EECOMMES"DATIO]SrS. 

The  publishers,  in  issuing  a  new  and  enlarged  edition  of  this  work,  would 
remark  that  they  are  gratified  to  know,  as  stated  in  the  translator's  adver- 
tisement, that  it  has  been  adopted  as  a  text-book  in  many  of  the  highest  in- 
stitutions of  learning  in  this  country  and  Great  Britain,  and  would  express 
their  hearty  thanks  to  the  press,  and  to  several  distinguished  philologists, 
from  whom  they  have  received  commendatory  notices  of  the  book.  The  fol- 
lowing, among  numerous  recommendations  of  the  work,  and  statements  in 
respect  to  the  Syriac  language,  are  respectfully  submitted  to  the  public,  hoping 
that  other  seminaries,  and  especially  theological  schools,  may  be  induced  to 
form  classes  for  the  study  of  a  language  which  was  essentially  the  vernacular 
tongue  of  our  Saviour,  and  which  has  furnished  the  earliest  and  best  version 
of  the  Sacred  Writings  ever  made  : 

From  the  North  American  Review. 
"  To  one  already  versed  in  the  Hebrew,  the  character  presents  the  only 
(and  that  not  a  serious)  obstacle  to  the  study  of  the  Syriac.  The  anomalies 
of  the  former,  as  compared  with  Occidental  languages,  almost  all  reappear  in 
the  latter,  and  the  two  have  hardly  a  less  close  mutual  kindred  than  the  Ger- 
man and  the  Low  Dutch.  The  book  before  us  contains  not  only  a  complete  ap- 
paratus for  the  study  of  the  Syriac,  but  a  method  which  would  entirely  super- 
sede the  need  of  an  instructor.  We  have  never  seen  materials  of  the  kind 
so  skillfully  arranged,  or  so  large  an  amount  of  help  in  the  acquisition  of  a 
language  brought  within  so  brief  a  space.  The  Chrestomathy  is  composed 
of  extracts  from  the  Peshito,  followed  by  a  minute  verbal  analysis ;  and  these 
extracts  are  sufficiently  varied  to  furnish  specimens  of  every  variety  of  style 
to  be  found  in  the  entire  version." 

From  the  New-Englander. 
"The  chief  fault  of  the  original  is  the  obscurity  of  its  statements.  Too 
much  matter  is  heaped  together  in  single  sentences,  which  are  of  course  long, 
complicated,  and  abounding  in  parentheses,  abbreviations,  and  departures 
from  the  natural  order  of  thought  to  all  but  Germans.  Mr.  Hutchinson,  more 
judicious,  has  faithfully  given  us  all  the  matter  of  his  author,  without  copy- 
mg  his  faults.  Many  of  the  long  sentences  of  the  original  he  has  broken  into 
two,  three,  or  more,  by  differently  arranging  the  matter  of  them,  and  then 
separately  clothing  each  thought  in  perspicuous  English.  .  .  .  We  hail  the 
appearance  of  this  meritorious  work,  as  supplying  a  real  desideratum  to 
American  and  English  students." 

From  the  Methodist  Quarterly  Review. 
"  According  to  the  testimony  of  the  most  competent  teachers  and  schol- 
ars, *  Uhlemann's  Grammar  of  the  Syriac  Language  '  is  the  best  extant.  Mr. 
Hutchinson  has  not  only  translated  it  well,  but  has  added  a  course  of  exer- 
cises in  Syriac  grammar,  with  a  Chrestomathy,  and  brief  lexicon.  With  the 
aid  of  this  book  any  one  tolerably  versed  in  Hebrew  can  acquire  Syriac  wilh 
great  rapidity." 

1 


RECOMMENDATIONS. 

From  the  Bibliotheca  Sacra. 
"  We  have  here  a  complete,  and  we  had  almost  said  perfect,  apparatus  for 
the  study  of  the  ancient  Syriac.  It  would  be  difficult  to  find  a  better  gram- 
mar of  any  language  than  Uhlemann's  of  the  Syriac ;  it  is  here  accurately 
and  clearly  translated,  and  the  addition  by  the  translator  of  a  good  Chres- 
tomathy,  and  lexicon  and  exercises,  leaves  the  learner  nothing  to  desire,  so 
far  as  the  rudiments  of  the  language  are  concerned.  Let  him  go  carefully 
through  with  the  study  of  this  neat  and  compact  volume,  and  he  can  begin 
to  read  with  ease  the  Syriac  translations  of  the  Bible,  and  derive  from  them 
all  the  necessary  illustrations  of  the  text.  Every  theological  student  who 
purchases  this  work,  and  thoroughly  studies  it,  will  find  that  he  has  made  a 
most  profitable  investment,  both  of  his  money  and  his  time." 

Ffom  J.  G.  Palfrey,  D.  D.,  formerly  of  the  Theological  School  connected  with 
Harvard  University. 
"  The  Syriac  version,  curious  in  the  highest  degree  from  its  antiquity,  is 
also,  I  presume,  the  best  version  of  the  evangelical  writings  that  exists  in  any 
language.  There  is  a  peculiar  interest  in  reading  the  discourses  of  the 
Saviour  in  a  dialect  closely  resembling  that  in  which  they  were  originally 
dictated.  And,  to  a  person  with  a  fair  knowledge  of  the  Hebrew  language, 
the  Syriac  is  a  very  easy  acquisition.  I  hope  that  the  Grammar  may  come 
into  extensive  use  among  Biblical  students." 

From  the  late  B.  B.  Edwards,  D.  D.,  formerly  Professor  in  the  Theological 
Seminary  at  Andover. 
"  I  have  been  much  pleased  with  '  Uhlemann's  Syriac  Grammar.'     It  is 
the  best  for  purposes  of  instruction  of  any  with  which  I  am  acquainted." 

From  C.  E.  Stowe,  D.  D.,  Professor  in  the  Theological  Seminary  at  Andover. 
"  It  is  highly  desirable  that  all  theological  students  should  make  them- 
selves acquainted  with  the  Syriac  tongue ;  for  it  is  not  only  (next  to  the 
Chaldee,  perhaps)  the  eldest  sister  of  the  Hebrew,  and  the  sacred  dialect  of 
that  interesting  people,  the  Nestorians,  but  it  gives  us  the  very  best  trans- 
lation of  the  Bible  (especially  of  the  New  Testament)  that  has  ever  been 
made  in  any  language." 

From  T.  J.  Conant,  D.D.,  late  Professor  in  Rochester  Theological  Seminary. 
"  The  excellence  of '  Uhlemann's  Syriac  Grammar,'  as  the  best  manual  for 
school  use,  is  universally  acknowledged.  The  exercises  added  by  the  Ameri- 
can translator  furnish  such  abundant  facilities  for  the  grammatical  study  of 
the  language,  that  a  knowledge  of  it  may  be  readily  acquired,  by  one  who  is 
acquainted  with  the  structure  of  the  Hebrew,  without  the  aid  of  a  teacher. 
The  volume  contains  also  Syriac  reading-lessons,  and  a  lexicon,  making  the 
apparatus  for  the  elementary  study  of  the  language  complete,  without  the 
purchase  of  any  other  book." 

From  Professor  D.  T.  Smith,  of  Bangor  Theological  Institution. 
"  I  have  been  acquainted  with  the  Grammar  for  many  years,  and  I  regard 
it  as  better  adapted  for  translation  in  this  country  than  any  other  Grammar 
that  I  know  of.  ...  I  am  much  pleased  with  the  translation,  .  .  .  and  it 
strikes  me  that  the  Chrestoniathy  appended  must  be  a  most  welcome  addition 
to  those  who  are  entering  upon  the  study  of  the  Syriac." 


SYRIAC    GRAMMAR, 


A  COURSE  OF  EXERCISES,  A  CHRESTOMATHY,  AID  A  BRIEF 
LEXICOI^. 


7      '   ,      'I     -^i.ttOJ^' 

UHLEMANl^'S 


SYRIAC    GRAMMAR 


TRANSLATED  FROM  THE  GERMAN, 

•         By    ENOCH    HUTCHINSON 

WITH  A  COURSE  OV 


EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR,  A  CHRESTOMATHY, 

AND  BRIEF  LEXICON, 

PREPARED  BY  THE  TRANSLATOR. 


SECOND  edition;  WITH  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 


NEW  YORK: 

D.  APPLETON  &  COMPANY,  549  &  551   BROADWAY 

1875. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1855, 

By  E.   HUTCHINSON, 

in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  for  the  Southern  District 

of  New  York. 


.pr^  ^^Nu.oA^\^L»T- 


TRANSLATOR'S    ADVERTISEMENT 

TO    THE    SECOND    EDITION. 


The  first  American  edition  of  this  work  having  be- 
come exhausted,  and  considerable  orders  for  more  copies 
received  by  the  publishers,  it  becomes  necessary  to  supply 
the  demand.  It  is  a  source  of  gratification  that  the  work 
has  been  adopted  as  a  text-book,  to  an  encouraging  ex- 
tent, in  theological  seminaries,  universities,  and  other 
institutions  of  learning  in  this  country  and  Great  Britain, 
and  has  been  instrumental,  we  trust,  in  arousing  more 
interest  than  has  heretofore  existed  in  the  study  of  Ori- 
ental philology. 

In  1858,  an  abridgment  of  Hoffman's  excellent  "  Syr- 
iac  Grammar,"  prepared  by  B.  H.  Cowper,  was  pub- 
lished in  English  dress,  in  London.  The  author  seems 
to  have  ably  performed  his  task,  though  we  have  not  had 
time  to  thoroughly  examine  the  book.  "We  should  rather 
see  the  translation  of  the  entire  work,  or  a  more  extended 
abridgment  of  it.  However,  it  will,  no  doubt,  prove  to 
be  a  valuable  contribution  to  Syriac  literature  in  our  own 
language. 


.^  FT 


040S 


11        TEANSLATOR'S   ADVERTISEMENT  TO  SECOND  EDITION. 

Uhlemanii,  in  his  second  edition,  lias  made  extensive 
additions  and  some  corrections.  The  translator,  in  pre- 
paring this  second  American  edition,  has  carefully  com- 
pared the  two  German  editions,  and  inserted  at  the  end 
of  the  volume  a  translation  of  all  the  important  additions 
made  by  the  German  author,  with  explanations  (vide  p. 
371),  showing  where  they  belong  in  the  body  of  the  work. 
It  should  be  remarked  that  the  German  author  has  added 
a  large  number  of  examples,  especially  in  the  Syntax^ 
and,  where  they  have  seemed  to  the  translator  to  be 
more  numerous  than  was  absolutely  necessary  to  illus- 
trate the  principle  stated,  he  has  omitted  some  of  them, 
in  order  to  avoid  swelling  the  volume  too  much.  In 
those  cases  where  Uhlemann  has  merely  changed  the 
phraseology  of  sentences,  expressing  them  with  more 
perspicuity  than  in  the  previous  edition,  the  translator  has 
made  no  change.  He  has  corrected  many  typographi- 
cal errors  found  in  the  second  German  edition,  as  well 
as  some  found  in  the  first  American  edition,  and  trusts 
that  the  work,  thus  improved,  may,  in  a  still  greater 
degree  than  heretofore,  subserve  the  interests  of  Semitic 
philology. 

The  translator  is  happy  to  express  his  obligations  for 
the  valuable  assistance  which  he  has  received  from  the 
Astor  Library  (an  institution  established  by  the  Astor 
family,  and  filled  with  a  rare  and  extensive  collection 
of  books  in  almost  every  department  of  science). 

E.  HUTCHINSON. 
New  York  City,  Jvlyy  1874. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  AUTHOR'S  PREFACE 

TO    THE    SECOND    EDITION 


"  In  the  revision  of  a  manual  like  this,  whose  first  ap- 
pearance has  had  a  favorable  reception,  whose  usefulness, 
for  a  series  of  years,  has  established  it  as  a  standard  work 
for  academical  instruction  and  private  study,  I  thought  it 
better  to  retain  essentially  the  order  and  arrangement  of 
the  first  edition,  so  far  as  its  simple,  gradual  unfolding 
seemed  to  be  really  adapted  to  aid  the  learner  by  mak- 
ing his  task  lighter  than  it  otherwise  would  have  been. 
Hence,  on  account  of  the  extensive  use  of  the  original 
work  (first  edition),  in  reading  the  Syriac  language,  I 
came  to  the  conclusion  that  some  parts,  though  imperfect 
to  a  small  extent,  had  better  not  be  changed,  and  that 
other  parts  might  with  propriety  be  enlarged ;  therefore, 
I  felt  it  to  be  my  duty  to  insert  the  improvements  and 
additions  which  appear  in  the  new  edition.  In  accord- 
ance with  this  plan,  additions  are  made  to  section  5,  and 
the  attentive  reader  will  perceive  where  similar  improve- 
ments and  additions  are  introduced  into  the  sections  upon 
Etymology.     The  Syntax  has  been  somewhat  extensively 


IV        EXTEACT  FEOM  THE  GERMAN  AUTHOR'S  PREFACE. 

enlarged  by  sucli  additions  as  seemed  adapted  to  the  scope 
and  design  of  the  work.  For  this  purpose  the  elaborate 
works  of  Agrell  (' Supplementa  Syntaxeos  Syriaca,'  Gry 
phiswaldiae,  1834 ;  '  Appendicula  ad  Supplementa  sua  Syn- 
taxeos Syriacse,'  ibid.,  1836,  and  '  Appendicula  posterior,' 
1838),  which  extend  over  the  writings  of  the  Oriental 
scholars  Asseman  and  Barhebrseus,  have  often  been  con- 
sulted, while  the  careful  study  of  the  classical  Ephrem, 
and  the  'Acta  Martyrum  Orientalium,'  by  Maruthas, 
have  furnished  such  important  contributions  appropriate 
to  this  Grammar,  that  the  new  edition  could  not  well 
be  longer  delayed.  So,  also,  it  seemed  proper  in  a  manual 
like  this  to  present  a  brief  view  of  the  grounds  of  Syriac 
metre,  which  I  have  compressed  into  section  88.  I  felt 
myself  particularly  called  upon  to  do  so  from  the  fact  that 
the  poetic  part  of  the  annexed  Chrestomathy  has  been 
favorably  received,"  * 

^  The  remaining  portions  of  the  Preface  relate  to  the  author's  Chrestom- 
athy, which  is  not  inserted  in  this  work. — [Tr. 


TRANSLATOR'S  PREFACE  TO  FIRST  EDITION. 


The  following  translation  was  undertaken  in  accordance  with 
the  suggestion  of  several  literary  friends,  and  in  view  of  an 
increasing  desire  among  American  students  to  become  acquainted 
with  a  language  in  which  the  earliest  and  best  version  of  the  New 
Testament  is  generally  admitted  to  have  been  made,  and  which 
is  essentially  the  language  spoken  by  our  Saviour. 

Uhlemann's  Grammar  is  acknowledged  by  all  to  be  a  manual 
of  rare  excellence ;  and  it  is  hoped  that,  in  an  English  dress,  it 
will  be  found  tx)  be  well  adapted  to  promote  the  progress  of  ori- 
ental philology  in  this  country.  Some  of  our  helps  of  this  kind, 
in  the  study  of  the  Syriac,  are  too  brief,  and  others  are  too  volu- 
minous. Uhlemann  has  aimed  to  present,  within  moderate  lim- 
its, a  work  sufficiently  extensive  for  ordinary  purposes  of  instruc- 
tion. The  translator  has  endeavored  to  give  as  Rteral  a  transla- 
tion a,s  is  compatible  with  perspicuity.  He  has  added,  where  it 
seemed  to  be  necessary,  occasional  explanatory  notes.  After 
having  prepared  an  abridgment  of  the  paradigms  of  verbs  and 
nouns,  following  Winer's  arrangement  in  his  Chaldee  Grammar, 
he,  on  the  whole,  concluded  to  insert  the  full  paradigms  as  they 
stand  in  the  original  work,  and  not  to  make  the  attempt  to  im 
prove  a  grammar  so  nearly  faultless. 


Vi  TRANSLATOR'S  PREFACE. 

The  translation  is  followed  by  a  course  of  Exercises  in  Syriac 
grammar,  which,  if  carefully  studied,  will,  it  is  believed,  mate- 
rially facilitate  the  progress  of  the  learner  in  an  accurate  know- 
ledge of  the  elements  of  the  language.  After  having  read,  with 
care,  the  introduction,  and  cursorily  examined  other  parts  of  the 
grammar,  the  pupil  may,  at  once,  commence  upon  the  Exercises, 
and  merely  consult  the  grammar  (as  directed  in  the  introductory 
remarks  to  the  Exercises)  as  a  book  of  reference,  in  order  to 
enable  him  to  solve  the  difficulties  with  which  he  may  meet  in 
analyzing  the  first  page  of  the  Chrestomathy.  The  translator 
trusts  that  he  shall  not  be  considered  as  obtrusive  in  calling 
special  attention  to  a  method  of  analysis  which  he  has  found  to 
be  of  great  advantage  in  teaching  classes  in  Hebrew.  Some  in- 
structors have  probably  adopted  a  similar  onCj  and  others  may 
have  devised  still  better  methods.  This  is  submitted  to  the  con- 
sideration of  those  teachers  who  have  not  already  adopted  a 
satisfactory  one. 

A  brief  Chrestomathy  and  Lexicon,  prepared  by  the  transla- 
tor, follow  the  Exercises.  The  former  is  composed  of  selections 
from  that  beautiful  edition  of  the  Peshito  Bible  published  by  the 
British  and  Foreign  Bible  Society  in  London,  in  1816,  and 
reprinted  in  smaller  type  in  1826.  It  was  executed  for  the  use 
of  the  Syrian  Christians  in  India.  It  was  corrected  for  the  press, 
as  far  as  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles,  by  Dr.  Buchanan,  and  com- 
pleted by  Rev.  S.  Lee,  Professor  of  Arabic  in  the  University  of 
Cambridge.  Several  manuscripts  were  consulted,  and  the  text 
is  considered  as  very  correct,  though  we  have  discovered  in  it 
some  typographical  errors. 

In  the  Exercises,  an  extended  analysis  will  be  found  of  the  first 


TRANSLATOR'S  PREFACE.  YU 

page  of  the  Chrestpmathy,  and  merely  brief  explanatory  remarks 
on  the  remaining  pages. 

The  basis  of  the  Lexicon  is  that  inserted  by  Uhlemann  in  his 
grammar,  to  which  the  translator  has  made  many  additions,  having 
consulted  the  Syriac  Lexicons  of  M.  Trost,  E.  Castell,  ^Egidius 
Gutbier,  and  ^milius  Rodiger.  The  Lexicon  is  intended  merely 
to  include  those  words  which  occur  in  the  Chrestomathy. 

Some  errors,  in  the  author's  numerous  references  to  the  Old 
and  New  Testaments,  have  been  discovered  and  corrected. 
There  are,  probably,  others  which  were  not  observed. 

The  translator  trusts  that  this  effort  will  be  received  with 
indulgence  by  the  literary  public.  Errors  will  doubtless  be 
found  by  teachers  who  may  use  the  Manual,  and  he  will  be  very 
thankful  to  receive  suggestions  from  any  quarter,  by  which  a 
future  edition,  should  it  ever  be  called  for,  may  be  improved. 

The  publication  of  the  work  has  been  unexpectedly  delayed, 
most  of  the  stereotype  plates,  when  nearly  completed,  having  been 
destroyed  by  a  disastrous  fire. 

The  translator  avails  himself  of  this  opportunity  to  express  his 
obligations  to  Mr.  W.  W.  Turner,  late  of  the  Union  Thelogical 
Seminary  of  this  city,  T.  J.  Con  ant,  D.  D.,  of  Rochester  Univer- 
sity, and  J.  G.  Palfrey,  D.  D.,  formerly  of  the  Theological  School 
connected  with  Harvard  University,  for  valuable  suggestions; 
also  to  Mr.  A.  H.  Guernsey,  of  this  city,  for  important  aid  in 
the  examination  of  the  manuscript  before  going  to  press. 

New  yoRK,  Jan.  1855. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  PREFACE  TO  FIRST  GERMAN  EDITION. 


The  earlier  sheets  of  this  Text  book,  designed,  principally, 
for  academical  instruction,  had  been  printed,  and  that  part  of 
the  Manuscript  which  contains  the  elementary  principles  and 
paradigms  had  been  for  a  considerable  time  out  of  my  hands, 
when  the  more  comprehensive  work  of  Professor  Hoffmann 
made  its  appearance.  In  the  preparation  of  this  work  my 
plan  had  especially  led  me  to  present,  with  as  much  brevity 
as  was  consistent  with  clearness,  what  is  most  essential  for 
understanding  the  language  in  its  grammatical  forms.  1 
was  of  the  opinion  that  the  more  extended  treatment  of 
separate  phenomena  of  the  language  might  be  dispensed 
with,  since  the  greater  portion  of  the  Syriac  forms  may  be 
explained  from  those  of  the  Hebrew  language  ;  and  in  fact, 
a  knowledge  of  the  Hebrew  implies  an  acquaintance  with 
the  principles  of  the  Syriac.  Upon  a  close  examination  of  the 
above-mentioned  work,  I  was  convinced,  that  I  had  proceeded 
upon  almost  the  same  principles,  had  made  a  similar  use 
of  the  older  grammarians,  such  as  Amira,  Ludov.  de  Dieu, 
Buxtorf,  Michaelis,  and  others,  and  had  deviated  only  in  the 
collocation  of  separate  rules.  Although  I  might  have  approxi- 
mated more  nearly  to  the  work  of  Hoffmann,  by  isolated 
alterations,  yet  I  deemed  it  advisable,  where  deviations 
existed,  to  follow  my  own  views  ;  as  for  example,  in  the  ta- 
bular arrangement  of  derivative  nouns.  Following  the  older 
grammarians,  I  have  introduced  a  separate  paradigm  of  the 
nouns  placed  under  Declension  HI.,*  instead  of  classing  them 
with  the  Segholate  forms ;  this  was  done  because  the  vowel 
entering  into  the  inflection  of  these  nouns  is  not  an  original 
one,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Segholate  forms,  but  is  introduced 
un  account  of  the  difiiculty  of  pronunciation.     Real  Segholate 

*  g  48,  Decl.  III. 


forms,  monosyllabic  nouns,  namely,  those  derived  from  verbs 
3  rad.  Olaph  quiescent,  belong  rather,  according  to  their 
principal  inflection,  to  the  substantive-stems  of  Declension  Y., 
and,  in  only  a  few  instances,  coincide  with  the  Segholate 
forms.  In  preparing  the  Syntax,  I  have,  like  Professor  Hoff- 
mann, followed  the  Lehrgebdude  of  Gesenius  ;  and  like  him, 
alsOy  I  have  made  use  only  of  those  passages  of  the  Old  Tes- 
tament collected  by  Gesenius,  in  which  the  translator,  unfet- 
tered by  the  Hebrew  text,  seems  to  have  wrought  more  in 
accordance  with  the  genius  of  his  own  language.  In  addition 
to  this,  I  have  frequently  consulted  the  translation  of  the 
Xew  Testament,  as  the  oldest  Syriac  writing  known  to  us  ;* 
Ephraemi  Opera  Syr.,  Romae,  1743,  tom.  III.,  fol. ;  Barhebrsei 
Chronicon  Syr.,  ed.  Kirsch.  Lips.  1789 ;  and  Assemani  Bib- 
liotheca  Orient.  Clementino-Yaticana,  Eomge,  1719,  tom.  HI., 
fol. ;  so  that  a  close  and  impartial  examination  will  easily 
determine  what  has  been  added  from  my  own  not  inconsider- 
able collections,  f     -^     -J*-     *     *     *     -^e- 

Berlin,  March,  1829. 


*  In  point  of  time  the  Feshito  version  of  the  Old  Testament  is  the  most  ancient 
document  extant  in  the  Syriac  iiinguage,  though  the  New  Testament  was  trans- 
lated into  Syriac  from  the  original  Greek  about  the  same  time.  Michaelis  su]^- 
poses,  that  the  Syriac  version  of  both  Testaments  was  made  near  the  close  of  the 
first,  or  in  the  early  part  of  the  second  century. — Tr. 

t  The  remainder  of  the  Author's  Preface  relates  mainly  to  his  Reading  Lv.'ssons, 
which  we  have  not  inserted,  they  being,  in  our  opinion,  too  difficult  for  beg-baers. 
— Tr. 


CONTENTS 


PACT 

I.VTRODucTiON. — Brief  Historical  Yiew  of  the  Syriac  Lang'.i%'e 

and  Literature  17 

PART    FIRST. 

ELEMENTS   OF   THE    liAIVGUAGE. 

CHAPTER    I. 

WKITTEN     CHARACTERS     AND     THEIR    USE. 

§  1.  Consonants 28 

§  2.  Yowels  in  general  (Yowel  Letters  and  Yowel  Signs)    .        ,  30 

§  3.  Yowel  Signs       .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .30 

§  4.  Diacritical  Points  which  supply  the  place  of  Yowels    .        .  31 

g  5.  Kushoi  and  Rukok 32 

§  6.  Ribui 33 

I  7.  Mehagyono  and  Marhetono 34 

§  8.  Linea  Occultans ?6 

I  9.  Tone  . 3r) 

^10.  Marks  of  Punctuation i^6 

CHAPTER  n. 

PECUI.IARITIES    AND    CHANGES    OF    LETTERS, 

?  11.  General  Yiew ,         .        .      ?> 

1 12.  Changes  of  the  Consonants .        .        .        .        ,        .        ,      3(> 
2 


jii  CONTENTS. 

§  13.  Quiescent  Letters ,39 

g  14.  Yowel  Letters  which  are  not  sounded  (Otiant)      ...  40 

g  15.  Changes  in  the  Towels 41 

PART    SECOND. 

ETYMOLOGF,   OR  PARTS   OF  liPEECII. 

CHAPTER  L 

PRONOUNS. 

I  (J.  Personal  and  Possessive  Pronouns 44 

Table  of  Pronouns  and  Suffixes 4.5 

3  17.  Uther  Pronouns 48 

CHAPTER  IL 

THE    VERB. 

g  18.  General  View 49 

I.  Regular  Verbs. 

^19.  The  Inflection  of  Regular  Yerbs  in  General         ...  50 

L  Table  of  Personal  Inflection 52 

II.  Table  of  the  Temporal  Inflection  of  Regular  Yerbs      .        .  53 

A.  Personal  Inflections 54 

B.  Inflection  of  the  Tenses  and  Moods 55 

^  20.  A.  The  Ground-form  Peal — its  formation  and  signification   .  5G 

B.  Derivative  Conjugations. 

§  21.  Ethpeel 58 

I  22.  Pael  and  Ethpaal        . 59 

^  23.  Aphel  and  Ethtaphal 60 

§  24  Shaphel  and  Eshtaphal 61 

g  25.  Conjugations  occasionally  used  and  Quadriliteral  Yerbs  €2 

§  26.  Yerbs  with  Gutturals 63 

II.  Irregular  Verbs. 

4  27.  General  Yiew 63 

Table  of  Irresrular  Yerbs     ...  ...  65 


CONTENTS. 

A.  QuiesceiU  Verbs. 

I  28.  Verbs  1  Rad.  Olapli  Quiescent    . 

§  29.  Yerbs  1  Rad.  Yud  Quiescent 

I  30.  Yerbs  Med.  Olapli  Quiescent 

I  31.  Yerbs  Med.  Rad.  Yau  and  Yud  Quiescent  . 

g  32.  Yerbs  3  Rad.  Olaph  Quiescent     . 

B.  Defective  Verbs. 

I  33.  Yerbs  1  Rad.  Nun 

I  34.  Yerbs  Med.  Rad.  doubled    .... 
§  35.  Doubly  Irregular  and  Defective  Yerbs 

Paradigms  of  the  Regular  and  Irregular  Yerbs 
§  36.  Regular  Yerb  witli  Suffixes 

Table  of  the  Same 

1  37.  Suffixes  to  Yerbs  3  Rad.  Olaph  Quiescent    . 

Table  of  the  Same 

2  38.  Auxiliary  or  Substantive  Yerbs  . 


xm 

PAGH 

C7 
G8 
70 
70 
72 

75 

r5 

7G 
SO 
37 
102 
103 
108 
110 


g39. 
HO. 


§41. 
§42. 
§43. 
§44. 
§45. 

§46. 
3  47. 


CHAPTER  III. 

THE     NOUN. 

Derivation  of  Nouns   .        .        .        .        ,        .        .        .111 

Nouns  derived  from  Yerbs 112 

Tabular  Yiew  of  Nouns  derived  from  Regular  and  Irregular 

Yerbs 113 

Denominative  Nouns 122 

Composite  and  Exotic  Nouns 123 

Gender  of  Nouns 124 

Number  of  Nouns 126 

Different  Relations  (states)  of  the  Noun       .        .        .        .129 

Table  of  the  Same 132 

Nouns  with  Suffixes 136 

Declension  of  Nouns  in  general    ....  .139 


XIV  CONTENTS. 

PACK 

g  48.  Exhibition  of  Xouds  according  to  Declension       .        .        .  139 

g  49.  Anomalous  Nouns 145 

Paradigms  of  Nouns  with  Suffixes 148 

g  50.  Adjectives  and  Numerals    . 150 

CHAPTER  lY. 

PARTICLES. 

g  51.  Adverbs 152 

§  52.  Prepositions .153 

Table  of  Prepositions  with  Suffixes     .        .        .  .155 

§  53.  Conjunctions  and  Interjections 156 


PART    THIRD, 

SYNTAX. 

CHAPTER    I. 


THE      PHONOUN. 

g  54.  Use  of  Separable  Personal  Pronouns  and  Suffixes 

A.  Separable  Personal  Pronouns 

B.  Suffixes 
g  55.  Pleonastic  use  of  Pronouns 

A.  Separable  Personal  Pronouns 

B.  Suffixes 
General  Remarks  on  Personal  Pronouns 

§  5G.  Use  of  the  Relative  Pronoun 

§  57.  Use  of  Demonstrative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns 

g  58.  Pronouns  for  which  the  Syrians  have  no  special  forms 

A.  Reflexive  Pronouns 

B.  Other  Pronouns 


15: 
157 
159 
160 
ICO 
161 
163 
164 
166 
166 
166 
167 


CONTENTS.  XV 

I'AOX 

CHAPTER   II. 

THE   VERB. 

1 59.  General  View      .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .  172 

§  60.  Use  of  the  Preterit .        .172 

§  61.  Use  of  the  Future 175 

§62.  Use  of  the  Imperative 178 

§  63.  Use  of  the  Infinitive 179 

A.  Infinitive  Absohite 179 

B.  Infinitive  with  >i  or  the  Construct  form          .        .        .  180 

§  64.  Use  of  the  Participle 182 

§  65.  General  Yiew  of  the  Manner  of  Designating  all  the  different 

Moods  and  Tenses,  and  particularly  the  Imperfect,  Pluper- 
fect, and  Optative 1S8 

§  66.  The  Persons  of  the  Yerb 190 

§  67.  Construction  of  Yerbs  with  the  different  Cases  and  with 

Prepositions 193 

I.  Yerbs  with  the  Accusative 193 

IT.  Yerbs  with  Prepositions 196 

III.  Passive  Yerbs  and  their  Construction      .        .        .        .201 
Mode  of  expressing  Greek  Composites          ....  203 
g  68.  The  Substantive  Yerb  and  some  other  peculiarities  chiefly- 
relating  to  the  Construction  of  Yerbs  in  General      .  204 

A.  Useof"|oai    A-a]  and  Ail» 204 

B.  Indirect  Discourse 205 

C.  Ellipsis— Zeugma— Paronomasia  and  Puns     .        .        .206 

CHAPTER  III. 

THE     NOUN. 

I  69.  Use  of  the  Noun  in  General '    .  207 

§  70.  Gender  of  Nouns 210 

?  71.  Number  of  the  Noun 212 


XVI 


CONTENTS 


^2. 

§74. 

§75. 
§76. 

I  77. 


§78. 


§79. 

^80. 


Apposition  and  Duplication  of  No-irs 

The  Emphatic  State 

The  Construct  State  and  the  Genitive 

Designation  and  Use  of  the  other  Cases 

The  Case  Absolute     . 

Comparison  of  Adjectives 

A.  The  Comparative  . 

B.  The  Superlative     . 

Construction  of  Numerals 

A.  Cardinal  Numbers 

B.  Ordinal  Numbers  . 

C.  Other  Eelations  of  Numbers 
Union  of  the  Noun  with  Adjectives 
Union  of  the  Noun  with  the  Verb 

A.  In  Respect  to  Number  . 

B.  In  respect  to  Gender 

C.  In  respect  to  both  Gender  and  Number 

D.  Construction  of  Sentences  in  which  there 

or  more  than  one  Subject  . 
Peculiarities  relating  to  Nouns    . 

A.  Ellipsis  of  the  Noun 

B.  Zeugma  and  Ilendiadys 
The  rendering  of  Composite  Greek  Nouns 


Compound 


PAGE 

212 
214 
215 
218 
220 
222 
222 
223 

224 
224 
224 
22G 
227 
229 
229 
232 
234 

234 
237 
237 
238 
23S 


CHAPTER  lY. 

PARTICLES. 

1  82.  Construction  and  Union  of  Adverbs 240 

§  83.  Use  of  the  Particles  of  interrogation,  affirmation  and  negation  242 

§  04.  Prepositions 244 

2  85.  Conjunctions 240 

I  86.  Interjections .        .        .240 

Peculiarities  in  respect  to  the  Position  of  Words  .        .         .  2.)U 


CONTENTS.  xvii 

PART    IV. 

Exercises 253 

Ohrestomathy 313 

Lexicon 841 

Corrections  and  Additions  .......  369 


IISITEODUOTION, 


BRIKF  HISTORICAL  VIEW 

OF  THE 

^YKIAC  LANGUAGE  A:^D  LITERATUEE. 


1.  The  Syriac  language  (sometimes  called  the  Western 
Aramaean,  to  distinguish  it  from  the  Chaldeean  or  Eastern 
Aramaean,  with  which  it  constitutes  the  Aramaean  dialect  of 
the  Semitic  family  of  languages),  formerly  extended  over  the 
whole  northern  part  of  Aram,  from  the  borders  of  Palestine 
to  E'atolia,  and  from  the  Mediterranean  to  and  beyond  the 
Euphrates.*  It  degenerated  at  an  early  period,  and,  during 
the  continual  changes  of  government,  particularly  by  the  re- 
ception of  Persian  and  Greek  words,  lost  much  of  its  original 
purity.  Of  its  pure  state,  no  written  monuments  have  come 
down  to  our  times.  But  at  the  beginning  of  the  fourth  cen- 
tury after  Christ,  the  language  enjoyed  a  flourishing  period, 
and  kept  its  place  for  a  long  time  at  Edessa  as  a  written  lan- 
guage. As  from  the  earliest  period  the  Palmyrene  dialect 
was  recognized  as  the  principal  one,  so  this  period  has  been 
designated  by  the  name  of  the  Edessene  Period.  Moreover, 
at  various  times,  mention  is  made  of  the  Damascene,  the 
Chalnic  or  Ctesiphontic,  the  Acharic  or  N"esibene,  and  the 
Maronite  dialects.  The  essential  difference  between  these  con- 
sisted very  likely  in  the  pronunciation  ;  this  may  be  asserted 
with  still  more  confidence  in  respect  to  the  JS'abataean 
dialect.  The  ancient  written  language  of  Antioch  or  Com- 
magene  is  still  used  by  various  Christian  sects,  in  particular 

*  E.  Rodiger  says  of  the  Aramaean  language:  "It  was  called  Syriac  in  the 
form  in  which  it  appeared  in  the  Christian  Aramaean  literature,  and  Chaldee 
kvhen  it  appeared  in  the  Jewish  Aramaean  writings."  See  Gesenius'  Heb. 
Gramm  ,  15th  edit,  by  RoJiger,  Leipz.  18-18  ;  Eiuleitung,  §  1.  2.  b. — Tr. 


18  IXTKODCCTIOX. 

by  the  Mai'onites,  Kestorians,  and  Thomas-Christians  of  India, 
JI.-5  their  ecclesiastical  language.  So  also  the  Zabians,  or  so- 
called  St.  John's  Disciples,  are  said  to  make  use  of  it,  in 
their  religious  ceremonies.  But  as  the  language,  as  early  as 
the  eighth  and  ninth  centuries,  was  greatly  corrupted  by  the 
frequent  use  of  the  Arabic,  and  was  driven  by  the  Arabs 
from  the  cities  in  the  tenth  and  eleventh,  and  from  the 
villages  in  the  twelfth  and  thirteenth  centuries,  it  may  be 
safely  assumed  that  it  is  no  longer  in  use  as  a  vernacular  Ian 
guage.  Although  several  modern  travelers  of  note,  as 
Kiebuhr  and  Brown,  maintain  that  it  is  still  spoken  in  some 
parts  of  Mesopotamia,  about  Raka,  Edessa,  and  Damascus,  as 
well  as  upon  Lebanon,  they  are  opposed  by  Ferrieres 
Sauvebceuf  and  Yolney,  wliile  Chateaubriand,  Seetzen, 
Clarke,  Joliffe,  and  Buckingham  pass  the  matter  over  in 
silence;  and  Burckhardt  only  remarks,  that  the  Maronites 
in  the  convent  of  Kashia  use  the  Syriac,  at  the  present  day, 
as  we  do  the  Latin.'-^ 

Rem. — The  LXX,  even,  use  Syria,  (2u^ta,  2vpoj,  Su^itfTt)  in  ..he 

wider  sense,  for  the  Old  Testament  &^5)5  (^']  comp.  the  "Apifxoi 
in  Horn.  II.  ii.  783 ;  Hesiod  Theog.  304 ;  Strabo  Geog.  i.  2,  xi.  14 ; 
Stephanus  Bjzant.  under  "Apijxa,  and  Bochart  Geogr.  S.  ii.  5,  6  ) ;  and 
the  Greek  and  Roman  Authors  often  confound  Syria  with  Assyria  (comp. 
Diod.  Sic.  ii.  13;  Herodot.  vii.  63;  Strabo  xvi.  2  ;  Xenoph.  Cyrop. 
vii.  5,  31 ;  Lucian  de  Dea  Syr.  §  1 ;  Oppian,  Kuvrj/  III.  402 ;  Horat. 
Od.  II.  11,  16;  HI.  4,  32.  Justin,  i.  2;   Aramian    Marcell.   xxiii.  6. 

The  Arabs  call  it  f^^t,  as  it  lay  at  the  left,  when  their  faces  were 
turned  towards  the  east  (comp.  Abulfeda  Tab.  Syr.  p.  5 ;  Assemani 
Bibl.  Orient.  T.  III.  P.  ii.  p.  782.)  In  the  earhest  times  this  country 
was  divided  into  several  small  nations,  ruled  by  kings  (comp.  Jahn  Bibl. 
Archaol.  Thl.  i.  Bd.  i.  p.  51  seq.;  Mannert  Geogr.  Bd.  vi.  p.  1  seq.; 
Vater  Commentar  iiber  den  Pentat.  Bd.  I.  p.  152  ;  Winer  Bibl.  Real- 
worterbuch,  Bd.  i.  p.  51  seq.);  of  these,  subsequently  to  the  time  of 
David,  Zobah  and  Damascus  are  mentioned  in  the  Scriptures,  as  the 
most  powerful ;  David  conquered  them  both  (2  Sam.  viii.  3  sq.;  x.  6 ; 
1  Chron.  xix,  [xviii  ]  3,  4.  sq ),  and  Solomon  kept  possession  of  them 

*  Since  Uhlemann  prepared  his  grammar,  it  has  been  ascertained  that  the  Nes- 
torians  use  the  Syriac  language  at  the  present  day.  Mr.  Layard,  in  liis  admirable 
work  on  the  ruins  of  Nineveh,  says  of  the  Nestorians  (or  Chaldaians  as  he  incor 
rectly  denominates  them) :  "  Most  of  their  church  books  are  written  in  Syriac, 
which,  like  the  l^tin  in  tlie  "West,  became  the  sacred  language  in  the  greater  part 
of  the  East."  See  Layard's  Nineveh,  chap.  viii.  Missionaries  who  are  laboring 
among  the  Nestorians,  bear  testimony  to  the  same  fact. — Ta. 


INTRODUCTION  19 

until  Reson  Ben-Eliada,  who  had  been  ^enersil  of  the  king  of  Zoba 
(1  Kings  xi.  23  sq.),  re-established  at  Damascus  a  government  inde- 
pendent of  that  of  the  Hebrews.  Subsequently  the  Syrians  were  incor- 
porated with  the  monarchies  of  the  Assyrians  (^38  b.  c),  the  Persians 
(539  B.  c),  and  the  Macedonians  (331  b.  c).  Though  after  the  death 
of  Alexander  the  Great,  they  arose  again  for  a  time  under  the  Seleucida3 
(301  B.  c),  yet  they  again  lost  their  independence  by  means  of  Pora- 
pey  (64  b.  c),  and  their  kings  reigned  only  at  Edessa,  till  the  third 
century  after  Christ,  when  this  kingdom  came  also  under  the  Roman 
sway.  At  the  division  of  the  Empire,  mider  Theodosius  (395),  Syria  fell 
to  the  Byzantine  Empire,  after  Jovianus  had  (a.  d.  363)  already  surren- 
dered Nesibis*  to  Sapores  II,  king  of  Persia.  Afterwards  it  was  taken 
possession  of  by  the  Arabs  (636),  and  was  subjected  (660)  to  the 
Ommiades  and  several  other  Arabic  royal  famiUes,  whose  dytiasties 
were,  in  1086,  brought  to  a  close  by  the  Seljooks.f  At  the  time  of  the 
Crusades,  the  Christians  could  maintain  themselves  there  against  the 
Seljooks  but  a  short  time  (1097  and  subsequently)  ;  and  in  lltl,  Sala- 
din  wrested  the  country  from  them.  In  1369,  Syria  became  a  prey  to 
the  marauding  inroads  of  the  Mongols  under  Timur  ;  and  it  has  now, 
for  three  centuries,  sighed  under  the  Turkish  yoke(cf.  Gatterer,  Hand- 
buch  der  Universalhist,  Bd.  I.  p.  248  sq. ;  Beck,  Weltgeschichte,  Bd. 
I.  p.  213  sq. ;  Heeren,  Ideen  iiber  die  Politik,  u.  s.  w.  Thl.  I.  p. 
213  sq.  ;  Riihs,  Handbuch  der  Geschichte  des  Mittelalters,  p.  152, 
sq,).  The  transition  into  broadness  of  pronunciation  ('TrXaruo'TOfj.ov) 
seems  not  to  have  extended  much  beyond  the  time  of  the  Babylonish 
captivity  ;  and  the  Palmyrene  Dialect,  which  is  known  to  us  by  some 
inscriptions  found  among  the  ruins  of  Palmyra  or  Tadmor,  and  decipher- 
ed by  Barthelemy  and  Swinton,  may  have  grown  up  soon  after  Solo- 
mon, the  founder  of  that  city.  In  the  Edessene  Period,  during  which 
flourished  Ephraem  (died  318),  Jacob  Yon  Sarug,  Isaac  the  Syrian, 
and  Xenaias  of  Mabug,  all  of  whom  Jacob  of  Edessa,  at  the  middle  of 
the  seventh  centuiy,  recognizes  as  classical  writers,  theological  learning 
was  zealously  cultivated  (cf.  Assem.  T.  III.  P.  II.  p.  994).  The  Maronites 
on  the  Orontes  and  upon  Lebanon,  originally  disciples  and  followers 
of  St.  Maro  (cf.  Assem.  I.  496  sq.  ;  Pfeififer,  in  his  Auszuge,  p.  166  sq. ; 
Gieseler,  Lehrbuch  der  Kirchengeschichte,  Bd.  I.  p.  6T5  ;  Riihs,  Hand- 
buch der  Geschichte  des  Mittelalters,  p.  37)  approximate  to  the  an- 
cient Syriac  dialect ;  still  more  closely  do  the  Nestorians  (cf.  Assem.  T. 
III.  P.  II.  p.  379),  and  the  Thomas-Christians  of  India,  who  diifer  from 
the  Xestorians  only  in  name  and  place  of  residence  (cf.  Assem.  a.  a.  0.  pp. 
413,  435.  sq.  ;  Pfeiffer,  pp.  285,  484  ;  Gieseler,  Bd.  I.  pp.  417,  638), 
all  of  whom  make  use  of  it  only  as  an  ecclesiastical  language  ;  the  two 
former  speaking  Arabic  in  common  life,  and  the  latter,  the  language 

*  A  celebrated  city  and  military  post  inMesopotamia,  generally  written  Nisibis.—TR, 
+  Called,  also,  Seljiiks,  Seljouks,  or  Seljoukian  Turks.— Tk. 


20  INTRODUCTION. 

of  Malabar.  Dififerent  from  this  is  the  dialect  of  the  so-called  Johannes- 
Christians,  Mandaeans,  or  Zabians  (who  are  not  to  be  confounded  with 
a  Mohammedan  sect  of  the  same  name,  in  Maraccii  Goran.  Sur.  II.  p.  33 
sq. ;  Assem.  T.  III.  P.  II.  pp.  509-515 ;  Pfeiffer,  p.510  sq.;  cf.  Gieseler,  Bd. 
I.  p.  66  ;  Neander,  Allgemeine  Geschichte  der  christlichen.  Religion  und 
Kirche,  Bd.  I.  Abth.  II.  p.  427),  whose  religious  books  are  written  in 
a  corrupted  Syriac,  and  which  appears,  from  the  numerous  Ghebric 
expressions  which  occur  in  them,  to  have  been  drawn  up  in  the  Persian 
Irak.  By  the  Nabatoean,  according  to  Barhebrseus  (in  Assem.  T.  I.  p. 
476)  is  to  be  understood  the  former  language  of  the  Syrian  country- 
people.  On  the  question,  whether  the  Syrian  is  still  a  vernacular 
language,  compare  Niebuhr,  Reisebeschr.  von  Arabien,  Bd.  II.  p.  352  ; 
Brown,  Biblioth.  der  neuesten  Reisebeschr.  Thl.  I.  p.  489  ;  Ferrieres 
Sauveteoeuf,  Memoires  historiques,  etc.,  T,  II.  p.  169  ;  Yolney,  Voyage 
en  Syrie,  etc.,  T.  I.  p.  331 ;  and  Burckhardt,  Travels  in  Syria,  etc.,  pp. 
22,  186. 

2.  Syriac  literature,  which  extends  over  almost  all  branches 
of  knowledge,  and  in  a  special  manner  over  the  department  of 
Theology,  and  possesses  valuable  works  upon  Oriental  and  Eccle- 
siastical History,  flourished  principally  in  the  period  between  the 
fourth  and  tenth  centuries  of  the  Christian  era.  The  language 
itself,  which  gave  proof  of  its  versatility  of  expression  by  the 
translations  of  Aristotle  and  other  Greek  authors,  and  by  its 
accurate  representation  of  mathematical  subjects,  had  found,  at 
an  earlier  period,  in  its  own  country,  zealous  cultivators  in  the 
departments  of  Grammar  and  Lexicography. 

As  the  most  ancient  grammarians,  whose  works  have  been  lost, 
history  records  the  names  of  Achudemen  (died  575),  Joseph  Hu- 
zita(died  580),  Jacob  of  Edessa(died698),who  labored  to  restore 
the  purity  of  the  ancient  language,  Jesudenah  (at  the  beginning 
of  the  eighth  century),  John  Stylita  (about  830),  John,  son  of  Cha- 
mis.  Bishop  of  Themanum  (850),  and  Honain,  the  physician  (died 
876).  The  first  accurate  grammar,  however,  was  written  by  John 
Bar  Zugbi,  a  Nestorian  monk,  at  the  beginning  of  the  thirteenth 
century ;  about  which  time,  also,  Joseph  Bar  Malcon  seems  to 
have  composed  his  Rete  Pundorum^  and  Barhebrseus  (died  1286) 
to  have  made  known  his  grammatical  works.  At  the  beginning 
of  the  sixteenth  century,  the  study  of  the  Syriac  language  was 
transplanted  to  Europe.  Theseus  Ambrosius  learned  the  Syriac 
language  from  Syrians  at  Rome,  in  1514,  and  became,  in  1529, 
teacher  to  Albert  Widmansiadt,  who  subsequently  pursued 
the  study  under  Simeon,  Bishop  of  the  Syrians  upon  Lebanon. 
Through  the  labors  of  these  men,  and  of  Moses  von  Merdin,  whom 


INTRODUCTION.  21 

Ignatius,  Patriarch  of  Antioch,  had  sent,  in  1552,  to  Julius  III. 
at  Rome,  and  whose  instructions  were  enjoyed  by  Andreas  Dumas 
(Masius),  the  publication  of  the  New  Testament  was  effected  in 
1555.  At  the  close  of  the  sixteenth  century,  the  grammatical 
study  of  the  Syriac  language  was  much  promoted  at  Rome  itself, 
by  the  Maronites  Amira  and  Abraham  Ecchellensis,  whose 
copious  grammatical  works  had  already  been  preceded  by  the 
attempts  of  Theseus  Ambrosius,Widmanstadt,  Tremellius,  Dumas, 
and  Waser.  They  were  followed,  about  the  middle  of  the  seven- 
teenth century,  by  Isaac  Sciadrensis  and  Joshua  Accurensis. 
From  this  period  onwards,  the  Syriac  language  has  been  gram- 
matically pursued  in  Germany;  partly  independently  of  other 
languages,  most  copiously  by  the  two  Michaelises  and  Hoffmann ; 
partly  in  connection  with  the  Chaldee,  as  by  Ludov.  de  Dieu  and 
Jahn ;  or  with  the  other  Semitic  languages,  as  by  Buxtorf,  Hot- 
tinger,  Schaaf,  Vater,  and  others. 

The  earliest  attempts  at  Syriac  lexicography  were  also  made 
in  the  ninth  and  tenth  centuries,  in  Syria,  by  Honain  Isa  or 
Joshua  of  Maruz,  and  Gabriel,  the  son  of  Bochtiesu.  More  im- 
portant, however,  are  the  contemporary  works  of  Isa  Bar-Ali 
(about  885),  of  Ananiesu  Bar-Saru  (about  900),  and  the  most 
serviceable  Avork  of  this  kind  by  Abulhasan,  Isa  Bar-Bahlul  (about 
963,)  which  is  still  extant.  The  lexicons  of  Dumas,  de  la  Boderie, 
Schindler,  Crines,  Buxtorf,  Trost,  Hottinger,  Gutbir,  Nicolai, 
Schaaf,  and  Zanolini,  which  have  appeared  smce  the  sixteenth 
century,  are  confined  to  the  New  Testament,  with  which  the 
Syriac  literature  in  1555  made  its  appearance  in  Europe.  Fer- 
rarius,  and  Edm.  Castell,  on  the  other  hand,  availed  themselves 
of  the  above-mentioned  Syriac  works  relating  to  the  same  subject, 
and  John  David  Michaelis  enriched  the  labors  of  the  latter  by 
valuable  remarks  and  additions.  The  valuable  work  of  Lorsbach, 
who  compared  all  the  Syriac  works  which  had  then  been  printed, 
besides  a  number  of  manuscripts,  and  collected  the  words  and 
significations  wanting  in  Syriac  lexicons,  still  remains  uncom- 
pleted. More  recently,  copious  works  have  been  promised  by 
Bernstein  and  Quatremere,  philologists  of  great  merit  in  the 
department  of  Oriental  literature.  Glossaries  are  contained  in 
the  Chrestomathies  of  Michaelis,  Kirsch,  Tychsen',  Grimm,  Hahn, 
and  Sieffert. 

Rem. — Eusebius  (Hist.  Eccl.  I.  13)  cites  the  letter  of  Abgarus  to 
Jesus,  and  the  answer  to  it,  as  among  the  most  ancient  Syriac  writings 
(cf  Assem.  I.  554  ;  III.  P.  II.  p.  8  ;  Gieseler,  Bd.  I.  p.  74)  ;  and. 


22  IXTRODUCTION. 

in  like  manner,  John  is  said  to  have  written  his  Gospel  in  the  Syriac 
language.  But  the  most  ancient  Syriac  work  of  undoubted  authenti- 
city, is  perhaps  the  translation  of  the  New  Testament,*  which  musi 
have  existed  as  early  as  the  second  century  (cf.  Hug,  Einleitung 
in  die  Schriften  des  N.  T.,  Thl.  I.  p.  348  ;  Gieseler,  Bd.  I.  p.  123). 
That  the  Syrians  considered  their  language  to  be  richer  than  the  Ara- 
bic is  attested  by  Asseman  (III.  P.  I.  p.  326  sq.)  ;  and  its  capacity  for 
rendering  Greek  authors  may  be  judged  from  Barhebrseus  (Chron.  p. 
231.  ed.  Bruns),  compared  with  Aristotle  (Top.  I.  cap.  4).  Abulphara- 
gius,  in  his  Historia  Dynast.,  ed.  Pocock,  p.  147,  mentions  Theophilus 
of  Edessa  as  the  author  of  a  successful  translation  of  two  books  of  the 
Iliad  (cf.  Assem.  I.  p.  521).  In  addition  to  the  larger  work  of 
Asseman  (Assemani  Bibliotheca  Orien talis  Clementino-Yaticana, 
Romaj,  1729, )  3  vols,  fol.,  and  the  abridgment  of  it  by  Pfeiflfer,  Erlangen, 
1776,  we  possess  a  brief  history  of  Syriac  literature  by  Hoffmann,  in 
Bertholdt's  kritischem  Journal  der  neuesten  theologischen  Literatur, 
Thl.  XIV.,  pp.  225-291. 


I.  Gil  AM  MA  US. 

Thesd  Amhrosii,  Introductio  in  Chald.  linguam,  Syriacam,  etc.,  Papise, 

1539. 
Aug.  Caninii,  Institutiones  linguae  Syriacag,  Parisiis,  1554. 
Widmanstadii,  Syriacae  linguae  prima  eltmenta,  Yiennae,  1555,  4to.  ed. 

II.  Antwerp,  1572. 
loh.  Merceri,  Tabulae  in  grammaticen  linguae  Chald.,  quag  et  Syriaca 

dicitur,  Paris.  1560.  4to.     Eiusd.  grammatica  Chald.  et  Syr.  Yite- 

bergae,  1579,  8vo. 
Imman.  Tremdlii,  Grammatica  Chald.  et  Syr.  Genevae,  1569,  4to.  Ap- 
pended also  to  his  edition  of  the  New  Testament. 
Andr.  Masii,  Grammatica  linguaB  Syriacae  (im  Tom.  YI.  der  Antweqi. 

Polygl.)  1573,  fol. 
Casp.  Waseri,  Institutio  linguae  Syr^e  ex  optimis  quibusque  apud  Syros 

scriptoribus  collecta.  Lugd.  Bat.  1594.  4to.  Ed.  II.  Leidae,  1619, 
4  to. 
Georg.  Amirce,  Grammatica  Syr.  sive  Chald.  etc.    Romae,  1596,  4to. 
Chrisioph.  Cri'Msii,  Gymnasium  Syr.  h.  e.  linguae  lesu  Christo  verna- 

culae  perfecta  institutio,  etc.     Yitebergae,  1611. 
lo.  Buxlorfii,  Grammaticae  Chald.  et  Syr.  libri  III.  Basil.  1615.     Ed. 

II.  1650,  8vo. 

*  Hug,  in  his  Introduction  to  the  New  Testament,  says  that  the  Translation  of  the 
New  Testament  was  appended  to  that  of  the  Old  Testament,  and  that  both  weni 
uicluded  under  the  same  name,  Pcshito. — Tk. 


INTRODUCTION.  23 

[o.  Casjp.  Myriad,  Grammatica  Syro-Chaldaea.     Genev.  1619,  4to. 
Herm.  Nicolai,  Idea  linguarr.     Aramsearum  per  comparationem  etc^ 

Copenh.  162t,  8vo. 
Ahrah.  Ecchellensis,  Linguae  Syr.  s.  Chald.  perbrevis  institutio.    Romae, 

1628,  16mo. 
Ludov.  de  Dieu,  Grammatica  linguarr.  orientt.  Hebraeorum,  Chald.  et 

Syr,  inter  se  coUaturum  Lugd.  Bat.  1628,  ex  recens.  Clodii.  Francof, 

ad  M.  1683,  4to. 
Isaac  Sdadrensis,  Grammatica  linguae  Syr.  Romae,  1636,  8vo. 
loh.  Michad.  Dilherri,  Rudimenta  grammaticae  Syr.  Halis,  163t.  Ed. 

XL,  1646,  12rao. 
Tosephi  Acurensis,  Grammatica  linguae  Syr.  Romae,  164*7,  8vo. 
lo.  Ernst.  Gerhardi,  ixiaypoup/a,  linguae  Syro-Chald.  Hal.  Sax.  1649. 
Andr.  Senrwrti,  Ebraimus,  Chaldaismus,  Syriasmus,  Arabismus  nee  non 

Rabbinismus,  etc.  Yiteb.  1666*  4to.     Eiusd.  Chaldaismus  et  Syrias- 
mus, etc.,  1666. 
loh.  Henr.  Hottingeri,  Grammatica  Chald.  Syr.  et  Rabbinica  Turic. 

1652,  8vo.    Eiusd.  Grammatica  quatuor  linguarr.  Hebr.  Chald.  Syr. 

et  Arab,  harmonica  Turici,  1659,  4to      (the  Syriac  also  printed 

separately). 
Briani   Waltoni,  Introductio   ad   lectionem  linguarr.  orientt.  Hebr. 

Chald.  Samarit.  Syr.  Arab.  Pers.  Armen.  Copt.  Loud.  1653,  12mo. 
lo.Leusdeni,  Scholae  Syriacae  lib.  III.  etc.     Ultraiect.  1658,  8vo. 
Giiil.  Beveridgii,  Grammatica  Syr.  tribus  libris  tradita.  Lond.  1658, 

8vo. 
Edm.  Castelli,  Brevis  et  harmonica  quantum  fieri  potuit  grammaticae 

linguarr.     Hebr.  Chald.  Syr.  ^thiop.  Arab,  et  Pers.  delineatio. 

Lond.  1669      (preceding  his  Lex.  Heptagl.) 
Dav.  Grafunderi,  Grammatica  Syriaca  cum  Syntaxi,  etc.    Yiteb.  1665. 
lo.  Nicolai,    Grammatica   linguarr.  Ebf.  Chald.  Syr.  Arab.  Jj]thiop. 

Pers.orientalium  secundum  prima  prasceptadelineata  harmonica.  lenae, 

1670.  4to.  Ed.  IL  Critica  Sacra  Francof.  et  Hamb.  1686. 
lo.  AlHngi,  Synopsis  institutionum  Chald.  et  Syr.  Francof.  ad  M.  1616. 

Ed.  Yl.  a  Georg.  Othone  adornata,  1701,  8vo. 
Christ.  Cellarii,  Porta  Syriaca.     Cizae,  1677,  8 vo.  Eiusd.  Porta  Syriae 

patentior,  etc.,  1682. 
Henr.  Opitii,  Syriasmus  facilitati  et  integritati  suae  restitutus,  etc.  Lips. 

et  Francof.  1678.  4 to.  in  compendium  redactus  a  Chnst.  Ludovicl 

Yiteb.  1669,  4to. 
Car.  Schafii,  Opus  Aramaeum  complectens  grammaticam  Chaldaico- 

Syriacam,  Lugd.  Bat.  1686,  8vo. 
lo.  Aug.  Danzii,  Aditus  Syriae  reclusus,  etc.    lenae,  1689.     Ed.  HI. 

1715,  8vo. 
In.  Ern.  Gerhardi,  Harmonia  linguae  Chald.  Syr.  et  JEthiop.  lenae, 

1693.  4to, 


24  INTRODUCTION. 

Herm,  von  der  Hardt  Syriacae  linguae  fundamenta.     Helmst.  1694. 

8vo.     (Only  Paradigms.) 
Ge.   Othonis  Palaestra  linguarr.  orientt.  Chald.  Syr.  Arab,  -^th  Pers 

etc.  Francof.  1702.  4to. 
lo.  Phil.  Hartmanni  Hebraicae,  Chald.  Syr.  et  Samarit.  linguarum 

institutio  harmonica.     Francof.  ad  M.  1*707.  4to. 
Sam.    Frid.    Bucheri   Thesaurus  orientalis  s.  compendiosa  et  facilis 

methodus  linguarr.  orientt.  etc.  Francof.  et  Lips.  1725.  4to. 
Christ.   JBened.   Michaelis   Syriasmus  i.  e.  grammatica  Hnguae  Svr. 

Halis,  1741.  4 to. 
lo.  David  Michaelis  Grammatica  Syr.     Halis,  1784.  4to. 
/.   G.  Kals  Grammatica  Hebraeo-harmonica   cum   Arab,   et   Aram. 

Amstelod.  1758.  8vo. 
lac,   Ge.   Christ.  Adleri     Brevis  linguae  Syr.  institutio  etc.  Altonte, 

1784. 
W.  Hezel,  Syrische  Sprachlehre.     Lemgo,  1788.  4to. 
loh.    Gottfr.    Hasse   Practlsches    Handbuch    der  Araraiiischen  o.ler 

Syrisch-Chaldaisch-Samaritanischen  Sprache.     lena,  1791  ^  Svo. 
Innoc.  Fessleri   Institutiones  hnguarr.  orientt.  Hebr.  Chald.  Syr.  et 

Arab.  Vratisl.  Halis  et  lenae,  1787  et  1789. 
01.   Gerh.   Tychseni   Elementale  Syr.    Rostochi,  1793.  8vo.      (Ap- 
pended to  his  Chrestomathy.) 
lo.  lahn.  Aramaische  oder   Chaldaische   und    Syrische   Sprachlehre 

fiir  Anfanger.     Wien  1793.  8vo.  neu  herausgegeben  von  Oberleit- 

ner  Elementa  Aramaicae  s.  Chaldaeo-Syriacae  linguae   etc.  Viennae, 

1820.  Svo. 
loh.  Sev.    Vater  Handbuch  der  Hebr.  Syr.  Chald.  und  Arab.  Gram- 

matik.     Leipzig,  1802  u.  1817.  Svo. 
Thomas  Yeates''  Syriac  Grammar,  principally  adapted  to   the  New 

Testament  in  that  Language.     Lond.  1819.  Svo. 
Hampus  Tullherg  Elementale  Syr.  P.  I.  et  IL     Lond.  1824.  Svo. 
Paul  Fwald  Lehrbuch  der  syr.  Sprache.     Erlangen,  1826.  Svo. 
Andr.   Theoph.  Hoffmanni    Grammaticie    Syriacae    hbri    III.  Hil.-e, 

1827.  4to. 


II.  LEXICONS. 

Andr.  Masii  Syrorum  peculium.     Antwerp,  1521.  folio 

Fahr.  Boderiani  Dictionarium  Syro-Chald.     Antw.   1572.   (i'om.  VI. 

of  the  Antw.  Polygl.) 
Val.    Schindleri   Lexicon   pentagl.   Hanovioo,    1612.    1649.      Lond. 

1635  Francof.  1653.  1695.  fol. 
Christoph.  Crinesii  Lexicon  Syriacum.     Viteb.  1612.  4to. 
loh.  Bapt.  Ferrarii  Nomenclator  Syriacus.     Romae,  1622.  4to. 
loh.  Buxtorfii  iun.  Lexicon  Chald.  et  Syr.     Basil.  1622.  4to. 
Martini  Trostii  Lexicon  Syr.  etc.  Cothenis  Anhalt.  1623.  4to. 


SYRIAC   ClIRKSTOMATIIIES.  25 

Thomas  a  Novaria  Nomenclator  Syr.  Roma2,  1636.  8vo. 

Andr.  Sennerti  Lexici  Chald.  et  Syr.  compendium.    Viteb.  1666.  4to. 

loh.  Henr.  Hottingeri  Etymologicum  orientt.  s.  Lexicon  harmonicum 
heptagl.  etc.  Francof.  1661.     Turici,  1664.  4to. 

Dav.  Grafunderi  Compendium  Lexici,  Syr.  (Appended  to  his  Syriac 
Grammar.) 

Aegid.  Gutbirii  Lexicon  Syr.  Hamb.  1667.  8vo.  (Appended  to  his 
New  Testament.) 

£Jdm.  Castelli  Lexicon  heptagl.  Lond.  1669.  From  this  has  been 
specially  edited  the  Syriac,  by  J.  D.  Michaelis,  under  the  title, 
Edmundi  Castelli  Lexicon  Syr.     Gotting.  1788.     Tom.  11.  4to. 

lo.  Ft.  Nkolai  Hodogeticum  orientale  harmonicum  etc.  lenae, 
1670.  4to. 

Christoph.  Cellarii  Glossarium  Syro-Latinum.     Cizae,  1683.  4to. 

Car.  Schajii  Lexicon  Syr.  concordantiale.  Lugd.  Bat.  1708.  (Ap- 
pended to  the  New  Testament ) 

xiut.  Zanolini  Lexicon  Syriacum.  Patav.  1742.  8vo.  (Appended 
to  the  New  Testament.) 


HL  CHEESTOJVLiTHIES. 

loh.  Dav.    Michaelis  Syrische    Chrestomathie   Thl.    1.     Gottingen, 

1768.    8vo.      Die  II.  Ausg.    1783.  mit  einem  Glossar.  u.  Anm. 

vervollstandigt  unter  dem  Titel :  loh.  Dav.  Michaelis  Chrestoma- 

thia  Syr.  Ed.  III.  glossario  adnotationibusque  instructa  a  /.    Ch. 

Dcepke.  1829. 
/.  C.  G.  Adleri   Chrestomathia  Syr.     Hafn,  1784. 
loh.    Gottfr.   Hasse   Lectiones  Syro-Arabioo-Samaritano-^thiopicae 

Regiom.  et  Lipsiae,  1788.  8vo. 
Georg.  Guil.  Kirschii  Chrestomathia  Syr.     Hofae,  1789.  8yo.  (Newly 

edited  by  Bernstein.) 
Glai  Gerh.  Tychsen  Elementale  Syriacum  etc.     Rostochi,  1793.  Svo. 
Henr.  Ad.  Grimm  Neue  Syrische  Chrestomathie  mit  einem  Glossarium 

u.  8.  w.     Lemgo,  1795.  8vo. 
Gust.  Knoes  Chrestomathia  Syr.  maximam  pai'tem  e  Codd.  MSS. 

collecta.     Gotting.  1807.  Svo. 
Aug.  Hahn  et  Sieffert  Chrestomathia  Syr.  s.  S.  Ephraemi  carmina 

seleeta.     Lips,  1825.  Svo.     (With  a  Lex.  Syr.) 


a 


SYRIAC    GRAMMAR 


PART    FIRST. 

ELEMENTS     OP     THE     LANGUAGE 


TABLE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


i 

« 

p 

i'  umi. 

c 
3 
5 

? 

? 

3 

NAME. 

1 

1 
1 

1 

SOUND. 

1 

1 

Olaph 

,W\K 

1 

^!  ^ 

1 

Spiritus    lenis 

1 

2 

Beth 

Zuo 

O 

r^ 

.n 

»CI 

B,  Bh,  V. 

2 

3 

4 

Gomal 
Dolath 

? 

r 

r 

> 

D,Dh(<Amthis). 

3 
4 

5 

He 

loj 

CTi 

01 

CTI 

Ol 

H. 

5 

6 

Vau 

olo 

0 

Q 

Q 

0 

W  or  V. 

6 

1 

Zain 

r 

^l 

1 

V 

\ 

1 

Z,    ?Gr,cFr. 

T 

8 

Cheth 

A^ 

j^ 

Mh 

kAK 

%A* 

Ch,  or  Hh.' 

8 

9 

Teth 

A4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

T. 

9 

10 

Jud 

iol 

a 

^ 

iJL 

•^ 

Y. 

10 

11 
12 

Coph 
Lomad 

0 

1 

a 
1 

>• 

^ 

K,  Ch. 
L. 

20 
30 

13 

Mim 

^S£ 

5:D 

So 

Ul 

^ 

M. 

40 

14 
15 

Nun 
Semcatb. 

,    "H 

J 
CO 

1 
m 

N. 
S. 

50 
60 

16 

Ee 

]i 

L 

L 

\i 

Vi 

2?  Hebrew. 

70 

17 

Phe 

\£ 

Si 

Si. 

^ 

^ 

P,  Pb,  F. 

80 

18 
19 

Tsode 
Koph 

.2100 

S 

n 

^ 

^ 

Ts. 

K  guttural,Q. 

90 
100 

20 

Rish 

^? 

J 

• 

r 

r 

> 

R. 

200 

21 

Shin 

M 

A 

..A  . 

..» 

Sh. 

300 

22    Thau 

o2 

I 

A       A       Z     Th.  T.  0  Greek.' 

400 

2S  CONSONANTS. 


CHAPTER  I. 


Weitten  Characters  anb  their  Use. 


§  1.  Consonants. 


The  Syriac,  or  West  Aramsean  Language,  lias  an  alphabet 
(3onsisting,  like  that  of  the  Hebrew  and  Chaldee,  of  twentj- 
two  consonants.  In  common  with  the  Arabic,  it  connects 
together  the  several  letters  of  a  word  by  horizontal  lines 
at  the  bottom ;  from  which  arises  a  fourfold  form,  though 
essentially  the  same,  according  as  a  letter  is  initial,  medial, 
or  final,  or  is  connected  or  unconnected  with  the  preceding 
letter,  as  exhibited  in  the  table  on  the  preceding  page. 

Rem.  1. — The  character  exhibited  in  the  preceding  alphabet,  is 
called  Feshito,  i.  e.  the  simple.  It  is  employed  by  the  Maronites  and 
Jacobites,  and  is  said  to  have  been  invented  by  Jacob  of  Edessa  in 
the  seventh  century.  Besides  this,  Amira  mentions  the  Estrangelo^ 
not  from  c'^po/'^uXoj,  round,  (see  Asseman  Biblioth,  Orient.  T.  IH. 
P.  11.  p.  378.)  which,  according  to  M'cbaelis  Gram.  Syr.,  p.  15, 
means  the  Gospel  character  (scriptura  evangelii).  It  was  the  basis 
of  the  Nestorian  smaller  character,  to  wnich  the  so-called  double 
alphabet,  used  for  inscriptions  and  titles  of  books,  bears  a  strong 
resemblance.  There  is  also  the  Palmyrene  alphabet,  found  in  inscrip- 
tions on  the  ruins  of  Palmyra  or  Tadmor,  and  the  Mandcean  or 
Nahatcean  alphabet.  The  latter,  in  consequence  of  the  amalgamation 
of  the  gutturals  f  with  1 ,  and  Ol  with  ^  ,  consists  of  only  twenty  con- 
sonants. It  is  written  in  a  continuous  line,  with  four  different  forms  of 
each  letter,  viz.,  the  simple  consonant,  and  the  consonant  with  the 
vowels  a,  ^,  or  u. 

Rem.  2. — The  letters  I,  p  01,  Q,  ].,  ^,  J,  A,  connect  only 
with  the  preceding  letter.  After  one  of  these  letters,  therefore,  J  ,  # , 
J ,  2 ,  stand  unconnected ;  and  also,  with  the  exception  of  ^ ,  always 
at  the  beginning  of  a  word.    The  final  letters  are  ^ ,  ^  ,  -^ ,    . ,  VX . 

y  before  ^  is  written  S^  ;  and  after  it  U  or  }^ .  Double  L ,  at  the  end 
of  a  word  takes  the  form  of  m.     The  letter  G,  in  words  adopted  from 


CONSONANTS.  29 

Other  languages,  is  written  \^  .  Several  consonants,  where  they  ter- 
minate a  word,  are  slightly  inflected  upward  ;  e.g.  »S,  wD,  *a,  etc. 

Rem.  3. — The  gutturals  express  the  several  gradations  of  guttural 

sounds  from  the  weakest  to  the  strongest,  f  and  01  may  be  compared 

with  the  Spiritus  lenis  and  Spiritus  asper  of  the  Greek  language 
(§  12.  5.  b).  Deeper  guttural  sounds  are  .j.*  (  =  the  German  ch  ) 
and  ^  which  the  Greeks  express,  sometimes  by  the  Spiritus  asper, 
and  sometimes  by  /.  The  sound  of  JD  is  formed  in  the  fore-part  of 
the  mouth  ;  that  of  vO  farther  back  towards  the  throat.  %*  =  "^J 
sometimes  stands  for  g  at  the  end  of  Greek  words,  and  is  pronounced, 
according  to  Amira,  p.  9,  sc  before  e  and  i.  The  aspirated  conson- 
ants    A2iS,.||jQ   are,  in   some  MSS.,   marked  as  such  with  a  red 

point  placed  over  them  ;  the  removal  of  the  aspiration  is  indicated 
by  the  same  sign  beneath  them  (§  5). 

Rem.  4. — The  division  of  consonants,  with  reference  to  the 
organs  of  speech,  is  the  same  as  in  Hebrew.  But  the  gutturals 
^ImOiI  occasion  less  difficulty  than  in  Hebrew,  as  the  Sheva  and 
Daghesh  forte  are  vi^  an  ting  in  Syriac.  Of  the  gutturals,  in  connection 
with  a.  and  Q,  it  is  to  be  remarked ;  a)  that  |  between  two  vowels  has 
the  sound  of  y  ;  e.g.  Vo|o  Jco-yem  ;  h)  that  O  quiesces  in  —  and  — 
(=  0  and  w),  and  after  —  and  —  (=  a  and  e),  forms  the  dipthongs 
au  and  eu  ;  c)  that  initial  a  with  —  ==  z,  and  even  when  |  is  pre- 
fixed,  it  is  pronounced  i ;  e.  g.   |>00U|  Ihudlio  ;     d)  that  initial  1 

17     IS 
;  e.  g.  JGIL  ehadh. 

Rem.  5. — The  letters  of  the  Alphabet  suffice  for  designating  the 

numerals  as  far  as  400  (Vid.  Table  of  Consonants,  Amira,  p.l2.  sq). 

In  compound  numbers,  the  larger  stand  first ;  e.  g.  p^oZ  441.  From 

500 — 900,  the  tens  of  50 — 90  are  denoted  by  a  dot  over  the  letter  ; 

e.g.  vCD  600,  *2)  800.     Thousands  are  designated  by  —  placed  under 

the  units,  ten  thousand  by  ~^,  ten  thousand  thousand  by  7\       The 

numbers  20  and  50  are  also  expressed  by  double  yD  and  ^,  Uiv 
final  letters  falling  away  where  units  are  added.  Fractional  numbers 
are  designated  by  a  small  line  drawn  obliquely  downward,  from  left 
to  right,  over  the  letter  which  expresses  the  denominator  of  tho 

fraction  ;  e.g.  «iD  =^,  . .  ==  s  ^C" 


80  VOWEL  LETTERS  AND  VOWEL  SIGNS. 

§  2.     Vowels  in  General  {Vowel  Letters  and  Vowd  Signs). 

InSyriac,  the  vowel-letters  |,  o,  and  «a  originally  served  to 
designate  the  vowels,  and,  at  the  time  of  Mohammed,  the 
Syrians  were  acquainted  with  only  three  vowel-signs,  which 
sufficed  for  their  language,  and  which  the  Arabs  appear  to 
have  borrowed  from  them.  Afterwards  the  Monophysites 
sought  to  express  the  Greek  vowels,  and  increased  their 
number  to  seven  (v.  Asseman  T.  I.  pp.  477, 478  ;  Gesenius 
Lehrgeb.  p.  84),  and  since  the  time  of  Theophilus  of  Edessa, 
in  the  eighth  century, the  Greek  vowels  appear  to  have  been 
in  common  use.  The  Nestorians,  on  the  other  hand,  make 
use  of  diacritical  points  (Asseman  T.  III.  P.  II.  p.  878). 
The  Monophysites  or  Maronites  commonly  use  them  only  in 
doubtful  cases. 

Rem. — Even  in  the  last  century,  the  Maronite  Gabriel  Heva  era- 
ployed  the  vowel-letters  to  designate  the  vowels,  making  *\  =  a, 
f  ==  0,     •  I  =  c,     wi  =  i,   and  O  =  u    (v.  Michael  is.  p.  29). 


§  3.      Voivel    Signs. 

The  Syrians  denote  the  vowels  by  diacritical  points,  or  by 
characters  formed  from  and  in  imitation  of  the  Greek  vowels, 
the  latter  mode  being  that  now  generally  used.  In  ancient 
manuscripts  both  modes  occur  together. 


FORM. 

NAME. 

SOUND. 

Syriac.                 Greek. 

•  7 

•  7 

Pethocho 

(]1*'A2))    a. 

It 

or       —         —     or     — 

Revotzo 

(r^i)3. 

I 

—                   —     or     — 

Chevotzo 

(V^^)  i- 

0 

or       —                 — 

Zekofo 

(laoi)    0. 

,  Q—  Q—                   Q— 

Etzotzo 

(lii^)    "• 

DIACRITICAL  POINTS  WHICH  SUPPLY  THE  PLACE  OF  VOWELS.    81 

Rem.  1. — The  names  are  derived  from  the  form  of  the  organ  used  in 
pronouncing  the  vowel.    The  Greek  forms  from  which  they  are  derived 

are  easily  recognized.     —  also  occurs  without  Q  =  w  in    vJD    and 

Vy.^VD  (For  lA^^fiD,  Luke  xvii,  29,  stands  more  correctly  |A^;.OD 
Psalm  xi.  6).  The  first  three  vowel-signs  may  also  be  written  beneath 
the  consonants. 

Rem.  2. — As*to  pronunciation,  —  seems  to  have  denoted  a  and  ae^ 

though  —  was  sometimes  sounded  by  the  Nestorians  like  a  (V. 
Asseman  T.  III.  P.  II.  p.  379).      In  foreign  words  it  quiesces  in  Q. 

In  —  are  contained  both  the  German  6  and  u. 

Rem.  3. — As  to  quantity  it  may  be  assumed  with  some  certainty 

that  —  is  always  long,  and  —  always  short ;  according  to  others,  — 

P  9^  7 

with  «^,  —  and  —  with  Q  are  long ;  —  is  short,  except  in  foreign  words. 

7  P 

Amira,  on  the  other  hand,  maintains  that  —  =  a,  —  =  o,  and  the 

others,  even  —  with  Q,  are  common.  Some  grammarians  also  denote 
the  quantity  of  the  vowels  by  diflferent  signs,  thus  ; — 


—  —  —  —  Revotzo. 

/r 

—  — ;-  Ciievotzo. 

O —     "O —  O —  Etzotzo. 

Rem.  4. — The  dipthongs  are  formed  with  Q  and  «^.  With  Vau  ;  a) 

r 

with  —  preceding  at  the  beginning  or  middle  of  a  word,  au ;  e.  g. 
(Zq5^  ;  b)  with  .*  preceding,  oi  nearly  ( the  German  eu ) ;  e.  g. 
wiOIOaA*!  ;    c  )    in    the   middle   of  a   word,    after     -i,  lu ;    e.  g. 

-  I  7  *. 

•jiOlQuj^QJ;  c?)  Vau  doubled,  the  first  with  —  ^  ou  (according 
to  Amira  u).  With  Yud  (besides  the  combinations  b  and  c  above); 
a)  with  a  preceding  —  ,  ai ;  e.  g.  p-^;  b)  with  —  m  the 
middle  and  at  the  end  of  a  word,  oi ;  e.  g.  (AAiOpO. 


§  4.  Diacritical  Points  which,  siijpply  the  ptace  of  Vowels. 
These  were  employed  earlier  than  were  the  vowels,  and 


82  KUSHOI  AND   RUKOK. 

were  used  even  after  the  invention  of  the  vowels,  by  the 
Nestorians.  The  point  which  designates  the  suffix  3  sing, 
fern,  cn  seems  to  have  originated  from  that  system. 

^  •  7 

Rem. — According  to  Amira  p.  51,  001=001;  while  001=001; 
•jO1=wa01  ;  *aOl=»u01  .  Ludov.  de  Dieu  has  treated  this  subject 
more  definitely  in  his  Grammar,  p.  35  seq. ;  according  to  him  the 
point  when  above  the  consonant  denotes  a,  o,  and  w,  under  it  e,  un- 
der «-a  and  I  i,  .and  under  Q  u.  The  principal  use  of  this  point  in 
the  verb,  is  to  denote  the  diflferent  persons  and  tenses  (v.  Amira, 
p.  51 ;  Lud.  de  Dieu,  p.  37).  Throughout  the  preterite,  with  the 
exception  of  the  1  sing.,  it  stands  under  the  radicals.  In  the  parti- 
ciple, it  denotes,  over  the  first  radical,  in  Peal,  _!.,  in  Aphel,  _i.,  or 
in  Verbs  med.  Vau,  _f_.  In  the  imperative  and  infinitive  it  may  be 
omitted  or  written  underneath.  The  future  takes  it  onlv  under  the 
radicals,  not  under  the  preformatives,  with  the  exception  of  the  1 
sing.,  where  it  stands  above  it  (comp.  Isenbiehl,  Beobachtungen 
von  dem  Gebrauche  des  Syrischen  Puncti  diacritic!  bei  den  Verbis, 
Gottingen,  1773). 

§  5.     Kuslioi  and  Rukoh  (wfc-»QO  —  yl^oi)* 

1.  According  to  Lud.  de  Dieu  and  Norberg,  the  Syrians 
have  in  fact  the  Sheva,  and  pronounce  a  vowelless  consonant 

with  a  short  half-sound  of  e  ;  e.g.  ^QOJ  pronounced  ^«  hum. 
Some  Grammarians, as  Amira,  p. 42,  and  the  Zabians,  use  J!L* 
So  too,  according  to  Asseman,  the  doubling  of  consonants  in 
pronunciation  (Daghesh  forte)  occurs  among  the  Oriental 
Syrians,  and,  according  to  the  analogy  of  the  Hebrew,  in  Pael 

andEthpaalofVerbs^andMl**  But  as  the  doubly  written 
consonant  falls  away  where  analogy  would  require  it  to  be 
retained  (§  8),  this  grammatical  usage  is  still  very  doubtful. 
This  duplication  is  retained  only  in  foreign  words. 

2.  Analogous  withDaghesh  lene  is  Kushoi^{i.G.  hardening), 
a  red  point  inserted  over  the  aspirates,  in  manuscripts,  which 
removes  the  aspiration.  The  retention  of  the  aspiration  is 
indicated  by  a  point  placed  underneath,  called  Rukok  (i.  c. 
softeninfr). 

*  It  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  Sheva  and  Daghesh  are  not,  in 
Syriac,  denoted  by  any  written  characters,  and  appear  only  in  pronunciation. 
— Tr. 


EIBUI.  33 

Rem. — Some  consider  Kusboi  to  be  Daghesh  forte,  which  is 
denied  by  Amira  and  Gabriel  Sionita.  Lud.  de  Dieu,  p.  25  sq.,  places 
it;  a)  at  the  beginning  of  words,  except  where  ^0^2  precede,  or  where 
the   preceding   word   ends   in    •-» ,  O ,   | ,  in    wllich  case   Rukok   is 

retained;    e.g.    f,  iViNZ,    fp.fci£2^A^;  6)   in    the    middle,   after   a 

quiescent  letter ;  e.  g.  01 '^.\V) ; c)  after  dipthongs ;  e.  g.  Aa-^ ;  (ZqId, 

with  the  exception  of  ^  |  as.  Rukok,  on  the  contrary,  occurs,  besides 
the  cases  noted  under  a  above ;  a)  when  one  of  the  aspirates  ends  a 
syllable,  but  is  in  the  same   case   hardened   by  a  preceding    vacant 

consonant ;  e.  g.  ^V^M  ;  b)  when,  according  to  Hebrew  analogy,  they 

follow  a  movable  Sheva ;  e.  g.  |A3)QO  ;  c)  after  an  open  syllable ;  e.  g. 

Hij.     So  too  these  consonants  are  not  pronounced  as  aspirates  in  Pa. 

and  Ethpa.  of  Verbs  ^,  when  the  J  preceding  them  has  fallen  away ; 

e.  g.  . qXoZ  from  ^^ij ;  and  in  verbs  with  the  middle  radical  doubled, 
where,  in  Hebrew,  Daghesh  forte  stands.  Furthermore,  here  belong 
the  letters  in  which  one  having  fallen  away  before  them,  is  to  be  com- 
pensated for,  in  the  future  and  infinitive  of  verbs  *.^2),  or  in  general 
where  Daghesh  forte  euphonic  stands  in  Hebrew.  These  points  do 
not  occur  in  printed  works. 


§  6.  Bibui  (^QOj). 

1.  To  distinguish  the  plural  of  nouns  and  verbs  from 
the  singular  written  with  the  same  consonants,  the  Sjriac 
makes  use  of  Bihui^  i.  e.  two  points  placed  horizontally  over 
the   word.      This  sign  is  still  retained,  like  the  vowels,  in 

printed  books.     Thus,  bj  means  of  these  points  ]^\V>  is  read 

\h  \So  the  Icings^  and  distinguished  from  |n\V>,  the  Jcing. 
This  sign  is  also  used  in  the  3  plur.  fem.  pret.  of  Verbs  3  rad. 
Olaph  in  all  the  conjugations  except  Peal  (§  32),  to  distin- 

guish  it  from  3  sing.  masc.  ;  e.  g.  «i\  ..iZ]  they  have  praised 

themselves  ,from  *  >  \   . .  Z  |  he  ha^  praised  himself.    In  like 

manner  Kibui  strengthens  the  distinction  between  the  3  plur. 
pret.  masc.  and  fem.,   where  the  formatives  Q  and  t^  at  the 

end  sometimes  fall  away  from  the  3  sing,  masc;  e.  g.  \^.^  =• 

qL4o,  « i  \t^*    The  plurals,  which  are  easily  recognized,  re- 


34-  MEHAGYONO  AND  MAEHETONO. 

;nain  without  this  designation,  though  it  is  not  omitted  in 
plural  forms  with  suffixes.  In  numerals  the  usage  is  arbitrary. 
Some  mark  with  this  sign  only  the  feminines,  and  the  forms 

with  suffixes ;  e.  g.  ^7jl2,  .QIUjIZ. 

Rem. — Amira,  p.  48,  omits  Ribui,  when  the  plural  form  ^  (§  44) 

lias  the  signification  #QJ|  or  tOGLkAal,  i.  e.  they  are^  but  adopts  nie 
above-mentioned  use  m  numerals,  and  uses  it  also  with  prepositions 
joined  with  plural  suffixes  (§  16.  c). 

2.  Ribui  also  serves  to  denote  collectives ;  e.  g.  I'rOb  a  heeve^ 

];ao  a  herd  of  heems. 

Rem. — When  Ribui  stands  over  >  (with  the  exception  of  the  1  sing, 
pret.  and  fut.,  and  the  participles  Act.  Pe.,  according  to  §  4.  Rem!), 

7 

or  coincides  with  a  diacritical  point  representing  —  ,  one  of  the  points 
is  omitted.  When  three  points  come  together,  one  of  them  represents 
Kushoi. 


§  7.  Mehagijono  and  Marhetono. 

^0    0  7    .  ^0  0,  ,7 

(tll^Olk)  -  WOl-r^). 

When   an   accumulation    of  consonants    without  vowels 


occurs,  and  the  Syrians  wish  to  indicate  that  a  monosyllabic 
word  is  to  be  pronounced  as  a  dissyllable,  or  a  dissyllabic 
word  as  a  trisyllable,  and  so  on,  they  place  a  line  under  the 

consonant  to  which  a  vowel  (usually  —  more  rarely  — )  is  to 

be  supplied  ;  e.  g.  lAi^j.   This  line  is  called  Mehagyono^  and 

denotes  a  removal  of  this  accumulation  in  utterance 
(Diaeresis).  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  voice  is  to  hurry  over 
these  same  consonants,  a  line  is  drawn  above  them,  which  is 

called  Marhetono  \  e.  g.  lAojl. 

Rem.  1. — Some     Grammarians     place    Mehagyono     only    before 

«viVr>\  and   before   ai^  in  (A*jJD>.     Amira,  p.  41.  sq.,  compares  the 

two  with  Diceresis  and  Synceresis,  which  may  have  been  transferred 
from  prosody  into  prose.  (Vd.  Chrestom.  Syr.  ed.  Hahn  et  SiefFert, 
Lips.  1825.  p.  11). 

Rem.  2. — Sometimes  a  line  is  found  over  consonants ;  a)  in  numerals  ; 

e.  g.  «i^  12  ;  6)  in  abbreviations ;  e.  g.  pO  for  \A^r^ ',  c)  over  the  particlo 

of  exclamation  0|,  to  distinguish  it  from  0|. 


LINEA   CCCULTANS.  .S5 

§  8.  Lima  Occultans. 

This  line  placed  under  consonants  denotes ;    a)  that  the 

letter   under  which  it  stands  is  not  pronounced ;     e.    g. 

Z;i  (§  12. 1);  h)  that  1  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  followed 

by  Ol  is  to  be  pronounced  weaker,  and  like  f ;  e.g.  jcni  (vid. 

§1.  Eem.4) ;  c)  that  the  letter  quiesces,viz.,  in  the  impera.  of 

the  pass.  Ethpeel  and  Ethpaal ;    e.  g.  ^^-^2*1,    pronounced 

etlikatl^  and  imp.  from  %4^'  5  which  with  the  transposition 

of  the  first  two  radicals  is  w^^Ol  (comp.  §  12.  1). 

Rem. — Some  have  extended  this  also  to  the  imperatives  Ethtaphal 
and  Eshtaphal ;  but  in  the  latter  especially,  it  appears  to  be  merely 
a  diacritical  designation  of  the  imperat.  As  such  it  may  in  general 
be  regarded  as  coming  under  h  and  c  above. 


§  9.  Tone. 

1.  The  tone  stands  regularly  upon  the  penultimate  sylla- 
ble, when  the  ultimate  does  not  terminate  in  a  movable 
consonant  ;  e.  g.  ln\V>,  Mdlco. 

Rem. — In  an  accumulation  of  consonants,  where  by  Mehagyono 
(§  V)  the  penultimate  syllable  becomes  the  antepenultimate,  the  tone 
remains  upon  the  stem-syllable. 

It  is  more  difficult  to  determine  whether  words,  which,  according 

to  Amira,  p.  462,  have  Q  in  the  penultimate,  follow  the  same  rule  ; 

e.  g.  PQjaj,  and  should  be  pronounced  achuno  or  achuno. 

2.  The  tone  is  on  the  ultimate,  when  it  ends  in  a  movable 
consonant ;  e.  g.  t^A*  ;  so  too  with.  Q  and  t^  final,  if  they 
have  arisen  from  2q  and  Ax ;  e.  g.  on\V)  from  ZonSV). 
vid.  Amira,  pp.  467 — i69. 

§  10.  Signs  of  Inter punctio7i. 

The  Syrians,  who  do  not  possess  the  Hebrew  system  of 
accents,  divide  their  periods,  according  to  Amira,  p.  475,  into 


36  GENERAL   VIEW. 

protasis  and  apodosis,  which  again  are  subdivided  into 
smaller  parts,  and  include  the  more  precise  designation  of 
subject  and  predicate.  In  this  respect  they  designate ;  a) 
the  separate  members  of  the  protasis  with  (♦) ;  h)  the  close 
of  the  protasis  with  (•.),  which  is  also  the  sign  of  interroga- 
tion; c)  the  separate  members  of  the  apodosis  with  (♦*), 
which  also  marks  longer  interrogations ;  and  d)  the  close 
of  a  period  is  marked  by  a  point,  which  as  it  also  occurs  in 
the  middle  of  a  period,  some  consider  to  be  the  smallest 
mark  of  interpunction,  and  (♦)  or  (::)  the  largest  point. 

Rem. — Amira,  p.  479,  mentions  a  point  standing  over  a  word 
which  indicates  a  question,  address,  admiration,  praise,  command,  and 
the  like. 


CHAPTER  II. 


PECULIARmES  AXD  ChANGES  OF  THE  LeTTEES. 


§11.  General  View. 


As  the  changes  in  the  different  parts  of  speech  are  effected 
partly  by  consonants  and  partly  by  vowels,  this  chapter  is 
naturally  divided  into  two  parts.  In  the  first  place,  those 
changes  which  take  place  uniformly,  in  accordance  with 
fixed  laws,  in  pronouns,  verbs,  and  nouns,  must  be  accurately 
distinguished  from  those  which  occur  only  in  individual  forms. 
Tliough  the  former  class  of  changes  will  be  here  principally 
treated,  yet  in  order  to  afford  a  proper  connection  between 
them,  that  which  occurs  universally  will  be  first  treated  of, 
and  that  which  takes  place  in  special  and  individual  cases 
will  be  appended,  either  independently  or  in  remarks. 


§  12.  Changes  of  the  Consonants, 

Of  those  changes  in  the  radical  consonants  which  Hebrew 
grammarians  classify  as  Assimilation,  Transposition,  Falling 


CHANGES   OF   THE   CONSONANTS.  87 

awaj,  Exchange,  and  Addition,  the  first  only  is  wanting  in 
Syriac.  And  this  want  is  only  in  form,  for  in  point  of  fact 
this  feature  exists  in  those  cases  where  a  letter  is  dropped 
in  pronunciation  by  the  occurrence  of  Linea  occultans  (§  8. 
comp.  Gesenius,  Lehrgebaude,  p.  162).  Here  should  be  no- 
ticed the  following — 

1.  Consonants   are   dropped   in   pronunciation,    by    the 
occurrence  of  Linea  occultans,  as  follows  :  A)     In  General ; 

a)  in  nouns  whose  middle  radical  is  doubled ;    e.  g.    ]ilSo 

mano ;    h)  j  without  a  vowel  before  Z;  e.  g    \l^j^  ;  c)  01  in 

suf&xes  of  the  3  masc.  sing.  *aOi .  .jcno ,  «aau.,    %^oiQ^    of 

the  verb,  and  *^01Q  of  the  noun  plural  (v.  Table  to  §  16);  or 

when  Linea  occultans  has  arisen  from  theGreek  Spiriius  asper ; 

e.g.  wi^ooij  cpw^y] ;  J)  o  in  derivatives  of  verbs  w^aand  |2), 

as  IlijOQ*  from  1^*  :  B)    In  particular  is  this  the  case  ;    a) 

with  1  initial   in    ^.i  »il ,  ^tjs*l ,  .Jiol ,  and  in  the  pronoun 

m1  in  connection  with  the  participle,  Ij")  Ivm  ;     h)  with  Oi, 

particularly  in  the  following  cases ;  a)  in  the  pronouns  OOI 

and  *j01  ,  with  the  throwing  back  of  the  vowel  upon  the 

preceding  vacant  consonant ;    e.  g.  ool  AaA  ;    or  with  the 

falling  away  of  the  letter  with  the  preceding  vowel ;    e.  g. 

001  )mD  pronounced  h^  slieu ;  in  which  case,  however,  before 

001 ,  —  passes  into  —  ;    e.  g.    OOI  p(  for  p( ;    /3)  in  fOOl 

(v.  §  38)   when  it  is  an  auxiliary  verb ;    e.  g.    fOOi  ^^4^ 

he  had  hilled ;    7)  in  *O0U  for  »QOU  to  give ;    c)  with   ^ 

in  ^ll  to  gb  away^  when  it  should  have  a  vowel  which  falls 

back  upon  the  1 ;  e.  g.  ALll'^for  ASlf  (v.  §  28) ;  d)  with  J  in 

the  pronouns  Aj(    masc.   and    ^bS\  fem.,    and  their  plurals 

.oAj|  masc.  ^Z\J|  fem.,  and  in  some  other  words ;  e.g.  fAls ; 

and  finally  ;  e)  with  >  in  b^  daughter ;  (v.  §  8). 

Rem. — Linea  occultans  is  retained  under  f  in  nouns  derived  from 

those  adduced  under  a  ;  e.g.  '\Lci\  >  »»!  ,  lZ;-»si| ,  fZoju]  ,  and  many 


38  CHANGES   OF  THE   CONSONANTS. 

others.  It  also  occurs  in  p| ,  001,  and  «-*01  when  they  are  used 
for  the  logical  copula  or  substantive  verb  (comp.  §  16. 1.,  §  54.  A.  3. 
a  and  c).  In  these  pronouns,  even  when  thoy  stand  pleonastically 
(§  55.  A),  the  logical  copula  is  fundamentally  involved,  as  is  con- 

19 
001   (§  68.  A),  which   verb   loses 
Linea   occultans  only  when  it  is  used  absolutely  in  the  sense    of 
to  he^    to  become^  to  come  to  pass;      As  to   further   inflection   of 

•^OLi    compare  §  29.  1.  Rem. 

2.  Transposed  is  L  before  sibilants  in  Eihpe.^  Ethpa.^  and 
Eshta.;  e.  g.  .-^ikAcol  from  IJcD ,  ^j6A«1  from  ^}Qm. 

2  7      7^ 

is  changed  into  %4  ^^^^^'  V  '^^^^  ?  ^^^^^  ^  *'  ^'  S'  •^^^■4  ll 

7    7    J*!*  7   7    ^-^  7  '*«J""  .  .    . 

for  o«kSaD*Z(,  ^?ll  for  ^Kl*  There  is  no  transposition  when 
Z  is  doubled  in  Ethpe.  of  Verbs  «aJ^  and  Ql ;  e.  g.  ^Q^L^dLL] 
(v.  §31.  2).  I  as  middle  radical  is  sometimes  transposed;  e.  or. 
%aS|Z1  from  (j^fO*  Also  J  in  the  imperat.  from  *.^(JlJ  (v.  §  8). 

3.  Dropped  are ;    a)  f  with.  Linea  occultans ;    e.  g.  ..aj;^ 

for  »«j1  jo  and   as    first  radical    in    the  1   sing.  fut.  Pe. 

infin.  and  part.  Pa.  of  Verbs  ]si  (§  28.  1) ;    e.  g.  ^Qsf  for 

VkOoll ;    and  in  ^]  for  ^1  *al ;    b)    w>  and  J  as  first  radical, 

and  Q  as  middle  radical  in  Verbs  ^x£  (§  29.  2),  ^  (§  38.  1), 

and  Qi  (§  31.  1) ;  e.  g.  -oak)  from^QSJ.     Here  belong  snch 

nouns   as    JlQ^Lo  for   tJomV)      The  same  is  true  also  in 

respect  to  the  middle  radical  of  Verbs  Ml  (§  34.  1),  and  the 
nouns  derived  therefrom  ;  c)  one  of  two  Z  without  a  vowel 

standing  between  them  ;  e.  g.  ]ZpA*  for  1ZZ,-m.  Also  when 
three  Z  stand  together  in  the  fut.  pass. ;  e.  g.  \L^IL  for 
^^ioZZZ.  Finally  Z  falls  away  at  the  end  of  the  fern,  end- 
ings Zq  and  Ajl  ;  e.  g.  o^\V)  for  Zoo^V). 

4. — Exchanged  are  ;  a)  the  gutturals  1  and  1  before  Ol; 
e.  g.  r»0l1  for  hOU;  b)  in  transferring  Hebrew  words  into 
Syriac,  7  passes  into  j ,  ^  into  «^ ,  •©  into  Z ,  sometimes 
-|   into  -^  and  J  ;     also   ^  of  verbs   "13?   into   Ol  ;      e.  g 


QUIESCENT  LETTERS.  39 

r  TT  ^  .  -  : 

Zoio  =  vjj'-^^  ;  c)  Z,  when  transposed  with  sibilants,  in  the 
passive,  goes  over  into  >  and  v^,  according  to  Eem.  2.  above; 
d)  1  with  Z  in  the  construct  state  fem.,  and  before  suffixes 
(§§  45,  46);  and  in  the  Mhj)e.  and  Ethpa.  of  verbs  ]a  (§  28. 
1   Eem.  ;   e.  g.  r^ZZ*|  for  h^IZ]* 

Rem. — This  last  has  been  also  applied  to  nouns  derived  from   \zi 

Verbs  ;  e.g.    \**JiL  from  •J4J|«     In  many  cases  this  usage  is  doubt- 

jy.Z   which  may  be  derived  from  JytZ  or  J..  I ♦    Hence 

\\%\L  is  found.     The  derivatives  from  Aphel  do  not  belong 

here;    e.   g.    (AajoZ  from  •-*J0|» 

5. — Added  are  ;  a)  sometimes  ]  at  the  beginning,  before  a 

vacant   consonant ;    e.  g.    Lqd\  for  Zoo  ;      ^Lm\  for  taZ^  ; 

also  in  Greek  words  beginning  with  2  ;  e.  g.  ^0*^420!  = 
ra<J'ov ;      6)  01  to  denote  the  Spiritus  asper  in  Greek*  words  ; 

e.  g.   V^Sdooij   Twfxaioff   (§  12.  1.  A.  c);    even  in  compound 

words  in  the  later  Syriac ;  e.  g.   .iDOjaiJQCD  duvo^og  ;  and  in 

cases  where  01   does   not  represent   Spiritus  asper ;    e.  g. 

jro;-4^*2)  nsrpoj  ;    c)  J  is  added  where  it  supplies  the  place 

of  Daghesh  forte  withLinea  occultans ;  e.  g.  Ir^^yi  =  1*"l!S!\5 

§  13.   Quiescent  Letters. 
The    vowel-letters     %a,  O,  1,   and,    according  to  some, 
01   also,  quiesce  in  the  preceding  vowel. 

Rem. — Here  belongs  only  01  ;  for  oi  of  the  suf.  3  sing.  fem. 
=  ^   of  the  Hebrew. 

The  following  letters   quiesce  : 

1.  1  final  in  —  and  —  ;  e.g.  P'^.,]]^";  1  medial  in  — 
and  —  ;  e.g.  ^i^fco,  ;Sd1!sD  ;  and*if  it  have  a  vowel,  this 
falls  back  upon  the  preceding  vacant  consonant ;  e.  g. 
^)aJ  for  ^)mj.  And  so  in  words  transferred  from  the 
Hebrew;    e.  g.    *q'Is  =  ^^3» 


4:U  VOWEL-LETTERS   WHICH    ARE   NOT   SOUNDED. 

Rem. —  1  quiesces  in  —  in  po^'  f-»-^»  lit  ^"^  ll^^M*  I»i  Greek 
words  »  and  ai  are  represented  by  | — ,  ai  sometimes  by  wi|  — ;  e.g. 
"JZqQ^D  xifBc^rog  ;  JCD)^  xaipog.  In  the  later  Syriac  ]  stands 
for    a    and    s. 

2.  0  quiesces  in  — ;  e.g.  ^OO ,  and  sometimes  OQ  ;  e.g. 
lliooi     (§3.  Kem.  4). 

Kem.  —  In  Greek  words  O  quiesces  m  — ,  in  the  termination 
%CDQ  =  oj  ;  e.  g.  *J0O'^>\>*=^  ==  ^iXi'T-ttoj.  J3DQ  is  also  used 
for  a»  j  e.  g.  •.C0QO)|  =  ol^X"-*'  ^^  ^^^  later  language  we  find 
also  *CDQJLiZ|  =  'A&r]vaij  ;  «.CDQOj|  =  app^aj. 

8.  «-!.,  medial  and  final,  quiesces,  in  —  and  — ;  e.  g. 
^A^,  w».Ji^..ZV  .^  initial  usually  quiesces  in  —  ;  e.  g.  ^^, 
and  —  fiills  back  upon  the  preceding  vowelless  prefix ;  e.  g. 

7    1  r  I 

QlraO  for  Qlr^O*  Also  between  two  consonants  ^  quiesces 
in  —  ;    e.  g.  lAjJjf  for  iLjl. 

§  14.    Vowel- Letters  which  are  not  sounded    {Otiant). 

In  the  following  cases  *j,  o,  1,  are  not  sounded  ; 

1.  ]  in  the  pronouns  2  plar.masc.  and  fern.  ^oAj]  ,  ^Aj") 
conjoined  with  the  participle  to  denote  the  present  tense, 
e.  g.  toAjl  ^-ib^4^  pronounced  hotelitun^  in  which  case  th^ 
^  of  the  participle  is  not  sounded. 

2.  O  and  wt  at  the  end  of  words  ;  a)  in  verbal  endings 
without  any  vowel  preceding  (2  pret.  sing.  fem.  ;  8  plur. 
masc.  and  fem.;  imperat.  sing.  fem.  and  plur.  masc. ;  and   2 

flit.  sing,  fem.)  ;    e.  g.    uiA^^^O ,  Cl^O  ;     h)  in  the  sufiixes 

7  7 

w»,  ^jlQ,  t>ni  ,  *aOlQ,  where  *a  is  sounded  only  when  fol- 
lowed  by  Ooi ;  e.  g.  OOl  .  i^n  pronounced  hehiju  ;  c )  in 
>  >  \V)Z  I  yesterday^  %^^  rest^  and  the  like,  which  form  J>  in 
the  emphatic  state   (  §  46.  1). 


CHANGES   IN   THE   VOWELS.  41 

§  15.   Changes  in  the  Yovjels. 

Although  to  a  less  extent  than  in  Hebrew,  the  rowels  in 
Sjriac,  undergo  various  changes  and  modifications  in  res- 
pect to  formation  and  derivation,  still  they  are  exchanged^ 
transposed^  dropped  or  added, 

1.  They  are  exchanged  partly  in  accordance  with  the 
genius  of  the  language,  and  partly  in  transferring  Hebrew 
and  Chaldee  words.  The  genius  of  the  language  requires 
the  following  exchanges  of  vowels  ;  a)  in  the  preformatives 

of  the  fut.  and  infin,  Pe.  in  simple  syllables,    in  Verbs  \zi , 

vA^ ,  (]-i-M  §  32),  —  passes  over  into  — ;  e.  g.  ^Iso'p,   r^lSD ; 

but  before  gutturals  and  5  at  the  end  of  words,  inta —  ;  e.g. 

>,.»  for  jp»  ;     h)  in  the  feminine  with   \ ,    — ,    in  the  con- 

struct  state,  passes  over  into  —  ;    e.  g.   (n^   construct  state 

An^  (§  45.  2).     In  transferring  words  from  the  Hebrew  and 

Chaldee,  the  following  vowel  changes  may  be  noted ;  a)  for 

— the  Syriac  prefers  — ;    e.  g.    Byi  ==  Hbt^  ;    5>0jY=  ^^^^^^  ; 

T  _  _  \^  "^  "T  IT-: 

b)    nr  is  exchanged  in  proper  names   mostly  with  — ;  e.  g. 
QCQ^l  =  yQ^^  ;  —  with  —  ;  e.  g.  *>*A2L»  =  n?l3^  ;    c)  1  with 

Q- ;  e.  g.     V»?<^  =  tlJlp  ;  ^^  with  Q-  ;  e.  g.  "ISDoi  =  (Chald. 

2.   Vowels  are  transposed  ;  A)  in  general ;  a)  q  in  the  im- 

perat.  plur.  masc.  Pe.  when  a  suffix  is  added ;  e.  g.  0^040, 

with  sufSx  ^olQ-i.^^^ ;    ^)  concerning  the  falling  back  of  the 

vowel  over  1,  »a,  or  oil*,  upon  prefixes,  compare  §  13.  1.  3; 

§52.  1;  §53.1.  Eem. ;  B)  in  Particular  ;    ff)in^l),  vrhen- 
ever  1  is  vacant,  the  vowel  of  the  ^  falls  back  upon  it ;  e.g. 

t^\\  for  ASi]  (§12.1) ;    Z>)  in  some  nouns  of  the  form  ^O^^, 

when   a  syllable  is   appended   and  in  the  emphatic  state 

li?Q£>   (§  45.  8  ;    §  48.    A.  Decl.  IV) ;    of  the  form  1^^, 

emphatic  state  fZrOa  ;     c)   in  ^^QjD  and  iOjOD  with  1 

prefixed,    Q  is  placed  before  Q  when  a  and  j  retain  theii 

—  ;  e.  g.    ^.SqqqV  .,»SDoal>»     In  r^  when  it  enters  into 


4:2  CHANGES  IN   THE   VOWELS. 

composition,  —  moves  forward  upon  j ;  e.  g.  Vu^^l,  ]Sd^» 

8.  The  vowel  of  a  final  mixed  syllable  is  dr opined ^  when 
an  entire  syllable  is  added  at  the  end,  especially  when 
the  last  radical  begins  the  new  syllable  ;    e.  g.   in  the  verb 

^i^6JD  masc.  AX4^  fem.;  in  the  nouns  j^SLo,  ]^Sd» 
Rem. — This  vowel  remains  unchanged  ;  a)  when  merely  a  formative 

letter,  without  a  vowel,  is  added  ;  e.g.  Q^4^  ixova  ^^^6^  ;  ^)  when 
a  syllable  is  added,  if  the  stem-syllable  remain  a  mixed  one  ;    e.  g. 

xOl^^O  from  ^o^^  ;  and  moreover  ;  c)  when  the  stem-syllable 
becomes  a  simple  one,  in  the  following  cases  ;  a)  in  the  second  form 
of  the  3  fem.plur.pret.and  2  fem.  plur.  imperat.;  /3)  where  inHebrew 

Daghesh  forte  stands ;  e.  g.  ^<11  emphatic  state    (SOik  (q^,  1723?)  ; 

7)in  words  ofDeclension  I.piasc.  (comp.  §  48.A).     In  ^o^  emphatic 

State  \\  iS;  ^Qji  emphatic  state  pOQa,  the  original  vowel  only 
reappears  (comp.  48.  A.  Decl.  IV). 

4.  Yowels  are  added ;   a)  with  1,  *j,  and  2^,    at  the  begin- 

nmg  of  words  ;  |  and  i^  usually  take  —  and  —  ;  e.g.    ^QO  | 

(imp.),  joii ;  but  «u  usually  takes  — ;  e.g.  JOLk ;  b)  of  two 

vacant  consonants  at  the  beginning  of  a  word, the  first  takes 

—  ;  e.  g.     (iV)«n  for  [>Vrf*^ ;    go  also  when  two  vacant 

consonants  m  the  middle  of  a  word  follow  —  ;  e.  g.   ji^j^'r^ 

for  1A>**^  ;    or  when  in  Hebrew,    the  first  has   Daghesh 

forte  ;  e.  g.    U^J^for  l^'ryiV  from   ^in^i^  ;    or  finally  when 

three  vacant  consonants  would  come  together  in  the  middle 

of  a  word  ;  e.  g.  Al^Z]  for  t^al].     This  assumed  vowel 

is  sometimes  —  ;  e.g.  AS^O  (pret.  Pe.)  from  xs.^^  ;  or  — 
before  ^    (v.  §  13.3),    excepting  in  the  emphatic  state  of 

the   participle   fem.   pass,    of  Verbs  ]]   in   Pa.,  Aph.,  and 

Eshta.,  where  —  is  added  to  distinguish  it  from  the.^active 
participle  (comp.  §  48.  B.  Decl.IV.  Eem.).  Finally  Q  is  as- 
sumed in  the  emphatic  stats  sing,    of  some  words ;    e.  g. 

VAloaSD  from  13aSD  for  lAlsiSo ;  c)  a  vowel  is  assumed 
with  Q  between  two  vacant  consonants  :  this  vowel  is  _!. 
when  it  stands  at  the  beginning  of  a  mixed  syllable  ;    e.  g. 


CHANGES  IN  THE  VOWELS.  43 

.qdZo,-m  ;  but  —  when  it  stands  in  a  simple  syllable ;  e.  g. 

UOpM  .  d)  The  assumption  of  a  vowel  is  arbitrary,  when 
there  are  two  vacant  consonants,  of  which  the  first  can  be 
attached  to  the  preceding,  and  the  second  to  the  following 

syllable  ;  e.  g.  "^wwOjib  and  ]A>.Q,iD;  if  the  second  consonant 

be  ],  —  must  be  assumed,  for  a.,  Q  and  ]  cannot  stand 
without  a  vowel  between  two  consonants. 


PAET  SECOND. 


ETYMOLOGY,    OR,   PARTS   OF   SPEECH. 


CHAPTER  i. 


PRONOUNS. 


§  16.  Personal  and  Possessive  Pronount. 

The  Personal  Pronouns  are  divided  into  two  classes  : 
Separate  Pronouns^  which  stand  as  separate  words,  and 
mark  the  nominative  case  ;  and  Svjjixes^  consisting  of 
syllables  formed  from  the  separate  pronouns,  which  are 
appended  to  other  parts  of  speech ;  appended  to  Yerbs,  they 
mark  the  accusative ;  appended  to  nouns,  the  possessive 
pronoun,  or  the  relation  of  the  genitive ;  and,  with  preposi- 
tions, they  form  the  remaining  cases. 


TABLE  OF  PRONOUNS  AND  SUFFIXES. 


45 


TABLE  OF  PRONOUNS  AND  SUFFIXES. 


SEPARATE. 

SUFFIXED  TO  VERBS. 

SUFFIXED  TO  NOUNS. 

6. 

c. 

In  Sing. 

In  Plural. 

Sing. 

1.        2 

1 

1  c. 

m 

7                     7      ! 

1 

•  A     .1 

^ 

^' 

2  m. 

LA' 

* 

P 
>*- 

7 

2  f . 

^AjT 

.jSI^          j     *u^ 

0 

^ 

7 

3  m. 

f      OCT 

Ol- 

r           .  ! 
«^01CLb.      t^Ol 

p 

«-kOLki 

01- 

7 

«^01Q 

^      OOI 

•uOIQiA. 

«^01Q 

3  f. 

waGI 

I 

01 

r     .     I 
OU» 

OU.^ 

di 

* 

.  p 
01 

OVi. 

Plur. 

1   c. 

^ 

.  ^  u 

p 

V 

^ 
^ 

7 

2  m. 

^oi\jT 

^a^            * 

v^' 

^on 

.QOjI 

2  f. 

3  m. 

^a       J     * 

-1*  p 

-ft 

•X        7 

•  OOIa. 

SEPARATE    FROM    THE    V 

ERB. 

3  f. 



^r 

^(Jl 

i 

-"         7 

— &Ota. 

J 

46   KEMARKS  AND  EXPLANATIONS  CONCEKInING  THE  TABLE. 

Remarks  and  Explanations  concerning  the  Table 

I.     T/!.e  Personal  Pronoun. 

The  second  and  third  persons  have  two  genders,  while  the 
first  person  is  of  the  common  gender.  The  fem.  of  the  2 
sing,,   is  denoted  by   ^^  appended  to   the  masc.     In  the  3 

sing.  001  masc.  and  w»ai  fem.,   are  used  rather  in  a  demon- 

strati ve  sense,  while  001  masc.  and  *a01  fem.,  are  used  in 
connection  with  adjectives  and  participles  rather  to  designate 
the  present  tense.  And  so  in  the  plur.,  the  first  forms  given 
above  are  used  rather  substantively  as  nominatives,  and  the 
second  as  accusatives  (comp.  §  36).  Concerning  Linea  oc- 
cultans  under  ]  and  01  of  the  1  and  3  sing.,  see  §  12.1. 

II.     Suffix   Pronouns. 

A.     Suffixes    of   the  Verb. 

In  the  sufiixes,  or  abbreviated  forms  of  the  separate  pro- 
nouns, an  ancient  obsolete  form  whose  characteristic  was 
not  L  but  O,  lies  at  the  basis  of  the  2  sing,  and  plur.  (comp. 
Gesen.  Lehrgeb.  203). 

Of  the  suffixes  to  verbs,  given  in  the  Table,  those  marked 
«,  fall  into  two  classes  ;  the  first  of  which  are  attached  to  con- 
sonants (with  the  exception  of  ^  )  in  the  forms  of  the  regular 

verb  ;  and  the  second  mainly  to  the  same  forms  of  Yerbs  ]3, 
and  in  part  to  the  imperat.  and  fat.  of  the  regular  verb. 
The  forms  placed  between  1  and  2,  are  common  to  both. 

The  suffixes  marked  h  are  appended  to  forms  with  Q  and 
•.x,  which  then  quiesce  in  _1  and  _i.  Where  this  form  is 
wanting  under  h  it  is  comprehended  under  a.  Finally  the 
suffixes  under  c  are  attached  to  the  forms  with  ^,  and  also  to 
the  t>  sing.  masc.  and  3  plur.  fem.  pret.  The  forms  wanting 
under  c  are  comprised  under  a.  On  their  mode  of  union, 
comp.  §§36,  and  37,  and  the  accompanying  Tables. 

B.     Suffixes  of  Nouns   or  Possessive  Pronouns. 

The  suffixes  of  the  noun  (possessive  pronouns)  are  attached, 
to  the  emphatic  state  (§  45,)  with  the 


SUFFIXES  TO   PAETICLES.  47 

falling  away,  of  V- ;  e.g.  *A^  ,  empliatic  state  1raS>^, 
with  suff.  « i  n\V)>  In  the  plural  they  coalesce  with  the  end 
ing  of  the  construct  state  wi.,  so  that  they  may  be  considered 
as  attached  to  the  final  consonant  of  the  noun ;  e.g.  construct 
state  « I  n\V^,  with  suff.  y  i  n  Vo»  Only  in  the  3  sing.  masc. 
does  *A  pass  into  Q,  and  in  the  3  sing.  fern.  _L  is  the  union 
vowel.  In  the  noun  fern,  the  suffix  with  a  union  vowel  is 
attached  to  the  emphatic  state,  with  the  falling  away  of 
V— ,  e.  g.  CfiALoAo  from  emphatic  state  IALoAo*  In 
the  remaining  persons  (1  sing.  2  and  3  plur.)  suffixes  sing, 
are  attached  to  the  construct  state  (v.  §46.  2);  e.  g. 
^Al^oAii  from  the  construct  state  Z^oAo,  plur.  ^j^ALoAid 
from  construct  state  A^oAo* 

Kem. — For  the  complete  union  of  nouns  and  suffixes,  compare 
§§  46—48,  and  the  accompanying  Tables. 

Besides,  the  possessive  pronoun  may  be  expressed  in  a 
separate  form  jfrom  the  noun,  by  means  of  some  form  of  ^iui? 
(from  J  =  -I'jjJi^  chald.  i^   and  ^  )  with  a  suffix,  thus  ; 

Plural.  Singular. 


1.  ^~^?  ^^^** 

I  HiN  i>  ^Q^\i>    your. 


X 


.  >Ni>  my. 


.3.  ^Oll^>  ^OOI^J    their.  \  GlSa)  her.  OlK*>    his. 

Rem. — This  form,  which  corresponds  with  the  German  der  meinige 
(mine)etc.  occurrinjr  after  a  suffix  to  the  noun,  indicates  an  emphasis  ; 
e.  g.  jA^J  yii,>V)\2o,  hut  thy  scholars.  Sometimes  it  signifies 
relating  to;  e.  g.  ^0^\i>  to  us. 


C.     Suffixes   to   Particles. 


The  Prepositions^  which  were   in  part   originally   nouns, 
*ake  suffixes  sing,  and  plur.     Singular  suffixes   are  attached 


4:3  OTHER  PRONOUNS. 

to  JOa  in,  ^  the  sign  of  the  dative,  io^  to,  ^io  from^ 
>Ams  and  hta  after,  ^o^ricQ^  towards,  against,  comp.  §  15. 
2.  Plural  suffixes  are  attached  to  >Q»»\n  aside,  only  , 
iS\o  without,  ipM  or  ^Sr^  about,  JZiLj^for,  ^^  over,  jK 
or  p*.  towards^  «/^<?^,  ^r^  before,  Lqj^L  (Aa-iaZ  before 
nouns)  wno?er.  The  suffix  plural  fern,  occurs  with  ^i^i 
on  account  of ;  e.  g.  ^^A-lu^^  i  with  both  plural  suffixes 
and  ALa^  between. 


Rem. — For  the  complete  union  with  suffixes,  compare  the  Tabic 
belonging  to  §  52. 


§  17.    Other  Pronouns. 

1.  The  Demonstrative  Pronoun  is  declined  as  follows  : 

Plural.  Singular. 

F.        C.        M.  F.  M. 

^01^  Uhese.  (V,(31)  P^'*  iGoi   ['^'''• 

IPC 
>01  is  united  with  the 

•X  X  7    0 

personal  pronoun  3  sing.  masc.  001  and  fern.  *ji01,  forming  QJOl  and 
JOI*  Sometimes  OOl  and  ^0\  precede  ;  e.g.  pOl  OCl  just  this, 
(jOl  adjust  this.     The  Chaldee  ,^iN»|    is  only  used  in  compari- 
sons ;  e.  g.  ^^iNi]  ^i5',  or  ^^iNoi  ^\}  such. 

2.  The  Relative  for  all  numbers  and  genders  is  j,  who, 
which,  that,  and  with  the  pronouns  ^-So  c.  Ji-»1  m.  |r*l  /  ^i  ^O 
pi.  com.  preceding,  it  becomes  interrogative. 

Rem. —  p-il  having  a  relative  signification  with  >  following  it,  is 
an  exception  to  the  general  rule. 

3.  The  Interrogative  ;  a)  for  persons  of  both  genders  and 
numbers  is  ^iD  ivho.      It  unites  with   001  following,  and 


niE   VERB GENERAL   VIEW.  49 

forms  Ql2iO  and  M-i|  masc.  whof  \rA  fern,  whof  V)  (io  and 

^Syb  wliat^  refer  to  things  (  U^D,  tOLo  ) ;  c)  yjk\%\  refers  to 
both  persons  and  things. 

4.  The  Beoiprocal  and  Reflexive  Pronouns   are   formed 
partly  by  passives  (§  21.  2.  §  22.  2.  §  24.  2),  or  by  the  noims 

\m2i^    soul^   and    ]SDQir>  person^  with   suffixes    appended 
(comp.  the  Syntax). 


CHAPTER  II. 


THE   VERB. 

§  18.  General  View. 

1.  The  Yerb  is,  as  in  Hebrew,  the  most  important  of  the 
parts  of  speech,  since  it  lies  at  the  basis  of  the  formation  of 
the  others.  Yerbs  may  be  divided  into  the  three  following 
classes,  in  so  far  as  new  verbal  forms  are  derived  from  them 
in  accordance  with  definite  laws,  or  as   a  noun  is  to  be 

considered   as   their  stem:    a)   Primitives \   e.  g.  J^to  to 

write^  ^J>4^  to  hill ;  h)  Verbal  Derivatives  {Conjugations) ; 

e.  g.  *Djl  to  justify^  from  *jDj1  ;  c)  Denominatives^  subsequent 

formations  from  nouns  ;  e.  g.  ;jcai  to  tithe^  from  ;fl£ll  ten  ; 

7         «k7  «0  '^ 

%ja.^f  to  celebrate  Easter^  from  f^.^  Easter. 

2.  The  Stem-form  in  the  3  sing.  masc.  pret.  consists 
usually  of  three  radicals  (verbum  triliterum),  and  is  pronoun- 
ced as  a  monosyllable,  by  the  help  of  —  placed  over  the 

middle  radical  in  transitive,  and  —  in  intransitive  verbs. 

3.  From  this  are  formed  the  Derivatives  or  Conjugations, 
which  agree  closely  with  the  ground-form  in  the  inflection 
of  persons,  and  the  principal  characteristics  of  mood  and 
tense.  Modern  grammarians  have  added  a  third  conjugation, 
Shaphel,  to  the  two  originally  derived  from  the  ground-form. 

The  passive  is  formed  by  prefixing  2^,  and  has  not  only  a 
passive  but  also  a  reciprocal  and  reflexive  signification. 


50  THE     REGULAR    VERB. 

The  Conjugations   are   as  follows  ; 

Active.  Passive. 

1.  Peal  ^O     to  kill  ;*  Ethpeel  ^^s^Zf. 

2.  Pael  ^^4^     to  murder  ;  Ethpaal  Vy^^Z]^ 

3.  Aphel  ^4^1  to  cause  to  kill  ;          Ethtaphal  ^\4^^^f» 
4  Shaphel  ^\^£l»  to  cause  to  kill   (mr^)  Eshtaplial  ^4^Aa1. 

Rem. — x\ll  verbs  do  not  have  the  whole  of  the  conjugations ;  and 
wherePael  and  Aphel  are  found  together,  there  is  usually  a  difference 

7    7  ^        l' 

in  their  signification ;  e.  g.  ^^^  to  honor,  JO0(  to  be  burdensome. 

4.  The  Syriac,  like  the  other  Semitic  dialects,  has  a  Pre- 
terit and  Future.  It  has,  moreover,  an  Imperative  in  the 
passive,  and  two  Participles,  an  active  and  a  passive,  in  the 
active.  The  Hebrew  Infinitive  absolute  and  Infinitive  con- 
struct are  in  Sjriac  united  in  one  form  (v.  §  19. B. 8). 

RexM, — The  other  relations  of  time  are  supplied  in  the  following 
manner  ;  the  Present  is  expressed  by  the  participle  with  the  personal 

pronoun  following;  the  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  by    (OCTI  (  J^^in)' 

T    T 

the  former  joined  with  the  participle,  the  latter  with  the  preterite. 
The  Optative  and  Subjunctive^  are  contained  in  the  future,  to  de- 
note which  more  explicitly,  | OCT  is  also  frequently  used  (v.Syntax). 

5.  Verbs,  finally,  are  divided  into  two  principal  classes. 
Regular  and  Irregular.  In  regular  verbs  the  radical  letters 
remain  unchanged,  while  in  irregular  verbs,  one  of  the  rad- 
icals either  falls  away  {Defective  Verbs),  or  quiesces  {Quies- 
cent Verbs)  V.  §  27. 

1.    EEGULAR  VERBS. 

§  19.     The  Inflection  of  Regular  Verbs  in  General, 
The  formation  of  Verbs,   in  respect  to  person,  tense,   and 
mood  is  effected,   in  general,    by  uniform  laws.     The  irre- 
gular verbs  are  formed  in  a  different  manner,  in  particular 

♦Literally,  he  killed,  etc.  The  infinitive  being  considered  in  English  the 
ground-form  of  the  verb,  and  for  the  sake  of  brevity,  is  uniformly  used  to 
represent  the  Syriac  ground  form  3  masc.  sing. — Tr. 


KEGULAR    VERBS.  51 

cases  only,  according  to  their  special  laws.  It  will  therefore 
be  most  convenient  to  treat,  under  the  regular  verb,  of  what- 
ever belongs  to  the  universal  analogy  of  the  verb. 

In  the  following  Tables  of  the  Inflection  of  Regular  and 
Irregular  Yein^s,  the  following  signs  are  used :  The  radical 
letters  are  denoted  by  *.  The  vowels  which  stand  imme- 
diately over  the  *,  belong  to  the  inflection  of  transitive 
verbs ;    and   those   vowels   which   are   separated   from   the 

*  by belong  to  intransitive  or  guttural  verbs,  or  denote 

other  forms  in  equal  use.     Radical  letters  which  have  fallen 
away,  are  denoted  in  the  Table  of  Irregular  Yerbs,  §  27  by 
° .     Those  which  take  their  place,  stand  over  this  sign. 


52 


TABLE   OF   PERSONAL   INFLECTIONS. 


O 


S 

Ph 


o 

O 
H 


1 

1 

1 

Singular.        • 

s 

CO 

■5f 

■5t 

CO 

* 

f     ■}«■ 

•X- 
1 

* 
^    *     :     f 
* 

*    * 
* 

* 

* 

* 

*     : 

* 

H      * 

* 

4  0        '• 

* 
1 

T— 1 

* 

* 

CO 

I*  i  u  T  a  I. 

* 
CI 

1 

* 

* 

.0^ 

CO 

1 

* 
* 

2 

* 

^d     * 

* 

* 

* 

* 

TH               *                ^ 

'1. 

^  o 

TABLE  OF  THE  TEMPORAL  INFLECTION  OF  REGULAR  VERBS.  53 


O 

o 

o 

H 
Q 


O 
H 


O 


^ 

1 
ti, 

i 

1 

i 

Particip. 
Pass. 

1 

* 

* 

* 

*    : 
<d     : 

* 

,51 

f     *          . 
*  ^—1 

S  ^ 

1 

f       * 

* 
* 

'1 

f       # 

o 

51 
^d 

51 

1^ 

ft.   # 

* 

'1 

* 
^d 

'1 

i 

* 
* 

* 

*3 

^51 

c  * 

* 

^d 

^51 

* 

*        : 

^51 

*        : 

} 

■H- 
■5<- 

'■3 

2 

* 

* 

^d 

►< 

§■ 
^ 

•X- 

•x- 

1 

c 

l-H 

^d 

f    -X- 

>— 

■X- 
«^   -x- 
•X-  ^    : 

i 

•x- 

•5f 

2 

'1 
^d 

54:  PERSONAL     INFLECTIONS. 

A.     Personal  Inflections  (comp.  Table  1). 

The  inflection  of  persons  is  found  in  its  most  simple  form 
in  the  preterit  and  imperative,  where  formative  syllables 
are  appended  only  to  the  stem  {Afformatives).  In  the  future 
the  form  is  more  complex,  additions  being  received  at  the 
beginning  {Preformatlves)^  and  at  the  end.  The  inflection 
is   as  follows  ; 

In  the  3  sing.  pret.  the  simple  verbal  stem  suffices  for  the 
masc;  but  in  the  fem.,  2,  preceded  by  JL  (==  X]~t)i  is  appen- 
ded and  considered  as  a  sign  of  that  gender.  The  3  plur., 
which  has  a  two-fold  gender,  is  distinguished  in  the  masc. 
by  the  addition  of  the  plural-sign  Q,  from  which  the  fem. 
in  its  simple  form  is  distinguished  only  by  a  silent  ^  instead 
of  Q*  In  the  same  person  of  the  fat.  the  inquiry  into  the 
origin  of  the  preformative  J  in  the  sing.  masc.  and  the  plur. 
masc.  and  fem.,  is  a  difficult  one.  The  opinion  that  the  J 
had  its  origin  in  tji  is  opposed  by  the  fact  that  among  the 
Zabians  this  preformative  exists,  while  there  is  no  similarity 
between  those  two  letters.     More  consideration  is  probably 

due  to  the  derivation  from  poi  and  ^QJOl  (comp.  §  17).  In 
the  plur.,  the  masc,  in  addition  to  the  preformative  J,  is 
distinguished  as  in  the  pret.,  by  the  plural-sign  Q  with  ^  pa- 
ragogic,  which  causes  the  vowel  of  the  last  radical  syllable 
to  fall  away.  And  thus  the  ^^  in  the  fem.  reminds  one  of 
the  paragogic  final  syllable  }-l!D  ii^  Hebrew.    The  abbreviated 

form  of  the  personal  pronoun  evidently  appears  in  the  2 
sing,  and  plur.     Thus   in  the   pret.  sing.,  2  masc.   and  ^Z 

fem.  are  related   to  Ai1  masc.  and  *^Li\  fem.,    as  fOZ  masc. 

and  ^Z  fem.  are  to  tOAj |  masc.  and  ^Aj]  fem.  in  the  plur. 

The  same  is  true  of  the  preformative  Z  in  the  same  person 
of  the  fut.  sing,  and  plur.  where  the  fem.  sing.,  in  order  to 
designate  the  gender,  takes  .^  final  and  ^  paragogic,  with  a 
like  influence  upon  the  vowel  of  the  preceding  radical 
syllable.  In  the  plur.  the  2  pers.  shares  with  the  3  pers., 
this  same  character  at  the  end.  In  the  1  sing.  pret.  the  ori- 
ginal form  of  the  Z  with  _1  =  i^   preceding,  has  not  been 

shown.     But  in  the  plur.  ^  and  ^J,   as  well  as  f  before  the 


INFLECTION  OF  THE  TENSES  AND  MOODS.  55 

1  sing,  and  J  before  the  1  plur.  fut.  refer  us  the  more  defi- 
nitely back  to  \A  and  ^j^*  Here  too  it  should  be  noticed 
that  the  1  plur.  fut.  is  distinguished  from  the  3  sing.  masc. 
which  has  the  same  form,  by  Ribui. 

The  preformatives  of  the  fut.  uniformly  take  —  except  m 
Pael  and  Shaphel,  where  (with  the  exception  of  the  1.  sing.) 

they  are  vacant,  and  in  Aphel,  where  they  take  — ♦ 

The  imperative  coincides  with  the  future  in  respect  to 
formatives  at  the  end,  except  that  the  paragogic  ^  in  the  2 
sing.  fem.  and  2  plur.  masc.  falls  away,  the  former  person 
ending  in  the  feminine  sign  ^,  and  the  latter  in  the  plural 

sign  Q  .     In  both  cases  in  Peal,  Q  is  retained  as  the  vowel 

of  the  radical  syllable.  Finally  the  fem.  plur.  ends  with  ^ 
and  the  vowel  of  the  final  syllable  is  retained. 

B.  Inflection  of  the  Tenses  and  Moods  {pomp.  Table  11). 

1.  With  the  preterit  (the  characteristics  of  which  are 
more  specifically  given  in  Table  11.  and  the  section  following), 
the  imperative  most  nearly  coincides.  The  imperat.  Peal 
receives,  in  Yerbs  Med.  A,  between  the  second  and  third 

radicals,  Q  quiescing  in  — ;  but  in  Yerbs  Med.  E.  and  3 

y 

Gutt.  the  middle  radical  takes  — ♦  All  the  remaining 
imperatives  are  like  preterits,  except  that  in  Ethpe.  and 
Ethpa.,   Linea   occultans   stands  under  the  middle  radical 

7 

with  —  preceding. 

Rem. — The  same  holds  good  in  respect  to  the  imperatives  Ethta. 
and  Eshta.,  if  Linea  occultans  be  admitted  in  them 

2.  The  future  is  formed  from  the  imperative  by  prefixing 
J»     In  Aphel  the  characteristic  falls  away,  and  in  passives 

1  of  the  formative  syllable  2]  .  In  Ethpe.  and  Ethpa.  after 
the  rejection  of  Linea  occultans,  the  vowels  of  the  preterite 
re-appear. 

3.  The  infinitives  (of  which  the  simple  form  denotes  the 
gerund  in  do  or  the  absolute  state,  but  with  L  prefixed  de- 
notes the  construct  state)  are  formed  from  the  preterites  by 
prefixing  So*     They  end  (excepting  in  the  Peal,  where  they 

coincide  precisely  with  the  preterit)    in  Q,  and  in  the  apoco- 


66  THE  GROUND  FORM  PEAL. 

pate  feminine  form,  in  La ,    changing  the  vowel  of  the  last 
syllable  of  the  preterit    into  — ♦ 

4.  The  participles  are  formed  from  the  preterit  as  fol- 
lows ; — in  peal,  active  form,  the  first  radical  takes  -^,  and 
the  second  JL  ;  in  the  passive  form  jl_I_  is  inserted  between 
the  last  two  radicals.  In  the  other  conjugations  Id  is  pre- 
fixed, and  JL,  in  the  second  syllable  of  the  active  form,  is 
changed,  in  passives,  into  JL*  But  this  distinction  appears 
only  in  the  absolute  state  of  the  masc,  and  even  here  is  lost 
in  verbs  3  Gutt.,  j,  and  01,  the  active  form  of  which  like- 
wise takes  _L* 

5.  The  preformatives  of  the  fut.,  infin.,  and  part.,  mostly 
take  JL ;  but  in  Aphel  they  take  _L,  rejecting  the  1  accor- 
ding to  No.  2  ;  and  in  Pael  and  Shaphel  they  are  without 
a  vowel. 

Rem. — For  the  reciprocal  use  of  these  twoTahles,  which  suffice  for 
the  complete  formation  of  the  regular  verb,  it  is  to  be  remarked  ; 
that  Table  I.  contains  the  personal  inflection  of  Peal.  The  forms  in 
Table  II.  in  the  inflection  according  to  Table  L,  retain  their  charac- 
teristic vowels,  and  merely  take  from  Table  I.  the  affbrmatives  with 
the  vowels  thereto  belonging.  Where,  in  pret.  Peal,  the  vowel  of  the 
stem  falls  away,  the  remaining  preterits  also  lose  the  vowel  of  the 
last  radical  syllable  ;  but  Ethpe.  takes  _!.  over  the  first  radical, where 
this   has   _L   in   Peal.*     In  the  fut.  the  vowel  of  the  last  radical 

syllable  is  uniformly  lost  where  Q  falls  away  in  Peal,  except  that  in 

this  case  also  in  Ethpe.the  first  radical  takes  _!_♦  In  imperatives  the 

*• . 

vowel  of  the  last  radical  syllable  is  retained,  as  Q  is  retained  in  the 

imperat.   Peal. 


§  20. 

A.     The    ground    form   Peal  —  its   Formation   and 

Signification. 

1.  The  usual  form  of  Peal  is  ^^4^  {transitive  verb  med.  A), 
Besides  this  the  form  with   Ji   {med.  E)    is  always  used 

*The  inflection  of  the  different  persons  iu  the  {)reterit     should  be  noticed 
in  order  to  perceive  the  verification  of  this  remark.     Tu. 


ITS   FORMATION  AND   SIGNIFICATION.  57 

for  intransitives  ;  e.  g.  »oAa  to  sit,  JD'fO  to  be  near.     To  this 

class  also  belong  Verbs  ]l,    which,  throw  back  —  upon  the 

_  i» 
first  radical ;  e.  g.  jOt\o  to  feel  pain^  or  derivatives  of  Hebrew 

Verbs  ^^  ;  Ci^g.  *o]^  =  ^-jt:-  ^ne  form  Med.  O.  still  ap- 
pears in  the  Verb  joao  to  shudder. 

Rem. — With  the  inflection  of  Verbs  Med. A.  agree  those  with  3  rad. 
01 ;  e.  g.  01SQ»  to  name,  OlliZ  to  admire.  Verbs  Med.  E.  retain 
— ,  when  in  Verbs  Med.  A.  —  stands  in  the  radical  syllable.  In 
respect  to  the  forms  of  the  3  plur.  fern.  pret.  ■  iNf)^,  ^  '  ^^*^  and 
^X^O  adduced  bj  Buxtorf,  the  first  is  found  only  in  Verbs  |J  and 
the  second  seems  to  have  originated  from  crasis  with  the  affix  ^01* 
There  are  instances  to  be  found,  though  rare,  in  which  —  is  placed 
over  the  third  radical  in  the  1  plur.  ^^4^*  The  apocopate  form  of 
the  infinitive  with  Q  is  also  sometimes  found  in  Peal  ;  e.g.  Luke  ix. 

•X       7  *      • 

33.  a»^£iSQ^*  In  the  imperat.plur.masc.  with  ^  paragogic,  Q  final 
quiesces  in  _  ;  e.g.  tO^Q^^*  Besides  the  2  plur.fem.with  — x,  Amira 
(p.  300)  adduces  another  form, viz :  t  j>  \q^»  The  imperat.ofVerbs 
Med.  E.takes  —  instead  of  Q  ;  though  the  transitive  form  with  Q  is 
also  found ;  e.g.  QJ^O'^Q  from  •iD;iD^  Sometimes  another  form  with 
—  occurs  ;  e.  g.  Rom.  xiii.  3.  r^^*  More  rarely  the  vowel  of  the 
imperat.  differs  from  that  of  the  fut.  as  in  the  Verb  ^ll,  fut.  ^1  p, 
imperat.^1*  Not  only  the  imperat.  but  the  fut.  of  Verbs  Med.E.  and 

7  7  •»> 

of  those  having  the  third  rad.  a  guttural,  take  — ;  e.g.  ;K»m*  In  the 
fut.  3  sing.  fem.  the  form  with  t-i   attached  is  more  frequent.     Also 

a  form  of  the  fut.   with  —  ;    e.  g.    -^*^^'  together  with  ««n\n 

Instead  of  the  part.  act.  ^^v^jO,  the  participial  noun  of  the  form^\4^, 

emphatic  state  ij-4^)  is  often  used.     In  the  part.  act.  the  emphatic 

state  masc.  and  the  absol.  fem.  are  alike  ;  e.  g.   1J-4^»    The  active 

form  ^9,ikM  (Mark  xiv.  67),  in  immediate  connection  with  ^^^ 
(verse  54),  is  perhaps  to  be  regarded  as  an  error  iii  transcribing.  The 
passive  form  is  always  fully  written  ;    in  intransitive  verbs,   the  first 

radical  sometimes  takes  — ♦  Passsive  intransitives  occasionally  occur  in 


58  DERIVATIVE  CONJUGATIONS. 

an  active  sense,  sometimes  derived  from  transitives  ;  e.  g.     ^  >r^^ 
hearing^    f^.j>*\  holding. 

To  the  inflection  of  the  participle  belongs  also  the  idiom 
by  which  the  present  tense  is  expressed  by  a'^reviated  per- 
sonal pronouns,  appended,  like  afformatives^  to  the  partici- 
ple. But  this  formation  occurs  only  in  the  2  sing,  and  the 
1  and  2.  plur.  masc.  and  fem.,  and  is  as  follows  : 

Participle  Passive.  Participle  Active. 


COMM. 


MASC. 


wiZ2^'  Al4^  2  Sing. 

^ixX4^  1  Plur. 

^b!L^         ^oAjlS^  2  Plur 


2.  From  the  preceding  remarks  it  appears  that  the  signifi 
cation  of  Peal  may  be  transitive  or  intransitive.  Sometimes 
we  find  both  forms  in  the  same  verb.     In  some  cases  there 

is  no  difference  of  signification ;    e.  g.    »fns\  and  «fft\\   to 
chew ;  and  in  other  cases  there  is  a  difference  in  signification; 

e.g.  ^v-^  to  divide^  *\V^^  ^^  ^^  divided. 


B.     Derivative    Conjugations. 

§  21.    Ethpeel. 
1.  The  characteristic  of  this  conjugation,   as  in  the  other 

passives,  is  the  formative  syllable  L\  and  the  vowel  —  or  in 
Verbs  8  Ead.  Gutt.  _L,  in  the  last  syllable  (vid.  Amira, 
p.  278).  The  passive  conjugations  are  distinguished  from 
each  other  generally  by  the  vowels  over  the  radical  letters, 
or  by  the  addition  of  2  {Eihta.)  or  by  the  insertion  of  • 
{Eshta.). 

Rem. — Upon  the  transposition  of  the  sibilants  with  Z  see  §  12.  2. 
The  first  radical  takes  _L  in  the  3  sing.  fem.  and  1  sing,  pret.,  in  all 
of  the  imperat.,  in  the  2  sing.  fem.  and  2  and  3  plur.  masc.  and  fem. 


DERIVATIVE      CONJUGATIONS.  59 

of  the  future,  and  finally  in  the  part,    excepting   the  absolute  state 

masc.     According  to  others  —  is  used,    but  only  in  Verbs   t^  even 

when  1  falls  away  ;  e.  g.  Acts.  xx.  27.  A^l£«V;  tSlmf*  This 
usage  however  is  confirmed  neither  by  examples  nor  by  Amira.  The 
3  sing.  fem.  and  1  sing.  pret.  the  imperatives,  2  sing.  fern,  and  2  and 
3  plur.  masc.  and  fem.  of  the  fut.  and  the  part,  excepting  the  absolute 
masc.  cannot  be  distinguished,  according  to  Lud.  de  Dieu  p.  2lY, 
from  the  same  persons  of  Ethpa.  excepting  when  the  first  radical  is 
AH  aspirate,  which,  in  Ethpa.  becomes  hardened.     The  passive  form 

^"i^^Z*!  is  not  mentioned  by  Amira.     In  the  Verb  «m^^,  in  Ethpe., 

w>.-  is  inserted  between  the  two  final  radical  letters.     The  infinitive 

however  is  excepted ;    e.g.  pret.  jn^Sl^^l  j  infinit.  Offi^^ASb* 

2.  The  signification  of  Ethpe.  is  ;    o)  passive  of  Peal ;   e.g. 

^\4^2f ;     h)  reflexive ;  e.  g.    «JQ«lmZ1   to  reflect  hy  or  upon 

ones  self;     c)  =  Peal  in  intransitive  verbs  ;  e.  g.   \iSi   and 

wxiaZl  to  return;     d)  sometimes  Ethpe,  is  passive  oi  Aph.  ; 

e.g.     5<l-..As|  to  be  embarrassed,  from  yi--w»(. 


§  22.     Pael  and  Ethpaal 

1.  Both  of  these  conjugations  are  characterized  by  _L  in 
the  penultimate,  and  _;;;_,  in  Pa.,  in  the  ultimate  syllable. 
The  vowel  is  changed  into  _1 ,  in  Yerbs  3  Ead.  Gutt.  or  j, 
as  it  is  in  the  passive.  The  preformative  1  of  the  1  sing.fut. 
Pa.  alone  takes  JL  (comp.  §  19.  A.  and  B.  5).  The  imperat. 
Ethpa.  with  Linea.  occultans  and  the  part.  fem.  Ethpa.  are 
like  the  same  forms  in  *Ethpe. 

Rem. — The  passive  form  ^i^4^Z|  does  not  occur  in  Amira.  It  is 
rejected  also  by  Buxtorf.     Amira  remarks,  p.  339,  that  in  ^Q^t^, 

y 

the  second  radical  takes  —  only  in  the  imperat.  (vid.  Matt.  ix.  2*7). 
Concerning  the  part.  act.  and  pass,  in  Pa.  vid.  §  19.  B.4.  The  form 
yj^'r^  (Mark.  x.  16  )  in  pret.  Pa.  must  be  considered  as  an  mcorrect 
mode  of  writing,  since  ^>n.»,f)  (verse  32)  is  a  participial  noun. 


60  APHEL    AND    ETHTAPIIAL. 

2.  The  signification  of  Pa.  is  ;  a)  causative ;  e.  g. 
^js*j  to  cause  to  he  afraid^  from  ^x»j  to  fear  ;  h)  intensive  ; 
e.g.  Mli^  to  overwhelm  from  M^4  ^  press;  c)  =  Pe.;  e.g.  .jQmJ 
and  *£lm^  to  kiss ;  d)  to  hold  forth^  to  declare  ;  e.  g.  *i^?i 
to  pronounce  just.  The  signification  of  Ethpa.  is  ;  a)  passive 
of  Pael  ;  e.  g.  ^^4^21  to  he  murdered ;  h)  reciprocal;  e.  g. 
i^yl]  to  wonder  within  one's  self;  c)  =  Peal ;  e.  g.  ^ZiDjL] 
to  he  made  to  hlush^  i.  e.  to  hlush  =  *£mJ» 


§  23.     Aphel  and  Ethtaphal, 

1.  Aphel  is  characterized  by  1  placed  before  the  stem, 
which  quiesces  in  _L»  After  the  preformatives  of  the  fut., 
infinit.  and  part.,  ]  falls  away,  and  its  vowel  falls  back  upon 
the  preformative.  JL  occurs  in  the  second  syllable,  and,  only 
in  Yerbs  8  Pad.  Gutt.  and  S ,  is  -L  found  in  that  syllable. 
In  the  passive,  to  compensate  for  the  loss  of  the  characteris- 
tic 1  of  Aph.,  L  mit  JL  is  inserted  between  the  stem  and  the 
formative  syllable  of  the  passive  I^*  The  final  radical  syll- 
able takes  —  ;  e.g.  ^\4^ZZ1* 

Rem. — The  characteristic  |    of  Aph.   is  retained  after  the  prefor- 

mative,  in  verbs,  which  lose  a  radical  letter  ;  e.g.  ^.^j^pD  from  ^.ja* 

Under  the  same  rule  should  be  placed  Verbs  \L\    e.  g.    »A!2 p   or 

^t^J*     But  the  Verbs  *m>iT|  to  he  able,  and  ^L»\  to  drink,   do 

not  belong  here,  since  _2^  already  re-appears  over  (♦  They  are  rather 

forms  of  Pe.  with  (  prosthetic,  as  is  also  shown  by  their  further  for- 

mation  ;  e.g.  fut.  t^jJUAJ,  infinit.  QuMJQmSD  (comp.  §  20.Rem.),  part. 

P.  '^^  ''^*,  and  the  passive  ^**oL»\*  In  respect  to  the  participles  of 

Aphel  the  same  rule  holds  good  as  in  §  22.1.  Rem.  compared  with 
§19.  B.  4.  Buxtorf  RTid  others  do  not  recognize  the  passive.  Lud. 
de  Dieu  p.  238,  approves  of  the  abridged  imperat.  with  Lin.  occult. 


SHAPHEL  AND  ESHTAPHAL.  61 

^iw4o^2)»     Later  Grammarians  however   doubt  the  correctness  of 
this  form  (Comp.  §  8.  Rem.). 

2.  The  signification  of  Aphel  is  ;  a)  causative  as  in  Pael ; 
e.  g.  ^Ljk\  to  bring  forward ;  and  then  it  frequently  takes 
two  accusatives  ;  e.  g.  ..ao!^  to  cause  to  put  on  (something 
upon  some  one) ;  h)  imperative  or  permissive ;  e.  g.  ^OOj*! 
to  suffer  to  mount  a  horse ;  c)  intransitive ;  e.  g.  ^^oaIoI  to  he 
weak ;  d)  =  Pael ;  e.  g.  ^^>* j  and  ^^I* jl  to  frighten.  The 
passive  has  either  the  passive  signification  of  Aphel  or  co- 
incides  with  Pe.;  e.g.  *oAji  to  dwell,  *qZoZZ|  to  keep  house. 


%  24.     Shaphel  and  Eshlaphal, 

1.  Shaphel  is  one  of  the  conjugations,  admitted  into  the 
paradigm  at  a  later  period  (§  18.  8).  Its  characteristic  is  m 
with  JL  prefixed  to  the  stem,  and  Jl  in  the  last  syllable.  In 
inflection  it  coincides  with  Aphel.  In  the  passive  (Eshta- 
phal)  occurs  the  transposition  of  m  and  L  and  »L  appears 
in  the  last  syllable.  The  preformative  of  Shaphel,  like  that 
of  Pael,  takes  JL  only  in  the  1  sing.  fut. 

Rem. — In  verbs  which  lose  a  radical  letter,  this  conjugation  some- 
times  furnishes  a  new  stem ;  e.  g.  *>OmA  to  he  black,  from  ^OmA, 
Shaph.  of  ^V>»i»  The  same  is  true  in  Eshtaphal.  Thus  JajOAs*! 
furnishes  the  new  quadriliteral  «u;.k»A»{« 

2.  The  signification  of  these  two  conjugations  is  similar  to 
that  of  Aph.  and  Ethtaphal.  Sliapliel  is,  in  the  examples 
still  extant;  a)  cav^sative ;  e.g.  ^yir*  to  let  fall-,  h)  intert,- 
sive  ;  e.  g.  «<^N»»»  to  exchange,  from  ^ZlLj^  to  change,  Eshta- 
phal has  sometimes  a  passive   and  sometimes   a  reciprocal 

signification  ;  or  it  forms  intransitives  ;  e.g.  ^..jAsI   to  err^ 

ijo  sin. 


62  OTHER  CONJUGATIONS   AND   QUADRILITERALS. 

§  25.  Conjugations  occasionally  used  and  Quadriliteral  Verbs. 
The  occasional  conjugations  (vid.  Agrell  in  Otiolis  Sjr.  p. 
28  sq.)  are  similar  to  Pa.  and  Aph.  and  take,  for  the  most 
part,  their  signification.  They  are  also  to  be  considered  as 
quadriliterals.  To  verbs,  which  take  the  initial,  prosthetic 
letters  So ,  CD ,  Z,  and  are. 

Is  7 

A.  similar  to  Apliel,  belong ;  a)  Maphel,  ,^nfnV)  to  make 
poor,  pass.  ^!MQSdZ(  to  become  poor ;  b)  Saphel,  *sai;flD  to 
permit  to  hapten  and  to  hasten  ===  •iiOlj]  ,  pass.  ^\^^AfiD]  to 
persecute ;  c)  Thaphel,  r^^O^Z  to  teach. 

Rem. — For  ^LGuCTI  (•jiA»|  vid.  §  23.  Rem.)  no  special  form  can 
be  assumed,  as  similai*examples  do  not  occur. 

B.  Similar  to  Pael  are  those  conjugations  which  insert 
JL,  Sq,  ;,  Q,  after  the  first  radical  viz.;  a)  Pauel  =  Poel, 
usually  transitive  ;  e.  g.  '>^y«  io  chew  the  cud,  pass.  jyQoL] 
to  become  divided  ;  b)  Paiel,  transitive  ;  e.  g.  f*^>fy>  to  suffer  ; 
c)  Pamel ;  e.g.  ^^fflV^.i»  to  remain  :  d)  Parel ;  ^yi^  to  dance, 
pass.  ^j;..Z]  to  be  cut  off. 

C.  Kot  very  diiferent  from  the  last  are  also  the  quadril- 
iteral verbs  with  prosthetic  •-»  and  final  ^,  viz.  ;  a)  Pali  = 
Pael ;  e.  g.  ^LmJ^  to  domesticate,  pass.  vaAjJDZ]  to  converse 
with  one  ;  b)  Palen,  ^^y  to  be  master,  pass,  ^a^)^  (  to  make 
one  a  master. 

D.  Here  belong  quadriliterals  with  a  radical  doubled  = 

f       y 

Pilel  and  Pilpel  ;  a)  Palel  =  Pael ;    e.  g.   ?r^^  to  reduce  to 

slavery  ;    b)  Pealel  with  its  pass.  ^\V>\mZ1  to  dream,   and 

finally;  c)  Palpel  (in  Yerbs  Ml);  e.  g.  ^ocoSqcd  to  heal,  pass. 

l^;ljZ1  to  be  broken. 

I^EM. — Those  verbs,  which  are  compounded  of  two  ground  forms, 

7  7..^  7  7 

also  belong  here ;  e.  g.  ;SSnfc»|  to  blush,  from  ^^ t  and  ;l # ♦     In 

quadriliterals  formed  from  the  Greek  (e.g.  »Q^Ao  to  elect  a  Bishop), 


VERBS  WITH   GUTTURALS.  68 

a  letter  of  the   ground  form  frequently  falls  n  way;  e.g. 
yt'rti^  ^^  appoint  as  Patriarch. 


§  26.   Verbs  with  Gutturals. 

Since  tlie  peculiarities  of  Guttural  Yerbs,  are  not  marked 

in  Syriac,  as  in  Hebrew,  eitber  by  Dagbesh  forte  or  Sbeva, 
the  irregularities  in  verbs  of  which  the  first  and  second  rad- 
icals are  gutturals  are  entirely  wanting  ;  and  those  only,  of 
which  the  third  radical  is  a  guttural  or  >,  deviate,  and  those 
in  but  very  few  cases  from  the  regular  verb,  in  connection 
with  which  these  deviations  have  already  been  cited.  (Con- 
cerning Yerbs  ]£,  K,  and  ]]"  compare  §g  28,  80,  82).  For 
more  convenient  reference,  these  cases  of  deviation  are  here 
brought  together.  These  verbs  take  ;  1)  inthefut.  and  im- 
perat.Peal,  —  instead  of  Q  ;  e.  g.,  fut.  jfMJ  ;  imperat.  Jf»]  2) 
in  like  manner  in  the  other  conjugations,  and  in  the  part, 
act.  Peal,  they  exchange  the  _2_  of  the  last  syllable  for  _L  ; 
e.  g.   part.  act.  Peal,  '^U    pret.   Ethpe.  ;Lo|Z|,    fut.  jSojAj; 

77,77,  ^77  ,"' 

Pa.  pret.  j,^,  fut.  j^aJ,  imperat.  >,»,  part. act.  &  pass.  Jr*^; 
Aph.   Pret.  ^>1,   fut.  ^is'^J,     imperat.  M»>|,   part.  act.  and 

7  7 

pass.   ^;Sd» 

Rem. — In  the  same  manner   in   Pa.  and  Ethpa.  are  formed   the 

following  ;  ^lo  to  console,  JiQ.^  ^^  ^^^h  11 1  ^^  de/ile,  and  1  fSM 
to  be  adorned   (comp.  §  13.  1.  Rem). 


II.    Irregular  Yerbs. 

§  27.      General    View. 

1.  Under  Irregular  Verbs,  are  to  be  comprehended,  those 

in  which  there  is  a  change  in  respect  to  one  of  the  three  letters 

of  the  ground  form.     Such  letter  either  quiesces  or/alb  avjay 

(Quiescent  aiid  Defective  Verbs).     A  verb   in  which  two   let- 


64  IRREGULAR    VERBS. 

ters  of  the  ground  form  are  changed  is  said  to  be  doubly  an- 
omalous  ( Verbum  dupliciter  imperfectum). 

2.  The  Quiescent  Verbs  are  the  following  ;  verbs  with  1. 
rad.  Olaph  (la),  ^oJDf;  1.  rad.  Jud  (^^.a),  y^;  med.rad.  Olaph 
(ll),  ^|i;  med.  rad. Vau  and  Jud  (Ol,^  ^o  (2>0QO),  A^; 
and  3  rad.  Olaph  (]])  U^  ♦ 

To  defective  verbs  belong  those  with  1.  rad.  Nun 
(-2));  e.g.  *Q2LJ,  and  med.  rad.  doubled  (Ml);  e.g.  *aDj» 

Rem. — Here,  and  frequently  in  subsequent  sections,  the  designa- 
tions of  classes  of  verbs  are  taken  from  the  position  of  the  radicals, 
of  the  Verb  ^*iA2)  (=  ^5?S),  by  which  the  variations  affecting  the 
radical  letters  of  irregular  verbs  are  kept  in  view. 


TABLE    OF    lEREG 


Verbs  11  ;  IJ^-  §  32. 

Yerbs  |1  ; 

Part.  Pe. 

1   Imperat.  Pa.    |      Fut.  Pe. 

Pret.  Pe. 

p 

*** 

Pret.  Aph.  |    Imp.   Pe.  j 

-n    p 
*** 

0     7 
*** 

] 

1. 

***i 

7 
*** 

Part.  P.  Pa.  |   Imperat.  Pe.   |   Intia.  Aph. 

Pret.  Ethpe. 

Part.  Pass. 

Imperat. 

^7     7 

*^x                       U-*-.          7 

**:zi 

3Pl.f.Fu.Pe.  1  2Pl.f.Imp.Pe.  |  3f.S.Pr.Pa.  | 

3  f.  S.  Pr.  Pe. 

2.A. 
a. 

b. 

Fut.Ethpa.  |Pr.  Ethpa.| 

•^-»•0                          .7-^       7 

7     7        * 

"Ji 

'JL* 

2S.f.Pr.Pa.  1 

2Pl.f.Pr.Pe.  |2m.S.Pr.Pe. 

1 S.  Pr.  Pe. 

Yerbs  Qland  tuJL; 

,-7                            -7 

ZoHc* 

Par.Act.Pe.  1    Pret.  Pa. 

.1. 

*    o* 

T>-»-7 

3Pl.m.Fu.Pe  1  2S.  f.  Fut.  Pa.  |  8  m.Pl.Pr.Pe. 

1  Sf.S.Pr.Pe. 

2.B. 

^o:;zi 

7 

o  *  * 

S.  A.  a. 

1 

1 

1 

! 

Pr.  Ethta.    |  2  S.m.Fut. 

*o*ZZ] 1 ^o^LL 

Part.  Pass.    |     Infinit. 

*o^2i) 

Yerbs  ^ ; 

Par.Act.Pe.  |  Pr. Ethta. 

^1, 

*  o  * 

^th] 

i 
1 

Pr.Ethpa.   |  Pret.  Pa.  | 

1 

1' 

*;:2j 

T>    7 

*** 

ULAR     VERBS .— Vid.  pp.  51,  63. 


^io*  § 

30.                    1                      Verbs  ]si 

;  ^1-  §  28.             i 

Fut.  Pe. 

1      Pret.  Pe.      |       |  Pret.  Ethpe.  |      Fut.  Pa.     | 

Imperat.  Pe.  |    Pret.  Pe.    | 

y  * 

*  *  *  J 

*** 

1. 

*  **  Z| 

■«         7 

• 

«.    7 

7  -n 
*  ** 

i. 

Future. 

1     Pr.  Ethpe.    |       |     Infin.  Pa.     |     Fut.  Pa.     |  (2m.Fu.Pe.)  |  l.S.Fut.Pe.  I     | 

1           ^     "       r 
2.      Q**oLO 

i>       7 

(*Q*oZ) 

7     I 

*Q*ol 

7       X 

2. 

Fut.  Pa. 

1      Pret.  Pa.     |       |    Pret.  Esht.    |  Pret.Shaph.  | 

Pret.  Ethtap.  |   Pret.Aph.  |     | 

•«  7 

•A. 

*      7 

**  * 

3. 

**0    A*( 

7 

:.*oZZl 

^0 

*  *  0  I 

-1 
3. 

:^,5»a 

^.  §  31. 

Verbs  .jlQ  ; 

riLT*     ^  29. 

• 

Part.  P.Pe. 

1     Pret.  Pe.      |          3f.  S.  Pr.  Pe.  |  Pret.  Ethpe.  |  Imperat.  Pe.  |    Pret.  Pe.   |     \ 

0 

1»          I-^ 

7    X 

*  ** 

*  *    * 
7 

1. 

Future. 

Pr.  Ethpe.    |       |  Imperat.  Pe.    |  1  S.  Fut.  Pe. 

Infin.  Pe.     |     Fut.  Pe. 

L 
2. 

*o*ZAj 

*o*2Zl 

2. 

S.  I. 

*  *  ol 

7I. 

Fut.  Aph. 

Pret.  Aph. 

Pret.  Esht. 

Pret.Shaph. 

i   Pret.  Ethta.  |  Pret.Aph. 

*  O  *  J 

3. 

**oA»l 

7O  7    -» 

**oZZ1 

.0, 

a 

jncon 

§  34. 

Verbs  ^  ;   * 

aaj*  §  33. 

Pret.  Aph. 

Pret.  Pe.     |  "     |     Fut.   Aph.     |   Pret.  Aph. 

1     Infin.  Pe.      |   Fut.  Pe.    | 

(*),.7 

*  *  1 

*  * 

1. 

■ft           7 

*    *    O  J 

.          .7 

*  *  o  I 

7          "R 

7 

Pr.Ethpe.  | 

Part.  P.Pe.    | 

***zi 

*  A   H«  H£ 

2. 

VERBS.  67 

A.    Quiescent  Verbs. 
§  28.      Verbs  1  rad.  Olaph  quiescent  (]2))  ^^io]  to  eat. 

The  following  are  the  irregularities  of  these  verbs. 

1.  In  the  Pret.  Peal,  where,  in  the  regular  verb,  the  fii'st 
radical  has  no  vowel,  I  takes  _L ,  but  in  the  imperat.  and 
part,  pass.,  it  takes  — ;  e.  g.  ^Qol ,  ^i^»^1»  If  the  preform- 
ative  or  characteristic. consonant  of  the  conjugation  be  with- 
out a  vowel,  the  vowel  of  1  falls  back  upon  it ;  e.  g.  fut. 
Pa.    ^|j;   pret.  Ethpe.  ^W* 

Rem. — In  the  fut.  and  infinit.Pe.  the  preforraative  takes  Jl,  in  the 
verbs  y^i;  V5^T,  Ui;^,  V^XMl  r*T-rvOIe.g.  ^Qb^^to^ 

But  —  is  used  in  the  verbs    ^X  ^ll"    ^^SlL",   ^X,    '^X  yT^X 

e.  g.  ^1j,  ;SDl!k)*     Both  of  these   forms   are  found   in  1Z1»     It 

should  further  be  remarked  that  the  first  class  of  verbs  mentioned 

above,  form  the  fut.  and  imperat.  Pe.  like  transitives  with  Q ,  excep- 
ting Verbs  3  rad.  Gutt.  or  >,  and  the  second  class  form  them  like 
inti-ansitives  with  _L»  Lud.  de  Dieu  (p.  26  ),  rightly  doubts  the 
correctness  of  the   double  form   of  the  infinit.  and  fut.  Pe.  with  JL 

and  _f.,  although  the  form  ^i|SD-^  is  found  in  I  Cor.  x.  27  ;  but 

the  fut.  of  it  is  not  found  with  Q»  Also  the  correctness  of  ^Q-ialZ 
in  1  Cor.  x.  28,  is   suspected.     The  forms  of  the   3  plur.  fem.  pret. 

«i\o|  and  ,^iN^|  are  not  approved.  The  vowel  —  is  sometimes 
found  in   the   part.  pass.  Pe.  of  the  regular  verb  (§20.1.Rem.).   In 

the  passives  Ethpe.  and  Ethpa.  of  the  Verb  fjaf,    ]  is  assimilated  to 

the  preceding  2;  e.  g.  ,jaZZ|*   This  formation  is  also  found  in  some 

other  verbs  varying   little  from  regular  verbs  ;    e.  g.   ^^ZZf    and 

"^XiX 

2.  The  radical  1  usually  falls  away  in  the  1  sing.  fut.  Pe.; 

e.  g.  \qd\  I  will  eat^  '^Xl^^iH  speak.  1  does  not  so  often 
fall  away  in  the  other  persons.  The  same  peculiarity  ex- 
ists in  the  infinit.  fut.  and  part.  Pa.,  and  the  vowel  is  thrown 

•back    upon    the    preformative  ;    e.   g.    *2LiJ   and   «2iL^* 


68  QUIESCENT  VERBS. 

Rem. — The  Verbs  ^1(  to  go  away  and  jZl  to  come^  lose  |  in  the 
imperat.,  and  form  ; 

^f,   oil,    ^f,   ^f 

^]2,  oZ,  -2,  XL 

3.  In  Aphel  and  Shaphel  with  their  passives,  1  is  chang- 
ed into  O,  and,    with   the   preceding   _L ,    forms  au ;  e.  g. 

Rem. — In  two  verbs  |  is  changed  into  i^,  viz :  1Z1 ,  Aph.  »-»Aa1, 
imperat.  iLif,  fut.  liJuJ  ,  infiait.  Oi^xSO ,  part.  IAaSd*  {^)  , 
Aph.  ^kI»C71  =  p)2J»5n  )•  For  this  reason  *Sl^\  and  «£Ubk  to 
learM,  are  sometimes  found  together. 


General  Remarks, 

The  Verb  ^'ij  (according,  to  §  12.1 ;  §  15.2)  should  be  no- 
ticed in  the  following  persons  ;  pret.  3  fern,  and  1  sing. 
AllX  ^if ;  ftit.  2  f em.sing.  and  2  and  3  plur.  ^-AlH^oLilT, 
etc.;  part  m.  emph.  Bl]  and  plur.masc.  and  fern.  ^^lV,  ^^t* 
In  the  signification,  to  he  of  ttse^  to  profit^  it  is  formed  regu- 
larly. Verbs  which  commence  with  oil,  like  Verbs  |2),  as- 
sume the  vowel  and  throw  it  back  upon  1 ,  but  do  not,  like 
those,  reject  or  change  it,  although  this  latter  occurs  in 
the  Galilean  dialect,  which  had  but  a  single  character  for 
the  two  gutturals  (comp.  §  ].  Eem.  1), 

§  29.      Yerhs   with  1  Bad.    Yud   (^2))  j.^  to   bring  forth. 

In  respect  to  these  verbs  it  should  be  observed  : 
1.  That  in  the  pret.  Pe.  even  when  transitive,  they  take 
JL  in  the  ultimate  syllable  (excepting  Verbs  3  Bad.  Gutt.) ; 


VERBS   1   RAD.   JUD,    ETC.  69 

e.  g.  j^Lk  (^r»)*  If  a,  the  first  radical,  be  without  a  vowel, 
as  is  usually  the  case  (in  pret.,  imperat.,  part.  pass.  Pe.),  it 
quiesces  in  ^*  In  the  fut.  and  infinit.  Pe.  the  vowel  JL  falls 
back  upon  the  vowelless  preformative  ;  e.  g..  ^^^J  ,  r^lSo* 
So  too  in  Ethpe.,  —  falls  back  upon  2  ;  e.  g.  r^-*^!*  But 
where,  in  the  regular  verb,  the  first  radical  takes  a  vowel, 
these  verbs  are  regularly  inflected ;  e.g.  2^^* 

Rem. — In  the   part.  pass.  Pe.,  besides   the  regular  form,  one  with 

7  •x  7  7  7 

—  appears  ;  e.  g.  «2LiA^*  Only  •^Gl*  takes  —  ;  but  where  the 
regular  verb  takes  —  over  the  first  radical,  — ,  with  Linea  oocultans 
under  Ol,  falls  away ;  e.g.  AaOU»  Lin.  occultans  with  —  appears 
in  the  3  fern,  and  1  sing.  pret.  with  a  suffix  attached ;  e.g.  GlA^OLi 

.      7  14 

she  has  given  him  (LdGLk)*     In  3  plur.  masc.  and  fern,  under  sim- 

9v  7 

ilar  circumstances,  Lin.  occult,  falls  away  ;    e.  g.    wtCTIQOOla  thei/ 

♦v  7  "• 

have  given  him  (QQOLi)* 

2.  In  the  fut.and  imperat.Pe.the  second  syllable  takes  _!_• 
In  the  fut.  and  infinit.  Pe.  this  class  of  verbs  is  similar  to 
Verbs  la,  and  changes  a  into  f  which  quiesces  in  —  (vid.  1. 
above).  But  in  the  1  sing.  fat.  ^  falls  away  ;  e.  g.  ^SV 
The  imperat.  on  the  contrary  retains  ^  ;  e.g.  ^* 

UKU.—^fl  and  *Oi\I  follow  the  inflection  of  Verbs  ^  (§  33) ; 
e.  g.   imperat.    ^>   and  ^lOL,  fut.   ^,J  and  ^qAj,  infinit.   Kif%0  and 

7.     -n  V  *  7  • 

*oALd*  In  like  manner  *^01  imperat.  from  *QCJU  follows  the 
same  rule. 

3.  In  Aph.  and  Shaph.  with  their  passives  a  is  changed 
into  o  (vid.  Yerbs  ]a,  §  28.  3) ;  e.g.  jSoV,  ^?cii» 

Rem. — ^  is  retained  in  ^oSul  and  •Alal ;  still  it  should  scarcely 

*    7 

be  considered  as  an  irregularity,  since  from  f^La  appear  Pa.  ,^10, 
Ethpa.  fLolX* 


70  VERBS   MED.  RAD.  VAU   AND   YCJD   QUIESCENT. 

§  30.      Verbs  Med.  Olaph  quiescent  (]l)  ^]i  to  ask. 

The  irregularities  of  these  verbs  occur  only  in  Pe.,Ethpe., 
and  Pa.  with  its  passive. 

1.  Peal.  In  the  pret.  1  quiesces  in  Ji  and  the  latter  falls  back 
from  1  upon  the  first  radical ;  e.  g.  ^]i  ;  but  when  «u  is  the 
third  radical,  it  quiesces  in  —  standing  before  T  ;  e.  g.  w»]]« 
The  vowel  —  appears  in  Aph. ;  e.g.  ^1*1  •  In  the  imperat. 
and  fut.  Pe.  1  quiesces  in  — ;  e.g.  ^1* ,  ^]ij» 

2.  In  Ethpe.,  besides  the  regular  form  *»)£)2l ,  —  is  some 
times  inserted  after  Z ;  e.  g.  jiloZ]* 

Rem. — In  both  cases  metathesis  of  f  takes  place  ;  also  a  duplication 
of  it ;  e.g.  ^X  ^V^  ^"^  l^l^V^  5    Ethpc^AOllf  and  ^12d12]* 

3.  In  Pa.  and  Ethpa.  1  is  generally  changed  into  a.  ;  e.g., 
•n*.^  and  *^^^ZV     The  other  verbs  retain  1 ;  e.  g.  ^lAslI 

Rem. Both  forms  are  found  from    \\  •   (l],.^ •  ]  and  y^ .  1)» 


§  31.      Verbs  Med.  Bad.  Van  and  Yud  quiescent 

{oL  and  -1^)  ^QD  (iOQO)  to  stand  up^   A.Vn  to  die. 

The  verbs  whose  middle  radical  letter  is  Q  or  a.,  and  whose 
grammatical  structure  generally  agrees  with  that  of  the  reg- 
ular verb,  differ  from  the  same  in  the  following  cases  : 

1.  In  the  pret.and  infinit.Pe.  of  Yerbs  Ql,  the  vowel ap- 
pears in  place  of  Q,  which  is  dropped ;  e.  g.  5>ao,  S^qSo»  In 
the  part.  pass.  Pe.,  and  in  the  other  conjugations  generally, 
Q  is  changed  into  jl,  and  quiesces  in  ±.  in  the  part.  P.,  Pe  , 
Ethpe.,  Aph.  an  i  Ethtaph.;  e.g.  3>cu^,  ^CL»X)ZZ1,  ^»f>>o]' 


VEEBS   MED.  RAD.  VAU   AND   YUD   QUIESCENT.  71 

On  the  contrary,  a.  is  movable  in  Pa.  and  Ethpa  ;  e.  g. 
^alo,  ^OjldZV  In  the  part.act.  masc.  of  Pe.,1  (=y,  vid.  §1.| 
Eem.  4),  which  has  arisen  from  Q,  goes  over  in  the  other 
inflections  into  a;  e.  g.  U){o  masc,  |V)> n  fem.  Only  in 
the  imperat.  and  f  ut.  Pe.^  Q  remains  and  qniesces  in  JL  ;  e.g. 
ioooj,  in  which  cases,  as  well  as  in  the  pret.  (in  Yerbs 
•-iA),  A  appears  and  quiesces  in  —  ;  e.  g.  A.kLo ,  y)imn 
Finally  the  preformatives  of  the  fut.  Pe.  have  no  vowel,  ex- 
cept the  1  sing.,  which  takes  —  over  1 ;  e.  g.  ^ool* 

Rem. — In  Pe.,  Ethpe.,  Aph.,  and  Eshta.,  verbs  of  this  class,  which 
are  at  the  same  time  U  (§  32),  as  (QA  and  some  others  which  can  be 

V  7 

referred  to  no  particular  species,  as  t-f^Or,  \QO,   retain  Q  movable. 

Some  are  inflected  in  both  ways,  but  with  a  different  signification  ; 

e.  g.    30^    to  take  a   handful,  Aph.     >1  (    to  deviate  from  the  way. 

TheVerb  i>aco,  contrary  to  the  rule,  takes  j.  in  the  fut.  and  imperat. 

But  LtlD  follows  the  inflection  of  Ql'  Verbs  ;  e.g.  fut.  ZqSQJ*    The 

imperat.  of  %£DQja  to  spare,  takes  —  («rf>»>),  with  the  signification, 
far  be  it.  In  some  manuscripts  _2_  is  found  in  the  preformatives  of  the 
fut.  and  in  the  infinit.  Pe.,  which  manner  of  writing  was  received  by 
the  ancient  grammarians,  and  which,  as  is  testified  by  Amira,  p.  311, 
the  Mandseans  used  on  account  of  metre  (vid.  Lud.de  Dieu  p.  292). 

2.  In  Ethpe.  2  of  the  formative  syllable  2]  is  doubled ; 

e.  g.    JtO-i^ZZI^     By  this,   the  transposition  of  the  sibilants 

does  not  occur  ;  e.g.  MalZZl*  When  three  Z  come  together 
in  the  3  sing.  fem.  and  2  sing,  and  plur.  masc.  and  fem.  fut., 

one  Z  is  omitted  ;  e.  g.  ^>0.x^ll.*  The  occurrence  of  three  Z 
together  is  unavoidable  only  when  the  verb  itself  begins 
with  Z,  in  which  case  four  Z  would  properly  come  in  succes- 
sion ;    e.  g.    ^o\nZZ2   Ps.   Ixii.  10,   from  ^^L     Elhtaph. 

differs  from  Ethpe.  merely  in  signification  ;  e.  g.   \>QjSLL\ 
Ethpe.  to  raise  one^s  self  Ethtaph.  to  he  token  away. 

Rem. — ^mi^ZZy  to  he  convinced,   Ethtaph..   from    «mi<^l ,   is 

usually  written  ^ma^^ZV 


72  VERBS   3   RAD.    OLAPH   QUIESCENT. 

8.  In  Aph.  the  preformatives  of  the  fat.,infinit.,and  pan., 
lose  the  characteristic  _L ,  excepting  the  1  sing.  fut. ;  e.  g. 
^Q-iJDf  ♦  The  part,  pass.,  contrary  to  the  analogy  of  other 
part,  passives,  changes  ^  into  —  ;  e.g.  5>aQk>,  to  distinguish 
it  from  the  active  form  y)iOV>  ♦ 

Rem. — No  example  is  found  of  Shaphel. 


§  32.    Verhs  3  rad.  Olaph  Quiescent  ((J)  |J-..  to  disclose. 

These  verbs,  which  include  the  Hebrew  jj^i  and  j^^ Verbs, 
are  different  from  the  regular  verbs  in  the  following  cases. 

1.  The  third  radical  1  either  quiesces  or  is  changed  into 
%^»  Here  it  should  be  remarked  that  the  pret.  Pe.  ends  in  |-; 
e.  g.  B-i« ,  the  other  preterits  in  ^;  e.g.  Ethpe.  .aI^uiZ]* 
The  futures  of  all  the  conjugations  end  in  |- ;  e.  g.  re. 
|J..^j ,  the  imperat.  Pe.  in  .jb- ;  e.g.  *"yi ,  imperat.  Ethpe. 
ill  .ji.« ;  e.g.  •-h^..Z( ;  the  other  conjugations  in  |— ;  e.g.  Pa. 
lJ-..>  The  termination  of  the  infinit.  Pe.  is  the  same  ;  e.g 
-^i^Ld«  The  other  conjugations  in  the  infinit.  end  with  Oi^; 
e.  g.' Aph.  cu^.|^2^,  the  participles  generally  with  |- ; 
e.  g.  Pe.  Ij-yf—  Only  the  part.  pass,  of  Pa.,  Aph.,  and  Shaph., 

7  ^7 

ends  with  *jl-;  e.  g.  Pa.  •^A.^^.-So* 

Rem. — Some  verbs  with  •.a*  (•-»^)  in  the  pret.  Pe.  are  inflected 
like  the  other  preterits.  Here  belong  mostly  intransitives,  or  Verbs 
Med.  E. ;  e.  g.  ^^.^^.-fiD  to  be  great.  Both  forms  are  found  in  the 
Verbs  pOa  and  "^>  to  swear.  The  imperatives  of  this  kind  of 
Terbs,  take  wi»  at  the  end.  Some  verbs  with  3  rad.  He.,  seem  to 
belong  here ;  e.g.  OlSD»  to  name,  Pa.  .jlSQs*     Some  grammarians, 


VERBS  3   RAD.   OLAPH   QUIESCENT.  78 

without  proof,  derive  from  the  imperat.  Ethpe.  the  forms  |j«yiZ(  and 

IJ-..«Z|»  The    Verb  |001  has  two  forms  of  the  future;  e.  g.    (OCJIJ 

and  (OOU^    In  the  formation  of  the  present  tense  in  connection  with 

the  pronoun,   the  part,  takes  wk—   quiescent,   instead  of   f. ;    e.  g. 

A^lOjliD   for   Aj"!  1lO>liD»      From  p-CO  ^o  hate  appears  a  double 

form  of  the  part.  pass. ;    e.  g.    [ISO  and  |>1CD»     The  former  refers 
more  particularly  to  things,  and  the  latter  to  persons. 

2.  "When  a  letter  or  syllable  is  added,  1  is  either  changed 
into  a.  or  falls  entirely  away. 

A.  In  the  first  case,  a.  is  a)  movable  in  the  pret.  3  sing, 
fem.  of  all  the  conjugations  excepting  Pe.  of  verbs  ending  in 
]L  ;  e.g.  Ethpe.  AlLy.21  (  Pe.  AS.. ) ;  in  the  second  form  of 
3  plur.fem.  ;  e.  g.  Pa.  ^a-IS.. ;  in  the  2  plur.  fem.  of  all  the 
imperatives ;  e.  g.  Pe.  ^jloJ^..  ;  in  the  2  and  8  plur.  fem.  of 
all  the  futures  ;  e.  g.  Ethpe.  ^j-^y.  Aj  ;  in  the  fem.  sing, 
and  plur.  of  all  the  participles  ;  e.  g.  Pe.  M-^yi ;  and  finally 
in  all  the  infinitives  except  that  of  Pe. ;  e.  g.  Aph.  cub^.^lo 
(Pe.  IJ— w_Ld)  ;  J)  A  is  quiescent  in  tbe  1  and  2  masc.  and  fem. 
of  both  numbers  of  all  the  preterits,  and  in  such,  a  manner 
that  .*.  in  Pe.  (excepting  tbe  1  sing.  A.*^.. )  quiesces  in  — ; 
e.g.  AaS..  ,  .oA-i-iy.»  In  other  cases  a  quiesces  in  —  ;  e.g. 
Ethpe.   AjiJ^..ZT,    ^oA^..Z11 

B.  1  falls  away  in  the  3  sing.  fem.  pret.  Pe.  of  Verbs 
ending  in  ]1  with  —  retained  ;  e.  g.  ASyi  ;  in  the  3  plur. 
masc.  and  fem.  pret.  Pe.,  and  in  the  3  plur.  fem.  (in  the 
3  plur.  masc.  Pe.  of  Verbs  -..iii  and  of  other  preterits,  »a- 
remains)  of  all  tbe  preterits  ;  e.g.  Pe.  ^vX'  i^^tliefut. 
throughout  in  the  2  sing,  fem.,  while  the  regular  form 
^  is  changed  into  ^',    e.  g.   Pa.  r^Vj/'    ^^^   ^^   *^^®   ^ 


74  VERBS   8   RAD.    OLAPH   QUIESCENT. 

and  3  plur.  masc.  ;  e.g.  Pe.  .a^.--J  ;  also  in  the  2  sing.  fern, 
imperat.,  where  ^  quiesces  m  —  ;  e.g.  Pa..  «-»-^vi ;  also  in  the 
2  plur.  masc.  imperat.,  where  Q  quiesces  in  —  ;  e.  g.  Aph. 
Q!i..1 ;  finally  in  the  plur.  masc.  of  the  part.,  where  the  reg- 
ular  form  ^a.—  is  exchanged  with  ^a«  ;  e.  g.  Pe.  ^-^  ^  . 

Rem. — Instead  of  Pa.  and  Ethpa.,sometimes  the  quadriliteral  form 
•-»Q^..  appears.  The  3  plur.  masc.  pret.  Q^ii  (with  paragog.  Nun 
^OQ^..)  occurs,  sometimes  with  |  retained  ;  e.  g.  Acts  xxviii.  2. 
^00|^«  But  the  form  CL^t*  which  Buxtorf  adduces,  is  neither 
confirmed  by  examples  nor  found  in  Amira.  In  all  the  conjugations 
excepting  Pe.,  the  3  plur.  fem.  pret.  differs  from  the  3  sing.  masc. 
only  by  taking  Ribui  (vid.  §  6),  for  which  Amira  (p.  266)  in  verbs 
ending  with  «^-,  and  in  Pa.  of  verbs  ending  with  (-,  writes  a 
double  a  ;  e.  g.  « >  »^v<*  ^^  ^he  imperat.  Ethpe.,  besides  the  form 
given  in  the  paradigm,  occurs  the  2  plur.  fem.  ^^i  i  A.iZ.|» 

General  Remark. — Verbs  |J  or«jL^,  which  are  at  the  same  time 

]^  (comp.  §  30.  1),  are  inflected  like  Verbs  ]j ;    e.  g.  pret.  Pe.  wi|j. 

Zuj],  L\i,  ^Zutf,  plur.  a»1],  etc.,  infinit.  lllSo,  imperat.  J\i,  ^a]], 

etc.,   fut.  ll]j,    plur.  ^ol]j,  etc.,    part.  act.  \\i,  pass.  1|J,   Apn.  pret. 

JiH]  and  *A1,  infinit.  a»|Jk),  imperat.  J\i],  fut.  *.*lJj,  part.  ^U^. 


APPENDIX  TO  §  32. 

Inflection  of  the  Verb  XLa*  to  live. 

In  the  Verb  ]a**  with  a  movable,  a.  is  rejected  when  the 
first  radical  and  the  preformative  are  without  a  vowel ;  e.  g. 
infinit.  Pe.  1*»iD  for  'U.mwLo*  Sometimes  this  verb  takes  1 
between   the   preformatives   and   the   first  rndical ;     e.   g. 


DEFECTIVE      VEKBS.  75 

\jS^  (better  perhaps  V^V^),  fut.  "liiJ  for  )1mJ  and  with  ] 
inserted  iCLmM,  Apli.  pret.  -k^,  infinit.  0>r»»V)  or  Qa-j^lSo , 
fut.  |mJ   and   |js*p ,     imperat.  ]>11,   part.  ^wkSD  and  "U*!^* 

JL  also  falls  away  when  no  preformative  precedes,  and  its 
vowel  falls  back  upon  the  first  vacant  radical ;  e.g.  imperat. 
Pe.  ti  *i  for « >  ■  I.  ig,  part.  fern,  p-m  for  |aii>i»  The  form  ^(j^ 
(Matt.  XV.  27)  is  found  in  the  part.  plur.  masc. 


B.   Defective  Verbs. 
§  33.    Verbs  luith  the  first  radical  Nun  (^)  *n2LJ  to  go  out. 

The  irregularities  of  these  verbs  are  the  following  : — 
In  the  fut.,  imperat.,  and  infinit.  Pe.,  and  in  all  forms   of 
Aph.,  the  first  rad.  J  falls  away  ;  e.  g.  jDoaj,  *OQ2),  -^<^Vr> 
*Q2)  !♦     The  fat.  and  imperat.  Pe.  sometimes  take  —  and  — ; 
e.  g.  *£i£aj,    \>£LJ» 

Rem.  —  The  exceptions  to  this  rule  are  ;  a)  Verbs  Med.  Rad. 
doubled  (§  34) ;  e.  g.  ^  ;  h)  Verbs  Med. Rad.  Quiescent ;  e.  g.  *2LI ; 
c)  Verbs  Med.  Rad.  Ol ;  e.  g.  JOU,  fut.  JOUJ*  Those  verbs  whose 
third  radical  is  ^  or  Z,  are  not  changed  by  assimilation,  as  in  Hebrew; 
e.g.  ^iLCLftOI  we  have  believed^  .oZAjjJ  ye  have  descended.  TheVerb 
*nmi  to  mount  up,  takes  its  pret.  and  part.  Pe.  from  toKtr)  (vid.  § 
35.2).  Upon  retaining  the  characteristic  1  in  Aph.;  e.g.  \d\L  for  pj. 
Comp.,  §  23.  1.  Rem. 


§  34.      Verbs  with  Med.  Rad.  doubled   (ML)  *CDflD>   to  sprinkle. 

In  respect  to  these  verbs  it  should  be  remarked  : — 

1.  That  the  middle  radical  falls  away  in  the  pret.,  infinit., 


70  DOUBLY   IKKEGULAR   AND   DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 

imperat.,  and  fut.  (having  —  over  the   preformative)   Pe. ; 

e.  g.  pret.  »CD> ,  infinit.  »CD*^ ,  fut.  %flDO;J ,  imperat.,  %CDOn 

Also  Aph.   and   Shaph.   with   their  passives;    e.   g.  *flDJ|, 

%flD)221^      The    part.    act.    Pe.   takes    1    in   place    of   the 

middle  radical,  which  has  fallen  away ;  e.  g.  *£Ci]j ;  but  1 
falls   away   again   when   a   syllable  is   added ;   e.   g.  plur. 

Rem. — Those  verbs  whose  2  and  3  rad.  is  ( ,  are  exceptions,  and 
are  inflected  according  to  the  rules  for  quiescent  verbs  (§  35.  1.  d). 

r  * 

In  the  fut.  and  imperat.  Pe.  forms  with  —  (not  — )  appear ;  e.  g. 

<«»»1 ,  ^»      The  part.  act.  Pe.  has  ^*^R  in  the  plur.  from  the 

Verb  ^\l  to  go  in.  In  the  part.  Aph.  sometimes  the  middle  radical 
appears  again,  but  it  is  marked  by  Linea  occultans ;  e.  g.  Heb.  ix.  5, 

^^iN\t)V>»     In  Aph.  the  characteristic  f  sometimes  remains  after  the 

preformative ;  e.  g.  QlO^^IoA  from  '^*^--  (Comp.  §  23.  1.  Rem.). 

2.   The  part.  pass.  Pe.  *£Q-i^»)  ,  Ethpe.,  Pa.  and  Ethpa. ;  e.  g. 

*CQCDjZ|  ,  JCQCDj  ,  are  regularly  inflected,  with  the  retention 
of  the  middle  radical.  Instead  of  the  last  two  forms,  how- 
ever, Palpel.  and  Ethpalp.  (§  25.  D)  are  more  in  use;  e.  g. 

Rem. — The  last  remark  holds  good  also  of  Shaphel,  which  occui*s 
more  rarely  (Comp.  1.  above). 


§  35.     Doubly  Irregular  and  Defective  Yerhs. 

1.  By  Doubly  Irregular  Yerbs  are  understood  those  in 
which  occur  two  of  those  letters  which  usually  give  rise  to 
irregularities.  In  the  inflection  of  these  verbs,  either  one 
or  both  of  those  letters  may  retain  their  peculiarities.  This 
class  of  verbs  consists  of  (vid.  Lud.  de  Dieu,  p.  340,  sq.);  a) 

Yerbs  ^  and  13 ;  e.  g.  Imj ,  Aph.  %jJDd1  to  ajpjprom ;   b) 

Yerbs  ^S)  and  ]]";  e.  g.  \1I\  to  come^  Aph.  •jiZu]  ,  Iflol  to  heal., 

Pa.  »aXo1 ,  ]2)1  to  boil,  Ethpe.  ^^iilZl ;  c)  Yerbs  J!a  and  ]] ', 


DOUBLY  IRREGULAR  AND  DEFECTIVE  VERBS.        77 

e.  g.  ISnl  to  swear ^  imperat.  «iV)i,  fut.  Ik5]j ,  infinit.  'jlo'lLo , 

Aph.   ^AJk)©!  ;   |:l»   ^(?  sprout^  imperat.  «.klu,  Aph.  %^ol 

and  •-A.l^l ;     d)  Yerbs  li  and  B  ;  e.  g.  1  p  to  chide^  imperat. 

^"lo  ,  infinit.  ]^k? ;  ^1]  ^6>  5^  displeased^  Aph.  «J^* 

2.  To  Defective  verbs  (see  Lud.  de  Dieu,  p.  344:)  belong 
the  following,  in  so  far  as  they  occur  in  the  language,  either 
in  individual  forms  only,  or  have  borrowed  their  defective 
forms  from  synonymous  verbs,  or,  finally,  vary  from  the 
regular  verb  in  inflection  and  interpunction.     a)  Impersonal 

Verbs.      From   JDjl    to  he  hit^   occurs  only  the   part.  act. 

^j1  it  hefits.      From   tfLo   appear  the  3  sing.   fern.   pret. 

Aj|Lo  it  is  disagreeable^  the  part.  act.  fem.  \i^  and  the  3 

sing.  fem.  fut.  ttolZ ;  and  from  Uo  and  1V»  appear  the  act. 

o  and  It*  it  is  suitable. 

b)  The  following   defective  verbs   are   completed   from 

others  which  are  synonymous :  *nNno  to  mount  up^  part, 
act.  nOXm ;  the  other  tenses  of  this  verb  are  formed  from 
.ncoj ,  imperat.  •jQcd  ,  fut.  -Qcaa ,  infinit.  »nrnV> ,  Aph.  cQcdI  , 

-n       7  7    7  IN 

part,   .ooft^o  ^  Ethpa.  .oVAnn].     A  similar  complement  is 

7  ^7 

found  in  t^Ol-a  to  give  (see  §  29.  1.  Rem.),  imperat.  *scn  , 
infinit.  \^]  fut.  \ES  from  \L  ,  Ethpe.  .oouZl'l 

c)  Those  which  differ  in  form  and  inflection  are  t-^O"? 

to  run^  imperat.  •«^JOl ;  ^l]   to  go  away  and  12]  to  come 

(see  §  28.  2.  3.  Rem.);  also  looi  to  be  (see  §  32.  1.  Rem. 

and  §  38),  fut.  |oou  and  joau ;  also  from  looi  is  found  a 

fut.  apocopate  ]oiJ ,  loiZ ,  plur.  tOOU  ,  etc.,  having  the  signi- 
fication of  the  conjunctive  as  well  as   of  the  usual   future 

(comp.  Agrell.  Otiola  Syr.  p.  46) ;  lAs  to  drink^  with  ] 
prosthet.  ^L»\ ,  imperat.  ^As"| ,  part.  lA»  ,  fut.  IAaj  ,  infinit. 
IAaSd  ;  ^1 ,  Aph.  ^iOkCTi  to  believe  ;  11**  (see  App.  to  §  32), 
to  live.  Finally,  in  four  verbs  3  rad.  Olaph. ;  e.  g.  "U^ , 
Uq^  ,  11 1  ?  1^)2]   (1>2),  which  merely  occur  in  Pa.  and  its 


V8  DOUBLY   IRREGULAR   AND   DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 

passive,  the  second  syllable  qiiiesces  in  «L,  as  in  Verbs  8 
Gutt.  (see  §  13.  1.  Eem.),  and  1  is  retained  in  all  of  the 
tenses  and  moods,  while  its  vowel  falls  back  upon  the 
preceding  vacant  consonant ;  e.  g.  3  sing.  fern.  pret.  I]  >  o , 
The  formation  is  as  follows  ;  pret.  Pa.  |ajq  ,  part.  V»-n^ 
infinit.  oUik) ,  indperat.  "Uo.  fut.  laldj,  Ethpa.  Ui^l" 
part.  U^Ai ,    infmit.  ojloAi ,   fut.  "llr^Aj. 


80 


PARADIGM  I. 


like    EthtaphaX. 


C^H 


like    Aphel. 


'vj        -^        -vl        "^       -v| 

■J^^    r^    r^    «j^    ^^ 


q   '^  '^ 

d)     <3)    i.<:i)    ^^  h^ 

f  '4  -^  i  -^ 

v 


4  4 


U 


•a 


•| 


#  3 1  • 


\'V 


^ 


'1'^ 


J^    ^     "^     -vl 


Q 


'vl       tvj       'vl 


'i 


'°^   v  ^% 


4 


■^Q   ->^Q   -^q   ..( 


I  ••!  I  :l  "-I  I  r^  '4 


f         f         f         f 

^    CJ    J^     f^ 


-v4         •Vj         -^         »>>J         -vj         •-nI 


ri 


1/ 


<o 


V  ^nu 


1 

J  d  j  ^-^  ^-^  -J  i  ;d  y  ^. 

.^-3)       ^      ^<4)      >^      ^-^      ^^      .^*9)     ^-^     ^^     r.-^) 

i 

4 

J   CI       CI 

Regular   Verb. 


81 


I 


:l4 


■■t 


'^  '?i  ';:!  ci  '^  '^  '-3  •;:J 


;;--« 


•^    ►'^     ^ 


"3  "3  ^  '"^  ^^  q  "^  •' 


.-t 


'I 'I 


q 


^vj     tTvi     .TM     'T;- 
Q 


^      I 


'3  c^  a  '::}  'CT  '-3  '^  a  '^1  '^ 


1 


n 


^1   ^1 


'9  :g 


^   —   .q   .g   -d  -g   -q   ^q   :' 

1/    :^    ^ 


1 


q      Q 

Q       Q 

b^Q       t-Q 

" n    t-Q 

f-^     .<:i) 

'^■^    -^ 

^       |=L 

^    fj. 

'^  '^  '^  CI  '::j  '^^l  '^  '^  '^  ^  cj  '^ 


'I  'I 


■•J-- 


^4 


W  «^^   r^   r^   '*T' 


c 


f'^J  f*^ 


*■  n     ^  ^  /*n|     ^e^   *^ 

*a    ^o  ^  */\    4.0 

-^    ^  t:P      \    zP 

1      ^ 


•J   T 


.1 


1^   CO       CO 


44_:        o 

(M  1-1 


-^    CO       CO 


1  ^ 


82 


PARADIGM  II. 


1 

;| 

?  1 

' 

d 
*6 

'3 

00 

[    f, f,^    «=, ^t^    «=, —    \ —    •=,^   ^,^    «=* —    \ — 

.        tTvJ              ^^       ^*v4       ^-vj       (Tvl       .rvj       .TvJ       .TvJ       .J^       ,r^ 

^o          ooooooooo 

%                        1              .\"'-'   V-i 

o 

o          ^ 

% 

'o^       'oT     o      o      o      o      c 

r^  -^ -^a '^a  ^ '-^  K 

< 

r  'o'  *©"  'oT 

1 

^d 

1 

"       f            f                (■                 V—        *€—         «—         *—       ''*— -       **"—        ^«'—       ^'— 
ivT   ^      t?^      tT^       t!^^       t?^       ^"^       rT^       ^      "^"^        •^'^ 

31 

f-       (^       (^ 

^  ^  r^ 

i  '^  1 1 1 1  '1  ';^ 

■  3  :l  '4. 

'^   '3' 

C7  C7  ^c^   {::][   sq"  ^jqp   c^   c^   cj   jq-   c:^ 

^d  <^o 

n^.:^^^ 
^   '•^' 

i  '^  1 1 1 1  '1  If  S  ;l  H 

"a 

^1     \ 

1 

^   1 

C^CO          CO          (M          (M          1-tQ^COCO          C^          (N          i-i 

} 

1^        CM      C-. 

Verbs  First  Rad.Olaph. 


83 


o 


o 


'^ 


►•"-I    tr^    W     !H     :5i     5i    •rvi     -vj   < 


cT-i        6      o      6    --^    -^    --^      o      o  ^-^ 


■I 


•a -a 

o      o 


o    o 


^3    ^-^  -^  ^"^   'o  ^3  ^3  -^  "^  ^3 


^1    ^% 


/TT/Tf  ^^%2  ^:<L  r±  .-£  ;--  -^  V2.  ?i  ^;:i';^ 
-~1  ^ 


o 


■ej^ 


:^'^^  '7^  '^  U  ';£  a  '^  :^a 


t 


*~-    "^vl    ^O 


'1:1 

"^     h;:!  h;^  h;:!  .^  ""^  ""^  ""-^  ^'^ 

1 

'fl 

V3.     f;:^  ri  ^^    "77  '^  t^  r-i    r^  f  n 

•J  -J  J  5 -J  4  4  ,-3 -^il 
1 

^e?(Nf^co          CO        c^        oi        rH^cocc        oi        ^'^cJl                   ^Ci^* 

84 


PARADIGM  III. 


1 


i 
} 

1 

o 

5'T 

■I 

H..i 

<o   i 

f           *v—    ^»       *<—     %-     ^,—     ^<—    *,^^    <=*—     <=<— 

^     ^^     ^^     i-*^     tT^     .r>v|     ^►vi     ,rv|     tT-l     ^ 

^oooooooooo 

^^.  .-4.  n.  n.  ?4.  n.  ^-4.  n.  H.  H. 

•  -ni    •^    "^si    -vi      o    :  1    -^    ri       r 

4:0 

0  0 
n.  '4.. 

i 

'•4.  /I.  '-4.  '-1.  .-4.  '-4.  H.  '-4.  '-4.  '-4. 

1 

'0"     '0' 

n.  4 

p        «=         f        f        f        f.    f         f«„    ^<^_    f,_ 

.-^  r^  r^  .-^  .-^  ^-^  .-^  r:i  ri  :^ 
vt  A  "A  'A  A  A  A  A.,  n.  A.. 

1/ 

'5 

0 

■11 

*    1 

1 

4 

<'0 

0-  <i      t»  < 

1 

.rj   "S  fS  iT-i 


4.  j4.  £4.  4.  4.  4.  4.  4 


•*v|      •vl      •'vl       ^g 
1 


n. 

o     •  1     "^ 


-v|         -v| 


i-l'H-' 


->4      -^ 


Cl^  CO     00 


I  S 


..  y-  4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 

1    ^      0    =1    -^    r^       rr 

3 

■^.■4 

'          ^          rH^COCO          <M          <N          »-i 

} 

Sl 

Verbs  First  Bad.  Jud. 

85 

i 

AA.\ 

44 

t 

•4.4. 

1 

o    V 

m%mm- 

33 

^ 

^3  '^  -^  -^  ^-o  ^3  ^3  ^-^  -^  ^3 
•■4.  '-4.  H.  -^.  H.  ^,  4,  ^.  .^.n. 

Ail: 

'^  "^  c^  ':3 

f      1 

..  H.  A.  A.  A.  XA. 

74X 

•I  '1 

^1  .-^  ^-^  -r^ 

'4.  H.  H.  < 

1 

1 

'^  -::i  -::i  ■y.  H  "^  '^3.  H^i  .^"^ 
•4.  VI.  VI.  /I.  -4.  •!.  ,^  ^,  ^  VI. 

2  m. 

2  f. 

3  in. 
3  f. 

2  m. 

2  f. 

1  c. 

Plur. 

3  m. 

3  f. 

2  m. 

2  f. 
1   c. 

il  ', 

m 

PARADIGM  IV. 

^-  r^    "-"^    .J^    N*^    r^    ^"^   ^"^    ^-^    r^    -^ 

1  ^iL  %  a  :£  'S  ^ii  ^ii  ;a  :£  -^ 
1  ^  ^^  ^  1  '^  -3  :1  J  <^  t 

'1 

^3 

T 

^1 

■|-^ 

o 

CO 

4  .•:i  .ti  .-ri  .^  :^  ^  H  .^  ^ 
J  <i  <l  <d   «d    d  ;  1  <.<i  .<a  .  t- 

'1 

d 

fcr  tar 

CCK> 

5  ^s  's  ^s  ^^  '^  ^s  ^^  ^.a  ^4  ^4 

'1 

'3 

0= 

s 

.51 
d 

ri 

1 

'  fa  ^Q  :]a  ^^  :;£  ^s  'S  >s  -^ii  -ii 
1  ^^  4  :|  '^  3  =^  ^  .^,  1 

3 

.3 

^^^i 

"r—      %—      *—      ^*—      f            f           f             f            f            %_ 

i  's  '^  ^  'ii  'ii  a  '4L  '^  '^  ii 

S-  1  -^^   ^   ^  '^    3  =1   4   ^    T 

'1 
^3 

■ft 

< 

.  '4  '41  '^  '^  'iL  'il  '^  'il  %  S 

1         .|^-^  vs 

1 

1 

•^1 

4.  ss,^'  -' 

Verbs  Mid.  Rad.   OlajjJi   Quiescent. 


87 


'•I 


•^    fn    ^n    "^    -"^    ■^'^    -^"^    ^^    ^n  "^ 


1 


n    ^ n    r^    -^"^    "^"^    ^n    ^n  "^ 

^  :a  ^^  ^^  ^^  ^  -l^ci 


'I 'I 


■"•3     r^     t?^ 

'i  '^  '^ 
111 


'^  ?  '4 


'^  '^  c:j 


"¥{  1 1 1 


Qi     'vi      < 


a 

1 

"^p    r^    r^ 

^M.  :il  :^ 

•r 
1 


i 


■^q    ,!^    ^-^    ;3 


3  a  a 
■I '  -i 


'^  ':::!  ':::J'^ 

:£  .^  :il^^ 

'1 .3  '1  ' 

'I 'I 


■■|:| 


-vi     -^     "^     *—-      n      1     'vi     •^ 


1  i  1 


v 


<h    t.-sj)    ^-sp 

ii4 


a 


'^A 


SI 


d 


»!  *V| 


Vil    '^    ^ 
1       1       1 


^ 


:a  S  'i 
1  '  'I 


1^3  '11 


i>a 


51  a 


31 


1 


'S 

1 


':::!  ^^  '-3 
'^  'il  'il 

"I   '  4 


'^  c:|  cj'^ 

%  a  a'il 

a  ^3  -1' 

•• 

i^  !^  S  'ia  ^3  'i  :|  ia  S'i 
1  p  -^  '  ^^^3^-u1 

^^g 

f. 

1 

Part. 

P.  m. 

f. 

88 


PARADIGM   V. 


•^ 
•^ 


%-       *#—       <=<—      **—       **— 
•Vl  '^  "^  "^  "^ 

•^  "^  -^  -VJ 


Q 


.  1     o. 


V  -T/ 


i 
^ 


11 


l 


•I 
•vj 


,51 

a 


CO 

"3" 


CO 


~         "^         ~         n        rt         n      »•  r»      '^  O      "^  U 


"3        3      " 


^  v.-i, 


.Q    .n    .g    .Q    .g    .(j    .^    .n    ;a   ^Q 
^   ^1     I     I    ^1     ^    :^     I    J     4. 

1  ./o^v^a 


f       f       f  _     f       (■       f ,      f       f       f-, 

»vT        •Vj  "Vj  "^  P^J  -"xj  "^nJ  •>J  »>s|  *^ 

Q    hQ    hQ    hQ    hq    ^n    hC 

1/  °-^         1/  1/ 


rv4  »V| 

M 

.q   .q 

•M 


a  "8  «a  ►^ 


°^     1/ 


1 


I 


1  ;i  ;i  ^ 


jft^  CO       CO 


<M  (M  i-l 


CO        CO  C^  <M  rH 


Verbs  Mid.  Bad.  Van  and  Jud. 


89 


it 


'^  '^  '^  '^^  '^  '^  '-3  '^   Ci  '^ 

rn\mm 


"i  :^  r?7 


q  .^  "Q  "q  "0  h3  ,-^  ,-g.ci 

1^1  ^C  4,1 4^ 


^ 


V--V—     ^n     f«v|     ^-^     "vj    *=*--    f-i     fn     -vj     "^sa  fn 

lfr-r-|:(l|;i;i;41 


llflfl-llllW 


hQ  hQ 


ri    r^  f^    ^#^ 

-^         ^-vl         *^         -v| 


•^    '^  <X 


y\nmvn 


•^  •vji  -^-j 


H 


-f-O 


\ 


^3  ^g  '3  '9  ^i  ^^  '3  ^3-3 


^^ 


r^  "^ 


1-1 


:4 


•I 


1 


I  s  -^  1^-  s 


CO       CO  <M  CM       I— I 


If^Q-i 


90 


PARADIGM   VI. 


V 


1 


V 


1 


CM 

CO 


r  yi         Hvl         u>i         H>1         uyl  H>|         H   >1         Kyi  u  yl 


■1  -1  J  -1  =3 1  A  =3  a  "1. 


">  '°^  v^-i 


■i 


■V 


1 


Id  '1  "1  "1  "1  "1  "1  a  % 

1  'i^°-  v^^ 


"1 1  "1  "i  "1 1  =1  "1 .1 1. 


'I 


i 


■>•  5^""  ^^  ^^  ^>-  '5^''  t^^  t;^''  ^^  ^"  -5^ 

■■i --i 'n '-^ '-i --2  n '-^  n  % 
1     ■i,'°-'i'-i 


51  r  *"'"  ^ 


^!^ 


'I 


I 


^ 
&  I 

;=!. 


<4J  S  Uh 


w  S    «*j       3      <*j 


ja^COCO  t^  N  r-H^COCO  <N  <M 


S      !S 


C^      <N 


Verbs  Third  Bad.  Olaph. 


91 


53. 

'•3  '-2 

:V 

il 
a  ^-d' 

'^  n 

^51  '5i 

•J  .;i 

1 

i  a  *-• 

92 


PARADIGM   VII. 


.4 

q 


1-61 

!'8 


6] 


Q 


CO 

CO 


•"^       "^       -n|       'vl 
^^       tTvl       ^.^^       ^ 

61  r-  ^ 


^^ 


•^        ""vl        'vl        -v|        "^ 

tTvi     jM     rv|     .Tvi     r::4 
-61    .61    .61    -q    -6^ 


-61 


^ 


% 


>. 


^ 


1  ^1 1 1  i  1 ;  1  :i  t 


.3 


0.1 


6     f 
C 


•=  4 


40 


1/   .^ 


^1 


-V4  r>g 


a  : 


-6 

C 


'vl       "^^       "^       »>vj       ."vl       •^       "^       "-^4       --nJ       "^ 


t 


°^'1/'i 


'I 


''       'f^-vs 


•~v4      »>s4 


£9 


s     ^ 


Verbs  First  Bad.  Nun. 


93 


'I 


\ 


1  \  1  '\  1  1  \  J  \\ 


'9  '*¥ 


rTvj     tfxl     .r-4 


^ 


ii 


^v|      ^'^   "^n 


11 


'fil 

q 


^ 


a. 


f  «: 


^  c:J  '2J  ':^  =7  '^  '^  '::j  -i:^:^ 


f 


":5  rs  ^s  ^a  ■^•^  ^-^ " 

■I  i  .14  .|  4 


<=t|  «=( 


q   d 


r^     "^     ^      ^       !3     •^^     ''^     !3    1    Q     Q 

•^  ^a  '3  ^i  a  ^3  -^'a  ^-a.^ 

a  .a    q    d-d    ^  .3  q   '3  ^ 


11 


.3.3 


r-J    .'vi 


^   '^    '^    CJ    C^^^ 


f 


'   1/ 


9  q 
1 


r^    r^    r-J    tt   <=!3    ''^^    r^i    r^  ^ri 

'%  ^%  -a  ^1  I  «^  a  .^1 

q   9    j,  q  'Oy  ^  >\    I'q 


d"fil 


Q^  <M  c^      ,!^  «^      w 


^    I  S   '-•      s 


94 


PARADIGM   VIII. 


^ 

>,»^ 
q 


CO 
093 


^ 
-^ 
rO 


'i 


f ".  ■      ^j *t^^    ♦=,— .    ''4—    ^«—   **—    '«—    ^,— 

tr-4      .T^      r^      r^      •-•^      ^^      tTvl      K»^      fvj      ,j^ 


■g  ^1 1 1  'I  '§  =1 1  :i  H. 


•  •-« 


^    1 


'I 


*V4  »>vj 


^..^      tK.rs      l.••^      "^.rs      t-.e.      t-.rs      ^  q      '^•'J      t-^      -•'^ 


1'°-^    V^T 


«'-•r^      >>-»^      b,»^      t>-»^ 

.a  ^a  .a  ^a  ^a 


-*o 


^ 


'I 


P  <     Q  i 


'  1 


^  ,  f_        f  ^  f  f  f  P  f^       P  f 

•"Vl  »Vj  «^  -^  J^  ^y  -s^  "^  ^J*  J^ 


'■1 


I  '9  '9  'i 


'I 


>*s      f.^ 


^    ^1    I    I    'I     §    =^    J    'I     ^ 


^o    ^o 

g  ^ 


Verhs  Middle  Bad.  Doubled. 


95 


n 


'^  t^  ^i::!  ^:^  '^  '^  '^  f^  :^  '^ 

.•vj    ^.7;    "^T;*    %^    ^-^    r-i    .r-j    ^r^    ^rs  r-i 

1 


■i-i 
9 -J 


■-'1     r4    tTvi     r^     /^    ^n    "^TL    -"^     '^'^  ^TL 

'^  1  '1  "1  ^  ^§  ^%  :§  '1'^ 

a         1/        -        - 


3  '::j  ci  ':::i  ^^  '^  '^  c{  ':::i  '-3 
;'S  ^'S  -s  "^'s    s  ^"S  "'S  ►vs  -^  -'S 

i  i  ^§  .§  i  I  'i  i  ii 


^  a  a 


-n.  ,7;!  .*:;;  .7;;  &;:  o.  .Tu  -^    ^ 

'9  "I  '§    a  'i    9    ^  '"^  ""^ 


f 


H    9  a  ,a  a  -i  a 


'^  '^  '^  '^  *=^  '^  '-5  <:^  c:i'^ 
§  ^9  ^a    a  ^a    a    9  ^a  ""^ 

i 


^1^1 


:n.  c;!   r;j   r;|   ':;:  ^n  ^n.  r^i   r;!  ^n. 


(^   CO       CO  C^  (M  1-f 


CO       CO  (M  (M       i—t 


«    ^«*- 


PARADIGM  OF  THE  VERB  WITH  DIACRITICAL  POINTS. 


PAKADIGM  OF  THE  VERB  WITH  DIACRITICAL 

POmTS. 


(  Compare  §  4.  Rem.  ). 


3  m.                               3  /.                 2  m.            1     c.      j 

Preter.  Sing.             ^\4^  1  A!^  Al^O 

^54ol  '    Al4o 

aU^ 

Al4o 
AI40 

J  Plur.          q14^  0^4^  i 

* 

Fut.  Sing.              ^Q^nj  1        ^Q^oZ 

^a4£)Z 
^ofcoZ 

^C4£)Z 

Plur.  ^q14^  ^q^4^  ! 

^                             1                              = 

Imper.Sing.  m.  ^Q^JQ  ^Q^O  IPlur.  m.         qIq^O  qIq^^   | 

Infill.      Vi^a^  VV^ciSo  \\^n^  VNj^nLD  nl^n^  etc.  | 

Part.  Act.      ^54^  m.  U^^'  f. 

^54nSD 

Passive  ^^u4^  ^J)u4^  ^4^ 

^4oAk)  ^\4£)ALd  ^^4iAk5 

Rem. — The  forms  of  the  verb  which  are  omitted  in  the  foregoini^ 
Table,  are  not  marked  with  diacritical  pcints,  since  they  may  easily 
De  recoofnized  from  their  formation. 


VERBS   WITH  SUFFIXES.  97 

§  36.      Verbs  with  /Suffixes. 

The  union  of  verbal  forms  with  suffixes  is  much  more 
simple  in  Syriac  than  in  Hebrew.  It  should  be  remarked 
in   general  that  the  vowel  of  the  first   or  second  syllable 

either  falls  away ;  e.  g.  —  in  the  3  fern,  and  1  sing.  pret. 

and  Q  in  the  fut. ;  or  the  vowel  of  the  second  syllable  falls 

back  upon  the  preceding  consonant ;  e.  g.  in  the  same  per- 

It 
sons  of  pret.  Pe.  in  w^hich  —  of  the  first  syllable  falls  away. 

The  verbal  endings  ^  and  o  quiesce  in  — .  and  — ♦  Verbal 
forms,  unless  they  terminate  with  *jl-  and  Q- ,  remain 
unchanged  before  the  suffixes  tQS  ,  ^-^^»  Also  the  character- 
istic vowel  of  the  first  syllable  of  Pa.  and  Aph.  remains 
unchanged,  and  the  suffixes  of  the  3  plur.  are  attached  to 
verbs  in  the  form  of  separate  pronouns.  In  respect  to  the 
particular  persons  the  following  should  be  remarked  (see 
Table  of  the  pronouns,  §  16.  and  table  of  the  verbs,  with 
suffixes,  §  36). 

A.     Preterit    with  Suffixes. 

3  sing.  masc.  ^\^  before  the  suffixes  #00 ,  ^-lo  in  the 

2  plur.  masc.  and  fem.  The  other  persons  ^^-4^  with 
suft'.  a.  1. 

3  sing.  fem.  AS^^  before  ^QD ,  ^^*  The  others  Al^ 
with  sutf.  a.  1. 

2  sing.  masc.  AL^^  unchanged,  and  by  way  of  exception 
with  sulf.  c. 

2  sing.  fem.  ^A^4^  is  changed  into  ^AL^  with  suff.  b. 
.  sing.  com.  AK^  forms  A^fr^  with  suff.  a.  1. 

3  plm\  masc.  Q^J^  becomes  Q^^  with  suff.  b.  or  w^ith  . 
parag.,  excepting  before  tOO  ,  ^.aO* 

3  plur.  fem.    o^fex)  either  \>4o  with  suff.  c.  or  with  , 
parag.  ,^  i  S(}n* 


98  FUTURE  WITH   SUFFIXES  . 

2   plur.   masc.   and   fern,   and   1    com.  retain  the  forms 

.oAl4^,  ^i^^^4^ ,  ^^4^  with  suff.  c. 

Rem. — The  3  fern.  2  masc.  and  1  com.  sing,  in  some  forms  with 
suffixes  are  only  distinguished  from  each  other  by  the  diacritical 
point,  which,  in  the  first  person,  stands  over  the  consonant  (vid. 
§  4).     Verbs  Med.  E.  with  suff.  follow  the  form  of  Verbs  Med.  A., 

and  retain  —  where  the  latter  retain  — ;  e.  g.  3  sing.  fem.  Al^S 

with  suff.  OlAl4^»     Yet  the  form  OlAV)»»>    occurs    in   Ps.    cxviii. 
167,  instead  of  which,  since  no  similar  example  occurs,  the  punctua- 

tion  should  perhaps  be  — .♦     The  same  is  the  case  even  in  Verbs 

Med.  Olaph.  Quies.     So  the  vowel  -.-.  belonging  to  ^|*  is  changed 

into  i—  over  Ol^js  ;  but  in  the  1  sing.,  —  remains;  e.  g.  ^Aj^|a* 

In  respect  to  verbs  1  rad,  f  and  a  quiescent,  it  should  be  remarked, 
that  where,  in  the  regular  verb,  the  first  radical  is  without  a  vowel,   ( 

retains  its  —  and  ji  its  — ;  e.  g.  OlA^^Of*     But  where,  in  the  regular 

verb,  —-  stands  over  the  fii*st  radical,  this  class  of  verbs  retains  it  in 

the  same   manner;   e.  g.  '^\  with  suff.  Oi;iO( ,    ^^.^   with   suff. 

t|\   i»      Defective  verbs,  or  those  with  Med.  Rad.  doubled,   retain 

—  in  the  pret.  unchanged,  like  the  form  ^\4^»     The  3  fem.  and  1 

sihg.  change  —  into  — ;  e.  g.  Aqj  with  sufi".  OlAoj  ;  but  they  remain 

unchanged  before  tOO  and  ^.a^  ;  e.  g.  tQDMK     Pa.  and  Aph.  retain 

the  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  unchanged.     In  respect  to  —  of  the 

second  syllable,  it  should  be  observed  that  where  Pe.  retains  — ,  Pa. 

1i  7 

retains  _ ;  but  where  - —  falls  away  or  falls  back  upon  the  first  sylla- 

ble ,  —  is  lost.     The  3  sing.  masc.  and  3  plur.  masc.  and  fem.  in  Pe. 
and  Pa.  with  suft'.,  are  hence  all  similar,  and  can  only  be  distinguished 

from  each  other  by  their  signification  in  the  context ;  e.  g.  OlX^^ 

(from  ^^4^  ^^  \i*^£i)*     But  these  forms  are  exceptions  to  this  rulQ 

when  standing  before  tOD  and  ^-»-^* 

B.    Future  with  Suffixes. 

Throughout  the  sing,  and  in  the  1  plm\,  Q  ,  which  has  been 
inserted,  remains  unchanged  before  the   suffixes   tOO   and 


IMPERATIVE   WITH   SUFFIXES.  99 

^^*     Before  the  other  suffixes  it  falls  away,  and  the  form 

v^^OJ  takes  the  sufF.  a.  1. ;  but  if  the  suff.  is  in  the  3 
person,  only  the  suffix,  a.  2.  is  used.  The  other  persons 
are  treated  according  to  the  rule  laid  down.  In  the  plur. 
the  2  and  3  niasc.  and  fem.  remain  unchanged  with  sulf.  c. 

Rem. — aji  parag.  of  the  3  sing.  fern,  falls  away,  and  is  connected 

with  the  sufF.  after  the  form  \)*^JDL*  What  is  true  of  Q  in  Pe.  is 
also  true  in  Pa.  in  respect  to  the  falling  away  of  the  vowel  of  the  last 

syllable,  excepting  before  ^OO  and  ^^^^  In  the  3  sing.  masc.  with 
suff.  of  3  person  masc. ;  e.  g.  ^uOlOiN^ni ,  _  appears  sometimes 

over  Q«  But  this  form  is  neither  mentioned  by  Amira  nor 
by  Sionita.  The  2  sing,  sometimes  takes  ju  before  the  suff.  of  the  1 
sing,  and  plur.      The  same  is  true  in  respect  to  the  imperat. ;  e.  g. 

iZoioZ  Jj  put  me  not  to  shame.     In  Verbs  Med.  E.  the  middle 


radical  retains  — ,  and  in  Verbs  3  Gutt.,  _♦  This  peculiarity,  Amira, 
p.  3 89,  refers  exclusively  to  quadriliterals ,  i.  e.  to  Aph. ;  but  examples 

are  also  found  in  Pe. ;  .e.  g.  Ps.  Ixxi.  9.  ed.  Erpen.  « il  iOn*^»Z  |J  , 

ed.  Paris.  « iinn»Z  ,  and  in  Pa.  Ps.  cxviii.  172,  « 1 1 1  'n\L*  Amira 
adds  that  this  form  is  found  particularly  in  prohibitory  negations, 
which  remark  is  likewise  confirmed  by  the  examples  given.  The 
persons  of  the  fut.  with  ^   remain    unchanged.      But   it   shotild   be 

remarked  that  if  the  form  ^Qa4qJ  takes  the  suff.  of  the  3  per.  sing. 

masc;  e*  g.  ^CTIaJoN/^OI,  sometimes  •  falls  away;  e.  g.  Matt.  viii. 

25,   ^010*rJuLJ)« 

C.     Imperative  with  Suffixes. 

The  2  sing.  masc.  ^q4^  remains  unchanged  with  suff.  a. 
2.  of  the  1  per.  sing,  and  plur.,  and  of  the  3  sing.  fem. 
When  the  suff.  is  in  the  3  sing.  masc.  the  form  of  suff.  c. 
is  used. 

In  the  2  sing.  fem.  of  the  form  ^Ao^o  with  sail',  b.  .^ 

quiesces  in  ♦ 

In  the  2  plur.  masc.  oikO^O  passes  into  Q^^Q-^  with 
buff.  b. 


100  LNTINITIVE   WITH   SUFFIXES. 

The  ^  plur.  fern,  is  rare,  and  omits  t  before  the  suffix. 
Rem. — The  imperative  with  —   and  —  in  Pe.  and  in  the  other 

7      7 

conjugations,  retains  its  vowel  unchanged ;  e.  g.  « i1  iSSn»  hear  me, 
>,*01i\no  receive  him.  Tlie  forms  of  the  imperat.  pass.,  with  an 
active  signification,  also  remain  unchanged ;  e.  g.  V^>M  ^^  reminded, 
with  sufif.  •jkX^'fDyLl*  In  respect  to  the  transposition  of  Q  in  the 
plur.  it  should  be  remarked  that  |  of  Verbs  |2)  (§  28.  1)  loses  its 
vowel  — ♦      But  in  those  [£i  Verbs  whose  imperat.  does  not  take 

*.  7  ;« 

Q ,  this  vowel  is  inserted  after  the  first  radical ;  e.  g.  0;Ld(  with  suff. 
^010;SdO(»  Yet  this  transposition  of  Q  does  not  always  take  place, 
as  the  form  tjiJoNofc^  sometimes  occurs.     In  Pa.  and  Aph.  _,  in 

7  -X  7  ^  *.  7 

Verbs  3  Gutt., ,  falls  away;  e.  g.  Ok»>*^»  with  sufF.  %jk(J\Q^*Sl» 

praise  him,  oikOOj  with  suflf.  «-»OlQ-iQO(  lead  him  hither.  Verbs 
\l  are  an  exception,  as  they  retain  — ;  e.  g.  wjJQo|^  |  do  me  good. 
Also  a  form  with  •  parag.  sometimes  occurs ;  e.  g.  tONo^  with  sufF. 
.  »m.  inV^r>o»  In  the  fern,  plur,  the  paragogic  form  is  the  more 
usual ;  but  in  Pa.  and  Aph.  both  forms  occur  together. 

D.     Infinitive  with  Suffixes. 

7  * 

The  infinitive  Pe.  \».4^^  with  suff.  a.  1.  remains  un- 
changed before  the  suff.  of  the  2  per.  plur.    The  suffixes  of 

the  other  persons  are  attached  to  the  form  ^4^k3«      But 

the  infinitives  of  the  remaining  conjugations  with  a  are 
treated  as  feminine  substantives,  the  feminine  suffixes  of 
which  (those  of  the  3  plur.  excepted,  which  are  attached 

separately  to  the  form  with  Q)  they  take,  attached  to  the 
termination  Zol  (Compare  §  45.  2.  and  §  48.  B.  feminines, 
declension  1). 

Rem. — In  Pe.,  where  —  of  the  second  syllable  falls  away,  some 
grammarians  insert,  in  its  place,  — ;  e.  g.  OlSt^nV^V  Buxtorf  adds 
yet  two  other  forms  with  Q  oc  Q  inserted  after  the  third  radical ;  e.  g. 


PARTICIPLES   WITH   SUFFIXES.  101 

wiOlQ-^Q^D  and  wtOloN^nV)*  If  the  vowel  be  — ,  as  in  Verbs 
Ql ,  it  remains  unchanged ;  e.  g.  GlSOOlQ^* 

E.     Participle    with  Suffixes. 

Participles,   which   are   considered   as  nouns,    take  their 
suffixes.     This  occurs,  however,  more  rarely  in  the  part,  act., 

where  either  prepositions  are  used  ;  e.  g.  5^^ ,  ^^iSn  who 
seek  thee^  or  a  noun  formed  from  the  participle  is  joined  with 

the  suffix;  e.  g.  jA  supporting^  OljO^l  his  helper.  On  the 
contrary  participles  with  separate  pronouns  (vid.  §  18.  4. 
Rem.),  or  with  afformatives  (§  20)  form  the  present  tense. 


102 


KEGULAE   VERBS   WITH   SUFFIXES. 


Proper  Form. 


Sing.  ]   c. 


2  m. 


Pret.    Pe.  )       y^ 
Sing.  3  m.)         ^» 


.  >iV^o 


2   f. 


y^ 


inV^Q 


3f. 
2  m. 


tS46 


i&^ 


;av^ 


-  »«^AV^<^ 


AV^ 


J^l^ 


2f. 
1  c. 


iAl4£) 


Ai4o 


Ai:^ 


»^'Al4£> 


^t^^ 


Plur.  3  m.        oii^ 


3f. 


2  m. 


V 


o"A}^k^ 


wiJuoAL^ 


2f. 


:ai^ 


^Al^D 


1  c. 


.^, 


J^i^^ 


.  >«^lV^O 


Infinit. 


^5^^^ 


•.^1X4^1:1^0 


I    imp.  sing.)      VJ^Q^^ 
'        2  m.)  ' 


^.4J^^q4^ 


»^K4qSd 


2  f. 


wAci4£3 


«>i  iXq4q 


Plur.  2  m.     qLq4^ 


iqI^qo 


2f. 


^1q'4o 


^'ut.sing.)      V^^J 
3  m.     )       ^^*b'— '-• 


«.Ai^fe>n,3 


5^^^4^ 


.AnS^oi 


Plur.  3  m.    .o\f^,n.i 


oV^rM 


«^jq14^ 


«»nfoSt)n.i 


Pret.  Pa. 


"^6 


.ilNfcjD 


>^^ 


^i^Kf)^ 


Infin.Pa.      oL^nLo 


>^2o\f)nV) 


^Zol^'nk) 


xD^ZoSf^nV)  I 


REGULA.R  VERBS    WITH  SUFFIXES. 


103 


]          S  m. 

1- 

3f. 

Plur.  1  c. 

2  m. 

2  f . 

cnS^ 

^S^ 

^dai^ 

Ol2\l4i3 

oi^^^^ 

(tHo 

.qdAS^o 

^Ail^o 

;    ^CTU^^I^ 

oiAL^D 

(tHo 

■5f 

* 

^aiaki\l|^ 

GuAl^ 

^'Al^D 

* 

1 

1         cnWla 

ci2^^^ 

1            * 

.qoAL^ 

^Al^ 

^moLAr) 

•  9  -x.          r 

P   -X.       .      7 

•X       P   «>t      .     7 

1         "^  "^v  *  '' 

1            i'^Q^{)0 

— .k^QJO^AjO 

^Gu!L^ 

0  ..  .T,         7 

«v          P  ..•i»         7 

1       .^va';; 

1        ........ 

.  , Ai ^KAo 

waOujoAL^ 

ouoAL^o 

^o"a1^ 

■?(■ 

* 

^oia-LiM^^ 

^'Al^ 

* 

* 

1 

oiiL^ 

* 

•X          P.         7 

i'^iVAo 

!        n^^Q^ 

oi!i4ci^ 

^S4^ 

^•anL^'ciV) 

.AV^'^oVrt 

;    ,jcna^a4o 

01.1.^04^ 

^ 

■X- 

.^aicu.S(i4£) 

■x- 

«              1 

1    ^oial^Qo 

oioL^Qo 

^ 

4f 

«^au.i^XQ4o 

rrii  >Ko^p 

1 

* 

oixl^^^j 

t:^^ 

^oaLa^oj 

.-»01jJq14qj 

oijol^xnj 

^jq14^ 

.aaiaL^^j 

■«   P    9.«       .           -« 

oiIIAo 

oill^D 

.^ 

fOa\/\o 

.  »n\^o 

oi7Ql4'nV> 

cfi'Zal^'o^ 

^'Zal^Qk) 

.qdZqI^JqLd, 

^oZoi^^OSO 

104    SUFFIXES  TO  VERBS  WITH   THIRD  RADICAL  OLAPH  QUIESCENT 

§  37.    Suffixes  to    Verbs  with  third  Radical  Olajph 
Quiescent  (]])♦ 

Yerbs  ]]  (§  32)  differ  so  widely  in  their  mode  of  connection 
with  suffixes,  from  regular  verbs,  as  to  demand  a  separate 
treatment.    It  may  be  remarked  in  general : 

1.  That  the  termination  iL  either  loses  1 ,  as  in  the  3  sing, 
masc.  pret.  Pe.,  or  in  the  sing.  masc.  of  the  imperat.  Pa., 
Aph.,  Shaph.  with  suff.  c ;  or  ]  is  changed  into  »a.  movable, 
as  in  the  infinit.  Pe.  with  suff.  a.  1,  excepting  before  .QO  , 
^jJd  ,  where  the  ^  which  has  arisen  from  |  also  falls  away, 
according  to  some.  So  the  termination  of  the  fut.  V-  is 
changed  into  a-  with  suff.  b. 

2.  Forms  which  end    in  «a.  either  omit entirely,  and 

connect  the  suff.  a.  1,  with  a.  movable,  as  3  sing.  masc.  pret. 

Pa.   and  Aph.  (and  sometimes   Pe.  with  wk  final),  or  

remains  with  suff.  b,  as  2  sing.  masc.  imperat.  Pe.,    and, 

without  exception ,  —  remains  also  in  the  first  case  before 

•X  f>  0 

•oa  ,  ^^^»  The  terminations  of  the  imperat.  fem.  .-k_  , 
^^i.>  ■  are  changed  into  -^  (or  ujL)  with  suff.  b,  and  into 
l-»-  with  suff.  c. 

3.  The  forms  which  end  with  Q  otiant,,  take  for  Q  the 

forms  OQ  (and  o].-) ;  and  for  Q.^-  the  form  Qa  unchanged  in 
all  the  preceding  cases  with  suff.  b ;  e.  g.  3  plur.  masc. 
pret.  of  all  the  conjugations  excepting  Peal. 

In  respect  to  individual  persons  of  this  class  of  verbs  with 
suffixes,  the  following  should  be  remarked  : 

A.     Preter.  with  Suffixes. 
(Comp.  Table  of  Verbs  JJ   with  Suffixes. 

Tlie  3  sing.  masc.  P.t  loses  1  and  appends  suff  b,  and 
suff.  •^OU  of  the  3  sing.  masc.  to  the  form  -L^^^ 


FUTURE   WITH   SUFFIXES.  105 

The  3  sing.  fern.  A!L..  takes,  unchanged,  suff.  a.  1.    The 
same  is  true  of  the  1  sing.  Aj-^.i* 

2  sing.  masc.  A^yi  takes,  unchanged,  suff.  c. 

2  sing.  fern.  .uAjlL..  attaches  suff.  b.  to  the  form  ^A^.t* 

3  plur.  masc.  Q^yt  is  changed  into  OQ^  ,  (and  o|^ai)with 
suffb.  ^  \.  \. 

3  plur.  fem.  ^^yt  remains  unchanged  with  suff.  c. 

2  masc.  and  fem.  and  1  plur.  take,  unchanged,  suff.  c. 

Hem.   Yerbs  3  rad.  ^ ,  as  they  are  mostly  intransitives, 
take  no  suffixes  in  Peal.     But  Pa.  and  Aph.  of  these  verbs 

with  a  transitive  signification,  as  well  as  of  Yerbs  U  with  the 

same  ending,  take  suff.  a.  1,  with  the  falling  away  of , 

excepting  before  ^a:3  ,  iQS ,  where remains.     The  3  sing. 

fem.  remains  unchanged  in  Pa.  Aa\..  and  Aph.  AlL.."!*   The 

same  is  true  also  of  the  1  sing,  in  both  conjugations.  The 
3  plur.  masc.  occurs  mostly  before  the  suff.,  with  O  doubled 

{see  Amira^  p.  372);  e.g.  Ps.  liv.  3,  ed.  MJrpen.^  oiOQlii 
they  have  sought  them.    Sometimes  the  original  1  appears 

4v       «  7 

before  both  00;  e.  g.  Ps.  Ixxvii.  16,  »^oo(p^  they  have  seen 
thee.  In  Pa.  Q^yi  and  Aph.  Q^ytl?  —  falls  away  before 
the  suff.,  and  jl  becomes  movable ;  but  Q  quiesces  in  — ;  e.  g. 
O*^  with  suff.  >-cLjjL  ;  oAiVwith  suff.  ^QDoi/ul*  The  3 
plur.  fem.  in  Pa.  and  Aph.  in  the  simple  form,  takes  the  suff. 
given  in  the  tab.  with  the  falling  away  of  —  over  *j ;  e.  g. 
waOIi  ■Vytl*  The  paragogic  form  of  these  two  conjugations 
takes  suff.  c.  given  in  the  table,  without  change. 

B.     Future  with  Suffixes, 

The  3  sing.  masc.  floJ  and  All  the  persons  which  terminate 

with  \L ,  affix  to  the  form  ^^SyJ  suff.  b.     The  2  and  3  plur 

masc.  and  fem.  remain  unchanged,  and  are  connected,  as  in 
the  regular  verb,  with  suff.  c. 


106  IMPERATIVE    AND   INFINITIVE   WITH   SUFFIXES. 

Rem.    This  mode  of  formation  also  occurs  in  Pa.  and 

Apli.    Sometimes  also  —  takes  the  place  of in  the  suif. 

3  sing.  fern. ;  e.  g.  Matt.  i.  19,  oujju  that  he  should  dismiss 

her^  or  in  Pa. ;  e.  g.  Luke  xiii.  18,  20,  OUlDjj  I  shall  liken 

it.  And  with  the  falling  away  of  «-»;  e.  g.  tOSOja]  /  will 
show  you^  the  correctness  of  which  Lud.  de  Dieu^  p.  398, 
doubts. 

C.  Imperative  with  Suffixes. 

2  sing.  masc.  *^yi  is  unchanged  with  suif.  h. 

2  sing.  fern.  •J^yr  is  changed  into  j»-^y«  with  suff.  b. 

2  plur.  masc.  Q^..  is  changed  into  OQ^.t  (and  op..)  with 
suff.  b.  ^  ^  ^ 

2  plur.  fein.  ^^i  i\..  affixes  suff.  c.  to  the  form  J-^y** 
Hem.   The  imperat.  Pa.  (Jyt  and  Aph.  Jj..|  take  the  suf- 
fixes of  the  pret.  in  connection  with  the  3  or  1  person ;  e.  g. 

oiflDf  heal  her.  The  same  is  true  in  the  plur.  masc.  of  the 
same  conjugations.  In  the  fem.,  the  paragogic  form  with 
suff.  c.  is  the  usual  one.     (Compare  2,  above.) 

D.  Infinitive  with  Suffixes. 

In  the  infinit.  Pe.  V-or^,  in  place  of  ] ,  ^  without  a  vowel 

is  inserted  with  suff.  a.  1.     In  respect  to  the  falling  away 

of  A,  before  ^QO,  ^xO ,  (see  1.  above,)  Lud.  de  Dieu^  p.  395, 
doubts.  The  infinitives  of  the  other  conjugations  are  treat- 
ed as  in  the  regular  verb.     (Compare  §  36,  D.) 


E.     Participle  with  Suffixes. 

(Compare  §  20  and  §  36,  E.) 

Passive. 

Active. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

Plur.                 Sing. 

vlV^,v\ 

^A 

^^k      '^k 

\> 

^^^ 

,S^^^ 

^    \    7,^^ 

ff. 

^^ 

!r. 

PARTICIPLE   WITH   SUFFIXES.  107 

The  participles  of  the  other  conjugations  are  inflected  in 
a  similar  manner,  retaining  the  characteristic  vowels ;  e.  g. 

Pa.  act.  .oZu^^  ye  a^/l',  .Aph.  ^ujQiD  we  tharik^  Ethpe. 

^1  iT^ASd  we  turn  about. 

General    Bemark, 

Yerbs  of  the  form  of  piJD  to  console^  never  lose  the  third 
radical  letter  1  when  taking  a  suffix,  but  throw  back  i'^s 
vowel  upon  the  middle  radical,  which,  according  to  §  36,  usu- 
ally stands  vacant ;  e.  g.  pret.  3  sing.  masc.  •.jujIjLo  ,  «^]Il3 , 
3  p]!.  masc.  t-uJoV»j::i,  5^o]ujd,  fem.  ^-^Ijld,  .aaulAr:),  fut.  3 
sing.  masc.  ^aJJ-lOJ,  ^ |  i  n  1,  imperat.  2  sing.  masc.  ^jJuVi^a, 

P  7     7  i  ^     ^  17     7  *      T 

uiOuV*^ ,  fem.  wijufu^ ,  ^010^1^2 )  2  plur.  masc.  toVaJO , 

..7  7  P. .7 


108 


VERBS  |]  WITH  SUFFIXES. 


Proper  Form. 

Sing.  1    c. 

2     m. 

2     f. 

^'ret.  Sing.  Pe.  j       '{{a 

1                r     7 

3  m.     Pa.  ^    wkQja 

7        7 
wftJ.JlCLKA 

P           7 

71              7 

Pe.   (       2-0 
^/-         Pa.    (   Alm^ 

p,p 

1  c.                   Zu-o 

* 

yt^\a 

.  ^asTAj'^ 

P^wr.  3  w.  -j 

•X             7 

«.               7      1 

••7 

3     /.           ]      ^^ 

-O  7 
P     »7 

..p  7 

p  *    7.. 

•  ••R       7 

/?l/w.                     Tr^=^ 

^;n!i 

^'^ 

^a^-'nV) 

2  m.  ]   Pa.  \           -^.^ 

P  7 

* 

* 

2    /.                     --^ 

^ll-^ 

* 

* 

PZwr.  2  m.                0'^ 

* 

* 

2/                  ^\ 

P  -^tP 

! 

* 

Pwiwr.  3   w.             VrQJ 

■7\             -R 

VERBS 

IJ    WITH    SUFFfXKS. 

109 

j          3  m. 

3f. 

Plur.  1  c. 

2  TO. 

~2f.        1 

•^         7 

01^ 

.      P          7 

p 

7          7 

•X         p 
».              17 

-R        I     7 

1 

ai2-£) 

GlisJr^ 

oi2L^ 

•)<• 

-     A   ^ 

^/u-^ 

•X                 7 

dioo-o 
diol-jo 

.CU£CJ 

•X          -x       7 

.QO00*r£) 

-^    -X       7 
-^    .X               7 

..       p  7 

pT. 

p^r. 

-«p':. 

V         1^ 
^  p  i<  T. 

au;nV> 

6u\cx}i) 

7               -n 

X 

P     7 

6u^ 

.     P   7 

P  7 

•jf 

•jt 

IP 

.  ip 

ip 
^xp 

•jf 

* 

^IJ,LI 

•X       7 

.      .X       7 
.       .Xij7 

•X- 

1 

p-n  .p 

.     p  -^lP 

^Vl 

* 

•jf 

^•r^ 

.on  ifo  1 

-n     -».        i» 

110  AUXILIAKY    VERBS,    OR    VERBS    SUBSTANTIVE. 

§  38.    Auxiliary  Verbs^  or  Verbs  Substantive. 

1.    There  are  in  Syriac  two  auxiliary  verbs  (verbs  sub- 

IP 
001  to  be^  which,  in  Hebrew, 
exists  as  Yau  conversive,  is  used  to  form  the  moods  and 
tenses  which  are  wanting  (see  §  18.  4.  Bern.).     The  other, 

which  is  properly  a  noun,  A^  being^  substance^  essence  {essen- 
tia)^ with  Olaph  prosthetic  Lk\ ,  takes  the  place  of  the  aux- 

001,  belongs  to 

Yerbs  ]] ,  like  which  it  is  inflected,  but  in  respect  to  which 
it  is  to  be  particularly  observed,  that,  when  connected  with 
the  participle,  preter.or  future,  the  01  (with  Linea  occultans) 

is  not  pronounced ;  this  is  also  the  case  when  the  verb  is 

IP  X  7 

001  *0k\M  he 

has  begun.    Upon  the  double  formation  of  the  fut.  (oou 

and  looiJ,  see  §  35,  2,  c.    The  inflection  of  Lk\  is  as  follows : 


Plur. 

F,         a         M. 

^Lj\  {we  are) 
—m^La\    (ye  are)    .QQ^Aji| 
—aOUA^I  {they  are)  .OOIaZLiJ 


Sing. 
F.  C.  M. 

^LiV    {lam)  1. 

iLiV  {tliou  art)  y^l^X  2. 
GVj^LkX{he,  she  is)  ^OloZul^'s. 


2.  In  connection  with  U  is  formed  Zu.^,  which  is  inflect- 
ed similarly  to  Aaf ;  e.  g.  *^^a.S  /  arn  not.  tu]  in  connec- 
tion with  looi  forms  the  imperfect;  e.  g.  looi  Lj]  or  looi 

^cioluXhe  was.  The  same  tense  is  also  expressed  by  looi 
looi.  looi  doubled  marks  the  pluperfect ;  e.  g.  A^ooi  AaOOI 
/  had  been.  . 


DERIVATION  OF  NOUNS.  Ill 


CHAPTEE     III 


The    Noun. 


§  39.     Derivation  of  Nouns. 

1.  Nouns,  as  in  Hebrew  and  Chaldee,  are  primitive, 
derivative,  and  sometimes  compounded.  To  primitives 
belong  nouns  of  one  and  two  syllables,  which  indicate  ani- 
mals, plants,  metals,  numbers,  members  of  the  bodies  of 
animals,  etc.  (See  Gesenius^  Lehrgeb.  p.  478,  sq.).  Inasmuch 
as  they  coincide  with  simple  verbal  forms,  they  are  always 
recognized  as  nouns  by  the  nature  of  the  object  which  they 

designate  ;  e.  g.  \n\'^Jlesh,  JOOl;  gold^  i*^rno  silver.  The 
derivatives,  which  are  by  far  the  most  numerous,  are  form 
ed  partly  from  verbs  (verbals),  and  partly  from  nouns 
(denominatives). 

2.  The  derivation  of  nouns  is  effected ;  a)  without  any 
change  of  the  original  word  ;  e.  g.  ^■■^So  counsel,  from 
<■  \V)  to  counsel ;  \>J^  mourning,  from  ^\s1  to  mourn  ; 
or  by  a  mere  change  of  the  vowel ;  e.  g.  j^-SJsO  king, 
\££i\  fetter ;  h)  by  the  falling  away  of  the  radical  letter  ;  e.  g. 
\L±M  sleep,  from  ^a^  ;  (As  •  care,  from  •Zi  .-j  ;  (JQ^  •  the 
heart,  from  «.nn\  ;  but  especially  c)  by  the  addition  of 
formative  letters  or  of  entire  syllables.  Those  letters,  if 
initial,  are  1 ,  SsO ,  u,  2 ,  *  ;  if  medial,  they  are  ^  and  Q  ; 
final,  1 ,  •  ,  Z»  Several  of  these  formative  letters  are  some- 
times found  in  the  same  noun  ;  e.  g.  yiV)\Z  scholar, 
Xl^QM  dominion,  1ZoiV)»i;V)  compassion,  1Aa^0i\»  fame. 


1.12  XOUXS   DERIVED    FROM    VERBS. 

§  40.     Nouns  derived  from   Verbs. 

Verbal  nouns  are  kindred  either  to  participles,  and  de- 
note the  subject  or  object  of  the  action  (Concrete  Nouns),  or 
they  are  kindred  to  the  infinitive,  and  receive  the  significa- 
tion of  the  action  or  quality  itself  (Abstract  Nouns).  But 
frequently  in  the  formation  of  these  nouns,  rare  or  obsolete 
forms  of  the  infinitives  and  participles  arc  chosen.  The 
following  tables  present  a  collective  view  of  the  modes  of 
formation. 


TABULAR  VIEW      OFDERIVATIVE  NOUNS.  113 


TABULAR    VIEW 

OF 

NOUNS  DERIVED  FROM  REGULAR  AND  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


I.    PARTICIPIAL    FORMS 
A.    oTpeAL. 


a.    The  simple  hut  unusual  Participial  Forms ^  ivhich  are  most- 
ly Adjectives. 


Absolute  state,  f  ^^O 
Emphat.  state.,    (   V^ 
^..     a  man. 
^Aj     an  associate. 
M^ryt     leprous. 
Ql  and  «.«J^ 


1 

^\^ 

v^ 

Whsi 

foolish. 

P'oio 

ruralf  quiet. 

^•^ 

sick'. 

pure. 

^OiS     mournful 

V  and    Ji. 
QM,  \aQM     equal.  \tkO     hard. 


pil4  impure  ;     >,j>.tCX)  much. 


From  these   are  derived   Abstract  Nouns  ;  e.  g.  |ZQ.iAOAarc?w<'55; 
(Zo|A.|lb   multitude. 


114  TABULAE  VIEW  OF  DERIVATIVE  NOUNS. 


b.      Usual  Participial  Forms  of  Peal. 


a.     Active.  /3.     Passive. 

Absolute  state,  j  ^O  j  ^^.^  j  \j^ 

Emphat.  state,  ^  ]]^  (   111*4^  ^  llli^^ 

901CD  a  witness.  X)  i  ^n  sound.  »Q->>1  righteous, 

>a3|  6/ac^.  f^LkOl«A  given.  'r^vU  ^  hireling, 

•Jk2)  Ql  and  wk.!  wkJZ) 

PdA^  a^i  inhabitant.  •^o^  cursed.  {■■*S   i  c?ry. 

frOJ  a  herdsman.  ;jQ1  6Z/w(?.  'r-Kt^  long-suffering. 

Ql  and  wii  ^  Ml' 

•P.        ^                     .  l"*!  *PI7 

(^.▲.^  reviling.  (,Oi/^4  renowned.  |*^in»t  beloved. 

iJ  |jljk*/re^.  IJ  A.^>  rare. 

t.Ll>  a  herdsman.  P 

pQl»*  a  landlord.  (fiOD  concealed. 

U'and  la  U'and  U 

lim]  a  physician.  \\Si  m.  '\Lk\Si  f.  beautiful. 
j]"and  li 

Ipi  beautiful.  U    and   ^ 


Vk<iOJ  prophet^  \Ljl^1  prophetess. 

Here  belong  also  AbstractNouns,  as  |ZQaJ»l  AmZm^,  ]Zon>n4 
publication^  \Lqi\^  freedom,  Q^^?1  and  |Z.QLQjt)l  righteousness, 
iZoai*^    I  dryness. 


TABULAR  VIEW  OF   DERIVATIVE  NOUNS.  115 


c.     With  Immutable  Vowels. 

t " '■ > 

Ab.  Stat.,  j  ^^\^    ^q4^  ,  ^q4^      \a^O      ^OO  &  with  J 

f»»\^  a  plough-        JQl]  sma^/.     J^Oryl  «  ^^«^-  (r>V)QCD       a  r^«/ 
man.  '  ^pheraer.  {color). 

^a^»<  weak.        ^Q.Xm  a  mo6,   ^0)1  a  sower.     •AS^xi)  a  friend, 
a  rabble. 

_2)  •  fej  |£)         merer.']      \si 

\^  a  carpenter.  \}a2i\a  preacher.  ^•0)(  a  ham-  ^SODOf  6Zac^. 

Ql  and  «.LL  ^2)  Q^  and  wtA     Pr^O|aj905.<?6$5or. 

jOki  a  spend-     UQ^J  c?a?7ip.  pQ^I  a  ^iv^r.     CLL  and  wiJL 

thrift.  CLL  and  t^.^^ 

p.^9  a  judge.  (aOa)  a  destroyer.  \LQA\sOmortal.  yl^Q^  fortunate. 

Mi  Mi  Mi  ^    ^• 

.ppv  *p ».     7  ^p -x  p  ^*p  ^   <K    ^^'vorce. 

jjrj  a  combatant.  f?Orit  a  youth.  nOVy.  «  barber.  |J-^Oj  a  6///  o/" 

\}\^  an  orator.  ^Qa.*  a  spy.      P  >  5  a  cleft. 

P  and  wkL         U  and  ♦.^.^         |J  and  «^ 

PiV*^  a  seer.     H^H^  mournful.   mO;2  creator. 

I'  >^*  g'm'e^.  (OOJ •  a  mocker. 

B'and  ]2) 

»P      P  ^7 

|.aJZ)(  a  baker. 


From  these  are  formed   Abstract  Nouns,   like  iZoa\»i  rejection^ 
IZOJQII  littleness^  IZobOjI  division^  IZoJO*!  5'i«^i'wy,  etc. 


116 


TABULAE   VIEW   OF    DERIVATIVE   NOUNS. 


B.    PARTICIPIAL    FORMS, 
a.    Of  the  other  Active  Conjugations. 


Pael. 

It  takes  the  usual] 
form,  and  the  form  j 

with  ^1-  and  the  j 

form  U^QiD  J 

P^^Sd  a  leader. 
|o«(T>Vn  poor. 

]l^\V)  a  teacher. 


a  torturer. 


QL  and  «.»^ 
L.OpO  united. 

}^'^  high. 

Uand^ 
|l-i^i^ll7  seditious. 

-^0  0       7 

pUjOlSD  a  leader. 

11  and^ 
|l  »f1D  yiiD  a  physician. 

a  and  ]i 
Pf  i^V>  a  comforter. 


Aphel. 
Usual    form    and  ] 


^^naV>  a  dwelling. 
|^n\V)  pincers. 
^JOanV)  an  offense. 

7  7 

^»>0V)  despairing. 

pp|nV)  injurious. 
QL  and  ijlI 

]]  and  ^' 
(VmIo  a  watch-tower. 
pOVyjJisO  a  sickle. 

]]  and  *jl£) 
jlajQib  a  confessor. 


Sbapliel. 
Usual    form     and 

10  7 

,n\«V)  a  slave. 

'k'p  fO  7 

|*^\»ti  changing, 

^P     P  7 

p^lOs  a  deliverer, 

]Jand«^ 
|>  NSaV)  proud. 
Part.  pass. 

t7  7 

t  i  NSnaVi  completed. 


From  these  are  derived  Abstract  Nouns,  as  (ZQJ;^,iD  direction, 
]2oi'^SV>  doctrine,  VZoiIflolli  healing,  &c. 


TABULAR  VIEW  OF  DERIVATIVE  NOUNS. 

b.     Of  the  Passive  Conjugatwns. 
Ethpeel. 


117 


Ethpaal. 
Usual   form   and 


Eshtaphal. 
Usual   form    and 

0      %P0 


Usual    form    and  |        Usual   lorm   and  |  Usual   torm    and  j 

those  with  y^Xi.      )      those  with  # ,  ]1      )  those  with  t ,  (1       ) 

Ql  and  *jil            U^lf^ASo  curdled.  ]]  and  ^ 

]irn«^2ASQ  entreat-               J^  ll  i\V)Zl<iilO /^/Z. 
^ilr*Z\iO  Renowned. 

Ml 
]l^SV)Ak?  eloquent. 


C.    PARTICIPIAL  FORMS  OF  LESS   FREQUENT  CONJUGATIONS. 


Palel.                            Pealel.  Paiel 

Usual  form  and  |           Usual  form  and  )  Usual  form  and  ) 

InbO^A^^  ^  church-  (V>\V)\»  unhurt.  (j4-l£)  a  farrier, 
treasurer. 


Parel. 
Usual  form  and  ^ 

10.       7  ^ 


Taphel.  Qu.  ""-iliterals. 

Usual  form  and  |      ]£  •AnLo 


|Jy.;>j  a  pitcher.  \jlyJ^L  an  interpreter. 

^aCi;mV)  sudden.        |,  >V)\Zi  a  pupil. 


an  accuser. 


118  TABULAR   VIEW   OF   DERIVATIVE  NOUNS. 


II.    INFINITIVE  FOEMS. 


A.    OF  PEAL. 


a.     Simple  Infinitive  Forms — Segliolates. 

Absolute  state,  J  ^^y.^  j  ^5\4^  J  ^Q^O 

Einphat.  state,  ^   ll^i)  ('  B^^  ^  U^QO 

[mSll  the  soul.  y^^'i  rain.  pt>QD  holiness. 

|V7m>\  bread.  X**-^}  morning.  P9Q2  the  knee. 

]j^La  sea-grass,  \r^\  «  lamb.  \*^yQ'\  a  way. 

yO'rA  herbage.  «ji:Z) 

|,X*  a  child.  I  As*   c?2'%e7ice,  (for  lAa^-a). 

Q2^  and  «.i^  Ql  and  «.aJL  Q1  and  «.iJL 

(2qVo  death.  P-*^  peace.  l^Q-4  goodness. 

L.Ol  a  yoke.  fjjij  a  dwelling.  (QCO  aw  e?ic?. 

|j  and  w^  |J  and  «jl}^ 
(0,-M  yoy.                    1 1  N»  rest. 

Ml  ^^  Mi 

(Vi*  a  treasure.  \^^  the  heart.  |)GlO  coldness. 

]]  and  K  W'and  K  U'and  ^^i) 

(Zja  countenance.  |Zo|J  /nr^or,  lAaoj  anguish. 


It  is  seldom  that  all  three  forms  are  found  derived  from  one  orig- 
inal ;  e.  g.  iJ^A*  a  rope^  U^jsi  a  pestilence^  JJSCLm  g^dlt ;  oftener 
two  forms,  as  |Jl  an  oak,  \i]  a  storm  (from  ml). 


TABULAR   VIEW   OF    DKllIVATIVP:   NOUNS. 


119 


b.    Infinitive  Forms  with  Immutable  Vowels. 


Abs.stat.  )  ^\^      (  ^Q£) 


Em.  Stat.  / 


\y\^a  htrd.  \  ^S^OJ  a punc-    ^A^n^N  seizure.     oLaCD  foll(/. 

If!^  a  work.  ture.                V>?nnV)  affiance.  IZonSV)  a  kiwj 

J2)  (r^Q^  gleaning.             (2) 

VrCol  a  girdle.  ]2)  (and  ]J)     IIjQCoV  a/ei/er. 

|rCu|  renown. 

\  "  - » ^ 

P^  ,,..    ^                      Qi.and*Al 

•)?1.L               ,  IJ^Q^  ^rac?^7^(m.  ')«'    ^     .  ,7    .-          Ql  ar 

ppaO  a  vessel.  yk fO •  talkative-      ^      y 

oi  and  JL:^  ,,.^      ^                 ^^5*. 

}^y  a  floioing.  ^^  ^"^  *^ 

]]  and  ^  P^0Q2);>er>m^. 

Uv^Ol     medita-  1*^??  «  ^"'^^^^''^^. 


Mi 

|]  and  ^j^Si 
*p  p I 
f *Si  a  sprout. 


Ql  and  «.a^ 

on  I  ^  favor. 

II  and  ^ 

(Zq.aJ1  indecency. 

«p.  -x         7 

(Z.QjiOVm  appear- 
ance. 

\l0Q1O  posses- 
sion. 

llandU 

(ZQa^Q     orna- 
ment. 


(nnn\    confi- 


dence. 


M  and  ^ 


^jjtQj  error. 


120  TABULAR  VIEW  OF  DERIVATIVE  NOUNS. 


B.    USUAL  INFINITIVE  FORMS   OF  PEAL  AND  OF  THE 
OTHER   CONJUGATIONS. 


Peal  Pael.  Aphel.  SliapLel. 

.  Usual  form  Usual  form  Usual  foim  and 

and  and 

V^4ak),^^in!i,  ^^4^2^  ^H^  "^^^ 

^a^ck)  or  ^q4o2       lAn«»»V)  l^^>iQ^ 

thought.  change. 

^oSOrSaO  a  bed.  \ciMJLZiL  flattery.  |Zo,n\«  slavery. 

^^^  a  desert.  l^r^Z  help.       (JiAaSD  a  concussion. 
PqaQ^  a  thrust.  \»0LDL  combat.  |>*0C1S  delay, 

]^  '\Zi  \zi  ]si 

Y^\^  a  speech.  ]LhQ.y»]I.mer-     IZqJ^QLo  c?e 

chandise.  struction. 

tf  u  o  - 

VS,^  insight.  ^tx^^^oLdespair.^t^UXOLJ^a  gift.  \ti\OQM  deliver- 
_2)  Ql  and  «.aJL  ^  ance. 

ilO£^  departure.  |;fr>V)  ri  sa'^;. 

fj^oaLo  bellows.  ]A»Q^Z  rubbish.         i;nV)  a  /iO^. 

Ql  and  .-Jl  U  and  wi^        ]]  (and  "Js)         (J  and  »^ 

fZlSiO  harken-  1 A i moZ  a  man-  IZq^AaSD  an  a5-   ]i.>.V)a»  cow- 
^  2/1^.  tie.  sembly.  elusion. 

]]'and  *aX     P'and  ^jlS  P'and  w»^  IJ  and  *j^ 

}]'^  a  drawing  X^i^^  doctrine.  IZoi  i<=^0V)  cow-  VijOQ*  a  jt?ro- 
*ojf  (of  water).         *  elusion.  misc. 

l]"and  la 

]A-i  Z|SD  arrival. 


TABULAR  VIEW  OF  DERIVATIVE  NOUNS. 


121 


C.     INFINITIVE  FORMS  OF  THE  LESS  FREQUENT 
CONJUGATIONS. 


Palel  and  Palpel. 

Pealel. 

Pavel  and  Paiel. 

..ox          V 

f;j)C11     splendor. 

I'i^SnSv^Sji  in- 

]lLoZ a  worm. 

Ql  and  tJkL 

nocence. 

l]"and  •A 

]j|J^Q..    motion. 

Pali. 

|J2i-lQ2)  contam- 
ination. 

JuCni^QS   astonish- 
ment. 

Parel.  Pamel.  Taphel. 

^OIlQflO  swiftness.  (;l!iDO»  shame.         |,V)\oZ  doctrine. 


122  DENOMINATIVE  NOUNS. 

§  41.     Denominative  Nouns. 
Here  belong  : 

1.  Koans  ;  a)  without  any  formative  additions,  derived 
from  some  other  nouns,  which  may  be  either  primitives  or 
derivatives  of  verbs ;  e.  g.  f^yt  «  gardener^  from  JJOl..  a 
garden ;  ]»»\V>  a  seaman^  from  ]fcii\V)  salt  ;  h)  with  the 
formative  syllables  "U-  masc,  IZL-  fern.,  (Patronymics  or 
Gentile  Nouns) ;  e.g.  '^Sdo?''  Roman,  l/U^',rCL»'| /sraeZiVess  ; 
with  the  falling  away  of  the  syllable  J3DQ  in  names 
of  towns  ;  e.  g.  V^xoa]  an  Ephesian,  from  •^ooma]^;  or 
Feminine  Abstract  Nouns,  terminating  in  Vq  and  1A^ ;  e.g. 
IZoiX^  youthfalness,  from  fll^  a  youth ;  12o;^Ql  Hind- 
ness,  from  ;^Q1  blind;  JA.1.JU9  beginning,  from  tAaS  ^Ae 
Aeac?,  principal ;  c)  diminutives  with  tQ  or  *flDQ  masc.  and 
IZUJQ  fem.  attached  to  the  noun;  e.  g.  X^o*^  a  little  son, 
from  1;r:i  ;  "IjOk*!  a  little  brother,  from  Ia*]  ;  lA^oZ^Q  a  lit- 
tle daughter  from  IZ^Q  ;  |fl0on\o  a  young  dog,  from  ]n\r)» 
Sometimes  we  find  both  forms  in  use ;  e.  g.  IJO'f^i..  and 
JCDO;^..  a  manikin,  from  Ir^yi^  Dimmutives  from  com- 
pound  nouns  also  occur ;  e.  g.  pQAJ;!D  from  (aj;2  ;  also 
a  double  formation  ;  e.  g.  poflDOjCi..  a  very  little  man, 
IA^qAjoZji:^  a  very  little  daughter. 

Rem. — Amira  (p.  145)  mentions  a  form  with  the  third  radical 
letter  doubled,  and  Q  inserted  between  them  ;  e.g.  ]h^o{)o\  a  little 
assembly,  from  ]«i^^» 

2.  Adjectives  belong  here,  which  are  formed  ;  a)  by  affix- 
ing the  terminations  p  masc.  and  IZLj  fem. ;  e.  g.  ^LmO) 
masc.  IAaLmoS  fem.,  spiritual,  from  paOj  ;  h)  by  afiixing 
the  terminations  V»  masc.  IAju-  fem.  ;    e.  g.  U^SosQ..  masc. 


COMPOSITE   AND    EXOTIC   NOUNS.  123 

|A>V)»Qyt  fern,  corporeal  from  |Sq»Q..  ;  ordinal  numerals 
(see  §  50.  8) ;  e.  g.  tkLSl  the  third,  from  ]i!il ;  c)  by  affix- 
ing the  terminations  \^  masc.,  IAjJ  fem.;  e.g.  ]il  mO>  masc., 
VZuiI*Oj  fern. 

Rem. — In  respect  to  the  cases  under  a.  and  c.  above,  Amira  re- 
marks (p.  106)  that  the  latter  is  rather  used  in  metaphorical  lan- 
guage, yet  he  also  admits  the  interchange  of  the  two  forms. 


§  42.     Composite  and  Exotic  Nouns. 

1.  The  formation  of  words  by  composition  is  more  frequent 
m  Syriac  than  in  the  other  Semitic  dialects,  (see  Michaelis, 
p.  151 ;  Lud.  de  Dieu,  pp.  73,  74).  The  words  most  fre- 
quently used  in  forming  compounds  are  ^p  son  ;  e.  g.  pu;^ 
man^  poZjIDuozce;  >\1Q  sir ;  e.g.  t^Q,  NS*^  enemy;  *^hmuch; 
e.  g.  iLkSH  JD)  householder;  ^Aaj principal ;  e.g.  (AjAuu) 
firstling;  ]LkJ^ house;  e.g.  AjJD  ]msiO  corn-house;  sometimes 
^^1  eating  ;  e.  g.  1  *;nSol  adversary.  In  changing  the 
Concrete  idea  into  the  Abstract,  either  the  last  part  of  the 
compound  word  only  is  regarded  ;  e.g.  l2on*o,Vsn  hostility, 
or  both  parts  are  changed  into  the  feminine  ;  e.  g.  ]LoLk£:> 
Adj  house-holding.     Upon  the  plural  inflection  see  §  44. 

2.  The  Syrians  have  introduced  many  Greek  words  into 
their  language,  and  given  them  either  Syriac  terminations 
or  permitted  them  to  retain,  more  or  less,  the  Greek  forms. 
The  following  are  examples  ;      f-^-yn  oiyicc,    ^a.\%JO\  suay^eXjov, 

(JQSQ-i^CTI  »j7fc>wv,       ^qNNV)     fJuaXXov,        J^iD|Z\LD     fxa^TifxaTa, 
.rctnKnrcs »     r>\r>on    (fvXkoyKf^og.      There    are    some  peculiarities 


124  GENDER   OF  NOUNS. 

in  the  formation  of  these  words,  for  which  see  §  12.  5.  and 
§  44.  Kem.  8.  At  the  time  of  the  Crusades,  the  Syrians 
introduced  words  also  from  the  western  languages ;  e.  g. 
11.Ji^;a    the   Franks^      ."to]]  ]    (7ermawy,     >lZuJiL^|  England, 

\ljk*^  Prince,    ^^y^^Sl  Henry,   etc. 


§  43.     Gender  of  Nouns. 

The  Syriac  language  has  but  two  genders,  masculine  and 
feminine.  The  latter  is  distinguished  partly  by  the  signifi- 
cation and  partly  by  the  form. 

1.  In  respect  to  the  signification,  the  gender  is  fixed  by 
the  same  rules  as  in  Hebrew.  Masculines  are  the  names  of 
men,  masculine  offices,  nations,  mountains,  months  and 
rivers.  Feminines  are  the  names  of  female  persons  and  ani- 
mals, countries,  cities,  and  members  of  human  and  animal 
bodies,  which  are  found  double  although  they  have  mascu- 
line endings  in  the  plural ;  e.  g.  ^jiiyo/ee^  from  ^y»>,  etc. 

2.  In  respect  to  form,   the  feminine  is  characterized  by 

-  (  1^  ),  *.»— i ,  Q— ,  Z»  But  the  first  of 
those  final  syllables,  which  is  particularly  used  for  the  for- 
mation  of  feminines  from  masculines  (e.  g.  \\Ci^  female  com- 
panion  from  ;^jsj  masc),  must  not  be  confounded  with  a 
similar  sounding  termination  of  masculines  (the  emphatic 
state,  §  45,  8)  usually  given  in  the  lexicons,  as  the  only  mas- 
culine form  in  use.  To  distinguish  this  fem.  form  from  the 
masculines,  it  is  usually  given  with  the  termination  \L ; 
e.  g.  lAnSV)  the  queen.  The  forms  with  q1  and  *.i-  have 
arisen  by  apocope  from  |Z;  e.  g.  oni  ^  goodness,  ^\o  heam. 
The  last  of  the  above  mentioned  endings  Z  is  seldom  used  ; 
e.  g.   t^^  part. 


GENDER    OF    NOUNS.  125 

Rem. — 1 .  The  feminine  ending  (-  is  generally  found  in  adjec 
lives  ;  e.  g.  JQ^  masc.  fii^  ^^^'  ^^  ^^^^  word  ends  with  f ,  this 
letter  is  changed  into  jl ,  and  forms  (a ;  e.  g.  (OJ  masc.  (>ni  fem. 
Gentile  nouns  and  numerals  ending  with  t.i»  change  that  termina- 
tion  into  pu.  ;  e.g.  taYOOLi  masc.  ^i>OCnu  fem.  Nouns  with  \L 
final  are  masculine  when  Z  is  a  radical  letter  of  the  noun  ;  e.  g. 
^Aa£}  bow,  |AjD  •  ornament,  |Aal  olive. 

Rem. — 2.  Many  nouns  with  a  masculine  ending  are  feminine  or 
common.  They  are  usually  given  in  the  emphatic  state  (§  45.  3)  ; 
e.  g.  ]<=^^  skip,  "U*'©!  W'ay,  ll-L  rib,  ]1j"|  mr^^,  p..i1  pitcher, 
>(q  well,  IJOQ  ^erf?,  Ij^ys  ^**^^  of  battle,  \1^}  com.  /ime, 
\b]  leather  bottle,  (C)^  sword,  com.,  vISQSD  burden,  I'fDD  talent, 
\si\D  stone,  IfiD^  6e?/y,  jlil-^  com.  tongue,  |jk£L3  50mZ,  fjQJ  ^re, 
jjOlfiO  com.  moow,  f^IlCD  shield,  ffflCY)  com.  mo^A,  ^2Lll  branch, 
IsD'fL  bed,  (a*09  com.  mwc?,  |A*Z>  com.  terror,  yLj^oh  com.  firma- 
ment, ^QU-»  hades,  \L^QM  rust,  |iiV>»  com.  heaven,  {aSDa  com. 
sww,  ^^*  ^^^y«  Names  of  animals  also  are  of  the  common  gen- 
der ;  e.  g.  l;Sfli»  an  ass,  U-^yt  «  camel  ;  also  the  cardinal  num- 
bers from  20  to  100^  Greek  nouns  retain  their  gender  ;  e.  g. 
•£DO,JQflD  tfuvoJo^,  (OaA^3  ^ja&>]x>).  In  general,  those  nouns  are 
considered  as  feminine  which  come  from  the  feminine  of  the  He- 
brew, ending  in  n"r,  and  all  of  those  nouns  which,  in  the  emphatic 
state,  end  in  IZ   (§  45.  3). 


126  NUMBER   OF   NOUNS. 


§  44.    Nurnher  of  Nouns. 


There  are  two  numbers  in  Syriac,  the  singular  and  plural. 
There  are,  indeed,  four  dual  forms,  taken  from  the  Hebrew, 

ending  in  ^-i_  (^iZ  masc.  two.^  ^Ljl  fem.  two,  ^Z]So  two 

hundred,  and  ^>  ^  Egypt) ;  but  they  cannot  be  considered 
as  a  special  form  of  the  language.     Pairs  are  usually  ex- 
pressed by  the  plural,  and  duality  by  the  numeral  two. 
The   plural   of  masculines   is   formed   by  annexing   the 

syllable  ^^  to  the  noun  sing. ;  e.  g.  ^)Q4  mountains,  from 

jQ^  ;  that  of  the  feminine  by  ^  (instead  of  | ) ;  e.  g.  (JoAs 

virgin,  plur.  ^oA2« 

Rem.  1.    Plural  masculines  of  derivatives  from  Yerbs  U, 

ending  with  ]-  and  *jl-  ,  terminate  in  ^ji_  ;  e.  g.  P.^  hoy^ 

..-'^  7  7  *  7 

plur.   ^iN(^ ;    *^;aSo   dwelling,   plur.   ^,^alD*      Feminines 

ending  in  q  and  L  take  tQ ;   e.  g.  onW)  kingdom,  plur. 

»an\V) :  those  ending  in  *-l-  take  ^ ;  e.  g.  *j;iO  creature, 

plur.  ^r^*     Nouns  derived  from  Yerbs  Ml ,  if  the  doubled 
consonant  appear  again  in  the  plural,  take  Linea  oocultans 

under  the  first  of  the  similar  lettere ;   e.  g.  ^.a  Sfi^^a  from 

•       P7  I..  7  «P7 

pOt  sea,  ,^iV)V>S  from  (ioi  people. 

Rem.  2.  Some  masculines  form  the  plural  in  the  same 
manner  as  feminines.  Here  belong :  Iflo]  physician.,  plur. 
.Qfiol ;  \iSo\  crib,  plur.  VZqIjo]  ;   \S\  lion,  plur.  Uo-ail ; 

^L\  place,   plur.VZojZI ;   ]Iq>^  snake,  plur.  '|ZoQ^;|Ij>Qa 

mz^Z^,  plur.  tZQJ>Qr);i».CDiQr)  throne,  plur.|Za£DjQO ;  f-i-ii^ 

night,    plur.  ]2oS 'i S  ;    ^0.0   member,    plur.   iZolcc  ;    U> 

herdsman,  plur.  (as  a  part.  ^^Aj)  |Zqij  ;    \cib  cup-heareft\ 

plur.  lZoo> ,  &c.     (Compare  Agrell,  Comment,  de  varietate 
generis  et  numeri,  p.  68 ;  and  upon  the  absolute  and  em 
phatic  states,  their  form  and  use,  see  §  45.  1.  3.) 


NUMBER   OF  NOUKS.  127 

Rem. — 3.  The  following  feminines  form  the  plural  like  mascu. 
lines  ;  a)  by  rejecting  the  feminine  ending  of  the  emphatic  singular 
(§  45.  3),  \^Xell,  ^J^V;  (\ltS( woman,  \mJ)  ;  ]hD]\an,  ]cd1" 
Xi^^  ffarden,  \lyJ;  fZ^OSD..  coa^JlDQ..  ;  X^!^}  Jif/-basket, 
^^}  ;    VAiS£)>  tear,  K^?^ ;  1\^^  ^^^^^^  ^^^  '•>   iM^  wheat, 

1^^ ;    1^\^  leaf  {of  paper),  W]^  ;      12\\^  sickle,  W]^  ; 

I^^LcLaIO  sieve,  ^Ow^  ;    l^^lSO  word,  llSo  ;    l^li  AaiV,  ]liD* 

l2;sV)  cave,  TpkkJ  ;  Vi'^MC  6ar%,  iJlQD  ;  VAljL£flD  skip,  IjLsiCD; 

VAoiI  cluster  (of  ff rapes),  l^lll ;    lAo'^l  thonff,  U^pl ;     l2>cL^a 

6H(f^e,  1>C1.^  ;      lAsilikD  bark,  ]f^So  ;      l^ryv*  almond,  Irvn*  ; 

I'Ali  ymr,  ^^  ;     I'Ali  hour,  ^^  ;     I'AjfZ  /^,  "^fZ,  etc. ; 

6)  by  retaining   Z;    e.  g.     l2^  Joo^y,  X^\^  *,      T^iy.  cry,  lAl^^^; 

(Zixi  siffht,  (ZIkm  ;   |Z)^ noxious  means,  \L\^  ;   \l\»  ugliness,  \L\  •; 

X^\  care,  X^\  '■,  1^^  callin(/,  X^^  ;  l^^^OS  rw5?,  lAjaQ* 
(see  Agrell,  passim,  p.  70.  55',) 

Rem. — 4.  Some  nouns   form   a  double  plural   (the  feminine  fotm 

father, 
^G12(  and  tdO( ;  ^\jlaj  army,  ^^iNia*  and  ^ON»  »t  ; 
\^f^  breast,  ^t**  ^^d  ^O,.**  ;  ^Ql  time,  ^iini  and  ^^1^1  [times, 
^i^rns  m  repetition)  ;      ^k  Ziawc?,  ^r*]  and  iCIr^l  [gripe  of  the  hand); 

•X  17  97  "i^C  ^V*         -,       0  y  %^ 

^Qa  (/ay,  ^-liDO*  and  ^LOOi ;  |n\  Amr^,  ^^iH^  and  ^QilLl ; 
I'rLo  /ore?,  ^'^  and  ^O*^  ;  JOIJ  stream,  ^JQIJ  and  ^OJOU  ; 
Xr^  feast,  ^^""and  ^>K  ;  1^^  eye,  ^La  and  ^IjlI  (/oi^w- 
tain)  ;  if^ol  ^eeZ,  ^.i.,OnS  and  ^^nOS  ;  ^J^O  ^orw,  ^*r£)  and 
^•^  {corner)  ;     "ISO*  wam^,  ^OISDs  and  ^OlSO*  ,  etc.        Some 


128  NUMBER   OF  NOUNS. 

masculines  as  in  some  of  the  above  examples,  take  Q  or  CJI  between 
the  plural  ending  and  the  last  radical.  Also  some  feminines  in  \L 
take  Q  and  01  before  the  plural  ending ;  e.g.  "{t^O^ people,  ^ZoSdI; 
1i\ik) ^ar/,  l2QlLiD ;  \i^  offering, '^LoiiL',  \iJ:){ mother, 'iL(jC^'{\ 
IAIsdI  handmaid^  |ZoiSD(  (compare  §  49).  Sometimes  jb  is  in- 
serted  ;  e.  g.  I^JQlDj  6^e,  |Aa>QO>  ;  (Adoj  j^Zac^,  jAjJDOj  ; 
(AfiDQCD  mar^,  |Aj[ix}QfiD,   etc. 

Rem. — 5.  The  composites  (§42.1)  form  the  plural  in  such  a  man- 
ner that  either  ;  a)  the  last  part  of  the  composite  is  inflected  ;  e.g. 
trciao  Aa^  granary,  or  ;  5)  the  first  part ;  e.g.  (a1aJL2  man- 
kind,   or  ;    c)  both  parts  ;  e.g.    tJ.oZl2  tattling, 

Kem.  6. — Some  words  only  occur  in  the  plural ;  e.g.  (.ftlD  water, 
yjL^  life,    [Si]  face,    puSD>  worth. 

Rem.  T. — Some  singular  names  (collectives)  take  the  plural  mark, 
ijJiJMi   (§  6) ;    e.  g.     (a3)  horses,  f^QO  cai^/e,  (xi  sAee^.     Amira 

IP"    J      ^  ^e««    X 

^^4  ^^^^5   and   (r'i^^  draft-cattle. 

Rem.  8.  Greek  nouns,  without  regard  to  gender,  take  the  Syriac 
plural  ending  of  masculines  in    |L  ;    e.g.     taQOrfti*^!  iifKfxoieoi, 

L J^2)  (paXa/ysj,    pQ.iO>  doyiJjOLra.     Less  frequently  do  they  take 

^  .      .       ^.        .  .        .    ^"1  "k^j "     ^  T  ^ 

the  plural  terminations  of  feminines  in  \L  ;  e.g.   (Zol^pO  /xiip^ava<, 

(ZojAfiOl  (fTdSia.  Letters  which  constitute  the  Greek  singular 
terminations  are  commonly  omitted;  but  in  some  instances  retained; 
e.  g.  |fiDQlQ3  vojxoi  from  vo^o^.  The  plural  terminations  5sg  and  tss, 
from  15  and  as,  are  represented  by  |p  and  Xi'^^-  g'  u  *^^  xXsj(Js^ 
from  xXsig',  X^^^rA  oLvS^iavrsg  from  ctv^^ia^.  The  Syriac  often  re- 
tains the  termination  of  the  Greek  plural  and  of  the  cases,  represent- 

»  ^7  7  *7 

ingthe  accusative  aj  (first  declension)  by  «fiD,  %£0],  »£D0  and  •£DOf; 

7     0  ^y7    7     I  7     l«^  7 

e.    g.     tlXlJOl     ^uva^,       JSM— A^    (piaXa^,       «i2DQlaZ|     'A^vjva^, 
;ain  Ksyx^^sag;   oi  and  ouj  (second  declension)  by   Q   and 


DIFFERENT  RELATIONS   OF  THE  NOUN  129 

kCDO ;     e.  g.     OOjOfe^t  ^Tu'ixoi,     ^CDO'^iNi^  ^tXiirieovg;   and 

;  e.  g.  I  |J£lO  xsqjaXaia ;  the  genitive 
;  e.g.  >0(  iO>|  a^x^Luv  ;  s^  and  a^  of  the  third  declension 
are  represented  by  JXU.,  tlD,  »CD|  and  ^fiDO  ;  e.g.  »£P;rnn  Kaitfa^a^, 
•flolO-La'ff'Xaxaj,  «xaQ1  iNoi  'EXX7)vaff  ;  sig  from  the  singular  in  j^ 
is  represented  by  JSQa^;  e.»  g.  trn>rr>>f  a]^s<fsis  ;  and  the  neuters 
ending  in  ara,   are  represented  by  [^  and  m  ;  e.  g.  14SQ..0J  and 

»7   «      7  0  N^ 

(4pQyt09  Jo^/fjoara.  Some  of  these  plural  endings  occur  in  Latin 
nouns  ;  e.  g.  «IX})jQJ|  annonce  ;  %flD  (j^^fc  castra.  The  same  is 
true  in  respect  to  Syriac  words  ;  e.  g.  iXdIi.*  garden,  for  |i-«  from 
lAl^.   (comp.  Affrell  Otiol.  Syr.  p.  46 — 49).  * 


%  45.     Different  Eelations  (States)  of  the  Noun. 

1.  Besides  the  absolute  and  construct  state  of  the  Hebrew, 
of  which  the  latter  marks  the  genitive,  there  is  in  Sjriac 
and  Chaldee,  an  emphatic  state.  It  originally*  marked  the 
noun  with  the  definite  article.  It  also  occurs  where  we 
should  not  expect  to  find  the  definite  article. 

Rem. — The  indefinite  article   is  expressed  by  the   absolute  state, 

7 

or  by  r>*  one.  There  are  many  nouns  which  never,  or  very  seldom, 
occur  in  the  absolute  state  ;  e.  g.  [^Om  heat,  JLdqo  situation, 
'iyoLhull,   'ilc^  death,   etc. 

2.  The  construct  state  ;  a)  of  nouns  masc.  sing.,  does  not 
differ  from  the  absolute  state ;   e.  g.    »^  good ;    but  in  the 


130  DIFFERENT  RELATIONS   OF  THE  NOUN. 

plural,  the  ending  ^x«  is  changed  into  •jl-;  e.  g.  •-■.^^  con- 
struct  state  from  ^a^Z*  Nouns  masc,  which  form  the  plural 
by  ^.^  (§  M.Bem.l),  change  that  termination  into  »aa  ;  e.g. 
wA^r^  from  ^r^ ;  h)  in  the  fem.  sing.,  J-  of  the  absolute 
state  is  changed  into  2  ;  e.  g.  Lz^L  from  \^*  To  the  ter- 
minations Q  and  »u^  only  L  is  added ;  e.  g.  2on\v>  from 
on\V) ,  Aj'^  from  ^\0*  In  the  plural,  2  is  appended 
instead  of  ^  ;  e.g.  An^  from  .^^* 

8.  The  characteristic  of  the  emphatic  state,  for  both  gen- 
ders and  numbers,  is  final  1  (=  n  the  Hebrew  article).  This 
is  ;  a)  attached  to  the  sing,  of  nouns  masc.  with  1^  preceding; 
e.g.  fiQL  from  ^<H  people.  In  the  plural  the  noun  masc.  takes 
the  termination  (.  with  the  falling  away  of  •-•—  ;  e.  g. 
I  p£i..  ^Ae  me?2,  (from  the  constr.  state  ^,JQyi  )  from  r^*i  *, 
/?)  in  the  emphatic  state  fem.  sing,  and  plur.  \m  is  attached 
to  the  construct  state.  In  the  sing.^  _1_  falls  away  before  I ; 
e.  g.  lA^oAo  from  constr.  state  AlioAa^  In  the  plural,  — 
is  retained  before  2 ;  e.  g.  lAl^^oAo  from  A^oAib* 

Rem.  1. — The  emphatic  state  plur.  masc.  ends  in  (.a.  in  nouns 
which  take  ^.^-  in  the  plural,  (§  44.  Rem.l) ;  e.  g.  Mr^^  f''om 
—A  fM^*  Only  three  nouns  take  [^^  instead  of  ^i.  ;  viz.  }.  .i  \|j 
boys,  \m^^  fragments,  and  (-j^m  5reas^,  from  the  emphat.  sing. 
(aA4  ,  M^)  Mr***  Tii6  emphatic  forms  [^j>^  water,  and 
I  >Vf>»  heaven,  belong  here.  Buxtorf  cites  yet  a  third  form,  witli 
U-;  e.g.  Rom.  ix.  24.  (iipO;  26.  (.▲irD;  Ephes.  ii.  11.  ]-ar^|« 
But  these  forms  are  not  recognized  by  Amira,  and  the  form  in  ^... 
should  perhaps  be  restored  in  these  cases,  af  more  correct.  The  fol- 
lowing should  be  noted  as  irregular  emphatic  plural  forms  :   (lO^j 


DIFFERENT   RELATIONS   OF  THE  NOUN.  131 

from  yd]  fruit,    (,1»kj>  from  U*^9  odor,    |-JOVm  from  '\o\j!*siff/it, 
|Ao  from  (A.1^  house  J   etc. 

Eem.  2. — Feminines  with  masculine  endings  (§  43.  Rem.2),  form 
tlie  emj)hatic  state  like  masculines  by  attaching  the  termination  ^, 
e.  g.  ^J  (  mr^A,  emphat.  state  yLj\ ;  ^O^  A;wee,  emphat.  state 
pjQO*  Before  the  ending  (.  of  the  fem.  absol.,  Q  is  inserted  and 
quiesces  m  —  ;  e.g.  \LOfj>*  from  lO^js^^oy.  Forms  with  \^^  take 
(A.&i«*  Some  words  in  the  emphatic  form  take  Q  before  the  last 
radical ;  e.  g.  ]ALqo|So  from  |JO  pD/ooc?.  Feminines  which  are 
formed  from  masculines,  like  |Z^y.  from  r^ii,  and  especially 
adjectives,  form  the  emphatic  state  fem.,  by  affixing  the  syllable 
\L  to  the  masc.  absol. ;  e.  g.  lAll^  (froui  .jQ^  niasc).  Adjectives 
in  I-  change  this  termination  into  •»»» ;   e.g.  fAj^^L^  from  Jj^  dull. 

y  »ftxp7  0       7 

Those  in  ^  take  a,  after  1 ;  e.  g.  |^itV)M;V)  from  ^^>>;^ 
compassionate..  In  the  emphat.  state  plur.,  some  words  change  jl 
into  Q  ;  e.  g.  f^QQJ  from  ^^.OJ  sAeep.  Some  take  Q  ; 
e.  g.  fZoiV)  from  tl^  part.  Others  insert  jl  ;  e.  g.  fAar^pD 
from  |Z;flDpi>  bundle. 

Rem.  3. — The  emphatic  form  is  found  even  before  the  genitive, 
which  is  formed  by  J  ;  e.  g.  |2l^L0)  ],dL  servant  of  the  kinr/ 
(vid.  Syntax,  §  73). 


182 


TABLE  OF  RELATIONS  OF  NOUNS. 


Table  of  the  Different  Relations  (States)  of  the  Noun, 
(§§  45  and  48). 


MASCULINES. 

A.  Nouns   of  one   and    two    syllables    with    immutable    vowels. 
(Decl.    1.   §   48). 


emphat. 


Plural.  Singular, 

constr.  absol.         emphat.         constr.  and  absol. 

Head. 
Vessel. 
Thief. 

Herh. 
Nazariie. 

Nation. 


u-v 

7      !•• 

..IX 

U*'> 

^1 

p]i^ 

^Is^ 

^J^D 

IJU^ 

.ti) 

-..-^  £>   7 

..7  0   7 

••x  t>   7 

*     £>  P   7 

0    7 

,-^•.*^             7 

•  •  7    *.             7 

..  T  9v              7 

<K                7 

]V»VlS 

.ASn^i 

■  iV^SqL 

toL 

^ 

B.  Nouns  in   which  —  asd  —  of  the  ultimate  syllable  fall  away, 

but  the  vowel  of  the  penultimate  is  retained  (Decl.  II). 

»•^..         7  r..         7                       I..       7  n   p         7                                7  7 

I  r^lD  ^  ^nO        ^  .jaO  1  pD  'rllO  Talent 

Ijoicb  *jjdii     ^joim  Ijoia  joim  TTi^wf*,?. 

»  P7       ..» c  7     ..»x                             I..^X                         1  ^     ^^                                      '  TT 

Pir-»|  *^,-ji1            _ipi|               |ri|                   r»  ^-al^^^. 


U^ySi    ^»Io,SD    ^u^jlD      1*10j5d)     ^o^k^  ^;tor. 

*  -»>  ■»  ,         *      J 


DECLENSIOX  OF  NOL'XS.  183 

C.  Nouns  in   which  —  (in  gutturals  —  )  of  the  ultimate  syllable 
falls   away,   and  the  vowel  —  appears  over  the  antepenultimate 
radical  consonant.     (Decl  III). 

1]^*ALd  JX^oALd  ^i'^fc^Ak)  IJ^ASd  ^^^tlJD  (One  dead). 


D.  Segholate  forms,  which  begin  with   a  vacant   consonant,   over 

.  .         '  ""  ...  *"  . 

which   the   original  —  or  ^ —  reappears   in   inflection,    or   Q  is 

assumed  in  their  stead      (Decl.  IV).  , 

•T>..  IS  7"  IS  I..  1\ 

[Mjao     ^AjmyQjo     ^^^^ao 

«  ..-«        r  ..7  7  ..      x        7 

i.  -«  ..   7  ..7        7  ..17 

jlo^  »»1jiS  ^iliS 

]]£l     Ji^     ^]^ 


h\<n 

j,.Sv) 

King. 

7 

Beck. 

W?ao 

^OrO 

Holiness. 

l]L£) 

^illD 

Master. 

]SdqI 

iOOi 

Bay. 

U^' 

X 

Eye. 

l]si^ 

u^ 

Impure. 

E.  Nouns  derived  from  V^erbs  P  ending  with  (-,«>>,  t-^- ,  in  which 
I  passes  into  %-k  and  is  movable  as  in  both  the  other  forms 
(Decl.  V). 

|aV  )  - »  >  V  >  >^<  |»^<            p»j  ma^ grazes. 

(ZqI  >  ZqIj  ^Ql5  PiAj           ^1>  Herdsman. 

y.Krf\Krs  .  >  I  VrnVn  ^>VmV>  ]\  VmO^  ^iSmV)  Abandoned. 

*  *  *  ]»V*       -  A«            Jiest. 

]»*^^  - »  «o^  ^'^^  ]>*^*         H^      Prisoner 


IHI  DIFFERENT   RELATIOXS    OF   THE  XOUX. 

F  E  M  I  N  I  N  E  S. 

A.  Nouns  with  immutable  vowels  (Q,  .ji— ,etc.)  before  the  ending 
U  (Dec!.  I). 

IJoAo  Virgin,   135  Bride,   ^L^  Citi/. 
Plural  Singular. 

empliat.         constr.         absol.         emphat.         constr.         absol. 

l^^lIoAfi*    Ai^oAo   ^oAo     I'AloAo     l^oLa       ]]oAo 
]h^     A!So     ^^'         12^         A^  Wo 

I^O-j'fLD     AL'r^iD       ^'r^  li\l-i%D  AL'pk)  li-Trk) 

B.  Nouns,  whose  final  syllable  begins  with  two  consonants,  which, 
in  the  emphat.  state  sing,  ha^  e  -I-  or  Jl.  inserted  between  them 
(Decl.  II). 

llLojf  Widow,     ]]Ll    Chariot,     \Qy\  Jims. 

UlvD,T  ASsoiT  ^'T    1^^>V   AV^DiV     ULDiV 
l^v?    ^\^    ^^^     ^V     ^ve       V^ 

jAoji        Aoji        ^ji  lAoji         Aoji  t£)>i 

C.  Nouns,  in  whose  emphat.  state,  the  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  is 
moved  forward  to  the  second  vacant  consonant  (  Decl.  Ill  ). 

•pSLM   Partner,     p-j.^  Cow. 

IZ'^A*  Z'riZlM  ^^^  U'r^*^  ^*r^^  Tr^:^ 

lAS^'    Ail^'    ,^^      lAl^      AS^       1]!^' 


DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS.  135 

D.  Derivatives  of  Verbs   IJ  ending  in  |.j  and  (0 ,    whose  %^  and 
O  in  the  emphat.  state  sing,  quiesce  in_i,  and  Jl.  (  Decl.  IV  ). 

Xa.j^O  •  Blame,    'Q.iJs«  Animal,     H^Ji^  Crirl. 

»0«     ?••   7  •     »   ••  7  P   ••   7  ^ff«  *.7  >''  ^"^ 

VAllI     Ali^     ^       IkS^      £^        Ui^ 


E.  Derivatives  of  Verbs  (J  ending  in  Q  and  t.^.  (  ^  )♦  beginning 
with  two  consonants,  and  having  O  'Rnd  «-i  movable  in  the  plural 
(  Decl.  V  ). 

O  0»    Thing,    OjaV)  Plague,    *-i;.2   Creature.     Q^»   Request, 
LllJD  Part,    OpD  Dominion. 

0     ..     7 

p   7   .. 


12^s 

^^°^i 

12qm1o 

Zoj^iii) 

VAI-^ 

p..  -h 

l2oS^ 

^.5 

rzoiii 

2ai^ 

l2o^i, 

23-3ij 

V^ 


P..7    p 


12^, 

2qo^ 

.*^^ 

r2o»vi 

ZomID 

Om^ 

1^-,= 

Zu*r> 

wi-^ 

r2oi. 

2<^, 

ol, 

lAliD 

Alio 

Also 

120-^ 

•  «.    .  p 

o;^ 

10 


136  NOUNS   WITH  SUFFIXES. 

§  46.  Nouns  with  Suffixes. 

The  noun,  m  taking  suffixes  (see  §  16.  2.  B.  and  table  of 
suffixes,  §  16),  undergoes  the  following  changes  : 

1.  In  masculines  ;  a)  the  suff.  in  the  sing.,  is  attached  to 
the  emphatic  state,  with  the  falling  away  of  1-  :  e.  g.  pNV) 

(from  y^"^),  with  the  suffix  «inSVi«.     In  decl.  I.  III.  lY.  Y. 

(§  48.  A)  the  radical  vowels  are  not  changed.  In  nouns 
of  decl.  II.,  the  final  vowel  of  the  absolute  state  JH  or  _L,  re- 
appears before  the  suffix  of  the  1  sing,  and  2  and  3  plural ; 

e.  g.   ^oJil,    emphat.  ]^\\    with   suffix   ,  iSnSs  ;  jOl-flO, 

JOlflO ,  with  suffix  ^OljOiflD*  So  also  monosyllabic 
nouns,  which  lose  Jl  or  _L  in  the  emphatic  state,  take  it 
again  before  the  suffix  of  the  1  sing,  and  2  and  3  plur. ;  e.g. 

^B  ,  emphat.  jkLs ,  with  suffix  ^^ln» ,  j^Lq«»  {^'^   from 

•^'),  etc.     In   nouns,    derived  from  Yerbs  ]]  ending  in  \2 , 

emphat.  state  U  (Decl.  Y),    w*  before  the   suffix  of  the  1 

sing.,  2  and  3  plur.,  quiesces  m  _!. ;  e.  g.  ,i  i\^ ,  ^oniN^ 

from  jJi ,  emphat.  I^X^ ;  but  before  the  other  suffixes  «^  is 

movable  ;  e.  g.  «^»N(^ ,  oliS^  ;  (  and  according  to  Syriac 
grammarians,  *a  is  movable  even  before  the  suffix  1  sing ; 

e.g.  wiJLX^)-  The  same  is  true  also  of  nouns  ending  with  »jl- 

(passive  participles  of  Pa.  Aph.  and  Shaph.  of  Yerbs  IJj'  §32.1, 

§48  masculines,  Decl.Y);  e.g.  ^oouAAkJ,  j^AmSo  (^AmSo) 

from  w^AaLd  drmh     These  nouns  with  suffixes  of  the  1, 

sing,  are  pronounced  like  the  absol.  state  ;  e.  g.    ^aAjiId  my 

drink,  (*-iIX)jQO  my  throne  from  |m>ao  is  an   exception). 

Here  belong  all  the  emphatic  forms  ending  with  V»  j  having 

a  vacant  consonant  preceding,  excepting  U'^k)  master,  which 

with  a  suffix  is  as  follows  :  ^"^  ,  y^,  Oi'^k) ,  .ooI'^Ld,  etc. 

Finally,  in  emphatic  nouns  ending  in  V";  having  a  vowel 

preceding,  the  general  rule  is  followed  ;  e.g.  M-yi^  reflection^ 


NOUNS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  I37 


with  suffix  »Aa.yiCn ,  or  mo;o  creator ^  with  suff.  »a-»o;q  , 
^0\^*  The  same  is  true  of  nouns  with  ||  for  Ja ;  e.  g. 
itiOO  with  suff.  ^al^QQ ,  *^UQS,  ^aOIaQQ,  etc.,  plur.  ^JLiOO, 
5^V»QO»  But  in  cases  where  the  termination  ]]  does  not 
stand  for  V» ,  as  in  l|ico ,  1  takes  Lin.  occul.  in  suff.  1  sing, 
and  2  and  3  plur. ;  e.  g.  J\lS£i ,  ^]lco ,  etc.  In  the 
other  suff.,  and  in  the  plur.  with  suff.,  the  vowel  of  ( is 
thrown  back  upon  the  preceding  vacant  consonant ;  e.  g. 
^j^pio  ,  ^(IQD  ,plur.  «^tl£D  ,  «^(lCO  ,   etc. 

b)  Plural  suffixes  in  the  masc.  are  attached  to  the  construct 
foiTQ  (§  45.  2.  a)  with  which  the  suff.  1  sing,  forms  a  crasis ; 
e.  g.  >an\V)«.     In  the  sing,  masc,  however,  wi.  passes  into  Q  ; 

y  •     V  IKY 

e.  g.  «,iOinn\V>  (also  ^jOIQ-  =  Germ,  aij  (Engl,  oi,  nearly), 
according  to  Lud.  de  Dieu^  p.  160,  but  not  according  to 
Amira) ;  and  in  the  3  fem.  —  before  ^^a  passes  into  • ;  e.  g. 
qiinSV)  (§  16.  B).  Plural  nouns  with  ^-Jl ,  attach  the  suf- 
nx  to  the  construct  form  ending  m  ^jl^  ;    e.  g.  ^->--^ii   with 

y  •       7  7  •       7  ■     ,       ■  v* 

suff.  t^ii  >\.> ,  %a01Cu.^..»     So  also  in  the  emphatic  ending 

^07  \^  ~        #7  ^  ••.7 

with  JjL-  ;  e.g.   >*^y( ,  *jOlQ^.t  (see  Lud.  de  Dieu,  p.  163). 
- ;  e.g.  (i  A^,  with  suff.  .iNq  and  « 1 1 N  ({, 

and  those  plurals  which,  with  the  suffix  of  1  sing.,  differ 
from  the  sing,  with  the  same  suff.  only  by  taking  Eibui  ; 
e.g.  ^IAjilLd  drink,  with  suff.  ^a^m!^  ;  plur.  emphat.  l-aAAk) 

..77  ^  A    "    '' 

with  suff.  »uAmSD  and  •^o.AaSo  my  drinks. 

Rem.  1. — Collective  nouns  sing,  with  Ribui,  take  the  suff.  sing. ; 
e.g.  iKwith  sufF.  oul ,  jA^*  Only  liij]  takes  the  suff.  plur. ; 
e.  g.  ^OlQuiil*  Amira  p.  213,  supposes  that  l-iJQO  with  both 
Buffixes  belongs  here. 


188  NOUNS  WITH    SUFFIXES. 

Rem.  2.  \£i\  father,  \jj\  brother,  jUthj^  father-in-law,  are  formed 
anomalously.  The  first  two,  with  the  suff.  of  the  1  sing.,  change 
—  into  — ;  e.  g.  wk^Of*  The  last  takes  —  ;  e.g.  »A.SQi».  Final  | 
before  the  other  suflBxes  is  changed  into  Q;  e.  g.  ^Qol ,  •■kSOo]  , 
^OlQOl ,  OlQQl ,  ^QOJ ,  etc. 

2.  In  Feminines ;  a)  the  suffix  in  the  sing,  is  attaclied 
to  the  form  of  the  emphat.  state  with  a  union  vowel  preced- 
ing; e.g.  OiA!LSd)1  from  \i^i]  widow^  emphat.  state  lAi^iV 
The  suffixes  of  the  1  sing,  and  of  the  2  and  3  plur.  are 
attached  to  the  construct  state  without  the  union  vowel, 
to  avoid  the  concurrence  of  three  vacant  consonants  ;  e.  g. 
^L\Ol^  from  l;^Js» ,  constr.  state  2;£1m* 

Rem. — From  yLf^  (emphat.  state)  mistresSj  is  found  tOOlZ^So. 
In  1^^  daughter,  constr.  state,  L'fCi  with  the  suflf.  of  the  1  sirig.,«« 
moves  forward  from  the  first  to  the  second  consonant ;  e.  g.  *aZ;q  • 
It  should  be  remarked  that  the  letter  marked  with  Linea  occultans 
is  to  be  pronounced,  if  the  above  suffix  occur;  e.  g.  \t\  >,V>  with 
suff".  .CLdAia^,  IZpl  with  sufi".  w»Z^»  Amira  asserts  (p.  190) 
that  the  laterSyrians  have  the  form.tOOlAljjSO ,  etc. 

b)  In  the  plural,  feminines  take  singular  suffixes  ;  e.  g. 
«uA^'oA!D ,  yjbLLoLa ,  etc. 

Rem. — In  respect  to  the  cardinal  numbers  (§  50.  2),  it  shouJd  be 
remarked  that  they  take  both  the  sing,  and  plur.  suffixes,  forming 
with  the  first,  possessive  pronouns,  and  with  the  last,  demonstrative 
pronouns ;  e.g.  Ol2;£Dtl  his  ten,  ^OOUjZ  those  two,  ^CJuZlZ  those 
two,  tOCTuALZ  those  three. 


DECLENSION   OF  NOUNS.  139 

§  47.  Declension  of  Nouns  in  General, 

Nouns  are  varied  in  respect  to  inflection  (§§44.46)  accord- 
ing to  their  form,  either  with  or  without  any  vowel  changes. 
Thus  they  are  divided  into  two  principal  classes,  viz. ;  those 
with  immutable  and  with  mutable  vowels.  The  latter  class, 
on  account  of  its  diversities,  may  be  arranged  under  several 
paradigms,  and  together  with  the  former  class,  takes  the  place 
of  the  declensions  of  the  western  languages  (comp.  §  48). 


§  48.  Exhibition  of  Nouns  according  to  Declension, 

A.  Masculines. 

DecL  I. — This  inclu^ps  all  monosyllabic  nouns  as  well  as 
those  having  more  syllables  than  one,  with  immutable  vow- 

els   (ju, ,  Q,  Q,)   e.  g.  %•-*>  head^  H^  master^  *»Q.JD  fean, 

Q..  midst,  •.i^OQ  partition^  %oZoZ  native.  To  the  latter  class 
belong  likewise  those  nouns  whose  penult,  syllable  is  either 
a  close  one  ;  e.  g.  t  Q^^  herbage,  (gentile  nouns  with  «a. ; 
e.  g.  ^'r^  Nazarite),  or  such  as  would  have  a  close  penult, 
syllable,   if  tlie  Syrians  employed  duplication  of  letters 

0  7 

(=  Dagh.  forte ) ;  e.  g.  *^^yf  i^^tf- 

Rem. — Here  also  belong  nouns  derived  from  ^  Verbs  with  — j 
which  in  the  plural,  double  the  final  radical  letter,  and  mark  the 
first  of  the  two  doubled  letters  with  Lin.  occult.  ;  e.  g. 
^alwa^^on,  plur.  -jlSC^OI*  But  monosyllabic  nouns  having  Q  and  ^ , 
and  m  the  emphat.  state,  which  change  —  and  —  into  — ,  belong  to 
segholate  forms(Decl.IV);  e.g.  ^Q-»  da?/,  emphat.state  pOQ-i ;  ^-lA 
eye,  emphat.  state  \lLL  ;  as  do  those  also  in  which  under  the  same 
circumstances  Q  is  transposed  ;  e.  g.  *»0pO  holiness,  emphat.  state 
]ijao»  In  S^>^^  young  man,  ^IQl  Md,  and  ^CCLij;2> paradise, 
2_  falls  away  in  the  inflection  and  j.  with  _L  preceding,  forms 
ai  ;  e.  g.  emphat.  state  |V>iNs ,  etc. 


140  DECLENSION   OF   NOUN^S. 

Decl.  11.  This  includes  nouns,  with  _1  and  JL,  which  have 

.  two  consonants ;  e.g.  ^Q«  name^   or  two  syllables,  of  which 

the  penult. is  either  a  mixed  one  as  in  ^^f^So  (part.  pass. 

Aph.),  «»»na^r>  mighty  ;   or  whose  middle  radical  must  be 

77  71» 

doubled ;  e.g.  po  a  talent  ;  ;a  •  sparrow  ;  or  has  an  immu 
table  vowel ;  e.g.  ^q\i  eternity  ;  JOICD  witness  ;  ^\^\  wheel. 
In  these  nouns,  the  vowel  of  the  final  syllable  falls  away, 
excepting  in  the  sing,  before  the  suff.  of  the  1  sing,  and  be- 
fore the  2  and  8  plur. ;  e.  g.  emphat.  state  ]V>Ss  with  sufp. 
01^\s,  ,iV>^S,  and  *00lV>Sv 

Rem. — Here  belongs  also  ^a  Aawrf,  emphat.state  1^^]  ;  plur.j—ipjl, 

7*        7  .  -^0  *7 

etc.  Forms  also  like  «»i>*"'),V>  a?/ar,  and  (m^^  belong  here, 
which  take  a  new  syllable  with  _^  over  the  first  radical  letter  in 
consequence  of  an  accumulation  of  consonants  ;  e.  g.  ImIo,^  (see 
§  15.  4).  The  following  are  examples  :  *.»^^  morning^  osaAslLo 
opening^  etc.  From  ^^^^^0  fountain^  appears  the  emphat.  state 
]l»SV),  plur.  tLl!^> 

Decl.  III.  To  this  belong  those  nouns,  which,  throughout 
their  inflection,  lose  2_  (before  gutt.  _L)  of  the  final  syllable  ; 
but  take  _L  as  a  helping  vowel  over  the  antepenultimate 
radical  consonant,  viz.  ;  in  participles  Ethpe.  ;  e.  g. 
%^t^  dead,  emphat.  state  ]l4^Ak)» 

Decl.  IV.  Here  are  to  be  enumerated  all  nouns  which  cor- 
respond with  Hebrew  segholate  forms  (see  Gesen.  Lehrgeb. 
p.  668  sq).  Such  for  the  most  part  in  Syriac,  are  monosyl- 
labic nouns  which  begin  with  a  vacant  consonant,  and  have 
for  their  characteristic  vowel  _!_  or  JL,  which  appears  first 
in  the  emphat.  state  over  the  first  radical.  In  this  form  the 
noun  remains  unchanged  throughout  its  formations.  They 
may  as  in  Hebrew,  be  divided  into   derivatives  of  verbs 

with  and  without  gutturals,  and  derivatives  of  Ql  and  *.*^ 

Verbs. 


DECLENSION   OF   NOUNS.  141 

A)  To  the  first  class  belong  forms  like  «^j^  hing^  emphat 
state  pj^;  \ZiSO  book,  emphat.  state  l^acD;  ^1' child^  em- 

.  phat.  state  ]^ ;  with  suff  OialSo ,  .001;?} ff) ,  ^\\1^  To 
the  form  with  Hholem  in  Hebrew  corresponds  .^0^0  holiness, 
emphat.    state   l^^ao;   ^ojo  hnee,   emphat.  state   ]a5QQ 

(comp.  §  15.  2.  B.  b).     The  same  applies  : 

ft 

B)  In  forms  with  gutturals ;  e.g.  ,<ai  slave,  emphat.  state 

Ir^^l;  ^^Jkio  master,  emphat.  state  Plo»  Here  belong  also 
emphatforms like \iS\  earth,  }]i]  cedar,  \1do\  food,  )aa>o)  wa?/. 

C)  Finally,  derivatives  of  Yerbs  w&.^  and  oL  lose or 

belonging  to  the  middle  quiescent  radicals  ^  or  Q^  In  con- 
nection with  _L,  A  and  Q  form  the  dipthongs  ai  and  au  ;  e.g. 
^v^  eye,  emphat.  state  P-iJL;  jo^Qla*  guilt,  emphatstate  (ocLm 
(AxT)  constr.  state,  house,  emphat.  lAx^). 

Rem. — The  following  forms  take  — ,  viz. :  ;£Q2  flesh,  'r^£D  side, 
y^^  counsel,  and  the  emphat.  forms  |j£^  f  mourning,  (^  i]  sea, 
l^jl  threshing  floor,  \2}l^  ship,  1;Sd"|  lamb;  from  ^iwO*!,  etc.  Some 
words  which  would  in  Hebrew,  take  Pattah,  in  Syriac,  take  J^ ;  e.g. 
^y.j/oo^,  emphat.state  |J.tJ  ,  etc.  (  is  considered  as  a  guttural  when 
at  the  end  of  )S£L^  impure,  emphat.  state  ] pCX^,  plur.  absol.  ^p^, 
constr.  «^pQ^,  emphat.  ipCl^  ;  and  in  the  emphat.  form  ff  jZ,  plur. 
—al'Z  (  also  ^jlZ  )  from  the  absolute  form  |j2  grass. 

Decl  V.  Here  belong  derivatives  (mostly  participles  and 
(comp.  §  40.)  ending  in  }«.,  ^  and  w*«» 
The  distinguishing  characteristic  is,  that  1  is  changed  into  ^^ 
and  is  movable  as  well  as  both  the  other  endings  in  the 
emphat.  state  sing,  and  before  the  suffixes  with  the  union 
vowel ;  e.g.  Uyt  emphat.  state  M-^yi ;  with  suff.  OU^  . «  But 
before  the  suff.  of  the  1  sing,  and  2  and  3  plur.  ]  quiesces  in 


142  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 

I  ♦.       ■  I  # 

— ;  e.  g.  ^oou-^y.»  The  same  is  true  in  the  plur.  which 
ends  with  ^  (§  44.  Eem.  1)  with  the  falling  away  of  ] ;  e.g. 
^jb^...  The  suffix  is  attached  to  the  emphatic  state  ending 
with  ]jL—  as  well  as  to  the  constr.  state  ending  with  .j^*  In 
respect  to  the  changes  of  the  vowels,  it  should  be  remarked 
that  the  form  with  ]-  takes  —  in  the  emphatic  state,  if  it  be 
a  monosyllable  and  begin  with  a  vacant  consonant ;  e.  g. 
VA..  from  ]]..  revealed.  In  words  of  two  or  more  syllables 
the  preceding  vowel  remains  unchanged  ;  e.  g.  pV**^  from 
l]>j^ ,  Vi-^y. AJiD  from  UyiASo*  Monosyllabic  nouns  witli 
^ik  mute  likewise  retain  their  vowels ;  e.g.  "jLao  from  -  -^^ 
wine.  Finally  nouns  ending  with  %▲.  (part.  pass,  of  Pa.  and 
Aph.  see  §  32.  1),  lose  _L  in  the  emphat.  state  sing. ;  e.  g. 
]*\mV)  from  >iNmV)  abandoned;  but  —  appears  again  in 
the  emphat.  state  plur. ;  e.  g.  liSmV)* 

Rem. — From  monosyllabic  nouns  ending  with  \Z.  we  find  forms 
with  — ;  e.  g.  lifino  (Matt.  vi.  4)  from  JCOS*  Also  from  [1^  we 
have  the  plur.  emphat.  1 1  \(i^  as  though  from  •t\(f*  Here  belongs 
also  |>V)»  from  the  obsolete  form  ]S/QA,  constr.  state  plur.  -  «^^- 
The  part  Pe.  act.  differs  from  the  noun  of  the  same  form  by  being 
inflected  as  usual,while  thenoun,in  the  plur.takes  the  form  of  feminines 
of  decl.  IV.,  and  (  is  changed  into  Q  movable  with  _l_  preceding ; 
e.g.  Jl> pasturing^  plur.  ^•>-^) ,  constr.  ti  iS> ,  emphat.  JjA)  ;  ^1> 
herdsman^  on  the  contrary,  becomes  m  the  plur.  ^Q^>,  ZOl),  (LQl)* 
From  |;Sd  master^  both  forms  of  the  plur.  cccur ;  the  latter  form  in 
(qD9Q2  throne.  The  noun  (.uQJ  prophet,  in  the  plur.,  contracts  a. 
and  1  into  a.,  |>ni ;  while  the  adjective  %  ■  it ^  takes  yet  another], 
emphat.  |Jju^  ,  plur.  ^^^  ,  ^^i.^,  |U^^* 


DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS.  148 

B.  Feminines. 

Bed.  I.  This  includes  all  the  Feminines  ending  with  ]_ , 
which  have  an  immutable  vowel  in  the  penult  syllable.  In 
*.his  case  the  penult  syllable  has  either  a  vowel  with  a  letter 

quiescing  in  it ;  e.  g.  ]]oAiD^;^V^m,  or  the  noun  is  a  derivative 

of  Yerbs  ^,  in  which  case  in  the  plural,  the  first  of 
the  duplicate  radicals  reappears,  and  takes  Linea  occultans  ; 

e.g.  yi^  (also  \i\i^  pretense  from  ^Sil ;  Uo  Iride^  plur.  -SSo* 
The  sulf.  of  the  1.  sing,  is  appended  to  the  constr.state  with- 
out the  union  vowel ;  e.  g.  w*A^oAq»  The  suff.  in  other 
persons  is  joined  with  the  form  of  the  emphat.  state  ;  e.  g. 

yt^oL^ ,  etc.  (comp.  §  46.  2). 

Rem. — From  \laLq:^  waistcoat^  appears  the  plur.  ^^il  iZoO  as  if 

from  IjlIuZqD  or  »A.laZQD»     Some  forms  with  final  \l  take  Linea 

occult,  in  the  emphat.  state  under  J  ;  e.g.  iLipSo  city^  emphat.  state 

|Ajl»,.Sd  ;    or  J  falls  entirely  away  as  in   \i\jS\   another^    emphatic 

state  IZ^I*  -^ 

Decl.  11.  Here  belong  all  nouns  fem.  whose  final  syllable 
begins  with  two  consonants.  They  have  the  peculiarity, 
<hat  between  these  two  consonants, '  in  the   emphat.  sing., 

—  or  —  is  inserted.  This  vowel  is  determined  by  the  vowel 
belonging  to   corresponding  masculine  terminations ;  e.g. 

USsDjI  widow^  (from  ^iiD>]  masc),  emphat.  state  f ALs^j]  ; 
IJ40  (from  ^^4^  masc),  emphat.  state  lAl^^ ;  before  guttu- 
rals —  is  always  the  vowel  inserted  between  the  two  conso- 

nants  in  the  emphat. ;  e.g.  \»^\Sifovjl^  emphat.  state  -jAja^S* 
In  the  reception  of  suffixes  this  declension  agrees  with  decl. 

I  ;  e.  g.    ^aAilSDjf ,  OlA^il),  ^tS^  and  OlAll^. 

Rem. — Some  insert  Q  ;  e.  g.  \123^fall^  emphat.  f  Aj^Q£i5^»     So 

too    (;l0)Z  wonder^    (k»*^»Z  love. 

Decl.  III.  This  includes  those  nouns  fem.  whose  vowel  of 
the  first  syllable  is  moved  forward,  in  the  emphat.  state  to 


144  DECLENSION   OF  NOUNS. 

the  second  vacant  consonant ;  e.  g.  l;^ja  female  companion^ 
emphat.  lZ^x» ;  |].^  cow^  emphat.  lA^.Il^  Nouns  of  this 
class,  taking  a  sufF.  in  the  sing.,  are  treated  like  nouns  in 
decl.  L  and  II. 

Rem.  .i.  Some  nouns  have  several  emphatic  forms.  Thus 
}iD>l  alms^  has  three  emphatic  forms ;  e.  g.  lAoj] ,  lAojl ,  lAojl* 
In  the  same  manner  also  are  inflected  (m^)  offering^  (Ag12  terror^ 
|*^m  woman,  |J>*?  /^<^^,  etc.  The  following  contractions  in  the 
emphat.  state  should  be  mentioned  :  \Lr*^  for  \LLfj>*  new,  \bsiy>> 
for  |Al21..  from  K^yt  ^^^^5  jAiiik  for  |^1*S\  from  jmN  brick. 

Decl.  IV.  This  includes  fem.  derivatives  of  Verbs  |J  end- 
ing in  t*  and  lo«  It  should  be  remarked  in  reference  to 
them  that  the  immutable  vowel  of  the  penult  syllable  is 
retained,  and  ^  and  Q ,  in  the  emphat.  state  sing.,  quiesce 
in  —  and — ;  e.  g.  (Ajj^o  •  from  Pft^O .  reproach,  jZOk-M 
from  |QjLj^  animal.  If  the  masc.  be  monosyllabic  the  vowel 
of  the  first  syllable  falls  away ;  e.  g.lAjJl^  from  \*!^  girl, 
(Vi  masc).  But  in  the  constr.  state,  and  in  all  the  plurals, 
M  and  Q  are  movable  ;  e.  g.  Lm^j^o  . ,  Zoi-m  ,  ZuJL^ ,  plur., 
,^1  ►iO»  ,  etc. 

Rem. — Here  belongs  also  the  participle  act.  of  Pa.  and  Aph. ;  but 
the  fem.  participle  pass,  in  the  same  conjugations,  ending,  in  the 
raasc,  with  w*. ,  takes  —  instead  of  —  in  the  emphat.  state. 
With  this  vowel  a  forms  the  dipthong  ai  ;  e.  g.  jiN.t  V) , 
emphat.  |A>\.tV)  from  «.i^y.Lo« 

Decl.  V.  To  this  belong  mostly  monosyllabic  derivatives 
of  Yerbs  ]]  ending  with  Q  and  ^  (some  end  in  Z ),  which 
begin  with  two  consonants ;  e.  g.  QjaSo  calamity,  •-»;£)  crea- 
ture.    Also  dissvllabic  nouns  belong  here  with  immutable 


ANOMALOUS  NOUNS.  145 

vowels  in  the  penult  syllable  ;  e.g.  03]  victory,  «-ijoZ  thanks^ 
whose  o  and  ^  quiesce,  throughout  in  the  sing.  But  in  the 
\AuT.  where  O  and  ^  are  movable,  some  nouns  (derivatives 
of  Pa.)  take  —  after  the  second  radical  letter ;  e.  g.  oL. 
entreaty  J  plur.  iQ^» ,  ^^ti  I^Cl^t*  Nouns  ending  with 
2  belong  here,  which  in  the  plur.  take  Q  with  the  falling 
away  of  2;  e.  g.  ASi  offering,  plur.  tOAl,  Lcl^,  I^QlSi* 
Other  nouns  (derivatives  of  Pe.)  take  —  after  the  first  rad- 
ical  letter ;  e.g.  QiD>  resemblance,  plur.  tOSoj ,  Zoioj,  |ZqSd>; 
or  wdth  gutturals  following,  they  take  — ;    e.  g.  QaaId  hloiv, 

0  7 

plur.  tCl*AiD,  etc. 

Rem. — The  same  peculiarity  of  taking  a  new  vowel  is  found  also 

4,         0  0  "7     0  «0  •^  0         7 

in  0;iD  authority,  plur.  tO^  ,  etc. ;  (ini  sheep^  plur.  tOOJ  and 
()SD  a  hundred,  plur.  (Zo  |ib  as  if  from  QOJ  and  0|Sd»  So  also  in 
some  nouns  which  are  not  derivatives  of  ]j  ;    e.  g.  Q-i\*^ partition, 

0        \7     0  «v  0  »0.  0         -n    ^\ 

plur.  ^Qu^JiS};  OjOlCD  testimony,  plur.  |Z0J01CD,  and  even 
0*^\V) ,  .O^NV> ,   besides  tO^NV) ,   and  some  others. 


§  49.  Anomalous  Nouns. 

Some  nouns  of  very  frequent  occurrence  are  inflected  in 
a  manner  varying  more  or  less  from  the  above  mentioned 
paradigms  (§§  47,  48).  This  arises  either  from  an  attempt 
to  unite  different  ground-forms,  or  from  the  simple  ground 
form  conforming  less  closely  to  the  general  laws  of  inflection. 

These  nouns  are  the  following  : 


146  PARADIGMS   OF  NOUNS. 


MASCULINES. 

Plural.  Singular, 

emphat.         constr.  absol.         emphat.     constr.     absol. 

01Q|       ^Gia]       ^Cld]  )  \oi\       *0|       JD|  Father. 

*C«PP»7  *     0     D  m7  ""•SI 

IZoi^l      Zoiol        ^ai^l  ^ 

\mJLO  w»JLO  ^aLd  ('^  \Ci  jp   5ow. 

I'Z^  JaAo  ^'Ao  I'A.&r)       AjlO  c^   ^02^5^. 

loiSQA    JoiSqs     ^oiSqa  )        ]Sn»     ^gl»      ^qs  JVam^. 

•p,    p  p..        .    pp..  ..p  p      r 

(ZaiSOA    ZoiSqa       ^ctiSqs  ' 

i26rzr  2o,'zr   /ovzr     lizr  ^^^r  ^lUiace, 

F  E  M  I  N  I  N  E  S  . 


VZoiSir  ZafiLof  ^oiSDf  tof  :>o'f  5>of  jl/o^Aer. 

iMii  Aii  ^i£)  I'Z'rO  Z'ri       Daughter. 

VZoilV  2culV  t^V  T^         Sister. 

l2oikiV  ZoiSdV  .OliV  l^V  ^V     "tofi/aiWm. 

]2Qk)V  ZqLD*!'  tOS^jf  IALOoI  ALDo]  lio]  People. 

«p,  p  ..  -»  , p  .. -ft  p ..  -ft  »ft    "-ft 

|ZQ21£D  ZQ21£0  .Q£IQD  |Z\£lCD  _^  — —  Lip. 

fAlooj  Aliioj  ^^o?  l^ooj  Aobj  looj  P/«ce. 


148 


NOUNS  WITH  StJFFIXES. 


Paradigms  of  Noum 
A.  Masculine  Nouns. 


Singular.  Decl.  II. 

Stat,  absol.  jOlcb 

Witness. 

Suff.Sing.  1  c.      *^>aicb 

D  0 

2  m.  ^)C71C0 

2  f.  olOJOIOD 

3  m.  01>GIQD 

3  f.  dlJOUX) 


SufF.plur.  1  c. 
2  ra. 
2  f. 


^■AO?01flQ 


Decl.  IV. 
King. 


Decl.  V. 


Boy. 


7.  7 

Drink. 
cuAaSd 

7   4  7 


2^ 


3  m.  ^OOljOlCD 


3  f.    ^01)0120      ^cnn^iLo     ^ouX^  ^guAaId 

(To  tlie  sufF.  1  sing,  of  tlie  forms  ]li  and  *aAmLb  add  » i  iS^  and 
aLmIhD  ,  compare  *^AaLo  §  46.  1.  a).  / y ^ 


Plural.                 ^>01CD  ^ 

Suff.sing.  1  c.         *^J01CD  *>n\V) 

2  m.      «^>ai£D  y  1  n\V) 

2  f.    .  > ^ >^mM>  .  ininNV) 

3  m.«^aio>ai£D  *uaion\V) 

3  f.        GU>C7l£D  Oli^SV) 

Suff.plur.  1  c.        ^jOlfib  .  inSV) 


V 


on 


2  m..Q2^)0l£D 

^      -ft       7  D 

2  f.  ^jLiLijairo 

3  m.,oau)Oi£D    .oaiinW) 


^n 


7»         7 


3  f.  ^OUJOICD     ^Ol 


»nSv> 


^OOLii^      ^001  >  I \^ 


NOUNS   WITH   SUFFIXES. 


149 


loiih  Suffixes, 

B 

.    Feminine  Nouns. 

Comp.  §  49 

.     Table. 

Decl.  1. 

Decl.  IV. 

Decl  V. 

7 

^r 

1            Vol^ 

X^ 

^5 

Son. 

Father. 

Virgin. 

Maiden. 

Petition. 

-•r^ 

^r 

^t&ota 

^td:^ 

oi7q1« 
otZqI. 

^ooiZol. 
^ctZqI. 

wi^ALoAo 

oi-b 

•X        ..7 

^OIQjDl 

Gii\LoA:2 

01AA4 

0\\Ci 

.-  *•          ^7 

OlOiDl 

oiiMoAii 

CT^uS4 

7 

«.         i.7 
«v           .X        ^7 

^oAo 
^qoASoAo 

^oai;i 

^      *    X         .7 
•X             -X         ^7 

.OOIQ^I 

^ASoAtd 
^ooiAlIoAo 

^001  All^ 

^       ■«  x      .v" 

^OlQliil 

^oiASoAo 
^oAo 

^oiAll^ 

]1 

Flood, 

••          7 

Waters. 

0.7    •• 

•  •      7 

^oioio 
oi'i'V) 


anjkSo 


V 


.ooilk} ,      »ooii">^o 


oiASoAo  (jfAll^ 

oi'aSoAo  oiAliJ^ 

.QoAlLoAiD  .qoAII^ 

.ooiASoAtd  ^ooiAlL^ 

^diASoAn)  ^oiAjIL^ 


«aZa^. 

n^.  7^ 

*,  p.  7^ 

oiZq1» 

.obZol^^ 
^-LoZqX» 

•X  ,p    .7  V. 

.ooiZqI* 

V      *  ,  0  .7  V. 

^oiZqI. 


150  ADJECTIVES  AND  NUMERALS. 

§  50.  Adjectives  and  Numerals. 

1.  Adjectives  being  derivatives  of  verbs  (see  §  40.  and 
tables)  and  having  the  same  form  as  nouns^  are  inflected  ac- 
cording to  the  same  laws  (see  §§  44,  45,  48).  In  respect  to 
denominative  adjectives,  see  §  41.  2. 

Rem. — The  Syriac  has  no  special  forms  for  the  comparative  and 
superlative.  For  the  manner  in  which  these  are  expressed,  see 
Syntax   §  Y7. 

2.  Numerals  are  either  cardinal  or  ordinal.  In  the  former 
we  should  notice  the  peculiarity,  that  masculines  from  3  to 
10,  as  in  Hebrew,  have  feminine  endings  ;  but  feminines,  on 
the  contrary,  have  masculine  endings.  From  20  to  100 
there  is  only  one  form  for  both  genders. 

The  numbers  from  1  to  10  are  the  following  : 
C  ORDINALS. 


Fem. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Masc. 

Vr- 

7 

1. 

a; 

YA.       6. 

^Vl 

^'^ 

2. 

W^m 

iLoi      1. 

tlL. 

XtlL 

3. 

]iii2 

]llii>2       8. 

^hX 

ii^^r 

4. 

^l 

K.r  9. 

.■V)m 

i^v.;. 

5. 

7 

ItCQi     10. 

Rem. — Upon  the  union  of  these  numerical  words  with  suffixes, 
see  §  46.  2.  b.  Rem. 

The  tens  from  80  to  90  are  expressed  by  the  plural  of 
the  cardinals  from  3  to  9 ;  e.  g.  ^iSSZ'  30,  ^^^^jf  40, 
^^laVOM  50,  ^E^  60,  ^xini  TO,  ^jlii  80,  ^-Jji2  90. 
The  plural  of  10  (^r^)  represents  20.  All  plurals" are  of 
the  common  gender.  Iti)  signifies  100,  ^"ifco  200,  l]k>AL7 
or  IZolliD  ALZ  300,  etc.,  with  the  preceding  unit  in  the  fem- 
inme.  «i^  signifies  1000  (instead  of  *a!ik  or  .SiISL,  em- 
phat.   Isil:^,  plur.   ,^i^^,'ta!L);   ^i<^%^  ^ll  signifies 


ADJECTIVES  AMD  NUMERALS.  151 

2000,  ,^-ii^  Ta!^2  8000.  etc.  (with  the  preceding  unit  in 
the  masculine). 

The  intermediate  numbers  from  11  to  19  are  formed  by 
the  union  of  units  with  10  in  one  word,  in  the  following 
manner  : 

Fem.  Masc.  Fem.  Masc. 

Vjmi'r^       ;mi^     11.  T'^TilKM         'r^^i 

T>l2i2        'Ml     12.  '^IhM !  !«• 

TJcQlASZ       •,aili^Z       13.  f[resl^m  -(^K^m       17. 

•yCQiZ^aV^M  ^  1  ^ms^Z         'rmi^Z     19. 

The  intermediate  numbers  from  21  to  29,  31  to  89,  etc., 

are  formed  by  the  numeral  representing  the  number  of  tens, 

followed  by  the  numeral  under  ten  preceded  by  o  ;    e.  g. 

(Aj^Zo  ^L\l  masc.  33,    .aSOmO  ^A»  fem.  66. .  Sometimes 

the  units  precede  ;  e.  g.  ^^£010  |^^^|  24,  etc.  So  if  the 
number  of  numerical  words  combined  be  large,  the  greater 
numerals   are   always  placed   before    the  smaller ;    e.    g. 

U^O     ^"fSoLo    l]Sn")V)Zo    «2l^    1827. 

8.  The  ordinal  numbers,  from  3  to  10,  are  formed  from 

the  cardinal  numbers   by  adding  the  terminations  |^  masc, 

f  Aa-  fem.,  and  inserting  ▲  before  the  ultimate  radical.  Foi 
the  first,  a  particular  word  is  used,  and  for  the  second,  a  form 
differing  somewhat  from  the  form  of  the  cardinal  for  2. 

ORDINALS. 

Fem.  Masc.  Fem.  Masc. 

VZuiDrO       ]»^rQ     the  first.     lAa2uA»     ]lAaA»      the  sixth. 

VAxIIjZ  lll)Z  the  second.  VAiStn*  l>Sin»  the  seventh. 

VLJLSL      ]lhu^L    the  third.  XLAj^I  ViliV'Z     the  eighth 

^A>v>A;      ]\  K  >  A%  the  fourth.     VZuloiZ  ]  i  S  i  •Z      i/ie  7^^^^.'A. 

liui-iSOM  1".  •^^^^^     the  fifth.     lAa'piini  ll'piXQl      the  tenth. 
11 


]  52  PARTICLES — ADVEKBS. 

The  tens  of  ordinals  from  20  are  expressed,  as  in  Hebrew, 
either  by  cardinal  numbers  or  by  the  addition  thereto  of  the 
terminations  (.k.  masc.,  \Ll.  fem. ;  e.  g.  (»i  ^^onv ,  {><  -n\^ , 
1 1 1  i  sn>  I ,   etc.     The  units  are  put  after  ;    e.  g.   ]uAa.^Z 

The  intermediate  numbers  from  11  to  19,  etc.,  are  formed 
by  uniting  the  ordinal  number  10  with  a  unit  of  the  cardi- 
nals, into  one  word,  the  unit  preceding ;  e.  g.  lAm'^mv  >. 
fem.,^;imSrM  masc.  the  eleventh^\L^\ > ^\IM fem.,  |.;>rftv;/ 
masc.  the  twelfth^  etc.  Sometimes  the  ordinal  10  is  united 
with  a  cardinal  number  and  the  word  is  preceded  by  >  ;  e.g. 

7        7  7  7        ,*«7 

;rQ^rM> ,  'jmuZj ,  etc. 

Rem.— The  Syrians,  like  the  Hebrews,  express  the  idea  o(  a  part, 
by  a  feminine  form  and  the  insertion  of  Q  after  the  first  radical 
letter  ;  e.g.  lA^oZ ,  'il209 ,  IaSoOm  third  part,  etc.  Upon  the 
other  relations  of  numbers  comp.  Syntax  §  78. 


CHAPTER  FOUETH. 

PARTICLES. 

To  Particles  belong  adverbs,  prepositions,  conjunctions 
and  interjections.  In  respect  to  their  origin  they  may  be 
considered  as  primitive, derivative,  or  transferred  from  other 
parts  of  speech.     The  last  are  by  far  the  most  numerous. 


§  51.  Adverbs. 

1.  The  following  may  be  considered  as  primitive  adverbs: 
^1  so,   )]  ,  Q^  not,   ^>OL  there,    p  here. 

2.  Those  derived  from  nouns  and  adjectives  with  the 
characteristic  endings   Al ,  Zo-  and  Lk\ ,   arc  the  following  ; 


/? 


PREPOSITIONS.         /.  163 

Zu>*l  at  last  J  AlLOrO  at  first,  ZqiIjZ  again,  Aa^oil^  godly, 
Aa|>^  m  sAor^,  A^(;£1L  Hebraically,  fP^QA  today. 

3.  As  transferred  from  other  parts  of  speech  are  to  be 
considered  those  : 

a)  from  substantives  ;  a )  with  a  preposition  ;  e.  g. 
|Z>i^  finally,  \y\M^  truly,  P^l^  once,  <^i^  inwardly, 
. » \ ^  1  Kc^i'nm/mpdiafphj^  •Ajj.JiD  anew  ;  j3)withouta  preposition; 
e.  g.  1  '^*^  {want)  not,  |AmSo  enough,  ail^ ,  ^X^  wholly,  na- 
tively, also  in  the  plural  1  Alibi  sometimes  ;  h)  from  adjectives, 
numerals   and  pronouns;    e.   g.   %rx4,  >-fc'yiffl  very,    >QuJ^, 

O.  .        7  7       ij7     -P  »*7  V  f*"         •  ^    ' 

jOkk^jQ  ow?y,  r**^l )  lp**^l  ^i  once,  (rM^  immediately,  ]iQO 
Aow;  mwc^  f  )iSq1  ,  Qlk)  i^^y  -^  c)  ^^^^^  verbal  forms,  as  the 
infinitive,  *QoZ  a^am  ;  or  participles  ^m»»V)S ,  ^mulp  ^ 
almost. 

Rem. — Some  adverbs  are  transferred  from  the  Greek  ;  e.  g. 
nVVvr>  ^aXkov,  ^mi\V)  fxaXio'Ta,  "lo^]  s/xii.  The  Syriae  lan- 
guage is  especially  rich  in  compound  adverbs.  Such  are  the  fol- 
lowing :  ]au1  where  ?  p-»U  l^r^  wherefore?  ]j  ^^saO^  not  yet, 
*jiAliD]]  l^OpL  AoMJ  long?  piCn  woz^>,  (SOpL  |Ld01^  until  now,  etc. 
Among  compound  adverbs  may  also  be  placed  the  circumlocutory 
A>V  not  to  he   (see  §  38).     The  simple  interrogation   is  either  not 

7 

expressed  at  all,  or  by  the  addition  of  wk^  :  the  negative  interroga- 
tion, is  expressed  by  IJ ,  and  loi  (]♦  The  syllable  %a1  prefixed 
to  pronouns  and  adverbs  expresses  an  interrogation  ;  e.  g.  P-»(  ^Lo 
whence  ?  pL»  |  who  ? 

§  52.  Prepositions. 

1.  To  the  original  Prepositions  belong  the  prefixes  •s , 
J  (gen.),  ^  (dat.  and  ace.)  which  are  always  joined  with  a 
noun  or  pronoun,  and  are  vacant  when  the  noun  or  pronoun 

begins  with  a  regular  consonant ;  _e.  g.  ^QjlD  ,  ln\\n\» 
Prefix  prepositions  take  the  vowel,  which  is  usually  _L,  when 


154  PREPOSITIONS. 

the  following  consonant  is  vacant  ;  e.  g.  ]»<^^*-^  ^  )X^^  ^ 
or  when  the  vowel  falls  back  from  the  quiescents  ]  or  Oi; 

e.  g.   llSoo  from  l^D  for  ]1^ ;     .-klDOOi'S  for   *jiiooi'^. 

Before  words  which  begin  with  ] ,  *a  or  oil ,  the  vowels,  in 
which  these  letters  quiesce,  fall  back  upon  the  preceding 
prefix ;  e.  g.  ]1jV3  ,  l^jo^i ,  1%lJ ,  V,i\%N" ,  joi:^  from 
li>l ,  etc. 

Rem. — Before  (A»  6,  and  ^A«,  these  prepositions  take  —  ,  pro- 
bably because  they  were  also  written  "{Lb]  and  ^A»l*  In 
^^^QO  and  ^>QD  the  preposition  L  quiesces  in  Q ,  *  which  falls 
back  (comp.  §  15.  2.  B.  c.  and  the  tables  following);  e.g.  V\^«^nV 
^r^oL ,  except  when  suffixes  are  appended  with  a  union  vowel,  in 
which  case  the  _\  of  the  second  syllable  falls  away  and  the  original 
form  reappears  ;  e.g.  OlXaon\  etc.  Among  the  original  preposi- 
tions may  also  be  reckoned  the  monosyllables  ^Ql  witk^  7n<^\  hy^ 

ICL^    to. 

2.  Most  of  the  other  prepositions  are  considered  as  trans- 
ferred from  other  parts  of  speech ;    a)  substantives  in  the 

constr.state  ;  e.  g.  ^^  before^  tPOy  instead,  *'^\^tfor,  «a1  in 

and  ALfc^  between,  hr*^  and  ^)h^  about,  Lo^L  and  Li^^Lunder, 

^  (fromLl!^  part)  from,  5Ao  after ;     b)   substantives  with 

prefixes ;  e.g.  >AcQQ  according  to,  ^nno\  against,  ^loQ^ 

before  ;     c)   compounds ;    e.  g.   ^  t^r^  until  to,    ^^aL  over, 

plXo  ^Sd  without,  >,-M  ^laO  around,  about,  \>^iOQ^  ^Sd  against. 

3.  Several  of  the  prepositions  seem  to  have  been  origi- 
nally plural  nouns,  on  which  account  they  are  united  with 

plural  suffixes.     Here  belong    \^over,    ?lt»  r»t    cfter,a- 

gainst,  %Si^**for,  ^^O  before,  Lqj^L  under  (comp.  §  16.  2.  C. 
and  the  following  paradigms). 

^Instead  of  saying  that  -^  quiesces  in  Q  the  author  should  have 

said  that  L  takes  the  vowel  —  with  Q  quiescing  in  it,  as  ^  is  not  a 
quiescent  (see  §  13). — Tr. 


PREPOSITIONS  WITH    SUFFIXES.  155 


Prepositions  with.  Suffixes. 
(  §  16.  II.  C.  and  §  52  ). 
A.  With  Suff.  of  the  Sino.  B.  Of  the  Plur. 


Masc.             Fern. 

^ 

ZoL 

^5^q1        ^         ^Hi 

in. 
Sing. 

1  C.       ^JJ^ 

2  m.    yJ^ 

to. 
/ZoL 

after, 

y',L6 

against.       over,  on  account  of. 

3  f.     oiQ     cfi'Zol     oi)Ao    aiSrjQol     olJ^    oi2^Asd 

Plur. 

1  c.     ^       ^2q1       ^Ao     ^^non\      ^j^      .Ai^So 

2  m.  .002  .qdZq^  .QD^Ab  .nnNnoai  .on  i  \\  .ooAIi^^ 

*^  *^  1    P*         •*>  ,  5      ?         -x        •         7         -X.  -X  .7  -X  it"*.  -    *»> 

3  m..ooio  ^ooiZo^  .ooijAo  ^oaiNnooX^aujiL^ooiA^i^ 
3  f.  ^012  ^CTiZolu^cn^^AQ^aiVnnoS  ^guXi^giAI^^Sd 


Rem. — The  following  take  no  suffixes  :  Aa2  in,  j£lL  without, 
Q. A  w^77im,  ^M!L  oi;er,  A>aA!^  under,  ]SdA  ^^^^^  ^<^>  and 
^^  ;^^   except. 


156  CONJUNCTIONS  AND  INTERJECTIONS. 

§  53.   Conjunctions  and  Interjections. 

1.  The  original  ConjunctioDS  are  the  copulative  O  ,  >  that^ 
because  (^before  infinit.),  il  ^^  p  as^  since,  of  or,  *jlO  hence, 
^Qj^  (for  this  preposition  in   questions  see   §  51.  3.  Kem.) 

r 

namely.  ^>  lest. 

Rem. — O  and  J ,   like  «2  and  ^,   are  prefixed  (see  §52.  1). 

2.  Compound  Conjunctions  are  ;  a)  with  ^1 ;  e.  g.  q2^  if, 
^  13]  andlloi^  7i7ilesSj  ^]  although,  ^j  ooul  and^rj]  if 
hut,  tlo  —  ,1©  he  it — he  it ;  b)  with  j  ;  e.g.  Bj  lest,  especially 
after  prepositions ;  e.  g.  j  yu]  as,  j  ^is^^ »  ?  ^^  ^^^  ?  *^^ 
because,  j  ^io  ?e5/,  j  p^A  until;  c)  with  other  conjunctions  ; 
e.  g.  ^i-OOl  /lence,  ^  inV>  now,  .Qyi  ,i  therefore,  -*^^  p 
although.     From  the  Greek   are  borrowed  |j  (  aXXa,  ;a..  ^ap, 

3.  Interjections  as  primitives  are  mostly  onomatopoetic  ; 
e.  g.  Of ,  ,0|  0  .-^  *^0  wo  !  \Cl  behold/  ^OU  hey  /  ha! 
They  are  sometimes  borrowed  from  other  parts  of  speech  ; 
e.g.  •2)oA«( ,   ^aol^  ify^l  -     OV*^*^  I  pray  you  I 


PART    THIRD 

SYNTAX. 

CHAPTER    FIRST. 
THE     PRONOUN. 


§  51.    Use  of  the  Separable  Personal  Pronouns  and  Suffixes. 

A.  Separable  Personal  Pronouns. 

1.  These  pronouns  at  tlie  beginning  of  a  sentence,  denote 
a  certain  empliasis,  and  stand  in  various  relations  to  the  verb 
which  follows  in  the  same  person.  This  relation  is  not  only ; 
a)  that  of  the  nominative  absolute  ;  e.  g.  Rom.  xiv.  10. 
»^a»alJ  Li\  .  Ij  plD  —a J  Aj|  hut  thoti,  ivhy  judgest  thou  thy 
brother  I  Eph.  iv.  20.,  Acts  xix.  15.,  II  Tim.  iv.  5  ;  but 
it  may  be  also  represented  ;  h)  by  the  oblique  cases  ;  e.g.  a) 
by  the  genitive  ;  e.g.  Matt.  iii.  11.  oNnaV^N  pf  fQ»  U>  ooi 
wiOlQjmSD  whose  shoes  I  am  not  worthy  to  unloose^  John  xix. 
11.,  Ephes.  vi.  20  ;  ^  )  by  the  dative  ;  e.  g.  Kirsh.  ii.  2. 
•Aj"!  ^jlL  JD;£)  ]3  \i\o  but  no  one  comes  to  me,  Luke  xxiii.41 ; 
y)  by  the  accusative ;  e.g.  Kirsh.iv.7.-9.  ^»ND  ^oAjfj  ]Ld  001 
Uo  oiiSuAo  -K^ffio  tjf  ]snSai]i  ^o»»n»"2>  ]'■  \Sn  ^tS\ 

OlA*A»n*1  what  you  seek  to  find  in  the  nighty   I  seek  to  find  in 
the  day   time^   and  find   it   not. 


158  THE   PKONOUN. 

Rem. — They  are  also  emphatic  after  the  verb;  e.g.  Luke  iii.  14. 
^Lm  *a|  fClL2  piO  what  then  shall  we  do  ?     Upon  ^ajj  and  -jUf 

as  accusatives,  comp.  §  16.  Rem.  1.  and  the  preceding  table. 

2.  United  with  substantives,  adjectives  or  adverbs  they 
mark  the  Present ;  a)  of  the  substantive  verb  looi  (see  §38); 
e.g.  *uai  l^'r*  slit  is  true-^  Matt.  xxiv.  26.  001  UdSqm^  he  is 
in  the  desert ;  verse  23.  OOl  pjOl  he  is  here  ;  h)  of  the  finite 
verb  with  its  participle;  e.g.  pi  ^1 /say,  AjI  pJ^Jl* 
thou  art  horn   (comp.  §  64). 

Rem. — (Upon  ]  and  01  see  §  12.  1.  B). — The  contraction  of  the 
pronoun  with  the  participle  or  adjective  into  one  word  is  found  in  the 
1  pers.  plur. ;  e.  g.  ^^1  \\n  we  read ^  k}^^  "^^  ^^  ^^^  holy.  It  is 
also   found  sometimes  in   other  persons  ;    e.  g.  Eph.  iii.  13.    (l^lji 

4^  0      7 

I  beseech  ;  Gal.v.3.  n*^u^  he  is  guilty ;  iii.ll  (comp.  §20.and§37.E). 

3.  Farther  in  these  cases ;  a)  the  pronoun  of  the  same 
person  may  be  doubled,  so  that  the  former  will  denote  the 
subject  and  the  latter  the  substantive  verb  ;  e.  g.  John  i.  20. 
|j I  Pi  / am  ;  xiv.  20.  tO Aj (  w»^  # 0 Aj |  ye  are  in  me  ;  Matt, 
xxvi.  73  ;  or  the  part,  present  of  the  finite  verb  is  placed  be- 
tween ;  e.g.  Matt.  iii.  11.  p|  ,V>SV>  pf  /  baptize ;  xxvii.  4; 
John  xiii.  13 ;  Barh.  68,  16 ;  105,  14  ;  148,  15. 

h)   In  the   simple   pronoun    may    be    contained    both 

the   subject   and   substantive   verb  ;    e.  g.  Gen.    xxix.   4. 

^Ija  •>*  ^Sd —  fO^Jf  pV^if   whence  are  ye  ? — we  are  from 

Haran;  Assem.  I.  83 ;  12,  13. 

c )  The  pronoun  001 ,  as  substantive  verb,  may  follow 
the   1    and   2   person    as    subject ;     e.   g.    Acts    xxii.   8. 

^Q*^  001  pi  I  am  Jesus ;  Luke  xxii.  67.   f»»,i«V)  ooi  Aj(  .| 

if  thou  art  the  Messiah  ;  verse  70 ;  xxiv.  18  ;  Ephr.  I.  214.  E; 
Barh.  173,  18-20.     Also  ^Qjf  and  ^jY,  follow  the  1  and  2 


PRONOMINAL  SUFFIXES.  159 

pers.  as  subject ;  e.  g.  Matt.  v.  13.   IijIj  01m>\V)  .qjV.oAj] 

ye  are  the  salt  of  the  earth;  I.  Cor.  iii.  17;  Barh.  133.  1. 

Rem. — Instead  of  the  pronouns,  thePhiloxenlan  version  of  the  N.T. 
uses  A^l  with  suff.;  e.  g.  ^OloZuf  \i\  Iam\  ^QD^Ljk\  ^bS\ye  are, 

B.    Suffixes 

1.  The  pronominal  suffixes  of  the  verb  denote  the  accusa- 
tive ;  rarely,  and  for  tbe  most  part  in  translations  from 
the  Hebrew,  the  dative  ;  e.  g.  wi-jAoctIji  for  w>JL  Aiiou  thou 

hast  given  to   me. 

Rem. — This  imitation  of  the  Heb.  is  neglected  in  passages  of  the 
0.  T. ;  e.  g.  Zach.  vii.  5.  comp.  with  Ephr.  II.  296.  B.  and  Isa.  xxiv. 
4,  comp.  with  II.  65.  C. 

2.  In  the  relation  of  genitive,  the  suffixes  are  attached  to 
the  nomen  rectum  or  to  the  genitive  proper;  e.g.  Ez.  xvi.  18. 

•jbOAo^j    p  1^    thy    embroidered    garments^     literally    of 
thine  embroidery   or  ornament ;  vii.  20;  xi.  15  ;  xxvii.  16,  27; 

y  p     *>      ^ "      ^^ 
Matt.  vi.  11.    ^inJQ£D>  pOM^^  our  necessary  hread^   literally 

of  our  need. 

Rem. — The  suffix  is  seldom  found  with  the  nomen  regens  ;  e.g.  Ez. 

xvi.  27.  fLQjkJlJ  .-fc-DAjaJOJ  ^SsD  of  thy  lewd  ways,  usually  in  con- 
nection with  |1  i  V)i  the  right,  and  |JSD£0  the  left ;  e.g.  Acts.  iii.  7. 
|l  iSf).  kJ  ClpA^  on  his  right  hand;  Matt.v.29;  Rev.i.I7.  Sometimes 

a  double  suffix  occurs ;  e.g.  Ephr.  I.  204.  B.  and  G.  ^^PQ^  y»r^-^ 
thy  first  horn. 

3.  The  noun  taking  a  suffix  stands  before  an   adjective 

»PxV  •^'a'" 

connected  with  it ;    e.  g.  Ps.  Ixxxvii.   1.    t*-"rO  01jq4o 

in  his  holy  mountain'^  Ez.  vi.  9;  Ephr.  I.  284.  A.  Jn^  Ol) .o] 

his  good   treasure. 

4.  The  suffix  to  the  noun  is  often  understood  objectively; 

8.  g.  Exod.  XX.  20.     OiA!iI*j/ear  before  him  ;  I  Cor.  xi.  25. 

•.ftJ;30rL  in  remembrance  of  me\  John  xv.  10.  OliiOA* 
love  to'him]  Barh.  218,  14.  * 

Rem.  1. — Possessives  are  also  expressed  by  ^\^J  with  suff.  (§  16. 
B) ;    e.  g.  Barh.  49.  7.     Oll^j  ]]1mw«U9  his  commander  ;  146,  10. 


160  PLEONASTIC   USE   OF   PRONOUNS. 

This  manner  of  expression  is  used  particularly  when  a  stronger  eia- 
phasis  is  required  than  is  indicated  by  the  mere  suffix  ;  e.  g.  Matt. 

vi.  13.   ]Zon\V)  w»Cn  y^y  thine  is  the  kingdom  ;   Barh.  146,  1. 

•;>A.O>  ^^?  (A05  (Lrl  our  great  church  in  Haran.  If  the  suff. 
to  the  noun  be  also  repeated,  it  indicates  (emphatically)  the   Greek 

possessives    ^[klg   tfo^,    &c. ;    e.  g.  John  iv.  34.    « »N*?    *-»A^QD]Sd 

sfAov  /3^u/xa  ;  vii.  6  ;  xv.  9  ;  Rom.  3.7.     The  same  repetition  of  the 

•7        1  7 

suffix  occurs  also   in   prepositions;    e.g.   II  Cor.  v.  19.   ^X*9  ^^ 

iv  vi\iA\)  ;    I  John  ii.  2,  and  in  certain  forms  of  expression;  e.g.  Matt. 

xxvii.  4.  ^^  PiD  — ^  T»  If  fag  >jfxa^  ;  John  xxi.  22. 

0  7   0 

Rem.  2. — We  should  mention  the  use  of  the  sufF.  in  •^;lD  ,  .rSD, 

for  the  pronoun  of  the  second,  and  in   «,ui,*^\,   ^ASd(  ,    j^^aijfor 

the  pronoun   of  the  first   person,  when  the   discourse   is   addressed 

to     superiors ;     e.   g.    Genesis   xliv.    16.       «->;V)  \    ;SDp    plD 

what  shall  we  say  to  thee  {my  lord)  ?  .^ii,*^s\  (Ol^^*  our  {thy 
servants')  iniquity  ;  ve;*se  32.     So  kings  in  speaking  of  themselves 

use   \d!^  ;  e.  g.   Esth.  viii.  8.    ln\V)>   ]V)«n    QCJo'Ao   write 

in    {my)    the   king's  name;    and   in   reference    to   God,    01,  vv 

is  used  ;    e.  g.   Gen.  v.  1.     Also   %a^   stands  connected  with  the 

second   and   third  persons ;    e.  g.  Mark  xii.  37.     «ji;Ld   Ol^    \\£i 

7     0 

he  calls  him  his  {my)  Lord,  and  diflfers  from  y^ ,  in  that  the  for- 
mer is  the  common  form  of  salutation,  while  the  latter  marks  the 
pluralis  majestatis,  and  is  used  of  Christ  in  the  version  of  the  New 
Testament ;  e.  g.  Acts  i.  1  ;     Rom.  xiv.  8. 

Rem.  3. — It  is  rather  to  be  considered  as  an  imitation  of  a  Hebrew 
idiom,  when  the  suffix  relates  to  a  noun  which  does  not  occur  till 
later  in  the  discourse  (comp.  Gesenius  Lehrgeb.  p.  739) ;  or  when 
the  noun  itself  is  repeated  instead  of  the  pronoun ;  e.g.  Gen.  xvi.  16. 

§  55.  Pleonastic   Use  of  Pronouns. 

A.  Separable  Personal  Pronouns. 

Here  belongs  the  pronoun  of  tlie  third  person   ooi  (Ol) 

(comp.  §  12.  1.  B)   united  with  nearly  all  persons  of  the 

sing,  and  plur.,  by  which  an  emphasis  is  denoted,  which  is 

disregarded  in  the  later  language.     It  is  found   still  in  such 


PLEONASTIC   USE   OF  PRONOUNS.  161 

passages  as  John  viii.  26.     ]Sn\sn   p]   WVv^V)  ooi  ^.Aoi 

thai  {exactly)  I  speah  hefore  the  world;    verse  28  ;    xv.  16  ; 

Eom.  iii.  31 ;    Heb.  ix.  17.     It  is  to  be  considered  merely 

as  pleonastic  m  Luke  vii.  19.     ^i  >^nn<^  ©01  ^*h^|J   o| 

or  shall  we  wait  for  another  ?  Eom.  xiv.  8  ;  Heb.  xiii.  22  ;  I 
Tim.  \A\  V.  9;  Barb.  188,  8  ;  Assem.I.  221,A.5,  especially 
where  it  occurs  with  a  feminine  noun ;  e,  g.  Eom.  iii.  26. 

|jL3;i:)  *Djj]iD  001  jZaiSOjiOlO  hy  faith  is  a  man  justified.  OCFl 

is  sometimes  connected  with  a  plural ;  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  214,  D. 

^OOLUTDO   OOI   .OOUaJ   AIj^^O  on  account  of  his  ivives  and 

children. 

Eem. — Sometimes  also  the  fem.  «-*01  (still  more  emphatic),  is 
found ;  e.  g.    Eev.  xxi.  2.   Aafja  —  VAaji^   ^6l     l^^LoXo 

and  I  saw  (it)  the  holy  city  ;  xxii.  19,  and  the  plur.  .QJOl  Assem.L 
YT,  A.  20,  21.  OOI  and  OOI  are  sometimes  united  together  without 

»      3  7  7  -X 

emphasis  ;  e.g.  John  v.9.  (^Qa  001  0010  and  this  day  ;  Barh.148, 

•X         P      .jft     P  ••7  ■»>  * 

3.  Also  in  the  plur. ;  e.g.  Matt.  iii.  1.  tOJOl  fASoOin  ^j  tO^Jl^ 

but  in  these  days.  The  pleonastic  use  of  001  is  confirmed  from 
the  fact  that  the  Philoxenian  version  omits  it  altogether. 

B.     Suffixes. 
1.  The  suffix  is  often  used  pleonastically  with  the  verb, 
when  the  object  with  ^  as  though  by  way  of  explanation 

follows;  e.  g.  Matt.  i.  21.  OlV)s\  wiOin > »» 1  ;jLy,  oaifor  he 
shall  bless  (it)  his  people  ;  verse  24;    ii.  6,  11 ;  Mark  xiv.  47. 

Without  ^in  Matt.  xxv.  25.  j^J^a  CxL^ki  I  hurled  {it) 
thy   talent  ;    xxvii.  5  ;  I  Tim.  vi.  14. 

Rem.  1. — The  suffix  also  occurs  pleonastically  with  "  after  verbs 
of  motion,  going,  coming,  &c. ;  e.g.  Gen.  xxvii.43.  y^  ^1  go  ;  Luke 
viii.37.  OlS  ^iU?  therewith  he  departed;  Matt.x.6 ;  John  xi.31;  iv.3. 
.jDoZ  OlS  l2lo  and  he  came  again  ;  Assem.  1.44,A.l7.  Oli^  «n^1 
he  went  out  ;  186,A.30.  ]lkJjT^^^^  ^^  1°^  ^^  ^^  ^"^  O^ne 


162  PLEONASTIC   USE   OF  PRONOUNS. 

to  the  Aramoeans  ;  Eplir.  I.  260,  B.  l»^!^  OlS  ^OO  Moses  stood 
up  ;  Matt.  iii.  2.  IaIQ*?  iZonSV)  cCL  tCi^O  the  kingdom  of 
heaven  is  near ;  the  same  is  true  frequently,  after  AoJ^  (  =  ?o 
depart  from  this  life)  ;  e.  g.  John  xi.  14.  Ol^  AjlSd  jV^  Lazarus 
is  dead  ;  Mark  ix.  26  ;  Assem.I.  367,  9  ;  Ephr.l.204,A  ;  sometimes 

7 

with  verbs  which  have  not  the  signification  of  motion  ;  e.  g.  'f!D£D 
to  believe  ;  John  xi.  31  ;  fi^lL  to  maJce^  Barh.  217,  10  ;  J4*  to  be 
foolish^  Rom.  i.  22  ;  and  even  after  |001  John  i.  15. 

Rem.  2.-f-0n  the  contrary,  the  suffix  in  active  verbs,  sometimes, 
falls  away  when  it  can  either  be  easily  supplied  from  the  context, 
or   the   same   object    has   already   preceded ;    e.   g.  Barh.  424.  9. 

^OiQlDjO    \MliO   -   llOtO      \l^y    \0    ^na]    he   brought    out 

all  of  the  silver  coin  and  heaped  (it)  up  before  him;  particularly  the 

♦^«k  7      7 

neuter;  e.  g.  Gen.  xxiv.  49.  t-iJOlOja  inform  me  thereof.  In  many 
verbs  following  each  other  the  suffix  which  is  to  be  repeated  falls 
away ;  e.g.  Matt.  xiv.  19  ;  I  Cor.  xi.  23, 24.  Where  two  follow  each 
other  the  suffix  is  usually  added  to  the  latter  verb  ;  e.g.  Barh.  419,5. 

Ol^   ,^1  i;O>V)0    ^1  >  n>QSD  we  esteem  and  honor  it. 

2.  The  suffix  is  also  pleonastic  in  the  nomen  regens  which 
precedes  the  genitive  with  j ;  e.  g.  John  iii.  18.  olSiiAO 
LpXMuk)  in  the  name  of  the  only  begotten;  xii.3.  ^QAa>  ^aOloL..  j 
the  feet  of  Jesus  ;  verse  81 ;  Acts  v.  2  ;  Ephr.  I.  87,  B. 

Rem. — Here  belongs  also  the  repetition  of  the  suff.  before 
^^j  (§  54.  B.  4.  Rem.  1)  and  after  ^^  =  all^  without  J  following 
it ;  e.g.  Matt.  xiii.  2.  (jklD  UV^D  the  whole  m,ultitude  ;  ii.  3,  4  ; 
Kirsh.  114,  10.  |Al*,V)  ^01^  all  cities.  Sometimes  ^\d  with 
suffix  occurs  after  the  noun  ;  e.g.  Barh.  71,  6.  Ol^  ^>  (SDI  but 
the  whole  people  ;  Matt.  vi.  33.  ^01^  ^^iNoi  all  these  things. 
Without  the  suffix  ^\o  signifies  each,  every  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  iv.  4.  v^ 
|j5jO  every  word  ;  Acts  xviii.  4. 

3.  Finally,  a  pleonastic  suffix  is  attached  to  prepositions 
thus ;    « )   >  is  placed  before  the  accompanying  noun  and  is 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.  163 

considered  either  as  a  sign  of  the  genitive  (§  52.  2)  or  as  a 
relative ;  e.  g.  I  Tim.  i.  8.  JcdqIQJj  oiZqo(  according  to  (it) 
the  law  ;  John  i.  42.  ^Qa^j  oljAo  /o  (^m)  Jesiis  ;  xviii.  15; 
jfXk  Eev.  V.  11 ;  2ciL  Luke  xxiii.  7  ;  ^^^JiD  Kom.  viii.  3. 
liu^j  oi^^S^JiO  for  (it)  sin  ;  ^  Acts  iii.  6  ;  ^  Rom. 
xiii.6  ;  Barh.  74,18.  M0;^>  <^aiQjxL  against  {him)  the  tyrant; 
^ai  76,  11 ;  ^fd  Luke  v.  19  ;  6)  or  the  preceding  preposi- 
tion with  the  suffix  is  repeated  before  the  noun  ;  e.  g.  Luke 
ii.8.  'ihI\L  ai::^  in  {it)  the  field ;  Barh.192,7;  Assem.L  27, 1, 
29;  Ephr.I.87,B  ;  ^^  John  ii.  2.  VZoAaSqI  oiS  to  {it  to)  the 
feast;  ^  Acts  viii.  35  ;  ^  Acts  ix.  21,  etc. 


General  Remark  on  Personal  Pronouns. 

In  Syriac,  we  also  find  in  personal  pronouns  enallage ;  a) 
oi  number  in  A-i*! ;  e.g.  Barh.  166,  6.  ^;£01  tOOlO  ^oioAal 
|,^Q«  |;£Q10  (aj  there  were  among  them  twenty  women  and 
ten  children  ;  in  words  whose  plural  only  is  used ;  e.g.  Luke 
xxiii.  45.  OiAi-Ld  ^!i  tlo^GI)  ]ijZ  Jia]  -»j4  tl^  the  vail 
of  the  temple  was  rent  {in  its  midst)  in  twain.  The  same  is 
true  in  the  dual ;  e.  g.  Hebrews  xi.  26.  ^>^)  oiASOiXO 
the  treasures  {of  it)  Egypt;  Barh.  108,  2/,  h)  oi gender  ;  e.  g. 
Michael.  Chr.  20,  9,  10.  ^Oir^  —  l2o>21\ooilo  all  places 
— in  these  ;  c  )  of  gender  and  number  together,  if  by  collec- 
tives sing.  fern,  are  signified  names  of  countries  and  cities, 
men  or  inhabitants  ;  e.g.  Barh.  565, 18, 19.  Xlamj]  Ql**sim\ 
fZollo  O-Dj  .O^Oll  •alo  —  UU-J^  they  found  a  great 
many  men,  —  and  these  odso  they  led  into  captivity ; 
l2aJ^  580,  1,  2 ;    iW^  591,  5,  6  ;  .^•^Vl50,  11,  12 


164  RELATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

§  56.    Use  of  the  Relative  Pronoun  (§  17.  2). 

1.  The  Kelative  j  gives  to  adverbs  of  interrogation,  place, 
time,  etc.,  a  relative  signification;  e.  g.  liil  where?  >  p^l 
there^  where^  Jonn  i.  28.  ^IaaOi  (001  ^SqiSdj  pu|  ihere^  luhere 
John  haptized  ;  verse  40  ;  Barli.82,2  ;  '^i^ ivhither  f  ?  ]L^ 
thither^  where:  e.  g.  John  xiii.  ZQ.  \i\  \\\y  |iill  whither  I  go  ; 
Barh.  198,  13  ;  Assem.I.  27;  2.3.V.  E  ;  l^'{how  ?  ?  liif 
jiLst  as  ;  e.  g.  John  iii.  14  ;  v.  26  ;  xiii.  83  ;  ^t^]  when  ? 
J  wiASol  when^  as  ;  e.  g.  v.  25.  ^QlSomJj  ^Ak)1  when  they  shall 
hear;  ]UlD  how  much?  j  ]Sdo  so  much ;  e.  g.  John  vi.  11. 
QO .J  jSOD  fl5  mwc/i  a5  they  would,     y  gives  the  same  mean- 

ingsometimes  to  nouns;  e.g.  >^  I  JO  Zflce  ;  >  5Z|  where;  e.g. 
John  iii.  8. 

2.  The  oblique  cases  are  formed  by  some  mark  of  the 
case  followed  by  a  sufi&x ;  a )  the  genitive  is  indicated  by 
the  suffix  added  to  the   nomen  regeris ;    e.g.   John  ix.  ll. 

^QA.A  OISq^j  whose  name  is  Jesus  ;  Assem.I.  165,  A.  14;  h) 
the  dative^   according  to  the  following  example ;    Eom.  i.  9. 

\i\  «.«V^iiV)  aC^^  whom  I  serve ;  verse  31 ;  c)  the  accusative, 
thus  ;  e.  g.  John  i.  26.  01^  .oAj*!  ^-i^r^  U  \ObS\y  luhom  ye 
know  not.  The  accusative  is  also  expressed  by  the  suffix  at- 
tached to  the  verb  ;  e.  g.  iii.84.  CJIj^ji  loCLj  whom  God  hath 

sent ;  d)  the  ablative  by  .^  ;  e.g.  John  i.48;  by  ^io  Rom.i.6. 
In  a  similar  manner  the  relative  is  united  with  the  preposi- 

7  '"7«kPP««7 

tion  ;  e.g.  ^1,  John  iii.2.  OlSoi  |Ol22^j  with  whom  is  God^  etc. 

Rem. — In  connection  with  the  suffix  of  the  1  and  2  person,  added 
to  the  verb,  it  (the  relative)  forms,  with  reference  to  a  preceding 
subject  of  the  same  person,  the  oblique  cases   who^  /,  whom^  me,  like 

the  Lat.  qui;  e.  g.  Gen.  xlv.  4.  *jlUoAi£)1j  ^afiOOi  '{j]  W  lam 

Joseph  whom  [me)  ye  have  sold  ;  Num.  xxii.  30  ;  Isa.  xli.  8    (Ephr. 

TI.88.  E)   5^Aiil>jj  L{\  ^^4  thou  art  Israel  whom  [thee)  I  have 


RELATIVE   PRONOUNS.  165 

nidde  strong.     The  same  occurs  with  prepositiona;  e.  g.  Num.  xxii. 

30.  thy  she  ass  «i  \\  Aj|  ^.^uS^jy  upon  whom  (me)  thou  hast  ridden. 

The   relative  alone   sometimes   marks  the   accusative,   particular!} 

the  neuter;  e.  g.  Gen.  i.  31.    r^^^}  \^  all  that  he  made.    The  re 
lative  is  sometimes  used  before  the  mark  of  the  case  ;  e.g.  Barh.  43, 

12.  OUr^lTij  to  which  time  ;  137,  5.  |OCri  puk^)  which  belonged 
to   the  Arabians. 

3.  The  Syrians  express  the  relative  with  a  demonstrative 
preceding  Ae,  or  iliis^  who^  that,  which,  etc.,  as  follows ;  a)  by 
>  001 ,  y  001 ,  >  poi  masc,  ?  ^Ol ,  >  fjoi  fern.,  and  in  the 
plur.  J  ^QjOl  masc,    j  ^01  fem. ;    e.  g.  John  vii.   16.   ^] 

7  9  7 

vJLJ9r«?  OOlj  buthiSj  who  has  sent  me;  Eom.iv.  5;  vii.  6;  Phil. 
ii.6.  waOioA^lj  Ijoi  thatj  which  was;  John  i.24  0J>A»1>  tOJOl 
;^Ao5e  luho  were  sent;  Barh.  17,  2  ;  170,5  ;  i)  by  >  ^  masc. 
and.  fem.,  and  j  ^jib  neut. ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xiii.  12.  A^lj  ^Sn\ 
«I30l— »Aj  Ol^  to  him  who  hath,  shall  be  given  ;  John  iv.  34 ; 
V.30  ;  vii.l7,  18  ;  Matt.xiii.l7.  ^o*AjV^v,.Ij  U)^  that  luhich 

^  ^0      *7  •  ^i7      ^7 

■  ye  see  ;  Eom.  i.  28  ;  viii.  25  ;    c)  by  j  P-»|  masc,  j  fj-»l  fem. 

and  plur.  j  ^^>\>]  com. ;  e.  g.  Eom.  ii.29.    001  fimnn>  \ju\ 

he  ivho  is  inwardly  /John  viii.  9 ;  Eom.  ii.  2,  3  ;  iv.  7  ;  v.  14 ; 
Barh.  85,  3  ;  d)  frequently  by  the  participle  ;  e.g.  Eom.vii.l. 

(fiDOSas  (.k^r^  those  ivho  know  the  law. 

Rem. — If  a  particular  emphasis  is  to  be  indicated  the  demonstra- 

001  »QAu>  001  QJOl  this  very 
one  is  he  who  sat.  Sometimes,  like  the  Greek  ^attraction,  the 
demonstrative  is  wanting;  e.  g.  John  iv.  14.  Ol^  ^Z|  pfj  |lSo 
cou  vSaros  ou  s/w  ^wtfw  olCtg)  ;  or  the  relative  is  wanting ;  e.  g.  Heb. 
V.2.  ..^>'^^0->  ]Lk]o  and  he  {or  this)  who  can;  less  frequently  are  both 
wanting,  according  to  Hebrew  usage  ;  e.  g.  Job  xxiv.  19.  Finally 
the  relative  occurs  pleonastically  before  participles;  e.g.  Amos  vi.  1. 
•Q^Ol  I!^  _a.^A.Ar^  *aO  woe  to  those  who  depiseZion;  Ephr.II.274.D. 


166     DEMONSTEATIVE  AND  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

§  57.    Use  of  Demonstrative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns. 

The  demonstrative  is  neither  usecl  for  the  relative^  nor 
does  it  give,  as  in  Hebrew,  a  special  emphasis  to  particles 
aDd  numerals  (comp,  Gesen.  Lehrgeb.  p.  750  sq.).  It  is 
used  only  in  its  proper  signification. 

Rem. — It  IS  emphatic  m  connection  "with    001  and  w»01  (§  17.  1. 

Rem.)  ;  e.  g.  Matt.   v.   47.      Sometimes  fJOl  may  be  translated  by 
hicce  ;    e.  g.   John  xix.  19. 

2.  The  interrogative  pronoun   (  §  17.  8  )   is  united  with 

Douns  of  both  genders  and  numbers ;    e.  g.  Matt.  xii.  48. 

wi.ja|  ^QJ I  -S^O  '  »^|  *a01  _Sd  who  is  my  mother  and  who  are 

my  brethren  f     The  oblique  cases  are  either  so  expressed 
that,  in  the  genitive,  the  noun  in  the  constr.  state  precedes ; 

e.  g.  Gen.  xxiv.  23.     ^tj)  ^io  L\£i  whose  daughter  art  thou  f 

or  so  that  ^  follows  with  y  preceding  ;  e.  g.  I  Sam.  xii.  8. 

^j  ]r-a)  ^Lo/rom  whose  handf    or   Qlk)j   stands  before 

the  noun  ;    e.  g.  Matt.  xxii.  20.     ^dAdo    poi   ^iii^t  QiSDj 

ivhose  image  and  writing  is  this  ?     The  other  cases  are  form- 
ed by  the  special  case-signs  preceding,  or  by  prepositions  ; 

e.g.  Assem.  1.  84,  6.   ^Zl  ^sb^  to  whom  shall  I  give  ?  Matt. 

xii.  27.  (iSqo  whereby  e 

Rem. — Sometimes   }1ji|    occurs   instead   of  the   relative   in  the 

indirect   question,   without   J   following  it ;    e.  g.  Matt.   xxiv.  42. 

^00;V)    iZ"!    (Al*    \fjL\a  at  what  hour  your  lord  will  come  ?   and 

QlLo   includes    (OOl ;    e.g.   John  xviii.  38.    (>;*    QlLo   what  is 

truth  ?   vii.    20. 


§  58.  Pronouns  for  which  the  Syrians  have  no  special  forms. 

A.    Eeflexive  Pronouns. 
The  Syrians  express  the  reflexive  pronoun  (§  17.  4)  as  fol. 
fows ;  a)  by  the  passive  (comp.  §  21.  2.  §  22.  2.  §  24.  2);   b) 
often,  particularly  in  the  third  person,  by  the  personal  pro- 


OTHER   PRONOUNS.  167 

noun  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  54,  15.  ^*i4^  OliT  001  he  killed  himself; 
77,  5.  laLi  ^001^  qSOi^I  they  chose  themselves  a  king  ; 
83,  16;  by  prepositions;  e.g.Barh.  164,12.  «Qni.Kv  oiL^lo 
and  they  lead  hy  themselves  ;  c)  by  \mSLi  and  }5aOQlD»  The 
former  is  used  in  reference  to  persons  ;  e.g.  Matt,  xxiii.  12. 
OlisiJ  2>CL»;Jj  jl^^ Ae  who  exalteth  himself;  Barh.  56, 2  ;  84, 
15 ;  144,  12  ;  less  frequently,  in  reference  to  things ;  e.  g. 
Luke  xi.  17.  0la2U  ^  y^^ly  on\V)  ^^  every  kingdo'^i 
which  is  divided  against  itself  ]iDQlo  is  used  in  reference 
to  both  persons  and  things  ;  e.g.  II  Cor.  xii.  15.  VWl^.>Vnoi^ 
I  give  myself;  Luke  xi.  17.  ^o-SsAsi  oiSOQlo  ^j  liud 
a  house  which  is  divided  against  itself 

Kem.  —  Less    frequently    occur    in    ;i    reflexive    signification, 
\*i\  heart ;  e.g.  Lakeii  .51 ;   «i^)  head ;    p^O)  spirit  ;  e.g.  Dan. 

»  •••^7  •  0         7  *    P   ». 

iv.  5,  9  ;   |a.M  life;  Ps.  vii.  6.     The  pronouns  (jk£L3  and  (LdQIO  by 
way  of  periphrasis  for  other  pronouns;    e.  g.  Rom.  x.  3.     (ZopO 
tOGlA£U>  their  own  righteousness  ;  1  Cor.vi.l9  ;  Phil.ii.4,5  ;  Rom. 
ix.  3.     ,  iV>Q10  X^X I  myself ;  Heb.  i.  3  ;  ix.  28. 
B.    Other  Pronouns. 

The  other  pronouns  are  thus  expressed  : 

1.  :77m,  thai,   see  §  56.  3. 

2.  Each,  every,  are  expressed ;  a)  as  substantives,  by 
1-£i '.  Gen.  xl.  5  ;  ^1  I  Cor.  iii.  8  ;  vii.  2,  8  ;  Gal.  vi.  4  ;^ 
the  latter  is  doubled  in  Acts  ii.  88,  45 ;  I  Cor.  vii.  17 ; 
xi.  21 ;  II  Cor.  v.  10  ;  I  Thess.  iv.  4.  Sometimes  they  are 
expressed  by  %MSn  ^^  Kom.  xiii.  1 ;  r^  r**  ^^  Eph.  v. 
88  ;  ^  .^jI  ^  Luke  xiv.  83  ;  ^'rTilo  or  ^-^i  ^ 
Rom.  xii.  18  ;  h)  as  adjectives ;  a)  by  ^  Matt.  vii.  17  ; 
1  John  iv.  8  ;  ^So  ^^Ad  Assem.  I.  11,  A.  19 ;  ^)  by  a  re- 
petition of  the  noun  defined  by  each,  every ;    e.  g.  II  Kings 

12 


168  OTHER   PHONO UXS. 

7  7 

xvii.  29.  ^<l^  >0.1  every  nation ;  Matt.  xx.  10 ;  / )  by  the 
plural ;  e.g.  Amos  iv.  4.  Ir^  J^  every  morning;  sometimes 
by  ttie  singular  which  is  to  be  considered  as  a  distributive  ; 
e.  g.  Jer.  xxxvii.  21.  V^XlxO  each  day.  The  neuter  is  ex- 
pressed by  ^r^  ^\o  John  iv.  25. 

3.  Whosoever,   (quicunque),  is  expressed  by   uu]  ^o   or 

cat\o  John  i.  7;    1  Cor.  iii.   13;     ?^   Matt.   xiii.  19  ; 

?  Vi-»T^O  I  John  iii.  3  ;    j  ^  Mark  vii.  16  ;  Barh.  195,  3  ; 

198,12.  The  neuter  by  ?  |kilo  Acts  iii.22  ;  iv.  23  ;  ?  U)^ 
Matt.  X.  27. 

4.  Somebody,  anybody  (aliquis)^  in  interrogative  and  con- 
ditional  clauses,  are  expressed ;  «  )  by  ^mS\  and  |J^»i  John 
iv.  33.  ^ISol  \>o;^  oliT  JA^V^]  ]\n\  AcfrA  a/t//  one 
brought  him  aughi  to  eat  ?  vii.  48  ;  I  Tim.  vi.3.  •  Ukl\  Zu|  . | 
»aiJ!^j  ?/"  any  one  teach  ;  Rev.  xxii.  18  ;  ft)  by  >  ^io  Mark 
vii.  16.  OlL  AjiIj  ^ib  hath  any  one?  c)  sometimes  by  ^io 
Rom.  iii.  3.  ^ooiliD  ^  s/  Tivsg ;  Mark  xii.  5  ;  or  more  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  Hebrew  idiom,  by  ]mS12  Lev.  i v.  2  ;  v.  1 , 
2,  4  ;  vii.  27.  The  neuter  is  expressed ;  a)hj  ^^  Acts 
V.  36  ;  *S>  001  ^r^>  that  he  was  something  {great) ;  John 
vii.4 ;  I  John  ii.  15  ;  b)  sometimes  by  ^  Lev. v. 9.  JSoj  ^ 
some  {of  the)  blood;  or  U^^^^  (=  1^1 )  Gen.  xviii.l4. 

'  5.  Nobody,  no  one  ;  a)  as  substantives,  are  expressed  by 
m]  1]  Matt.ix.l6;  John  i.l8  ;  James  i.l3  ;  ]i\mS\  Acts  xviii. 
10  flCor.ii.ll ;  'riy.  ]]''Num.xxxi.49  ;  .ail  'r^  jl  Jer.li.43  ; 
*mj1  Lj\  John  vii.4  ;  sometimes  by  *mS\}  A^  John  xv.l3 ; 
J  A^ik  or  simply  by  Aa^  v/ith  an  adjective  or  participle  fol- 
lowing; e.g.  Matt.xix.l7.  IfL^  AjlL  no  one  is  good.  The  neuter, 
by  U)r^  13' or  U'^^lio  Phil.  ii.  3  ;  I  Tim.  vi.  7;    A^^  fol- 


OTHER  PRONOUNS.  169 

lowed  by  ^r^  Matt.  x.  26  ;  with  ^^  preceding,  II  Cor. 
vi.  10  ;  without  '^^  James  iv.  2  ;  b)  as  adjectives,  by  IJ 
after  the  noun,  with  the  verb,  I  Cor.  ii.9.  L\j^  ]]  ]ijlL  no  eye 
hath  seen  it ;  before  the  noun,  Eom.  viii.  39.  \tu^  ]]  no 
creature  ;  by  A^  with  the  noun  following,  Luke  iv.  24. 
I»ni  Aa.^  no  prophet ;  Heb.iv.13  ;  with  the  noun  preceding, 
Eph.  V.  5  ;  with  the  words  standing  between,  John  xv.  22. 
(Aa.4**  ^001-^  Zooi  Aa^  they  would  have  had  no  sin. 

6.  Some,  any^  are  expressed  ;  «)  by  j  A^]  Matt.  xvi.  14. 
^r^l?  Aa"|  some  say ;  John  ix.  9  ;  with  words  interposed, 
vii,  12.  ^'^l?  •rO.^OOOl  L^X  for  some  said  ;  ?  ]jul  A^f 
I  Cor.  viii.  7  ;  xv.  34;  fl  Thes.  iii.  11 ;  b)  hj  **j]  "^] 
Phil.  i.  15  ;  I  Tim.  iv.  1 ;  ^  |ju1  John  ix.  16 ;  c)  elipti- 
cally,  by  ^,  Matt,  xxiii.  34.  ^oAj"|  ^iS^  .oouSd  some 
shall  ye  kill ;  Mark  xii.  o  ;  Acts  xvii.  32  ;  Eom.  v.  8  ;  (f) 
sometimes  by  the  plural  of  the  noun  ;  e.  g.  Dan.  viii.  27. 
I ALdOa  some  days  ;    poll ,  Gren.  xxix.  20.     The  neuter  is 

expressed  by  j  Ajj ,  Matt.  xiii.  4.   ^^»aj>  A^l  some  fell ;  also 

in  verse   8. 

7.  Some,  others,  are  expressed  ;  a)  by  \^\^  —  ^»aj] ,  Acts 
xxviii.  24  ;  or  by  .mJl  ^mj]  —  uijl  ^mS\  Phil.  i.  15 ;  b)  by 
)^r*A  —  ?  Aa"!  Matt.  xvi.  14 ;  John  vii.  12 ;  or  with  >  A^^ 
repeated,  Assem.  I.  10.  Eem.  1,  2  ;  c)  by  ^OOUio  —  .ooilSo 
Acts  xvii.  32  ;  Barh.  105,  10  ;  with  the  sign  of  the  case 
prefixed,  114,14.  ^00111  *  s  ScL  .oouSdLo  qI^^  ^oouIdIo 
some  they  hilled,  others  he  blinded  ;  finally  by  Mr**|  —  ^» 
Barh.  93,  18. 

Rem. — When  some   signifies  the  greater  party  it  is  expressed  by 


170  OTHER  PRONOUNS. 

p,.A*|  —  ^5;D  (Jo-i^CO  ,  John  vii.  40.  So7ne  this — others  that,  by 
VA1j->*1  \i^]  Acts  xix.  32. 

8.  The  one,  the  other,  (alter)  are  expressed  ;  a)  of  persons, 
by  ;iii  masc.  IZji**  fern.,  repeated;  or  by  'fCi.y  —  l;.0*i  Isa. 
iii.  5  ;  r^\\  —  k*I  Gren.  xiii.  11 ;  also  of  inanimate  objects, 
Matt.   xii.   13.    OlZ'^^js*  ^^^l  AloZo  oi^r^^iLa  he  stretched 

forth  his  hand  and  it  became  sound  as  the  other;  I  Cor.  xiv.7; 

Col.  iii.  13.  ISQIOJ  cniri>l  ^  .aj]]  Zuf^V   i/*    one  hath   an 

accusation  against  another  ;    Phil.  ii.  3,  4  ;  h)  by  ,.**  or  ^JOl 

repeated,  Kom.xii.lO;  j**.^  ja*  one  to  the  other  {^each  other, 

comp.  Kemark) ;    Matt.  xxiv.  10 ;    John  xiii.  35  ;    also  by 

]j>*l  -  r-^  Matt.  vi.  24.    ^'h^I  —  ^>A   John   iv.   37  ;    c) 

by   the    repetition    of   the    same    noun,     Acts    xxi.    34. 

io^o  i>0^  -  \nl]  one  this,  another  that ;  or  by  Ij^x*  Gal.vi.2. 

lVp*i5  1j^Q-»  CIII.4®  ^^^  ^^^  ^^'^^^  (Another's  burden. 

77^ 
j^EM. —  One  another  is  represented  by  ^x*  ,»m,  with  a  preposition 

interposed  between,  John  xiii.  14;  xxii.  34,  36  ;  sometimes  by  the 

simple  preposition  with  sufRx,  Rom.i.24.  ^OOIO  among  one  another  ; 

or  in  like  manner  by  |jr^  John  xvi.  19  ;  Barh.  41,  18. 

9.  The  same,  himself,  herself,  itself,  are  expressed  ;  a)  by 
a  personal  pronoun  doubled,  with  p  placed  between  ;  e.  g. 
Heb.x.ll.  U*^?  tOJOl  ^  .0301  i/ie  5a/?2e  sacrifice ;  Phil.iii.l. 
_a.JOl  p  ^JOI  the  same;  also  without  p  ;  e.g.Assem.I.44,13. 
IALdcu  .QJOlO  -QJ-0l2«^  ^he  same  time  ;  6 )  by  a  compound- 
ing of  the   demonstrative  pronoun  (§  l7.  1.  Rem.;  §  57.  1. 

Rem.) ;  c)  by  the  pleonastic  suffix  befol-e  the  noun;  e.g.Mark 
i.  42.  |A\aO  OIQ  at  the  same  hour;  Heb.  ii.  14;  ix.  24. 
1j.VQali  cnS  into  heaven  itself ;  Matt.  xxvi.  44  ;  Heb.  ix.  21. 


OTHER  PRONOUNS.  17 1 

PiDj  ^k)  ouSd  with  the  same  blood  ;  with  ^>  and  tlie  noun 
following  ;  e.g.  Assem.  1.415;  3.  lAi»j  giLa)  i/ie  ^awe  year  ; 
416,  1  ;  d)  sometimes  bj  \m2il  and  Udqit)  with  suffix  (§  58. 
A),  Matt.  iv.  6 ;  John  v.  26,  43. 

Rem. — More  definite  are  001  QJOl ,  equivalent  to  just  the  mme^ 
exactly  the  same  ;John  i.  15  ;    vii.  25  ;    Barh.  26,  2. 

10.  Jl  certain  (one) ;  a )  by  ^^  masc.  (^m  fern. ;  John  iv. 
46.  pM  p-^  a  certain  king;  v.  2.  Ih^  lAoo J  a  ceriam 
place  ;  Barh.116,10  ;  117,3  ;  with  ^.Sd  following;  e.g. Assem. 
I.  33;  22,  27 ;  Barh.  93,  6 ;  ft )  by  ^JSO  relating  to  things ; 
e.g.  Barh,  l70,  3.  W^  T-^'p^  ^  P  when  he  had  entered 
into  a  house  ;  l78,  2  ;   194,  3. 

Rem. — In  proper  nouns  it  is  sometimes  expressed,  by  circumlocu- 
tion, by  C31SQ«>  »«jl;e.  g.  Assem.  350,  18  ;  351,  2. 

11.  As  great — as  {tantus  quantus)  is  expressed  by^^i*!; 
e.g.  Barh.  190, 16.  001  ISdqJj  Ij^o]  »^V— .  OV**  ^i'they  saw 
no  need  so  great  as  on  this  day.  Of  which  nature — of  such , 
or  50  as  [talis-qualis),  are  expressed  by  U^Oi  —  j  \i^] ;  e.g. 
Assem.  1.39  ;  17,18.  •^oioA.^Tliooi  -  IjoSoil  Ajfljl^j  )LQr>t 
as  the  statue  which  thou  hast  seen,  so  is  he.  This  latter  idea 
alone  is  also  expressed  by  ^fand  a  pronoun  following;  e.g. 
John  iv.  23;     ^*S(7l  ^Ij  such;  Barh.  55,  13  ;  70,  18. 


CHAPTEE     SECOND 


THE     VERB. 


§  59.      General    View. 

The  use  of  the  Preterit  and  of  the  Future^  as  iii  ihe  He- 
brew, is  so  comprehensive,  that  by  them  almost  all  liie  other 
relations  of  time  are  designated,  in  accordance  with  definite 
rules  (comp.  §  65).  This,  however,  is  usually  in  such  a 
manner  that  the  preterite  designates  those  tenses  which 
stand  in  connection  with  past  time,  while  the  future  has  the 
same  influence  upon  future  time. 


§  60.      Use  of  the  Preterit 
1.  In  the   Past  it   designates  ; 

-n  7  7 

a)  the  absolutely  pa^t  tense ;  e.g.  Matt.ii.2.  oiiiOQD  ^W 
we  have  seen  his  star  ;  Ol-i  y.tfflV^\  ^2*1  we  are  come  to  ivor- 
ship  him  ;  John  iii.  16;  Assem.  I.  861,  26,  27  ; 

h)  the  Narrative  tense  [Aorist) ;  a )  mostly  before  the  sub- 
ject;  e.g.  Mark  xi.  11.  ^S»)o]]  ^am^  ^  Jesus  came  to  Je- 
rusalem ;  John  ii.22.  wiOlOpji^Z  Op?^!  his  disciples  remem- 
bered; /3)  after  particles  (when  something  ac^waZ  is  denoted), 
e.  g.  rS,  Barh.  68,12.  oi^o  ]]  p  since  they  did  not  receive; 
line  4.  >  t^r^  until  that ;  Matt.  i.  25.  l^'i  P^A  until  she 
brought  forth  ;  Barh.  24,  6  ;  AjlSdj  ^^^^  wni!i7  Ae  died ;  213, 
18  ;  217,  3  ;  Assem.  1.  31,l7  ;  Ephr.  I.  196,  F  ; 


USE   OF   THE    PRETERIT.  178 

c)  tlie  Pluperfect ;  a)  in  relative  clauses  which  define  the 
principal  action,  and  in  point  of  time,  precede  it ;  e.g.  Matt. 

i.  24.    ]1'^}  OloOlo  aC^  r^\  "U^T  p^  he  did  as  the  angel 

of  the  Lord  had  commanded  ;  Mark  xi.  6 ;    b)  after  particles ; 

e.g.  p  when,  aft^r  ;  Matt.  ii.  1.    ^QJu   A^Z]   p  t6'Aen  Jesws 

iw.«?  /wm;    verse  9 ;    John  ii.  22 ;    vi.  23,  24 ;  Barh.  90,  9  ; 

Assem  L  84,  B.  6.  ?   iA^)  q/J:er  ^Aa^ ;  Barh.  39,7.    ^5>^?  >Ao 

*fiDCUJ^  after  that  he  hadslainDarius;  164,8.  j  >Aq  ^,  ibid; 

Assem.  I.  213,  A.  25;    ?  Vr**^  ^o  soor*  a5  ;  Barh.  79,  12. 

Rem. — More  frequently,  however,  for  the  pluperfect,    stands  the 

If 
^„.^ ^  ocn(§65). 

2.  It   denotes   the   Present   Tense  ; 

q)  in  verbs  of  quality  and  condition ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xvi.  2,  3. 

y»^«  Z\nV)fY)  the  shy  is  red;  John  iv.  35.  OjOk.?  ]lLj(the 
fields  which  are  white ;  Isa.  i.  3  ;  Ephr.  II.  11 7,  A ;  b)  in 
general  designations  of  time,  denoting  simply  what  is  usual 

and  customary ;  e.  g.  Ps.  xiv.  2.  »Q^J  I  M^Sb  ^Ae  Zorc?  holes 
down  ;  xxv.  2  ;  c)  when  it  denotes  a  state  or  condition  ;  e.g. 

Gen.  iv.  6.    j^S  »*'liZ"|  ]lV)\  vjAy  ^^^  ^^<^^  angry  f 

3.  It   marks   the   Future    Tense  ; 

a)  in  prophecies,  asseverations,  and  ^e  like,  (for  the 
most  part,  however,  only  in  translations  from  the  Hebrew), 
which  are  viewed  as  already  fulfilled  and  accomplished  ;  e.g. 

Isa.  ix.  2.  ]b>  (ioiQJ  OU*  they  shall  see ^  a  great  light ;  Gen. 
xvii.  20 ;  sometimes  after  verbs  in  which  is  involved  the 

idea  of  a  future  action  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  80,  1.    ^oouj  ;2i'|   he 

promised  that  he  would  give  ;  b)  the  completed  future  (futurum 

exactum)  after  J  |k5 ;  e.g.  Mark  xii.25.  lAlSo  ^  qSQ£)>  ]Sd 
t<;Ae?i  they  shall  rise  from  the  dead  ;  John  iv.  25. 

4.  In  exhortations,  and  in  clauses  which  contain  condi- 
tions or  conclusions,  the  preterite  also  expresses  the  rela- 
tion of  the  subjunctive  ;    a)  of  the  present  tense,  (loqi  with  a 

XX  r 

participle  or  adjective) ;  e.  g.  I  Thess.  v.  6.  ^'riA  ^ooi  let 
us   he   watchful;  verse  8  ;  Eph.  ii.  11  ;  Tit.  li.  9,  10 ;    h)  of 


174  USE   OF  THE   PKETERIT. 

the  imperfect :  e.  g.  Jobn  ix.  41.  A^^  ^oLkOGl  ]'^f^  Q^ 
|Aa.4**  fCia^  Zooi  if  ye  were  blind,  then  would  ye  have  had 
no  sin;  xv.  19  ;  c)  of  the  pluperfect ;  e.  g.  John  xi.  21. 
*u-m1  looi  Zpo  |J  Zuooi  ^L  qIL  hadst  thou  been  here  my 
brother  had  not  died ;  Barh.  93,  10  ;   Ephr.  I.  225,  E. 

001  is  sometimes  want- 
ing; e.  g.  Matt.  ix.  17.  iSl  ^;4^  ]]j  the  bottles  do  not  thereby 
hurst ;  xxv.  24  ;  Mark  i.  44  ;  ii.  21,22  ;  Luke  v.  36  ;  the  imperfect 
subjunctive  is  more  frequently  expressed  by  the  future  (§  61) ;  and 
sometimes  the  preterite  with  «jiQ^  oh,  that,  denotes  the  optative 
(§  65);  e.g.  Rev.  iii.  15.  A^OOl  1;^;^  ^Q^  oh,  that  thou  wert 
cold  ;  Epiir.  III.  284.  Oil  ,Xi  ^  ZUOOI  ll'^oL  would  that  I 
were  not  of  her  children.  Tiiis  idea  seems  also  involved  in  the 
cases   under   c. 

5.  Finally,  the  preterit  also  stands  for  the  Imperative 
and   the   Infinitive  ; 

«     0 

a)  the  preterit  fooi  occurs  as  an  Imperative  in  connec- 
tion with  an  adjective  or  participle  ;  e.  g.  Mark  v.  84. 
]*r)iNi»    kaAaOOI   iV^j    hyir^g  ;   II   Tim.   iv.  5  ;    Rom.  xii.   9,  10. 

tQQ.kM|J    ,^iV>»>>    .OZUOOI    love  your  brethren  ;    I  Pet.  ii.  13  ; 
iv.  9  ;    after  preceding  imperatives  ;     e.  g.    Luke  x.    87. 

I  Pet.  iii.  15  ; 

b)  the  preterit  stands  as  an  Infinitive  after  verbs  signify- 
ing to  come^  to  go,  to  send,  etc.,  without  the  copula  ;  e.  g. 
Barh.  415,2.  oni  ^  ]{»  ]1]  he  came  to  besiege  Acco ;  402, 
8;  with  the  copula,  Barh.  403,  16,  17.  oLdO  ^  oV^ 
the^  sent  to  entreat ;  especially  after  *^\m  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  68,  1 . 
.jj.O,,k50 .j^As  «-ftV*  be  began  to  open  —  and  to  offer  up. 


USE   OF  THE   FUTURE.  175 

Rem. — But  this  union  frequently  denotes  merely  the  aorist ;   e.  g. 
Assem.  /.  288,  2.    oZ"!  oSnn  thei/  arose  to  go\,  e.  they  went. 


§61.    Use  of  the  Future. 

1.  The  Future  stands  ; 

a)  for  the  Absolute  Future ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xxiv.  Zd. 
.;riU  ]]  .  I \V)0  tOjriiJ  ]:S\o  ]>V^»  Heaven  and  earth  shall 
2oass  aivay,  but  my  word  shall  not  jpass  aivay ;  i.  21,  23  ; 
Luke  xviii.  8  ;    John  xiv.  18  ; 

h)  for  the    Complete  Future  in   conditional  clauses,  (with 

the  future  in  the  conclusion  of  the  sentence) ;  John  v.  43. 

^oSnnZ  OOT^i^  OIa£U  JxuilQ  IZ^j"  ^I>*1  tf  ^Z"  another  shall 

have  come  in  his  own  name^    him  will  ye  receive  ;   viii.  28. 
XV.    7,    10. 

2.  Furthermore,  it  denotes,  the  following  relations  of  time; 
a)  the  Present  although,  more  rarely  than  in  Hebrew ;  e.g. 

01^  JDOZ  Ulo  ^>\m  ^  |AaJ  >  \0 
"TTaj  6  'ttj'vwv  sx  rou  uJaro^  roJrou,  (Jj-vJ^yjtfgj  -Tr'aXiv  ;  with  1 1  verse  48, 
after  >  ^r^  I^^ke  xxii.  61.  l]l..-J>Z'  I'Oj'  j  ^5,^^  5^re 
the  coch  crows  ;  h)  the  Imperfect  ; ""  a  )  after  such  verbs  as 
>  ^*^  ;  Assem.  I.  27,  20.  Ol!^  '^'U  ?  ^'r*  ^^  sjmke  to  him 
(began  to  speak)  ;  /3  )  after  particles  ?  \^^  until ;  j  ^pO 
before;  e.  g.  Luke  ii.  2L  \a^'^  ^^^  ?  ^r^  ^'ore  7ie 
i(;(X5  conceived  in  his  mothers  womb ;  Barh.  xi.  15 ;  c) 
more  rarely  the  Perfect ;  e.  g.  Jud.  v.  8.  loiL^  ^VT'  ^^^ 
Aa^/i  chosen;  Isa.  xliii.  17,  19  ;  d)  i\iQ' Pluperfect :  after 
|]'^,  >  ^r^  Z>e/ore  ;  e.  g.  Jer.  i.  5. 
'3.  It  serves  to  express  the  following  Moods  ; 
.4 )  the   Subjunctive  ;    a)  of  the  Present ;    « )  in  general ; 


176  USE   OF  THE   FUTURE. 

John  vii.  .  37.  lAmJO  *j2q^  ]l\3  let  him  come  to  me  and 
drink  ;  Barh.  79,  1.  ioSOJ  ^inV)  now  let  him  die ;  /5)  after 
J ,  |j>  with  a  preceding  present  or  imperative ;  e.  g.  John 
V.  10.  »4a*rl  ^Qa»Zj  *A  4*ii'  "^it  is  not  lawful  that  thou 

should'st   carry   thy  bed;  vi.  12.     5o^  ^]j  ]]j  QmlO 

gather — that  nothing  he  lost ;  Matt.xxvi.41 ;  Assem.I.877,10, 
11,13  ;  h)  of  the  Imperfect ;  a)  in  conditional  clauses  ;  John 
ix.  22.  Oia  IjQJ  «AJ]  ^1  if  any  man  should  confess  concern- 
ing him  ;  (3)  after  a  preceding  imperfect ;  e.  g.  John  ii.  25. 
>ai£QJ  •AJ(>  fOOl  *niiro  iJ  it  was  not  needful  that  any  one 
should  testify;  after  a  preterite;  v.27.  ]i-»j  r^  loouj  Ci^^l 
he  gave  him  authority  that  he  should  execute  judgment  ; 
i.  31 ;  Barh.  80,  8  ;  Assem.  I.  359,  5 ;  after  the  pluper- 
feet ;  e.  g.  John  iv.  8.  .QlOp)  —  0001  Ouskl  they  were  gone 
that  they  might  buy ;  7)  sometimes  with  (OOI  appended;  e.g. 
Ephr.  I.  223,  C.  looi  OlJniJ  ]ilLt'{how  he  would  do  ;  As- 
sem. I.  297,  B.  3.  V.  E  ;  c)  of  the  Perfect  sometimes,  in  con- 
ditional  clauses,  after  J  and  ^|  ll(  {in  case  that)  ;  e.g.  John 
vii.  51  ;  Ephr.  I.  237,  B.  and  E  ;  <7)  of  the  Pluperfect,  more 
rarely,  and  only  with    (OOl  appended ;  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  40,  B. 

001    IZliJ   ^±i^>   U^i*?    i?CT^   fooi    (oou    p-rflDOM  p.2^ 

lohat  harm  loould  have  arisen  because  it  had  brought  forth 
good  ears  ? 

Rem. — May,  might,  can,  should,  must,  and  the  Hke,  are  also  ex- 
pressed by  the  future ;  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  203,  F.  ]u*So  ^{|/?  that 
he  might  go  and  see  ;  John  iv.  40.  .OOl^Q-!^  fOOUj  CUlJ^  OS*^ 
they  entreated  him  that  he  toould  remain  with  them, ^  verse  47  ;  v. 
14  ;  Rom.  vi.  1.  |QOJ  ^|j  yllki  what  shall  we  say,  shall  lot 
ronflnue?  Gen.  ii.  16,  30,  31 ;    Luke  xviii.  7  ;    John  vi.  28  ;    Heb. 


USE   OF   THE   FUTURE.  177 

i.  6  ;  Barh.  63, 19.  ZqSDJ  ^m^^J  ]]j  ^  every  one  who  of- 
fered not  should  die  ;  68,  18 ;  Mark  ix.  49.  IAmjD)  ^ 
t»»\V)2Z  ]»»\V)0  every  sacrifice  should  he  salted  with  salt  ; 
Prov.  XX.  9  ;    jS^P  ^2iD  who  can  say?      By  way  of  circumlocution, 

0  7 

may  and  should  are  expressed  by  >  «*^i  n  ;  e.  g.  1  Cor.  xi.  7  ; 
must — by  3  |J0  with  a  future  following  ;  e.  g.  John  iv.  24  ;  I 
Tim.  iii.    2. 

B)  The  Imperative  ;  a)  in  Prohibitions ;  e.g.  Matt.  i.  20. 
V5yjLj2  tf/ear  wo^ ;  John  iii.  7  ;  vi.  20  ;  I  Cor.  xv.  33,  34. 
tQ4>*2  |j  sin  not ;  h)  after  a  preceding  imperative  ;  e.  g. 
John  i.  40.    ^OVwZo  o2  Ipp^sc^s  xa?  /'^srs,  verse  47;  viii.  11. 

Rem. — The  third  person  of  the  imperative,   which  is  wanting,  is 

9G1QJ    |OCU  let 

there   he    light. 

C)  The  future  marks  the  Irifinitivt  after  verbs  which  in- 
volve the  intention  of  some  action ;  e.  g.  Barh.  34,  4,  5. 
•fSQ.  J"j  ]l£5  he  sought  to  kill ;  90,7,8.    ^uOloJ^^^?  ^»^1^ 

he  thought  to  kill  him  ;  Matt.  ii.  22.  ^l^J?  ^^J  he  feared  to 

--*7      7  -A  7  17 

go;  Assem.  1.  33,  25.  |j^JO  ^O^)  »-»'r*  he  began  to  fast 
and  to  pray ;  John  iii.  3.  fV^J?  .^».a«V)  P  //e  cannot  see  ; 
verses  4,  5  ;  xv.  4  (without  j  following,  Matt.  viii.  28).  In 
like  manner  occur  '\l\  Matt.  v.l7 ;  ^r-»  xvi.  3  ;  ^0£i  Luke 
viii.  55  ;  Acts  i.  4 ;  and  many  others. 

Rem. — The  infinitive  with  ^  also  follows  these  verbs.  Com- 
pare  §  63.   B. 

4.  Finally,  the  future  is  also  expressed  by  h^I  ready ^ 
about  to  he  (  =  jasXXsjv )  and  a  following  infinitive  ;  e.g.Matt. 
xi.  14.  ]1\^  r-»Al?  he  who  is  to  come  ;  John  iii.  14. 
]aj1  >  Oi;o  qSD)2AS^  h»^  lioai  eten  so  the  Son  of  Man 
iv  to  be  lifted  up  ;  vi.  6  ;  vii.  35  ;  in  the  plural  ;  Luke  xxi. 


178  USE  OF  THE  IMPERATIVE. 

OOISq^  ^jl^GI  ^jJf  ^H>Al  this  will  come  to  pass;  verse86. 
The  implied  idea  of  the  imperfect  is  expressed  by  looi  ap- 
pended; e.g.  John  vii.  89.  oSnnV)^  oooi  ^^^?  \L6y 
the  spirit  which  they  were  to  receive. 

Rem. — Also  occurs  J  ^jiAl  with  a  following  future  ;  e.  g.  Assem. 
I.  481,  22.  X't^l  IjOIO  H'^Alj  the  priest  shall  begin  ;  37,  17  ; 
Eplir.  I.  197,  D  ;  in  the  plural  ;  John  vi.  15.  The  idea  of  willing^ 
purposing^  is  also  expressed  by  |s  •  ;  a  )  with  J  and  a  future  fol- 
lowing;  especially  Matt.  xvi.  24.  tu^Ao  f^pj  r^t?  r~^ 
whoso  will  follow  after  me  ;  v.  40 ;  Barh.  68,6  ;  or  without  >  ;  e.  g. 
Luke  xviii.  13.  ^Q^p  •i  (001  |o»  JJ  Ae  would  not — lift  up  ;  b) 
with  an  infinitive  following ;  John  i.44.  «n<^V)\  |i  f  he  would 
go  forth. 


§  62.    Use  of  the  Imperative, 

1.  The  Imperative  expresses  either  a  command ;  e.g.  John 
V.  8.  5^010  ^&£0;l  ^on«  >OQO  anse^  take  up  thy  bed  and 
walk  ;  or  encouragement  and  permission  ;  e.  g.  Mark  i.  38. 
|jynoV  onLoi  go  into  the  city  ;  John  xi.  15. 

Rem. — In  the  same  signification  the  Syriac  appends  the  impera- 
tive of  l2f  (vid.  §  28.  l.Rem. ;  2.  Rem.)  to  the  future  of  the  finite 
verb,  especially  of  \L  and  %aL  in  the  singular,  w^hen  two,  are  in- 
tended ;  e. g.  Gen.  xxxi.  44.  |V^ ■  O  ^>m  (Z  let  us  make  a 
covenant  ;  xix.  32  ;  and  oZ  in  the  plural,  when  several  are  meant ; 
e.g.  John  xi.  7.     ^i1j    o2   let  us  go. 

2.  The  imperative  standing  after  the  future,  some- 
times acquires  a  future  signification ;  e.  g.  Gen.  xlv.  18. 
Q^Qolo  —  tOoL  ^^2 1  /  will  give  to  you — and  ye  shall  eat; 


USE   OF  THE   INFINITIVE.  179 

07'  the  latter  of  two  imperatives,  following  each  other  with- 
out a  copula,  denotes  the  infinitive ;  e.  g.  John  iv.  16. 
^'fO  *^]  go  to  call ;  verse  29.  ©Vm  qL  come  to  see  ;  Ephr. 
I.  201,  E;  or  with  the  copula  they  stand  in  the  relation  of 
cause  and  effect ;  e.  g.  Gen.  xlii.  18.  Q-i-mO  0,£i1  *|>oi  do 
this  and  live,  i.  e.,  if  ye  would  live. 

Rem. — In  this  latter  case  the  future  also  follows  the  imperative  ; 
e.  g.  Isa.  viii.lO.  -  >Vr>»<^/7  jJo  |A^Sd  oWV>  speak  a  word, 
it  shall  not  he  fulfilled. 

3.  Of  two  successive  imperatives,  when  one  is  negative,  it 
is  expressed  by  the  future  (§  61.  8.  B) ;  e.  g.  John  viii.  11. 
^u-^i   U    .^oZ  l»C7l   ^Ldo   *jl^1  go  and  henceforth  sin  no 

more  ;  Eom.  xi.  20 ;  Eph.  iv.  26. 

Rem. — Concerning   the   third   person   of  the   imperative,   com- 

001   to  designate   this 
person,   see  §  60.  5.   a. 


§  63.    Use  of  the  Infinitive. 

The  Syriac,  which  has  not,  like  the  Hebrew,  a  double 
form  for  the  infinitive  absolute  and  construct,  denotes  the 
latter  by  ^  prefixed  (compare  §  19.  B.  3). 


A.    Infinitive  Absolute.  • 

The  infinitive  without  ^  is  mostly  used  adverbially, 
and  in  connection  with  its  finite  verb,  which  it  precedes, 
denotes  ;  a)  a  strenthening  of  the  action ;  e.  g.  Hebr.vi.  14. 
. .  >  "!!  m*!  cL-lfiOSoo  v»2^1  QDj^qLd  /  will  bless  thee  exceed- 
ingly and  multiply  thee  greatly  ;  I  Sam.  xx.  6 ;  xxiii.  22  ; 
John  ix.  9.     OlS  ISdj   \i>^  he  is  very  like  Mm  ;  Acts  v. 


180  USE   OF  THE  INFINITIVE. 

28  ;  Philem.  verse  9  ;  b)  certainty,  confirmation ;  e.  g.  BarL. 
15,  13.  ^>Z  ^pSo  thou  shalt  know  with  certainty.  N"eg- 
atively  with  (J  before  the  finite  verb  it  is  equivalent  to,  hy 
no  means  ;  e.g.  John  xx.  5.  ^oi  p  m^Sd  he  hy  no  means 
went  in  ;  Eom.  ix.  6. ;  c)  it  sometimes  denotes  continuance ; 
e.g.  Isa.  XXX.  19.  ^QQoZ  p  p*^So  ye  shall  not  always  weep  ; 
Exod.  xxxiv.  7. 

Rem. — By  the  infinitive  absolute  are  also  expressed,  rather  how- 
ever after  the  idiom  of  the  Hebrew,  other  minute  points  of  the 
language;  e.g.  much,  much  more;  Jer.  xxii.  10.  Q^Q  ]^oVn 
weep  much ;  somewhat,  indeed  (  Germ,  etwa  ),  Gen.  xxxvii.  8. 
« Nv  Aj"!  '  A^^  on  ^V)V)  wilt  thou  indeed  rule  over  us  ? 
then,  truly;  xliii.Y.  ^OGI  ^••-Ir^  ^^^  could  we  then  know  ?  per- 
haps, indeed ;  Aci^  vW.  ^^.  LkY^k  ]\.»*1d  I  have  indeed  seen.  More 
frequently  it  is  merely  pleonastic ;  e.  g.  Luke  i.  22 ;  John  xiii.  29  ; 
Acts  vii.  45  ;  and  it  is  appended  to  the  imperative  ;  e.  g.   Isa.  vi.  9. 

7  •«  7 

MSQaSd  Qllfis  hear  ye.  The  negative  sometimes  stands  before 
it ;  e.g.  Gen.  iii.  4.  ^L^iiDL  ASibJiD  ]]  ye  surely  shall  not  die. 
The  case  a,  in  translations  of  passages  from  the01dTestament,is  also 
expressed  by  the  noun  formed  from  the  finite  verb  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  ii.lY. 
ZqLdZ  IZqLd    ^:])2Sr|    ^li)3    thou   shalt  surely   die     (compare 

T 

Ephr.  1.  24,  A),  which  is  closely  connected  with  the  ordinary  Syriac 

mode  of  expression  ;  as  %:Ol^  |Asi  |Zo,-m  |,j<*  rejoice  exceed- 
ingly ;  see  §  67.  I.e. 


B.     Infinitive  with  ^  or  the  Construct  form. 

The  Infinitive   with   ^  stands  ; 

a)  after  verbs  which  denote  a  purpose,  wish,   determina- 
tiony  capacity,   command,   etc.  ;    e.  g.  Luke  xi.  54.     ^jSO 

T>       *  7    »     *    t 

^^  r»atSQ^  they  sought  to  catch  something;  Matt.  xxi.  46; 


THE    INFINITIVE.  181 

John  V.  16;  vii.  1.  QIjikOlSDiii  loai  \^1  J]"  he  would  not 
go;  Matt.  xiv.  5;  Barh.  14,  18;  88,  6  ;  Matt.  vi.  24. 
,»»\<^V)\  «K>.naV)  •All  |J  no  man  can  serve  ;  Mark  ii.  7  ; 
Jolinm.2;  x.21;  Barli.192,20.  vqAsqI  ^ ioZl ^2  Uaf 
here  also  could  he  not  remain  ;  Luke  xv.  15.    ]v;<^V   OVifM 

he  sent  him  to  feed ;  John  iv.  83.     ^\o|s2iik  ^Lk{  he 

brought — to  eat  ;  Ephr.  I.  280,  D.  OjcrUSol  _  ^oriCDj  they 
shall  take  —  to  kindle  ;  John  xi.  31.  ]^nV)^  ]]l]  V^Cini^j 
that  she  goeth  unto  the  grave  to  weep ;  Barh.  12,  20;  h) 
after  verbs  signifying  to  begin^  to  cease,  to  be  accustomed  ; 
e.  g.  Matt.  iv.  l7.  01pV)\  *^\»  he  began  to  preach; 
xvi.  21 ;  Barh.  I,  1,  2  ;  5,  2  ;  Assem.  I.  5l8,  B.  20  ;  Acts 
V.  42.  0<^\V)\  0001  ,^iS>  |]  they  ceased  not  to  teach  ; 
Eph.  i.  16;  Barh.  5.  10.  Q^iIkkaSqI  ^"l:^  they  were  ac- 
customed to  changes. 

Rem.  1. — The  infinitive  with  ^  (which  can  sometimes,  viz.  in 
passages  translated  from  the  Hebrew,  be  rendered  by  while,  or 
when  ;  e.g.  Gen.  ii.  3.  ,nNV)\  loi^  Vr^^  which  God  created, 
when  he  made  it);  forms,  after  fuAl  (§  61.  4)  and  after  looi,  a  cir- 
cumlocution for  the  future ;  e.g.  Gen.  xv.l2.  «*^;SV)\  {aSQa  ]oai 
the  sun  shall  go  down.  But  of  the  Hebrew  idiom,  by  which  the 
infinitive,  joined  with  a  preposition  or  conjunction,  is  explained  by 
the  finite  verb,  there  occurs  in  Syriac,  only  the  construction  with 
J  ^  before  ^ ;  e.g.  Assem.  1. 42,8.  0<^^V)S>  ^  ]oai  IJa  ]]o 
and  he  ceased  not  to  teach  ;  negatively,  in  Hebr.  iv.  1. 
^^ASli^j  — Sd  *A\Zi^  who  should  refrain  from  entering,  i.  e., 
ivho  should  not  enter  ;  or  comparatively,  without  >  ;  Gen.  iv.  13. 
.o«^»0-^\  ^V)  ^Zo  \^CY)  wftOI  \oiy  my  crime  is  greater,  than 
can  he  forgiven  me.  ♦ 

Rem.  2. — Tn   the   poets   we   sometimes  meet  with   a  transition 


182  USE   OF   THE   PARTICIPLE. 

from   the   infinitive   to   the   finite   verb;    e.g.    Ephr.   III.  129,  F. 

{IQ^Sd  \i>  i^l  /ar  fte^^er  is  it,  in  time  of  thirst  to  drink  water^ 
than,  instead  of  drinkimj  to  measure  fountains  (Hterally,  and  loe 
will  not  measure)  ;  and  likewise  conversely ;  which  seems  to  be 
done  for  the  sake  of  the  metre  (compare  Hahn  et  Sieff.  Chr.  p.  V . 
Anm.).  The  Syriac  also  expresses  the  infinitive  by  the  future, 
with  or  without  J  prefixed  (  §  61.  3.  C  )  or  by  the  participle 
(  §  64.  3.  B  ). 


§  64.     Use  of  the  Participle. 

1.  Participles  may  be  considered  either  as  Adjectives  or 
as  Substantives  : 

A)  As  Adjectives^   they  assume  the  number   and  gender 

of  their  subject;  and  take  their  object  in  the  case  or 
with  the  preposition  of  the  verb  from  which  they  are 
formed ;  thus ;  a  )  the  Active  Participle  ;  e.  g.  John  ii.  14. 
ija«^0  l^r^O  \j0L  ^A.12p^?  ^^Ol  those  who  sold  oxen,  sheep, 
and  doves  ;  verse  16  ;  viii.  44  ;  Barh.  52,  4,  5  ;  74,  20. 
IbilSv  ^\Lj  ln\V)  a  hing  who  fears  God;  Assem.  I.  270, 
A.  Kem.  9 ;  Acts  vi.  3.  \1'S^}  olLoj  ^>Sv>  full  of  the 
Holy  Ghost ;  Rom.  i.  29  ;  John  iii.l5.  oii  ^^(k^l  ^aila 
every  one  who  believes  on  him  ;  h)  the  Passive  Participle, 
with  the  case  or  the  preposition  of  its  active ;  e.  g.  Ez.  ix.  2. 
V.QQ  ^d^  clothed  in  Byssus  ;  Barh.  32,  14  ;  108,  6  ;  l70, 
19.       Ir*"!     ...i^aZ)    maimed    in    the    hand ;     Lev.    ii.    4. 

]M>>V>n  ,^\ig^  V^'*''Vl  <^^^^^'^  anointed  with  oil  ;  I  Sam.  ii.18. 
ll;Snh^  5^jiD  blessed  of  the  Lord. 

B)  As  Substantives^   participles  stand,  in  a  genitive  re- 
lation, in  the  construct  state,  before  the  noun  ;  thus    a)  the 


USE   OF   THE   PARTICIPLE.  ]8B 

Active  Participle  ;  e.g.  Gen.  xxiii.  10.  \Lj2  >  \.^]L  those  who 
went  m  at  the  gate ;  Kom.  vii.  1 .  (COQSQJ  «^AApi  those  who 
know  ike  law  (literally,  the  knowers  of  the  law) ;  Barh.  1 95, 
11.  ^alco  « I  f^Sn«  who  had  draiun  the  sword '^  214,  1  ; 
even  before  prepositions;  II  Tim.  iii.  2.  |2o*^ifcjD  ^;ZiD 
ivho  deny  (i.e.  refuse  to  acknowledge)  favors;  I  Tim.  i.  10. 
lAisOoi  ^^  ^r^^  breaker   of  their   oath ;    b )    the  Passive 

Participle;  Gen.  xxiv.  81.  Hr^>  Ol^i;*^  blessed  of  God\ 
xxvi.    29. 

2.  Participles  mark  the  following  relations  of  time  : 

A)  The  present^  in  connection  with  the  separable  pro- 
noun denoting  the  subject  (  §  54.  2  ) ;  e.  g.  John  iv.  9. 
Aj  1  \^  thou  prayest  (  art  pro.ying ) ;  xv.  15 ;  Assem.  I. 
34,  9.  t^So  ^Sd  '\i\  ,  >n<^  j]  /  have  no  command  from  our 
Lord. 

Rem. — In  the  third  person  which  is  usually  already  rendered 
definite  by  a  preceding  noun  or  pronoun,  the  separable  pronoun  is 

omitted  ;  e.  g.  Luke  xv.  5.  01^  ^\ci»0  and  he  heareth  it  (the 
sheep)  ;  verse  6.  -  >mnVr>>^»\  \^0  <JlAi*^\  fZIo  and  cometh 
into  his  house  and  calleth  his  friends  ;  John  iii.  18,  20;  iv.  36; 
vii.  17  ;  viii.  47 ;  iv.  23.     liJlli  \kll\  B  1  hut  the  time  cometh. 

B)  The  past ;  a)  the  Imperfect ;  a )  in  connection  with 
looi  (§  Qb);  (3)  without  looi  after  a  preceding  imperfect ; 
e.  g.  John.  iii.  22.  ^knSoo  .OOlSoi  looi  ^OlAiD  he  tar- 
ried with  them  and  baptized ;  iv.  27,  31 ;  vi.  2  ;  7 )  after  the 
preterite  in  a  relative  parenthetical  clause  ;  e.  g.  John  vi.  5. 

Ol^Q^  Xl]\  1]  >  r^^  \m10  Iwo  <^^<^  ^^^  ^^^  ^  great  com- 
pany who  came  to  him ;  verse  11  ;  Assem.  I  .  75,  A.86  ; 
joined  with  o  copulative  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  4,  3.     ho^ik  QONcT) 

13 


184  THE    PARTICIPLE. 

^)x»0  ^oSo;,n>  they  went  up  on  Mount  Hermon  and  abode  ; 
h )  the  Perfect ;  John  vii.  52.  ]3-»^yi  ,^  K^?'  -^W©  *^^^ 
^]jO  U  search  and  see^  that  out  of  Galilee  hath  arisen  no 
'prophet. 

Rem. — It  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  mere  imitation,  and  not  as  a 
constant  idiom  of  the  language,  when  tlie  Hebrew  infinitive 
tliin  ^^  ^^®  participle  "rTbh'  (^7  which,  coming  before  the  finite 
verb,  is  indicated  the  continuance  or  gradual  progress  of  an  action), 
is  expressed  in  Syriac  by  the  participle   of  ^1  ( ;     e.  g.  Gen.  viii.  5. 

^lmI*o  oboi  ^iV  "Uioo  ( ^^t)r^^  -jibn  ^^^n  D^iTari") ) 

and   the   waters   decreased    more    and    more ;     I    Sam.    ii.    26. 

^l  ^-lo  ^iT  U^o  ( nit)i  bi!\i  tibn  "i5sm )  «^ 

<he  6oy  ^rei^>  /rom  <?ay  to  day. 

C  )  The  Future  ;  a )  the  Absolute  Future  ;  a  )  in  general 
propositions  ;  e.  g.  John  xi.  23.  .-iJDaMl  ^\o  thy  brother 
shall  rise  again  ;  (3)  after  a  present  ;  John  xi.  2-i. 
^poj  ^i]  "iLfjk  I  know  that  he  shall  rise  again  ;  iv.  25  ; 
y)  after  a  preterite,  Barh.  80,  20  ;  81,  1.  jAjDj  oiS  -^^01 
l^g^^V)^  OlS  IjI  ^oSiSO  ^ISDCU  12^Z  Ae  said  to  him  that  in 
three  days  he  would  surrender  the  city  ;  John  iv.  25  ;  ^  )  after 
a  future  ;  John  xiv.  23.  ^Z|  oiZoio  w>oio>V^Kt;j  ^q( 
my  Father  will  love  him,  and  lue  will  come  to  him  ;  Assem.  I. 
862,  5,  8.  \i\  looi  |i-a4^XL»P  -  ?  -^  ^ouAj  ^"  if  it 
shall  be  granted  me  that  —  then  will  I  become  a  christian  ;  s  ) 
after  an  imperative  ;  Mark  xi.  24.  ^oAjj  ^-».£1CQJ>  QlSaaC31 
believe  that  ye  shall  receive ;  X,)  after  loi,  John  xvi.  32. 
lAl»  taZl  loi  behold  the  hour  shall  come  ;  Gen.  vi.  17  ; 
xlviii.4 ;  Exod.  ix.  18 ;    ^i )  in  direct  and  indirect  questions : 


USE   OF  THE   PARTICIPLE.  185 

e.  g.  John  vii.  41.  V^iaV)  ]l]  O^y.  ^  ]Sn\/  shall  the 
Messiah  come  out  of  Galilee  ?  verse  31 ;  viii.  22  ;  xiii.  27. 
Aj|  r^^y  2>0jSd  w;7ja^  ^Aow  t^;2;7^  do;  b)  thefuturum  exacium ; 
a )  after  particles ;  e.  g.  Jolin  vii.  27.  Xl]\  ^Aif  t(;^m  Ae 
shall  have  come ;  verse  81.  Barh.  133,  2.  ^tS\  1iLq«>  ]So 
a5  5007Z  as  thou  shall  have  heard  ;  /3  )  in  conditional  clauses  ; 
e.g.  Eplir.  I.  218,  F.  tio  ^ooiL  Vl  *SOUj  tff  unless  I 
shall  have  given  him  water. 

3.  In  like  manner,  participles  indicate  various  Moods  ; 

A  )  The  Subjunctive  ;  viz.  «  )  of  the  Imperfect  (  with 
OOl  ,  compare  §  65  )  after  ^f  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  38,  10. 
•^ZAk)  U  —  ]jZ|  ;oZASo  jr^V^  ^1  even  though  the  vessel broke^ 
the  ground  —  would  not  break ;  Assem.  I.  379,  2. 
I^  B'lo  \1L  ]»»i«V)0  \ZiCi  ^  if  he  denied  Christ  then 
should  he  live^  ifnot^  he  should  die  ;  after  ?  U  ],  Barh.  56,  12. 
n»»0,V)\  ^^^(  11?  (J  I  ^e5ic?e5  that  they  would  not  sac- 
rifice ;  in  relative  clauses  depending  upon  a  future 
.( =  imperfect  subjunctive  )  ;    e.    g.    Assem.    I.    362,    19. 

^/ia^  /^e  shoidd  be  given  them  as  Bishop^  ivhom  they  should 
ask  ;  6  )  of  the  Pluperfect^  with  (001  in  conditional  clauses 
( compare  §  60.  4.  c ) ;  e.  g.  Gal.  iv.  15.  iocJl  ]»»naV)  oliv 
-  »V  »«^m»n  -oAaOOI  !■  riiO^t  ^  -  ^  ^«^  ^^  ^^<^^  possible 
ye  would  have  plucked  out  your  own  eyes^  and  given  them  to  me; 
Heb.  X.  2  ;  xi.  15;  I  John  ii.  19. 

B  )  The  Infinitive^  after  verbs  signifying  to  begin,  to  cease, 
to  permit,  to  (ommand,  to  be  able,  etc.;  e.g.  Matt.  xii.  1. 
^■r^SV)   Q^\»  they  began  to  pluck;  Mark  i.  45 ;  Luke  v.  21 ; 


186  USE   OF  THE   PARTICIPLE. 

XV.  14 ;  I  John  ii.  8.  (Vml\Sd  ^ji;*  IjOIQJ  they  began  tos';e 
the  light  ;  Assem.  I.  37,15.  llO  ^\m  he  began  to  call ;  60, 
5  ;  Barh.  96,  7  ;.  108,  19  ;  160,  7  ;  180,  5  ;  83,  12  ; 
(Zpl  ^>m  ^io  ^4^  /«e  ceased  to  build  churches  ;  Matt.  xiii. 
30.  ^-a^'  opar^ji  sw^er  to  grow ;  Luke  xviii.  16 ;  John 
XL  44  ;  xviii.  .8  ;  Luke  x.  40.  *jlS  '{S^^  cHL  '^'{  bid  her 
help  me  ;  Mark  ii.  2.  ^aJ|  r-^l  •^*^»|  U  2^  could  not 
hold  them  /  vii.  15  ;  John  v.  19 ;  viii.  43  ;  Acts  x.47  ;  Mark 
vi.  37.     ^^fcfns^  .001^  ^Aj  loe  will  give  them  to  eat. 

Rem. — Sometimes  >  also  stands  before  such  a  participle  ;  e.  g. 
Matt.  xxiv.30.  TZlj  Imjlj  (J\\Cl^  ^OVwJ  they  shall  see  the  Son 
of  man  coming  ;  John  v.  19  ;  Acts  xxi.  32.  ^^>»»>D)  ^io  Q^OIO 
«£DQJ^Q£k^    0001    J'ff'ajO'avTo    roitrovrsg  rdv    IlauXov. 

4.  The  Absolute  Participle  is  distinguished  bj  a)  p  pre- 
ceding  it ;  e.g.  Matt.xiv.25.  »^01Ld  p  ^om^  ^OOlZoi  jZf 
]vVn  ^\l  /e5W5  came  <o  <Aew  walking  upon  the  sea  ;  xv.  32; 
John  ix.  7.  lu*  p  Ulo  /ie  came  seeing ;  Barh.  62,  6. 
A>Vr>  |Q;or^  ^^^Ak)  p  disquieted  by  war  he  died ;  73,4. 
1^)  p  l]']*^^]^  p  U  710^  standing,  but  bowed  to  the  earth; 
ft)  by  J  preceding  ;  e.  g.  Mark  ii.  14.  ]mnV)  Zuo  j:^tly 
silting  at  the   receipt   of  custom ;  xi.  2,  4  ;  Matt.  xiv.  26  ; 

xxvi.  64. 

Rem. — If  to  such  a  participle,  a  noun  be  appended,  this  con- 
struction sometimes  expresses  the  Latin  ablative  absolute  ;  e.  g. 
Matt.  XV.  20.  •-»010,-»|  — i^mk)  tl  r^  with  unwashed  hands  ; 
Mark  vii.  2,  5  ;  John  xi.  44.  ^Cnoiy^JO  *uOldyal  ^>^1  P 
hound  hand  and  foot.  Tn  the  translation  of  the  New  Testament, 
the  participle  is  sometimes  to  be  understood  as  in  the  person  of  the 
finite  verb  following  it ;  e.  g.  Matt.  ii.  8.  onn\  qI]  ^opsu&s'vrsg 
c-^cTcctfaT?     verses  9,  10,  11,  13, 


USE   OF    THE   PARTICIPLE.  187 

5.  The  passive  participles  frequently  have  an  active 
signification  ;  a  )  those  from  transitive  verbs  ;  e.  g.  Matt, 
viu.  18.  01^  ^pif^i  those  surrounding  him  ;  Luke  vii. 
14.  aCL  0001  ^o-^jkOA)  tliose  hearing  him  ;  John  v.  4. 
M.Sal  locn  M»liD  troubling  the  water  ;  Actsxxi.l6;  Assem. 
I.  80,  4.  U^^^^JulQ*  yi  bearing  the  child;  84,9  ;  87,8 ; 
877,  2.  Olyuti  Oil  Zooi  1n*n\  she  drew  him  by  the 
hand  ;  b  )  those  from  intransitive  verbs  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  v.  4. 
U^SU  ^OOU^oi  blessed  are  those  who  mourn  ;  Mark  vii. 
80  ;    John  xi.  19.     OOOI  --it/Zl   they  were  come  ;  xii.  15. 

xl  ^  .0^9  ri(/iw^  w;7o/i  a  foal  ;  Barh.  170,  2  ;  228,  1. 
|£C)(    M^  •jQaAji   ^   sitting  upon  a  bed. 

Rem.  —  Participles  sometimes  have  the  signification  of  the 
Latin  participle  in  -ndus  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  128,  2.  ^^^..a-Mj  timendus. 
Here  also  belong  (  compare  No.  5  )  such  constructions  as 
v^  vaI  •.Cu.ClM  I  have  forsaken  all  ;  y*^  oul  \ASiD  I  deny 
thee  ;     «.i^  >a.i-M))  *^1  as  I  will. 

6.  Finally  participles  are  also  used  impersonally  thus  ; 
a)  the  Masculine ;  Eom.  xvi.  2.  ]ii  i,n\  *Ojlj  »^1  as  i7 
becometh  saints  ;  Heb.  viii.  8  ;  Philem.  8 ;  Assem.  I.  88,20. 
j^l  *£:>1  *^;Q   Twy   50/1,    2i   behoveth   thee ;   455,  A.  24,  41. 

1oi-Lj  TtO^V  Wsi  |J  it  behoveth  not  a  servant  of  the  Lord ; 
John  iii.  30.  (o;<^V  (ooi  jJo  OOl  OGL^  he  must  increase  ; 
ix.  4.  Uo  *^  I  must ;  Acts  xxv.  27 ;  xxvi.  1  ;  Rom.  xiv. 
4 ;  Mark  iv.  88.  ,  i  >.^1^  ..\  ^4^  U  oy  jasXsi  Coi,  on 
a-jroXXjfAs&a  ;  6 )  the  Feminine ;  especially  to  denote  the 
neuter;  e.  g.  Gal.  vi.9.     ^1  jj^^    ZoOT  W  let  it  not  be  bur- 

densome  to  us;  Barh.  45,  13.     V«isD?   |?cn   Mw  25  probable ; 


188  MOODS    AND  TENSES. 

Assem.  Ll79,B.22.  2!6cn  XJ^  it  was  necessary ;    482,  24. 
JojlO  \kQM  it  is  honorable  and  right ;  5 19,  A.  4. 

Rem. — Here  belongs  also  Rom.  xiv.  4.     ^aiOpAlfl)  14^  ^^  corner 
into  A/i'  hands  ;    i.  e.    Ae  caw  ;  and  in  the  feminine,  Acts  v.   39. 
nn>^  «]o    |-^Vr>  |j   ye  cannot. 


§  65.      View  of  the  manner  of  designating  all  the  Tenses  and 

Moods  ;  of  the  Imperfect^  Pluperfect^  and  Optative  in 

particular. 

1.  The  Indicative  ; 

A  )  of  the  Present  is  expressed;  a)  by  the  preterit  (§60, 
2) ;  h)  sometimes  by  the  future  (§61.  2.  a);  c)  usually  by 
the  participle  (§  54.  .2.  b,  and  §64.  2.  A); 

B )  of  the  Imperfect ;    a)  usually  by  the  participle  joined 

19 
ooi  (§  18.4.  Eem.,  and  §  38 ;  also  without  the  substan- 
tive verb,  §  64.  2.B.  ^  ) ;  e.g.  Matt.  ii.9.     Iboi  \\{  he  went ; 
verse 20.     |i\^>  Olmsu  oocn  ^ > "  *~^7  ^OJOl  who  sought  the 
child's  life  ;  iii.  5.     JOOU   CJLio  ZoCTI  joaj  all  Judea  went 

out ;  John  xvii.  12.  AaOOl  '^  I  kept;  h)hj  the  prete- 
rite (§  60.  1.  b),  and  rarely  ;  c  )  by  the  future  (  §  61. 
2.  b  )  ; 

C )  of  the   Perfect^   besides  cases   noted  in   ( §  60.  I  ) ; 

a)  rarely  by  the  future  (§  61.  2.  c) ;  6)  by  the  participle 
(§64.2.''B.b); 

10 
001  in  the  same 

person  and  number  added  to  the  preterit ;    e.  g.   Luke  v.  9 


MOODS  AND  TENSES.  189 

jOOl  C\r*A  jOlSiDZ  terror  had  seized  him;  John  iv.  8, 
oocn  oi^  the}/  had  gone  into  ;  v.  13.  looi  •J»J-yi^1  he  had 
hidden  himself;  x.  22.       |001   |001   he   had  been ;     h)  by 

the  preterit     (  §  60.  J.  c ) ;     c)  rarely  by  the  future   (  §  61. 

2.  d); 

E)  of  the  Fm^m re  besides  cases  noted  in  §61.1.,  some- 
times ;  a)  by  the  Preterit  (§  60.  3.  a) ;  h)  by  the  impera- 
tive (§  62.  2) ;     c)  by  the  participle  (§  64.  2.  C); 

F  )  of  the  Futurum  exactum  ;     a)  by  the  preterit    (§  60. 

3.  b),  more  frequently  ;  h)  by  the  future  (^  61.  1.  b),  some- 
times ;  c)  by  the  participle  (§  64.  2.  C.  b). 

//.  The    Subjunctive  ; 

A  )  of  the  Present  is  given  ;  a)  by  the  preterit  of 
1oc31  (§  60.  4.  a  ),  very  often  ;  b)  by  the  future  (§  61. 
3.  A.  a  )  ; 

B  )  of  the  Imperfect  ;  a)  usually  like  the  indicative  of 
the  same  tense,  by  the  participle   with  (OOl   in  conditional 

clauses  ;  e.  g.  John  viii.  19.  *£)|  ^oAaOOl  ^.i^r*  *-^  CL^ 
,oA^001  '^.  -  i"*^!'  i/ye  A;nei(;  me,  ye  would  also  knoiv  my 
father ;  verses  39,  42  ;  xviii.  30,  36  ;  xxi.  25  ;  b)  by  the 
future  (§  61.  3.  A.  b),  sometimes  ;  c)  by  the  participle  alone 
(§  64.  3.  A.  a) ; 

C  )  of  the  Perfect;  sometimes  by  the  future  (§  61.  3. 
A.c); 

D  )  of  the  Pluperfect ;  a)  by  the  preterit  (§60.  4.  c) ; 
b)  by  the  future  (§  61.  3.  A.  d),  more  frequently ;  c)  by  the 
participle  with  looi    (§  64.  3.  A.  b). 

in.  The  Optatice  is  expressed  ;     a)\)j  the  interrogative 


190  THE  PERSONS  OF  THE  VERB. 

pronoun  with  a  preterit     or  future  following ;  e.  g.  Judges 

ix.  29.  ^r-A^  MCJl  toil  Olkllsl'  ^j  ^  oh  thai  I  had 
{who  will  give  over  to  me)  this  people  in  my  power  /  Ps.  iv.  7  ; 
lv.7;  6)  by  tlie  particles  •aO^and  •SioLm]  oh  that,  with  a  pre- 
terit following  (§  60.  4.1lem.);the  Future;  e.g.  Gen.  xvii.18. 
]a*P  %aoA«|  oh  that  he  might  live  ;  or  the  participle  with 
looi ;  e.  g.  II  Cor.  xi.l.  ouL  ^oZuom  ^;n>fnV^  *aoA»l 
may  ye  yet  hear  with  me  ! 

Rem — The   optative   is   sometimes  also  expressed  by  •!  or  Q-^  ; 

7  7  7       «>lt^  ^ 

e.g.  Ps.lxxxi.13.  1  iINV^p  « i  V)S  Q^  would  that  my  people  would 
hearken  to  me  ;  by  verbs  that  denote  a  wish  with  a  following  j  ; 
e.g.  Exod.  xvi.  3.  tZ\.iJ^>  —^001  ,^i,0  •  would  that  we  were  dead  ! 
When  the  substantive  verb  denotes  a  wish,  it  is  omitted ;  e.  g. 
Luke.  ii.l4.  I^L^U  |Aa*0*^oZ  glory  toGod.  Sometimes  instead  of 
the  Hebrew  n^jji  n)^  occurs  the  almost  correspondent  J  ^£11  ^Sd  ; 
e.g.  Job  xxiii.  3 ;  but  it  is  literally  translated  in  Cant.  viii.  1. 
•jl!^  Vm|  ^a^Aj  — Si3  oh  that  thou  wert  my  brother. 

IV".  The  Imperative^  besides  the  cases  under  §  62,  is  ex- 
pressed ;  a)  by  the  preterit  of  loai  (§  60.  5.  a)  ;  b)  by  the 
future,  especially  negatively  (§  61.  8.  B). 

Y.  The  Infinitive^  finally,  besides  the  cases  under  §  63,  is 
expressed  ;  a)  by  the  preterit  (§  60.  5.  b)  ;  h)  by  the  fu- 
ture (§  61.  3.  C) ,  and  more  frequently  ;  c)  by  the  partici- 
ple (§  64.  3.  B). 


§  m.  TJie  Persons  of  the  Verb, 

1.  The  third  singular  masc.  and  fem.  of  the  active  and 
passive  conjugations  is  sometimes  used  impersonally  thus  r 


THE  PERSONS  OF  THE  VERB.  191 

a  )  the  masculine ;  a)  of  the  preterit ;  e.  g.  Heb.  x.  34. 
^onL  «^p  it  pained  you ;  Luke  x.34.  wiOloSl  Ol^  ^i^^M 
ke  cared  for  him ;  j^ )  of  the  future,  Deut.  vi.  24. 
^  kSl^J  it  would  he  good  for  us  ;  Jer.  vii.6,  .r>^V  »»]ij 
it  would  harm  you  ;  b)  the  feminine  ;  a)  of  the  preterit  , 
Ps.  xcv.lO.  001  |j^  wi.i^  Aj}Ld  it  shames  me,  {I  am  asham- 
ed)  of  this  generation  ;  Ps.  xxxi.9.  «aJl  Aoi  it  grieves  me  ; 
Luke  xviii.  23.  (yi^  A^;^  it  pained  him  ;  /3)  of  the  future, 
Gal.  vi.  9.  ^  tl^l2  U  it  will  not  he  grievous  to  us  ;  Ps. 
Ixix.  20.     Olik  ]p2>  ^SoL  whom  it  grieved. 

2.  In  like  manner  in  Syriac,  the  neuter  is  usually  ex- 
pressed ;  a)  by  the  third  person  singular  feminine  of  the 
verb,    thus  ;     a)   in  impersonal  phrases,    as  Lukb  vi.  13 

2     7  •»>  ,  A    ^          * 

OlyJ  it  vjas  light  ;  John  vi.  17.     Aaan  it  was  dark  ;    pas 

.   7  7       ^-n 

sively,  Barh.  84,14.  A^^A*  ( the  report  was  spread  abroad, 
Assem.  L  298.  A.ll.     OlL  A.A..Z1  it  was  revealed  to  him  , 

481,  7 ;  i3  )  in  connection  with  the  demonstrative  pro 
noun  or    with   adjectives   as   subjects  ;    e.  g.  John  i.  28 

..7  "J^'a'*  C' 

*uOC\  \m1L  Aa^^o  ^^x^OI  this  came  to  pass  at  Bethany  ;  i.  3 
loai  ]fj>*  yal   there   was   not  any  thing  ;  Ephr.  L  240,  F 

-'^^^•  '7..  7  -no         -7         -n 

t«QiD  -><  '^*^  IjOl  L\ZiM  it  seemed  good  to  Moses ;  passively, 
Assem.  I.  380,  4.  ^  A^VmZI  JDjl  it  seemed  just  to  us.  Yet 
we  also  find  for  the  neuter ;  b)  the  third  person  singular  mas- 
culine ;  e.g.  Isa.  xxiii.  12.  «in\  « »» 1 1 1  )]  there  will  he  no 
rest  for  thee  ;  Barh.  133,  8.     01^  r^JM  it  was  said  to  him; 

•X  T»      I  -n      - 1> 

Assem.  I.  362,  5.     «-»-i  JDCnuAj  ^|  it  shall  he  permitted  to  me, 

3.  When  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  general  or  indefi- 
nite, it  is  expressed,  in  Syriac,  in  various  ways,  as  in  the 
English,    thus;     a)hj   the  third  person  singular  ;     e.g. 


192  ,        THE   PERSONS   OF  THE  A^ERB. 

Gen.  xi.  9.  ]'fJD  he  calls ;  (i.e.  one  calls,  it  is  called)  ;  to 
which  is  also  appended  by  way  of  explanation,  after  the 
Hebrew  idiom,  the  participle  or  participial  noun  of  the  same 
verb  ;  e.  g.  Isa.  xvi.  10.  jsCU)  ^ao^J  the  wine  ireaders  shall 
tread  (  no  more  wine  ;  i.  e.  no  one  shall  tread);  or  (JUf  and 
(;^yt  ;  e.g.  I  Sam.  ix.  9.     Tr^yt   locn  ;Sb|  he  (i.  e.  any  one) 

saza  ;  John  iii.  4.  |aco  |;^»t  r^^?  ^**^^^  P^^-»l  /^<^^^  c<^^^ 
one  he  horn  when  he  is  old?  or  passively  Matt.  xxvi.  13. 
^k)Aj  ?7  5/^aZ^  he  told  ;  Acts  xvi.  13.  /ui  looi  IvmASo  ^Z 
1Zol^»  there  'prayer  loas  wont  to  he  made ;  Barh.  58,  13,  15  ; 
h)  by  the  third  person  plural ;  e.g.  Isa.  Ixiv.  3.  oZ.  |J  they 
( i.  e.,  men  in  general )  have  not  heard  ;  xlvii.  1 ;  Dan.  i.  12  ; 
Heb.  xi.  3.  w»oai  ^VmALdj  ^jJ^OI  i^Aa^  they  see  (i.  e.  ^i^/^a^ 
any  one  sees,  what  is  seen ) ;  also  with  an  explanatory  parti- 
ciple  or  adjective;  e.g.  Isa.  xxiv.  16.  OiNs]  iJQl  they  fail- 
ecZ ;  c)  by  the  second  singular ;  e.  g.  Luke  li.  4.  •^;£)Z  p 
tvhen  thou  hringest ;  I  Tim.  ii.  1.  ^O'^ok)  looiZj  ^Aa^  thou  of- 
fer est  (i.  e.  that  there  he  offered ) ;  sometimes  the  verb  is  in 
the  second  plural.  Matt.  vi.  24  ;  d)  sometimes  by  the  first 
plural  ;  e.g.  Mark  vii.27.  V^'pJO  —  «nmi)  (or  by  the  infin- 
itive with  ^,  Matt.  XV.  26.  0>V);V)!i:^o  —  ^acoSoL  xxii.17), 
that  we  (i.e.  anyone)  should  take — and  cast;  e)  more  fre- 
quently  by  the  participle  alone ;  e.g.  Matt.vii.l6.  ,-a4q^  jSo.^ 
do  men  gather  f  v.  15  ;  ix.l7  ;  x.  29  ;  I  Cor.  iv.l2  ;  Barh.6.2. 
^;So|  they  say  ;  58,  9. 

R,EM. — Here  belongs  filso  |;iiD|ASD  they  say,  it  is  said  ;  and  im- 
personal phrases  with  an  infinitive  following  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xii.  12. 
^^vO^V    ,^Xa   one  may   do  ;  Acts   v.    20.      om^^^ASoL  ]]o 

v}e  {any  one)  must  obey. 


VERBS    WITH  THE   ACCUSATIVE.  193 

4.  When  the  Deity  or  those  in  high  stations  (e.g.  Kings), 
speak  of  themselves^  the  first  person  plural  denotes  the 
pluralis  excellentice ;  e.  g.  Gen.  i.  26.  pu|  ,^U  let  us 
(i.  e.  I  will)  mahe  man',  xi.  7;  Barh.  90,  9.  -iqZo  jCJl  he- 
hold  we  (i.e.  ij  Justinian)^  have  written  ;  11.  ^  »£)oAo  r^ri'/^ 
to  us  (me) . 

Rem. — Sometimes  though  for  the  most  part  only  in  passages 
translated  from  the  Old  and  New  Testaments,  the  construction 
changes  from  one  person  to  the  other,  viz. ;  a  )  from  the  third 
to  the  second,  or  vice  versa ;  Micah  vii.  18.     «^Zq2|    (Oll^    A»X 

<^efe  is  no  God  as  thou,  who  forgiveth  sins,  and  remitteth  the 
transgressions  of  the  remnant  of  his  heritage,  and  retainest  not 
(compare   Ephr.   II.    284,   A.   B);    Mai.   ii.    15;    Gal.   iv.    21- 

^qSqj   L^L   .ooouj   rr^h   r^l'  tO^V  *^  O'^] 

yjysri  fjLoj,  ol  u-ro  vo'/xov  hiXovrsg  sivai  ;  Rom.  ii.  1 ;  Matt,  xxiii.37  ; 
h  )  from  the  first  to  the  third  person  ;  e.  g.  Isa.  xlii.  24,  25. 
tOOIiNs  fM\  —  01-^  ^.1.4^?  ^^  because  we  have  sinned  against 
him,  —  hath  he  'poured  out  upon  them  (us). —  Here  also  belong  the 
instances  where  writers  include  themselves,  in  the  first  person  plural, 
in  what  they  declare  of  their  ancestors;  e.  g.  Psalm  Ixvi.  6. 
Old  Ir^J  ^^Z  fhen  did  we  rejoice  in  him.  When  several  verbs 
having  different  subjects  follow  each  other  in  the  same  person,  it 
appears  to  be  rather  according  to  the  Syriac  idiom,  not  to  indicate 
more  particularly  the  difference  of  the  subject ;  e.g.  II  Sam.  xi.l3. 


§  67.      Construction  of   the    Verb    with  various     Cases    and 
Prepositions. 

I.     Verbs  with  the  Accusative. 
1.     With  an  Accusative  are  construed  ; 
a  )  Transitive    Verbs  ;    e.  g.    Matt.  11.  6.     .-lOlQjtl'pJ   OOlj 


194:  VERBS  WITH  THE    ACCUSATIVE. 

-'^^^  who  shall  feed  my  people  ;  iv.  16  ;  even  intransitives, 
having  at  the  same  time  a  transitive  signification ;  e.g.  Barh. 
214,  2.     I^SQm  fOOl  J^Dy  he  rode  upon  an  ass  ;  215,  11. 

Rem. — Here  also  belong  such  verbs  as  in  other  languages  govern 
other  cases  ;  e.  g.  rQ£)  to  command  ;  Matt,  xxviii.  20.  ,^V)i01  to 
believe ;  John  xii.  38;  Romans  x.  16,  (  with  JD  John  ii.  23  )  ; 
(ll  ^0  answer  ;  Ephr.  III.  285;  }£i£D  <o  announce;  Acts  xvi. 
10.  etc. 

h  )  Here  belong  the  following  classes  of  verbs ;  a  )  those 
signifying  to  put  on  or  put  off  clothing,  to  adorn,  to  gird,  to 
cover  with  anything  ;  *mn\  I  Cor.  xv.  53  ;  Eph.  vi.  11 ; 
Barh.  223,  12.  ^jjnn\  «an\l>  that  he  put  on  our  gar- 
ments ;  *M^  Col.  iii.  9  ;  ^1  I  Sam.  ii.  4 ;  Acts  xii.  8 ; 
even  passive  verbs ;  e.g.  .^4^Z|  Acts  xii.  8  ;  fcxCDoZl  Ps. 
civ.  2  ;  and  /3)  those  denoting  a  want  or  excess  ;  e.  g.  Acts 
vi.  8.  1].».*jO  yiaCLk^  looi  ]]Sd  he  was  full  of  faith  and  pow- 
er ;  xiii.  10 ;  Kom.  i.  29 ;  Mark  viii.  36.  ;m*jj  Oliaj  .  f 
if  he  suffer  harm  as  to  his  soul.  Furthermore  here  belong ; 
y)  verbs  of  remembering  and  forgetting,  joii  John  xv.  20  ; 
Luke  i.  72  ;  pjZf  John  ii.  17,  22 ;  \li  Heb.  vi.  10  ;  and 
tin  ally  ;  5)  verbs  of  coming  and  going  to  a  place ;  e.  g.  Matt. 
XV.21.  >0»j  JLoQajAjL  |Z|o  he  came  into  the  region  of  Tyre 
Mark  v.  38 ;  Luke  ii.  51  ;  John  iv.  5 ;  \\\  Luke  iv.  42 
John  vi.  1;  »^0l  Luke  ii.  39  ;  iv.  14 ;  \^  Acts  ix.  3 
A*Ij  John  ii.  12  ;  -Qaj  i.44  ;  ^CiScD  v.  1 ;  ^  xviii.33 ; 

c)  several  neuters  also  take  an  accusative,  viz  ; 

.2)  in  connection  with  a  noun,  as  their  object,  formed 
!rom  the  same  verb  ;    e.  g.   Judg.  xiv.  12.    IZ^^o]   ^   to 


VERBS    WITH  THE   ACCUSAflVE.  195 

propose  a  riddle  ;  Ez.  xvii.  2  ;  Acts  ii.  17.  —  POVm  |W 
]^^"  ^,\»i  to  have  visions  —  dreams ;  Matt.  xiii.  24 ; 
Ephr.  I.  251,  C  ;  253,  A  ;  especially  /3  )  when  the  noun  is 
more  accurately  defined  by  an  adjective;  e.  g.  Matt.  ii.  lO. 
1Aq>  12o,-m  QarA*  they  rejoiced  exceedingly;  John  iii.  29 ; 
Assem.  L*362,  18 ;  Gen.  xxvii.  34.  Xbjo'y  lALlLV^^VAe 
lamented  sorely  ;  Zach.  i.  14. 

10 
001 ,   in  the  sense  of  to  befall^    to  happen  to   any  one, 

also   governs   the   accusative   of  the   ohject ;    e.   g.   Luke  xiii.  2. 

tOj]    fOOl    (1201)  ,  because  this  has  befallen  them  ;  Acts  vii.  40. 

w»0L»001    (ik)   what  has  happened  to  him  ;  Acts  xxviii.  5,  6. 

2     The  following  govern  a  double  accusative ; 

a )  verbs  in  Pa,^  Aph.,  and  /S7ia.,  Pe.  of  which  takes  an 
accusative,  viz.;  a)  verbs  of  putting  on  or  off  clothing, 
adorning,  covering  with  anything;  e.  g.  i«n  \\,  i»»N»| 
Mark  xv.  l7,20;  Ephr.  1.  239,  A.  TAjJu^qo  ^cjf.an^o 
he  clothed  them  with  garments  ;  II.  178,  D ;  John  xix.  2. 
IjQy.ilj  IAmJ  «a01CLk£QD0  they  put  upon  him,  a  purple  robe; 
Ez.  xvi.  10  ;  i^)  verbs  oi filling  up,  satisfying  ;  e.  g.  Ephr. 
I.  527,  A.  ]ilmli  t^Q^  A>\V>  lAlSDjf  ^Ae  i^^^^ow;  yi/feo? 
^/«e  vessels  with  oil;  Luke  i.  53.  fArni  ^Inm  |l£^  ^/le  hun- 
gry he  fills  with  good  things  ;  7)  those  which  denote  teaching, 
or  showing ;  e.  g.  John  xiv.  26.  Vo^^Solo  ^nn*^\j  Ae  w;z7 
/eac^  3/0W  aU  things  ;  I  Tim.  iv.  6 ;  John  xiv.  8.  "^ol  ^Om 
sAo^^  t«5  the  Father  ;  verses  10,  32  ; 

h )  verbs  in  Peal  with  a  double  accusative  signification. 
Here  belong  ;  a)  verbs  of  clothing,  covering  (also  with  »r^  of 
the  thing)  ;    e.  g.   Ephr.  1.  239,  A.     U^Ol  ^QjV  ;fl>f  he 


196  VEKBS  WITH  PREPOSITIONS. 

girded  them  with  girdles  ;  cm^^  to  anoint^  Ps.xlv.7;  ^>1  to  sow  , 
Lev.  xix.  19  ;  ^)  verbs  o^ filling  up  (also  with  «0  and  ^) 
e.  g.  John  ii.  7.  '^^  V^  ^f  qSlo  fill  {them)  the  water 
pots  ivith  wal£fr  ;  verse  9  ;  Barh.  212,  2  ;  Assem.  I.  332,  A. 
12;  7)verbs  oi  commanding  ^ordering  ^  (also  with  jiand  ^\2hoi 
the  person  and  thing) ;  e.g.  Gen.  vi.22.  OirOaj  ^^  all  that 
he  had  commanded  him]  Mark  viii.ll.  121  OiS  0001  ^-b^1» 
they  demanded  of  him  a  sign  ;  5)  verbs  of  showing  or  doing 
any  thing  to  any  body,  or  malcing  a  person  or  thing  to  he 
thus  and  so ;  e.  g.  Gen,  xvii.  5.     ^.Aqou   (a|  /  have  made 

thee  a  Father ;  John  viii.53.  «^a£1]  Lh\  rOl  QlSo  i^//ia^  ma^- 
69^  thou  thyself?  Heb.  i.  2  ;  Assem.  I.  3-46,  A.  4.  v.  E.  Al- 
so with  an  accusative  of  the  material  of  which  anything  is 
formed;  e.  g.  I  Kings  viii.  52.  1.^^^/^  lapL  ^-ij1  ll£5 
he  huilt  of  {them)  the  stones  an  altar  ;  s)  verbs  of  naming,  1;jO 
Isa.  Ix.  18  ;  I  John  iii.  1. 


II.     Verbs  with  Prepositions. 

1.  Yerbs  are  construed  with  «2  which  in  English  are 
joined  with  m,  on,  upon,  about,  conoerning,  etc.  Here  belong 
especially  ;  a)  verbs  which  denote  some  state  or  emotion  of 
the  mind  ;  e.g.  Luke  i.l4.  oi,\oV)n  t^r^^  ^^^y  ^^^^^  rejoice 
at  his  birth ;  Barh.90,20;  *^  y^^to  have  pleasure  in  some- 
thing;  Matt.  iii.  17  ;  Heb.  x.  38;     *^  oiLdZZI  to  wonder  at; 

7 

Matt.  xxii.  33  ;  Luke  ii.  47  ;  *^  \^iSD  to  hope  in  ;  Matt.  xii. 
21  ;  John  v. 45  ;  »Q  ^LOkOl  to  believe  on ;  Mark  i.  15 ;  John 
ii.  11;  .o  jJ  to  look  at  ;  John  i.  36,  43  ;  Barh.  190,  13  ; 
Assem.  L  89,  A.  l7  ;      *S  L(jif:^  to  be  ashamed  of ;  Rom.  L 


VERBS  WITH  PREPOSITIONS.  197 

16  ;  *0  '^.^  to  rebuke  ;  I  Tim.  v.  1  ;  '\]o  ibid,  or  threaten  ; 
Matt.  viii.  26;  Luke  iv.  41 ;  Barh.  53, 10;  *Q  wmIt:  to  moc\ 
at ;  Matt.  xx.l9  ;  xxvii.  81;  <S^  .nT^  to  laugh  at  ;  Acts  ii. 
13  ;  b)  verbs  that  denote  acknowledging^  denying,  siuearing 
by,  calling  upon ;  e.  g.  Matt.  x.  32,  33.  ^r*^  1?^?  •i^*^ 
whosoever  shall  confess  me ;  Mark  i.  5 ;  Acts  xxiii.  8  ; 
Kom.  x.  9,  10 ;  Matt.  x.  33.  *j^  joanjj  ^  whosoever 
shall  deny  me  ;  xxvi.  84  ;  I  Tim.  v.  viii ;  Assem.  I.  341,  A. 
23;  372,  8,  9;  Matt.  xxvi.  63.  U^  loi!^^  1j1  ]SdqSo 
7  adjure  thee  by  the  living  God  ;  Mark  v.  7 ;  I  Thess.  v.27; 
»^  Ip  /o  call  upon  ;  Gen.  iv.  26.  Here  also  belong ;  c) 
some  verbs  which  denote  a  doing  something  for  or  against 
some  one  ;  e.  g.  ^TD  p^il,  .-&.S9|  and  .^Om  <o  /?rofe  against 
some  one ;  Acts  xxiv.  27 ;  xxv.  9  ;  Kom.  ix.  17 ;  I  Tim.  i. 
16;  *C)  JOICD  (also  with  ^^)  to  testify  against;  Dent.  xxxi. 
28.  Of  verbs  of  motion,  here  belong ;  d)  ^d  ^vS  to  encoun- 
ter;  Luke  viii.  27 ;  xxii.  10  ;  and  *£i  \l]  to  come  with  (i.  e. 
bring)  something ;  Psalms  Ixvi.  12;, 

Rem. — Here  also  belongs  *2  |Aa  to  drink  from  ;  Gen.  xHv.  5. 
*a^  OlO  |A«J  (£02  ^^e  cup  from  which  my  Lord  drinks.  Some 
times  «2  denotes  a  j^ar^  of  the  object ;  e.g.  II  Sam.  xxiii.  10. 
|a^a\*^0  JD'f^  he  made  an  overthrow  atnony  the  Philistines  ; 
and  here  are  to  be  placed  %£i  ^OlL  and  ^\Sd  to  labor  at  something; 
I  Kings  ix.  23. 

2.  The  following  verbs  are  construed  with  ^  as  a  sign  of 
the  dative;  a)  those  of  giving,  permittins:,  commending; 
e.  g.  John  xiv.27.  .qq\  pi  ^ruoi-a  wkXk>  yULn  my  peace 
^ive  I  to  you  ;  Matt,  viii.21,31.  ^  -  cuA  *£Q2)|  permit  me 
—  us  ;    Mark  v.  13  ;    Luke  viii.  32  ;    Acts  xx.  32.    ^^ 


198  VERBS  WITH   PREPOSITIONS.      • 

loi^l]  .onL  pi  /  commend  you  to  God;  I  Peter  i v.  19; 
h)  those  of  pleasing  and  displeasing ;  e.  g.  John  viii.  29 
01^  fSiM}  ^Ao  if^^^  which  pleases  him ;  Eom.  xv.  2,  3  ; 
Heb.  xiii.  16 ;  or  c)  those  that  denote  likeness^  similarity; 
e.g.  Luke  xiii.  18.  louLj  IZonSV)  UiDj  li^n\  to  what  is 
the  Kingdom  of  God  like  ?  verses  9,  20  ;  Heb.  ii.  17  ;  Barh. 
137,  12.     aii  Ajj  loi  thou  art  like  him. 

Rem. — Here  also  belong  impersonal  phrases,  such  as  ^  ]]  O  it  is 
fitting  for^  and  ^  Aji|  equivalent  to  to  have  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  iii.  9  ; 
Luke  xvi.  28,29  ;  John  x.  16.  (with  the  accusative  of  the  object  in 
relation  to  tx^'v,  II  John  9.  OlS  L?i  li^^O  |o]]o  ^JOT 
oZrog  xoLi  rdv  ifOLri^a,  xai  tov  uIov  £;!^£»),  and  ^  A^  equivalent  to 
not  to  have  ;  Matt.  xiii.  21 ;  Johnxiv.30.  In  the  same  signification 
occurs  also  ^  loOl  ;  e.g.  Barh.  66,  4.  IaLd  CJl^  OOCTI  '^tULl 
he  had  three  sons. 

3.  With  ,i>D  are  connected ;  a  )  verbs  which  denote  to 
fear,  flee,  guarding  oneself,  retraining,  ceasing,  releasing ; 

e  g.  Luke  xxiii.  40.  Aj]  ^\Zy  lai!!^  ^  V' *2i(  fearest  thou 
not  God?  John  ix.  22 ;  Barh,  94,9  ;  Kom.  ii.3.  ^0^2  tS\\ 
loi^j  Oll^>  ^JiO  that  thou  shah  escape  the  judgment  of  God; 
I  Cor.  vi.  18  ;    x.  14  ;    Barh.  170,  4 ;  Matt.  x.  17.     Ojoijl] 

]r^  ''*^   ^^  hcv/are  of  men  ;  xvi.  6,  12;  Luke  xii.  15;  xx. 

46  ;  John  xvii.  15.  (au.2  ^Sd  ^qj]  ;4^?  ^^^^  ^^^^  shouldst 
keep  them  from  evil  ;  I  Peter  ii.  11.  C7lA.^..>  ^So  QuO;aZ| 
\r^}  abstain  from  lusts  of  the  flesh  ;  Acts  xv.  29  ;  I  Pet. 
iv.l.  |0l4^  ^Sd  01^  «i\»  he  csasethfrom  sin;  Barh. 102,9; 
Assem.  1.  42,  8;  II  Thess.  iii.  3.     \mj^  ^  ^oaoiomj  he 


VEKBS  WITH  PREPOSITIONS.  199 

will  keep  you  from  evil ;  b)  those  of  filling  up  ^  lacking,  and 
failing;  Luke  xv.  16.  Ioo^jva  ^  OlCDp  ]]SqSq^  to  fill  his 
belli/  t/nth  husks  ;  Barb.  69,1 ;  I  Tim.  vi.lO.     IZoiiCUOl  _lo 

7  ^^ 

QI4  ^^ey  came  short  of  the  faith  ;  II  Tim.  ii.  18  ;  c)  those  of 
asking,  beseeching;  John  i v.  31.  OUlD  00(71  ^  >v*^  ^Aev 
besought  him  ;  verse  40;  I  Peter  ii.  II. 

Rem. —  ^1d  also  expresses  the  Latin prce  ;  e.  g.  _k)  A.Vn  ^^  f/{g 
6e/bre  ;  or  per,  with  ^\l  and  «nSm,  John  x.  1,  2. 

4.  With  ^^  are  construed  verbs,  which,  in  English,  may 
be  followed  by  abouty  concerning,  viz.  ;  a )  some  which  ex- 
press an  affection  of  the  mind;  e.g.  Matt.xv.22.  -  '^^  ^OlmjAI 
be  merciful  to  me  ;  xvii.  15  ;  Eom.  ix.  15  ;  xi.  32 ;  Matt.vi. 
28.     ^oAjI  ^^^  pi  liafli^  ^  why  take  ye  thought  for 

raiment ;  Luke  xii.  26.  ^  KtJ  to  be  anxious  ;  Matt.v.22. 
>\l  ^omoZf  to  rejoice  over  ;  Rev.  xviii.20,  ^\l  po  to  weep 
ove/*;  Lukexxiii.27,28.  ^  j^iioZ)  to  take  counsel  concern- 
ing ;  Matt.  xxvi.  4;  b)  those  which  denote  povjer  or  authori- 
ty  over  somethmg  ;  e.  g.  Luke  xix.  14.  JjOl  ^^iNs  .^iW)i> 
that  this  person  should  rule  over  us  ;  Rom.  vi.  14  ;  vii,  1  ; 
Barh.  40,  6  ;  Matt,  xxiii.  35.  ^nni\\  1Z]j  shall  come  upon 
you  ;  Luke  xxi.  34  ;  John  xviii.  4  ;  Luke  i.  1  . 
^OloiLl  A\g^i  IALj^j  fear  fell  upon  him  ;  c )  those  which 
,  denote   a   doing  for  or  against^    or  an  occupation  with  some- 

•  7  i»  V  .I*     -7 

thing;  e.  g.  Acts  vii.  58.  toenail  ojoicoj  ^^iNi]  those  who 
t/istified  against  him  ;  Matt.  xxvi.  62 ;  John  i.  8.  ^\l  jOlflCiJ? 
IjOIQJ  that  he  might  bear  witness  of  the  light ;  iii.  26 ;  v.  31. 
^  ^flOoV  io  accuse  ;  John  viii.  46  ;  ^  *oA3  to  writA  of, 
concerning.  John  i.  46  ;  v.  46  ;    Acts  xxi.  25.    ^  '^'\  and 

14 


200  VERBS   AVITH   PREPOSITIONS. 

^S£i  to  speak  of,    about;  John  i.  22,  30;  xiii.  22;  vii.  13  ; 

d)  verbs  of  coverings  protecting,  or  burdening  ;  e.  g.  Matt, 
xvii.  5.  ^OOIa^I  A^I  |Z;^ariJ  tin  a  bright  cloud  covered 
them  ;  Luke  i.  35.     -  >*^.>  Vv      ^  V"^?  OlNi  »i  the  power  of 

the  Most  High  shall  cover  thee  ;  ^^  14^  and  too  have  the 
same  signification  ;  Jer.  xviii.  23  ;  11  Sam.  xiii.  25. 
-^»  Av  jo'^j  ]] J  50  that  we  shall  not  burden  thee.  And  finally ; 

e)  several  verbs  that  denote  a  charge,  command  or  petition  ; 
e.  g.  ^^  r^2)  to  charge  one ;  II  Chron.  xxxvi.  23  ; 
^^  %QZib  to  prescribe  for  one  ;  II  Kings  xxii.  13.  ^^  PbQ 
to  pray  for :  John  xvii.  9.  ^\l  ^li  /o  ask  after  ;  Assem. 
I.   50,    6. 

Rem. — Here  also  belong  phrases  compounded  with  nouns  derived 
from  these  verbs  ;  e.  g.  I  Peter  v.  1.  \(JC^  ^\l  O,*  ^QoAa » 
cast  your  cares  upon  the  Lord  ;  Barh.  77,  5.  O^Ol  j'^NV)  ^\l 
lZo\  >  fc^  they  took  care  for  the  King  ;  Isa.  i.  14.  « i\s  0001 
]Z;n.ljit  they  are  a  burden  to  me  ;  Job  vii.  20. 

5.  With  AjlO ,  %k\  >n  and  Ly  >0  between^  are  construed 
verbs  which  denote   dividing,   separating,   distinguishing; 

e.g.  Gen.  i.4.     poa»>\   poiQJ   Aa^d ^;a  Ae  separated  be- 

i//)eeM  light  and  darkness  ;  Euth  i.  17.  AxQ  ^, — »  and  (Vm 
/o  6'ee,  to  perceive  a  difference  between  ;  II  Sam.  xix.  35  ; 
Mai.  lii.  18. 

6.  With  jAo  after,  are  joined  verbs  which  signify  to  go 
(equivalent  to  to  follow  )  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  iv.  25.  OliAo  Q^l] 
/Aey  followed  him;  xii.  15;  Mark  x.  82;  Matt,  i v.  19. 
wiiAri  oL  follow  after  me  ;  xix.  2  ;  John  viii.  12  ;  jAo  .^aiS 
1  Tim  vi.  1 J  ;  II  Tim.  ii.  22. 


PASSIVES  AND   THEIR  CONSTRUCTION.  201 

Rem. — More  in  accordance  with  the  Hebrew  idiom  we  find 
)Aq  with  verbs  signifying  to  put  away,  destroy  :  e.  g.  I  Kings 
xiv.  10  ;  xxi.  21. 


General    Remarks. 

To  seerrij  to  appear,  are  expressed,  as  in  Hebrew,  by 
.  il  iSO  in  the  relation  of  genitive  or  with  the  suffix  be 
longing  to  the  person  ;    e.  g.   Gen.  xix.  14.      » 1 1 1 \n  looi 

7        7 

.jOIQjAa*  he  seemed  to  his  sons-in-law;  II  Sam.  x.  8. 
y  1 1  >  SO  (he)  seems  to  thee.  When  rendered  more  definite 
by  the  adjectives  good  or  had,  they  are  expressed  either  by 
^  ;Si»  and  ;i<^»  ,  or  *«li21  without  «il  i\n ;  e.  g.  Acts 
vi.  5  ;  Kom.  xv.  2.  8  ;  Gen.  xxi.  11 ;  Matt.  xxi.  15  ;  or  in 
connection  with  » i  i\  \n  ;  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  240,F.  looi  }^Ji» 
\k'fiD  -y  -^^  ^aS^  would  this  seem  good  to  God  f  In  the  trans- 
lation of  the  New  Testament,   SoxsT  is  usually  expressed  by 

^  VwASd  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xvii.  25;  xviii.  12;  xxi.  28;  xxii.17: 
Luke  X.  36, 

To  suffer,  permit,  are  expressed  either  by  ,  n<^  to  com- 
mand, or  hfM  to  cause  (without  the  copula  following)  ;  e.g. 
Barh.  72,  12  ;  or  they  are  expressed  in  such  a  manner  that 
the  thing  to  be  done  is  implied  in  the  imperative  itself ; 
Barh.  27,  2;  114,  14. 


III.    Passives  and  their  Construction. 

1.  The  active  cause  in  passives  is  usually  expressed  by 
^;  e.g.  Matt.  vi.  16.  ]fillVn^  ,OVmAj>  that  they  may  he 
seen  hy  men  ;  Luke  viii.  29.     OlS  looi  l^  he  was  caught  hy 


202  VERBS  WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

him;  Assem.  1.  89, 14,  and  16.     Co  Oll^  MSdA»1  there  vjas  a 
voice  heard  hy  him  ;  Barh.  152,  11. 

Rem. — Yet  we  also  frequently  find —Sc,  Matt.  iii.  14.  ^^liO) 
^S^ZI  that  I  should  he  baptized  of  thee  ;  v.  13  ;  xx.  23. 

2.  Passives  whose  actives  govern  a  double  accusa- 
tive, sometimes  retain  one  of  them;  e.g.  Luke  i.  41. 
fii^QD)    H^0>    A>\^/|  5^6  i^as  yi^^cc?  t(;i^A   i/ie  ^O'f?/  Ghost 

man  who  was 
Assem.  I.  86, 
A.  27,  28. 


ii.  40  ;  Barh.  32,  14.     I^ob  .m%A\y  1'^.^  a 
clad  in  Byssus  ;    90,  14  ;    108,  6  ;    223,  15;    . 


3.  When  passives,  especially  in  verbs  relating  to  the 
mind,  have  an  active  signification,  they  are  joined  with  the 
accusative ;  e.g.  I  Thess.  i.  2.  tZo^^  •aa^  ^pjASo  ive 
remember  you  in  our  prayers  ;  «n«>iZ|  to  think,  Rom.  ii.  3  ; 
XV.  5  ;  ^>oA»l  to  recognize,  Acts  xix.  15 ;  MiA»l  ^^  ^^^Vi 
Eph.  vi.  1 ;  Col.  iii.  22  ;  *..;..;2f  to  wish,  I  Tim.  vi.  10. 

Rem. — Here  also   belong  such   passives   as   99Q..Z|  to  chew  the 

cud,  Lev.  xi.  3,5  ;   and  hence  also  may  be  explained  why  participles 
passive  of  the  Pe.  (§  64.  5)  take  the  accusative  of  the  object. 

4.  Passives  have  also  frequently  a  reflective  signification 
(§  21,  2  ;  §  22.  2  ;  §  24.2  ;  §  58.  A.  a  )  ;  e.  g.  John  viii.  6. 
.OlytZj  A>jA^  ViQAu  Jesus  lowed  himself  down  ;  verse  8  ; 
Mark  i.  7  ;  I  Tim.  v.  14.  ^yiO?P  ^J^?  ^  *..!L^1  those  who 
are  young  shall  marry  ;  iv.  13  ;  ^\1a*Z1  to  wax  strong.  Acts 
xix.  16  ;  xxiii.  11 ;  %Aii^Zl  to  hide,  John  viii.  59  ;  ^aIqZ^ 
to  turn  around^  Matt.  ix.  22.,  etc. 

Rem. — Many  neuters  take  a  passive   signification  ;    e.  g.  \^   to 


MODE   OF  EXPKESSING  GREEK  COMPOSITES.         203 

err,    Luke  xxi.  8.     tQl^Z    (SOJ^  fx^  leXavri^vire  ;    ,n,a    ^o  6wrn, 
>Q1S  ^^i,ni  xa<  flrup?  xalsrai  ;     ^\£L]  to/all,  iii.lO. 
jQlfD  >\£L3  sig  'n'up  paXksrat  ;  J^EU  <o  ^o  owi,  viii.  12.     ^Q02L1 
ix^Xrj^rjtfovrai    etc. 

Upon  the  use  of  verbs  for  adverbs,  see  §  82.  1. 


Appendix  to   §  67. 

Mode  of  expressing  Greek  Composites. 

To  the  subject  of  the  construction  of  verbs  with  cases  and  prepo- 
sitions, belongs  also  the  manner  of  rendering  Greek  Composites, 
which  in  the  Syriac  translation  of  the  New  Testament,  are  express- 
ed  as   follows  : 

1.  By  simple  verbs,  in  the  signification  of  which  ;  a )  the  idea 
of  the  Greek  preposition  is  included ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xx.  18. 
^Lm  ^iDNfO  rtvapaivofASv  ;  viii.  1.  AmJ  ^  xara^avri  ;  iii.  2. 
QSoZ  ixsravosr-rs  ;  xvi.  5.  Ql^  ^^rsXaStovro  ;  or  by  verbs  which  ; 
h  )  without  respect  to  the  Greek  preposition,  answer  to  the  simple 
Greek  verb  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xi.  5.  ■  %\  n  avai^XsVoutfj  ;  Acts  xxiii.  33. 
Q£^GLk  ava^o'vTS^  ;  Rom.  14.  9.  (.i.^  avi^rjtfsv;  Luke  xv.  24,  32  ; 
x.31,32.  ^jQl  avTj'Tr'ap^X&sv  ;  Acts  xxvi.  5.  ^-b-^i-"  "f po/'vwtfxovT^f ; 
Rom.  XV.  4.       %!dAoZ|    "Tposypa^T]. 

2.  By  verbs  ;  a  )  with  a  preposition  answering  to  the  Greek  ; 
e.g.  ^'^.ODoL  =  kvrl  ;  Luke  xiii.lY.  Oll^^OnL  0001  ^^  i  V)  i  D) 
oi  avTjxsi'jxsvoi  aurw  ;  Acts  vi.lO  ;  Rora.xiii.2.  ^\i=  aVi'  andxa-ra; 
Luke  x.  34.  wkOloXl  CJlli  ^^ii^^Z]  xa/  ^-n-SfxaX^^r}  aiJrou  ;  Matt. 
xxvi.62.  '-  »^^     »%mmVo  xa<ra|xap<rupoiJo'/v  tfou  ;  >QL  =  fl'uv  ;  Rom. 


204  PECULIARITIES   OF   VERBS. 

1>  7    •  *  I  0 

vi.8.  CTlSCl  MjJ  Cu^^jCoiuLSv  ai3<rc5,  Heb.  iv.  15  ;  II  Tim.  i.  8.  ^^O 
=  «7rpo  ;  Acts  vii.  40.  ■  aSOyQ  •oij^ip)  oj'  'Trpo'B'opSurfov'rai  >3|xwv  ; 
Matt.  ii.  9  ;  or  b)  by  an  adverb  of  similar  signification  ;  e.  g. 
%Aji))  —^  ^  (xvtt,  I  Peter  i.3;  Uk^9)  ^Sd  tr^O|  ava^sw^Caj  '>;fAa^, 
Ileb.  vi.  6.  ^a»r^  ^  =  -^rpo ,  II  Cor.  xiii.  2  ;  2*k5Vj>ai^  ^ 
«rpos/p>)xa  ,  Rom.  i.  2  ;     Col.  i.  5. 

3.  By  another  verb  representing  the  preposition,  which  usually 
stands  first,   without  any  connective   particle,   in  the   same   tense, 

*   7 

number,  and  gender  with  the  finite  verb  ;  e.  g.  ^fO  (  to  come  he- 
fore  )  =  "rrpo  ,  Mark  xiii.  23.  2l^|  ALO^O  'n'pos/pyjxa,  Acts  vii.  52; 
Rom.  hi.  9  ;  xi.  35.     This  verb  sometimes  follows  ;  e.  g.  John  xx.  4. 

4.  If  the  composite  is  formed  from  a  noun  or  adjective  and  a 
verb,  it  is  usually  resolved  into  its  components  ;  e.  g.  Mark  iv.  20. 
p  \Si  —.k^Ol^  xccpito(popov(fiv ;  iii.  4.  *ai*^>  Of  -'^(j)  i*^^^^ 
otra&o'Troiv^tfai  •^  xaxo-n'oi^o'ai  ;  Matt.  xix.  18.  ZojOlfiO  jOlCoZ  |J 
I^QA    ou  4^su^ofiapTup^o's»j. 

Rem. — It  seems  to  be  merely  pleonastic,  where  in  John  iv.  4. 
^isp^stf^aj  is  translated  by  ;nM  fZpj» 


§  68.     ^^e  Substantive    Verb,    and  some  other  Peculiarities 
chiefly  relating  to  the  Construction  of  the  Vei'b. 

A.     Use  of  looi ,  L^  and  AaS  (§  38). 

Instead  of  looi    to  be  (with  which,  according  to   §  Qb.  B. 
and  D,  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  are  formed),  the  Sjriac 


INDIRECT     DISCOURSE.  205 

also  uses  Lk\ ,  and  in  negative  phrases  LJ^  with  suffixes, 
and  with  them  also  in  connection  with  the  former  (looi), 
forms  the  imperfect ;  e.g.  John  ix.24.  looi  •uOloA^I  he  v:as; 
verse  14.     Zooi  OuAj^I  they  were^  etc. 

10 
001    sometimes  stands  pleonastically  with  the  preterit 

without  giving  it  the  signification  of  the  pluperfect ;  e.g.  Mark  i.45. 
001  ^\M  he  hegan  ;  Luke  i.  8  ;  John  iii.  25.  It  is 
sometimes  omitted  as  present  or  imperfect,  according  to  §  54. 
2  ;  or  when  it  would  be  a  mere  copula  between  the  sub- 
ject and  object ;  e.  g.  Matt,  xxvii.  29  (§  65.  III.  Rem.) ; 
Luke  i.27.  It  seems  to  mark  emphasis  after  IJ  (in  the  Philoxenian 
version  Q-^  nowise)'^  e.g.  John  vi.  32.  ^on\  *O0U  |»qSd  loOl  |J 
Moses  has  not  given  you;  verses  38,  58  ;  xiii.  11, 18  ;  Heb.  ii.5,16  ; 
or  in  interrogations  with  Jj  =  nonne  ) ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xiii.  55. 
POI  fOOl  U  is  this  not  ?  xx.  13  ;  Mark  vi.  3  ;  Luke  xi,  40  ;  xvii. 
IT.  Concerning  |001 ,  A^f  and  Ajl!^  with  ^  =  to  have — not  to 
have,  compare  §  6Y.  II.    2.  Rem. 


B.     Indirect  Discourse. 

The  indirect  discourse  is  usually  expressed  directly, 
commencing  with    >    ( =  "iD  —  <^'^' )?    ^-   S-  ^^ohn  iv.    17. 

]Ko  ,  A  Lk^y  ^^r^]  t'*^*  ^^^^  ^^^^  rightly  said,  I  have 
no  husband;  verse  53;  ii.  17;  vi.  81  ;  Barh.  51,11. 
AiSoif  i^X  p  «s  he  said;  I  (he)  have  heard;  135,10  ;  69,7. 
]!]  looi  ]1']<^V>X  ]rillDj  ]SCU  ^>  001  he  svjore,  he  would 
(I will)  he  no  King  of  the  heathen;  223,  11,  12. 

Rem.— Sometimes  J  is  wanting  at  the  beginning  of  the  direct 
discourse  (especially  before  ©1  )  ;  e.g.  Barh.  131,  11,  12;  374,  13; 
443,  8  ;    more  frequently  '^Y  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  106,3  ;  183,9  ;  219,5  ; 


206 

243,  10  ;  486,  5 ;  543,  19  ;  596,  11.  Compare  Assem.  I.  479,  A. 
24,  with  480,  1.  The  indirect  discourse  also  occurs;  e.  g.  Barh. 
79,  19,  ]iy^  ^OOlL  laaco  ]]i  CIl^  0-;ii{  they  said  to  him,  the 
tribute  is  not  sufficient  for  thee  ;  94,  1 — 3  ;  97,  1.  Sometimes  the 
direct  discourse  passes  over  into  the  indirect;  e.  g.  276,  8 — 10  and 
vice  versa  ;  166,  19,  20  ;  513,  5,  6. 


C.     Ellipsis — Zeugma — Paronomasia,  and  Puns. 

1 .  "When  a  verb  has  previously  been  used  in  the  protasis, 
it  is  usually  omitted  in  the  apodosis,  where  it  would  proper- 
ly be  repeated ;  e.  g.  Matt.i.22.  llSoAaj  Zooij  cilLd  ^j  Ijoi 
hut  what  has  happened  {has  happened)  that  it  might  he  fulfil- 
led; xxi.  4;  John  xx.  81;  Rom.  v.  20 ;  I  Cor.  ix.  25. 
tnnrm>  ^jL.4ai9)  ^a^OI  those  who  run  {run)  that  they  may 
obtain  ;  II  Cor.  v.  13  ;  Heb.  vii.  19  ;  viii.  8  ;  I  Peter  iv.  11; 
I  John  iii.  6.  Sometimes  the  verb  is  to  be  suppHed  from 
the  context ;  Matt.  27,25.  ,^iNs  OllsOj  his  hlood  {come)  upon 
us;  Acts  xxiv.6.  ^ODQiQiaj  ^|  as  it  {is  written  )  in  our 
law. 

Rem. — The  ellipsis  must  be  considered  as  a  pecuharity  of  the  Sy- 
riac  language,  where  the  Philoxenian  translation,  omitting  the  J  in 
the  apodosis,  adheres  strictly  to  the  Greek  words ;  e.  g.  Matt  i.  22. 
ZOCTI  CTL^  _k)   (jQl   rovTo  as  oXov  yiyovsv  ;    John  xx.  31.     Con- 

cerning  the  omission  of  jLd|    see  B.  Rem.  above ;  and  concerning 

IP 
001  see  A.  Rem. 


2.  Sometimes  a  verb,  by  its  signification,  can  belong  to 
only  one  of  two  connected  nouns  {Zeugma),  so  that  to  the 
other   noun    another    verb   must    be   mentally    supplied ; 


USE   OF  THE  NOUN   IN   GENERAL.  207 

e.  g.  Job  IV.  10.     ^yCill]  IIbo  —  juilj  IALdotj  the  roaring 
of  the  lion  {is  stilled)  and  the  teeth  are  broken  ;  x.  12. 

3.  Paronomasia  and  puns  occur  but  rarely  in  Syriac. 
The  former  is  a  mere  imitation  of  the  Hebrew  original  in 
Ps.  xl.  3.  ^Oy*Jo  IV^CD  ^OWJ?  (  tlij^^^n  d'^n-l  :iii:T  ) 
that  many  see  it  and  rejoice.  Puns  occur  mostly  in  names 
where  the  language  does  not  require  any  such  alteration  to 
be  assumed ;  e.g.  Gen.  xlix.  8.  fOjQJ  %^  IjOOU  Judah  {thy 
brethren)  shall  praise  thee,  verses  16,  19. 


CHAPTEE      THIKD. 


The    Noun. 

§  69.      Use  of  the  Noun  in  General. 

1.  Abstract  nouns  not  unfrequently  in  Syriac  take  the 
place  of  adjectives  and  then  they  stand  in  the  relation  of 
genitive  to  the  noun,  with  ?  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  iii.  11. 
M»>Q£5>  paO'rO  with  the  Holy  Ghost;  John  xv.l.  lVr»>  l^yt 
the  true  vine  ;  I  Cor.  xv.  44.  Especially  does  this  union,  as 
in  Hebrew,  occur  with  adjectives  which  denote  the  material 
or  substance  of  which  a  thing  is  composed  ;  e.  g.  John  ii.  6. 
l2)]o>   ]lT.f  stone   ivat^-pots  ;     Heb.  ix.  4.     I^OI))  ]^IX10 


208         USE  OF  THE  NOUN  IN  GENERAL. 

a  golden  box  ;  II  Cor.  x.  4  ;  II  Tim.  ii.  20  ;  Barh.  11,  7,  8  ; 
20,  10  ;  88,  2  ;  172,  8  ;  228,  7.  IjCJIOJ?  fjoSni  a  fiery 
pillar. 

Rem. — Adjectives  of  material,  however,  do  occur  ;  e.g.  Barh.  59,4. 
JLaAjlmJ  ];  i^rn]  a  brazen  celestial  sphere  ;  and  in  the  same  con- 
struction adjectives  of  quality  with  j  prefixed,  used  for  substantives ; 
90x1)  |AOa  week  of  the  white  [clothes). 
Abstract  nouns  with  J  in  connection  with  a  pronoun,  supply  the 
place  of  the  predicate;  e.g.  Rom.  vii.  14.  p|  ;ffi*^>  — »j  p| 
6m^  /  am  carnal  ;  or  with  a  preposition  prefixed  they  supply  the 
place  of  an  adjective  to  which  a  noun  is  to  be  supplied  ;  e.  g.  Heb. 
ii.  17.  (ai-^rO  in  divine  (  things  )  ;  Luke  viii.  49.  ^Lo  *AJf 
bi^ay  one  of  the  household ;  even  with  suflSxes,  •-iC710)(a9 
^ajfxovi^oiasvo^.  Some  abstract  nouns,  in  the  relation  of  genitive  with 
J  following,  precede  as  nomen  regens ;  e.  g.  Barh.  170,  20. 
loAoj  iVyfClbD  Twawy  writings ;  1*72,  4  ;  178,  5  ;  195,16.  )o;iin 
|1£Aa*>  in  the  remaining  fortresses  ;  198,13.  Here  also  belongs  ^^S 
according  to  §  55.  B.  2.  Rem. 

2.  Especially  are  adjectives  or  concrete  substantives  de- 
noting possession^  custom^  similarity^  etc.,  expressed  bj  way 
of  circumlocution,  by  means  of  the  nouns  \!^  son ;  2;s 
daughter ;  ^'\ia  and  (;iO  lord^  master  ;  JD)  and  ^m^h  prince^ 
ruler  ;  and  A^jQ  ^owse.  In  respect  to  the  use  of  these  nouns 
it  is  to  be  observed  ; 

a)  \!^  designates ;  a)  Oentile  names^  inhabitants^  etc.  e.  g. 
Tit.  i.  12.  '{^^  Jlo  Cretans;  Barh.  167,1 ;  Acts  xxi.  12; 
IjZI  ^lOi  ol  ivroVjoj ;  Barh.  80,  17.  lAla^So  %aJX3  citizens  ; 
91,12;  /3)  the  idea  of  race,  species^  kindred ;  e.g.  Rom.  xi.l4. 
VrCQO  'rO  a  kinsman  ;  Deut.  xxiii.2  ;  I  Cor.  vii.22.     |){ja  '^ID 


USE   OF  THE  NOUN  IN  GENERAL  209 

a  freeman  ;  John  xviii.  85.  (Soi  olIO  heathen  ;  Micliael. 
Chr.  5.  .JCCuxoiCFl  ^  a  heretic  ;  Assem.  11.248.  ^hty\^  \^ 
a  courtier ;  Kev.  ii.  14,  20.  (Here  also  belongs  Jaj^)  ; 
7)  participation^    likeness^    {=  cOv  ojxoj) ;    e.   g.   Eph.   iii.   6. 

»!».  «s  -     ?  7.. 

|ZoZ>  w»aa  tfu/xX^povofAoi ;  I  Thess.  ii.  14 ;  Acts  xviii.  3  ; 
XIX.  24.  (ZQlk)0|  ;o  l[t.Wcx^^£  ;  -Dan.  i.  10.  \1m  \^  con- 
temporaries ;  Phil.  iv.  8 ;  Gal.  i.  14  ;  ^)  locality^  situation^ 
and  other  circunLstances ;  e.g.  Isa.  xxvi.  1.  \yOM  \a  a  moat; 
Psalms  cxxxii.  2.  1>0  9\^  a  neck  chain.  And  finally ;  g  ) 
the  adverbial  phrase  0iAl»  \i^  forthwith^  immediately  ;  Matt, 
xiii.  5,  20 ;  John  v.  9  ;  xiii.  80  ;  Acts  x.  2>^  ;  xxi.  82. 

h)  Z^  plur.  Axo  forms  ;  a)  rarely  abstracts;  e.g.  Ii]  A;^ 
circumcision;  more  frequently  concretes  in  the  feminine; 
e.  g.  I  Mace.  xi.  7.  |>|a*  l\^  one  horn  free  ;  or  it  denotes; 
/3)  the  product  of  anything  ;  e.  g.  lAl^O^  L\Ci  grapes-, 
|ASiQ.a  Z;^  (/i^TTi  on  sea-weed  ;  and  tropically  |jO  Z;i  t;oice  ; 
Eom.  X.  16,  18 ;  Gral.  iv.  20 ;  and  in  the  plural.  Acts  xii. 
22  ;  7)  implements^  clothing^  lAl^iO  Z;i  napkin  ;  1>  ^^^  ^;^ 
rm^ ;  S)  descendants ^  nations^  etc.;  e.  g.  Luke  xiii.  16. 
V00IJ0I  ZjQ  the  Hebrews  ;  Matt.  xxi.  5.  ^CL»ai^  Z;£i  Jerw- 
salem,  or  its  inhabitants. 

c)  ^10  denotes  ;  a)  mostly  concretes  ;  e.  g.  Eom.  xi.  84. 
jaiii  ^is^  counselor  ;  Matt.  v.  25 ;  xiii.  28,  89 ;  II  Chron. 
xiv.  5.  Kdqu*Z  ^\iq  neighbor  ;  (3)  sometimes  nations ;  e.  g. 
]]  qSqSd  ^\iq  an  Ethiopian.     In  like  manner ; 

d)  l;So  Luke  vii.  41.  IoqJ  Ijio  debtor  ;  Ephr.  IL 
860,  C  ; 

e)  *o>  forms ;  a)  principally  concretes  of  masculine  offices 


2l0  GENDER  OF  NOUNS. 

e.  g.  II  Sam.  xviii.  1.  1a-L  *£ij  a  chiliarch  ;  Luke  xvi.  1. 
fAj^  *Q)  o/xovojxoj  ;  Heb.  iv.  14.  \  ^^000  *^j  ap;)^isplO^  ; 
I  Pet.  V.  4  ;  Luke  xix.  2  ;  ^)  abstracts  ;  e.  g.  Luke  xvi.  2. 
|ZoAjib£3   A29    o/xovo/xia.     la  like  manner  ; 

/)  ^mjS  ;  a)  concretes  of  masculine  offices;  e.g.  Luke  viii. 
41.  ]A«Q1D  %A^9  app^itfuva/w/o^  ;  John  ii.  8,  9;  Acts  ii.  29; 
I  Thess.  iv.  16 ;  /3)  more  rarely  abstracts  ;  e.  g.  Matt,  xxiii. 
6.  ]£)ZQiD  «jla9  flfpwroxa^s^pj'a.  Sometimes  it  denotes  ;  7) 
tlie  extremity  of  a  thing  ;  e.  g.  pSOQ^fiol  ^a^j  or^/?ce  o/"  ^ze 
stomach  ;    Ua.1  *aa5  aperture  of  the  mouth,     Finally  ; 

g)  LlO  denotes ;  a)  the  place  or  receptacle,  in  which  a 
thing  is  found  or  kept;  e.  g.  Acts.  xii.  17.  1  r»-CDl  A.*^ 
prison;  Matt,  xi v.  2.  jZuio  Aji^  grave;  Acts  xvii.  19. 
]iJy  Li^  judgment  hall;  Luke  xix.  29.  lA!*i  Aj^  olive  gar- 
den ;  Heb.  ix.  4.  ]V)mo  AaTS  censer  (literally,  house  of  in- 
cense); II  Tim.  iv.  13  ;  ^)  countries,  cities,  etc. ;  e.g.  Assem. 
I.  169,B.7,  X-^OCly  LMj::i  the  Boman  dominions ;  Michael. 
Chr.  10.     \ls£\ki  Lkh   Persia. 

Rem. — Here,  however,  do  not  belong  ^^OU  Ajl2  Mesopotamia^ 
and  1'  '^  LaJOi  forehead,  where  Aa.Q  signifies  between.  More 
rarely  we  find  similar  compositions  with  *2)(  father,  and  y)]  wo^A- 
«r.  Of  the  latter  only  occur  |ma9)  \1jd\  the  crown  of  the  head,  and 
|jl10)  JSOJ  hydraulics.  The  Syriac  also,  though  more  rarely  than 
the  Hebrew,  uses  the  names  of  countries  and  cities  for  nations  and 
inhabitants  ;  e.  g.  Barb.  150,  12.  cjjd*'^]  Africans  ;  248,  6. 
A^rytlZ  Tagritians. 

§  70.   Gender  of  Nouns. 
1.  Nouns  which  in  the  plural  take  the  termination   of 


GENDER  OF  NOUNS.  211 

another  gender  (§  44.  Kem.  2  and  8),  retain  the  gender  of 
the  singular,  and  in  this  case  respect  is  rarely  had  to  the 
termination.  Here  belong ;  a  )  masculines  with  a  femi- 
nine termination  in  the  plural ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xii.  43. 
•OOUD  AoA  m1d>  |Zo>Z|  place  in  which  there  is  no  water; 
I  Cor.  X.  9.  I^OOLm  ^QJ(  OjQO(  the  serpents  destroyed  them; 
VioSlI*  ( from  WIaT)  Luke  ii.  13 ;  fASooi  ( from  UdoI  ) 
Matt,  xxviii.  20;  12q£S  (from  ]cS.)  Luke  xxi.  84; 
IZoiau  (from  l>cnj)  Matt.  vii.  25,  26.,  etc. ;  h)  ferainines 
with  a  masculine  termination  ;  e.  g.  John  xi.  35.  ^2| 
^Q*^>  «^aiQlSo>  *ji001  tears  came  into  the  eyes  of  Jesus  ; 
t4^  (from  \k^)  Matt.  xiii.  30;  BSo  (from  1^^)  xxiv.35; 
liio  (from  lAlSo)  x.  30  ;  ^-lia  (from  Xtli)  Acts  xxiv.  17  ; 
^^»N*  (from  lAi*)  xix.  34.,  etc. 

2.  When  the  abstract  stands  for  the  concrete,  or  when 
the  noun  takes  another  than  its  proper  signification,  the 
gender  in  both  cases,  is  regulated  by  the  sense.  Concern- 
ing the  former  of  these  cases,  compare  §  80.  B  ;  to  the  lat- 
ter belongs  IALLd  XoYoj=  Christ;  e.  g.  John  i.  1 — 1. 
lA!i!^  looi  ^oioZul  it  ivas  the  word;  verse  14  ;  or  \xm  Zqaa* 
(literally,  beast  of  tooth)  ^^  ovrip^pjCro^,  Rev.  xiii.  1  ;  xvi.  2,13; 
xvii.  7,  8.  QiD>  a  myriad  {of  men)  ;  Acts  xxi.  20  ;  Barh. 
55,  9,  10  ;  334,  6  ;  895,  19.  Ua/,  in  the  plural,  =  inhahi- 
tants  ;  Barh.  159,  10;  236,  8  ;  548,  20.,  etc. 

3.  In  Syriac  the  neuter  of  nouns,  as  of  verbs,  is  desig- 
nated by  the  feminine    ( §  66.  2 ) ;    e,   g.   Rom.   vii.   18. 

0  0  «  "  ^ 

lA£i4  aya^ov,  |A^>«^  xaxov ;    in  the  plural,  Assem.  I.  218. 


212  NUMBER. 

B.  11.   1Z2hs»0  lAOaAlL  OiVnnl    they  despised  the  old  and 
the  new. 


§  71.  Number, 

1.  Some  nouns,  particularly  those  which,  denote  cohesive 
materials  (liquids,  metals  and  the  like),  form  a  plural  only 
when  they  may  be  conceived  of  as  consisting  of  several 
parts ;  e. g.  |Z;iflO  WZey,  plur.  |,:^CD  barley-corns;  in  like 
manner  [^  from  IA^a*  wheat ;  Matt.  iii.  12  ;  John  vi.  13  ; 
I  Cor.  XV.  87 ;  and  |m.i   o  timber  ;  I  Cor.  iii.  12. 

2.  Some  nouns  singular  have  a  plural  signification  {col- 
lectives §  44.  Kem.  7),  and  then  they  take  JRibui  §  6.  2.  As 
such  they  are  joined  either  with  the  plural ;  e.  g.  John  iv. 
30.  |mJ(  QQ2U0  there  came  out  people  ;  or  with  the  singu- 
lar ;  e.  g.  John  x.  3.  Ol-^D  }lSO»  Jll  ^/ie  5^ee^  /iear  his 
voice ;  verses 


Rem. — 1.  As  collective  plural  forms,  the  following  sometimes 
occur,  I^SQO  tocust  ;  Michael.  Chr.  63,11  ;  79,  6.  lAliO  (proper- 
ly ^r<)  remainder,  members  ;  102,  5,  8. 

Rem. — 2.  As  pluralis  excellentice,  the  Syriac  has,  merely  by  im- 

rp«7  7  ^X    »7 

itation  of  the  Hebrew  i-iJjl  or  *^0>|  =  n^^^j^  ,  Michael.  Chr.  30. 
Pf   pCU  wftJOlpO   /  swore  by  the  Lord. 


§  72.  Apposition  and  Duplication  of  Nouns, 

1.  A  noun  in  apposition,  usually  includes  a  more  accu- 
rate definition  or  explanation  of  the  previous  noun,  as  for 


APPOSITION  AND   DUPLICATION.  213 

example  in  the  names  of  cities  ,  lA^pD,  lAsj,  "jAi^^, 
Assem.  I.  349,  3.  lAoj  lAl^j!i:  ]iOOifcj1  Aniioch,  a  great 
city.  The  noAin  in  apposition  takes  the  number  and  case  of 
its  subject ;  e.  g.  Matt  x.  8.  tmak)  *uAk)  Matthew  the  Pub- 
lican ;  Barh.  82,  7.  "Ui^Qj  ^Ol!^  \^y  IpAa  the  image 
of  Baal   {of  a)  god  of  the  Babylonians  ;    11,  8;    12,    2. 

I'lM^  «^?] « n\So  ^io  from  Mekhisedech  (from  the)  Ca- 
naanite. 

Rem.  —  Sometimes  the  noun  m  apposition  stands  before  the 
principal  noun;  e.  g.  Barh.  39,  11.  JQISO'^^  V^T  »nfni 
Ae  took  for  wife  Roxane  ;  so  too  with  nouns  of  weighty  measure^ 
and  time,  in  the  genitive  ;  e.  g.  Rev.  vi.  6.  «J0Oni>1OO  lA^Z 
I  |J^QD>    ^/iree   measures   ( o/")    barley. 

2.  The  duplication  of  the  noun  denotes  ;  a)  a  ^rea^  Tzwm- 
her  or  quantity  ;  e.  g.  Ephr.  III.  154.  —ijQj  ]^'*^  Oir^  Aa| 
^^QJ  ^/iere  are  ?7za?2?/  fish  in  the  sea  ;  h)  the  distributive 
sense  expressed  in  English  bj  each,  by  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xx.  9, 10. 
p-i>  p-»j  a  penny  each ;  Barh.  85,  6.  ^^>an  ,^i«0 
by  heaps ;  424,  10 ;  165,  19.  Especially  in  respect  to 
numbers  ;  e.  g.  Mark  vi.  7.  _-»jZ  — liZ  it^'o  eac/i  ;  verse  40. 
1]Sd  IISo  a  hundred  each  ;  II  Cor.  xi.  24  ;  c)  it  forms  a 
circumlocution  for  aZ/,  every    (§  58.  B.  2) ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xxiv. 

7.  t>0>  ]oOpQ  xard  toVou?  ;  Tit.  i.  5.  iLr^  pUr^Q^ 
xara  'ToXjv  ;  c? )  a  diversity,  variety  ;  e.  g.  Mark  ii.  17, 
various   diseases ;    John   v.  4  ;    Acts   x.   46. 


«\     Ao     with   different   tongues ;     xxi.    34  ;    xxv.  19  ; 
Assem.    1.   13,    A.    6.    v.    E.     2^^^  5^>5  ^?  1]sd]Sd 

discourses  having  various  contents  ;  191,  A.  7.  v.  E  ;    280. 


214  THE   EMPHATIC   STATE. 

B.  13.  V.  E  ;     e  )  a  strengthening  of  the  sense   (§  77.  B.  b)  , 
e.g.  John  vi.  7.  ^*^wxSo  WAo  very  little  ;  II  Thess.  iiL6. 


§  73.   TJie  Emphatic  jState. 

1.  The  Emphatic  State  expresses  the  noun  with  the' 
article  with  less  definiteness,  from  the  fact,  that  in  many 
nouns  this  form  also  denotes  the  absolute  state  (§  45.  1), 
which  is  no  longer  in  use ;  e.  g.  Matt.  x.  9.  Sometimes 
also  it  supplies  the  place  of  the  indefinite  article  ;  e.  g.  John 
iv.  7.  ^'r^Q*  -So  (ZAj|  ZZ|  there  came  a  woman  of  Sa- 
maria ;  ix.  1 ;  Acts  vii.  37  ;  xi.  24;  even  with  r**  masc. 
Ih^  fern,  appended ;  e.  g.  Luke  xix.  12.  ^  ir^v\ 
a  man. 

Rem. — From  this  should  perhaps  be  distinguished  the  cases  in 

7 

which    r^  is  used  numerically  ;    e.  g.   Eph.  iv.  6. 

7 

2.  Hence  to  avoid  any  ambiguity  OOi  is  also  sometimes 
joined  with  the  emphatic  state  in  order  to  designate  it  as 
such.  It  stands  either  before  the  noun  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  ix.  33. 
|»;jsi  001    mSo   the  dumb  sjoahe  ;    John  xviii.  16  ;    or  fol- 

7       -P         7  O  1^ 

lows  it ;    e.   g.   John  v.    9.    OOl   Vr^yi  ^ClJik>*Z|  the  man 
became   whole. 

Rem. — In  the  first  case  the  absolute  state  usually  occurs, 
when  J  follows  001  ;  e.  g.  Luke  xxii.  27.  •AiQjiiDj  001 
the   servant. 

3.  Hence  also  the  emphatic  state  with  j  following  is 
used  in   the  relation   of  genitive  ;     e.   g.   Eev.   xviii.   2. 


THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  AND  THE  GENITIVE.  215 

IZlSo^  Uo5   ^?  VZ>q4jo  loljj  l2-^   a  haUiaiionof 
devils  and  a   Jiold  of  all  unclean  spirits. 


%  74.  The  Construct  State  and  the  Genitive. 

1.  In  the  Syriac  also  the  Construct  state  serves  to  denote 
the  relation  of  genitive,  more  frequently,  however,  in  the 
plural  of  the  masculine  and  the  singular  of  the  feminine, 
where  it  can  at  once  be  recognized  by  its  special  form  ;  e.f. 
Matt.  xi.  12.  ^L^Oa  JioQLi  -i  since  the  days  of  John  ; 
xni.  48.  |V>  i  wj,acQ  the  shores  of  the  sea  ;  Acts  xxiv.  16  ; 
Assem.  I.  2,  B.  1.  Vr**o  ^tS.1  Al*  ^oi  that  is  the  thirty- 
first  year  ;  37^  3,  4.  JDO;i\o  Al^SOQ  m  ^Ae  7?22ffe^  o/  ^^e 
cZeri^s  ;  40,  4  ^OCJliaiiQjiCTi  ^Or»^  ^^^^^'^  deficient  faith, 
literally,  i!Ae  deficiency  of  their  faith. 

Rem.  —  Yet  the  masculine  singular  of  the  noun  occurs  also 
before  the  genitive  in  the  construct  state  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  x.  41. 
|l£j  ^QMd  in  the  name  of  the  Prophet  ;  xiii.  2.  ]SqI  ^aCD  ^ 
on  the  shore  of  the  sea  ;  verse  50.  In  addition  to  the  nouns  which 
supply  the  place  of  adjectives  ( §  69.  2 )  it  also  occurs  in 
Qy.  midst,   and    ^-a  hand,   etc.  ;    e.  g.  Matt.  xiii.  1  ;  Gal.  iii.  19  ; 

Barh.  255.  11.   ^4m£}   O.^^   in  the  interior  of  the  palace.     Here 

belongs  moreover  the  use  of  the  construct  state  in  adjectives  and 
participles  (§  64.  1.  B),  followed  by  the  noun  with  a  preposition  or 
particle  belonging  to  both,  by  which  is  denoted  either  the  genitive 
relation  ;  e.  g.  Luke  i.  28.  |a12  Aqa;2  blessed  of  {among)  women , 
II  Tim.  iii.  3.   lAyiJ^   . »  <^v<fcVn   slaves  of  passion  ;   I  Tim.  i.  10 

ji^VOQlsD    \y2k   wipl^l   violator  of  an  oath  ;     or   a   more   accural 
15 


216  THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  AND  THE  GENITIVE. 

definition  of  the   adjective   or   participle;     e.g.   Luke   i.    V,    18. 
t00li\SjDQxO    «^^.w^  far  advanced  in  their  years  ;   Rev.  xiv.  4. 

Pk>|   ,-Lo    1 1 1  i  ni    redeemed  from  the  earth  ;  Acts,  xxiii.  23. 

2.  Far  more  usual  is  ;  a)  the  connection  of  the  emphatic 
state  as  nomen  regens^  with  a  following  y  before  the  genitive  ; 
e.  g.  Matt.  X.  5.  ]£I1a«>  ]jsj>o|jD  into  the  way  of  the  Gentiles ; 
verse  15.  p^jj  |Vnr>.o  at  the  day  of  Judgment ;  verse  42; 
xii.  42.  ^iaiZ>  lA^Vvn  the  queen  of  the  south  ;  xiii.  11,  45 ; 
xxiii.  35  ;  xxiv.  3  ;  John  viii.  47.  loTL^^j  |]So  the  icord  of 
God ;  or  h)  with  a  pleonastic  suffix  referring  to  the 
genitive  following,  ( §  55.  B.  2  ) ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xii.  8. 
]Lci»J   ai'^  Lord  of  the  Sabbath  ;  xi.2.    |»»>aV)>  .>mo  *^v 

heart  of  the   earth. 

Rem. — Rarely,  and  chiefly  in  foreign  words,  J  stands  after  the 
construct  state  before  the  genitive  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xiii.  22. 
pZoLj  %M,k\OC  ^^^^  deceitfulness  of  riches  ;  John  x.  23. 
tnV>t\»>  |d()>fD|  the  porch  of  Solomon.  But  it  is  commonly 
used  when  one  or  more  words  are  interposed  between  the  nomen 
regens  and  the  genitive  ;  e.g.  Barh.  421.13,20.  yiA»>ol9  OOl  '\Sl\ 
the  region^  that  is  of  Jerusalem ;  or  when  several  geii- 
itives    follow    each     other  ;       e.     g.     Assem.     1.     83,     B.     21. 

,i^»nrol>    I'r^r^?    U-J»'^?    loilL'    V^   L^j    Ifa? 

the  convent  of  the  Mother  of  God^  of  the  Syrians  in  the  Scythian 
desert  ;  Barh.  81,  2.  The  nomen  regens  is  sometimes  wanting,  and 
the  genitive  is  then  to  be  distinguished  by  J  ;  e.  g.  Rom.  xiv.  8. 
,-l->j  f^?  the  Lords  are  we  ;  Matt.  xxii.  21.  Sometimes  j  is 
wanting  when  the  noun  forms  an  apposition  with  a  preceding 
genitive  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xii.  39.  \jLdl  ^Q-ft?  C\L\  the  sign  of  Jonah 
the  prophet.     J    stands  before  proper  nouns,  especially   the   names 


THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  AJ^D  THE  GENITIVE.  217 

of  countries  and  cities,  when  they  thereby  acquire  a  more  de 
definite  designation  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  ii.  1,  6.  1>OOU9  ^Oil^  A^ 
Bethlehem  in  Judea.  In  some  instances,  especially  in  the  super- 
scriptions of  some  Psalms  ;  e.  g.  Ps.  iv,  v,  vi,  ^  (^  auctoris)  sup- 
plies the  place  of  J  ;  very  rarely  elsewhere  ;  e.g.  Barh.  17,  4. 
m;n)  \  p^joa  the  deliverance  of  the  (i.e.  by  the)  Lord  ;  Assera.  T. 
346,  A.  25,  26.  So  too  with  _So,  when  origin  or  descent  is  indi- 
cated ;  e.g.  Barh.  372, 16.  ]1J^'^  ^  lALi^  ^.lKr\J.  .*->rp^ 
he  took  fifty  cities  of  the  Franks  ;    or   when   there  is  indicated  a 

•  •7  7  »  7     . 

choice  or  selection  from  several ;  e.g.  271,  1.     %jiaiO(JQl  ^^  ^k>.^ 

one  of  his  slaves  ;  270,18.  Pi^JOZ  ^iD  \\jk.y^  many  of  the 
Turks. 

3.  The  genitive  is  sometimes  to  be  understood  objectively; 
e.g.  Markxi.  22.  lailLj  lAoiLcuai  faith  o/(i.  e.  in)  God  ; 
John  ii.  17.  )^Aa£3>  Olli^  ^7ze  zeal  of  (i.  Q.for)  thine  house; 
vii.  13  ;  Hebr.  xi.  26.  (»» i«V>>  CFlpCOxi  ^Tid  reproach  of 
Christ  (i.e.  ^/la^  attached  to  hirn). 

Rem.  —  Other  turns  of  expression  imitating  the  Hebrew  are 
Isa.  xvii.  2.  ;aJLO;l>  (ajQO  cities  of  {about)  Aroer  ;  Exod.xxii.lL 
)^;l0>  OlASooSb  an  oath  of  (by)  the  Lord  ;  Ez.  xxxv.  5. 
•qOI^)  \1Q,\  iniquity  of  {at)  their  downfall ;  Isa.liv.9.,  etc.  Not 
unfrequently  is  this  genitive  of  the  object  connected  with  the 
preposition  of  the  verb,  from  which  the  nomen  regens  is  derived  ; 
e.  g.  Barh.  53,  18.  i^^sQDj  |Zaiia»01  the  faith  in  our  Lord  ; 
Assem.  I.  347,20. 

4.  Sometimes,  especially  when  geographical  references  are 
made,  the  genitive  occurs  (as  in  English)  where  apposition 
would  be  more  strictly  correct;  e.  g.  Acts  vii.  40. 
— li  jij  llif  ^  from  the  land  of  Egypt ;  xx.  6  ;  Eom.  xi. 
8  •  Barh.  114,  l3.  ^i^^?  1>CL^  Ol\n\  the  whole  mountain 
of  Lebanon. 


218        DESIGNATION  AND   USE   OF  THE   OTHER  CASES. 

5.  Standing  after  adjectives,  the  genitive  is  often  used 
merely  to  define  them  more  accurately;  e.g.  Luke  xxiv.  25. 
|*^N  wifAp  aO  |1  >\)  w>,  >mi»t  Of  0  fools  and  slow  of  heart  ; 
Acts  vii.  51.  PpO  «i  i«0  o]  0  ye  stiff  necked  ;  Cant.  ii.  5. 
|ASQaa>  ZoLija  sick  for  love. 

Rem. — Sometimes  a  noun  in  the  genitive   takes  the  place   of  an 

adjective  ;    e.  g.   John,  xviii.  10.     fl  iV)i>    cnjjf    his  right  ear  ; 

xxi.  6   (§  54.  B.  2.  Rem.) ;  and  vice  versa  the  nomen  regens  ;    e.  g. 

Luke  iv.  25.     |ASLd>|  •-^•yv^O  itoXkul  %^pa»  ;  John  ii.  12.     In  the 

first  case  the  Philoxenian  translation  uses,  instead  of  J,  the  explana- 

tory  001  and  *a01,   equivalent   to    i/ia^  is,   namely  ;    e.  g.   OUj  |  ; 

I A  >  1  >  Vr> »    ^01    and   J   is   to   be  understood    as  a  relative,  when 

it   follows   prepositions   with   suffixes  ;    e.   g.   Assem.    I.   30,    17. 

(2)QO£QjLa(>    |00lSd   m7A  (them)  the  bishops.     Compare  §  55. 
B.  3. 


§  75.     Designation  and  Use  of  the  other  Cases. 

1.  The  dative  and  accusative  have  ^  for  their  common 
sign,  which  may  be  omitted  before  the  accusative  ;  e.  g. 
Matt.    xvii.  4.     ^^iSN^j^  A!LZ  ,^iU  let  us  make  three  taherna- 

■"■      x^7«p7«p  ^ 

cles  ;  Barh.  60,  9.^CU^|  |o>  (jl2)0)9  he  raised  a  great  'perse- 
cution. No  difficulty  is  thereby  occasioned  even  when 
the  two  cases  stand  together ;  e.  g.  Acts  xiii.  21. 
^\n]^\  -001^  .jOOU  he  gave  them  Saul  ;  xx.  82. 

Rem.  With  verbs  having  a  double  accusative  (§  67.  I.  2)  ^  falls 
:iway  in  both  cases.  The  same  is  also  to  be  recognized  in  the  pre- 
.,eding   pleonastic   suffix   to   the   verb     (§  55.   B.   I) .        Usuallv 


DESIGNATION  AND   USE   OF  THE   OTHER  CASES.       219 

^  (  =  ""tliS:  )  stands  before  the  noun  in  the  emphatic  state  ; 
e.  g.  Barh.  14,  9  ;  or  before  proper  names,  11,  20.  |ax.iJ^  C7ll£^ 
he  built  Nineveh.  For  this,  in  Gen.i.  1 — 3,  the  Peshito  has  Al  = 
J^^  (compare  Ephr.  I.  116,  D),  which  moreover  occurs  in  Eccl.  ii. 
3  ;  iii.  IV  ;  iv.  1  ;  viii.  9,  17 ;  Cant.  iii.  5  ;  viii.  4. 

2.  The  accusative  is  also  used  adverbially,  and  then  de- 
notes ;  a)  direction  towards  a  place  (§  67. 1,  b) ;  e.  g.  John 
vii.  14,35;  viii.14;  xviii.3  ;  Barh.58,  18,19;  6)  in  indicating 
time  it  denotes ;  a)  the  question,  How  long  ?  e.g.  Barh.7,5, 
6.  ^.kloaa  ,^iSn>|  1^4^  I^OT  the  rain  continued  forty  days  ; 
3,  15,  16.  ,^il»  1'po  ^OIqSl  qLLIU  they  mourned  for  him 
a  hundred  years  ;  24,  7,  8  ;  85, 19,  20  ;  195,  6,  7  ;  Assem.I. 
18,  A.]  ;  /3)  When  f  Luke  i.  59.  ]1i1d2>  ISdqII  Iocfi  it 
came  to  pass  on  the  eighth  day  ;  Ps.  i.  2.  (' W^  |SQSa»  hy 
day  and  night ;  c)  in  reference  to  measure  and  weight  ; 
Hoiu  long  f  How  high  ?  etc.  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  38,  19.  looi  j^j] 
^1  IALZ  it  tuas  three  cubits  long;  20,  6;  179,  18. 
^UD..   Mo  J I   —   ^aLk    U^^   the  snow  lay  four  fingers  deep; 

d)  concerning^  in  relation  to,  as  to ;  e.  g.  Barh.  37,16.  \^^im 
looi  lA^QD  he  luas  heautiful  as  to  form ;  17.  JQI] 
|VjDQl2)0  |i^:^  he  had  small  eyes  and  a  small  mouth ;  38,  4; 
Assem.  I.  74,  A.  30 ;  77,  A.  22  ;  86,  A.  25. 

Rem. — In  indicating  time,  How  old  ?  is  commonly  expressed  by 
\C^   or   L'^   with  the  addition  of  the  years  ;    e.  g.   John  viii.  57. 

I  "  I  y  7 

«i*     »^V>«.>  j«3  fifty  years  old  ;  Barh.  3,  20. 

3.  Derivative  nouns  also  take  the  accusative  instead  of 
the  genitive  of  their  verbs,  viz. ;    a)  participial  forms;  Heb, 


220  THE    CASE    ABSOLUTE. 

xii.  2.  ^ZqiSQaOI^  yjoUly*  the  finisher  of  our  faith  ;  James 
iv.6  ;  b)  infinitive  forms ;  e.g.  Kirsch.Chr.136,1.  ]]-n  m  ^ 
>mi\o<^ni  >t)^^on\  the  conquest  of  Constantinople. 

4.  The  vocative  is  distinguishable  in  part  bj  its  connection ; 
e.g.  Matt.  XXVI.  89,  42.     ti^naV)  .  |  »in|  wy  Father  if  it  he 

-    0 

2)ossible ;  Rom.  viii.  15  ;  partly  bv  o],  prefixed  ;  e.  g.  Rom. 

^      DO      7  -    P 

ii.  1.  JAJ'rO  o(  0  man  ;  verse  3  ;  I  Tim.  vi.  11 ;  James 
V.   1. 

Rem. — The  Philoxeuian  translation   imitates  in  Greek  nouns  the 

vocative  termination   belonging  to  that  language  ;    e.  g.   Luke  i.  3, 

and  Acts  i.  1.     ]]l£of2  6]'  ^  ©so'ipiXs  ;  I  Tim.  vi.20. 

5.  Finally  the  ablative  is  distinguishable  by  the  preposi- 
tions,  *o,  ^,  ^Ql,  etc..  prefixed. 

Rem. — Time,  When  ?  is  frequently  expressed  in  a  similar  man- 
ner  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  viii.  11.  [m^j  l*"^^  "^  eventide  ;  Prov.  vii.  9  ; 
Assem.  I.  37,  A.  11. 


§  76.     The  Case  Absolute. 

By  the  case  absolute  is  meant  a  noun,  which,  at  the  be- 
ginning of  a  sentence,  by  itself  and  without  connection 
with  what  follows,  forms  a  clause,  and  is  usually  to  be  ex- 
plained by  supplying,  as  to,  concerning^  and  the  like.  Here 
belong    especially  ; 

1.  the  Nominative  absolute,  which  ;  a)  either  forms  the 
subject  of  the  following  clause  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  xxii.  24. 
«^G1  »2)|  Zf^O  —  OlAO0j>0  o.nd  his  concubine  —  she  also  bore  ; 


THE    CASE    ABSOLUTE.  221 

or  b)  is  to  be  rendered  by  an  oblique  case,  wbich  a  suffix 
to  the  noun,  in  the  clause  following  shows  to  be  ;  a)  a  gen- 
itive ;  e.g.  Ephr.  I.  242,  E.  oi'^cooj  ]^»V)0  looil  p  lajj 
1  Aa.aAD  if  there  be  found  on  the  skin  of  the  body  of  a  man  a 
blemish  ;  I.  110,  D  ;  Matt.  iii.  4  ;  or  the  suffix  to  the  prepo- 
sition indicates  it  as  ;  /3)  a  dative ;  e.  g.  I  Cor.  vii.  7. 
(Gu^  ^lib  Gl}^  |i:LiGl.a  lA^OIoSo  i ■  iNo  to  each  one  is  given  a 
g'ftfrom  God  ;  Acts  xv.  21 ;  /)  an  accusative ;  e.  g.  Ephr.I. 
223,  F.  K*ouoci  |lk>  ^Lm  ^l^-^  13  —  ViqSjO  we  know  not 
what  has  befalUn  Moses ;  (§  67.  1.  c.  Eem.)  Ps.  Ixxiv.  17; 
i)  an  ablative  (with  a  following  *0  and  ^io)  ;  e.g.  Heb.  x.  1. 
.  ^^J  X^i'i  OlO  1oOl  A^f  l^^AlS^  IcDQiQJ  in  the  law  is  the 
shadow  of  the  good  things  to  come ;  Ephr.  I.  237,  A. 
]I;Sq!^   |Ld}Q£)  ou^  ^qqcdZ  V  \^\  ^^o  ;ji.sh»*  ^ 

cf  anything  leavened  and  of  honey,  bring  ye  no  gift  to  the 
Lord. 

2.  The  accusative  absolute ;  e.  g.  Gen.  xlvii.  21. 
\\Cl^  VrO  ^!iO  •QjI  ^1«  ISdiLo  the  people  led  he  (literally  led 
he  it)  from  one  city  to  the  other. 

3.  Cases     with    prepositions  ;      e.    g.     Gen.      ii.      17. 

oilib    ^QoTZ   ]]'  VAain?o'  lAni?    1A^^^?    U^V   ^ 

o/  i^e  ^ree  o/  ^Ae  knowledge  of  good  and  evil  {of  it)  shalt 
thou  not  eat. 

.  Rem. — Sometimes,  instead  of  the  suffix,  the  precedinor  noun 
absolute  is  repeated  ;  e.  g.  Esth.  vi.  1 — 9.  —  i;*^oN 
];^^^  .  >mn^><^\ir>  as  for  the  man  —  thus  let  him  be  clothed  ; 
likewise  with  the  pronoun  ;   e.  g.  Jer.  xxvii.  8. 


222  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

§  77.     Comparison  of  Adjectives, 


A.     The    Comparative. 

The  comparative  is  usually  expressed  by  the  simple  ad- 
jective,with^So  =  prce  following  and  before  the  object  com- 
pared ;  e.  g.  John  viii.  53.  tObV  ^  tS(  ^y  tS\'  ISol 
iooi;^]  art  thou^  then^  greater  than  our  father  Abraham  ;  vii. 
31 ;  xiii.  16;  xiv.  12  ;  xix.  11 ;  Assem.  I.  378,  19.  w>IdV 
|An\V>  ^^  «.kJ^  l£i4  my  onother  is  dearer  to  me  than  the 
queen  ;  872,  3.  v.  E  ;  Barh.  82,  20.  f^/.  ^OOlii)  ^O 
(ASo)  ZoOl  JQa)]  she  was  a  cubit  taller  than  any  man. 

Rem. — Besides  ^Sd,  sometimes  also  i^^  very,  or  p>A^  7nore, 
equivalent  to  by  far,  is  added  to  the  adjective  in  order  to  strengthen 
the  meaning  ;  e.  g.  Acts  xx.  35.  'r^Lk  t^OUj  ^tl  »^aiQ£Da4 
•^DlCQJ)  (la  I  ^iDhappier  by  far  is  he  who  gives  than  he  who  receives; 
Heb.  iii.  3  ;  iv.  12.  The  simple  adjective  is  used  as  a  comparative 
in  stating  the  age  of  two  persons  ;  e.  g.  Ez.  xvi.  61.  A^CQJj 
IZioi^Xd  "lAaianS  w»ai2aMi]  since  I  have  received  thy  sisters, 
the  elder  and  the  younger  ;  Barh.  27,  6,  V.  Rarely  after  the  He- 
brew idiom,  are  we  obliged  to  supply  the  comparative  adjective 
from  the  context  ;  e.  g.  Job  xi.  17;  more  frequent  is  ^iD  =  too  ; 
e.  g.  Deut.  xiv.  24.  ^mSo]  ^^llO  %u01  1]  '  jl  ^  the  way  is  too  great 
for  thee  ;  or  before  an  infinitive   with  ^'=  than  that  ;    e.  g.  Gen. 

iv.  13.     «nnaV)S  ^Sd Idh  greater  than  that  it  can  be  forgiven. 

This  construction  with  ^Ld  occurs  also  with  verbs  of  quality  ;  e.  g. 
Lam.  iv.  7.  ]r\\^t  ^  OjOmO  Kv^2  ^Ld  QaSJ  they  are  purer 
than  snow  and  whiter  than  milk.  The  adverbial  more  or  less,  in 
respect  to  numbers,  is  expressed  by  ^So  ^  Aa  and  ^^  ^ ;  Barn, 
156,  2;  Assem.  I.  414,  3. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES.  223 

B    The  Superlative. 

The  Superlative,  is  expressed;     a)  by  the  positive^  with 
the  noun  following  in  the  genitive  plural  ;  e.g.  I  Cor.  xv.9. 

\M  >\ti>  tOGDQll  the  least  of  the  Apostles  ;  or  with  *o  in- 
stead of  the  genitive;  e.  g.  Matt.ii.6.    I'OOLi)  ]^V<r^^  lUV^ 

the  least  among  the  {'princes)  towns  in  Judah  ;  or  simply  by 
the  emphatic  state  ;  e.g.  Matt.  v.l9.  I'H^  the  least  ;  Barh. 
85,  7.  K^^l?  X^y  lAl-i^  *^oi  B/jme^  the  greatest  city 
of  Italy  ;    Assem.  I.  823"  A.  20 ;    335,  A.   14.  v.  E  ;  in  the 

plural,  ICor.vi.2.   |o,.Oj  s\(i-xi({ra,  ;  II  Pet.i.4.   |C)90)  [Liytdra.-^ 

or  when  a  preference  is  given  to  one  individual  over  a 
whole  species,  by  \0  ^SsO  and  a  following  plural  ;  e.  g. 
Ephr.I.  204,  C.  ^oZ^  ^  ^  ^>  the  greatest  of  all  evils  ; 
b)  by  doubling  the  adjective  or  noun,  so  that  the  latter 
stands  in  the  relation  of  genitive  in  the  plural ;  e.g.Gen.ix.25. 

^r^l  pOl  the  meanest  slave  ;  Exod.xxvi.38.  Pau^QO  vSO^O 
the  holy  of  holies^  i.  e.   the  holiest  place  ;  Num.  iii.  32  ;  Bafh. 

530,  3,  4.     ].^^LLo  t^i  N.Sd  the  king  ofkingSy  i.e.    the  might- 

iest  ldng\     c)    by  JO.^  and  ;-»A.a   before  the  adjective  ;    e.  g. 

;n>V)  i^L.^  t^iO  the  most  precious  wood  ; 
Barh.  87,  3. 

Rem. — To  denote  the  superlative,  use  is  also  made  of  the  words 
*,aLkj  and  llib;  e.g.  Barh.  170,  13.  |ZQfiD|  ,Maj  the  most  excellent 
physician  ;  Assem.  1.  335,  B.  4,  5.  (SDaj))  |;iD  ^Ae  wo5^  w^m- 
ful ;  more  like  the  Hebrew,  by  (GIL^  ;  e.  g.  Ps.  xxxvi.  6.  f >Ql^ 
1oi!Sw  the  mountains  of  God,  i.e.  the  greatest  mountains.     In  verbs, 

I        7 

a  strengthening  is  denoted  by  « i  .■  00  much  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  56,  11. 
•.m^>Z]^«jl.Zqd  he  was  much  disquieted  ;  or,  by  J^J  many  (§  67.1. 
c.  13)  ;  e.g.  Barh.  6,  5  ;  135,  1.  To  be  noted  also  are  such  forms  as 
OiASQSLmJ,  literally,  whose  wisdom  (is  known)  for  the  wisest. 


224  CONSTRUCTION   OF   NUMERALS. 

§  78.     Construction   of  Numerals   (§  50): 

A.     Cardinal   Numbers. 

The  cardinals  from  three  upwards,  are  connected  with 
nouns  in  the  following  manner  ;  a)  the  object  numbered  pre- 
cedes the  emphatic  state  plural ;  e.g.  Luke  i.56.  TA1^2  X^^r^-^ 
three  months  ;  Barh.  133,  1 6.  ^ZjZo  ^rCQl  \^Xm  tvjenty-iwo 

years  ;  4,  5.  *aV>»>0  ^lJLd  (jlIa  ^it'O  hundred  and  five  years; 
or     6)   it  follows  in  the  absolute  state  ;    e.  g.   Matt.  x.  29. 

^r2)»  ^IjZ  /i^o   oparrows ;    xiv.    20.      ,^il  t<^QQ  ;fiQl)iC 
^6t;e/ye  baskets  ;    John  v.  5  ;  Acts  xx.  8  ;  Barh.  135,  10. 

Rem. — Exceptions  to  this  rule,  however,  occur,  tlie  object  num- 
bered standing  after  the  number  in  the  emphatic  state  ;  e.  g.  Barh. 

160,17.    YfCiL   ^■i.a!L'  IlllbZ   ei(jht  thousand  slaves  ;    121,8; 
164,  4  ;     or    the  cardinal,  though  rarely,  stands  as  nomen  regens  in 

the  construct  state  ;    e.  g.   Matt.  iv.  25.     jAl-jifSD  Z^T^l  ^e/i  cities, 

(literally,  the  ten  of  the  cities).     Some  nouns,  such  as  liOQji,  f  Al* 

also  follow   the  numeral  in  the  singular  ;  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  213,  A.  21, 

»P77  X7  77-»> 

22.  pJDCLk  fKtO  ^juSOk*  0;iQl>  ^!iD  tvhen  fifty-one  days  had  pas- 

sed;  Barh. 10,1 6.  Concerning  the  designation  of  age  by  'fd  and  L^d 

comp.  §  75.2.  Rem.;  Assem.I.  31,21  ;  377,  1  ;  Ephr.I.195,D  ;  Barh. 

50,13  ;  179,4;  with  the  omission  of  ^^JJi  ;    Barh.  5,  12.    ]]^  '^ 

•.aSQjsjO  — ^AaO  one  hundred  and  sixty  five  years  old.  For  the 
combination  of  numerals  without  any  numbered  object,  compare  § 
50;  in  respect  to  which  it  is  to  be  noticed  that,  contrary  to  the  He 
brew  usage  the  smaller  numbers  follow  the  larger  ;  e.  g.  Num.  iv. 
43;  1. Kings  V.  11.  Concerning  suffixes  to  cardinal  numbers,  see 
§  46.  2.  b.Rem. 


B.     Ordinal  Numbers. 
1.  Ordinals  are  connected  like  adjectives  with  their  nouns 

•  P.      7      7 

in  the  same  number  and  case  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xiv.  25.    |Z;4^^ 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  NUMERALS.  225 

l»  ^^?  (A.».Li^>  in  the  fourth  watch  of  the  night  ;  Kev.  iv.  7  ; 
vi.  9.  U^LiiOM  lis^  the  fifth  seal ;  verse  12  ;  xvii.  11. 

2.  The  cardinal  numbers  also  supply  the  place  of  ordinals 
as  follows  ;  a)  the  units,  especially  in  designating  time  ;  a) 
with  the  noun  standing  before  the  numeral  in  the  emphatic 

state  plural ;  e.  g.  John  xix.  14.  As  K^  ^  about  the  sixth 
hour  ;  /3)  with  the  noun  after  the  numeral,  in  the  absolute 
state  ;  e.  g.  John  iv.  6.  ^2lJi  A^  *a6oiAj>^  it  was  the  sixth 
hour  ;  verse  52 ;  Acts  iii.  1 ;  x.  9,  30 ;  but  more  especially ; 
h)  in  numbers  above  ten  with  the  noun  preceding  in  the 
construct  state  ;  e.g.  Luke  iii.  1.  liaimSa^  Sim^  in  thefif 
teenth  year  ;  Assem.  I.  2,  A.  1.  2,  v.E.  |rCQl£l»b  IILd  AiaQ 
in  the  one  hundred  and  seventeenth  year  ;  I.  8,  A.  3  7.  B.  19  ; 
888,  8 ;    889,  1,  8,  5;  407,  10  ;    or  with  j  following  in  the 

emphatic  state  ;  e.g.  Barh.  4,  16.  ]V)\s>  tal^J  lAlio  in  the 

ymr  of  the  world  one  thousand ;  or  c)  the  J  prefixed  raises  the 

cardinals  to  ordinals  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xxii.  26.    ^)^>  the  second; 

X^'LLj  the  third ;  verse  89 ;  Luke  xii.  88.  A!^Z?  o]  ^IjI^ 
the  second  or  the  third ;  especially  in  designating  the  years 
of  the  reign  of  a  sovereign;  e.  g.  Barh.  lO,  14;  11,  1 : 
86,    U. 

Rem. — Sometimes  also,  in  accordance  with  Hebrew  usage,  the 
object  numbered  is  repeated  after  the  numeral  in  the  absolute  state 

plural ;  e.g.  Gen.  vii.ll.  ^^AS  'W^D  Lm  AlAQ  in  the  six  hundredth 

year;  and  the  years  of  the  reign  are  given  with  ^o^J  with  a  suffix  ; 

e.  g.  Barh.  19,  9.  OlS/j  ^miZOAO  in  the  tenth  year  of  his  reign  ; 

60,  8.  In  giving  the  days  of  the  month,  either  ^d  without  U>Q4 
is  repeated  after  the  numeral,  before  the  name  of  the  month  ;  e.  g. 

Assem.  I.  2,  B.  12.  v.  E.  ^«li.lO  li-OaiASAo  on  the  IZtk  of  Ni- 
san(Aprii);  272,B.31  ;  399,19,20  ;  407,8,9  ;  or,  reversely,  after  the 
name  of  the  month,  before  the  numeral  following  it ;  e.  g.  397,  13, 

f'  0         -r*  9  I  7  1  .i«^ 

Old  ]1»Aq  rrA'U*  «»»;in  on  the  9th  of  June  ;   or   with   >OaxS 


226  RELATIONS   OF  NUMBERS. 

before   the  numeral  and  the  name  of  the  month  which  follows  with 

•ID  repeated  ;  e.  g.   398,  7.    ^QID  ^ja'r^O  ^,iniO  ]LciM  ^cL-Q 

on  the  2^ th  of  December  ;  274,30;  or   reversely,  so   that  y^QjkJD 
stands  after  the  name  of  the  month,  before  the  numeral ;  e.  g.   399, 

14.     OIQ  ^rO^O  ^>Z  ^Qj.i:3  »q1  «x»«pk^  on  the  22nd  of  Au- 
gust.    This  takes  place   even  in  designating  the  days  of  the  week  ; 

e.g.  Matt,  xxviii.  1.    |*^aO  h^  the  first  day  of  the  week  ;  John  xx. 
19;   Assem.  I.  2,  B.  12.  v.  E! 


C.     Other  Relations  of  Numbers. 

1.  Distnhutives  are  formed  ;  a)  by  doubling  the  cardinal 
numbers  (§  72.  2.  b) ;  e.  g.  Mark  vi.  40 ;  Barb.  19,  14 ;  h) 
sometimes  by  circumlocution  by  means  of  ^\o  ;  e.  g.  Barb. 
41,  16.  r*^  ^>2  ^5ol  two  each  ;  17. 

2.  Numerical  adverbs  ;  a)  in  answer  to  tb.e  question,  How 

many  times  f  (Multiplicatives) ;  a)  by  h^  and  *o  before  a 
cardinal  number  following,  wbicb.  more  'clearly  defines  it ; 

^9  7  7 

e.g.  Gen.  iv.  15.  fsnan  ^^  seven-fold;  Luke  viii.8;  without 
*0,  Jer.  xvii.18.  ^jL  ^  twofold  ;  /3)  by  tbe  simple  numeral 
with  *0,  Luke  xix.8.  Ilo^l^  (i.e.  1^1)  fourfold;  h)  in  answer 
to  the  question  How  often  f  a)with  the  signification  of  a  cardi- 

7  I         7 

nal,  by  means  of  ^1  time^  plaral  ^il*^1  times^  as  in  Eng- 
lish ;  e.  g.  II  Cor.  xi.  24,  25.  ^Ol  1^^  once  ;  ^^>ini  ,ttV^n 
five  times  ;  Matt,  xviii.  22  ;  Luke  xvii.  4  ;  John  xiii.  38  ; 
by  VAlil  plural  lAlQl,  Asssem.  1.  484,  27,  80 ;  sometimes 
by   .A  tirtie^  plural  ^ A;  Barb.    10,  19  ;    more  rarely  by 

11*>ol  way^  or  merely  by  the  feminine  of  the  ordinal  num- 
ber ,•  e.  g.  Gen.  iv.  24  ;     ^)   in  an  ordinal  signification,  in 

-0  7 

such  a  manner  that  either  |i^l  of  the  cardinal  precedes 
with  >,  and  is  repeated  after  it  in  the  plural ;  e.g.  AblZj  |iai 


CONNECTION  OF  THE  NOUN  WITH  ADJECTIVES.       227 

^J[5{  (also  elliptically  ASZj  U^l  or  ^^jiii  A-lIZj)  for  the 
third  time ;  or  by  adverbs  of  the  ordinals  in  Zo,  e.  g.  Jude, 
verse  12.    Loi^lfor  the  second  time. 

8.  Fractions  are  represented  ;  a)  by  special  forms  derived 
from  tiie  cardinal  numbers ;  e.  g.  Rev.  viii.  7.  ]ALo2  one- 
third;  vi.  8.    (in^O)  one  fourth;  Heb.vii.2  ;  h)  by  circumlo- 

•  c      ■*        ■»>       y 

cution  ;  e.g.  Rev.  xi.l3.  rrCQl  ^  j**  one-tenth  ;  Epbr.  1.204, 
D ;  Ez.  V.  2.  ^Qilib  AlZ  ^  lU** 


§  79.     Connection  of  the  Noun  ivith  Adjectives, 

The  adjective   is  related  to  the  noun  either  as  epithet  or 
predicate. 

I.  As  epithet  it  follows  the  noun  in  the  same  gender  and 

number  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xvii.  ].  p^>  |jQ4  an  high  mountain  ; 
xvi.  4.  IZ'H^yiO  lAa>n  lAo;*  a  wicked  and  adulterous  gener- 
(i^ibri  ;  xi.  8.  |^iO>  |AajJ  5q/if  raiment ;  John  xi.  47. 
IZul,^  1Z6Z1  mawy  miracles.  The  same  is  true  in  respect 
to  pronouns  and  participles ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xv.  8.  licji  \^  this 
people  ;  verse  12  ;  xix.  1 ;  Rev.  iii.  8.  ]aiu»A2)  ]liZ  a?i  opew 
door.  Collectives  in  the  singular  are  followed  by  the  ad- 
jective in  the  plural ;  e.  g..  Assem.  I.  78,  A.  4.  ^^4^  \^ 
IcoQku  the  people  who  hold  to  the  law  ;  so  also  with  nouns 
in  the  plural  having  a  singular  signification ;  e.  g.  John  vii. 
88.  IIa.  ]1so  living  water  ;  Heb.  x.  24  ;  or  in  the  singular 
ad  sensura ;  e.  g.  IS'um.  iv.  5.  ^SD^\Si->  Pk>I  *j^f  the  vail 
which  was  spread  out. 

Rem. — The  pronoun    frequently   comes  first ;    e.  g.   John  xi.  47. 
V;^yt  IjOT  ^A^f  7w«n  ;   Matt,  xviii.  1 :  xvii.  18.  Adjectives  are  also  used 


228       CONNECTION   OF  THE   NOUN  WITH  ADJECTIVES. 

emphatically,especially  in  titles;  e.g.  Assem.l.25,A.l4.  «^pD  pL2Q4 

5»a»'a1  the  pious Ephraem;  ll7,B.23.^LMa»  ^'fJi  \au^rO  the  holy 
John;  286,  A.  1.  If  an  adjective  is  appended  to  the  demonstrative 
pronoun  for  the  sake  of  more  particular  designation,  the  pronoun 
usually  stands  between  the  noun  and   the  adjective  ;  e.  g.   Ephr.  1 

124,E.  ^SOfQO  IrJB^I  001  IjOIQJ  this  light  first  spread  abroad; 
127,  D;  or  before  both,  132,  F.  "l^)  ]l^\V)  001  this  great  teach- 
er.— ^\o  occurs  (as  a  noun)  exclusively  before  the  noun  ;  e.g.  Matt. 
XV.  13.  (pi|  (Ao^J  ^\o  this  whole  planting,  (with  suffix,  compare 
§55.B.  2.Rem.).  A  word,  generally  a  particle,  sometimes  stands  be- 
tween  the  noun  and  the  adjective  ;  e.  g.   Acts  xvii.  20.    ;-*...  |J>So 

|A^-^QJ  strange  words  indeed.  But  very  rarely  the  adjective  fol- 
lows   in  a  gender   different  from  that  required  by  the  noun  ;    e.  g. 

Barh.  454,  18.  \m^r^  l*r*?  (fem.  lAm^r^)  the  hohj  cloister.  Or 
with  nouns  of  the  common  gender,  the  gender  of  several  adjectives 
following:  one  after  the  other,  is  interchanged  ;  e.  g.  Michael.  Chr. 
61.  1,  2^ 

2.  As  predicate  (with  the  substantive  verb  expressed  or  to 
be  supplied)  the  adjective  precedes  the  noun,  which  follows 
in  the  absolute  state,  or  with  a  suffix  ;  e.  g.  Mark  xv.  23. 
|)QSo  OlO  >4iL\*>>  l^-^  '^^^^  ^^^^  which  myrrh  was  mingled  ; 
verse  26.  1A!^  Zooi  |^Ao  as  reason  was  written  ;  Matt.xv. 
28.  tJbSZcLliCUOl  »^01  |^>  great  is  thy  faith.  In  like  manner 
the  pronoun  ;  e.  g.  Mark  xv.  26.  JjiJOOLij  pW)  QJOl  thai  is 
the  King  of  the  Jews  ;  Luke  ii.  12.  |Z|  ^QO}^  (jOl  thai  shall  he 
for  you  the  sign. 

Rem. — Sometimes  the  adjective,  as  predicate,  follows  the  noun, 
viz.:  when  several  words  follow  which  define  more  closely  the  signi- 
fication of  the  adjective;  e.  g.  Gen.  xix.  20.  t^;o  IjOl  lAa;-0 
Vr>A\  .o«v<un\  ^CH  this  city  is  nigh  to  fiee  unto  ;  or  an  adver- 
bial idea  is  embraced  in  the  preposition ;  e.  g.  Gen  xxix.  7.  ^^-iJD^ 
bQ.x.0  pDQji  it  is  yet  high  day^   i.  e.   high  in  the  day.     Sometimes 


CONNECTION  OF  THE  NOUN  WITH  THE  VERB.         229 

the  adjective  singular,  as  predicate,  stands  before  the  plural  noun  ; 
e.g.  Barh.  542,  14,  15.  |JSo  oio  *S^tO  to  that  same  were  the 
words  written  ;  or  it  follows  a  plural,  being  itself  in  the  singular  ; 
e.g.  Assem.  I.  21,5,  6.  Ol2^  ^-^-^^  (Z;..a1o10  |A^..Q£0  songs  and 
hymns  were  composed  hy  him.  But  especially  the  adjective  in  the 
plural  follows  collectives ;  e.  g.  Rev.  xix.  1.  ■  i;V>|>  |1!l..t^  falO 
a  great  multitude^  who  said ;  Barh.  88,  4.  The  predicate  is  also 
expressed  by  a  noun ;  e.  g.  I  Cor.  xii.  27.  ^»A>«Sf)>  tOAj|  G1^^ 
ye  are  the  body  of  Christ ;  Eph.  v.  30. 

3.  "When  several  nouns  of  different  genders  are  connected, 
the  adjective  as  epithet  and  predicate,  usually  conforms  to 
the  masculine  ;  e.g.  Luke  i.  5,  6.  —  VLomlS.  Oi'ZAjIo  ]Ipl 
(Ol^  ^r^  OOCJl  _a£1^)1  tOaUjZ  Zacharias  and  his  wife  Eliz- 
abeth both  feared  God  ;  verses  6,7  ;  Barh.  106,9. 

Rem. — Concerning  the  neuter  the  same  rules  prevail  as  in  §  QQ. 
2,  and  §  70.  3  ;  e.g.  Assem.  I.  36,  6.     l^LiAoj  wiOl  that  which  has 

been  written;  372,  19  ;  Ephr.  I.  241,B  ;  Barh.24,  18.  ^AjuO)  ^OlL 

he  did  that  which  was  evil. 


%  80.     Connection  of  the  Koun  with  the  Verb. 

Tlie  Yerb  conforms  in  number  and  gender  to  the  subject; 
but  to  this  there  are  many  exceptions,  which  may  be  refer- 
red to  the  following  cases.  Compare  Agrell  Comment,  de 
varieiaie  generis  et  numeriin  LL.OO.  LundcE,  1815,  4. 

A.     In  regard  to  IT  amber. 

Here  it  should  be  remarked  : 
1.  That  collectives  or  those  nouns  which  are  regarded  as 

^ ,^ .^ ^ ^,    -'^;  e.g. 

Barh.  9-4,  10.    qLq»V-CdJ2i!:1  llsbo'?  fl^x*  the  Roman  army 


230  CONNECTION  OF  THE  NOUN  WITH  THE  VERB. 

proceeded  towards  Persia  ;  96,  9  ;  ^^  ;  e.  g.  Acts  xxvi.  18. 
0001  «iV^N>  ^i^  all  who  were  with  me  ;  Michael.  Chr.  15,5  ; 
and  its  compounds,  r»»^^;e.g.Assem.I.39,3 — 5.  QoAd"|  ^m^Is 
all — wrote  ;  ^^V)\^  ;  e.g.Michael.Chr.  14,15.  O'^lj  ^^  all 
who  said;  *mjl  ^O;  e.g.Barli.277,6.  oioiZ  >ai\o>  that  everij 
one  wondered;  also  (am;  e.g.Lukexxiii.l.^OOUiio  oiXd  nVnf4 
the  vjhole  multitude  aro5e;lL.QflD;e.g.Barli.422,10.1)ytQCD  oZ] 
a  great  multitude  came  ;  Assem.I.  386,15,16  ;  JSOI;  e.g.  John 
V.  3.  (0UrO>  i''^\V^  r^^  OOCn  -jlLD)  ^^x^OlO  in  these  (pooh) 
lay  a  great  multitude  of  invalids ;  Assem.  I.  483,  19  ;  Barh. 
95,6,7;  227,8 ;  312,7  ;  lo-^';  e.g.  Barh.211,8.  01^]^-^ 
.X)*r^s2^  the  others  fled ;  342,  19.  According  to  the  same 
construction  are  names  of  places  put  for  their  inhabitants ; 
e.g.  V^Ql  cloister;  Assem.I.411,  ]^ote  B.  4 — 6.  r^—  V^^OQl 

«v    7  • 

•jiOIOOp^  when  the  monks  saw  him. 

Rem. — The  same  nouns  also  are  found  with  the  verb  singular  ;  e.g. 
UjLja,  BaTh.551,  13  ;  ^^*^  288,12,  and  its  compounds,  |»»\n  ;  e,cf. 
309,14;  ^V^\o;  e.g.  314,2  ;  ULl}  ^  or  ,«l\n;e.g.373,l;also'i^l 
e.g.Acts  xiv.4;  pDl;  e.g.Acts  v.26;Barh.  301,9,10.  In  like  manner, 
abstract  feminines  occur  for  concretes;  e.  g.  (ZojUf,  Barh.  490,  18. 
Ad'^I  IZqaj]  01^  all  men  fled  ;  l^in*  for  prisoner;  Assem.  1. 
490,  A.  31 ;  lAla^  for  inhabitants-^  e.g.Acts  xiii.44  ;  12,^  for  con- 
gregation; e.g.ICor.xiv.23.  Still  more  remarkable  is  the  construction 
of  these  nouns  in  one  and  the  same  period  with  a  singular  and  plu-i 
ral  verb ;  e.g.  IJIaJ,  Barh.212,1.  ^OlO^lO—  1]1>1  ^^Oioill  ^il 
an  army  conquered  him  and  took  him  captive  ;  »Jl3|  ^\o  e.g.  388,3, 
4  ;  Vioi;  e.g.  Acts  xxi.  36  ;  Barh.  371,  8. 

2.  Nouns  with  a  plural  form  having  a  singular  significa- 
tion  (  §  44.  Kem.  6  ),  are   either  ;     a)  in   respect  to  form 


CONNECTION  OF  THE  NOUN  WITH  THE  VERB.  23  I 

connected   with   the   plural  verb ;   e.  g.   )al,   II  Cor.   iii. 

«     0  ♦••»     7     ^  ••■V7  l>..7 

18.  lA^ii  (2)|0  i{;iVA  uncovered  face  ;  Barh.  201,  1  ;  Jjua*; 
e.g.  John  iii.lo.  J^Sl^j  III*  CJl^  ^OOOIJ  he  shall  ha,ve  eternal 
life  ;  V.26;  Barh.219,12  ;  llso;  e.g.  John  v.7.  Qi^fZZV?  |k5 
|1L^  when  the  water  was  troubled;  Barh.  194,  3  ;  268,  7,  8, 
12;  and  I  *V)»;e.g.Marki  lO.fiV^^  OOjAflOf  oupavo/  o'x'JqVsvoi; 
James  v.  18.  Trfi^  QOOU  (^iOS  6  ojpavoj  usrov  edwxsv  ;      or    h) 

more  rarely,  in  respect  to  signification,  they  are  connected 
with  the  singular  verb ;  e.  g.  Luke  xxiii.  45.  *uk.h]  ^-^i  A 
(ijZ  ^/i«  vaiY  was  rent ;  John  i.  4.  fOOl  ].■,>■><  OIQ  m  him  wub 
Zi/e;  Num.  xxxiii.  14.  }-jl-Sd  ^-^^  |oai  Aa.^  ^Aere  was  no 
water  there  ;  Luke  iii.  21.  (l^s  »a*A2)Z1  the  heaven  was  open- 
ed;  as  feminine,  II  Petr.  iii.  5.  ;>Qji;jD  ^  ZoC31  Ol.»Aal  \*!in» 
ojpavo;  '^fl'av  sx's'aXai  ;  Barh.  228.  10. 

8.  With  the  noun  plural  also  is  connected  the  verb  singu- 
lar;   a)  when  the  verb  preceding  is  use!  impersonally;   a) 

^x  .        •7  9       i.»  *     7  .7  T 

A^l  and  A^Ji. ;  e,  g.  John  vi.  9.  t  t^ri«  »aU1m  wkOiQ^  A^j 
— .&JQJ  ^9^0  |p.lCD>  he  has  five  barley-loaves  and  tioo  fishes  ; 
xxi.  25  ;  I  Cor.  xv.  40  ;  Barh.  144,  8 ;  with  looi,  John  v.  2. 
■  lOf^fiOf  jjikLQAA  OIQ  (OOl  Aj|  there  were  in  the  same  fi,ve porches  ; 
Assem.  I.  852,  18  ;  ^)  other  verbs  relating  to  persons ; 
e.  g.  Luke  ii.  18.  U^*?  it-SV^  (Zaj^**  *al.jaZl  there  ap- 
peared  many  of  the  heavenly  host ;  Barh.  124,  11.     (1*0   r^l 

1la.A  the  Arabians  made  peace;  188,  12.    -  ai^  1^>1  AaId 

there  died  four  thousand;  177,  14;  839,  9  ;  or  b)  when 
the  verb  follows  though  more  rarely  ;  a)  Ljt]  and  LjJ^ 
e.g.  Barh.  148,  10.  X>QAAiil  looi  A^t  1'^  U^Z.  Chisum 
had  five  walls  :    f3)  other  verbs  relating  to  persons ;  e.  g. 

16 


232  IN   RESPECT   TO    GENDER. 

Barb.  11-2,  ]0.  ^\|j3Zl  itvi  many  were  slain;  125,  14,15. 
jH^^S^I  (->~v-b  ^he  Arabians  chose  for  Icing  ;  190,  9.  >^\Ci 
^j  ji  -  fAlap^  since  the  inhabitants  feared  ;  298,  17  ; 
513,  3;  532,  19.* 

Rem. — Some  have  attempted  to  explain  this  singular  of  the  verb 
as  the  third  plural  pret.  defectively  written  (§  6  ;  comp.  Agrell  a.  a. 
O.p.  12,13)  ;  still  it  is  remarkable  that  one  and  the  same  author,  as 
Barhebrseus,  should  employ  interchangeably  both  ways  of  writing. 
On  the  contrary  this  construction  is  found  in  Hebrew  and  more 
frequently  in  the  Arabic  ;  and  to  both  of  these  languages,  such  a 
defective  form  of  the  3  pret.  plur.  is  unknown.  When  a  plural 
is  to  be  considered  as  distributive  {one  of  them,  or  each  one  of  them)., 
the  Syriac  uses  not  only  the  singular  but  the  plural  also,  and  marks 
this  construction  more  accurately  by  r^iw^D,  tOOUlD  ^^^  or  ^^ 
^jJ^OI;  e.g.  Barh.  434,  12.  OI>2]3 ^.^kIs  ^iT.QJOl  each  one  of 
them  went  into  his  country  ;  101,  14,  15.  r*'  i^N*^  Qil^  ^ 
tOOIlliO  each  one  of  them  had  answered. 

4.  The  dual,  whicb.  is  used  in  four  words  only,  (§  44),  is 
connected  with  the  plural  verb  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xxiv.  40. 
^oocru  ^jZ  two  shall  he  ;  xviii.  19  ;  xix.  5  ;  Barh.  165,  19. 
^OLiZjZ  wftr^O  and' they  both  brought  forth. 

Rem. — Sometimes,  also,  according  to  the  sense,  the  verb  in  the 
singular  is  found  with  ^)^  ;  e.g.  Barh.396,12.  ^'^^  Aq2)J> 
01  p**!    ^ib    that  it   should  be   called  Egypt ;  433,20.     Similar  is 

*  0  7  '^t"^T      »"• 

Barh.  121,  11.  ^;A!iO  ^ZjZ  Zj>  there  departed  two  armies. 

B.     In  respect  to  Gender. 

1.  Nouns  masculine,  singular  and  plural,  sometimes  take 
the  verb,  whether  it  precede  or  follow,  in  the  feminine 
when  they  are  masculine  in  respect  to  the  termination,  but 
not   as   to   signification    (compare   §  43.  Rem.  2,  and  §  70. 

1.  b). 


CONNECTION"  OF  THE  NOUN  WITH  THE  VERB.  233 

Kem. — It  must  be  considered  as  a  solecism  or  a  designation  of 
the  neuter  when  the  verb  feminine  is  found  with  a  noun  masculine  ; 
e.g.  Barh.527,16.  IaSsO)  iooi  p  when  it  was  evening  ;  compared 
with  Matt.  viii.  16  ;  xiv.  15  ;    or  Barh.  152,  14.   ^scL^  ^  L6(Jl 

there   arose   a   quarrel ;     compared   with   Matt,   xxvi,  5 ;      Acts 
xxiii.  10. 

2.  Feminines  take  a  verb  in  the  masculine;  a)  wiien  they 
are  feminine  merely  in  respect  to  termination  (compare  § 
70.  l.a)  ;  b)  when  abstracts  stand  for  concretes  (compare 
§  70.  2);  e.  g.  ^aaJ,  lAmaj/or  mankind;  Barh.236,8.  yji 
oA^lD  lAmaJ  1.».alL  ^minL  there  died  about  fifty  thousand 
men;  548,20;  585,14.  l2pCQl  army;  581,  12.  QmIdZ] 
|Z;nrni  ^.a^OI  these  armies  were  assembled  ;  or  (ZqmJLz)  milita- 
ry for  soldiers  ;  607,  20. 

Rem. — These  nouns  are  also  found  with  the  verb  feminine  ;  e.  g. 
Barh.  341,  10,  11.  ^iaj  ]Ial£  JCQljZ  y^  ^L^  there  died 
about  twelve  thousand  men  ;  348,  15,  16.  But  the  preceding  verb 
masculine  is  to  be  considered  as  impersonal  in  such  cases  as  Barh. 
612, 14.  |A2)|  %QQIjiZ|  there  was  occasion  given  ;  compared  with 
579,  14.  ZoCJl  lAlDj  lAal  there  was  muchAOCcasion  ;  or  606,  19, 
20.  1A-1k»>  OlZoi^  loOl  he  had  fear  ;  compared  with  136,  6. 
]^S.^  V^  lA\rr;  A^2L3  fear  fell  upon  the  king. 

3.  Sometimes  the  nonn  is  connected, in  the  same  sentence, 
with  the  masculine  and  feminine  of  the  verb  ;  not  only,  a) 
nouns  of  the  common  gender  ;  e.g.  Mark  v.  13.  U^oj  QQ^iJ 
r>Vvn  1i\ai.4  ^^Cn  these  unclean  spirits  went  out  and  entered  ; 
but  b)  such  also  as  have  a  determinate  gender ;  e.  g.  Barh. 
268,  10.  QoLmZIo  1  ff^<^^  — »auZjZ  they  both  {mother  and 
daughter)  fell  and  were  suffocated  ;  260,  11,  12. 


234  CONSTRUCTION   OF  SENTENCES. 

C.     In  respect  to  both  Gender  and  Number. 

1.  Collectives  feminine  often  take,  in  accordance  with  tlie 
meaning,  the  plural  masc.  of  the  verb ;  e.  g.  Barh.  561,  6, 
7.  0001  ^^ i n  I'rl  —  \Lam^\  the  inhabitants  had  fled  ;  Gen. 
xli.  57.  oZ|  |ij(  OU^  the  whole  people  {country)  came  ; 
Matt.  viii.  32.  olaj  —  w»OT  l^oi  dllo  this  whole  herd  — 
perished ;  Assem.  I.  53,  17.  ^a^QQ  p  IAu^Sd  Ollo  AaIoZI 
rt//  <Ae  inhabitants  {the  vjhole  city)  assembled  and  wept.  So 
too  the  names  of  cities  ;  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  51,  Note  B.  1. 
^Q^4^Ajj  Aq2U  t-kOI^Of  the  inhabitants  of  Edessa  went  out  to  be 

slain  ;  Barh.  248,  6,  7.     '|Zq.»—.».4  for  Mohammedans;  Barh. 
580,  1,  2. 

2.  With  nouns  plural  feminine,  sometimes  occur  verbs 
singular  masculine;  as  well  before  as  after  the  noun  ;  e.  g. 
Isa.  iii.  10.  tO-^Ol^  Aia  J^iu>ZZ|  the  daughters  of  Zion  are 
haughty  ;  Barh.  215,  7.  Ol^ZoTD^  ^CTl^  f^Z]  oZ/of  his 
goods  had  been  plundered;  Ephr.  II.  145,  A.  looi  JQ^Ao 
lA^^Ao  ^Olx-^  there  were  writings  composed  concerning 
them ;  Jer.  xiv.5.  .nn»0  jX-*  .  IA!^]  ^/jg  /iznJ^  ca/i^e^  and 

forsook;  Barh.  368,  11,  12  ;  10,  9.  c^OloLf^i.^ ASZ  there 
were  three  eyes. 

Rem. — Seldom  are  cases  found,  where  the  verb  singular  feminina 
stands  with  the  noun  plural  masculine  ;  e.  g.  Job  xxxix.13,  14. 
OlAlD  JclQ*  ^jlm.£1S  the  ostrich  leaveth  her  eggs. 


D.   Construction  cf  sentences  when  there  is  more  than  one  subject^ 
or  where  the  subject  is  compound. 

l.When  the  subject  of  a  sentence  is  compounded  of  a  nom- 
inative and  genitive,  the  verb  conforms  ;    a)  usually  to  the 


CONI^ECTION'  OF  THE  NOUN-  WITH  THE  VERB.        235 

nominative  ;  e  g.  Barh.  228,  7.  IjqSQ!^  ZaS>oj  AalI»Zf  there 
was  seen  the  form  of  a  pillar  ;  613,  14.  (lacaScj  |Aly« 
AiLdA#(  iAe  cr//  of  the  jwor  was  heard  ;  348,  20 ;  Z>)  the 
verb  conforms  to  the  genitive,  when  the  latter  contains  the 
principal  idea ;  e.  g.  Job  xxxii.  7.  .^'^IVo  \j^»y  IfytOflo  tJie 
multitude  of  years  shall  teach;  Barh  96,8,9.  ]Al-».pSDj  ai||..aco 
A^2U  a  great  part  of  the  city  was  destroyed,  ;  141,  10;  241, 
10,  11 ;  188,  7,  8.  OOOl  ^^^oASo  _  lAxSo  ^Sai  a  multi- 
tude of  the  dead  were  buried. 

Rem. — In  the  last  connection  ^O,  almost  always  is  found  ;  e.  g. 
Matt.  viii.  34  ;  Acts  xxi.  30  ;  I  Cor.  xiv.  23  ;  to  which  the  verb 
rarely  relates,  as  Barh.611,3.  OlAloZ  ^aOl^O  VloAaJ  all  of  his 
petitions  should  be  granted. 

2.  When  it  has  several  subjects  connected  by  and^  the 
verb  stands  as  follows  ;  A)  when  they  are  of  the  same  gen- 
der ;  fl )  in  the  plural ;  thus  a )  before  the  subjects ; 
e.  g.  John  xxi.  2.  "jiooVZo  \zi^  ^QlSoi  lr**^1  00<^  ^OOuA^f 
^^"JjAjO  there  were  together  Simon  Peter,  Thomas  and  Nathaniel; 
Barh.  19,  7.  .AlOiO  ^o{»  oNf^Zj  Saul  and  Jonathan  were 
slain ;  78,  8  ;  193,  17  ;  Assem.  I.  30,  A.  1,  2.  ^»«>in  p 
\ml£i  OlSoO  -rr><'>;  >^r>  when  the  clergy  and  the  whole  congregation 
were  assembled ;  Ephr.  1.  223,  A  ;  ^)  after  the  subjects  ; 
Exod.  xvii.  10.  rsr\rfs  jOmO  ^ojOiIo  "IsoSd  Moses,  Aaron 
and Hur,  went  up.  But  the  verb  is  also  frequently  found ;  b) 
in  the  singular  ;  a)  before  the  subjects ;  e.g.  Matt,  xxviii.  1. 
VZj>*l  5»al'^0  VAJL-^i  ^Xll'rJiO  tl^  then  came  Mary  Magda- 
lene and  the  other  Mary ;  Barh.  106,  4,  5;  121,  19  ;  159,  9; 
160  13.  1j2qSD0  llao  looi  ^/tere  arose  famine  and  pest- 
ilence ;  193,  19;  Assem.  I.  272,  A.  35,  36 ;  Ephr.  I.  216,B; 


236       CONNECTION  OF  THE  NOUN  WITH  THE   VERB. 

230,D  ;  (3)  after  the  subjects  ;  e.g.  Johiiii.2.  ^Qml  001  ^]' 
^'fOL]  *aaiO,aSn\2o  Jesus  and  his  disciples  were  invited  ; 
Barli.  111,10;  Assem.  I.  234,  A.  5.  v.  E  ;  B)  when  the  sub- 
jects are  of  different  genders,  the  verb  conforms  ;  a)  to  the 
gender  of  that  standing  nearest  to  it ;  e.  g.  Barh.  106,  9. 
^^fp  (jUO  I  rO.t  ■  I  ■  ilO  f^  when men^women  and  youth  had 
assembled  together ;  192,  10.    \Lj\yyO    pCL^    Oi\.tZ]    mountains 

and  islands  appeared  ;  195,  4  ;  or  h)  the  masculine  is  pre- 
ferred, especially  if  the  verb  follow  the  subjects;  e.g.  Barb. 
74,  12,  13.  0001  ^-iri>Ak>  oiAj^o  ^cooi^coojofi  Theodosim 
and  his  sister  were  educated ;  77,  7  ;  78,  2  ;  Ephr.I.  253,  A; 
C)  finally,  when  there  are  several  subjects,  if  the  construc- 
tion commence  with  the  singular  of  the  verb,  in  the  con- 
tinuation of  the  sentence,  the  plural  of  the  verb  is  used  ;  e.g. 
Barh.  137,  14.  QjD*1o'  ^axo'J^O  ]]iQ.I  )>ao  Gahala  and  his 
confederates  arose  and  fled ;  155,  16.  P-«>  OlZo^  *n*^1 
QO^O  (uLi^O  the  judge  and  the  elders  went  put  and  brought. 

j^EM. — The  verb  in  the  plural  also  follows,  when  several  subjects 
are  united  by  5>ai  with  ;  e.g.  Barh.  197,5,6.  ^<11  )Q2L»jCUJ  ^.O 
r>i<^  |jklDOJ>  |/r>\»  a.  when  Nicephorus  with  the  Roman  army 
returned;  72,2;  85,9.  When  there  are  two  different  subjects, 
of  which  one  is  a  pronoun  of  the  first  person,  the  verb  follows  in  the 
first  person  plural;  e.  g.  Luke  ii.  48.  J2))Q4^  ^^dOfO  p| 
..\  _>001  »^*^  lt'1-^vQD  I  and  thy  father  (we)  have  sought  thee 
with  much  sorrow  ;  Assem.  T.  173,  B.  23 — 25.  Yet  sometimes 
when  the  subjects  are  in  the  first  and  third  persons,  the  verb  is  in 
the  first  person  singular ;  e.g.  Assem.  1,  347,  28,  29.  |M^*A!iO0  \i\ 
ijkbu\  |1aJD  rAj  I  and  the  Messiah  are  (am)  one  nature. 


PECULIARITIES  RELATING  TO  NOUNS.  237 

§  81.     Peculiarities  relating  to  Nouns. 
A.    Ellipsis. 

1.  If  the  subject  of  a  sentence  would  be  repeated  in  the 
predicate,  before  a  genitive  for  the  purpose  of  defining  it 
more  accurately,  that  subject  is  omitted,  and  only  the  geni- 
tive is  used;  e.  g.  Matt.  iii.  4.  I^^ICD)  oisanL  looi  *^oioAj] 
IJSQ.*)  his  clothing  was  ( a  clothing  of)  cameCs  hair  ;  John 
V.  ZQ.  ^lA»Qa)  ^iD  ^Ojj  (ZojOl-flO  a  vntness  which  is  great- 
tr  than  that  of  John;  x.  21;  xi.  4 ;  Heb.  iii.  3;  v.  14. 
IZ;^;^  lA^QD^i  I  r*^y«?  ^0  those  who  are  of  full  age  belongs 
strong  meat ;  Col.  iii.  22. 

Rem. — This  Ellipsis  also  occurs  in  designations  of  time  and  place, 
with  fAli  ;  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  394,  6,  7.  cio  Zboij  \Lim  ^^ 
JiOAil*^  >£DOJOIJQCO  a  year  before  the  Nicene  council^  for  (Ala 
VAi*  ^^  ;  1-  11-  lAl»j  CJliAo  the  year  thereafter,  for  lAli 
VAi»>  6\Sbh  ;  Mark  xiv.  9.  IjOI  ^Z'pQg)  lpZ2>  ^iuif  ^ 
(viz  :  jZ|)  where-ever  this  my  gospel  shall  be  preached. 

2.  Sometimes  the  accusative  is  wanting  with  the  active 
verb,  when  the  object  can  be  easily  supplied  from  the  sig- 

7 

nification  of  the  verb  ;  e.  g.  'rOj  to  plough,  literally  to  drive 
(fjra  the  yoke— -plough),  I  Sam.viii.l2.  (in  full,Luke  xvii.7)  ;  ^ 
r-lLl  to  bring  forth,  Aph.  pSo")  to  beget  (U-J^),  Gren.  xvi. 
J  ;  xxx.  1;  >nffll  to  marry,  literally  to  take  (IZAjI);  Ezra. 
ix.  2,  12  (in  full,  Barh.  39,  11) ;  w*.ii1  to  cast  lots,  literally 
to  cast  (]ma  a  lot)',  I  Sam.  xiv.  42  (in  full,  Ps.  xxil  19); 
also  nouns  with  prepositions ;  ^03  to  consider,  literally  to 
lay  a  '*^^^  in  the  Heart):    Job  xxxiv.  23   (in  full,  Acts  v. 


238  ZEUGMA  AND   HENDIADYS. 

J)  to  ship^  literally  to  go,  (|Sn*n  upon  the  sea) ;  Mark  vi 
48 ;  Luke  viii.  23. 

Rem. — Here  also  seem  to  belong  impersonal  plirases  (  §  66.  1,  2) 
like  ^  ^r^,  ^  AjpD  to  which  may  be  supplied  \mSli  or 
VkiO)  ;  and  ^  .^p  to  which  may  be  supplied  (ioL*  To  Zoi-jJ 
it  is  clear,  and  Aiiaa*  it  is  dark,  it  is  forced  and  unnecessary  to 
supply  llj|  or  jAS^Q^* 

B.     Zeugma  and  Hendiadys. 

Zeugma  occurs  with  the  noun  as  well  as  with  the  verb 
(§  68.  C.  2);  e.g.  Gen.  ii.  1.  ^ooil^  Olloo  U'lo  ]1sq»  the 
heavens  and  the.  earth  and  all  their  host ;  or  Hendiadys  ; 
e.g.  Gen.  iii.  16.  >inii[)^0  «*n>np  thy  sorrow  and  thy 
conception,  i.  e.  the  sorrow  of  thy  conception  ;  Job  iv.  16. 
Cases  of  Paronomasia  are  merely  imitations  of  the  Hebrew; 
e.g.  Isa.  xxviii.  10,  13 ;  and  passages  of  accidental  asson- 
ance ;  e.g.  Barh.  102,  18.  "M^oao  W  ]rniVn  \S  not  by 
persuasion  hut  by  the  sword. 

APPENDIX. 

T^ie  Rendering  of  Composite  Greek  nouns. 

The  Syrians  render  the  Greek  composite  noun  as  well  as 
the  verb  (compare  Appendix  to  §  67)  into  their  language, 
in  the  following  manner  ;  1)  by  simple  Syriac  words  of 
like  signification  ;  e.  g.  I  Tim.  iv.  13.  ava^vwCi^  U-»^0; 
•n-apaxXyjtfjff  |Zq1Q  ;  i.  9.  a(fsl3sTs  \Ljl»J  ;  avoVioj  U-^  ;  Matt, 
xviii.  28.  tfJvtJouXo?  ]Lxd  ;  or  2)  by  writing  two  words  for 
one ;  a)  in  the  relation  of  genitive;  e.g.  Acts  ii.23.  'rtp6yvu(fig 

lAir— a  Zq1d,.qSd;  II  Tim.  iii.2.     a^apitfroi  |Zona()^  ^.^^SiD 

or    b)  by  two  nouns,  of  which  the  latter  stands  in  apposi- 


THE  RENDERING  OF  GREEK  COMPOSITE  NOUNS.       239 

tion  ;  e.g.  John  xi.l6.     trufxjxa^rjra;  aWou  •^oio,^Lm  1^  .CnK?  • 
c)     hj  a  participle  and  noun  whicli  correspond  with  the 
verb  ;     e.    g.      Acts    iv.    13.      a/pa.a/xaroi    l^sico    ^^r^   \f 
or  by  participles  and  adjectives  and  the  noun  with  ^  pre 
fixed;    e.g.   II  Pet.  iii.   16.     ^uCvo'rjroff  P-OqcqL  jzllHOL 
or     6?)  by  the  pronoun   and  verb  ;    e.  g.    I  Cor.   vii.   8 

a/afxoi  \mJ  ^001^  A^j  ^^»\»1*  If  the  composites  are  form 
ed  -from  adjectives  and  nouns  ;  3)  they  are  frequently  re 
solved  into  their  component  parts,  and  rendered  in  the  same 
manner  as  in  cases  mentioned  above  ;  a)  in  the  relation  of 
genitive;  e.  g.  Mark  xvi.  14.  (fx\y]poxoLpSia  "J^S  Za^mo; 
Col.  ii.  14.  x^ipo'/pa^ov  ^oqk»  r4»;  Matt.  xxiv.  24. 
•^/sutJo-rpotpVa*  (ZoOrOj  ja-OJ  ;  h)  by  the  noun  and  adjec- 
tive  ;  e.  g.  Phil.  ii.  3.  xsvo^olla  jQajDD  {m.2Qs  ;  II  Cor.  xi. 
13.  4'Su(^a'n'oVroXoj  |J-yi?  1*j^a-^«  ;  4 )  ^sometimes  we  can 
trace  definite  laws  of  rendering  ;  a)  nouns,  adjectives,  and 
adverbs  compounded  with  ^ag-,  take  ^^  ;  e.  g.  Luke  xi.  22. 
flravo'TrXi'a  \Lk\  CPL^  ;  xxiii.  18.  •jrajAcr'Xii&s/  ]alO  01^  ;  Sap. 
xviii.  15.  'ff'avTo^jvafjLoj  |a^So  ^i-D>  ;  h)  when  they  are  com- 
pounded with  a  privative,  the  latter  is  represented  by 
U'and  ]]j  ;  e.  g.  I  Cor.  xv.  53.  a^avatf/a  \LoLa^  }]';  Eph. 
i.  4.  a/xwfJLo?  ^C^  ]]j  ;  Matt.  iii.  12.  aa^edrog  ]aij  Un 
Finally,  in  composites  formed  with  tfOv ,  this  is  often  ren- 
dered by  5^ ;  e.  g.  Philem.  verse  23.  Cuvaip^ftaXwroV 
^ou   *^i^>  ]1^  ;     Rom.  xvi.  9.    o  Cuvsp/o^  ^m-wv  VAa 

7     7 


CHAPTEE    FOUETH. 


P  AETICLES. 


§  82.     Construction  and  union  of  Adverbs. 

1.  Besides  the  formation  of  adverbs  described  in  §  51,  is 
to  be  noticed  as  a  special  peculiarity  tbe  expressing  of  them 
by  certain  verbs,  which,  either  stand  in  the  same  tense,  num- 
ber, and  gender,  with  the  finite  verb,  with  or  without  the 
copula,  or  the  infinitive  of  the  verb  follows  with  ^^  In 
this  connection  stand  ;  a)  yS^UV  to  return^  and  *aflDO|  to  con- 
tinue^ioT once more^  farther^  again;  e.  g.  Gen.  viii.  10.  j^Ol 
uijfBO  again  he  sent  her  out ;  Ps.  Ixxi.  20.  ySi(y\L 
»jLm2)2  thou  shall  bring  me  again  ;  Job  vii.7.  %xSQ2)CnZ  U 
IijmwSqa  they  shall  no  more  see  ;  Luke  xx.  11,  12.  •£iCDo'| 
Jr»0  he  sent  again  ;  Assem.  I.  203,  A.  7,  8 ;  Gen.  iv.  2. 
,^]SfiS  AaCDol  she  bare  again  ;  Barh.  152,  3  ;  also  by  ad- 
ding  pleonastically  ^oL  again ;  Gen.  viii.  21.  »2iC00|  |J 
|l>]]  rnl\\wL  ,^oZ  /  will  no  more  curse  the  earth  ;  h) 
« a.y^rol  to  make  much^  for  very  ;  e.   g.  Barh.  9*2,  14.     »^i^fiol 


CONSTRUCTION  AND   UNION  OP  ADVERBS.  241 

7     r 

;Q-a  he  esteemed  very  much  ;  II  Cor.  viii.l6  ;  II  Kings  xxi. 
6.  auJOi}  ,nsV)\  *  i.yt  ff>]  he  did  much  evil ;  c)  ^aS«  lo 
end,f or  wholly, completely ;e.g.GeJi.x'slv.\ 6.  '^^^^^^^  ^Ol£m  ]]" 
he  had  not  yet  done  speaking ;  d)  ^^  to  precede  (always 
witliOTit  tlie  copula)  for  before ;  e.  g.  ZjSd|  b!^fO  I  have  said 
before ;  Acts  ii.  31  ;  vii.  52  ;  Rom.  iii.  9,  25;  viiL  28,30,  xi. 
35  ;  xii.  11 ;  I  Cor.  ii.  7;  Gal.  iii.  8. 

Rem. — More  according  to  the  Hebrew,  seems  to  be  the  expression 
in  Hos.  vi.  4  ;  '^O  :>oJaLDj  ll'U  (^^'n  d'l^tp^  btp)  <^  ^^^^ 
which  early  is  scattered  ;  Gen.  xxxvii.  7  ;  or  II  Kings  ii.  10. 
Z^^  A^JDol  (ii^t?b  rr^tfpil)  thou  askest  too  great  a  thiny;com- 
pare  Ephr.  I.  519,  D.  E  ;     ^^^i^Stl  ^^  II  Chron.xxvi.l5,is  expressed 

by  wkye^l  ;  compare  Jer.iv.5,and  onward.  If  the  finite  verb  already 
precede,  it  may  be  omitted  in  adverbial  usage  ;  e.  g.  I  Sam.  xx.  41. 
-  >  1  fy>|    ,-*0>    ^;2   —    QUO    they   mourned  —  but  David   the 

most. 

2.  Adverbs  like  adjectives,  are  connected  with  nouns 
and  stand  ;     a)    before  tliem  ;    e.  g.   Luke  iv.  25.     .>.itt> 

Xt^LHiDj]  many  widows ;  John  ii.  12.  IASdgL*  ^h^nfew 
days  ;  Barb.  78,  1  ;  105,  3 ;  106,  8 ;  Assem.  I.  30,  15,  21  ; 
270,  A.  6.  V.  E ;  with  words  standing  between;  284,  A.  10. 
V.  E.  ;  ^)  more  seldom  after  the  noun  ;  e.  g.  I  Cor.  v.  6. 
^5)wI!^D  lU^**  ct  little  leaven  ;  II  Chron.  ii.  9.  ]m  ■  ■  n 
-J^  much  wood  ;  Barh.  80,  16.  Zu^A^  ^  1>QJ  the  fire 
placed  under. 

Rem. — Sometimes  nouns  represent  the  adverb  by  a  following  geni- 
tive ;  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  219,  A.  ^m?  I^^^ISoV  ^^  JooiZuV 
IjqSQIO  they  had  continually  the  cloud  and  the  pillar,     Particu- 


242      INTERROGATION,    AFFIRMATION    AND   NEGATION. 

larly  should  be  noticed  ;  ^^  Vk^^CI'^  almost  ;  or  _Ld  ^^  «^<^ 
^\^^^^   >Z|  ^SjO,  %ji..ta)  partly^  etc. 

3.  The  repetition  of  the  adverb  indicates  ;  a)  a  strength- 
ening or  increase  of  the  meaning  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  vii.  19. 
»^4  •^^  ?^*^^  ready  ;  Matt.  iv.  24.  ««>n  «iiin  very  5acZ  ; 
John  vi.  7  ;  Barh.  65,  14.  ^i-i^io  ^iSnn  and  84,  17. 
jAq  )Aq  Z>?/  degrees  ;  h)  sometimes  a  diversity  is  expressed 
by  adverbs  of  place  ;  e.  g.  I  Kings  xx.  40.  )aj^O  \2l^  here 
and  there. 


%  83.     Use  of  the  Interrogation^  Affirmation^  and  Negation, 

A.  Upon  the  construction  of  the  interrogation,  it  should 
be  remarked  ; 

1.  That  the  simple  direct  question  is  distinguished  ;  a) 
either  by  being  preceded  by  an  interrogatory  pronoun  or 
particle;    e.g.  Luke xxii.27.     *^S   Qi^D  iv ho  is  the  greatest  ^ 

^       r^^   M^  what  has  he  done  to  thee  f  verse 

10.      -  >  ^  >  ^   wfc-MAaZI   \lQu\  how   were   thine   eyes   opened  f 
verse  19  ;  vii.  35  ;  Assem.  1.  33,  15 ;  179,  B.  25.     lakliV^ 

»Vm  0001  ^li^r^  whence  know  they  thisi  or  h)  by  the 
position  of  the  words  employed,  the  prominent  word  in 
forming  the  question  being  generally  placed  first  ;  e.  g. 
Matt,  xxvii.  ll.     MjOOUj  |a\V)  OOlAJf  art  thou  the  Icing  of 

the  Jews?    Assem.  I.    33,    l7.     V^^  y^  A^l   is  it   thy 
wish  f 

2.  A  question  with  U  usually  contains  an  affirmation  ;  e.g. 
John  iv.  35.  1?^*^  fif  ^iH  U^>T  >Ai^j  ^-^f  ^oAjf  l3 
say  ye   not,  that  afUr  four   months   comelh   the   harvest  ? 


INTERROGATION,  AFFIRMATION   AND   NEGATION.      243 

xviii.26  ;  but  with  ISiA  it  embraces  a  negation;  e.g. John  v. 
45.  ^Oal  XA  -yii4^  V]i  ^oAjI  ^-^nco  ^ol  believe  ye  that 
I  shall  accuse  you  ?  x.  21 ;  xviii.35  ;  or  a  doubt  ;  e.g.  Matt, 
xxvi.  22.  ^-fio  Ul  fcol  Lord  is  it  I?  John  ix.  27;  xviii.25; 
so  also  with  *xO ;  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  240,  F,  *xO  looi  \^^^ 
|a;io  »i1  iSn  vjould  this  please  God  f  Luke  xviii.  8  ;  xxiv. 
18 ;  John  vii.  85. 

Rem. — The  direct  question  is  also  found  with  ]>(  (apa),  Barh. 
131,  12  ;  with  U^  for  U^  119,  10. 

8.  The  indirect  question  is  indicated  bj  t]  =  whether  ; 
e.g.  Matt.  xxvi.  63.  loil^j  Ol'^O  l»»i«V>  OOl  bS\  /|  whether 
thou  art  the  Christ  the  son  of  God.  The  disjunctive  {whether 
— or  (uirum — an)  is  marked  by  o]  in  the  second  part ;  e.  g. 
Matt.  xi.  3.  ^L£cqSD  001  ^;>*l]'oVl2]?  OCT  OCT*^^ll  (^rt  thou 
he  who  should  come  or  shall  we  look  for  another  ?  John  ix. 
2;  Assem.  1.  87,  B.  12,  13;  377,  20,  21. 

Rem. — The  affirmation  or  negation  of  a  question  is  usually  expres- 
sed by  a  repetition  of  the  leading  verb  with  the  personal  pronoun  ; 
e.g.  Assem.  I.  375,  7.  O'^l©  —  ZJIdV?  ^'r^  *1>1V  ^oAlSC* 
L'^\y   ^r^Q-^  — 1SQ»  have  you  heard^my  brethren^  wliat  I  have 

•  7  V  «•?         «7         p..  ;«:    7 

said  ?  and  they  answered^  yes,  all  ;  10.  OSOO  -^  (J  Of  tr*^ 
.  ^\My  is  it  true  or  not  ?  and  they  answered  it  is  true,  i.  e.  yes  ; 
sometimes  by  another  verb;  e.g.Matt.xxvii.l  1.  Z;!!©*!  Li]  thou  hast 
said  it,  i.  e.  yes  ;  in  the  negative  with  the  same  repetition  ;  e.  g. 
Assem.  I.  378,  7,  11.  Sometimes  only  IJ  ==»  not,  appears  ;  e.  g. 
Assem.  I.  33,19.     w»^l  ]]  jSolo  and  he  said,  No,  my  father. 

B.  The  'negative  particles  ]]  and  oli  (and  nonne  f  )  are 
distinguished  from  A-I.S  by  this  latter  forming  the  negation 


244  PREPOSITIONS. 

to  A-»1,  and  with  nouns,  adjectives,  and  participles  (§  68. 
B.  5)  or  with  suffixes  (§  38.  2),  it  includes  the  substantive 
verb. 

Rem. —  IJ  is  repeated  in  the  latter  of  two  negative  clauses  ;  e.  g. 
I  Cor.  xi.  11,  16  (but  the  negative  sense  is  lost  when  the  parti- 
cle is  to  be  taken  affirmatively  ;  as  in  Matt.  v.  25  ;  Luke  xxi.  34). 
To  adjectives  and  participles  it  gives  a  negative  or  privative  signifi- 
cation (  =  un,  in,  -less)  ;  e.  g.  Eph.  i.  4.  ^qSd  |J  spotless  ; 
Rom.  i.  23.  ^\cu*ALd  ]]  imperishable.  Before  nouns  it  signifies 
nothing  less  than  ;  e.g.  Deut.  xxxii.21.  *»V>\  |J  nothing  less  than 
my  (God^s)  people.  Before  the  future  (equivalent  to  an  imper- 
ative) it  is  prohibitory  ;    compare  §  61.  3.  B,  and  §  62.  3.     Doub- 

led(ljO  -_  UO  or  iJo U  ),  it  signifies  neither  —  nor  ;    John  viii. 

19;  ix.  3. 


§  84.     Prepositions, 

1.  "When  prepositions  come  together,  in  many  instances  ; 
a)  the  signification  of  one  of  them  is  only  apparently  lost. 
Thus  for  example,  ^^  ;  a)  before  prepositions,  denotes 
the  direction  from  a  place  whose  position  is  more  closely 
defined  by  those  which  follow  ;  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  4G,  21. 
1,^  l^P  A.»-mZ  _1^  out  from  under  a  rock,  1.  37,19  ;  p)  after 
prepositions  it  denotes  a  removal  from  the  place  more  closely 
defined  bj  those  Avhich  precede  ;  e.  g.  Assem.  1. 54,  7. 
^LfL  —So  AmA^  •-aOloSDCD  theg  buried  him  under  the  Churth  ; 
Barh.  200,  16.  I'Alaj:^  ^  'r^il  before  the  city;  72,  19,  20; 
QQ^  13.  (jQ*  ^io  \Ok-^  from  beloiu^  (i.  e.  above)  the  walls  ; 
figuratively,  31,  17.  li!D>0>  ,0Ollo  ^  ^il^  above  all  ex- 
cellence ;  one  of  the  prepositions  is  ;  b)  merely  pleonastic  ; 
e.  g.   Eccl.  X.  14.     OljAo  ^   after  him  ;  Assem.  I.  36,  22. 


PKEPOSITIONS.  245 

j^Zoik  ^  from  thee ;  87,  1  ;  Dan. v.  24.  ^OIOSd^  -Sd  ie- 
/ore  him  ;  Barh.  65,  9.     ]a\V)S  2q1  to  ^7ie  if%. 

2.  Several  of  the  prepositions  have  a  peculiar  consecu- 
tion ;  e.g.  betwixt — arzc?  between^  ^O  —  *  *  I  ■  n;  e.g.Matt.xx.l7. 
•OOl^O  %aaiQ1  i.O  between  him  and  them ;  frequently  with- 
out the  copula,  xix.  10  ;  ^  —  AjlQ  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  60,  13. 
wiCnioy  t*r-^  ^-^  between  Ear  an  and  Edessa  ;  75,  17,18  ;  83, 

15  ;  146,  13  ;  rarely  ^  —  ^  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  60,8  ;  from— to, 
\  lSD'r:k-^;e.g.Matt.i.l7  r»0^^  fco^^  ^CT'of  ^  /ro/w 
AbroJiam  to  David;  in  more  general  (''^jsignations  also  with- 
out toA;  e.  g.  Barh.  99,  17;  105,  7. 

8.  Besides  the  cases  mentioned  in  §  65.  B.  3.  b)  preposi- 
tions are  repeated  with  several  nouns  which  follow  after  one 
another,  and  depend  upon  one  and  the  same  preposition  ; 
e.  g.  Barh.  82,  10 ;  104,  11,  13  ;  but  the  preposition  is  quite 
as  frequently  omitted  after  the  first  noun  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  6,  1 ; 
40,  12 ;  66,  6. 

Rem. — As  special,  idioms,  are  to  be  regarded  the  following  ;  o) 
*0  sottietimes  stands  for  ^  (sv  ==  s/V) ;  e.  g.  Luke  ii.  3.  looi  ^ll 
OlidjT-LQQ  -»  1^'^*^  each  went  to  his  own  city  ;  iii.  3  ;  Barh.  QQ, 

16  17  •  or  serves  to  designate  the  value  or  price  of  a  thing,  equiva- 
lent to  for  ;  Barh.  64,  6.  ^ilk)  ^»«^>»0  ^^l}^  for  tioo 
hundred  and  fifty  oholi  ;  149,  8,  9  ;  191,  1,  2  ;  193,  19  ;  h)  \ 
denotes  direction  towards  a  place  (§  67.  1.  b.  ^)  ;  with  numerals, 
with  ]SOA  preceding  =  about  to  ;  c)  Zgl^  and  ^Q-i  show,  some- 
times a  possession  in  a  physical  and  intellectual  sense  (  =  penes)  ; 
e.ff.  Job  XV.  9.  tZoik  loOl  l]j  which  stands  not  in  our  power  ;  23. 
14;  c?)  -JiO  forms  adverbs  (§  51.  3.  a)  ;  expresses  the  pronouns 
amjhody  —  some  (§  58.  B.  4,  6,7),  and  sometimes  indicates  the  di- 
rection to  a  place  ;  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  485,  28.     U^yi   ^  toward* 


24:6  CONJUNCTIONS. 

morning  ;  1.  29  ;  e)  xy^l  often  occurs  before  a  duty  or  obligation 
(§  67.  II.  4.  b)  ;  Ezra  x.  4.  It  may  also  in  respect  to  signification, 
be  considered  as  a  preposition  ;  /)  |J  J  without  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  227,5. 
IJ..J    PjO    Hr'l    \1}  without   hands  and  without  feet. 


§  85.     Conjunctions. 

The  Sjriac  language,  in  common  with  the  other  Semitic 
dialects,  is  very  deficient  in  conjunctions  ;  but  affluence  of 
periodic  diction  in  all  languages  arises  from  this  class  of 
Avords.  Hence  in  sjriac,  upon  the  one  hand,  the  periods 
are  wanting  in  variety  and  continuance  ;  and  on  the  other 
hand  the  connective  particles  which  do  exist  have  many 
significations.  In  general  the  following  may  be  observ- 
ed : 

1.  Those  conjunctions  (e.  g.  ivhen^  then)  are  frequently 
omitted,  which,  in  the  protasis  indicate  the  relation  to  the 
apodosis,  and  the  two  members  are  united  by  and  ;  e.  g. 
Gen.  xix.  23,  ^  4^0  •^^  ^iSoi  when  the  Sun  had 
arisen^  Lot  came  ;  xliv.  4. 

Rem. — Moreover  the  following  fall  away  ;  a)  O  {asyndeton)  after 
verbs  of  motion  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  ix.  7.  ^1 1  ^oi  he  arose  and  went  ; 
Barh.  25,  1;  197, 19  ;  especially  in  earnest  discourse  ;  e.  g.  I  Sam. 
XV.  6  ;  h)  oior  ;  e.g.  II  Kings  ix.  32.  ^jISoicflSD  XtULl  ^>Z 
two  or  three  eunuchs  ;  c)  J  more  in  accordance  with  Hebrew 
usage  ;  e.  g.  Isa.  1.  2.  ^mS\  L»^Q  b^L\  flV)\  wherefore  was,  I 
came,  {when  I  came),  no  one  there.  On  the  other  hand  0  is  often 
repeated  [polysyndeton)  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  51,  20.  ;— 'PdZIo  AaIdo 
|»Vr>^\  .o\mr>  ^dOO  he  died,  was  buried,  arose,  and  went  to 
heaven  ;  82,  l7;  38,  5,  6. 

2.  As   correlatives,  conjunctions   are   used   doubled  in  a 


CONJUNCTIONS.  247 

sentence  ;    a)  the  same  word  ;  e.  g.   o o  and  •^df—  »aY 

as  well — asj  both-— and ;  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  291,  A.  10,  ll,v.E; 
oX^oX either^or  ;  Barh.  112,  4  ;  223,  4,  5  ;  ^V—^l  wheth- 
er— or;  e.g.  21 7, 13;  or  6)different  words  ;  e.g.  liDOl  — j^f 
like— as;  Assem.  I.  75,  B.  ll,  13,  v.E;  374,  23,  24;  with 
J  llilil  preceding;  Ephr.I.  214,  E;  UT—  ^X  although— yet; 
e.g.  Barh.  91,  12,  13. 

o.  The  conjunctions  >  ==  that^  thereby^  or  Pj  =  thai  not^ 
are  usually  connected  with  the  future  (§  61.3.  A) ;  e.  g.  As- 
sem. I.  515,  B.32  ;  Barh.  213,  6 ;  but  in  as  far  as  they  have 
the  signification  of  since^  because^  (quod),  they  are  connected 
with  the  preterite  ;  e.g.  Matt.  ix.  8.     %2au>  loi^)]   rt^^^m 

they  praised  God,  because  he  had  given  ;  12,  41  ;  13,  11  ; 
Barh.  24,  9. 

4.  Concerning  the  use  of  particular  conjunctions,  the  fol- 
lowing may  be  noted  ; 

a)  6]  is  sometimes  used  in  comparisons  (=^  ^)  ;  e.  g. 
Matt,  xi.22  ;  xix.  24  ;  and  likewise  b)  ^]  in  comparing 
one  thing  with  another  of  the  same  species ;  e.  g.  Isa.  i.  7  ; 
Job  xxiv.  14;  Assem.  I.  75,  A.  1.  v.  E  ;  168,  B.  29  ;  with 
numerals  it  signifies  really^  about ;  Barh.104,13  ;  c)  o!^  if^ 
(  ^  T]^  sav )  denotes,  in  doubtful  cases,  the  relation  of  the 
subjunctive  ;  tf  =  Gi^  ^'  i^  cases  of  certainty,  denotes 
the  indicative,  and  also  occurs  in  indirect  questions  (§  83.3); 
it  is  negative  in  those  passages  containing  asseverations 
under  oath,  yet  only  in  those  which  are  translated, and  which, 
according  to  the  Hebrew  idiom,  are  without  any  negation ; 
with  a  negative  (1  X  )]  ]  or  ^  U  ],  it  is  affirmative(compare 
355^  and  {^*3  di^?  Gesenius  Lehrg.  p.  844)  ;  e.  g.  Cant  2.  7. 
17* 


248  CONJUNCTIONS. 

x'r^^  (\o  ^'r-i-lZ  ^1  wake  not,  rouse  not ;  d)  j  (for  the  further 
use  of  which  see  ^m-,  %  69.1 ;  73.  3  ;  §  74.  2.;  §  78.B.2) 
a)  from  particles  which  it  follows,  forms  conjunctions 
e.  g.  >  y^just  as,  Assem.  I.  34,  17  ;  so  thai,  Matt.  ii.  13 
J  Urul  just  as,  John  viii.  28  ;  Ephr.  I.  214,  E  ;  >  ^uALof 
(of  time)  as,  when,  Assem.I.  485,  15  ;  J  *jOIS  since,  because, 
Barh.  112,  7,  8  ;  160,  12  ;  >  j^,  39,7,  and  j  hlL  ^,  As- 
sem.  I.  213,  A.  25,  afterwards ;  >  OlAlk^'rO  as  soon  as,  1.218, 
27  ;  ?  fco  (of  time)  luhen,  1.485,20 ;  j  Vi^,  Barh.160,  16, 
and  >  ^\l,  158,12,  smce,hecause  ;  j  P^r^  until,  //m^, (including 
the  terminus  ad  quern),  Ephr.  II.  125,  B  ;  242,  A  ;  lio'^ 
>  »^ai^  50  w?/c/z  jJ/ia^,  Barh.193,2  ;  ?  i*0^^  ^<?/ore,150,l3  ;  /3) 
in  the  signification  of  that,  j  is  sometimes  omitted  before  the 
future  ;  e.g.  John  xxi.  3.  \i02  jo.*)  pf  Vtl]  /^o  iliail  may 
catch  fish;  after  ^1 ,  John  v.  7.  p|  |Z|  p]  yl  until  that  I 
come  ;  or  it  is  pleonastic  after  ^| ;  e.  g.  Matt.  x.  13.  OOi  J 
fZuTi  |a»>  Wiew  the  house  is  vwrthy ;  Mark  viii.  3  ;  Luke 
vi.  7  ;  John  viii.  36 ;  after  ^f,  Matt.  ix.  21 ;  ]]'q!S^  Mark 
13,  20  ;  e)  the  copula  O  also  denotes  a)  that^  especially 
after  verbs  of  sending^  entreating,  commanding,  etc  ;  e.  g. 
Assem.  I.  77,  23,  24  ;  Barh.  11,  18  ;  97,  8;  105,  1  ;  152,  5 ; 
221,2;  it  forms  ^)  the  apodosis ;  e.g.  Barh.  39,  7.8;  and 
is  y)  equivalent  to  hut  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  11,  16;  16,  9 ;  ^)  it 
sometimes  supplies  the  place  of  the  comparative  ^|  ;  e.  g. 
Job  V.  7.     Also  the  Hebrew  Qb^b^  is  translated  by  the  fre- 

7  T 

quently  occurring  ^\J^  yet,  nevertheless. 


INTERJECTIONS.  249 

§  86.     Interjections, 

1.  The  Interjection  which  denotes  an  imprecation  or  cry  of 
distress,  is  usually  connected  with  ^  following  ;    e.  g.  Eccl. 

X.  1 6.  *  i^N  i-aO  looe  to  thee  I  ii.  1  ^.  ^0^\  «^0  woe  to  you  I 
Matt,  xviii.  7 ;    xxiii.  13-16  ;    xxiv.  19  ;    Ephr.  II.  135,  E. 

1jOOI-a?  I'^SSnS   ^o  woe,   to  tJie  king  of  Judak  I     274,  1). 

|Al  .  i*^a»tASoA  fcuO  woi'  to  those  who  meditate  deceit  !  351,  0. 

^jJaOOinN  (aO ;  or  with  --^^  appended; e^g-  pO   ^^woe  to  mt! 

Ez.  XXX.  2      h^ClL^   Olo]  woe  for  the  day  !  sometimes  with 

^^  ;  e.  g.  Jer.  1.  27.     |001->.-\S   %aO  woe  to  you  I    or  ji, 

Amira  p.  449.  fjOl  jAlli^  ^!^  OlOf  looe  to  this  generation. 
Without  an  intervening  preposition,  they  are  the  usual  ex- 
pressions of  grief  and  mourning,  and  the  noun  is  then  to  be 

taken  in  the  accusative  ;  e.  g.  Judges  xi.  35.  *a2;z:3  oio] 
alas^  my  daughter  I  Rev.xviii.10,16,19. 

Rem. — Sometimes  0|  occurs  as  an  ordinary  exclamation,  with  ^ 
as  a  sign  of  the  accusative  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  333,  3,  4.     As  a  particle  of 

exclamation  sometimes  also  occurs  — u| ,  properly,  verily^  truly ; 
compare  Amira  p.  436. 

2.  Concerning  the  construction  of  particular  interjections, 
the  following  may  be  observed  : 

a)  loi  lo  !  behold^  is  frequently  pleonastic;  e.g.  Ephr.  III. 
149,  B.  ]«^<*^  |]Z  loi  12^J^  001  ^^-aDCT  IL^  the  mortal 
body  is  thus  dependent  upon  the  soul ;  or  at  the  beginning  of 
a  period  it  serves  to  give  animation  to  the  discourse  ;  e.  g. 

Ephr.III.247,C.  ^^>01  ul*;^  loi  lo  !  our  brother  (member) 
is  separat'id ;  in  designations  of  time,  like  the  Greek  ^(5ii,  it 

signifies  now^  already ;  e.   g.  Matt.  iii.  10.     ^>QjJ:q  |..;j    |ol 

[jjLk(>    Ir^^   ^*^  the  axe  is  already  laid  at  the  roots  of  the  tree  ; 

Num.  xxii.  28.     ^iin]  A^Z  loi  already  the  third  time  ;  As- 

sem.  I.  369,  30  ;  with  j  ^  following,  since  tiat:    e.g.  Acts 


250        PECULIARITIES   IN"  THE   POSITION"  OF   WORDS. 

X.  30.  Ij]  ^K?  ^  1^  since  that  I  have  fasted;  Col.  i.  4  ; 
preceded  by  11  (loi  Jj  ,  from  which  comes  Q^)  oj^s  nonnef 
e.g.Matt.v.4G.  ^r^^  1?^  *-»^  loft*^^  ^Si\  loi  |]  do  not  even  the 
publicans  the  same?  verse  47;  xiii.  27  ; 

h)  *mj>*  far  be  it,  with  ^  of  the  person  and  j  before  the  fu- 
ture  of  the  finite  verb  ;  e.g.  Matt.  xvi.  22.  *j;-!aD  ^»»^  .mxi 
IjOl  j^Jk  lOCriZj  far  be  it  from  thee,  my  lord,  that  this  should  hap- 
pen to  thee;  Assem  1.  341,  A.  30.  IoiSLq  ioaajj  ^  »ml* 
far  he  it  from  us  that  ive  should  deny  God  ;  375,  13.  Some- 
times  the   participle  follows  ;    e.  g.    Assem.  I.  51,  12,  13. 

r    X         p  •c  or 

t^'gin^  _^  *CQj^  — l>j  far  be  it  from  us  that  ive  should  deny  ; 
the  verb  follows  in  the  fnture^with  ^|  preceding  (^Qjj^  com- 
pare §  85.  4.  c) ;  e.  g.  I  Sam.  xxiv.  7  ;  or  in  the  infinitive 
vrith  ^ ;  e.  g.  Gen.  xliv.  7 ; 

c)  •-i.odi  hail!  (=  ^i-itDi^)  with  sufiix  plural,  and  the 
noun  following  with  ^,  to  which  the  preceding  suffix  relatesr 
e.g.  Matt.  V.3.  .K»a0;O  ]l.omV>\  .OOLi^o^  hail  to  the  poor 
in  spirit;  verses  4-11 ;  with  a  word  interposed;  e.g. Assem. 
I.  95,  A.  3,  6,  V.  E.  \zi^  ^QlSa»  j^S  *2)V  >»-»^Q^  hall  also  to 
thee,  Simon  Peter  ;  frequently  absolute  without  ^  ;  B.  3.  v. 
E.  ^^m  6Vwi^A.oa4  hail  to  thee  0  Sichem  ;  96,  A.  17,  19. 
— The  Hebrew  }j^5  is,  in  the  Peshito,  expressed  by  ]-J  ;  e.  g. 
I  Kinsrs  xxii.  12. 


APPENDIX. 

Peculiarities  in  the  Position  of  Words. 

In  the  position  of  words,  which,  as  in  the  Hebrew,  is  very 
easy  and  natural,  besides  the  peculiarities  referred  to  in  the 
preceding  chapters,  the  following  deviations  from  the  usual 

ooi  and  ;Sd|  are  interposed 


PECULIARITIES  IN  THE  POSITION   OF  WORDS.         25l 

between  words,  which, according  to  their  grammatical  connec- 
tion,  cannot  be  separated;  e.  g.  Exod.  vii.  7.  ;  *^  (•r>-Vo 
,^il»  1 001  ^jLLIdl  Moses  was  eighty  years  old ;  Luke  v.  3  ; 
Exod. V.  16.  OLD)}  _!^  .  »;V)|  p*l\o  and  hricks^say  they  to  u^,make 
ye.  The  same  is  true  ;  h)  of  personal  pronouns,  having  the 
signification  of  fOOl ;  e.g.John  viii.33.iO0lja(>  i>>  oilJl  we 
are  Abraham's  seed  ;  verse  37  ;  Ileb.  vii.  28.  f*<  '<*^  (fiDOSOJ 
(  r^QO  ^0^.010  |0L»  r^  001  27  Z5  <Ae  law  which  makes  priests  of 
feeble  men ;  c)  more  rarely  the  same  occurs  with  the  noun  ; 
e.  g.  Matt.  xvi.  1.  y6S{  IguIjj  U^  t-^  l^V  OlS  ^lU  they 
besought  him  that  he  would  give  them  a  sign  from  heaven  ;  d  ) 
more  frequently  it  occurs  with  particles  ;  e.  g.  Mark  i.  45. 
lAl  a,V)>>  ^Q^J  i^ui'tlL..  he  should  go  openly  into  the  city. 
Comi3are  \6l  and  IcTl  U"  (§  86.  2.  a). 


EXERCISES 


SYRIAC    GRAMMAR, 


AND 


A    CHRBSTOMATHY. 


PREPARED  WITH  REFERENCE  TO 


THE      TRANSLATION      OF 


UHLEMANN'S    SYRIAC    GRAMMAR 


BY  ENOCH  HUTCHINSON. 


NEW  YORK 

1875. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1855, 

By  E.   HUTCHINSON, 

in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  for  the  Southern  District 
of  New  York. 


PART  IV, 
INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS. 


The  following  Exercises  are  designed  for  beginners,  who 
need  something  simple,  and  at  the  same  time,  something 
which  will  lead  them  into  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the 
grammar. 

A  small  portion  of  Syriac,  perhaps  a  page,  should  be  se- 
lected and  carefully  analyzed  in  reference  to  all  the  import- 
ant phenomena  of  the  language.  Every  peculiarity  in  res- 
pect to  each  word  should  be  critically  examined.  Perhaps 
the  best  course  would  be  to  trace  one  peculiarity  throughout 
the  page,  searching  the  grammar  and  other  helps ;  then 
trace  another,  and  so  on,  until  every  peculiarity  shall  have 
been  examined.  Thus  the  most  important  facts  will  be 
strongly  impressed  upon  the  memory. 

The  great  difficulty,  especially  with  beginners,  is,  that 
they  often  attempt  to  investigate  too  many  subjects  at  once 
and  thus  do  not  obtain  clear  ideas  of  any.  There  is  fre- 
quently a  great  inclination  to  press  forward  and  translate 
rapidly.  Hence,  many  important  subjects  of  investigation 
are  entirely  neglected,  Superficial  scholarship,  is  the  un- 
avoidable result  of  such  a  course. 

That  nothing  may  escape  observation,  a  few  general  di- 
rections are  presented  to  aid  the  learner  in  making  his 
analysis.  In  mentioning  those  points,  which  arc  to  be  ex- 
amined, the  exact  order  in  which  they  occur  in  the  gram- 


25i  INTRODUCTORY     REMARKS. 

mar,  has  not  been  followed,  but  tbey  have  been  so  arranged, 
it  is  hoped,  as  best  to  facilitate  the  progress  of  the  student ; 
and  thej  are  intended  to  embrace  the  most  important  phen- 
nomena  necessary  to  be  attended  to  by  the  learner. 

Before  commencing  the  examinatioif  the  pupil  should  be 
directed  to  the  Introduction  of  the  grammar,  that  he  may 
become  somewhat  acquainted  with  the  history  and  literature 
of  the  Syriac  Language.  The  grammar  should  be  studied 
rather  as  a  book  of  reference  than  as  one,  which  must  be 
committed  to  memory.  The  student,  at  first,  should  consult 
it  as  an  aid  in  analyzing.  At  the  commencement  of  the  an- 
alysis, he  will  feel  the  need  of  assistance,  and  that  assistance 
he  must  find  in  the  grammar.  When  he  there  discovers  a 
principle  of  the  language  and  perceives  its  application  in 
parsing,  he  can  easily  retain  it  in  his  memory.  By  the 
time  that  he  has  carefully  studied  the  Exercises  and  Chres- 
tomathy  through,  he  will  not  only  have  a  considerable 
knowledge  of  the  language  ;  but  will  have  most  of  the  gram- 
mar committed  to  mem/)ry^  with  but  very  little  effort,  and 
no  loss  of  time  in  learning  rules  and  principles,  whose  ap- 
plication he  does  not  perceive,  and  which  consequently  are 
apt  to  escape  from  the  mind.  After  the  pupil,  in  the  course 
of  his  analysis,  shall  have  become  somewhat  familiar  with 
the  grammar,  he  may  recite  it  regularly  through,  and  it  will 
not  be  an  unmeaning  nor  an  uninteresting  exercise. 

The  general  divisions,  in  the  Exercises,  are  marked  by 
the  character  T,  to  distinguish  them  from  similar  divisions 
in  the  grammar  marked  §.  Smaller  divisions  are  inserted 
under  Kemarks  and  Explanations. 


GENERAL  DIRECTIONS  FOR  ANALYZING. 


I.  Find  the  Guttural  Letters  on  page  first  of  the  Chrestomathy. 
Yid.  Gram.  §  1.  Rem.  3,  4. 
II.      "      "  Aspirates f  or  on  what  letters  Kushoi  and  Rukok 

are  found.     Yid.  Gram.  §  1.  Rem.  4  ;  §  5. 
III.      '*      "  Diacritical  Points,  for  which  the  vowels  are  de- 
signed to  compensate,  formerly  used  instead  of 
Towels  and  for  other  purposes.    Yid.  §  §  2,  3,  4, 
and  Rem. 
lY.      "      "  Lmig  and  Short  Vowels.     Yid.  §  3.  Rem.  3. 
Y.      "      "  Simple  and  Mixed  syllables. 

YI.      "      "  Pure  and  Impure,  Mutalk  and  Immutable  vowels. 
Yid.  §  45.  A  ;   §  48.  A. 
YII.      "      "  Dipthongs,  Quiescent  and  Otiant  letters.     Yid.  §  3. 

Rem.  4  ;  §  13  ;  §  14.  ^ 
YIH.      "      "  Lin^ce  Marhetono,  Mehagyono  and  Sheva. 
IX.      "      "  Linea  Occultans.     Yid.  §  8. 
X.  Find  on  what  syllables  the  Toti^  is  to  be  found.     Yid.  §  9. 
XL  Examine  the  Marks  of  Punctiiation.     Yid.  §  10. 
XII.  Find  Rihui.    Yid.  §  6. 
XIII.  Read  the  Sjfriac. 
XIY.   Translate. 

XY.  Examine  the  Changes  of  Consonants — assimilated — trans- 
posed— dropped — added  and  exchanged.  Yid. 
§12. 


256  GENERAL  DIRECTIONS  FOR  ANALYZING. 

XYI.  Find  the  Changes  of  Vowels — thrown  back — exchanged — 

transposed — dropped  and  added.     Vid.  §  15. 
XVII.  Find  the  Suffixes  and  Prefixes,  Sufformatives  and  Prcfor 

matives,  Yid.  §  16  ;  §  36  ;  §  46. 
XYIII.  Parse.  In  respect  to  Verhs — ascertain  whether  they  are 
Simple  or  Compound — Their  Conjugation —  Voice — Regu- 
lar or  Irregular — Active,  Passive  or  Neuter — Number — 
Person — Gender — Mood — Tense — Conjugate  and  Injkit 
them  to  the  Case,  Mood,  Tense,  etc.,  where  they  are 

•    ioxmdi— Rule.    Yid.  §  19.,  etc.;  §  59.,  etc. 

Nouns ' —  Signification  —  Suffix  or  Prefix  —  Adjective  or 
Substantive — Derivation  and  Formation — Declension — 
Person — Number —  Gender —  State —  Case .  A^id .  §43; 
§70;  §  44;  §  n;§  45;  §73;  §U;  §46;  §47; 
§48;  §50;  §77.,  etc. 

Pronouns — What  kind — Person — Number —  Gender — 
Case— Suffix— Rule.     Yid.  §  16  ;  §  17  ;  §  54.,  ttc. 

Participles — Derivation — Active  or  Passive — Conjugation 
—Rule. 

Adverbs — Primitive  or  Derivative — What  they  qualify.  Yid. 
§  51  ;  §  82. 

Numerals — Cardinal  or  Ordinal — Gender — Decline — To 
what  they  belong. 

Propositions — Suffixes — What  they  govern.  Yid  §  52;  §  84. 

Conjunctions — ^What  kind — Suffix  or  Prefix — What  they 
connect.     Yid.  §  53.  1,  2  ;  §  85. 

Interjections — Primitive  or  Derivative.    Yid.  §  53.  3;  §  86. 


EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR. 


EXERCISE  FIRST, 


ViD.  Gram.  §  1.  Rem.  3,  4. 

H   1. 

Find  the  Gutturals  on  the  first  page  of  the  Chrestomathy. 

1.    Select  all  those  letters  which  are  ever  used  as 
Gutturals;  thus: 

loioilloilloioilloTllailloioiloilcn 
lloioi]  loil^oioilioiTljaloioioiloiA* 
loilj^lVoioiHcnoiT*^!  oijs*  Hlcjioiin 
loiloij^oini  oilaiioiloi]oi]aicn]cyil 
Hoiioilloicjiloilloillilitcjilin  01 

Ol  1  1  I  t  1  Ol» 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  The  above  are  all  guttural  letters,  but  not  all  used  as  such 
in  the  text  from  which  they  are  taken. 

h)  The  guttural  1  resembles   the  Spiritus  lenis  of  the  Greeks, 


258  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR. 

being  a  scarcely  audible  breathing  from  the  lungs.  1  has  always 
a  feeble  sound.  The  Galileans  pronounced  1  and  «ja  like  i^  of 
the  Hebrews.  An  Arabian  would  pronounce  1  as  a  sort  of  vowel 
sound  like  a.  It  is  a  kind  of  soft  breathing  (comp.  Gesenius' 
Hebrew  Grammar,  by  Conant,  §  6).  The  Greeks  express  %** 
as  well  as  \  sometimes  by  Spiritus  asper,  and  sometimes  by 
y.  Usually  «-m  is  sounded  like  M  with  a  rolling  of  the  palate. 
01  before  a  vowel  is  our  h  (Spiritus  asper);  but  when  uttered  after 
a  vowel,  it  has  nearly  the  sound  of  h  in  Korah,  perhaps  a  little 
softer,  as  in  ah !  oh !  It  is  difficult  to  ascertain  exactly  the 
sounds  of  these  letters  ;  still  it  is  important  that  the  learner  should 
fix  upon  a  definite  pronunciation  of  each. 

2.  Find  those  letters  which  are  here  used  as  gutturals. 

ciibj^oioioicTiaioioicnoiGiGioi  oi* 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Verse  3.  word  8.,  Cl  is  a  guttural,  as  it  would  in  Hebrew 
take  a  composite  sheva,  and  it  has  no  vowel  of  its  own.  (Some 
would  perhaps  prefer  to  call  01  a  regular  movable  consonant,  and 
consider  1  at  the  end  of  the  word  as  otiant,  and  O  as  quiescing 
in  — )• 

h)    Verse  3.  word  4.,  1  is  a  guttural  for  the  same  reasons. 

c)  Verse  3.  word  6.,  **  is  a  guttural  for  the  same  reasons. 

d)  Verse  4.  word  6.,  01  is  a  guttural  being  movable.  It  be- 
longs to  the  second  syllable  of  the  word,  being  preceded  by  a 
vowel  (§  15.  4.  d).     The  other  cases  may  be  similarly  explained. 

Rem. — It  should  be  remarked  that  there  are  some  other  guttural 
letters  on  the  first  page  of  the  chrestomathy,  which  should  be  con- 


EXERCISE  FIRST — QUTTURAL  LETTERS.  259 

sidered  merely  as  movable  consonants.  It  is  true  that  all  gutturals 
are  sounded,  and  might  be  said  to  be  movable  consonants  (com- 
pare Gesen.  Heb.  Gram.,  transl.  by  Conant,  §23.2).  Still  we  prefer 
to  make  a  difference  between  gutturals  and  regular  movable  con- 
sonants. The  latter,  though  guttural  letters  on  page  first,  are  the 
following  : 

3.  Find  those  guttural  letters  which  are  regular 
movable  consonants  : 

loilloioiloioillcnoiloioijajaloi 
oim^oiaj*!  Gi|aic7ijsAailcFi^aiGiailoi 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  2.,  1  is  a  regular  movable  consonant,  and 
is  sounded  nearly  like  the  vowel  — ,  and  does  not  quiesce 
in  its  vowel.  In  dialects  kindred  to  the  Hebrew,  ]  melts  in- 
to the  vowel  far  more  readily  than  the  sound  of  the  Hebrew 
;5^  melts  into  its  vowel.  Still  1  retains  its  power  as  a  movable 
consonant.  It  is  very  common  in  Syriac  for  a  guttural  let- 
ter to  take  a  long  vowel,  where  in  Hebrew,  it  would  have  a 
composite  Sheva.  This  seldom  occurs  in  Hebrew  (vid.Ges- 
enius'  Heb.  Gram,  by  Conant.  §  23.  2.  Rem.  2). 

b)  Y.  1.  w.  5.,  01  is  movable,  as  it  does  not  quiesce  and 
is  not  otiant. 

c)  Y.  1.  w.  8.,  0  (not  a  guttural)  is  movable,  as  the  pre- 
ceding letter  is  not  sounded,  and  the  following  one  is 
quiescent. 

d)  Y.  1.  w.lO.,  1  should  be  considered  as  movable  though 
its  sound  so  melts  into  the  vowel,  we  can  scarcely  perceive 
that  it  has  the  power  of  a  consonant. 


260  EXERCISES  m  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

e)  y.  1.    w.  11.,    ]  is  not  movable,  as  it  quiesces,  though 

7 

seldom,  in  —  (§  13.  1.  Rem). 

/)  Y.  1.  w.  11.,  Ol  is  movable  for  the  same  reasons  as 
others  above.  —  preceding  it,  belongs  to  the  previous  sylla- 
ble (comp.  t  5.  1.  f ;  §  15.  4.  d). 

g)  y.  3.  w.  2.,  Ol  is  movable  as  it  is  a  suffix,  and  =  ^  of 
the  Hebrew  (§  13.  Rem.). 

h)  y.  9.  w.  9.,  1  is  movable  as  it  has  a  vowel  of  its  own, 
though  it  so  flows  into  the  sound  of  the  vowel  that  it  is 
scarcely  perceptible  (T  1.  1.  b). 

Rem. — It  should  be  remarked  that  two  of  the  guttural  letters  ] 
and  01  are  sometimes  used  as  quiescents  and  sometimes  as  otiant 
letters  (§  12.  A.  B.  and  Rem.;  §  13;  §14). 


EXERCISE    SECOND. 

12. 

Find  the  Aspirates   or  in  what  letters  Kuslioi  (*jL*ao  a  hard- 
ening^  and  Rvkok  (*^0>)  a  softening  are  found. 

1.  Those  which  are  ever  aspirated  (§  1.  Rera.  3). 
joAjsruoo  jQ£i  J  A>2j2>5>o:d,.jA 

2.  Find  those,  which  are  aspirated  on  page  first 
(§5.  and  Eem.  by  Tr.). 


EXERCISE  SECOND — ASPIRATES.  261 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yersel.  wordl.,  A  is  aspirated  as  it  closes  the  syllable 
(§5.  2.  Kem.  c.  a). 

b)  Y.l.  W.2.,  A  is  aspirated  as  it  follows  an  open  or  sim- 
ple syllable  (§  5.  2.  Rem.  c.  c,  and  §  15.  4.  d). 

c)  Y.l.  W.4.,  A  is  aspirated,  because  a  letter,  which  would 
in  Hebrew,  take  a  vocal  Sheva,  precedes  it  (§  5.  2.  Rem. 
c.b). 

d)  Y.  2.  w.  4.,  s^  is  aspirated  as  the  preceding  word  ends 
with  1  (§5.  2.  Rem.a). 

e)  Y.3.  W.2.,  r  is  aspirated  as  it  follows  an  open  syllable 
(§  5.  2.  Rem.  c.  c). 

f)  Y.3.  W.4.,  o  is  aspirated  because  it  follows  a  letter 
which  would  in  Hebrew  take  a  vocal  Sheva,  (§  5.  2.  Rem. 
c.b). 

g)  Y.3.  W.4.,  r  is  aspirated  as  it  is  preceded  by  a  letter 
which  would  in  fiebrew  take  a  composite  Sheva  and  would 
of  course  be  vocal  (§5.  2.  Rem.  c.  b). 

h)  Y.3.  W.5.,  Si  is  aspirated  as  it  follows  an  open  syllable 
(§  5.  2.  Rem.  c.  c). 

i)  Y.4.  W.7.,  ?  is  aspirated  as  the  preceding  word  ends 
in  1  (§5.  2.  Rem.  a). 

k)  Y.4.  W.7.,  Ci  is  aspirated  as  it  closes  a  syllable  (§5.  2. 
Rem.  c.  a). 

Z)  Y.7.  W.4.,  >  is  aspirated  as  it  closes  a  syllable  (§  5.  2. 
Rem.  c.  a). 

m  )  Y.lO.  w.  4.,  r  is  aspirated  as  it  follows  an  open  sylla- 
ble (§  5.  2.  Rem.  c.  c). 

3.     Find  those   which   are   not   aspirated' 

EXPLANATIONS. 
a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  £i  is  not  aspirated  as  it  begins  a 
word  (§  5.  2.  Rem.  a). 

18 


262  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR 

h)  y.4.  W.I.,  d  is  not  aspirated  tliougliitis  preceded  by] 
(J5.  2.  Rem.a),  because  it  begins  a  verse. 

c)  Y.Q  W.3.,  A  is  not  aspirated  as  it  is  preceded  by  a  let- 
ter, which,  in  Hebrew,  would  not  take  a  vocal  Sheva,  and 
which  has  no  vowel  (§  5.2.  Note  by  Tr.). 

d)  For  the  pronunciation  of  these  aspirates  see  the  Alph- 
abet^ and  §  1.  Eem.  8,  4. 

Rem. — Q  when  aspirated  is  sounded  Hke  v^  and  when  not  aspira- 
ted hke  h  ;  f  like  th  in  that^  when  aspirated,  but  otherwise  like  d 
£)  when   aspirated  is  sounded  like  ph  or  /,  and  otherwise  like  p 
A   when   aspirated   like    th   in    thin^  in   other   situations   like  t 
..  is   sounded  like  g   hard   whether  it  be    aspirated    or   not  * 

O  when  aspirated  is  sounded  like  hh  or  k  with  a  rolling  of  the 
palate ;  in  other  situations  like  k.  In  general  the  aspirates  are 
pronounced  like  the  corresponding  letters  in  Hebrew  (vid.  referenc- 
es above  and  Gesenius'  Hebrew  Grammar  by  Conant,  §  6.  2.  3.  and 
Note  by  Tr.). 


EXEKOISE     THIKD. 

1    3. 

(  §  2  ;  §  3  ;  §  4  anc?  Rem). 

Find  tlie  diacritical  points  for  which  tbe  vowels 
are  designed  to  compensate,  formerly  used  instead  of 
vowels  and  for  other  purposes  : 

VA^  0010  VAik  001  li^  *j]L  looi  "Zooi  looij  looi  ooio 
looi  12]  J^  001  looi  1 2l>  looi  J\£i  looi* 


*  The  aspiration   of  ..  would   be  indicated  by  the  rolling  of  the 
palate. 


EXERCISE  THIRD — DIACRITICAL  POINTS.  263 

EXPLANATIONS. 

Rem.  1. — Diacritical  points  sometimes  mark  particular  tenses  and 
persons  of  verbs  (§  4.  Rem.). 

Rem.  2. — The  vowel  system  of  the  Syrians  began  to  be  introduced 
in  the  time  of  Mohammed.  Then  and  even  after  the  system  was 
completed  by  introducing  characters  from  the  Greek  vowels,  the 
ancient  diacritical  points  were  used  to  some  extent  by  many  writers. 
They  are  now  seen  in  the  more  ancient  writings. 

Rem.  3. — The  diacritical  points  here  presented  and  others,  appear 
in  ancient  Syriac  writings,  perhaps  from  the  fact  that  they  have 
been  copied  from  more  ancient  editions,  and  in  some  cases  doubt- 
less, directly  from  the  oldest  editions  of  the  Peshito.  The  several 
editions  have  been  copied  with  so  much  care,  that  even  after  the 
vowel  system  came  into  use,  the  diacritical  points,  which  had  been 
used  long  before,  were  copied  as  well  as  the  more  recent  vowels. 
Thus  appear  sometimes  two  characters  to  represent  one  vowel  sound. 
As  later  editions  have  appeared,  however,  those  points  have  gradu- 
ally been  omitted  and  vowels  substituted,  though,  some  remnants  of 
the  old  system  are  still  left  (§2;  §3;  §4). 

a)  Verse  1.  word  4.,  1AL»  The  diacritical  point  under  \ 
according  to  the  principles  laid  down  byLadov.  deDieu,indi- 
cates  the  vowel  — ♦  We  have  then  here  the  vowel  and  the 
ancient  diacritical  point  for  which  the  vowel  compensates 
(§4.Eem.). 

6)  y.l.  w.  5.,  0010*  The  point  under  01,  according  to 
Amira,  indicates  —  (§4.Eem.). 

c)  Y.3.  w.  2.,  *^]o*  The  point  under  wi  indicates,  ac- 
cording  to  Ludov.  de  Dieu,  the  vowel  —  (g4.  Rem.). 

d)  Y.3.  w.  3.,    looi*     Diacritical  points  are  often  placed 

under  and  over  the  radical  letters  of  verbs, sometimes  to  dis- 
tinguish particular  persons  and  sometimes  to  indicate  vowels 
(vid.  T  3.  Rem.  1).     In  the  imperative  and  infinitive  it  may- 
be wholly  omitted  or  inserted  underneath  (vid.  §4:.Rem.;  al- 
so compare  Hoffmann's  Syriac  Gram.  §14). 


264  EXERCISES  IN    SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

EXEKCISE    FOUETH. 

1    4 

Find  the  Long  and  Short  vovjels  (§  3.  Bern,  3). 
I.     Find  the  Long  ones  : 

ftpppipxx         p  p  p         I        -h         p         -n         p         p         p  OP 

'r,i>p-^'r,pi\x*,^ppp^^p^«^Of> 
^.CP'npoPTi'n  PPt>*^P0pt\0  9^ 

pii9sPP-*>r.        fiP*,P^pt<p  •^«*PI^ 

*«k  0        9         9         P         'f'        0  P  P  P         P  P  P  P         *         f         9         9  P 


EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  I.,  JL  JL  are  both  long  as  they  are  fol- 
lowed by  «u  quiescent  (§  3.  Kem.  3.  b). 

b)  y.l.  W.5.,  »±.  is  long  because  o  quiesces  in  it. 

c)  y.  1.  w.  11.,   JL  is  long  as  it  has  a  quiescent  (§13.  1. 
Rem.). 

The  other  instances  need  no  explanation. 


2.     Find  the   Short  voxels   : 


T77V77  ^^777777777  7 

77'7«^7777  777#.7 


EXERCISE  FIFTH — SIMPLE  SYLLABLES.  265 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  2.,  _L  is  sLort  as  it  is  a  regular  short 
vowel. 

b)  Y.l.  w.  10.,  ^  is  short  as  Olaph  is  movable,  not 
quiescing. 

c)  V.  3.  w.  1.,  Jl  is  short  as  it  has  not  O  quiescing  in  it 
(§3.  Rem.3). 

7 

Rem. — In  v.l.  w.2.,  —  and  several  other  short  vowels  on  page 
first,  form  dipthongs  with  O  and  ^*  These  quiescent  letters  do  not 
fully  coalesce  with  their  respective  vowels  ;  but  melt  into  them  to 
a  greater  extent  than  they  would  do  in  Hebrew,  under  similar  cir- 
cumstances. They  can  scarcely,  therefore,  be  considered  as  mov- 
able consonants,  as  they  would  be  in  Hebrew.  Still  the  vowels  in 
these  cases  are  heterogeneous  and  the  quiescents  do  not  sufficiently 
coalesce,  in  our  estimation,  to  make  the  vowels  long  (vid.  Gesen. 
Heb.  Gram,  by  Conant,  §  8.  4 ;  Uhlemann  §  1.  Rem.4). 


EXERCISE     FIFTH. 

1    5. 

Find  the  Simple  and  Mixed  Syllables  (§15.  3  and  4). 
I.  Find  the  Simple  Syllables  : 
^•^  J!{oL  Iboi  i  TA^  ooio  i  VaI  *aT  oA  Iboi  1  1  loi 
lo  H^  Ibi  ^f  oL  IcSoi  boi  So  lAl  6\  ]j  J(o\  looi  S\Ci  } 
1  loi  jb  locji  ao  il  Oj  I  iJa  fr**  So  |o  >^  f-u.  |ooi  a*oU 
J\  .iA  Qj  |joi  .ja  1  I*  ocno  qj  (jcji  ja£>  om  p  ajO  qa 
]i  ]]'  looi  1.  U  r.  'A.  n  I6i  a.  ^  oi  ]i  XIL  ml 


266  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

OJOI    \L    QJ    |301    wiOl   (a    P  0C31  lOOl  QJ  |j01    1   (J  Q-J  jjOl 

EXPLANATIONS. 

Rem, — A  simple  syllable  terminates  in  a  vowel  sound,  and  that 
vowel  sometimes  has  a  \owel  letter  quiescing  in  it.  A  mixed  syll- 
able terminates  in  one  or  more  movable  consonants.  Every  vowel 
stands  in  a  simple  syllable  when  the  following  consonant  takes  a 
vowel. 

X 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  ^\Ci  is  a  simple  syllable  as  it  ends  in  a 
vowel  sound,  althongli  it  has  a  quiescent  ;  *  has  a  vowel  of 
its  own  and  is  of  course  sounded  with  the  following  syllable 
(vid.  1  5.  1.  Eem.,  and  §  15.  4.  d). 

b)  Y.l.  W.2.,  w»]  is  simple  for  the  same  reason  as  last, 
the  syllable  ending  with  ^  and  not  with  A  (vid.  §15. 4.d). 

c)  Y.l.  W.2.,  oA  is  a  dipthong  and  should  be  considered, 
we  think,  as  a  simple  syllable  because  O  coalesces  in  the 
vowel  to  such  an  extent  that  the  syllable  ends  in  a  vowel 
sound,  though  the  coalescence  is  not  so  perfect  as  in  a  regu- 
lar case  of  quiescence.  Some  may  regard  O  as  a  movable 
consonant  as  it  would  be  in  Hebrew,  under  similar  circum- 
stances, but  we  incline  to  the  former  opinion  (vid.  ^4.  2. 
Rem. ;  Ges^.n.  Heb.Gram.  by  Conant,  §  8.4). 

d)  Y.l.  W.4.,  So  is  simple  (vid.  reference  above). 

e)  Y.l.w.  4.,  ]jt^  is  simple,  1  quiescing  in  — ♦ 

/)  Y.l.  W.5.,  OOIO  is  simple,  the  last  o  quiescmg. 

g)  Y.l.  w.lO.,  1  is  simple  as  ^  which  follows  Olaph  has 
a  vowel  of  its  own. 

h)  Y.l.  w.ll.,  (o  is  simple,  Olaph  quiescing  in  — ,  though 
it  seldom  quiesces  in  that  vowel  (vid  §13.1  Rem.  ;  compare 
1  1.  8.  e). 

i)  Y.  3.  W.2.,  Vd  is  simple,  |  quiescing  in  —  and  «.«  being 
otiant. 


EXERCISE   FIFTH — MIXED   SYLLABLES.  267 

A;)  Y.3.  W.5.,  I  is  simple  as  —  is  a  long  vowel  and  2)  be- 
longs to  the  next  syllable  (§15.4.  d). 

V)  Y.4.  w.S.,  «^A  is  a  dipthong  and  ends  in  a  vowel  sound 
as  wi  melts  into  the  vowel  to  such  an  extent  that  it  can  hard- 
ly be  considered  as  a  movable  consonant  as  it  would  be  in 
Hebrew.     We  choose  then  to  place  the  syllable  among 

siraple  ones  ;  •-i.l  in  verse  4.  word  7.,    and   •-»ol  in  verse  7. 
word  8,  are  similar  instances  (vid.T4.2.Rem. ;  To.l.c). 

m)  y.4.  W.6.,  QJ  is  simple  as  O  quiesces  in  —  making  it 
a  long  vowel,  and  01  belongs  to  the  next  syllable  (§l5.4.d). 

n)  y.7.  W.3.,  £q!^  is  simple  as  01  belongs  to  the  penult 
syllable  and  follows  a  long  vowel  (§15.4.  d.  ;  compare  ^  1. 
2.  d). 


2.     Find  the  Mixed  Syllables  : 

Ajla  ZqL  A^i  ZqL  ^      01%     'Zooi      i»Oy  oij  csL^Ci 
.001  oj        iLd  joi  jl  01 C)  \^  )>  ^  ois£*  ^  m-jj 

JOI    \>.i   lo    *-ja  ^SD   Oly  £Q-J>    JOI   ^\l    'H-yt    ^y    1-Si3? 
501     J^ril     .A-l     Olj   r-a    Oi_l      ♦ 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  A.».a  is  mixed  as  it  ends  with  a  con- 
sonant sound  (vid.  T  5.1.  Rem.). 

h)  y.l.  w.  9.,  Zal  is  mixed,  ending  in  a  consonant  sound 
(vid.  1  5.  l.Rem.). 

c)  Y.3.  W.2.,  Olr  is  mixed  as  01  =  ^  in  Hebrew  and  is  of 
course  movable  (§  l3.  Rem.). 

d)  y.7.  W.7.,  ^?  is  mixed  as  —  is  short  when  o  does 
not  quiesce  in  it,  and*  the  following  consonant  has  no  vowel 
(vid.  §I5.4,and§3.Rem.3). 


268  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR. 


EXEKCISE    SIXTH. 

1    6. 

Find  the    Pure^   Impure^    Mutable    and  Immutable    voiveh 
(§45.^;    §48.  A). 

1.     Find  tlie  Pure  vowels  : 

0fitkitr'nyv7r7P'r>77fytt7e 


EXPLANATIONS. 

Rem.  a  pure  vowel,  is  one  with  which  no  consonant  colesces. 
An  impure  vowel  is  one  with  which  a  consonant  coalesces. 

7  7.      ^ 

a)  Verse  1.  word  2.,  —  is  pure*  as  the  syllable  oA  is  a 
dipthong  (vid.  §  3.  Kem.  4 ;  also  Palfrey's  Gram.  §  2),  and  O 
does  not  fully  quiesce  in  »!_,  though  it  so  far  coalesces  that 
it  can  hardly  be  considered  as  a  movable  consonant.  Still 
as  the  vowel  is  a  heterogeneous  one  and  O  does  not  fully 
coalesce  in  it,  we  scarcely  feel  authorized  to  place  the  vowel 
among  the  impure  ones,  though  some  may  prefer  to  do  so, 
(vid.  T"  4.  2.  Eem. ;  T  5. 1.  c.  and  1 ;  Gesenius'  Heb.  Gram- 
mar by  Conant,  §  8.4  ;  compare  §15.  4.  d;  also  T  6.2.  Rem., 
and  T' 6.1. Rem. V 

b)  Y.l.  W.9.,  —  is  pure  as  o  does  not  quiesce  in  it,  being 
a  movable  consonant  and  ^  preceding  being  pronounced 
with  a  vocal  sheva. 

*  It  is  also      mutable  (  ^  6.  4;  b  ). 


EXERCISE  SIXTH — IMPURE  VOWELS.  269 

•  c)  Y.l.  w.  10.,  —  is  pure  as  Olapli  does  not  quiesce  in 
that  vowel.  Olapb.  is  here  a  movable  consonant  according 
to  the  analogy  of  the  Hebrew  (vid.§l.  Rem.4.;also  Gesenius* 
Heb.  Gram,  by  Conant,  §23.2). 

d)  Y,3.  W.5.,  —  (the  first  one)  is  pure  f  as  1  being  a 
movable  consonant  does  not  quiesce  in  _L  (vid.  last  referen- 
ces). 

e)  Y.3.  W.7.,  —  is  pure  as  O  is  movable,  cri  being  sound- 
ed as  if  it  had  Sheva,  and  forming  a  part  of  the  syllable. 

/)  y.3.  W.9.,  —  is  pure  and  immutable  as  01  does  not 
quiesce  in  it,  being  a  guttural   (comp.  Tf  I.  2.  a). 

g)  Y.4.  W.5.,  —  is  pure  as  wiA  is  a  dipthong  (vid.  a 
above). 

h)  Y.7.  W.3.,  —  is  pure  as  Ol  is  a  guttural. 

i)  Y.7.  W.9.,  —  is  pure  as  Ol  is  =  ^  in  Hebrew  and  is  of 
course  a  movable  consonant  (vid.  §  13.Eem.  JL  is  also  mu- 
table according  to  the  general  rule  (T6.  2.  Eem.). 


2.    Find  the  Impure  vowels  : 


9«vPP«^px!>i»«>P  p-nppOPP^O 


EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  —  and  —  are  both  impure  vowels 
as  they  have  «j>  quiescing  in  them. 

f  j»_  is  also  immutable  (  ^  6.  4  ). 


270  EXERCISES   IX   SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

/•)  V.l.  W.3.,  —  is  impure  as  1  quiesces  in  it  (compare  T 
6.  1.  e). 

V 

c)  V.l.  w.ll.,  —  is  impure  asOlaph  quiesces  init,thougli 
it  does  not  often  quiesce  in  that  vowel  (  §  13.  1  and  Rem.). 
The  other  cases  are  similarly  explained. 

Rem. — As  a  general  thing,  those  vowels,  which  are  pure  are  mut- 
able and  those  which  are  impure  are  immutable  ;  but  there  are  as 
in  Hebrew  many  exceptions  (vid.^  6. 1.  a.  b.  c.  d.  e.  f.  g.  h.  i). 


3.     Find   the   Mutable   vowels  (compare  1"  6.  2 
Rem.)  : 


»—   '  ——   ^i—  — _  _ —  .^_ _  ^ 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  10.,  —  is  mutable  (also  pure,  according 
to  the  general  rule  (vid.  ^  6. 1.  c )  as  it  is  in  a  simple  sylla- 
ble (compare  T  6.  4.  d). 

b)  Y.S.  W.2.,  ■ —  is  mutable  as  it  has  no  quiescent  and  is 
long. 

c)  V.4.  \v.2.,  —  is  mutable  as  it  is  in  a  simple  sylla- 
ble. 


4.     Find   the  Im7nutaUe  vowels  : 


I, 

Jl, 

I 

o 

* 

0 

^ 

JL 

0 

I 

p 

p 

0 

1_ 

_ 

p 

p 

X 

P           ♦. 

r, 

0 

0 

I 

p 

X 

p 

p 

P 

«^ 

X 

P 

p 

p 

f> 

p 

P            7 

9 

0 

- 

I 

^ 

^ 

r 

p 

p 

4^ 

»> 

P 

•X 

p 

7 

7 

•X            P 

0 

p 

7 

P 

0 

■» 

0 

p 

•X 

P 

p 

P 

p 

p 

«^ 

P 

7          7 

«^ 

" 

9 

I 

9 

«v 

p 

p 

r 

7 

«v 

0 

I 

p 

j;_ 

_-_ 

_L-1 

EXERCISE  SEVENTH — DIPTHONGS.  271 


PPP  P0900I0C0P 


EXPL  A.NATIONS. 

Rem. — Those  vowels  are  immutable,as  in  Hebrew ;  in  which  either 
a  vowel  letter  quiesces;  or  from  which  a  vowel  letter  has  fallen  away; 
short  vowels  in  mixed  syllables  which  would  inHebrew  takeDaghesh 
forte;  and  vowels  immutable  by  nature. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1., are  both  immutable  as  well  as 

impure,  having  quiescents. 

b)  y.l.  W.2.,  —  is  in  a  simple  syllable,  is  pure,  and  cannot 
properly  be  considered  as  immutable  though  O  coalesces 
with  it  to  some  extent  (vid.  T"4.2.Ilem. ;  T5.1.c;  TfG.l.a). 

t» 

c)  Y.I.W.4.,   —  over  So  is  immutable  by  position  as 

li\i^  is  derived  from  Wd  a     ^1L  verb,  and  the  i^  is  in 

reality  doubled  and  the  first  would,  if  expressed,  take  Linea 
occultans.  This  is  similar  to  Daghesh  forte  in  Hebrew,  and 
makes,  as  in  that  language,  the  preceding  vowel  impure  and 
immutable  (compare  §48.B.Feminines), 

d)  Y.l.  w.lO.,  —  is  short  but  in  a  simple  syllable  (  To. 

1 .  g)  and  consequently  not  immutable. 

e)  Y.l.  w.lO.,  —  (the  first  one)  is  immutable  by  nature 
(48.  A.  Masculines) ;  it  is  sometimes,  however,  like  all  the 
other  vowels,  mutable  (vid.g  15.1.b ;  §  45.2.b)  as  in  Hebrew 
(vid.  Stuarts'  Heb.  Gram.  §127). 

/)  Y.l.  w.ll,  —  is  immutable  as  1  quiesces  in  it   (  T  6. 

2.  c). 

g)  Y.o.  W.I.,  — •  is  immutable  as  it  is  in  a  short  mixed 
syllable. 


272  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR. 


EXEKCISE    SEVENTH. 

1    7. 

Find  the  Dipthongs,  Quiescents  and  Otiant  Letters  {^S.BemA  ; 
§13;   §14). 

I.     Find  tlie   Dipthongs   (§  3.  Kern.  4  ;  Palfrey's 
Gram.  §  2)  : 

7  7  7  7  ■"  7  7  7  7 

O...    0-1-    0.^1^    O..    0.1-   ji...   .k..   ji—    o.^     • 
EXPLANATIONS: 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  2.,  o is  a  dipthong  as  o  is  in  the  same 

syllable  with  JL  without  fully  quiescing  in  it,  though 
O  so  melts  into  the  vowel  that  the  syllable  may  be  consider- 
ed as  ending  in  a  vowel  sound  (vid.  T"4.2.Kem.;  ^"5. 1.  c  and 
1 ;  Gesen.Heb.Gram.  by  Conant,  §8.  4). 

6)  V'3.  W.4.,  o —  is  a  dipthong  for  the  same  reason  as 
last. 

c)  y.4.  W.5.,   A is  a  dipthong  as  a  unites  with  _  but 

does  not  fully  quiesce  in  it  (vid.  references  above). 

Rem.  It  will  be  observed  that  dipthongs  in  Syriac  as  well  as  in 
Hebrew,  are  quiescent  letters  with  heterogeneous  vowels  ;  but  in 
Hebrew  the  quiescent  letters  are  movable  while  the  reverse  is  true  in 
Syriac. 


2.     Find  the    Quiescents : 

- .  ^  iioi  ^1  ni  -1  ou  -  1-  -  u 
innn-oQiioaia)ann]  a 


EXERCISE  SEVENTH — OTIANTS.  273 

uiu  • 

EXPLANATIONS: 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  »*  is  a  quiescent  as  it  unites  with  the 
sound  of  the  preceding  vowel  (§13.3). 

5)  Y.l.  W.2.,  o  is  a  regular  quiescent  letter;  bat  does  not 
here  fully  quiesce,  though  it  forms  a  dipthong  and 
so  melts  into  the  vowel  that  the  syllable  may  be  considered 
as  ending  with  a  vowel  sound  (vid.  TT.l.a). 

c)  Y.l.  W.3.,  o  is  not  quiescent  as  it  is  a  movable  conson- 
ant, 01  not  being  sounded.     The  following  |  however  qui- 

esces  in  the  preceding  vowel. 

d)  Y-1.  W.5.,  o  (the  first  one)  is  movable  as  it  would 
in  Hebrew  take  a  vocal  Sheva ;  the  second  o  quiesces 
in_L  ♦ 

e)  Y.l.  W.9.,  Q  does  not  quiesce  in  —  as  it  is  movable 
(vid.  16.1.  b). 

/)  Y.l.  w.ll.,  1  quiesces  in —  though  it  is  rather  un- 
usual (§13.  l.Eem.). 

g)  Y.3.  W.2.,  (  quiesces  m  — >  * 


3.     Find  the    Otiant  Letters 


a)  Yerse  1.  word  2.,  *^  is  otiant  as  it  is  a  part  of  the  suf- 
fix and  is  not  followed  by  ooi  (vid.  §  14.  2.  b). 

h)  Y.3,  W.2.,  -  is  otiant  because  it  follows  a  quiescent. 


5^74  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 


EXEECISE    EIGHTH. 

1    8. 

FindLinece  Marhetono  Q^(J\'^)^  Mehagyono  (]la...OlLD),  and 
JSheva,  where  iJiere  is  no  accumulation  of  consonants. 

1.     Find  instances  of  MarTietono  and  Mehagyono  : 

EXPLANATIONS: 

a)  Yerse  5.  word  7.,  > ?♦  Here  is  an  accumulation  of  con- 
sonants, and  to  indicate  that  they  could  not  all  be  sounded  con- 
veniently, Marhetdno  (or  a  horizontal  line)  would  regularly 
be  placed  over  >  ♦  In  this  case  the  J  would  in  Hebrew  take 
silent  Sheva.  J  must  of  course  be  pronounced  with  a  vocal 
Sheva  (vid.§7). 

Rem. — 1.     There  seems  to  be  no  instance  of  Mehagyono   on  the 

first  page.  A.T.IIoffmann  in  his  SyriacGrammar  gives  (AXisa)  as  an 

instance.  The  ^  is  to  be  sounded  as  though  a  short  e  followed  it 
(vid.§   1). 

Rem. — 2.  It  appears  that  Marhetono  indicates  silent  Sheva  when 
t  here  is  an  accumulation  of  vowelless  consonants,but  under  no  other 
circumstances,  though   silent  Sheva,  in  reality,  frequently  occurs  as 

in  Hebrew.  So  Mehagyono  represents  vocal  Sheva  only  when  there 
is  a  similar  accumulation  of  vowelless  consonants,though  when  there 
is  no  accumulation  vocal  Sheva  often  occurs. 

2.    Find  instances  of  Simple  vocal  Sheva  : 


EXERCISE  EIGHTH — VOCAL  SHEVA.  275 

EXPLANATIONS. 
a)  Verse  1.  word  1.,  O  would,  in  Hebrew,  take  a  vocal 
Sheva,  and  as  it  cannot  well  be  pronounced  without  the  aid 
of  a  vowel  or  half  vowel  we  must  use  the  Sheva.  This  can- 
not be  considered  as  an  instance  of  Mehagydno,  for  there  is 
no  accumulation  of  consonants  which  are  destitute  of  vowels 
(vid.  §  7).  According  to  Lud.  de  Dieu  and  Norberg,  the 
Syrians  did  use  the  Sheva  and  pronounced  consonants  ac- 
cordingly, as  in  Hebrew  (vid.  §5.1). 

h)  Y.  1.  W.4.,  ^  should  be  pronounced  with  a  vocal  She- 
va like  d  under  a  (vid.  references  above). 

Rem. — We  find   no  characters  to  indicate  Sheva  and  seldom  any 

to  indicate  Marhetono  and  Mehagyoiio,  still  we  are  to  pronounce 
the  consonants  where  those  characters  would  regularly  occur,  as  we 
should  if  they  had  actually  appeared. 

c)  Y.3.  W.5.,  a  is  pronouncod  with  a  Sheva.  The  pre- 
ceding syllable  being  simple^  2)  belongs  to  the  final  syll- 
able. 

d)  V.3.  W.9.,  oi    makes  a  part  of  the  first  syllable  of  the 

word  and  should  not  be  pronounced  with  vocal  Sheva. 

e)  Y,Q.  W.3.,  •  is  pronounced  with  a  vocal  Sheva  as  it 
constitutes  a  part  of  the  penultimate  syllable,  being  preceded 
by  a  long  vowel  (§  15.4). 

/)  Y.9.  W.9.,  ^  should  be  pronounced  with  a  vocal  Sheva 
(vid.  last  reference). 


3.     Find  tlie  silent  Shevas,  where  there  is  no  ac 
cumulation  of  consonants  destitute  of  vowels  : 

A2A2^oiZi^oioi,i:ii5?oi;>^oi^m? 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  A  would  regularly  in  Hebrew  take  a 


276  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC   GRAM^IAR. 

silent  Sheva  (vid.  Conants'  Gesen.  Ileb.Gram.  §10  ;  also  ^S. 
2.  a.  b  and  Eem.). 

h)  y.l.  W.2.,  O  would  in  Hebrew  take  a  silent  Sbeva,  be- 
ing a  movable  consonant  at  the  end  of  a  syllable  ;  but  in 
Syriac  it  so  melts  into  its  vowel, that  the  syllable  may  be  con-, 
fiidered  as  terminating  in  a  vowel  sound,  and  O  does  not 
take  silent  Sheva  (vid.  T"  4.  2.  Eem.  ;  comp.  references 
above). 

c)  Y.3.  W.I.,  Stakes  silent  Sheva  as  it  closes  a  sylla- 
ble. 

(T)  V.3.  W.2.,  Ol  is  a  movable  consonant  at  the  end  of  a 
syllable  being  equivalent  to  jtj  in  Hebrew  and  takes  silent 
Sheva. 

e)  Y.3.  W.9.,  CJl  is  at  the  end  of  a  mixed  syllable  with  a 
short  vowel,  and  takes  silent  Sheva  though  a  guttural  (vid. 
T"8.4:.d;  I'G.l.f ;  comp.  Gesen.  Heb.  Gram,  by  Conant,  §22. 
3). 

/)  V.4.  W.5.,  u  forms  with  the  vowel  —  a  dipthong.  It 
would  in  Hebrew  be  pronounced  as  a  movable  consonant 
and  take  a  silent  Sheva  ;  but  in  Syriac  it  so  melts  into  its 
vowel  that  it  can  hardly  be  considered  as  a  movable  con- 
sonant and  does  not  tnke  a  silent  Sheva  (vid.  ^4.  2.  Eem.; 
18.3.b). 

g)  Y.9.W.5.,  -•  takes  a  silent  Sheva  as  it  is  preceded  by  a 
short  vowel  and  ends  the  antepenultimate  syllable. 


4.    Find  instances  of   Composite  Sheva  : 

01a»OIO1G1G1O101G1O1G1G1O101G1* 

a)  Yerse  3.  word.3.,  Ol  would  in  Hebrew  take  a  compo- 
site Sheva  and  is  pronounced  as  though  it  did  here  (vid. 
Gesen.  Heb.  Grammar  by  Conant,  §22.  3  ;  T1.2.a). 

h)  Yerse  3.  w.6.,  **  takes  composite  sheva  for  similar  rea- 
sons as  in  the  case  above. 


EXERCISE   NINTH — LINEA  OCCULTANS  277 

r)  y.3.w.9.,  01  does  not  take  composite  Sheva  but  silent 
Sheva  simple  as  in  Hebrew.  The  Gutturals  take  simple 
Sheva  where  other  consonants  would  take  silent  Sheva 
(Gesen.Heb.Gram.  by  Conant,§22.3). 

(/)Y.4.  W.6.,  01  takes  composite  Sheva  (vid.  a  above). 


EXEKCISE    NINTH. 

t    9. 

Find  instances   of  Linea    Occultans  (§8)  : 

01010101010I0101010101* 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  2.,  01  is  an  instance  of  Linea  occultans, 
indicating  that  the  Ol  is  not  sounded  (vid.  §8;  §12.1.  A.  and 
B.,  also  Eem.). 

h)  Y.l.  W.3.,  01  is  another  instance  of  Linea  occultans. 
The  horizontal  line  under  01  shows  that  the  letter  is  not  to 
be  pronounced.  In  this  case  o  begins  the  syllable.  The 
othe  cases  are  similarly  explained. 

19 


278  EXERgiSES  in  syeiac  grammar. 


•    EXERCISE      TENTH. 

t    10. 

Find  on  wliat  Syllables  the  Tone  rests  (§  9)  : 

ZuA  w*l"  loCTi  Ld  0010  So  w»V  looi  Zol  '1  '1   Jf  ]6ai 
ooi  Ld  oi   v^l    fooi   Zua  Zq^  ik   \^  oi^   (ooi  i  1  1^^. 

lOOl  SDr  Cl>    Ol-TD    >s»     jOOl    >*  .OOl    QJ    1    0010  QJ   QA  JOl 
•         •    •  «  ^  • 

QA    U    Ol-D     (OOl    J    >J    ^    ^    OISD*    ^1    Ol  1  0>   JOl  \^ 
QJ    *«J.    ^LO    Olp    U    001    loOl    QJ    I    JOl   ^   Q-J   w»1  lOOl 

^..  Q-j  ;  JOl  ^A-1  Ij  1^  iQ  jooi  :i.o  oiy  (001  10  U 
oui    ♦ 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  Aim  istlie  final  syllable  and  takes 
the  tone  because  it  ends  with  a  movable  consonant  (  §9.1 
and  2). 

b)  Y.l.  W.2.,  w»(  takes  the  tone,  as  o  in  the  final  syllable 

oA  is  not  movable  (vid.  ^4.  2.  Eem.;  ^8.  3.  b  ;  §9.1  and  2). 
01  and  t^  are  not  sounded. 

c)  Y.l.  W.4.,  li>  is  the  penultimate  syllable  and  has  the 

tone  according  to  the  general  rule  (§9.1). 
'« 

d)  Y.8.  W.2.,  Olc  is  the  final  syllable  and  takes  the  tone 
because  oi  is  movable. 


EXERCISE   ELEVENTH — MARKS   OF  PUNCTUATION.     279 

e)  Y.3.  W.5.,  I  is  the  penultimate  and  takes  the  tone. 
2)  belongs  to  the  last  syllable  (§15.  4.  d). 

/)  Y.4.  AV.5.,  tOOi  takes  the  tone  because  it  ends  with  a 
movable  consonant. 

g)  Y.o.  W.3.,  Qm  is  inserted  above  as  receiving  the  tone 
according  to  the  general  rule,  though  it  is  somewhat  doubt- 
ful whether,  in  such  cases  the  tone  was  on  the  penultimate  or 
ultimate  syllable  (§9.  1.  Rem.).  Euphony  would  seem  to 
favor  the  former  opinion;  there  is  another  instance  of  the 
same  kind  in  v.7.  w.3. 


EXERCISE    ELEVENTH. 
1     11. 

Find   the   Marks   of  Punctuation    (§10)  : 

*       A.      *  * 

•      •«•«*♦♦•>*•        ♦♦♦♦♦•♦♦*. 

EXPLANATION'S. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  4.,  ♦  is  a  mark  of  punctuation  more  gen- 
erally used  to  denote  the  end  of  a  period,  but  sometimes 
used  in  the  middle  to  denote  a  slight  pause  similar  perhaps 
to  our  comma.     It  is  used  so  here  (§l0.d). 

b)  Y.l.  W.15.,  ♦  denotes  the  full  close  of  the  period. 

c)  Y.5.  W.4.,  '.  indicates  the  end  of  the  protasis  (^lO.a). 

d)  Y.5.  W.7.,  ♦  is  supposed  to  indicate  the  longest  pause 
of  any  mark  of  punctuation.  It  is  sometimes  written  thus  :: 
(PO.c). 

c)  Y.B.  W.5.,  /  indicates  the  end  of  the  apodosis(vid.§10.c). 


280  EXERCISES   IN   SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 


EXEKCISE    TWELFTH. 

t    12. 

Find   instances   of  Hihui   (§6)  : 

EXPLANATIONS. 

rt)  Yerse  3.  word  4.,  "  over  the  word  is  an  instance  of 
Ribui  indicating  that  the  preposition  has  a  plural  suffix  (§ 
6.]. Rem.;  §16.0). 

h)  V.4.  W.2.,  here  Ribui  indicates  that  the  noun  over 
which  it  is  placed  is  in  the  plural  number  though  it  is  ren- 
dered as  if  it  were  in  the  singular.  This  word  occurs  only 
in  the  plural  form  (§44.Rem.6).  The  same  is  true  in  respect 
to  V.4.  W.4. 

c)  Y.4.W.7.,  Ribui  indicates  simply  the  plural  form  of  tho 
noun  as  above. 


EXERCISE    THIRTEENTH. 

1    13. 

Head  the  Syriac  : 

Yerse    1..     B^rishith   aithau   vo  meletho    v^iu    m^l®tho 
aithau  vo  l^voth  aloho.  valoho  aithau  vo  hu  melHho. 


EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR.  281 

V.  2.,  hono  aithau  vo  vVishith  l«voth  aloho. 

V.  3.,  kul  bidheh  lili«vo  vVel'odhau  opMo  hhMho  hh^voth 

niedh^m  dahlivo. 

V.  4.,  beh.    hhaye    lili*vo.    v^hhaye    aithayhuu    nuh*'ro 

dhavnaynoslio. 

"     ••  /      /  /  /  /         / 

V.  5.,  v®liu  nuh^ro  v^hhesliuko  manhar*.  v^hheshuko  lo 
adhAeli^ 

V.  6.,  lih°vo  varnoslio  dheshtadhar  men  alolio  v»  sli®in6h 
yuhhanon. 

V.  7.,  liono  etho  l^'soh^dliutlio  dli®nashedh  al  nuh'ro. 
d^kulnosh  n^aymen  b'idheh. 


V.  8  ,  lo  bu  b^vo  nub^ro.  elo  db^nasbedb  al  nub**ro. 

/     /       /  /  /  / 

V.  9.5aitbau  VO  ger  nub®ro  dhasbroro-.db^manbar  l^ulnosh 
/    ••  -      .•  ..  

detbo  pol®mo. 
V.  10.,b®ol®mo  b®vo.  v®ol®mo  vidbebb®vo.v«ol®mo  lo  yadheli. 


EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Verse  1.  word  1.,  ^'t^  is  tbe  first  syllable,  •O  not  mak- 
ing a  syllable  of  itself.  Tbe  ®  answers  to  tbe  Sbeva  in  He- 
brew, and  is  pronounced  like  a  very  sbort  e. 

Z*)  Y.  1.  w.  2.,  J  is    perbaps  best  pronounced  like  ai', 

tbougb  tbe  a  sound  is  scarcely  perceivable.  ^  In  oA,  o  bav- 
ing  a  beterogeneous  vowel,  does  not  fully  quiesce,  still  it  so 
melts  into  tbe  vowel  tbat  it  can  bardly  be  considered  as  a 


282  EXERCISES   IN   SYRIAC   GRA^TMAR. 

movable  consonant  (vid  •If4:.2.Eem.).  ,01  is  not  sonniod  as 
it  takes  Linea  occultans  (§8)  and  the  w»  is  otiant  (§  14.  2). 

c)  V.l.  W.3  ,  loqi*  01  is  not  sounded  on  account  of  Linea 
occultans,  aiid  o  becomes  vocal  by  beginning  a  syllable. 

d)  Y.l.  w.lO.,  I  is  pronounced  a.  Olapb  so  unites  with 
the  a  sound  that  it  is  scarcely  "perceivable  in  pronun- 
ciation, though  being  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable  it  is  a 
regular  movable  consonant.  It  is  at  the  same  time  a  gut- 
tural letter  and  must  have  the  sound  of  the  Spiritus  lenis  of 
the  Greeks  (vid.  T1.2.Ilem.). 

_   7 

e)  V.l.  w.ll.,  |0»  _L  is  pronounced  broad  and  hng  as  it 
has  a  quiescent  (glS.l.Kem.). 

/)  Y.3.  W.I.,  ^^   is  pronounced  thus  :  kul,  u  taking  the 

broad  and  short  sound.  The  _!.  is  short  here  as  it  has  no 
quiescent  (vid.  §3.  Rem.  3). 

g)  V.3.W.2.,  Oi,..a]o  bidheh.    1    quiesces  in  _L,  and  «^  is 

otiant.     Ol  is  a  movable  consonant  though  a  guttural  letter. 

h)  V.3.VV.4.,     vVel^othau.     ^   must  be   sounded   with  a 

vocal  Sheva  (vid.  T^8.2).  r  being  preceded  by  a  vowel  is  as- 
pirated.    •-»  as  well  as  Ol  {s  otiant. 

..    r>  7        - 

i)  y.3.  W.9.,  (ooij  dahhvo.  ^  is  movable  and  pronoun- 
ced with  the  first  syllable.  _L  has  a  broad  and  short 
sound. 

y )  Y.4.  W.5.,  wiA  thay .     —  is    short  and  broad  as  it  has 

no  quiesceri't  though  *a  so  melts  into  the  vowel  that  it 
can  hardly  be  considered  as  a  movable  consonant  (vid.  T  4. 
2. Rem.). 

•'  • 

h)  V.6.W.I.,  fooi  hh®70.  01  is  pronounced  with  Sheva. 
0  is  vocal  and  l  quiescep  in  J_> 


EXERCISE  FOURTEENTH — TRANSLATION.        283 

EXEECISE    FOURTEENTn. 

1    14 

Trarislate    Literally  : 


Verse  1.  In  (the)  beginning  was  (the)  Word  and 
he  (or- it  the)  Word  was  with  God  and  God  was  he 
or  it  (the)  Word. 

2.  This  was  in  (the)  beginning  with  God. 

3.  Every  (thing)  by  (the)  hand  of  him  was  ;  and 
without  him  also  not  anything  was  which  was. 

4.  In  him  life  (lit.  lives)  was,  and  life  was  (lit. 
lives  were)  (the)  light  of  (the)  sons  of  man. 

5.  And  he  (or  it)  light,  into  (the)  darkness,  shin- 
eth  (lit.  causing  or  permitting  to  shine  §23.2.(2.^), 
and  (the)  darkness  did  not  comprehend  it. 

6.  (There)  was  a  son  of  man,  who  was  sent  from 
God,  whose  name  (lit.  the  name  of  him)  (was)  John. 

7.  This  (man)  came  for  a  witness,  who  shall 
(should)  bear  witness  concerning  (the)  light,  that  eve- 
ry man  might  believe  through  (the)  hand  of  him. 

8.  He  was  not  (lit.  not  he  was)  (the)  light ;  but 
(came  for  a  witness)  who  might  bear  witness  concern- 
ing (the)  light. 


284  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR. 

9.  For  (tliat  light)  was  (the)  light  of  truth,  which 
shine th  upon  every  man,  who  cometh  into  (the) 
world. 

10.  (He)  was  in  (the)  world  (lit.  in  the  world  was) 
and  (the)  world  was  by  his  hand  and  (the)  world  did 
not  know  him. 

EXPLANATIONS: 

.IX 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  Llm^^S^*  In  translating  this  word, 
the  is  supplied.  There  is  no  distinct  character  in  Syriac  for 
the  definite  article.  It  was  originally  expressed  by  the 
noun  in  the  emphatic  state  ;  but  this  is  by  no  means  uni- 
versal in  laterSyriac.  There  are  many  cases,  as  in  Hebrew, 
in  which  the  definite  and  indefinite  articles  have  no  word 
nor  character  to  represent  them,  and  they  must  be  supplied 
in  translating  (§45.1). 

b)  Y-^- W.2  and3.,    looi   ^(Jiotu]   was.         The  substan- 

tive  verb  (OOl  io  6e,in  connection  with  the  other  substantive 

verb  Lk]  to  he,  (third  person  masculine    wiOloAjil)  forms  the 
imperfect  tense,  was  (§38.1,2). 

c)  Y.l.  W.5.,  oqio*  001  is  a  pronoun  of  the  masculine 
gender.  It  is  pleonastic  and  need  not  be  rendered  (§55).  As 
the  neuter  gender  in  Syriac  is  included  in  the  masculine 

and  feminine   OOl   might  be  considered  either  as  neuter  or 
masculine  and  may  mean  he  or  it  (§43). 

d)  Y.3.  W.3.,  fOOi  is  rendered  i^"a5,  and  is  in  the  imperfect 
without  »aOioA-il    (vid.  §65.B.a). 

e)  Y.3.  W.7.,  i.001  is  rendered  was,  same  as  last.  The 
same  is  true  in  respect  to  |oai>  (v. 3.  w.9). 

/)  Y.3.  W.6.,  TrM  and  y>jLk)  (v.3.  w.8)  should  be  taken 
tof^etlier.     The  first  means  amj  and  the  second  someiUing  or 


EXERCISE  FIFTEENTH — CHANGES  OF  CONSONANTS.    285 

thing.     Taken  together  they  should  be  rendered  any  Itiing. 

g)  Y.4.  W.2.,  (.JuAA  is  rendered  life.  The  noun  always 
takes  the  plural  form  though  it  usually  takes  a  singular 
meaning  and  has  sometimes  a  singular  and  sometimes  a  plu- 
ral verb.  Here  it  takes  a  verb  singular  and  in  v.4.  w.i,  a 
verb  plural. 

w  7 

h)  Y.5.  W.4.,  SouLo  is  a  participle  ;  but  it  is  used  instead 
of  the  present  tense  of  the  verb  (§64.2.  A.  andRem. ;  also  T 

18.5). 

i)  Y.Q.  W.3.,  >?A«lj  means  (lit.)  is  sent;  but  with  loOT  it 
forms  the  imperfect  tense. 


EXERCISE     FIFTEENTH. 

TF    15. 

Find  the  Changes  of  Consonants — Assimilated — Transposed — 
Dropped — Added — Exchanged  (§12). 

1.  Find  those  which  are  changed  by  aesimUor 
lion  : 

All  of  those  l^.tters  which  take  Linea  occultans,  are  in  re- 
ality assimilated  (vid.  §12.  and  ^9). 

2.  Find  those  whicli  are  changed  by  transposi- 
tion : 

EXPLANATIONS. 
a)  Yerse  6.  ^vord  3.,  JjA^lj   is  in  the  Ethpa.  conjugation 


286  EXERCISES   IX  SYRIAC    GRAMMAR. 

and  •  and  A  are  transposed,  the  appropriate  plaoe  for  A  be 
ing  before*  (§12.2). 


3.     Find    those    Consonants    wticli   have    been 

dropped  : 

inniinnnv* 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  4.,  lAj^  is  from  ]]!sD,  const.  A^k3»  1  is 
dropped. 

6)  V.3.  W.2.,  aip-.i]r:)»  1  final  is  dropped  to  give  place  for 
the  suffix. 

c)  V.8.  W.7.,  Zooi^     1    is   dropped   to  form  the  feminine 

(§87  Table). 

»   0  0   ••   7         7  ». 

d)  YA.  W.7.,  )a1  aiiOi*  1  is  dropped  before  the  second  J. 

e)  V.o.  W.4.,  jOULd*    ]   is   dropped  after  the  preforma- 
tive  ^* 

f)  Y.7.  W.7.,  and  v.9.  w.  7.,    ^Ai!i£j»    1   is   dropped  be- 
fore l» 

g)  y.7.  W.8.,  ^-ScuoiJ.  1  is  dropped  before  So* 


4.     Find  consonants  wliicli  are  added  : 
a  1  ^a\o  lA  o  1A  1  w»oio  1  o  1  ]  ^^oio  lA  1  ^oio 

Q    1    iD    1    Ol    O    ^C310    IZjOlloll    ^OOU    1    ?  1   O 

IidISdoII  oiV?1  A"!  cnLl  jjI  j  w»oij  o 
1  en  1  J  J  1  1  .-»oio  IjljkjljllciloliD 
1    01    0   1    CFl     ♦ 

EXPLANATIONS. 
a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  L^^^d*  a  is  added  as  a  prefix. 


EXERCISE   FIFTEENTH— CHANGES  OF  CONSONANTS    287 

h)  Y.l.  W.2.,  wfcOioLf.   1   is  prosthetic  (§38.1).  ^aio  is  a 

suffix. 

c)  Y.l.  W.4.,  IA^Ld*   a  is  added  from  the  construct  state 
and  1  is  added  because  the  word  is  in  the  emphatic  state. 

d)  Y.l.  w.IO.,  laCL»    1  is  added  at  the  end  to  form  the 

emphatic  state  (^18.^). 

e)  Y.2.  W.I.,  V>cn*  Perhaps  1  should  be  considered  as  ad- 

ded  here  because  (JOi  seems  to  be  a  kind  of  emphatic  state 

of  #01,  thougb  we  have  omitted  |  above  as  the  word  usual- 
ly appears  in  the  emphatic  form. 

/)  Y.3.W.6  ,]r*^*  l^is  added  to  form  the  feminine. 

^)Y.3.  W.7.,  Lo^*  Z  is  added  to  form  the  feminine. 

h)  Y.4.  W.2.,  V-l.i»Kj«  1  is  added  to  form  the  emphatic  state 

i)  Y.4.  W.5.,  ^ocyuA^I*    ^oou  is  added  in  the  course  of 
inflection  and  "j  at  tlie  beginning  is  prosthetic  (§38). 

k)  Y.4.W.6.,  lioiQJ*  1  is  added  to  form  the  emphatic  state 

(118.  .V). 

I)  Y.5.  ty.3.,  loQA>ll5»   1   is  added  to  form  the  emphatic 

state. 

m)  Y.5.  W.4.,    )OULd»  So  is  a  preformative  occurring  ia 

the  course  of  inflection. 

n)  Y.5.  W.7.,   ouij?!*    1  is  added  in  the  Aphel  conjuga- 
tion. 

o)  Y.6.  W.3.,  >?A»1?»  A  and  1  are  added  in  the  course  of 
'  inflection  (comp.  •[15.2. a). 

p)  Y.7.  W.4.,  >ai  m./i*    J  is  a  preformative. 


288  EXERCISES   IN   SYR  [AC   GRAMMAR. 


q)  y.7.  W.8  ,  ^-S£LfeOU*    i-iOU  is  added  in  tlie  course  of  in- 
flection. 

r)  V.8.  W.6.,  >ai.m.J>*  J  is  added  in  the  course  of  inflec- 
tion. 

s)  Y.9.  W.9.,  ]V)  \\\»    1    is  added  to  form  the  emphatic 
state. 


5.    Find  Consonants  exchanged  for  each  other  : 

There  are  no  cases  on  page  first.  1  is  often  exchanged 
for  1  before  01  and  vice  versa.  Other  letters  also  exchange 
with  each  other  (§12.4). 


EXEECISE    SIXTEENTH. 

1    16.        * 

Find  the  changes  of  vowels — ikrovjn  bach — exchanged — trans- 
posed— dropped  and  added  (§  15). 

1.    Find   those   which    are   thrown   back  : 

___  __  __  —    — ^  —  ^—  —  « 

EXPLANATIONS: 

a)  Yersel.  word  2.,  wiOToZuV    JL  is  thrown  back  from 
•^  tol(§l5.2.A.b;  §13,1.8). 

h)  Y.l.  W.7.,  .-iOTO^l  —  same  as  above. 


EXERCISE  SIXTEENTH — CHANGES  OF  VOWELS.        289 

c)  Y.l.  w.ll.,  loiiLo.    _L  is  thrown  back  from  ]  to  0» 

d)  Y.3.  W.2.,  ai|a(rD*  ^  is  thrown  back  from  |  to  a  on 

account  of  the  suffi'x. 

e)  Y.5.  W.4.,  jOUSiD*  ]  the  characteristic  of  Aphel  is  drop- 
ped and  its  vowel  -^  falls  back  upon  the  preformative  of  the 
participle  So  (§23. 1). 

/)  V.6.  W.3.,  J>A«1>^  JL  is  thrown  back  from  1  to  >♦ 

g)  Y.IO.  W.8.,  ouipl*  ^  falls  back  from  ,  to  ^  (§36;  1 

18.37),  as  the  vowel  _!.  of  the  original  form  ^j-^  is  dropped 
and  a  suffix  appended  (T[16.2.  e,  and4i ;  ^18.37). 


2.    Find  those   which   are   exchanged  : 

I  7  *  7  -w  7  . 

—  for  — ,   —  for  — ,   —  for  —      ♦ . 
EXPLANATIONS: 

•n    »  I  V  7 

a)  Yerse  3.  word  2.,  oip»p3  is  derived  from  p»«  —  is 
dropped  and  _f_  added  in  the  course  of  inflection  and  ^  is 
thrown  back  from  1  to  Q  (T16.1.C?)  the  .word  here  being  in 

the  suffix  state.     Some  would  prefer  to  say  that  —  is  chang- 
ed into  JL,  (116.4.  c  and  5.  d). 

h)  Y.4.  W.7.,  \m\  im?»  is  changed  into —  in  the  con- 
struct plural  (§45.2.a;  ^18.1). 

7  ?  * 

c)  Y.5.  W.4.,  >CTUiD»  In  the  second  syllable, —  is  changed 

into — ,  as  the  third  radical  of  the  verb  from  which  jOULd  is 
derived,  is  Eesh  (§23.1). 

f>  7  7  »■>»  * 

d)  Y.7.  W.8.,  ^-SOaCTU  is  derived  from  ^N  — ischang- 
ed  into  — ,  and  —  in  the  last  part,  into  —  m  passing  from 
Peal  to  Aphel.     But  it  is  better  to  say  that  —  is  dropped 


290  EXERCISES  IS  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

and  —  added  in  one  case,  and  —  dropped  and  —  added  in 
the  other  («lfl6.4.h;  5.r). 

e)  V.lO.  W.8.,    Ol-lr— ^   is   derived  from  ^i— »,  and  —  has 

the  appearance  of  being  changed  into  Jl.  on  account  of  the 
suffix  (§86.A.Rem.)  ;  but  _^  is  dropped  and  JL  thrown  back 
upon  *a  (116.1..7  and  4.&;  T18.37). 


3.     Find  those  vowels,  whichi  are  transposed  : 

•X  -Js  *>  Ov  «^  9v 


EXPLANATIONS. 


jOlQj  from  JOU  or  JOOIJ*  —  with  O  is 
transposed  in  the  emphatic  state  from  the  last  to  the  first 
part  of  the  word  (vid.T'18.?/). 

The  other  cases  are  all  similarly  explained. 


4.     Find  those  vowels  which  are  dropped  : 

pyp7P7707I'^'^-n75'P  y         7         1         7 


EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  2.,   .-»aioZU|  -has  an  additional  syllable 

^qio ;  but  the   original  vowel  —  is   not   dropped  as  «a 

quiesces  in  it  making   it  immutable  (vid.§l5.3  ;  §48.  A). 

/>)  Y.l  W.4.,  lAi^  is  derived  from  jJlD,  construct  Ai^» 
JL  is  dropped  to  form  the  construct  state  and  _!_  of  the  con- 
struct state  is  dropped  in  the  emphatic  state  because  the  ad- 


EXERCISE  SIXTEENTH— CHANGES  OF  VOWELS.        29 1 

ditional  syllable  |  is  added  (vid.§15.3;  compare  ^16.5.6). 

c)  V.3.  W.2.,  CFijuV-O  is  derived  from  r*^  —  is  dropped 
and  from  the  emphatic  state,  —  is  dropped  to  give  place  to 
the  suffix  (compare  %  16.6.d). 

^  .  .       .  7  7 

d)  Y.3.  W.6.,  fr^  is  the  feminine  form  of  ^a**  is  drop- 
ped (vid.  116.5.7). 

«P     p   ..7  7  X 

e)  V.4.  W.7.,   t«i  iiinn  —  is  dropped  from  the  plural  ab- 

••7 

solute  of  jlIQ  in  passing  into  the  construct  state  (vid.  §15.3, 
andEem.;  ^I6.6.z;  T'18.1). 

/)  V.5.  W.7.,  OlDJjl  is  Aphel  of  j^jj  with  a  suffix  pro- 
noun. In  taking  the  suffix, —  of  the  verb  is  dropped  and  — 
of  the  suffix  added  (vid.  Il6.5.m  ;  118.7). 

g)  V.7.  W.B.,  lAojcJiCQ^  is  in  the  feminine  emphatic  state, 
"^  p  It 

from  the  noun  >OlDD,  and,  in  the  course  of  inflection  —  is 
dropped  (vid.li6.5.p;  ll8.17). 

h)  V.7.  W.8.,  ^SOaOU  is  a  verb  from  ^Sd],  and  is  in  the 
Aphel  conjugation.  In  the  course  of  inflection,  —  in  the 
first  part  of  the  word  is  dropped  and  —  in  the  last  part,  and 
other  vowels  added  (vid.T[16.5.  r;  ^f  18.22). 

i)  V.9.  W.5.,  p^J  is  compounded  of  ?  and  p^*  The  latter 

7  7  , 

is  a  noun  in  the  emphatic  state  from  ;«♦  —  falls  away  in 
taking  an  additional  syllable  (^15.  3)  to  form  the  emphatic 
st?.te  (vid.  1  16.  5.  .9 ;  1  18.32). 

h)  V.9.W.9.,  ISQ^ki^  is  compounded  of  ^  and  ]V>S>S,  em- 
phatic state  from  ^a^l»  —  is  dropped  in  forming  the  em- 
phatic state  (§15.3"^  as  an  additional  syllable  is  received  (^ 
IQ.b.t',  «fl8.36). 

*  7 

I)  V.IO  W.8.,  ail,-a  is  a  verb  with  a  suffix,  derived  from 


292  EXERCISES   IN"  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

^r-rf*     In  taking  the  suffix,  —  is  dropped  and  —  falls  back 
upon  the  first  radical  (§36 ;  ^"18.  87V 


5.     Find   those   vowels   whicli   are   added  : 


r0077f»7l'^rfi7f>r*s0779 


oro7'»>pi>r»p«vp7or'»>i 


f7P  700  f  I         'ts         ff         It 


EX  PL  AN ATIONS 


7.       «.X  7 


a)  Verse  1.  word  2.,  w»OToA^l»    —  is  added  in  the  course 
of  inflection  as  a  part  of  the  sufformative  of  the  verb. 

h)  V.l.  W.4.,  lA^Lo  is  in  the  emphatic  state  from  the  con- 

struct  state  AjikSo*  —  is  dropped  and  —  added  (compare  ^ 
16.4.6  ;  11^.  d). 

c)  Y.l.  w.lO.,  ]oi!^  is  in  the  emphatic  state,  but  as  it  al- 

0 

ways  appears  in  this  state  it  is  perhaps  better  not  to  place  — 
(at  the  end  of  the  word)  among  the  vowels  added. 

ct)  Y.3.  W.2.,  Cir-jito   is  derived  from  f^*  —  is  dropped 
and  a  new  vowel,  — ,  added.     Then  from  the  emphatic  state 

Ip-^I,  —  is  dropped  to  give  place  to  the  suffix  with  which 
_L  is  added  (vid.  §  46.  1.  a ;  compare  «lf  16.  4.  c ;  T  18. 
m). 

e)Y.8.  w.  4.^  >jigo,\\oo  is  from  yl!io«     —  is    added 
with  the  suffix. 

/)  V.3.  W.6.,  IfAA  is  the  feminine  form  for  r**»  —  is  drop 
pc'd  and  ^  added. 


EXERCISE  SIXTEENTH — CHANGES  OF  VOWELS.       293 

ooij,  —  is  assumed  over  >  to  aid  in  the 

pronunciation  (vid.T"18.^). 

h)  Y.4.  W.6.,  1)0103  is  derived  from  JOU  or  90au*    —  is 

added  in  the  emphatic  state  (vid.TflS.?/). 

i)  V.4.  W.7.,  fal  jinn  —  at  the  beginning  of  the  word 
is  assumed  (vid.§l5.4.6).  The  remainder  of  the  word  is  com- 
pounded  of  aIO  and  }aJ|^  The  former  is  in  the  construct 
plural,  andjin  passing  from  the  absolute  to  the  construct  plural, 

—  is  dopped  and  —  added  (vid.  §15.3  and  4 ;  Tl6.  4.  e;  T 
18.1). 

k)  V.5.  W.3.,  pQa»j>Q»  This  is  from  yiQAA*  though  the 
emphatic  state  is  the  more  usual  form*     _L  is  added. 

,7  7 

I)  Y.5.  W.4.,  )ailliD.     This  is  a  participle  active,  Aphel, 

7  7       , 

from  >OlJ«.     The  first  —  is  assumed,  forming  a  part  of  the 
preformative  (vid.^  1 8.5). 

-»,      ^7 

m)  V.5.  W.7.,  OlOjjl   is  a  verb  in  the  Aphel  conjugation  • 
from  ySy*    —  is  assumed  in  the  preformative.     —  is  also 
assumed  with  the  suffix  (vid.Tl6.4./;  Tl8.7). 

n)  V.B.  W.2.,  \^\^  is  in  the  emphatic  state  and  —  is  ad- 
ded (vid.ll8.9). 

o)  Y.^.  W.3.,  >jA«1?  is  compounded  of  j  and  the  verb 
j>A»l"  Ethpaal  from  5p»»  —  is  added  as  a  part  of  the  pre- 
formative. The  first  _!_  is  assumed  in  the  course  of  inflection 
in  Ethpaal. 

p)  Y.7.  W.3.,  lAojOiai^  is  in  the  feminine  emphatic  state 

from  ^a\sa*     In  the  course  of  inflection  —  and  —  are  added 
and  i.  is  dropped  (vid.l"  1 6.4.^' ;  ^IS  l7). 

q)  Y!J.  W.4.,  JOimJj  is  compounded  of  the  relative  j  and 
'    20  * 


294:  EXEIiCJSES   IN   SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

the  verb  jOIQQJ,  Apliel  of  joiflo^  —  is  assumed  in  Aphel 
in  the  course  of  inflection  (vid.  §18.18). 

r)  V.7.W.8.,  ^SOkCTU  is   a  verb  in  the  Aphel  conjugation 

from  ^S)0|*    In  the  course  of  inflection,   —  in  the  first  part 

of  the  word  is  dropped  and  —  added,  and  in  the  latter  part 

of  the  word,  —  is  dropped  and  —  added  (T16.4.  A  ;  Tl8. 
22). 

j'rBJ  is   compounded  of  j  and  I>;*»     The 

latter  is  a  noun  in  the  emphatic  state  from  ;s  or  yfM*  If 
considered  as  derived  from  the  former,  _I_  is  dropped  on  ac- 
count of  the  additional  syllable  (§l5.3),and,  in  consequence, 
M}  having  no  vowels,  y  takes  the  new  vowel  JL  (§15.  4.  h). 

_L  is  also  added  to  form  the  emphatic  state  (vid.  Tf  1 6.4.  i ; 

1"I8.32). 

t)  Y.9.  W.9.,  |Sq\s^  is  compounded  of  i^  and  )^\s,  em- 

phatic  state  from  V)\s»  —  is  dropped  in  forming  the  'em- 
phatic state  as  a  syllabic  is  added  (§15.3),  and  _L  is  assumed 
(vid.Tl6.4.^;  1"  18.36). 


EXEECISE    SEVENTEENTH. 

1    17. 

Find  the   Suffixes  and  Prefixes,  Sufformaiives  and  Preforma- 
lives  {%\Q;  §36;  §46). 

1.     Find  the   Prefixes  : 

CiOQCiCiQ'iCiQ'iOCiQy^y'i^y^y 


EXERCISE  SEVENTEEXTH— SUFFIXES  AND  PREFIXES.    295 

^  I  L  o  o  o  o  * 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  o  is  a  prefix  preposition. 

h)  V.3.  W.2.,  iD  is  a  prefix  preposition  with  the  vowel 
thrown  back  upon  it. 

c)  y.8.  W.9.,  >♦  >  is  a  relative  pronoun  prefixed  to  the 
verb,  and,  two  vowelless  consonants  occurring  together,  _L  is 
assumed  to  aid  in  pronunciation.  The  other  instances  need 
no  explanation. 

2.    Find  the   Suffixes  : 

Ol..    t^OIOi—    Ol_    (TL^    01 —    01..^  Gl_  G1-.  * 
EXPLANATIONS: 

a)  Yerse  3.  word  2.,  OL—  is  a  suffix  pronoun  with  its 
union  vowel. 

*•  ^ 

b)  Y.3.  W.4.,  wiOio.,  is  a  suffix  pronoun  added  to  a  prepo- 
sition, though  the  same  form  when  attached  to  Lt]  is  a  suf- 
formative. 

Rem. — We  use  the  terms  sufFormative  and  preform ative  to  indi- 
cate those  letters  which  are  suffixed  or  prefixed  to  words  as  neces- 
sary appendages  in  order  to  form  particular  conjugations,  tenses, 
moods,  persons,  numbers,  gender*^  or  states,  according  to  the  course 
of  inflection.  Such  are  mere  formative  letters  and  properly  consti- 
tute a  part  of  the  word  to  which  they  are  attached,  while  suffixes 
and  prefixes  are  appendages  which  have  more  distinct  significations 
of  themselves,  and  do  not  necessarily  compose  a  part  of  the  word  to 
which  they  are  attached. 


296  EXERCISES   IX  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

3.     Find  tlie    PreformaUves  : 

Lo    V    ^— T   -J     -^CTU    -J    Ld    ♦ 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Verse  1.  word  2.,  1  is,  strictly  speaking, a  preformative , 
but  the  letter  seems  to  constitute  a  part  of  the  word  through 
all  of  its  changes  and  does  not  so  properly  come  under  this 
head  as  it  does  under  "consonants  added"  (^15.4.6). 

h)  V.5.  W.4.,  ^  is  a  preformative  added  in  the  course  of 
inflection. 

c)  V.5.  W.7.,  I  is  a  preformative  added  in  the  Aphel  con- 
jugation. 

d)  Y.^,  W.3.,   A ^   are  preformative  letters  added  in  the 

Ethpaal  conjugation. 

e)  Y.7.  W.8.,  jOU  is  a  preformative  added  in  the  Aphel 
future. 


4.    Find  the   Svfformatives  : 

EXPLANATIONS: 


a)  Yerse  1.  word  2.,  *^OTO —  is  a  sufformative  as  it  forms, 

according  to  the  inflection,  the  third  person  singular  mascu- 
line preterite,  though  it  is  in  reality  a  noun  suffix  attached 

to  the  original  noun  Aji  heing. 

h)  Y.l.  W.4.,  lA  is  the  sufformative  ending  of  the  empha- 
tic state,  or  rather  1  is  the   ending  of  the  emphatic  state 


EXEECISE  EIGHTEENTH — PARSE.  297 

and    A    of    the  construct  from  which  the    emphatic    ia 
formed. 

c)  V.3.  W.6.,  1   is  the  emphatic  ending. 

d)  y.3.  W.7.,   I  takes  the  place  of  1  and  is  a  formative 
letter  in  constituting  the  feminine  gender. 

e)  Y.4.  W.5.,  ^OCTU —  ig  a  sufformative  found  in  the  course 
of  inflection. 

/)  Y.4.  W.7.,  1  is  the  ending  of  the  emphatic  state. 

g)  Y.6.  W.2.,  ]  is  an  emphatic  ending. 


EXEECISE    EIGHTEENTH. 

t    18. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  Ajju;Q  is  compounded  of  the  pre- 
position £^  in  and  the  noun  AjljuS  beginning.  O  is  a  pre- 
position  governing  i\jLA^>  in  the  ablative  case  (§  75.5  ;  §52  ; 
§  84).  L»^y  is  a  denominative  noun  (§41)  from  the  root 
M^j  principal^  chief,  head  (Hebrew  "^jj^'-i  Chaldee  '^J&^l  ) — 
formed  by  adding  to  its  root  the  formative  letters  Ll.  (^39.2). 
The  vowel  —  is  added  and  aids  to  form  the  syllable  Lk  (§15.4; 
§13.3).  LamI^  is  of  the  first  declension  as  its  vowels  are  im- 
mutable (§48.  A)  though  it  is  somewhat  irregular  in  its  in- 
flection (see  its  plural)— third  person,  singular  number(§44). 


298  EXERCISES   IN  SYKIAC  GRAMMAR. 

Aa.ju>,  plural  (AA.mj)^  The  two  points  over  h  in  the  plural 
compose  Eibui.  The  point  belonging  to  y  still  belongs  to  > 
and  at  the  same  time  is  part  of  Eibui  (§6.2.Rem.) — feminine 
gender  as  it  is  the  same  as  in  Hebrew  and  is  transferred  from 
that  language  (§43.2.Rem.2).  It  ends  also  in  lA  a  feminine 
termination  in  the  emphatic  slate,  |  being  the  regular  em- 
phatic termination  (vid.  last  reference  and  §  45.3. Z>).  In  the 
absolute  state  the  form  is  A^ifcaJ,  emphatic  1A.*^J  (§  45 j — 
in  the  ablative  case  after  the  preposition  Q  and  governed  by 
it  (§75.5). 

b)  Y.l.  W.2.,  »^010Aa|  is  an  auxiliary  verb  from  A— ^  I  to  he 
(vid.Lexicon).  A— a*)  is  formed  from  the  noun  A^  being,  vritn 
a  prosthetic  (♦  »uOloAu'|  is  irregular — takes  the  noun  suffix 
w»Olo_,  as  it  is  derived  from  a  noun,  though  that  suffix  is 
here  to  be  considered  as  a  suffiarmative  (T  17.4.  a;  T  17.2. 
Rem.)— neuter  (§  66.2  ;  §19)— singular  number  (§88.1.Para- 
digm) — third  person  (§38.  1.  Paradigm) — masculine  gender 
(vid.last  reference) — indicativemood(§65.1 ;  compare  (§18.4) 
— preterite  imperfect  tense,as  looi  immediately  follows(§18.4. 
Rem.;  §38.2;§68.A).  Inflect  to  the  person  where  it  is  found. 
First  person  common  gender  *^A^1  (/am),  second  masculine 
^Zul  {thou  art\  second  feminine  > i n hLk\  {thou  ar^),' third 
masculine  .-lOloA^I  {he  is)  (vid. §38.1. Inflection).  It  agrees 
with  its  nominative  lAl^ji,  though  of  a  different  gender  (80. 
B.2). 

c)  Y.l.  W.8.,  looi  is  a  substantive  verb  signifying  to  b(' 
(§38.1)— a  ]]'verb(§38. 1)— irregular  (§32)—neuter  (§  19)— 
third  person—singular  number.  When  used  with  another 
verb  it  has  the  effect  of  Yau  conversive  in  Hebrew   §  38.  1) 


EXERCISE   EIGHTEENTH — PARSING.  299 

— masculine  gender  and  used  here  merely  as  a  jielping  verb 
to  the  preceding,  in  forming  the  imperfect  tense(§38^). 

d)  Y.l.  W.4.,  IALSjD  word  is  a  substantive  noiln,  derived 
from  ^iSio  to  speak^  forming  in  the  absolute  state  (^Vn  (yid. 
§  39.  2.  h,  third  example  ),  construct  state  A\v>  emphatic 
IaIsd — first  declension  (§45.feminines  A;  §48.B.  feminines; 
T"  6.  4.  c).  Decline.  Singular  (vid.above) — plural  absolute, 
^!io,  construct  Aiio,  emphatic  IASid  (§  45.  3)— third  per- 
son singular — feminine — emphatic  state — nominative  case  to 
looi  wiOloLr(§80.B.2). 

e)  y.l.  W.5.,  0010  is  compounded  of  the  conjunction  O 
and  the  pronoun  ooi*  o  is  a  copulative  conjunction  (§53. 
1) — a  prefix  (§53.  1.  Rem.).  It  connects  the  two  nouns. 
001  may  be  translated  by  he  or  i\  as  the  neuter  gender  in 
Syriac  is  included  in  the  masculine  and  feminine  (T  14.  c;  § 
43) — a  personal  pronoun  separate  (§16) — third  person  sing- 
ular. It  is  pleonastic  and  need  not  be  rendered  in  transla- 
ting (§55).  For  explanations  of  the  next  three  words  vid. 
supra. 

f)  y.l.  W.9.,  Lcl^  wii\   a  preposition  governing    (oCL 
(§52;  §84). 

g)  y.l.  w.lO.,  loi!l§L  God — taken  from  the  Hebrew  ^■j:^'' 
and  that  probably  derived  from  ^jj^  God.  niii^  is  a  de- 
nominative noun  taking  the  Syriac  emphatic  terminanon 
1  is  the  ending  of  a  large  number  of  Syriac  nouns,  s  )m'^- 
times  indicating  the  feminine  and  sometimes  the  emphatic 
state  (§43.2;  §45.3).  Some  nouns  always  appear  in  the  em- 
phatic or  suffix  state  (§  45.1.Rem.).    loilL  has  the  form  of 


300  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR. 

the   emphatic  state.     It  is  a  substantive  noun  and  may  be 

0     7 

declined  like  «2^it  (Decl.  1.  §45.masculines  A) — ^third  person 
singular-masculine-emphatic  state — ablative  case  and  gov* 
erned  by  icA  (§75.5). 

li)  Y.l.  w.ll.,  IotlLo*  O  a?ic7,  is  a  prefix  conjunction  oon- 
tinning  the  sense,  foi-^  God^  is  in  the  nominative  to 
loqi  ^oioZul  (§80).     For  further  explanations  vid.  supra. 

i)  Y.1.W.14.,  ogi  is  a  pleonastic  pronoun  (vid.  si/pra). 
y)  V.l.  W.15.,    IALLd   word^  is  in   the  nominative   after 
1bqi^qioLf(§80;  tlS.Z/). 

k)  Y.2.  W.I.,  (JOl  this^  same.  It  has  the  form  of  the  em- 
phatic state  though  it  should  be  considered  as  one  of  the 
original  forms  of  the  word.  The  forms  are  ^01  and  poi 
(§17) — a  demonstrative  pronoun — ^singular-masculine-nomi- 
native  case  to  foqi  w»oioAji]  (§80) — used  as  a  noun.  Decline 
it  (vid.§17). 

I)  Y.3.  W.I.,  ^^  all^  every ^  each,  (§58.B.2.(3r,7;) — a  pronoun 
used  as  an  adjective  (§58.B.2.5)  the  noun  thing  to  which 
it  belongs  being  implied — declined  according  to  decl.  1. 
of  nouns — ^third  person-masculine-absolute  state.  The  im- 
plied noun  would  be  in  the  nominative  to  ] OCT;  or  ^^  itself 
might  be  considered  as  a  collective  noun  and  in  the  nomi 
native  to  loOl  (§80. A.  1  and  Eem.). 

m)  Y.3.  W.2.,    CTpi^o   hy  the  hand  of  him  or  by  his  hand 
Q  is  a  prefix  preposition  governing  jji] ♦     The  whole  word 

•  7 

is  compounded  of  the  preposition  Q  by,  the  noun  r->  empha- 
tic  f,-i|  ha7id,SLnd  the  suffix  CT«.  of  him  or  his.  ,-*!-.  is  a  de- 
rivative noun  (§39),  from  r-»  and  takes  a  suffix  (Hebrew  ^n 


EXERCISE   EIGHTEENTH — PARSING.  SOI 

Chaldee^^)-2nd.declension-singular.  Absolute  and  constr.^, 
emphatic  Ipiljpluralabsolute^ri),  construct  •^,^1,  emphatic 
Mr-^l — third  singular  masculine  (§45.  masculines  B) — abla- 
tive case  and  governed  by  O   (§75.5).     Oi.«,  is  a  suffix  pro- 

0 

noun  attached  to  the  emphatic  state  and  f  falls  away  (§46. 1 . 
c)-third  singular  masculine  (§16.  Table) — genitive  case  (§54. 
B.2)  and  governed  by  p.]l  (§16  ;  §16.B;  §74). 

n)  Y.3.W.3.,  (ooi  to  he  is  here  rendered  was,  the  imperfect 
being  sometimes  thus  formed   (§65).     It  agrees  with  ^i^ 

c)  Y.3.  W.4.,  «^aiOrl^20  and  without  him — compounded 
of  the  conjunction  O,  the  preposition  ,S\o,  and  the  suffix 
pronoun  wiCTlo^*  O  and^  is  a  conjunction  as  above.  ,sSo 
without  is  a  preposition  with  a  suffix.  It  governs  its  suffix 
wfeOio..*  *aOiO-.  him,  is  a  noun  suffix  -  plural  (§16.Table) — 
third  singular  masculine — ablative  case  and  governed  by 
^^  (^75.5). 

j9)  V.3.  W.5.,  Pal  also  not,  neither — compounded  of  U  not, 
and  Si\  oho.  si\  is  a  conjunction(§53.2.«)  and  continues  the 
sense.     U  not  is  an  adverb  and  qualifies  Lo(j\* 

q)  V.3.  w.^.,  Ir**  one,  any  one,  a  certain  one,  certain,  any, 
from  r^,  is  a  pronoun  (§58.10.a  and  b)  or  a  numerical  adjec- 
tive (§50.2).  Here  it  has  the  sense  of  an  indefinite  pronoun 
— singular  feminine  and  belongs  like  an  adjective  to  the  noun 
^]j^  (§58.10.a). 

?')y.3.w.7.,  Zoc?l  to  he   from  looi*     1  is  changed  into  Z  to 
form  the  feminine  (§l9.Table).     Imperfect  and  parsed  like 
001  (vid.  n.  supra) 


302  EXERCISES   IN  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

ft  T> 

s)  V.3.  W.8.,  ^r— ^  «^y  thing,  has  a  similar  meaning  to 
that  of  (p>*  above  ;  but  has  more  the  sense  of  a  noun.  It  is 
sometimes  used  in  the  same  manner  as  |rM  (§58.10.6).  It  is 
used  here  as  a  noun  meaning  ihrng,  and  I^m  belongs  to  it,  as 
tlie  pause  between  |oOl  and  ^^^Sd  is  one  of  minor  impor- 
tance (•|f  ll.c;  §  10)-third  singular  feminine-absolute  state- 
nominative  case  to  Loot  (§80). 

ty  » «  r 

001 J  which  was — compounded  of  (ocri  and  j» 

>  which  is  a  relative  pronoun  (§  l7.2) — is  in  the  third  singu- 
lar— nominative  to    looi* 

u)  Y.4.  W.I.,  OL^iD  in  him,  compounded  of  a  in  and  Ol- 
hii7i,  O  is  a  preposition,  governing  the  ablative  (§75.5); 
OU  is  a  suffix  pronoun  (§  iG.Table;  §  52.Table)-third  person 

singular — in  the  ablative  case  and  governed  by  ^   (§  75.5. 
compare  §54.3.1). 

v)  YA.  W.2.,  t  .*  »>  life,  is  a  verbal  noun  (concrete)  (§40Ta- 
bleA).  It  occurs  always  in  the  plural  form(§44.Eem.6),gener- 
ally  with  a  singular  signification  (vid.Lexicon;  §80.2)-deriv- 
ed  from  ]a«M  to  Zwe-appears  in  the  emphatic  form,like  other 
plural  forms  mentioned(§44.Eem.6  and§45.Eem.)though  this 
is  its  usual  form.  It  is  an  anomalous  noun  having  no 
regular  declension-third  person  plural  masculine  (§45.Eem.)- 
nominative  case  to  locJl  (§80.2.6). 

lo)  YA.  W.4.,  Jaj^O  and  life — compounded  of  the  conjunc- 
tion  O  and,  and  \m.*^  life.  This  is  parsed  like  the  same  word 
above,  only  it  is  in  the  nominative  to  a  plural  verb  (§80. 
2.  a). 


EXERCISE  EIGHTEENTH— PARSING  803 

x)  Y.4.  W.5.,  ^OOuZul  was,  literally  were  —  third  person 
plural  masculine,  and  agrees  with  ^lil  in  gender  and  num- 
ber (§80.2.a;  vid.also  c.  and  d.  supra). 

y)  y.4.  W.6.,  1>01QJ  light,  is  a  verbal  noun  from  JOU  to 
shine — an  infinitive  form  in  the  emphatic  state  like  U^QO 
from  ^54^)  (^  40.Table,  II.  A.  a).  Infinitive  absolute  you, 
Sou  or  joou,  emphatic  state  1>01J,  IjOU,  "IjOIQJ.     The  So 

which  appears  in  the  infinitive  is  here  dropped  (compare 
§39.2.6.and  §40),  though  the  emphatic  form  is  the  one  in 
whicb  it  usually  appears-declensionIV.(§45.masculines,D)- 
third  person  singular-masculine-emphatic  state,  and  in  the 
nommative  case  after  ^oouAa],  but  used  as  the  construct  be- 
fore J  of  the  next  word  (§74.2.a). 

1)  Y.4.  W.7.,  ]■!  am>  of  the  sons  of  men,  a  composite  noun 

(§41.1)-compounded  of  >,    .iJ^  and  \mS\*     j  o;^  is  a  sign  of 

the    genitive    case,   which  follows  (§74.8).    aIO  sons,   is 
'  .    .  .  y 

from  \^  son,  primitive — anomalous.  Singular  absolute  ;o, 

construct  ;o,  emphatic  |;o,  plural  absolute  ^^  i  m,  construct 

..7  _         »(>  ••7 

wkJJD,  emphatic  |>m  (§49.masculines)-third  person  plural- 
masculine-construct  state(in  form  and  because  the  next  noun 
is  in  the  genitive)-genitive  case,  though  in  the  construct 
state,  as  sometimes  occurs  in  Hebrew  (vid.  Stuart's  Hebrew 
Grammar,  §434.  5),  governed  by  j  (§74).  ^aj  man,  is  from 
%ju],  the  1  being  dropped  (§12.3.a)-derived  from  theHebrew 
word  'Cjij}^  man  (Chaldee  tJi^JS})-^  primitive  noun-declension 
],  but  somewhat  irregular  (vid.  Lexicon) — third  person 
singular  as  it  has  not  Eibui,  though  it  has  the  same  form 
which  appears  in  the  plural-masculine  emphatic  state  abso- 


301  EXERCISES  IN   SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

lute  and  construct  ^mj],  emphatic  \mS\j  absolute  plural 
^AJf  or  |Aj|-genitive  case  and  governed  by  tlie  preceding 
noun  lid  (§74). 

2)  y.5.  w. I.,    OOlo    {v]d.supra  e). 

1f>     ^ 
jOi QJ  Ujht,\s  in  the  nominative  absolute,  with 

the  participle  >0lllk5(§76.1).  For  farther  explanation  of  the 
word  vid.  y  above. 

4)  Y.5.  W.3.,  pQA*jwOm(/7i6)iarArries5,is  compounded  of  the 
preposition  a  in,  and  PQaaj  darkness.  ]dqjlkm  is  a  sub- 
stantive noun  (the  Hebrew  form  is  ^lajfl,  a  verbal  noun) — 
declension  fourth  (§  45.  masculines  D) — third  person  singu- 
lar masculine-emphatic  state-ablative  case  and  governed  by 
=>(§75.5). 

5)  V.5.  W.4.,  jouio  permitting  to  shine-a.  pB.Tticiple  from,  the 
irregular^, active  intransitive  verb  (§20.2)  JOU  to  shine  (33) 
-in  the  Aphel  conjugation  (§  19  Table;  §  19.B.4 ;  §  23.1)- 
an  active  participle  (§19.B. 4;  §23.1).  It  is  used  here  for 
the  third  person  singular  of  the  present  tense(§64.2.A.Rem.) 
and  rendered  the  same  as  though  it  were  a  verb  (vid.  Trans. 
^I4)third  person  singular.  Conjugate  to  the  place  where  it  is 
found.  Preter.  Peal  JOU,  preter. Ethpeel  JOuZf  (§  l9.Table 
II,  and  §21.1),  preterite  Pael  hou  (§l9.Table  II,  and  ^22.1), 
preterite  Ethpaal  joiiZf  (§  19.  Table  II,  §  22.  1  and  Eem.), 
preterite  Aphel  JOTjf  (§19.  Table  II;  §23.1),  future  Aphel 
JOUJ  (§19.  Table  II;  §19.B.2,5;  §23.1),  imperative  Aphel 
50ijf  (§  19.  Table  II;  §  19.  B.  1;  §  23.1),  infinitive  Aphel 
ojoiii  (§19.Table  II;  §19.B.3  and  9;  §23.1)participle  active 


EXERCISE   EIGHTEENTH— PARSING.  305 

Aphel  JOULo  (§L9.Table  II ;  §19.B.4;  §23.1).  It  is  found 
in  the  Aphel  conjugation-active  participle — masculine  gen- 
der, and  belongs  to  HoiQJ  (§  64.  1.  A),  or  is  absolute  with 
it. 

6)  Y.5.  W.5.,  PQa_>jO  and  the  darkness.  O  is  a  conjunc- 
tion as  above,  and  ]aoa,M  is  in  the  nominative  case  to 
Ol-3jj(»     For  farther  explanations  see  4.  supra. 

7)  Y.5.  w,7.,  (JVJ:ihi\  comprehended  iV,  is  an  irregular  ac- 
tive  intransitive  verb,  composed  of  ^>j  and  Ol_»  Irregular- 
active  voice-intransitive  (§19.Tablel)-indicative  (§65.1.B.b) 
-Aphel  preterite.  The  usual  form  is  j^ij ]♦     When  the  suffix 

is  appended,  the  final  vowel  of  the  verb  is  dropped  (§15.3) 

■* 
and  the  last  consonant  forms  a  syllable  with  the  suffix   Ol-» 

It  is  in  the  3rd.person  masc;  Pealj^Jj,    Ethpeel  ^>jZ|,   Pael 

*  7  7  7     ^^  •*    »7 

*^>>,  Ethpaal  j^jJm,  Aphel  ySy\  and  agrees  with  its  nom- 
inative ]anji  ■!>■>♦  The  suffix  Ol-  is  a  personal  pronoun — 
third  masculine  singular-accusative  case  (§54.B.l)  and  gov- 

-^      -7 

erned  by  *^>?|» 

8)  Y.Q.  W.I.,  looi  vjas^  is  a  Lomadh  Olaph  verb — Peal — 
active  voice-3d.  singular-masculine-indicative  mood-present 
tense  (32.1)  and  agrees  with  'iaa*^  (vid.  ^18.c). 

9)  y.6.  W.2.,  "U^T^  son  of  man,  is  a  composite  noun  (§42. 

1)  compounded  of  \Ci  son  and   ^1  man.     \^  is  a  primitive 

noun — anomalous — singular,  construct  (vid.  paradigm  §49. 
masculines) — third  person    masculine  —  nominative  case 

to  logi*  ImJ  ^otw,  is  a  noun  derived  from  »aj]  man — prim- 
itive— declension  firs1>-third  person  singular  masculine-em- 
phatic state-in  the  genitive  Case  and  governed  by  ',0  (§74; 
1[18  1). 


306  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

10)  Y.6  W.3.,  >>As(>  who  was  senilis  compounded  of  ^  who^ 
and  JjA*!  ivas  sent,  j  is  a  relative  pronoun-third  singular  mas- 
culine, a  prefix,  and  in  the  nominative  case  to  hiL»]  (§17. 
2 ;  §56).  J>A»|  is  a  verb  in  the  Ejhpaal  conjugation — pas- 
sive voice — regular — third  singular  masculine — indicative 
mood — preterit  imperfect  tense  (§60.4),  and  agrees  with 
its  nominative  >♦  Peal  J>«,  Ethpeel  i>A»(,  Pael  5>#,  Eth- 
paal  5>A«1»  In  Ethpaal  and  the  other  passive  conjugations 
M  is  transposed  (vid.T15.2.a). 

11)  YS.  \v.4.,  ^So/roTT?,  0^  is  a  preposition  and  governs  the 
ablative  case  (§75.5). 

12)  Y.6.W.5.,  fOl}^  Godj  a  noun — declension  first — third 
singular  masculine — emphatic  state — ablative  case,  and  gov- 
erned by  ^  (§75.5 ;  ^iS.g). 

13)  Y.Q.  \v.6.,  01Sq»  his  name^  compounded  of  SQ»  name 
and  CV—his.  SQ»  is  a  noun  from  ^9 — anomalous — third 
singular  masculine.  Absolute  and  constr.  singular  ^»,  em- 
phatic  p£i« — suffix  state  0lSQ»  (vid.  paradigm,  §  49.  mascu- 
lines). JL  of  the  absolute  state  falls  away  in  the  emphatic 
state,  and  from  the  emphatic  is  formed  the  suffix  state  by 

and  adding  01 — (§46.1.cz) — nominative  case  to 
loCJl  wiOloAaj  2vas  (implied).  In  reference  to  jooi  wiOloA^I 
(vid.T"18.  b  and  c).  01-  his,  is  a  suffix  pronoun,  third  sing- 
ular masculine  (§l6.Table)-genitive  case  (§54.B.  2)  and  gov- 
erned by  SQ»(§I6;  §16.B;  §74). 

14)  y.6.  W.7.,  ^.i-x»Qa  John,  a  noun  proper-anomalous- 
third  singular  masculine,  absolute  state-nominative  case  af- 
ter loOl  wftOloAA]* 


EXERCISE   EIGHTEENTH — PARSING.  307 

15)  V.  7.  w.  1.,  poi  same,  this — a  demonstrative  pronoun, 
singular,  masc.  nominative  case  to  ]l]  (vid.  ^18.  k), 

16)  V.  7.  w.  2.,  ]l]  came — Lomath  Olaph  (]]) — active 
voice-Peal  conjugation-pret.  imperfect-3d  pers.  singular, 
masc.  indicative  mood  and  agrees  with  poi  (§27  Tab.;  §32). 

17)  Y.  7.  w.  3.,  IZojoicoli/or  a  witness — compounded  of 
^foVj  and  |Zojoioo  witness.  |IojOifiD  is  a  noun  derived  from 
the  verb  joifio  ^o  witness.  The  form  ?oiflD  appears  as  a  noun 
of  the  2d  declension.  Absolute  and  construct  ?OTCD,  emph. 
IjaiflO  (§45.  masculines  B).  The  feminine  absolute  has  the 

10  0 

joico*  In  many  nouns 
Z  is  inserted  before  the  final  1  in  the  feminine  ;  O  with  Z  is 
also  sometimes  inserted  (§45.  3  and  Rem.  3)  as  in  this  word. 
It  has  the  form  here  of  the  emph.  feminine.  That  indeed 
seems  to  be  the  usual  form  in  which  the  word  appears — 
3d  pers.  singular,  dative  case  and  governed  by  ^  (§75.  1). 

18)  V.  7.  w.  4.,  )cn,m  i>  who  shall  (should)  hear  wit- 
ness— compounded  of  j  who,  and  >ai ,.  m  ■  i  shall  (should) 
hear  witness,  or  cause  to  hear  witness  (§23.  2.  a) 
>ai.  m  ■  1  is  a  verb  from  joico  to  heget,  to  hear  witness-A-ph. 
conjugation-active    voice-regular    (§26)-intransitive.     3d 

sing.  Peal  jOifiO,  Ethpe.  joifloZJ,  Pa.  joiflo,  Ethpa.  'OiooZj, 
Aph.  pret.  ?OlCD(,  Aph.  fut.  jounj-fut.  tense,  masc.  gender. 

7 

In  the  fut.  Aph.  3d.  masc.  usually  we  find  -  in  the  last  sylla- 
ble  ;  but  sometimes  as  here  we  have  -  (§23.2,  where  are  ex- 
amples, with  1  in  the  last  syllable.  Compare  §19,  Tables  I 
and  II).  The  future  tense  is  here  used  in  the  sense  of  the 
subjunctive  mood  imperfect  tense  (§61.  3.  A.  b)  and 
agrees  with  its  nominative  ?  ♦     >  is  a  relative  pronoun-3d 


308  EXERCISE    EIGHTEENTH — PARSING. 

pers.    singular,    masculine-a   prefix-nominativ^e    case   to 

;J._mJ(1fl8.0.    , 

19)  y.  7.  w.  5.,  vOk  to,  against,  on  account  of,  q/-pre- 

.      ^*     *-       ' 
position  governing  pOlQJ  . 

20)  Y.  7.  w.  6.,  1>C71QJ  %A^-verbal  noun  from  JOU  to 
sAme-declension  fourth,  Sd  pers.  singular,  masculine,  em- 
phatic state,  ablative  case  and  governed  by  ^  (1[18.  y). 

21)  V.  7.  w.  7.,  ufci^j-compounded  of  ?  that,  iib  all^ 

every,  and  *jl]  man-}  is  a  conjunction  (§85.  3  &  4,  c?)-prefix 

connecting? 01 — OiJ  and  ^-SD^ou*  ^O  ever^/,  a?^,  is  a  pro- 
noun, but  here  used  as  an  adjective  (§58.  B.  2.  b.  a)  and 

belongs  to  ^ai  ♦  For  declension,  etc.  vid.  ^18. 1.  *-*!  ma7i 

is  a  noun  from  wAJJ — declension  first,  but  is  somewhat  irregu- 
lar-3d  pers.  singular,  masc.   absolute  state,  nom.  case  to 

^^■V)>C7lJ.     For  further  explanations,  vid.  ^  18.  1. 

22)  V.  7.  w.  8.,  ^  SOiOU  migJit  believe-a.  verb  doubly 

irregular,  ]zi  and  ^,  and  is  placed  among  the  defective 

verbs  (§35.  2.  c).     In  the  Aph.  conjugation.  Pe.   ^1, 

Aph.  ^i£2-fcOl,  future  Aph.  ^iQ-»CFlJ-active  voice-intransitive- 
3d  pers.  singular  masc.-future  tense  and  used  in  the  sense 
of  the  subjunctive  mood,  imperfect  tense,  and  agrees  with 

its  nominative    «-*!  (comp.  ^18.  18). 

23)  Y.  7.  w.  9.,  OI^Jq  through  or  hy  the  hand  of  Mm. 
For  parsing,  vid.  ^  18." m.,  where  the  same  expression  occurs. 

24)  Y.  8.  w.  1.,  P  not,  is  an  adverb  and  qualifies  looi  ♦ 

25)  Y.  8.  w\  2.,  OOI  Ae,  is  a  personal  pronoun  separate- 
3d  pers.  singular  masc.  and  nominative  case  to  looi  (comp. 

1fl8-«)-  ,.  .  ,  ■         . 

26)  Y.  8.  w.  3.,    fOOi  tvas-axi  irregular   verb   agreeing 

with    ocji  for  its  nominative  (vid.  ^18.  n). 


EXERCISE   EIGHTEENTH — PARSING.  309 

27)  V.  8.  w.  4.,  IjCJIOJ  UgJd-Si   noun   and   nominative 
case  after  loai  ( vid.  ^18.  y). 

28)  V.  8.  w.  5.,  (]]  5i^^-a  conjunction,  a  contraction  of  U 

not,  and  ^1  if ;  it  continues  the  sense.  Following  this  and 
preceding   the   next  word,  there  is  something   implied; 

after  |J  f  supply  jZojoim-^  ]l]  came  for  a  witness,  the  same 
which  is  expressed  in  verse  7.  For  the  remaining  three 
words  of  this  verse,  vid.^18.  18,  19,  20. 

29)  Y.  9.  w.   1  and  2.,  looi  uiOioA^]  was-a.   verb  and 

agrees  with  IVoiQ-J  understood,  IjCHQ-J  Vjoi  that  light, 
being  implied.     For  parsing  this  verb  fully,  vid.  ^18.  h.  &  c. 

30)  y.  9.' w.  3.,  ;^t/or,  is  a  conjunction  continuing 
the  sense.  ^ 

31)  V.  9.  w.  4.,   (>01Q-J  ?^(77i^-a  noun-nominative  case 
after  fooi  ^oloLl  (vid.  ^[18.  y). 

32)  Y.  9.  w.  5.,  P'r*?  q/"  #rw^/i-compounded  of  j  of,  and 

)^»  truth.    ]yr»  is  a  noun  derived  from  the  verb  >;*  to  he 
coTim/icec^-declension  first  (vid.  §48.  A.  decl.   1.  Kem.)- 

singular.  Construct  and  absolute,  'r»  or  >;•,  emphatic   h'r* 

forming  the  emphatic  state,  from  'r»*  _  falls  away  on  ac- 
count of  the  addition  at  the  end  (§15.  3),  then  -•?  pre- 

7 

senting  two  vowelless  consonants,  ?  takes  the  new  vowel  - 
(§15.  4.  &)-3d  pers.  singular,  masc.-genitive  case  after  > 

j'r*j  fjOlQ-J  is  an  instance 

in  which  the  abstract  noun  \y\M  has  the  sense  of  an  adjec- 
tive, and  the  phrase  is  properly  rendered  the  trite  light. 

7  y 

33)  Y.  9.  w.  6.,  >Ol-J.-isDj  which  shineth,  or  having  shone- 

compounded  of  >ai  l  ^  shineth,  or  having  shone,  and  > 

which.     jouo-Sd  is  an  Aph.  participle  from  Sou,  absolute 
21 


310  EXERCISE    EIGHTEENTH PAKSING. 

with  J  (^18.  5).  >  lohicJi,  is  a  relative  pronoun,  nomina 
tive  absolute  with  >CTUJ-Si>    (§76.  1 ;  ^[18.  3). 

34)  V.  9.  w.  7.,  *A^  Nn\  upon  every  man,  compound- 
ed of  ^  upon  J  ^  every  and  ^ai  man.  V^  is  a  preposition 
governing  the  accusative  or  dative.    ^  is  a  pronoun  used 

adjectively  and  belongs  to  •*-!  (vid.  18.  I).  •.*!  is  a  noun 
in  the  accusative  and  governed  by  ^  (If  18. 1,  9,  21). 

35)  V.  9.  w.  8.,  IM?  who  comes,  composed  of  >  wJiOj  and 
]l\  comes.  ]l'\  is  a  verb-Peal  conjugation,  present  tense, 
and  agrees  with  its  nominative  j  (T[18.  16). 

36)  Y.  9.  w.   9.,  |V^  NnN  into    the  t^orZd-rCompounded 

of  ^   intOj    and    pO-^   the   loorld.     ^   is    a   preposition 

governing  the  accusative.  ]Sn,\s  is   a  noun  from  ^^N 

second  declension.   Absolute  and  construct  VAs,  emphatic 

t^Q^^*  In  SiQ-^  the  final  vowel  —  falls  away  in  the  em- 
phatic state  as  a  syllable  is  added  (§15.  3)-3d  pers.  sin- 
gular, masc.  accusative  case  and  governed  by  i^  ♦ 

37)  V.  10.  w.  8.,  (the  seven  precedinoj  words  are  ex- 

plained  above).  Cl-i,-a  knew  7n'm-compounded  of  OU  hiru, 

and  ^r»  hnew,  ^r»  is  a  verb  with  a  sufl&x  pronoun  at- 
tached* to  it-derived  from  the  Hebrew  2?ii  to  know,  doubly 

anomalous.    •-•^  and  ^-Peal  preterit  -3d  pers.  singular, 

masc.  indicative  mood  and  agrees  with  (^Q-J^i^  ♦  By  taking 
a  suffix  the  usual  form  is  changed.     The  common  form  of 

7X1  7 

the  Peal  preterit  is  ^r»  ♦  -  falls  away  and  -  falls  back  upon 
the  first  radical  when  the   verb  takes  a  suffix  (vid.  §36). 

Ol-  is  a  suffix  pronoun  with  its  union  vowel   (§16.  Tab.  a) 

7 

-3d  pers.  singular,  masc.-accusative,  and  governed  by 

(§54.  B.  1). 


CHRESTOMATIIY. 


CHRESTOMATHY. 

FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING. 
John  i.  1—10. 

♦  looij 
(■1  iin?  ])cnQj  ^oouA^f   U^o  «  |oai  ]^^  cis  4 

•:«  Cn2))|     |J     pQAjaO    *.  )GUlO    POAM^    |)G1QJ    0010    5 

P   7     -X  T>  aj  p  P««7  '^        ,77        »'^       ^pp       7        «P 

^^ou  ,.ai\n>  •  1)'oiqIj  ^"^  >oimj;  V^o>oia^  ]1'\  Ijoi  7 

♦  Ijoiqj  ^  jcjicQjj  IJV  ♦  Ijoiqj  looi  001  O's 
Y2T>  .aAnS  jouSdj  •.  1r^?  Hoidi  -h-^^  looi  ^oioLTo 

P'  iLolio    .  looi  oi,la]-i  V^^^o  •  loOT  1  SnSsn  lo 


314  CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS   IN  TRANSLATING. 

Matthew  ii.  1 — 10. 

3  ^j   msq«*    ♦  ail  y^mV)\  ^l]o  ]L^y^^   ciLdod 
«  oiSoi  :>a^9o|  cnloo    «  ^LiiZZ]o    pllo  «£D>0)ai 

5a.,^V  ^lT  1-jV  ^1?    ♦  »JLjolaL  o2  ^aouioZujiislj 


CHRESrOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING.         315 

Mark  xiv.  32—42. 

.•^CJlOpiSoi^A^k  •rSD|0  .,J^lCOr*i  U'r^ASDj  1pi||AS0y^  oZ|0*  32 

♦  0'rilZZ]o  ]a>01  OQg  >  VZoSqI  |k?^  ^a^^lS  OlS  ^aOI    ]Lp 

)>jjamk)  ^y  "jooi  y^Soo  ♦]i'1  ^^  ^^JO  VVAo  jd»oo*  35 
Ulo*  ♦  j^j  gl  ^A^j  >aiIq^  fi  UJ  ♦Ijot  ^mo  -xiSd  'rT^j  3: 

^Q^Z  P>  C^tO  O'pilZZi*    «  O'rlZASD^    |AlS  Ir-*^  Am^Os]    |]  38 

^llo*  ♦01— ipVp^UI  ♦  l^o^i^o U^^ l^oi  vpn»mi\39 
,>j^»T  *ooZ  1Z|  ^010*   ♦•^1  |A1Sd  wioio  ^.  ^oZio 

1.      0        P  "7  "P       I    7         «>  ••  7      7  o>      ■«  17         7** 

^.4J^j-»   |J0    ♦  ^001  ^r^Cljk  ^OaLi.laA)   \>4^  ♦^inV)>  jS  .Qj] 

♦  ^OOll   pSDJO  ^oJ^l  A!lZj    (Z(0*     .  oil  ^C'r^Op  JliD  OOOl  41 

loio   ♦lAi*  ZZlo  IZ'pM  A^J^   ♦  om^^ZZIo  \uLak)  oaSoj 
loi  ♦^(Ij  oSdod*  ♦  UI^j  ^ootu'[-»1£  ]aj]j  oi*b  5>qSAaSd  J2 

*  «jA  y)NaV)>  001    jd;£) 


Luke  xxiii.  18 — 27. 


X  7         .    ?  7 


lAi^.^o  Zooij  .m>m5cpl  ^^4^?  W  o6\*  ♦l^V^rA^  ,9. 


310         CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING. 

2o^oaiSQi  ViIsd  ^>  ^oZ*    Or*^!  AuTi  looi  lijD>  |]4^o 

•  •I  7     .  •  ?   •  7  *  0^  9        «^  P  -X  I      •   *P 

23  ou^  0001  ^^l«o    •.  toi  IJns  oooi  ^^innZ  ^j  ^qjoi^" 

*  POID  w»i2>)0  .OOl^)  ^OOl^O  |0O1  ^AlO    •  ^0UJQ£1CP> 

II  oail  ^ooil  l-*o*  ♦  .ooiA!i|i  looi'Zj  .oa  ^'j  ^o^iLa* 

T>7  7i>i7  f>0  ■WO*  I7*R*.'« 

•  olU?  001  l^lcol  Zu^  looi  "isoj  U^^o  .m»mfciDl  ^^>4^> 
^6 •,  01^  ^LoqLd  po*   ♦  .ooui.n  A  5>ciL»l  ^j  ^o«i\ 

wiOloll   qSQ£00     *.  lAa'rO  ^  ]L]i  ]  1 1  i>QO  ^\V^a\  OpKil 

P«v  *P?  .'^P  **i»  -"P  7'«9X 

27*1]  QflD  oijAri  looi  Ulo*    .^omaj  oijAs  ^^?   (sludi 

7  OP  y  0        7  -T>7»*  pr 

«  ^OloSs  ^i^O  .Looi  tr^^?  r-^1  ^^     *U£^? 


7  -n         7 


Luke  xxiii.  33 — 42. 

P7  «v7  P  77P7•^»P».  ^%5'' 

33  .^jZ  *^01Q21D1    •.  lA2l£3-rO  Vr^^?  Ir^  fAooA  oZ|  jOO 

-iNp«  •«  7  *  T7  tx  y  J>.P.«X"7P  -X  Pt7 

♦  OUkJm)  ^  r»^0  OlLxSOi  ^  r**   *  |Am^O  ^jOl  ^QJOl^O 

34>..  ]]    ♦.OOlijk    ^Cm»    ]^'\    OoOl    'rSDl    ^QA^    ^?    001* 

om.Xv    GLiiiO)(0    wkOlOA^J  a.wJ^O    •  ^r^^    M^   ^^^f* 

t,  7  I'7  -nP  0      y  IX        0  Z   "  1^^* 

35  OlO  OOOl       >  o  >  <^Vr)Q   ,  I^KiO  ]SD1  ^J  loOl  ^(O*     ♦  JCDS) 


CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING.  3n 

G12     0001     ^^tMlOSOO*       *|0l2^>     Ola*^..      (>.  .^Vnix 

*(Jaj    Oil    ^in;oV)o    oiZol   ^^^'rO    ^.^   V^o >  ^, f)fol 

I  ff7p7'^:>♦^  107  •K  7^  i>  »  P 

Zu|*  ♦  »^Aaj  VmI  Vjoou) "lalSD  001  AjI  ^  ♦oil ^-^lo* g 

•Aa|LD001)0  ZujjOi   *.0Uk3^\ll«£LiAD)VDA2,£l^>l001 

7         P  -x  3  '^  *         7  -^  P  *^    ,.     I  P  7  7     9  x  ff         -n 

^^r'nil  .QJOl  ^.^?  r^*     ♦V»?OCJU>  ]n\V)  QJCTI    ♦  ZuV^TilO  39 

♦•^lo*AOialilooi  ^p^  '.oiSoioooi  ^^nA .  >  1  Amlr^ 

*<»7  7  ^»'^  J>7P7  0  1  ».  7* 

012  IPO*    ♦  ^  ^1  X^O  ^a2U  I^    *•  |m>i«V)  001  Aj]  ^1  40 

AjI  *2)|j   •.  Aj|  \y«M>  joi-^  ^  U  ^ I  ♦  oil  'rSDlo  oi;o»* 

-i»  7  -«P  7  xpi77  px  r  -n 

•^u-.    ^OOl    ^Q*J  »^1     ♦ZU^JP    ^1>*0*    •.U-»r^    M    012  41 
♦  Oil    r».m    U  jlflDJ   5>0^   ^J    pbl    ♦^'rSZI    tr^^lj   *^lo 

P^-X7  ^•^**^''  "  7       7       i\  v.*  7-K 

.  j^^oalSQo  Aj I  (Z] J  tSD  ^;k5  *aj.^p>Zl  ♦  <^0(n\  '^lo*  42 


43 


Luke  xxiii.  43 — 53. 

loOlZ  .kIlSQI  llk}a^>    *•  «A  ij(  'r^l  ^^^1    •  ^QM^   oil  'rSsbl* 

7  p».'»>P  y  ■«        •^••P  y  i\         ..  7  X  p  7       7 

^  I^QAm  1 0010    «  A»  tlA  «^|  ^>  «^001  L^^    *> ]m.^«<y^o  4^ 

*jl2)|  ^'r^^lo  ♦  >*»**  |aSQ»0*  .  ^^A«  M*A1  IkJjJL  ••  ]lJ I  Olio  45 

7    -«        p  p    ..p  p  ««     *    p       7  ■»»     7  *     11"       '      ^^      ? 

.-rSOfO    (SD)    fjQ2  ^QAa  jlOO^     •  OlAl  J^  ^  UOaOI)  (1>Z46 


•ftp  7  'ft77'ft'»>P  «vp  *P  7..       I  p 

^>  \\^  yO*    ♦  VqIsO  '^"I  1 JOI  .  *xja0>  W  y>]fiO  »^p*|2  *jl21  47 

op  T0X7  '1»PP7  77  P  7  ■*■     f  0     *.  * 

lijOl    A^Vr»*r»    ♦'r^lo   loil]]     «M>n»    OoOlJ   ^,SO   ]j0;^10 


318  CHRESTOMATIIY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING. 

48  0001    ^■i.^AJD?  ^aAj]   ^MlD  .001^0*    *]0GI    \cLk^]    In^i 

\^^^'^  p  Qiiaoi   ••looij  ^ySD  ow  p   ♦1>oi  iZvwJ^ 

'O^P-X-XU-X  •«  7  xp  -x  X7 

49  •^OlQlOpi  ^OOlLo   IcLmOJ    ^   OOOl   ^aSAa^O*    .  .OOU^^ 
^U'O     'tJ^^^  ^  CnSDl  «a001  ^Zl>  ^Ai]  taJO    «V!)QAji) 

-^  "»?*'"*>  -«  7  '^  7  7  *«P  7  .t*   p.  ..  7 

50  ^  •.  V4q^Q£3  ^SlTDOi  Olkl©>  y>*  ^?  I'r^M*    <*  ^^Aoi  w»OCJl 

OOP  017  PPP  P7  'X  xpi  PP 

loCT     lnfnV)o    ..oou-LQmlo    ^ooulsll   Iboi    :>qS^ 

-R?  P7X  p  1»  pp  •k''''«''«k^*t''t 

52>5i]»o   ',*cdq4^^^^  ZcA  ,^•^£5  ]joi*    ♦IcnlLj  |Zon\v^l 

Tip  pp-^  0    0  7  -n7  T>  7  -x-^  -n7 

53  oiSomo    ♦IjAoj  Kjlm^  oiopo  oiA>*lo*   ♦ViQAa>  oi;.^2) 

P  I  -n  ^i   7  "■»«''*  p         I  p  4v  V>\ 

loOl  ^^LmSdLL]   NSuJ^r^  *Aj1  Uj  OOl     ♦Vr»^13  ]yQCi£^  ZuTHQ 


Ol£) 


Acts     xvii.  22—32. 

Tc.pT7        'n7  7-n  P7  px7  "•''  P7 

22\'^jZ1  lr^\    ♦'r^l    ^CDO.^  *fiDa»>|£:5    ^CDQ^QS)  ><10    pO* 

7  ..-R      I  7       -n  «^  X     I     7  •«         -X         7  -X  p  "^    P 

ZuKn*]    «^Qr)ALia>  A^r^  A^ooi  lv»^o  Aaooi  «^pALo  >. 

7«  PI  0    Q         7  '  t  ^  X7  9  PJ» 

ooi    Ov^Sx  1^-^?    ♦^••■-^^k  looi   v^^Aoj    \1h^  ]L^ 

pp7iP7/*..7  P7P7rPP  ^    ^  -R 

U  |u,L»t  ^Ij  (Jn^CJUD    •.]l'l?0    l-»^^^?   Vr^   OiOOlO    ♦Ol£i 

r  I)     is  7  PP»«7  ..7X  -K  7   7  f  0  f> 


CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING.  319 

..  777  X  P4,  -^  P<'••^7•^*^  P0         7  *7 

y  7171X  -n  7x7  **.  ■*  7*7 

^1    «^Zulo  ^1iSilZAk)0  ^IjuuM  *rK.   001  OlO*    •  ^JiO  rM28 

7  4v  -X  -«    *  7    *  *^  7  ■"^••x      7  i>  p..p  • 

•  ^OIQ^  OOI  OIISD)  O'riol  ^Q^>    |V^>nM  ^   [mS\   ^|> 

P'Xj)  -x  pi7         01:  •  r  ox  .7^         %' 

IZoiiDolo   ]«=^»\..>   t2)]a^   0I     ♦♦]SD]ml   ol    iaoiA? 

77  P-X  0  '^          -n  -  7  9,%^         \m^     m^"  0Pfi7l>7         X 

•oil  UcLiA.4j  'huo  U^l*    ♦  iZoOllL  ViiDj  (AJ'r^>  lAlpi^O  30 

^Qyj>  fltL  oioj  IldoI  5>ai^lj  ^*5yl4^*  ♦  %ooAj  ]soj  ^5y£s  ^i 

«.  I  7  779»7P  77  p*>i  •P«kP7 

7  7  1»..i  »i»  -RI77  ■*     *^     e  7  Q 

7  I         7  «K         n  -n  ..I  ■»  »  ff  » 

*oooi   ^  >  ^  >  ^ v>   ^ooiik)    *.|A^i^   LaJOi  ^y    \t^ak.o 

■np  7P7XP  ^  75  7  i.j^  * 

>l>ai^>^i^iiSV)«  ^>*1  ^^  ♦0001  ^'riol  ^oouLoo 


"Romans    vi.  1 — 10. 

77^9*.  70          I  7  .pi>7  ''_^..  Iff^PP 


•  jAjiZZ  IZqo^j  1Aa4>j^  010  looj  .  -rSolj  ^5ui5oi  U^^* 


320         CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSL  iTING. 


Hi 


*.wiC7iQL£^|)  (AAjaosAr:)  (A^iD  A.>^  ^  |M>>a^  v^qa^  ^O) 

5  ^^21  ly*xOl    -H^O*     *>^™  Ur^  l-"^**^  ^:^  ^1  ^^ 

■n-n  i»pr  opro.  -«  7  p»v  7  -^7 

•loaU    OlAV^iOn    »£)|    (isoi    *.oiZqSd)     IZoSDr^   CflSOl 

P  T77*  -«r  -n^jipxy  7  0       7  -K  7       10 

6  (•  ^    \>4^Ajj     ♦  OlSQl   *2IO>l|  JOaAl  ^'rlli?  '^y  ^luJLpi* 

771^  T>  IP.  7  ti"  ^  9^  "^      ^         ^t  *"«  "k"  ^' 

'n7  pi  7  I  ip.         •?>  pi  -n  t\ 

*  0«pi  7  ■n'-ip  >-A^x.p  I  7  -^7 

•air:)  ^AaSd  P  IZqSoo    *Z1so  (J  «£}oZo    .iZuib  A.>^ 

•X  777  '»"  '^  7I7■^  I 

10001  ..A^  ^.A-M>o   .^1   Ih^  AjlSd  0(71  lAif)»»\  'pi..  Zul^>^ 

0  p  7 

<  ♦» 

CoLossiANs  iii.  1 — 15. 


P7  5  77'n  ""•'  ^     "••      ^  P  I     7  7  -"  P 

2»U'ki?     "O     Q1)Z1     ^\Aj*      .loil^J     ]liV>i     ^     ^Zu 

8  .lail]al»»,i«^><ii^^4mOynnl'lMO  .'r^.  ^onL^oZZuk)* 

Ov  7  0  t\        'D  "  7  7  *.       «■.  ;j  -no*!  7  7         "K 

4  .oAj]  ^1  ^r>^    ♦♦^^JuM  OiOOlJ  U^ASD  VjulaSD)  ^uASdIo* 

•>.       "     7     0   7  I.p  17  P  .X  '»>7  -X  ^ 

5  .QO^lDjOl     \UJD01    0A.ii^f=^      •jjj.£iQJLQ    oiSoi    ^a\..ZZ 

l2ano\\o  .VAm^lLy^olSl^o  tZQ£ii4Ucuj{  .U'l^? 

6  01]..  O J  ]l]    ;a-.    ^^01   ^4^*     ,\fDLSi    AAj^J    »^01    *a01J 


CHRESTUMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING.  321 

*^  y  »  -riff*  9      «^         9  X  ■»«  ff  e..f  T  00  7 

IZoJLk^    «|ASQajH>\0>    ♦^a^OI  ^Ollo  ^niV)  CUj^aJ]  ^> 
Ul  ♦  r»*^  r**  r*^  r^  ^OOOlZ  |Jo*    ♦t2ll4  jJNSnV)    ♦]£)JCL.  » 

y  7  »PP-X  rp7rjrr*?7  't'lo 

A^j  p*  ♦ou-r^^j  (ZqLd^  |A^r>^  Z^a^ASdj  |Zh^  onn\o*  n 

PP-X  IS  7  1\         -cy  f>     I-7          P     P  7        p..  7  7  I    •? 

\zuMOyo  Isom'j  •.lria^L»aO  1*^,^  loil^j  l^n..  >^1  ^"{s-kaoi 

»P-Xj  a^k  17  m.i>*    •X  X  •'>PJ»«'X  T7  m.(>  J    *.  X        7 

•  P^O)  Zo'ra.^0  IZokkoJo  .IjLkA)  ZoninV)0  ♦lZoV)imno 

i-R  7  7  ^P7  71  7  ^77 

•X  7  PI  7P77PP-X  '"'••''  Si 

I^dom   ^oiLd  ^i\cn  >Qio*  ♦onan*  ^oAj|  *2)|  liaoiu 

77  «Pi  7  •"•?7  ^'j''^  X7^PP  »>*>  ^ 

•^jJ     ]»»  I  aV)?      CFlSQ^O*        •  (ZO'H^o?      M3W     CLiOOlJ  l3 

n  7  «,  7  7  7  7  *"  ^  lC  «*  *'»"''     1* 

♦-♦• 

Revelations    v.  1 — 10. 

pp  OP  7  "»>P  7  •T>i7  T*y 

V^Ao    •.^coqjojZ  ^  ^A^j  o6i>  oii.V)*  ^  Aiwo*  i 

»7*,7  X7P  Ti  -^  7  ■*  X7 

•uOioAu!  QiSb  •.fiD)  iJno  ipSD?  VjAIa-m  p]Jk5  A^u*o* » 


322         CHRESTOM.VTHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING 

spo*    ♦*oilu>  ]i£4-^   |;aV)No    ♦♦JsAal  ^Aaiol  1q«j 

7  P  9       7  7       0  f>  O        7  y  P  -R  T»  p 

Vk         •%    ^     "       X^  7*-n.p  7  i<  !>  l>  -x     -K.  17 


7'^_'^         17  tvP 


0>  lypp-R  -7  ik'*^  »P  7  i>  '7970  p 

OCT  ♦hO>>  Vr^^  oux     :l>ooi^j  lA:s*p»  ^?  ooi  tij]  ]oi  toi 

P7  7  .^^  •*^_'"P..'  ''t''  PP. 7  7-n 

0     0      7  T>  X  pi  7  -ftp  p-n  T<i7»>»p 

0       0       ^7  ■r>  7  7  0      O  7  ■^0  7  -ni7 

7  -R..  I7P  7  xiN4».p  PP..   7  77..  -np 

»£DlJa^O  (>Au^  ^OOUSD  pM  ,w\n\  A^l  p    ♦  Vr^I?  ^^OlOlDrO 

■np  IP7P7  PfV  •"  177  -HI7 

*>     •»!  1*       I  -R..P  7  7-R7  *"'•''  '''"«  ''"^ 

^^^4^  •  cilji)  ]LdAm^  ,^t^^\o  *.|r:^AiL^  ,nmV^\  ^^A^l 
lAo'^  \o  ^    ♦♦^A^?  P^r^  Icn^U  ^  Air^io  AfioiuZlj 

1^..  w  7ipp''«yl»  V'7  9*.  P7  PP"" 

10  ]r>Vvn  ^JS^j   loiL]]    ^QjI   Z^TilO*    ••IALDoIo   ]SD10   U^O 

p7  7  X  7-  -R..     p 


CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING.  323 

Revelations   xxii.  1 — 10. 

J      7  -X  7  0  X    7        '"••7  P       7..  0  7  x  i       7 

PX  '••*•  *P07  «^7  7*  -Filliff  'W..7 

(jAj  ^\00*    ♦]SQSm>  IZouDdIJ    .*(m>o^  .  .mr)c^"(^n    ^Oli^j^ 

'     •«  -K       •       P  £»  i»  7.      7  0     0  7  P    ?  7  *^  -n  *    A 

.(ooij  oio  Vr^l  ooijo  |oi^>  ^cdqjojZo  *^ol  loou  U 

»G1^)    ]£20«*r£)    ^Vk»JO*      « ^^OUJQJliQAJ     01^9     Ti^O  ^ 

l>aiQj50    ♦♦'L;*j  l>oiQjj  UcjQCD  ^ooi-ik  looiJ  Uo  .^ooZ 

.QOLSOJO      ♦^OOIJ^     JCJUiiD    IoIjL    Jj'rSDj    ^SD     /|mSQ«> 

!?i)i7  PP  ••7  -^1>  "^P  I  7*  -^..p  n..  p 

.  oi^aj    plJSDi^   *^  wiJ)r*  V«^^?    U*oyy    |oi-^  ti-fk)© 
♦^,jiJD  IooiSd^  ^jlj  ^-Aoi    ♦♦oiL^j  ],n\l  OiOAjlai 

9     p        7     P      -X  17^  -n"  •  7p  •7PP  «^  7  P       ^""^        ^ 

i»T»7  TiO-ftp  7P  •7P7».P'»>  P  PP 

A!.Sd«  po  :^loi  li.**o  MSq«>  001  ^TmOi  \i\  *alo*  ♦poi  s 

•7  P'7      7  ..     7      -h  P  7  *  t"         '"  "^  '       ^^  ? 

001   p1J!^>  *^oiq^.j  ^jO  y..«iV)\  Alaj  ••Zuv^o  p] 

.9      X         P  P  P  X  17        1.  C     '  C  -i"  -T      ^  * 

j^^ajlAlO    ^♦U    ♦  w»V^»  »-ilJ^ 'r^lO*    ♦^-i^Ol^A^  (001  IOmIDjQ 


1^    9        7  .■*      '^ 


'loA09  |]SQ^  ^*r4^?    ^^01)0    ^X^Sn  s/^A'i   W1)0     /^Zu] 

rt        .V  XT'**     T^**  'X  ■'^l^  "X.  y  ti  ^  (?P^  Q       P 

]Zai^j?  ]]Sq1  :>ooAjaZ  |]  uA  '^lo*  .  ?Q.^  loilU  .  poi  lo 

7      X  17  1>  P  7   Ni     '7  P       P  P     P        7 

♦  ^OIoAj]  ^n^'r^))  'ri^.  U^l  OOI  .^JOl  ]*dAo> 


321         CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IX  TRANSLATING. 

Revelations  xxii.  11 — 21. 

11  .JDa^    ^^^     'IK?    ®^®     .*S0Z    ^QU      ,^QSV))    001* 

^0  'K  77-KPir  «v  T>  '"^',*"  I7PI7 

i2|cn*   .jiioZ  «^r^Aj  (AJriDo  *«£:)oZ  ^^^u  iZon^^na^^io 
yj\  y^Loi  ^-^aiiA  ♦...iDi  .A^j  l^lo   AIl  |j1_1Z1 

(,       0  7  •?  I  7       0  0  0  -^  *     I  p-  0  7  I 

13  (>Vn,o    001     .OZO    *21-S^   ]j(    pf*     •  Ol^^?    fr^Iii   *a010A-i(> 

J'i  .QJOl  .QjI    pAiSC3l4*    ♦|V>\o»    0010  ]ma>  001    .(ji'rwl  0010 

.^OOll^J  U4^C^    lOOUJ   ]iaji|    «Olla>    Py£5C£il   ^r^il? 

-no  i>.p  Ov  »7  y  P  ?•"*■       '  ■*•♦?"  *..P   7 

(Tiio  ^>a»a9)  ^o  ♦IpAa  « i  »»S'g)0  Uq^do  ^Ujio  }*-h^o 
iG  onl  o>oimSn\  \>A.>>  ]D|]LQ-ik  Zj^s  ^qa^  p]*   .|ZqX»  ? 

7  17  P'^  0     0  -K  '7  7xp•^P  P«'i  P  t^     " 

»^1   •r»oj>  ]mi..  o  V,m  001  *-iA^l  W  .IZyL  ^^o  ^^^oi 

I  ->  P  7  P    «v  PP  7  .7  P  I   7  P  7  .7 

17»^-Ad1   lAloO    P^OJO*     .K2)»    OOl    '.(mwi^    JiQOQD    001 

■np  .7  TNi-»»7«7'^P  71       ^7      P  -7  P 

♦"la.  J    0010    ♦UVj  loitj  OOIO     OZ    ♦•ri>o]j  MSQ«?  OOIO     ,]l 

•^  71..  7P  ■'^f"  ""P  P7'»>  y*'  ?    7..  7    -n 

X  ""         1^  .  "^  C*         i^-K  AiJ     P         »   P     ^         7      -P.   -x  X       7 

^^mi  •,^01.1-^  ;>Qa.£CJ  ^Aj|  ^(j  ♦poi   MdAoj  |ZQa.Q]> 

P  -n  PPPP  7  0»«X79P..     7  7  PP7 

19  ^  ^lo*  ♦Ijoi  XciLzia  ^tliAdj  IZowid  ^oioli  loi!^ 
oiAiSqI  |oi}^  >^£ij  .fjoi  IZoi-jQjj  }oAa>  (J^  ^  5^£u 

p..     X7  P  17  .ppi  i>  T>..  7  p  7  » 

^njAa?  ••lAmajD  ^^oi   lAi^rSD  ^Loo    ««]jum>  ]miO  ^lo 

7  P»P  X  "ftp-B  7  .77<»  PPPp7 

20  ^U^  WUl  ♦♦^l  ♦^i^oi  joimlDj  001  ;Sd1=^   ."(joi  IrsAaiD 

7P  X  *.'*7P  -n-X  7  Ov-nppp  17 

21  i»Ql  "Ufc-i-aV)  ^QA^  ^'rSOJ  OlZon*^*    ♦^Q*j  ]ji'^  IZ     .^-ilol 

X7-RX7         4,  «, 

♦  ^jir)!  .]ii.*^^  ^ooij^ 


CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IX  TRANSLATING.  325 

Psalm  xlv.  1 — 10. 
,>ia\  :]alSQl  ^^ioi  i^]o  ,yL(,  Ua^iAa  ^jltA  ^]*i 

^    JQDJ     :]il    »^*A^Q*0  j^JJOl*     'Vr^^l    .^.'i\»»n  ]'^ifif>4 

lA^r^   ^aSai    ♦IZoooi)   ]ii2qLdo   ]AsQ£)9   IaXsd 
]oV^  ♦  ^^ZomZ  . olgu  ]v^Snso  ^ i  1  i  1  •  *^>\< *  tj^juicajo 
,^>v>V  ^\sl  IcFili.  .^.i«>?QS^  : ]"^\V)>  >acnnnn','\s'o>  e 
A>ipr>n  1Zqq.i?i  ASOwj*  t  >^Znn\V)>  14^*  l^'Jka  U^^i»  7 
jaA^  IZorAij  t*iwAk)  : ^^oi!^  loOL  .^.K»aV>  |joi!^4^  .]]q:^ 

Z«^*  :  ^Qjir**  *-»ZcA  ^o  'U'-''  Bii^oi  ^  ♦j^-i^orilo 


Psalm  li.  1—10. 
..>vn^r>  lAmloo  :Aj14m  >^>QuSn  ^*  .^^lao^Qjl^ 


326         CHRESTOMAIHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING. 

6^>   AjI*    :*jlLd1    ^jLjAi4r:)   Ioi^mjdo    Ai^^Z]    ]]qisj 

7«£D0)'<'      :wkjAl>0]    ^ASOILm)    lA>rnnr>     «Aj^.     lA^QOiD 
•  •  •  •     o  . 

:  joL]  ]^Z  ^o  cjini  ,iii\\>'i    ♦  ]djI]o  Isjopii  -  Av 
9:*i»»S  wiZnS'ocf)  ^GiLso   *^6i^  ^  y^^]  y^Cl]* 


Psalm  civ.  1 — 10. 

1  IbaiO  lOkl  :  «£^  ^'r^  ^Ot!L  Vr^  •  V»n^  «»«^1  ^u^'^^^' 
2*^1    UiO*  o^ASD    :  Uo^'r^  5^1  UCJIOJ  *jl£QoZ]0*    ♦  ,an\ 

5]]>  ♦oujiiASiD  ^IijI^Z]*  :  Ir^  1)QJ  •^0iQimS£iAk30 
6  ♦^ouAxmi  Uo-i'r!^  )^1  V^oaiZ*  :  ^^»<n\s  :>q1i1  wiJ^oiZ 
7j^.*iQii>l]o^o  ♦^-i^'ri;^Z|o^*  :"lliDQkiDlja4^o 
sAioZjliZlo  ♦lAioa  oAmjo  1jcl4  nnSm*  :^-i^oi)ASd 

10  t^  inSoilD  l?Q-4  AiaQo  ♦]1^q  Uo^i^  Z>,ji^ 


CHRESTOMATHY. 

KOTES  ON  THE  READING  LESSONS- 


After  having  analyzed  the  first  page  of  the  Chrestomathy,  and  thus 
given  a  specimen  of  the  manner  in  which  the  learner  should  proceed  in 
reading  his  first  lessons  in  Syriac,  it  will  only  be  necessary,  in  re- 
spect to  the  remaining  pages  of  the  Chrestomathy,  to  explam  the 
derivation  and  formation  of  the  most  difficult  words  which  there 
occur.  Thus  the  student  will  be  thrown  upon  his  own  resources,  and 
be  induced,  it  is  hoped,  to  assiduously  study  his  grammar. 

EXPLANATIONS. 

Matthew  ii.    1 — 10. 

1)  Yerse  1.  word  3.,  r^^l  is  a  verb  in  the  Ethpeel  conjugation, 
from  r-i^* 

2)  V.  1.  w.t.,  wilOQa^  is  compounded  of  O  a  preposition  and 
«a10CLa  a  noun  of  the  fourth  decl.  construct  plural,  from  ^Q-i  • 

7  -»>  ?    * 

3)  Y.  1.  w.  10.,  oZ]  is  a  verb  from  ]l]  Pe.  pret.  3d.  masc.  plural 

(vid.  1fl8.  16). 

7  *» 

4)  Y.  2.  w.  5.,  ^^a1»t  is  a  verb  from  |V*** 

5)  Y.  2.  w.  10.,  -tfinV)  is  a  verb  m  the  mfin. pret.,  from  jv-CD ♦ 

6)  Y  3.  w.  5.,  ^l221  is  a  verb  in  Ethpeel  conjugation,  from  ^0\ 
or  ^1  ♦ 

7)  Y.  4.  w.  1.,  •.■la  is  a  verb  in  Pa.  conjuga<;ion,  from  *Aia. 


328  NOTES  ON  THE  CHRESTOMAIHY. 

8)  Y.  4.  w.  2.,  tOOllo-from  Lo  and  takes  the  noun  suffix-3d 
masc.  plural. 

9)  Y.  4.  w.  3.,  .-i^^-constr.  plural  from  *Sj  ♦ 

10)  Y.  4.  w.  1,  \>)ASsD-is  a  part,  from  \]m  . 

11)  Y.  4.  w.  8  and  11.,  ]6a\ jSJ'Asb*     These  two   words 

indicate  the  imperfect  tense,  the  latter  word  being  a  passive  parti- 
ciple  (  vid.  §  64.  2.  B.a;  §  65.  B.  a). 

12)  Y.  6.  w.  6.,  *jA-»001  is  a  verb  in  the  second  person  from  |OCn  • 

13)  Y.  6.  w.  12.,  *£5QaJ-third,  masc.  fut.  Pe.,  from  *n2LJ» 

14)  Y.  6.  w.  15.,  «->aiOi    \p  is  a  verb  in  the  fut.  with  suflBx,  from 

15)  Y.  1.  w.  8.,  M-Jipb   is   compounded   of   P-»1   and    d    (vid. 
Lexicon), 

16)  Y.  T.  w.  10.,  •-iVmZI  is  a  verb  in  Ethpe.  pret.  from  ll>*» 
It)  Y.  8.  w.  6.,  Q^l  is  a  verb  in  the  imperative  from  ^ll  (vid. 

§28.  1  and  2). 

'^    7  -n   7 

18)  Y.  8.  w.  Y.,  n*^OS,  imperative  from  «*^OS» 

19)  Y.  8.  w\  12,,  «jiC31jLJ0A**.a»(j  is  composed  of  *aOU-meaning 
/im-3d.  masc.  suffix,    y  that  a  conjunction*-and  JOA*xS«|  averb 

7 

in  Aph.  conjugation,2d.  plural,  from  t»»  >T ♦ 

20)  Y,  8,  w.  13.,  o2  is  a  verb  2d.  pi.  masc,  (vid.  §  28.  2.  Rem.)- 

p  «    * 

imperative  from  (2|  /o  co77?e. 

21)  Y.  8.  w,  14.,  wiJOlOM  is  a  verb  from   (Om 2d.  masc. 

plural,  imperative,  with  a  suffix  pronoun  (vid.  §  3t.  table  of  verbs  IJ 
with  suffixes  ;  §  3t.  3). 

22)  Y.  ID.  w.  5.,  CLir^is  a  verb  from  \r>^* 

23)  Y.  10.  w.  t.,  \Lay  is  an  adjective  noun,  fern.  sing,  construct, 

from  t^)  ♦ 

*In  connection  with  the  preceding  word  P^;  it  forms  a  compound  conjunction 
meaning  when.  (vid.  ^  85  4.  d.  a). 


NOTES  ON  THE  CHRESTOMATHY.  329 

Mark  xiv.    32 — 42. 

24)  V.  32.  w.  4.,  ]1'^ALd>  is  composed  of  ]l*r^^  and  J  • 
The  relative  J  with  the  preceding  pronoun  should  be  rendered  that 
which  (vid.  §  56.  3.  a)-^;iASjD  is  an  Ethpe.  pass,  participle,  from 

25)  Y.  32.  w.  8.,  oaZ-imperative  from  ^tl  (§  29.  2.  Rem). 

26)  Y.  32.  w.  11.,  "t^LSC-Pa.  act.  participle  from  tl.  • 

27)  Y.  33.  w.  1.,  O^IQdASq^  is  composed  of  the  prefix  preposi- 
tion and  the  verb — infinitive  Ethpe. 

28)  Y.  33.  w.  8.,  QQlZAi-^O  is  composed  of  the  conjunction  O, 
the  prep.  ^^  and  the  verb  in  the  infinitive  from  *OQl  or  JO^  ♦ 

7      7  <j 

29)  Y.  34.  w.  9.,  OQO-  imperative  from  |QO* 

30)  Y.  34.  w.  11.,  0*p^ZZ]o-imperative,  Ethpe.  from  >OLor;^. 

31)  Y.  35.  w.  9.,  (n>'mV)-Aph.  fem.  participle,  from  «»»n»« 

32)  Y.  35.  w.  10.,  'r^T-Pe.  future,  from  'r^* 

33)  Y.  37.  w.  5.,  ^^^^?  is  a  participle,  plural  from  «,iaV>?  and 
that  from  the  verb  ^^^?  ♦ 

34)  Y.  37.  w.  15.,  b'riZASD-infinitive,  Ethpe.  from  )Q1  or  'A* 

35)  Y.  38.  w.  2.,  qS.  ^ra2/-imperative,  Pa.  from  1^^* 

36)  Y.  38.  w.  4.,  ^qSsZ  {yQ)shallmter-'?Q.  fut.  2nd.  plural,  from 
^SLorV^i. 

37)  Y.  38.  w.  8.,  In  I  \^\  willing-SLCt  part.  f.  Pa.  from  %£)Q4  • 

38)  Y.  40.  w.  9.,  .OCJllLii  their  eijes-from  \ij^  with  a  plural 
suffix  pronoun. 

39)  Y.  40.  w.  10.,  Tr^-Q^  heavy-SiU.  adjective  in  the  plural,  from 

17  ^ 

10  7  X 

40)  Y.  40.  w.  13.,  ^^^r*  knew-from  ^r»  ♦ 

41)  Y.  41.  w.  8.,  OMuuZZlorg^^ye-Ethpe.  imperative  from  ***QJ 

or 


330  NOTES  ON  THE  CHRESTOMATHY. 

42)  y.  41.  w.  14.,  ^(l^tMl^  being  betrayed-Eth^pe.  participle  from 

43)  Y.  42.  w.  2.,  ^Uj  future  of  ^ll  to  go. 

44)  Y.  42.  w.  6.,  y>\« V)  betraifing-Aiph.  participle  from  !^\ii  ♦ 


Luke  xxiii.    18 — 27. 

45)  Y.  18.  w.  1.,  Qi^  cried  out-Sd.  masc.  plural,  from  lio  ♦ 

46)  Y.  18.  w.  6.,  *jiau.-^QO»  take  him  away-2n6..  masc.  plural, 
imperative,  with  suffix  pronoun  (vid.  §  36.  E  table  of  suffixes). 

47)  Y.  20.  w.  8.J  IjmJ-future  from  I',*  to  release. 

48)  Y.  21.  w.  6.,  .-iai^aQDI  cn<a/i/ /^m-imperative,  with  a  suffix 

7 

from  ^SiO]  ♦  ^   ^ 

49)  Y.  22.  w.  19.,  ^(JlQ^yj]-I  ivill  chastise  him-fat.  1st.  sing.  Pe. 

10  , 
>J  with  a  suffix  pronoun. 

50)  Y.  22.  w.  21.,  ^aiQjLQ-^l*l-/  will  let  him  ^o-future,  Pe. 

7 

1st.  singular,  with  a  suffix  pronoun,  from  Q£l»  ♦ 

X  £>•  7  7    • 

51)  Y.  23.  w.  3.,  |^»*^oZ  with  OOOl  urged-a  part,  from  «jQDZ« 

52)  Y.  23.  w.  10.,  *jOLilJQ21£)P   (that)   they  shall  crucify  him- 

7 

pret.  Pe.  fut.  3d.  masc.  plural,  with  suffix  pronoun,  from  »2ID1  (vid. 
§  36.  Table). 

53)  Y.  24.  w.  4.,  loofZ  should  Z>e-future   of  ibcjl  ♦ 

54)  Y.  24.  w.  5.,  tOaiAjLj*  (according  to)  ^Aejr  fife^ire-a  feminine, 
sing,  noun,  with  a  plural  suffix  (§16.  Table). 

55)  Y.  25.  w.  16.,  ^Oll^Q*    their  wHI-sl    noun   with   a   suffix 
plural  from  .  lO •  • 

56)  Y.  26.  w.  2.,  ^-\or>V>  leading  or  causing  to  lead  away- Aiph. 
part,  plural  from  nSHa  ♦ 

y     *  7   -^ 

57)  Y.  26.  w.  4.,  0,.>*1  /ai^  Mc?  o/-from  h^|  ♦ 


NOTES  ON  THE  CHRESTOMATHY.  33] 

58)  Y.  26.  w.  13.,  ^4J  might  carry-Mnre  from  ^. 

59)  Y.  2T.  w.  8.,  xr^r^  bewailivg-Aph.  part,  from  fOy  ♦ 


Luke  xxiii.  33 — 42. 

60)  Y.  33.  w.  5.,  ]I*r^^  calkd-Ethpe.  pass,  participle,  from  1  JjO  • 

61)  Y.  34.  w.  7.,  ^Ql^m  fargive-imi^eTSitiye,  from  -<^^^  • 

62)  Y.  34.  w.  16.,  Oiiiillcii^^-Aph.  3d.  plural  from  lioi. 

-no  p 

63)  Y.  35.  w.  1.,  ^\o  ^/aTi^^iwfi'-participle  from  ^OO* 

64)  Y.  35.  w.  12.,  VlfAjU  to  o^^^r^-plural  from  ^>*l-with  the 
prefix  prep.  Lomad. 

X  7  y 

65)  Y.  35.  w.  13.,  .~i-m1  saved- Ai^h.  pret.  from  1jl>** 

66)  Y.  35.  w.  14.,  ih*»i  shall  save-Ai^h.  future,  from  m-m* 

17       7 

67)  Y.  36.  w.  1.,  ^-i^MpQSO- mocA;i7?^-part.  from  »A*1^  • 

68)  Y.  37.  w.  8.,Vki1  save-imperat.  Aph.  from  m-m  ♦ 

7    7   * 

69)  Y.  42.  w.  3.,  wi.lap>Z'|   re?mmher  ww-imperat.  Ethpe.  with 

7 
suf.  from  J3?  ♦ 


Luke  xxiii.  43—53. 

70)  Y.  45.  w.  3.,  ^fif}^  was  rent-Eth-pe.  part,  from  Ij-*    2  is 
transposed  and  changed  into  ^  (§  12.  2.  Rem.). 

71)  Y.  46.  w.  3.,  yio  voice-mill  a  prefix  preposition. 

..    •  X  7 

72)  Y.  46.  w.  7.,  )^r*t^  ^^^o  %  A<i?i<^5-from  r*  with  a  prefix 
preposition,  and  a  suffix  pronoun. 

73)  Y.  46.  w.  8.,  ^]SD  am/iding-Fe.  £ict.  participle  from  ^Om •. 

74)  Y.  48.  w.  4.,  ^'^-<^    caTM  together- Aph,  pret.  plural  from 


332  NOTES  ox  THE  CHRESTOMATHY. 

75)  Y.  48.  w.  16.,  tOaUrAA   their    breasts-from    p^M  with  suf. 
plural. 

1Q)  Y.  49.  w.  1.,  ^-1 — SQajD  5^<z?i^m^-part.  Pe.  plural  from  ^do  • 

77)  Y.  49.  w.  6.,  wiOlQlOpU  his  a cqimintance-f rom   (lOpk  with 
suffix. 

78)  Y.  51.  w.  7.,  ]^£QSD-?/?ai;m^-participle  from  pCD . 

79)  Y.  53.  w.  1.,  GlLtJ\^took  dozen- A])h.  pret.  from  AajJ* 

80)  Y.  53.  w.  8.,  |;>m  <rZ?*^  c»z6^-part.  passive,  Peal  from  ;OJ  ♦ 

81)  Y.  53.  w.  13.,  UL^ll'fwas  /«i^-Ethpe.  pret.  from  Joio  ♦ 
2  is  doubled  (vid.  §  12.  2.  Rem  ;  §  31.  2). 


Acts  xvii.  22—32. 

82)  Y.  23.  w.  3.,   j^pAi  passing  J^-Ethpe.  part,  fi'om  j^p  ♦ 

83)  Y.  23.  w.  9.,  AakOsI  Ifound-Aph.  pret.  1st.  singular  from 


84)  Y.  23.  w.  14.,  OlAl  o7ii^^  with  a  suffix. 

85)  Y.  23.  w.  29.,  ;nfnV)  dedare-Vsi.  part,  from  ;^m  • 

7      7  -K  -K     7 

86)  Y.  25.  w.  2.,  vASDAAk)z(;or5>^i;)pMzo'-Ethpa.part.fr'omvaSQ*. 

87)  Y.  26.  w.  8.,  .OOCru  shall  he,  with  ^J^  should  dwell^Ye. 
fut.  3d.  plural  of  the  defective  verb  (001  ♦ 

88)  Y.  27  w.  2.,  ^^>S*^  ^ee/cw^-participle  from  h^iS* 

17  7 

89)  Y.  27.  w.  4.,  ^^  I  ^nsV)^  seeJcing,  feding-Fsiel  pass,  participle 

-R    7 

from  t'^ns  ♦ 

7X7  7 

90)  Y.  28.  w.  4.,  ^^  >  >  »>  o?^r  /i/e-pl.  absolute  form  with  suf.  ^« 

»-«  ••    7 

from  |i  ■  »»♦ 

7  T         I  -R 

91)  Y.  28.  w.  5.,    ,^1  iNilZAk?    our    moving-Ethi^e.   part,   and 
suffix  from  ^01  or  ^1» 


NOTES  ON  THE  CHRESTOMATHY.  333 

92)  y.  28.  w.  6.,  ^A^l-ftrg-lst.  person  plural  from  A*]  * 

93)  Y.  28.  w.  12.,  t<l^>  who  with  3/<7!*-compose(l  of  tOO  you^ 
\  with  and  >  wJw. 

94)  y.  28.  w.  16.,  ^01 Q^   our  offspring-from  ^OIQ^   with 
buffix  pronoun. 

7  10      7  Of 

95)  y.  29.  w.  8.,  ^^1  >ni  M  our  debt,  from  «*^i  n  with  a  suflBx. 

96)  y.  29.  w.  9.,  'rODQk)  to  /AJTz^-infinitive,  Pe.  from  •rico* 

97)  y.  29.  w.  15.,  Ja.»^. ..  wri/^en  or  ^mre?i-participle,  Pe.  from 

98)  y.  29.  w.  16.,  IZoiSooliD  by  art,  from  VZoiliol . 

99)  y.  30.  w.  15.,    .jQoAj   shall  repent-Mnre  Pe.  from   *OoZ 
or  *oZ  ♦ 

•X        7  p 

100)  y.  31.  w.  6.,  tOplj  that  shall  judge-Mnre  Pe.  from  tj  with 
the  prefix  J  ♦ 

X       •    7 

101)  y.  31.  w.  14.,  %jl1£)|0  a7id  showed,  made  knovytir-A^h.  from 

17  ^ 

102)  y.  32.  w  8.,  ^.».Qa.SqSD  moc/aVio-participle,  Pa.  from  *OQiD» 


Romans  vi.  1 — 10. 

OOJ  shall  remain-Pa.,  future  from  |QO  ♦ 

104)  y.  1.  w.  8.,  jAjZZ  5A«/Z  Se  a52*w^?i^-Ethpa.  future  from  )Aa  ♦ 

105)  y.  2.  w.  t.,  1*J^J  5^^//  /jf6-future  Pe.  from  ^Lm* 

7     7 

106)  y.  3.  w.  6.,  ^A^^}   who    were  baptized-^ret   Pe.   1st.   pi. 

7*7 
com.  from  r^Q^  with  the  prefix  >  ♦ 

•  7  -A 

lot)  y.  4.  w.  1.,  ^;i:ioZ|   are  bu.riedr-Ethipe.  pret.   1st.  pi.  com. 
7 
from  ;A0  * 

•\    » 7 
108)  y.  4.  \v.  14.,  wiOlQOljo/i^w/k^Aer-a  noun  jn  the  suffix  state, 


334  NOTES  ox  THE  CKRESTOMATHY. 

3(1.  masc.  singular,  from  %Ci  f  with  the  prefix  >  ♦ 

109)  Y.  4.  w.  20.,  jAcnJ  5Aow/<i  ic«/^-future  Pa.  from  y\a\  ♦ 

110)  Y.  5.  w.  4.,  ^O  f.iL\  have  been planied-Ethipe.  pret.  from  JD  ^* 

111)  Y.  5.  w.  11.,  loau  5Aa//  Z>e-future  Pe.  from  looi. 

112)  Y.  6.  w.  1.,  ,^1  iSr»  A-TiMTw^-participle,  witli  a  suffix  from 

113)  Y.  6.  w.  5.,  «£lO>lf  is  cruciJiedr-Ethpe.  pret.  from  *2LD1 « 

114)  Y.  6.  w.  1,  ^^)^Aj>  ^A«i  5Ao?*/^^  Je  rfe^^r^j^/e^-Ethpa.  from 
^^s4^  with  the  prefix  j  ♦ 

*  7  I    * 

115)  Y.  8.  w.  6.,  ^SlLiGU  Jg/igre-Aph.  future  from  ^Sd^  * 

116)  Y.  8  w.  10.,  |j1j%A^)!/Z  fe-future  Pe.  from  ]1m. 

IIY)  Y.  9.  w.  13.,    .^^Amk)    beiTig  powerful-Ethpa.   participle 
from  «^^-^  * 

118)  Y.  10.  w.  9.,  *a-M  living-peirt.  Aph.  from  (xa** 


CoLossiANS  iii.  1 — 15. 

119)  Y.  1.  w.  1.,  QikO  ^ed-unperative  of  JIS* 

7  7      '^ 

120)  Y.  2.  w.  2.,  QI9Z)  lei  your  affections  he  ^Zacft^-Ethpe.   im- 
perative,  from  {Ly  • 

•X  ••    7    7  ^-R       ..  7 

121)  Y.  3.  w.  4.,    tO^>  > »»  2/02* r  /z/e-from    |i  >  n  with  a  suffix 
pron.  and  the  prefix  O  * 

122)  Y.  4.  w.  9.,  tOi^tZZ  (ye)  ^^^Z/  ^^^'^^r-future  Ethpe.  from 


\- 


123)  Y.  5.  w.  1.,  oAjlLdI  7nortify-Aph.  imperative  from  Lk!^* 

•X        ..       7     P    7 

124)  Y.  5.  w.  3.,  ■0'^iV)>01  your  member s-Bn&ix state,  2nd.  masc. 
plural  from  V5>01  ♦ 


NOTES  ON  THE  CHRESTOMATHY.  335 

125)  Y  5.  w.  11  and  12.,  «-i01  ^ClJ*     These  pronouns  seem  to 

include  the  substantive  verb  (comp.  §  54.  3.  a). 

126)  Y.  1.  w.  8.,  ^-fcjaaoiALo  turning  or  having  turned-Ethpa. 
from  wOaoi  ♦ 

12t)  Y.  8.  w.  3.,  QwwAJf  put  away~Aph.  from  «mOJ  or  ujJ  * 

128)  Y.  9.  w.  2.,  ^OOOlZ  i/e  ^AaZ/  5e-future  from  looi  ♦ 

129)  Y.  9.  w.  3.,  ^A.j^.r^  h^f^t  <^6cwV/z^participle  Pa.,   from 

180)  Y.  9.  w.  7.,  tJkClQM^QM  put  off,  cast  ai/jaj^imperative  Pe., 
from  fciK^s  ♦     It  takes  a  suffix. 

131)  Y.  9.  w.  12.,  ^Oioaaboi  his  deeds-suS.  state,  plural  from 

27    r.    « 
^    . ,     f^L^J  who  being  renewed-Ethi^a.  part,  pas- 

.   rJsi  with  the  prefix  J  ♦ 

•  -n      p  1  ' 

133)  Y.  10.  w.  6.,  0U;Q>  w^  crm^e^  Ai7»-from   |JQ  with  a  suf. 
pronoun,  with  the  prefix  j  ♦ 

.^j-I^-mO  «^?2^;?  Z>e/M/'e^-plural  from   f*^i*^A* 
with  the  prefix  O  ♦ 

«v  7         7  y 

135)  Y.  13.  w.  1.,  ^AaOOlO  and  ^/^-frora  001  with  the  verbal 
termination-2nd.  pi.  with  the  prefix  O  ♦ 

136)  Y.  13.  w.  2.,  ^^IdjJOiHiD  forbearing-Fa.  part,  from  ;ifiD« 

137)  Y.  15.  w.  1.,  OlSl22:lb*0  and  his  peace,  from  |SdX»  with  suf. 
pronoun,  and  prefix  O  ♦ 

138)  Y.  15.  w.  4.,  ^QDLClC3^your  hearts,  from  \Ol^  with  suf.  prou. 

^      I      -h 

139)  Y.  15.  w.  6.,  ^oLt'rOL]  ye  are  called-Eih.  2nd.  plural  from 

-n  7 

140)  Y.  15.  w.  10.,  ^^)a — Sd  thanJcful-psiTt.  active  Aph.  from 

1U. 


336  NOTES  ON  THE  CHRESTOMATHY. 


Revelations  y.  1 — 10. 


141)  Y.  1.  w.  1.,  2a^1>jO  atid  I  saw-X^\\.  pret,   1st.  sing.  fr(»ni 
IVm  with  prefix  ©♦ 

142)  Y.  2.  w.  10.,  oaAalQ^  to  open-Va.  infinitive  from  o^As 
with  prefix  !^  * 

143)  Y.  3.  w.  17.,  CTU1m>V)\  to  look  on  iV-infin.  with  suffix  from 

ll-M  with  the  prefix  ^« 

144)  Y.  4.  w.  2.,  AaOOI  zV  w-formed  from  A^l  and  001,  ]  being 

dropped.     The  phrase,  including  the  word  precedmg  and  the  one 
followmg,  means  literally,  it  is  weeping  much. 


145)  Y.  4.  w.  7.,  .^i^AsI  was  found-'E\h^.  from 

146)  Y.  5.  w.  8.,  UlCiZ  literally  thou  shalt  «7eep-2nd.  per.   fut. 
masc-put  for  the  unperative  (vid.  §  61.  B.  a). 

141)  Y.  6.  w.  6  ,  ^\oy  to  stand.  ^\o  is  a  participle  from  ^OO 
(vid.  §  64.  3.  B.  Rem.). 

148)  Y.  6.  w.  8.,  ]rtV»nj  slain-psiss.  part.  Peal.  fem.  from  *mnu 

149)  Y.  6.  w.  21.,  ^9>A»(>  who  were  sent-M.   per.   f.  plural, 

,77 

Ethpa.  from  J>«» 


Revelations  xxii.  1 — 10. 

7^7  if  '' 

150)  Y.  2.  w.  23.,  wiOlQs'p^O  and  leaves  of  it-from  Izi'^i  with 
a  suffix,  and  prefix  0* 

151)  Y.  3.  w.  4.,  looiJ  shall  5e-future  of  looi  ♦ 

0  -X  7 

152)  Y.  3.  w.  14.,  wiOUJOmSOmJ  shall  serve  him-fut.  3d.  masc. 

•»>      7    ~ 

plural,  Pa.  from  oftios  with  a  suffix. 

,77 

153)  Y.  5.  w.  16.,  JOllI^D  causing  to  shine- Aph.  part.  masc.  from 

>ou. 


N0TE8  ON  THK  CHRESTOMATHY.  33T 

154)  Y.  6.  w.  15.,  OiO»>V>\  to  sAow-iufmitiYe,  Pa.  from  iuCLm* 

155)  V.  8.  w.  13.,  rM^rnSoN  to  woj'ship,  to  ;>raMe-infinitive,  Peal 
from  rve^  * 

156)  Y.  11.  w.  1.,  ]\i^  shall  be  filthy-fat.  Ethpa.  from  \L* 
15t)  Y.  14.  w.  15.,  toSsi  they  shall  enter  in-fut.  3d.  masc.  Peal 

from  ^\l  ♦ 

158)  Y.  It.  w.  4.,  \L  co7;ie-imperative  of  |Z(» 

,7    7  ,  r 

159)  Y.  19.  w.  3.,  JfJ^  shall  take  away-Feal  future  from  >^^• 


338  NOTES  OX  THE  CHRESTOMATHY. 


POETRY. 


"We  present  a  few  specimens  of  Syriac  poetry,  taken  from  the 
Peshito  Bible,  published  by  the  British  and  Foreign  Bible  Society, 
in  1826.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  text  does  not  appear  in  a 
rhythmical  form,  nor  are  there  any  divisions  into  verses.  The 
Peshito  or  literal  version  was  made  near  the  close  of  the  first, 
or  beginning  of  the  second  century,  while  the  divisions  into  chapters 
and  verses  were  introduced  in  the  thirteenth  century.  Points,  in 
addition  to  Rihui,  will  be  noticed  over  and  under  particular  letters. 
These  are  intended  to  mark  the  occurrence  of  Kushoi  and  Rukok. 

Psalm  xlv.  1—10. 

1)  Yerse  2.  word  9.,  ^JOlL^^  therefore.     This  is  composed  of  the 

conjunction    m-^Sd  and  the  suffix  pronoun  JJ01»     Conjunctions  as 
well  as  other  particles  often  take  suffixes. 

2)  Y.  3.  w.  1.,  1SD)|  cast  (gird)-Aph.  imperative,  from  poi* 
See  a  sunilar  instance  in  Matt.  xvii.  2t. 


Psalm  li.  1—10. 


3)  Y.  2.  w.  1.,  lyefi^l  multiply-im])QVdiirfQ,  Aph.  from  LwCD  used 
here  adverbially  in  the  sense  of  vary  much. 

4)  Y.  2.  w.  2,,  *  i  1  >  .1  i  •!  wash  we-imperative,  Aph.  from  v^tO* 
with  a  suffix  pronoun. 


NOTES  ON  THE  CHRESTOMATHY.  339 

5)  V,  2.  w.  7.,  %A.ia>  cleanse  ?M£-imperative,  Pa.  from  p>  with  a 
suflQx  pronoun. 

6)  Y.  3.  w.  8.,  ^^niSnn  in  all  time,  always-from  la  all,  ^] 
time  and  the  prefix  preposition,  Q  in. 

7)  Y.  4.  W.8.,  »D>>lZ>  ^A<2^  thou  mighlest  he  just-Ethpa.  2nd.  sing. 

raasc.  future  from  »0>1»     The  preformative  falls  away  as  the  coa- 
j  unction  J  precedes. 

8)  Y.  6.  w.  7.,  waAAl>0|  thou  Tnakest  me  to  know-^xxidi.  sing.  pret. 

Aph.  from  ^pi  with  a  suffix  pronoun. 

9)  Y.  9.  w.  7.,  » I  »»\  llot  owMmperative  Pe.  from  VaI* 


Psalm    civ.  1 — 10. 

10)  Y.  5.  w.  1.,  ^A|  ^prepared,  laid-Ethpe  Jrom  JJLO* 

11)  Y.  5.  w.  4.,  CJUJLDALO-participie  with  a  suffix  pronoun  from 

12)  Y.  7.  w.  7.,  ^A^OljA^  hastening-an  Ethpe.  participle,  from 

13)  Y.  9.  w.  6.,  OUOmniO  and  (that)  they  should  Twt  arcer-M. 
plural,  Pa.  from  tCQO  with  a  suffix  pronoun,  and  the  conjunction  O 
preceding. 


SYRIAC    LEXICON, 


jof,  ]o]]  suf.  *jjd1  a  father,  pi. 
|OL.r::)|  |^aio(  parents. 

rS|  to  perish,  Aph.  to  cause  to 
perish,  to  destroy. 

^ojQ  (  to  be  sad,  to  be  disturbed. 

^  iioj  Abnil  (name  of  an  idol). 

^cn;:Dl  Abraham. 

lUi  I  m.  a  reward. 

12^.'|  a  letter,  a  writing. 

pj  I  an  ear. 
O I  or. 

0(  0  !  (mark  of  the  vocative). 

AjJDoI  namely,  that  is  (from  0| 

and  AxO). 

VZoiliol  skill,  ability. 

VALDOJ^f.  a  nation. 

;j^o1  Ophir  (a  proper  name). 

«-kCn>0|  Edessa  in  Mesopotamia 
(a  proper  name). 

X^kio]  a  way. 

1A— >)o1  the  law  book  of  Moses, 
the  Pentateuch. 


^qX»jo1  Jerusalem. 

^ll  to  go,  to  go  away. 

\L]  brother. 

rjJ\  to  hold,  to  seize,  to  lay 
hold  of. 

U'r»^\  the  last,  the  end. 

^*rJs»l,   Iju'r^jl    another;    fem. 

lA-^'r-jal,    pi.     m.     ^>*1, 

C     0         -X  I 

Jjl4sc1u^|  an  Egyptian. 

Aat^SJOyj-il    Adverh,    like    the 

Egyptians. 

Ipi"!  hand-in  Hebrew  ^ . 

]pi1  who,  which,  fem.  of  P-**!* 

y^S\  SO  as,  according  to,  as  to, 

{secundum)  nearly,  >  j^|  just 
as,  therewith. 

]n-al  where?  >  P— »1  there, 
where  ;  p  >(]  whither  ?  P-a | 
^iD  whence  ? 

Q^^l  where. 


342  SYEIAC 

f    'J 


r      r      t  7 


SO 


,    .  7  0    7' 

^1,  tlQ-il  how?  >  Usui 
that. 

^^iNil  pi.  they, 

,-jil  truly,  certainly,  yes. 

(JL»1  who,  what-Uatr^  at  what. 

«.n »» m » I  Isaac  (a  proper  name). 

^^^I'jXfiuj  Israel  (a  proper  name). 

|;Qji{  honor,  a  mark  of  esteem, 
a  solemn  procession. 

I  7       X 

A— »"!  it  is,  ^Lk\  I  am,  etc. 

MP  I  serpent   (e;)^i6va). 

pMwD  (  at  the  same  time-together. 

*  7     IN 

vJD"!  to  eat,  to  consume. 

U^ii-^Vjust  as,  ?  l-^^T  of 

such  a  quality  (qualis). 

(.a — \n\   n|  a  stranger,  a  guest 
1j(    but,    yet     (aXXa),    if     not 

(J  0). 

IJ I  to  lament. 

Tai!£  God. 

|aC31-^  godly. 

iZooi-^  f.  divinity,  the  godhead. 

P     0  7        ^7 

^>,irnn \^  an  Alexandrian. 

^alL  Olaph,  the  first  letter   of 
the  alphabet. 


LEXICON. 

«^l-^  to  learn,  Aph.  to  cause  to 
learn,  to  teach. 

]'ny\  a  ship. 

»      vv  to  constrain,  to  compel, 

to  urge  any  one,    •  i  vv.   op- 
pressed. 

U  ^-^  oppressed. 

JSdI  mother. 

pkiD]    Amida  in   Mesopotamia 
(a  proper  name). 

I     7      -n        17 

,^i.V)|,  |1*V)|,  surely,  firmly. 

7    ■«  -n  7  -^  7 

^1  Aph.  ^^.OiOl,  fut.  ^SOiOU 
to  believe. 

■c  0         1.       7 

Ljk\\  iV)f  Adv.  constantly. 
;iD  I  to  say,  to  speak. 

0      7   T» 

\f£i\  a  lamb. 

7    -n 

w»ALd1  (with  >  following)  if. 

i>   ■«  7 

p1  I,  pi.  ^1x1  we. 

^Q 3 1  m.  ^-J1  f.,  that  (^5  J.cc.) 

•X  X       7 

Cll  1 5-^  I     Antinum      (a     proper 
name). 

7  '^ 

vM^Jj  Ethpa.  to  sigh. 

•AJf   man,   a   certain    man,   pi 

^AJ(  and  (aJ(  ♦ 


SYRUC 

|ZqaJ|    humanity,    as    concrete, 

mankind. 
L iV  m.  *aA jV  f.   thou  ;   pi. 

^oAj^m. 

^""AjTf.  you. 

|ZAj]  a  woman,  a  wife. 

(ZoflOl  a  healing. 

l-^Va  bound,  pi  iV^l  ^^ 
a  prison. 

VrJQ^^l    stylite    (according  to 
Assem.)     - 

^mimfcvCO!  sedition. 

■n  ..     7       * 

|4q4^1  <^il  of  cinnamon. 

P     -X       17  ^ 

(ZQl4'r4co!  a  soldier. 

ISDjLaCDl   external    appearance, 

dress,  {dyyiiLa). 

pASOi^CDj  hypocrite 

*2)1  also,  |J2)|  neither. 

^1'  1-^V  face,  ^\-l  SM 

over,     wi^U     accordmg     to, 
towards. 

|2)QQ£Q.B^j  a  bishop. 

7  It 

%Si  •  1  to  be  anxious,  uneasy. 
^li^il  [Lay]  four. 

p         i-n  -ft 

]n^i1  heterodox. 


LEXICON.  843 

p     » 
Vii]  a  lion. 

•ISOj)  I  Arius. 

0  7  0       J^ 

%£OQy%£i  J2DCLk)|  Areopagite. 
JJQO>|  a  ruler,  a  chief  man. 

OPT 

V&l0)l  a  Syrian,  a  Gentile. 

p  7         -n-ft 

l4o » ty)>1  an  errorist,  a  heretic. 
.miflO?]  heresy  (al'^so'jj). 
JU|  earth,  land,  country. 

I  to  find,  Ethpe.  to  be  found. 


pDQ— ^  2 As  I  the  six  days  work, 

the  creation. 

p  -n 

fZl  to  come,  Aph.   to  lead,  to 
bring,  to  conduct. 

7       7      ff  7 

JL],  (jZ)  a  place,  a  region. 


*Q  in,  from,  through,  to. 
filNti:^  a  possessor  of  a  bath. 

X  7        1 

^"lo,  tcU^  a  pulpit    {(Briiia). 

*>  7 

^Q-.  pQ  hence. 

ZoiS  to  be  ashamed,  Aph.  to 
make  ashamed. 

0  7     * 

]ZZoiQ  shame,  disgrace. 

).^qLq2,  wiZq^QjO  a  counselor. 
[_Sq QDQ a     agreeableness, 


amiableness. 
|jQQ  awkward,  uneducated. 


su 


SYRIAC  LEXICON. 


jVO   Pa. 

mock. 


7   y 

*\^  to   deride,   to 


12; M — Q  (from  IZ;— A*1   end) 

finally. 

^^.4^  to  cease,  to  destroy. 

^4^  to  conceive. 

|i4o  pregnant. 
7     7 

among,  between. 

m.  (AflUJS  evil. 

m.  an  evil  person-pi.  ^AjlS, 

flOain  malice. 

>^Q«>n  Besoe  (a  monk-proper 

name). 

A       *  A         "  ' 

Aa^  =  A  ■  1 1  Q  between,  by  ; 
hi — I — Q  ^  out ;  ^i'cnj 

AaJD  Mesopotamia. 
-ft       p      7  i>    p  ♦> .. 

Aa^,    (AaA   a  hoase,  (a^O) 

AjlQ  the  Roman  dominion. 

^*jwJiAj^  Bethlehem  (a  proper 
name). 

Ibo  to  weep. 

,ili  TTlthout. 

>.7  ,..,  ,.7 

falO  pl.  m.   sons.    MUf    -  - 1*^ 

»o    0  ••  7 

Cmst.  t«l  iin  men,  lit.  sons 

7 
of  men.  ;Q  is  always  used  in  the 
sing,  for  son. 

IcQO  to  despise.  Part.  P.  ]miD 

despised. 


0       •x         I      7 

«g)ni  Nirno  Basilius  (a  pro- 


per name. 

kO%  «^  17 


|ZnV)imn  f.  joy,  benignity. 
I'^C^O  m.  back. 
^Q£QQ  to  perfume. 
IVnmn  odors. 

JIQ  to  seek,  with  ^iD  to  entreat, 

to  demand. 
^9   p  •  -ft 
|*^*^|NS*^  enemy,  an  adversary. 

1  Al!D  the  seekmg,  the  finding  out. 

,  7 

J  ^a  to  take  away. 

r^^  m.  small-l^^fcO  feminine. 

fZo;^^  a  small  matter  (for  the 

Adj.  small). 

I — O     *^  to  explore,  to  discover, 


Ethpa.  with  »2  to  contemplate, 
too  a  gnat,  a  midge. 
•fO,  V^  sou.  li\lji^  *jio  au 

inhabitant  of  the  city. 
1^  to  create. 

toj^oik     Barabbas    (a  j^roper 

name). 
»»  0       7 
^;o;o  a  Barbarian. 

0       7        7 

t^j;o   Bardesanes    (a  proper 
name). 

|Aj,!o  houses,  pl.  feminine. 

7 
5^; O  to  fall  down,  to  bend  the 

knees,  Ethpa.  to  receive  a  bene- 
diction, to  bless  one's-self. 


SYRIAC  I 

V 

>0'^  but,  yet. 

*mJ;o  Etkpa.  to  become  man. 

iti^'r^  man. 

lo;0  the  lightning,  brightness. 

]l'r^,  lya  a  daughter,  pi.  Al£5» 

|JoA:D,  f  A^oAiD  a  young  woman, 

a  maiden. 
5Z\0  after,  ^-OjAq  afterwards. 

^Ao   jAo    soon,    (literally), 
shortly  thereupon. 

IjLi,  l^t  an  arrow,  dart. 

)iQ.*  to  choose,  to  select. 

U^i-yi   a  side,   a  part,    f^i-y\ 

•  |J-Sdcd>  the  wrong  side,  i.  e.  an 
enemy. 

p^.«  the  choice. 

1  ALjl£1..  a  formation,  a  creature. 
;^.,  Il^kt  a  man,  a  person. 

^^nn   .   Gethsemane  (a  proper 

name)"! 
*2)-.P^.  »2)p,t  to  blaspheme. 
«iir..  to  meet  with  any  one,  to 

happen  to  any  one. 
Q-.  in  the  midst,  Qve^  within. 

^>Qyk  a  troop,  a  multitude. 


EXICON.  345 

(2)>Q.t  m.  blasphemy. 

M-JQ.I  shame,  disgrace. 

]-i>Q..    Guria  (proper  name  of 

a  woman). 

I^JOLy  circumcision. 
54**Hy«  to  laugh,  to  mock. 
f^for. 

lJ-.i    to    uncover,   to    discover, 

Etkpe.  to  be  discovered,  to  be 
made  known. 

l^yt  to  rob,  Ethpe.  to  be  robbed. 

Zu]ll^yi  public,  free. 

p..i^y»  Gahlee  (a  proper  name). 

[y  >  \.t  a  revelation. 

.^ij;^..  to  engrave. 

|Zo;AV)yt     an    accomplishment, 
perfection. 

•,SCU  to  fulfill,  to  finisb. 

Vri=if^  mighty. 

VUi  Pass.  Fart.  IWm   hidden, 

unknown. 

|.iJ.»  to  lend. 

jni-. ,  |£Ql-t  race,  family  (/^vog)^ 

offspring. 
jaaco.*  Aph.  *CDm  I  to  lie  down. 

;!-•  to  scold,  with  »Q  • 

(.i^^t  the  north. 

po^t  a  bone,  a  hmb. 


346 


SYRIAC  LEXICON. 


>  mark  of  the  Genitive ;  Rela- 
tive Pronoun;  while,  that,  there- 
with, in  order  that. 

7 

•.>xfD>  to  offer.  Fa.  the  same. 

•p       It 

U*^y  an  offering. 

*^y  to  carry,  to  take,  Ethpe.  to 
be  conducted,  to  conduct  ones- 
self. 

^.  J  to  lie,  Fa.  ^^i  ?♦ 
(Za\..  J  a  falsehood. 
{dClJ  gold. 
|;O0>  behavior. 

I   7 

,-iO>  David,  sometimes  written 
)OCFU>  (a  proper  name). 

•X        -p     -X        ^0         «. 

»^0>,  poj,  jAaoj,  place. 

•X  0 

^11 0 J,  «^)  to  crush. 
^^.**>  to  fear,  to  worship. 

0  »  1>      I  7  * 

1A^>  fear,  terror,  ]J\»,  Z\LjsjJ 

superstition. 

IP  t>    7 
Q^j  an  evil  spirit,  the  Devil. 

po^j  to  be  possessed  of  an  evil 
spirit. 

*  \y— aj  a  word  accompanying  the 

Fossessive  Fron.   §  16,   nSn? 
who  is  my,  or  my. 

5,A-L»>  thy,  or  who  is  thy. 

^>  but  (^i). 

-^0    97 

^JUj  a  Judge. 
(la)  judgment. 

*  This  is  formed  from  ^  and  V^  ,    Vid. 
reference  above.    Tr. 


9       7 

^^>  Daison  (the  proper  name 
of  a  river). 

10       7 
\^y  a  cloister. 

*P    5      7 

Wr^^  ^  monk. 
|Zql»;j>  monastic  life. 

X        1  7X 

« >  O  iAa>  testament  (^laS^jxr]). 
Pj,  jloj  pure,  clean. 

^0  X  7 

P>  Pa.  •jlO?  to  purify. 

7 

pj  to  remember. 
^>,  and  ISdj  the  blood. 
(ZqSdj  a  resemblance,  an  image, 
a  likeness. 

X^^}  similar. 

»t)      "7  ..  7 

U^?  Constr.  St.  wiiDj  value. 
♦^J  to  sleep. 

■^     7 

y  A  V)>  sleepmg  ;  Matt.  viii.  24,  pi. . 

..X  7 

7 

^12iD>  to  weep. 

7 

jliOj  Ethpa.  to  wonder  at,  to  ]je 
astonished. 

^y   to   judge,    Fass.  Fart,    ^j 
judged. 

PmJj  the  feast  of  the  appearance 
of  Christ ;     Epiphany. 

*!>        7 

[xn^  the  beard. 

^jj  Aph^jyy  to  comprehend. 

jlij  an  arm. 

7 

v*)j  to  encounter,  to  speak  with 
any  one. 


SYRIAC 

Toi  lo  I 

fjOl  Fa.  »-fc)Cn  to  lead,  to  guide. 

IjOl  this,  she,  PronSChal.,  ^j^n)- 

T 

^JOl  members. 

1)J01  honor,  glory. 

OOl  m.  *a01  f.  and  OOl   m.   wiCTI 

7 

f.  that,  the  former  ;  >  001  who; 

0 

)  ^OL.^  since. 
looi  to  be   {Verh   Subst.)  Fut. 

loou^ 

•X        -x 

CLiOOl  he,  she. 

•X 

^  001  them. 

^••0     -x 

joaooi  customs,  deeds. 
^r^OI  there,  then. 

ii"  '       '' 

P-a^Ol  a  temple,  a  palace. 

y/n  iVn  ,rri  faith,  belief,  doc- 
trine, Ili^Q*  ^^-"'^  the  sav- 
ing faith. 

ZoOOl  in  like  manner. 

^^o^Ol  therefore. 

^--DOl,  U-^^  so,  in  this  manner. 

^Ol,  ^OlL  hence,  for,  there. 

j^Ol  Pa.  to  wander,  to  go  forth, 
to  walk. 

»  \^  they,  these. 

.01,  J— JOl  m.  IjOl  f.  plur.  ^QJOl 

m.  ^xJOl  f.  this. 


LEXICON.  347 

p-ftJOl  advantage,  pleasure. 

7 

«^01  to  return,   A'ph.   to  lead 
back. 

«£D>0)ai  Herod  (a  proper  name.) 

p>01  here,  hither. 

«^01,  t^OI  now,  at  present. 


0  1o  the  letter  Yan^  and. 
^1  to  redeem,  Fut.  ^p.  Fa. 

T>  7 

^1,  ll^l  time,  pi.  liSl   Acts 
xvii.  26. 

0        y  *"7  17  y7 

1  Aiai ,  ^Z?Z>  or  ^^  1 ,1  ni  r^ALii-i 

twice ;    ^-^1^1    ALZ    thrice ; 
y)'r-^  ^  ^1  before. 

7  ' 

^-.l    to  grow   dumb,  to  put  to 

silence. 

)qji)1  just,  upright. 

*-£)jl  to  be  just,  wOjl  it  befits, 
it  "is  suitable,  it  is  becoming. 

lA-a— Ojl      agreement,     corres- 
pondence. 

"JAdjI  alms. 

Zul;jiOll  Adv.  carefully. 

>011  Bth'pa.  to  beware. 

]*jwa01  praise,  show,  splendor. 

.rr>.Air>^    Zenobius    (a  proper 


name). 


348 


SYRIAC  LEXICON. 


Viol. 


^01,  ^i  to  move,  to  be  restless. 

1^01  a  moving,  a  dance. 

iSiO\  hyssop. 

]ql»1  honor,  splendor. 

PV*!  a  weed, 

^1  to  arm. 

PI  to  conquer,  to  vanquish. 

•^9      0    7 

[.mJD]  a  conqueror. 

|;.A.k}l  a  song. 

^  species,  kind. 

•.A.J1,  PftJl  m.  fornication. 

IZo^i  fornication. 

>ail,  1>Q11  little,  JOIV^  U?  not 
small. 

7 

..Oil  to  cry,  to  call, 
|'^>ni  cross. 

7 

%2lQ]  to  crucify,  to  torture. 


IjU*  free,  l)iK»;2  free. 

>0»*  ought. 

hfc.*Q*^»*  quiet,  concealed   resi- 
dence. 

%C  X     7  X      ..     I      7 

tOanK> beloved,  pi.  ■  iniQAj^ 

I      7 

«n>nK»  Habib  (a  proper  name). 

.?  7 

(;^Aj   an   associate,   the   other, 
any  one. 

7 

«>*^»*  to  enclose. 
Kh^  a  feast,  a  feast  day. 


^U* 


\r^-y\^  lame. 

j-M  m.  (rJs»  f.  one,  a  certam  one, 

%   P       7  7 

any  one  |n«0  ,^  Sunday. 

0  I  or 

fpja,  wftr_ja   to  rejoice ;   ]L^J 

1^0  ,-K>  to  rejoice  very  much. 
f^LOpAA  rejoicmg. 
>pA*  mutual,  reciprocal. 
(Oj-^*,  I^OpM  gladness. 

h^r^  joy. 

Mr**  the  breast,  pi.  suff.  Luke, 

xxiii.  48. 

,  7 

Jr^  to  surround,  to  flow  around. 
|JJC71  honor,  majesty. 

7   P 

>^jfj^  around. 
ipM  to  renew. 

0  7  *..  7 

fZ,-M  new,  1)1.  lZrK»  ♦ 

II    7 
Q>*,  Fa.  «aCU»  to  show,  to  in- 
dicate. 

%    0  7 

^Qa»  love. 

|irnV)Qjsj  perseverance,  patience. 

P;i»CLm  injury. 

(I— XI  to  see  Ethpe.  to  be  seen,  to 
appear. 

1 01 — M  a  vision,  pi.  \lO\l*  an 

apparition. 

P    X 

x\A^  June. 
«01.ja  to  bind. 


\^\j^  bond,  union. 
(ZVjsj  a  view. 

14^  to  eiT,  to  sin. 

|ai4>^  m.  sin,  crime,  pi.  )-»n^, 

fOl^Ak  and  ^Ol^AA* 

TAj4a*  f.  sin. 

lA^M  wheat,  pi.  14^ . 

M-M  to  lire,  Apk.  %mj^]  • 

B._ja and  |»  >  »t  life.  (It always 
has  the  plural  form  but  gen- 
erally a  singular  signification. 

p     7  ..107 

»ni  »i  m.  a  debtor,  pi.  ^^in*  »i» 

fZOLi-M  living  creature,  an  animal, 
a  monster. 

I  0       7 

^\jLJvi,  |Ja.x»  a  force,  an  army. 
^  >  »>  to  strengthen. 


.A\i  »>  and  pA^jLjsj  strong. 
f  » *^>  linen,  fine  linen. 

^  X      7  ^    l>  X      7 

S0'*^"%    (V7>nM    wise,   plural 

I     ..  I     7  ^   -»     ..17 

,V».^>.  and  |V)>n»»* 

]ASQa*A  wisdom. 

0  7 

fjja  vinegar. 

V^Q-  \»>  a  gnat,  a  fly. 

•  7 

»4— -^  to  mingle,  Ethpa.  to 
take  part,  to  associate  with 
any  one. 

>Q.klLj,  ]V>i\m  sound,  healthy. 

■«      7 

vIa*  to  wash. 


SYRIAC  LEXICON.  349 

^>Q-Lm  to  dream,  Etkpe   to  re- 
cover. 

^'nSki  for,  instead  of. 
ASo**  Ethpe.  to  be  angry. 
(AS^AA  anger,  wrath. 
|A.|^Aaa  a  sigh. 

^1a*  we,  us,  pi.  c.  from  p|» 
i*^!  »i  a  heathen,  an  idolater. 
JXUa,  %£DQjsa  far  be  it. 

X       7 

^»m»i  vehement,  strong. 

7 
^a£CU»  to  envy,  with  *0» 

I^Lm  to  cover  Ethpa.  to  conceal 

oneVself. 

A^l^i^M  dihgently. 

7 
',Su*  Aph.  to  blush,  to  be  ashamed. 
•#    7 
{^^  the  back,  the  loms. 

>Qja  to  be  white. 

0 

\^  to  see,  to  look  out. 

^\j^,  ^'r^l  to  curse,  to  detest. 

^77 

j^ja  Pa.  to  liberate. 

^  ^ "  '' 

pi^  a  magician,  a  sorcerer. 

12-H^  f.  from  l2-r>ll  finally,  the 

end,  enough. 
]jlk»  endurance,  suffering. 
^QA»,    po«>i     darkness,   pi 

^-^QA>I  Eph.  iv.  18. 
^Aa*  to  mark,  to  seal. 
]LcAaa  a  seal. 


350 


SYRIAC  LEXICON. 


t^u. 


ioili  a  rumor,  a  report. 
•.^4  ■^4/-  go<^d.  Adv.  very. 
^u.£i4  Part.  P.  m.  sealed. 
iLo^  seal. 

•^q4  P«.  t^iJL^  to  be  ready,  to 
be  willing. 

jlOQ^  the  pious,  the  good. 

(jAqq^  happy,  blessed. 

iooid^,  and  lioo^  kind,  family, 
offspring. 

|Aj-^q4  vine,  branch. 

l^iQ^  readiness. 

(CQ^Q^  a  part  (tomus.) 

•.ao^,  •^^  to   swim  over  any- 
thing, to  overflow. 

fjQ^  a  mountain. 
^)Q4  distress,  misfortune. 
}. — .1 M-  •04   that  which  is  con- 
cealed, |!Lsq4s  secret. 

•X  7       0     -x  7 

Q*^»  (j,  fZonn  ^  goodness,  excel- 
lence, benevolence,  grace. 

.^Xia^  to  order,  (Taccsiv). 

|mn^   an    arrangement,    order, 
state  (Tafjj). 

1J4,  |i\^  a  young  man,  a  youth. 
|AaX4  a  girl,  a  maiden. 


•  n    !♦ 


^-ik^  to  carry. 

«nN(^  Ethpa.  to  be  dispersed. 

lsb.4  foul,  detestable. 

1^1  (t  unclean. 

]Zo^lfc>  uncleanness. 

{14  to  wander,  to  wander  around, 
to  forget,  with  ^  to  fall  from 
something,  to  apostatize,  Aph. 
to  mislead,  to  deceive,  to  cheat. 

|Zoi\^  error,  heresy. 
^Ql^  to  taste,  to  taste  well. 
^.^  to  be  laden,  to  bear,  Aph. 

to  cause  to  carry,  to  bring. 
p 
{^Zi2Ll=^a^)   *2lI  to  over- 

run.   Aph.   *2l41  to  overflow, 
to  fill. 

JCnZLi,  Ethpe.  ,mi^^Zl  to  ac- 
quiesce, to  obey. 
J^  to  chase  away,  to  drive  away 

7  y  7    -^ 

JZi'rL  to  strike,  Ethpe.  ^'rLl]  * 
ySi'fi  a  leaf. 


^0        .P     P 


()j,  t»Vi  fine,  suitable,  proper. 

i>- 7 
•JCLk^  to  wish  very  much,  Ethpa. 

the  same. 
^^.ilu  to  lead,  to  lead  away, 
*<n  ,,  I  to  dry  up. 


6YRIAC  LEXICON. 


351 


r^,  \r^\  hand,  ,^.0  by,  with  help, 
on  account  of. 

|p-«i  Aph.  »-»jO|  to  thank,  with 
'  JD  to  believe  in  somethmg,  to 
confess. 

p»,       m.  acknowledged,  known. 

(Alpfc  f.  knowledge. 

\i,.«ji  to  know,  to  be  acquainted 
'with ;  Ethjpe.  to  be  known ; 
Aph.  to  make  known,  to  in- 
dicate. 

(.Ip*,  [LOfjk  an  acquaintance,  one 
known. 

lAl, h  knowledge,  insight,  de- 
vice. 

7 

^     r^m         to   give.    Imperative 

-       7  -p  7 

%.r:)G1 ;  with   \MSil  to   give 
up  one's  life. 

(ji)OaLi,  90au  Judsea,  ]j>oaU9 

pi.  Jews. 
%£QQ1  >10CU  Jovmian  (a  proper 

name). 

9         7   ». 

'^  -^^^^  John  (a  proper  name.) 
^aCQQji  Joseph  (a  proper  name). 
S£i 0>\qji  Julius ( a  proper  name ) . 

P         7t      -X 

«IP01  >\0i  Julian  (a  proper 
name). 

(l*^\0*  a  doctrine,  teaching. 
^Q-a,    "Isiol    day,   ]^^in 

0  7     -kP     !>  7 

by  day,  ^iDO*,  JlSDQa  to  day. 


«  z 


now  ;  >00    ■     ^n  daily. 

for  T    ff       r 

M-SOLft  a  Greek,  A^]— JOi  Adverb. 
in  the  Greek  manner,  accord- 
ing to  the  Greeks. 

^>Za»,  P>Zq^  use,  advantage. 

*0  P         II 

Ml » » ■  ^  hermit. 


1^     ■  to  bring  forth,  Ethpe.  to 
be  born. 

1'r-Al  birth. 

15    9w  #7 

>0     N>  a  small  boy,  a  child. 

\SiQ — ^  a  teacher,  a  learned 
man. 

**n\     i  to  learn,  Aph  to  inform. 
|V)     i  the  sea. 

|V)     *  to  swear,  Aph.  to  cause  to 
swear,  to  swear  to. 

•  P  I     7 

|1  iV)»  the  right  hand,  the  right. 

*P       -x       p 

(^QIji  a  suckling,  a  baby. 

-»>  X 

%£l£Q.a  Aph.  to  add. 
jl— » to  increase  rapidly. 

«.  7 

«nonS>  Jacob  (a  proper  name). 

^P       4^  0 

{so  ^  one  who  takes  care. 
,£1*  to  burn. 

IP  7 

pOa  flame,  holocaust. 

X   7     »  p        17^ 

;in>,  |;>n*  illustrious,  honored, 
great. 

jD;a  to  be  great,  to  increase  (in 
respectability). 


352  SYRIA C   LEXICON 


|ja^  a  mouth. 

jlu'r^,  fAlui'pi  a  tent. 

^Q*^  Jesus. 

Aa  being,  essence, 
-ft  I 

•^Aa   to   remain,    to    dwell,    to 
settle,  to  sit. 

^Sd  ;_^A^  more  than. 

fZo^^Zu  superfluity. 

>£Li  to  win,  to  abound. 

1p  to  prevent,  to  rebuke. 
•£i p,  (il^p  passion. 
MjIo  justly. 

"I  Zojp  justice,  righteousness. 
^]o  a  stone,  a  rock,  Cephas, 
or  Peter. 

IZp  f.  a  rebuke. 

7 
*r^D  perhaps. 

7 
fD  as,  during  (pleonastic  before 

the  Fart.). 

iiOlD  a  priest. 

QJOlO  the  priesthood. 

r*jQa  shame. 
.9         7  .-ft   ..     7 

^r^OQS  m.  a  star,  ^^.   pQ2QD 

Matt.  xxiv.  29. 
I'^Sdqo  a  priest. 
..QOQO,  \£nD  m.  a  cup. 
(.*.»> QO  a  cell. 


y^SDJQD  a  throne. 
,.i  M>    1   JElkpa. 


tc 

laying    on 
the     hand 


V 


.3  each. 


blush. 

^7  IX  -X  I 

JjL— JQ— ^O'pi^   the 

or    extending    of 

W      ^  7 

\s._o  all,  every,  ,— w^ 

l^i-Lo  a  dog. 

^  i\o,  Pa^  a  crown. 

ISd^^D  every  thing,  any  thing. 

I'ALo  a  bride. 

pbo  how  much,  how  much  more. 

7 
;lQO  to  be  amazed,  to  be  sad. 

\lD  to  give  a  surname. 

(AlO  a  fellow  servant. 

\zilD  bosom,  lap. 
7 

««10  to  assemble,  to  collect  to- 
gether, Ethpa.  to  be  assembled. 

(■lO  an  assembly. 

|CC0  a  cup. 

IcQO  to  conceal,  Pa.   to  cover, 
Ethpa.  to  hide  one's-self. 

pus,   |>mo,    I* mo  concealed, 

p  ..  7 

|l£l2  famine. 

7 
;£10  to  deny,  to  refuse,  to  desert 
(with  ^)* 

7  7« 

p  where,  p^  there  where. 

IP  to  feel  pain,  ^  Aap  it  pains 
one. 


lip. 

\jk\D   sad,   sorrowful,    Etkpe.   to 

pass  by,  to  go. 
OUp,  Ibup  infirm,  weak. 
IP  Aph.  to  announce  (x>]^utf<''e'v). 
|la.4^1L»p  a  christian. 
^p  to  involve,  to  roll  up,  to  pass 

by. 

I^Dp  a  roll,  a  scroll. 
\1mD  a  collision,  a  shock. 

\^SiMD    Ethpa.,    w_21— A-O^l 

to  humbly  entreat. 
^to  to  write,  Aph.  the  same. 
loAo  a  writing,  a  book. 
^5\o  flax,  linen. 
laAo  a  shoulder. 
hlo  to  remain,  to  remain  behind. 

tf  not,  no  ;  V?  lest,  without. 
]ri!^  heart. 

-«^«^   ^  to  arouse,  to  che^r. 
"[lAoV  dress,  a  garment. 
12q^Li.£l^  a  decision,  reliance. 
.^V  to  hold,  to  take  hold. 
;«^V  outside,  without. 
i^AV  to  clothe,  to  cover. 

IqL  Pa.  to  accompany,  ^Mj?<i 
to  be  accompanied,  to  be  con 
firmed. 


SYRIAC  LEXICON.  353 

lA^Q^  abuse,  insult. 
WAr^nV  against,  towards. 
Zq^  to,  by,  besides,  with. 
V^  to  blot  out. 
pM^,  >0»»\o  only,  alone. 
lV)n>\  bread. 

ii^,  111!^,  lliS   night,    pi. 
^oN    I    \  &c. 

ZuL  it  is  not. 

]j L  an  insane  person. 

^"Mlover,  up ;  ^  ^Jyil  before, 


besides. 
f^"^    ^  to  eat. 


t3onn\  opponent. 

^\  ]i^^  tongue,  langunuv. 

]Sd  that,  what;  J  ]Sd  when. 

I'r^]^  word,  discourse,  a  part 
of  speech. 

)j|Sd  a  handle,  a  covermg. 

IvnoVn  spring,  fountain. 

liJopiSD  a  blessing,  a  benedic- 
tion. 

U-^,  IA^-wSd  scroll,   volume, 


roll. 

0      y 


r^s^  freely. 

1  •  1  ^  V*^^  a  wise  man,  pi 


364  SYRIAC 

(jj^fio  an  altar. 
Vr^i^b  a  desert. 
IZaJ;^,!©  redemption. 
(•pijlD  a  cloister,  a  chamber. 

•n         0 

^r-^Lo  thus,  thence,  therefore. 

P-ifSo,  lAlji,iD  a  town,  a  city. 

^f^  something,  ^,.liD  P  nothing. 

^AiMbJr^    eastern,     JwJr^    the 
Eas't. 

(s'rio  a  song,  a  hymn. 

JiSD^Olk)  believing,  with   |;-ft^ 
orthodox. 

;jOlk5  prompt,  ready. 

fAcjOloi  a  gift. 

•X  "K      7 

•^qS^,  P^.  *OiV>  to  deride. 

»?,         -x 

|>qSd  myrrh. 

]2Qk)  death. 

^—^..-J^  to  strike,  to  prick,  to 
bite. 

|Zq>j.Sd    a    blow,    plague,    pi. 

»9.  i>     ••      7 

|Ja.wwSD  weak,  humble. 
^m^Sd  on  the  morrow. 
]jQaA»iiD  a  tempest,  pi.  waves. 

14^  to  go,  to  come,  to  arrive, 

3/.  Fret.  Z^» 
\s4^  from,  of,  over,  on  account 

of;  J  ^\^  while. 


LEXICON. 

]\  i  sf^V)  a  heretic,  a  seducer. 
Ajfaii^V)  secretly. 

*0    ..  7 

I*     V)  water. 

Aa.^)  to  die,  Aph.  to  cause  to  die, 
to  mortify. 

,  7,  7 

jAjlId  distinguished,  excellent. 
POOLO  humility,  modesty. 

*0  17 

PinV)  affable,  modest. 
v.»riV)  now,  immediately. 

»P-«>  17 

|ZoninV>      lowliness,      intelli- 
gence. 

7  7 

«,i^V),  ^*io  to  be  depressed. 

1J--LD  to  be  full.  Fa.  to  fill,  ^%e. 
to  be  filled. 

t>         Tt  Ti        -n 

U— Ld  word,  saying,  plur.  p— !©♦ 

}oP-J^  an  angel,  a  messenger. 

f»I\V)  a  captain. 

«^i-^Sd  to  advise,  to  consult,  to 
reign. 

y^^,  "^a-Ai  a  king. 

|Zq^>>So  a  kingdom. 

\\\   V>  to  speak,  to  converse, 

l^kJ  Abs.  word. 

IALLo  jEmjpA.,  word^Z.  Uio. 

{la^Vo  a  teacher,  a  learned  man. 

IZaiajiLD  learning. 

Jj^SqSd  speech. 


SYRIAC  LEXICON. 


355 


^Sd  who  ?  y  ^  V>  that,*  which, 
QlLO  who  is  this  ? 

7 

^iD  certainly  (f^sv);  it  often  is 
superfluous. 

^Sd  of,  from,  on  account  of,  since ; 

LaL    ^    from,    of;    ^-i 

t— J Ol  afterwards,  hereafter, 

with  sufiP,  ^alo  of  us. 

U^what? 

(u»  >lV)  a  faithful  servant. 

lZ;iSD  a  candlestick. 

IAjlSd  a  part. 

|LQj;n>mV)  patience. 

|inff>V>  poor. 

VA^jQkHk)  f.  baptism. 

l^LjiD,   l2;S,Vn    a    hollow,   a 

cavern. 
*   p      p        7 
I    1    r>m    <y\    Vn  an  mterpreter, 

an  explainer. 
1  ^,  \a  ^  possible. 

1 J^  to  be  able,  Eth'pe,.  the  same, 
to  have  power  to  do  (with  *S 
by,  through). 

y2a»*iD  Sd  splendor,  light. 

^^^k)  in  the  midst. 

I'AiIsd  midst. 

I^r^,  1-Sd,  "ll-r^^  Lord,  Sir,  ^'^ 
literally  my  Lord  (title  for 
bishop  or  any  other  ecclesias- 


Va.-;.^. 


tical  person),  ^;Sb  our  Lord, 

(i.  e.  Christ);   ^b^  title  for 
ecclesiastical  ladies. 

(i^-kXyt^So  a  pearl,   a    precious 
stone. 

7 

>;— Sd  to  fall  off,  to  cast  away, 
to  make  free. 

»P«  9k  7 

|Zoj;1d  a  falling  off,  an  injury. 

»k    0  0    7 

t**;V)     bold,     impudent.     Adv. 
|4^r^  a  garment. 

»p     I     7 

i;^;!^  bitter,  sorrowful. 
lAriiOjLb  a  chariot,  a  throne. 

»P      PP    7 

^>j;Sd    that    which  ■  relates   to 

Christ. 
^^iS;V)  a  flock,  an  assembly,  a 

community. 

Pr^^  a  messenger. 

*     7 

.»»nV)  to  anoint. 
]^S»»«V)  changable,  variegated. 
[>>  >^<vn  the  Anointed,  the  Mes- 
siah. 
(OI^QaSo  known,  distinguished. 
1  »V<j^aVr>  complete,  perfect. 

*  P    P  7 

|i^Vr>^Vr>  a  deacon,  a  minister. 
iZoiaiQASD  the  oflBce  of  a  dea-  . 

con. 
]»«aiV>  a  person  sick  of  the  palsy. 
1A^;aLd  a  position,  a  bed. 


356  SYRIAC 

l2aim.iA^Ai  f.  obedience. 

7. 

•-»v»ASd  to  extend. 
t>*ALD  time,  a  period. 
^liOy*  )ASd  an  interi^reter. 
lA^l-^^a  »tZASg  necessity. 
^ZjZASo  a  catechumen. 

J. 

)ini  m.  a  prophet,  Matt.  i.  22. 

jZOim  f.  prophecy. 
Zo;-*-^   drawing  out,  patience, 
suffering. 

I       7 

;-iaiJ  shining,  bright. 

,      7 

JOU  to  shine,  Apk.  to  light,  Ethpa. 
to  be  bright. 

f  JOTJ  a  river. 

1 90101  m.  light;  from  JGU  to 
shine. 

•-mQJ,  vmJ  to  repose,  to  be  ap- 
peased, Apk.  to  lay  aside,  to 
put  away. 

•.jsjQJ,  paQJ  rest. 

P      -x  *o  p      *> 

*apQ_J,    (apQ^   a  stranger, 

VA^pOJ  f.  also  Neuter. 
iOQj,  >QJ  to  sleep. 

*  P       P    -x 

^i-DQJ  distribution,  expending. 
1>QJ  fire. 


LEXICON. 

I LO  ;jP  abstemiousness. 
(JjjJ  a  valley. 

A*jJ  to  go  down,  to  descend,  Apk. 
to  lay  down,  to  take  down,  to 
bring,  to  deliver. 

IAjjJ  m.  a  garment,  pi.  -^.AaiJ, 
»2i4j  to  drop. 

7 

*r^  to  take  care  of,  to  watch. 
(ZQmwjlJ  f.  lenity,  meekness. 

.7       11 

(lO^l  Nicoea  (a  proper  name). 
^,  1^  a  yoke,  a  bow. 
^»m  guilt,  injury,  crime. 

7 

«fn^1  to  augment,  to  honor,  to 
sacrifice,  to  slay. 

«^  7 

J]0OV)1  law. 

7 

«*^m^  to  take,  to  receive. 

IP    *.  -n 

JQajCQJ  temptation. 

»,»£QJ  to  pour,  Ethpe.  %DanL'\* 

7 

«orf)1  to  ascend. 
Mi]aJ  refreshment. 
^5siu  to  fall. 

7 

«n<^1  to  go  out,  Aph.  to  take  out, 

I         7 

>ni*^  J  spread. 
Jjtaj  the  soul,  reflexive,  self. 
I  ^  to  fight,  to  attack 

7 

fcS  ^  to  plant. 


SYRIAC 


P-M  ^  a  victory,  an  exploit. 

X  I 

^^i^i^ — 3  Nesibis  in  Mesopo- 
tamia (a  proper  name), 
P^-i^  victorious,  superior,  clear. 
^QQJ  Ethpa.  to  be  avenged  . 
%Sim  to  adhere,  to  follow. 
\cn  to  dig,  to  dig  out. 
lij  {:pl.  IZAjf)  a  woman. 
pAj  a  downfall,  a  curse. 

pb|ia3  silver,  money. 

IZlflO  a  bushel. 

JiUCD  an  old  man,  Adj.  old. 

tmincio  dense,  extensive. 

|A!idflD  an  ode,  a  song. 

^l^IiCD  to  be  satisfied. 

7 
;^iflD  to  believe,  Pa.  to  declare, 

to  forbear,  Ajpk  to  suppose. 

10  7 

;*^fr>  hope. 

^*X0  to  multiply,  to  ipcrease. 

IN 

-wflO  to  worship,  to  honor. 
IZpwi  worship,  honor. 
(jQ-wflO  a  cluster. 

I     7        ^^9     X     7 

«iyifO,  I  fji.tno  much.  Adv.  very. 
]Zo|>.tCr>  a  multitude. 
24 


1\^ 


LEXICOX.  857 

,  7 

JrflO  to  order,  to  arrange. 
jOlflD  to  testify,  to  witness,  Aph. 

to  die  as  a  martyr. 
(jOlflD  Emph.  of  >OlfiD  a  witness, 

a  martyr  (  =fxa^'ru^). 

|Z,OjOlCD  testunony,  witness,  mar. 
tjred  one. 
QflD  a  multitude. 

JlSLi  Q£D  offense. 

**»om  to  long  for  something,  to 

take  pleasure  in. 

UloQflO  thought. 

|n\orn  reception,  ascension  to 
heaven. 

^Q£D,  ^.£D  to  place,  to  inter, 

to  add,  ^^;2  to  shut,  l^]k) 

to    write   or   compose    books, 

Mftji;:0  to  punish  with  death, 
Ethjpe.  to  be  interred,  to  be 
buried. 

jCOjJQfiD  synod  (tfuvofJoj). 

(l^JQ — CO    indigence,    poverty, 
need. 

PI^QfiD  a  deed,  an  occurrence. 

*7  J    «. 

Pa>Q£D  Syria. 

^^jQflD    Adv.  Syriac,   in  the 
Syriac. 


358  SYRIAC  LEXICON 

1a-»)QflD  a  Syrian,  Adj.  Syrian. 
•.SUkCD    to  pull   down,   Fa.   to 
destroy,  Ethjpa.  to  be  dispersed. 
|i4QD  Satan  (a  proper  name). 
1;4^  a  side,  a  page. 

7  7 

;niCY)   to  bear,  to   endure,   to 
tolerate. 

0 

^iflO  the  laying  on  (of  hands). 

lASifY)  an  assembly. 

|2Liu£D  a  sword  (^I'fpos). 

(Q£D  to  expect,  Pa.  tinco  to  wait. 

IZoS^ro  transgression. 

«n!:^CQ  to  ascend, 

0  -x 

^QCD,  iOQCD  to  place,  to  lay  upon, 
to  commit. 

y  «o  7 

*,i^CQ  to  support,  [tkSil  to  take 
refreshment,  to  tarry. 

JJ-SQCD  left,  wrong. 
UcD  to  hate. 
tlCD  hated,  mean. 
.niCD   to   need,    •.Oa.ICD   Par?. 
P(255.  Pe. 

y 

;^QD  to  make,  to  do,  to  visit  (the 
sick). 

I  ^aDD  a  scribe,  ^Z.  ^  r^^^,  1  rSlCO. 

li  >^m,  l^Oa-aoo  a  ship. 

•2i£D,  |;a£D  a  book. 


"lAaur,  TJ^.l'Zoaa)  the  mouth,  the 
lips. 

y 

w»*;CX^  Pa.  to  dishonor,  to  violate. 


IjlL  a  feast,  a  feast-day. 

7 

i^il  to  do,  to  perform,  to  yield, 
to  make  something  (with  a 
double  Accusative). 

IP  7  r..     7 

r^i    m.    servant,  _p/.    ^^fi,*^S, 

•      ^  ..      7 

(,m  Mat.  xiii.  21. 

IP    «v*  P 

jaQl  creator. 

7 

;..£il  to  pass  by,  to  pass  over; 
with  JD,  to  pass  around. 

I  .p         -^ 

Aaj^iQl  Hebrew,  Ad.  Hebra- 
ically. 

^^,  ^^  shortly. 
Myul,  lA^^  a  young  cow. 
jl  until,  ^5u^rllJ  not  yet;  ILDjI 
until,  y  "t^r^  until  that; 

p  -K         ikP   p-^ 

^,  jjjl  time. 

,7 

)pl  Pa.  to  support,  to  aid. 

(Zpl  church. 

^Ql  to  act  unjustly. 

^Ql,  pOl  unjust,  sinful. 

0   0    7 

Pol  wicked,  ungodly. 


SYRIAC  I 

(•pSDQl  a  habitation,  an  abode. 
iVfJ^  tleatli. 

(oJQ^  an  answer,  an  alternative 

song. 

JDQl,  »Qi  Ethft.  to  be  troubled. 
iZqI^jqL  uncircumcision. 
>al  or  ;i  to  watch. 
)^  to  blot. 
jpoA  custom. 
,-jlI,  M-fc^  eye. 

?    7 

;ji^  to  arouse,  4?^-   to  stir  up. 

f^-i*  a  guardian  angel. 

\yik  oyer,  to,  against,  on  account 
of;  >  \y^  because. 

fZciDQ^  avarice. 

Ul,  lAll  cause. 

|AXi  an  altar.    Acts   xvii.    23, 

^1,  ^^  to  go,  with  *0  to  go 
into,  with  ^^  to  carry  on  pro- 
hibited intercourse  with  any 
one,  Eth'pe.  to  go  into,  Ajph. 
to  lead,  to  lead  into. 

^^,  Emph.  |^V>S  world,  race, 
generation. 

7 

^Ql  with,  above. 

'>a\  \ihi  a  nation,  pi.  ^-i^lioi, 

r^Ql  to  suffer  one's  self  to  be  dipped, 
to  suffer  oneVself  to  be  baptized. 


EXICON. 


359 


^0     0  ^ 

(r^l  dipping,  baptism. 

IjQiQl  a  pillar. 

|)Qi01  an  inhabitant. 

fJSoi  troul)le,  labor. 

•fSQl  to  dwell. 

]ll  to  hear,  to  answer,  Ethye.  to 

converse. 
(ZQaCLlL  piety. 
(r-kJ^  one  who  is  dead. 
tlii  a  cloud. 
,^»irf>S  twenty.  / 

lai  P<2.  to  inter. 
|1 »  >  \  aversion,  opposition. 

'^     7  ^  • 

«'^0\  Pad,  to  inquire. 
|;o:^  a  root. 

7 

*£5;i  to  flee. 

^Al  to  avail,  to  prevail. 

H»Al  prepared.    Part,   (put   for 
the  future). 

]na"Al  ancient,  old,  f.  I'Acu'Ai. 

I.    7       %0     I.    7 

•fuAl,  {-piAl  rich. 
1)la  fruit,  'pl.  lila* 

7 

^^2)  to  meet,  to  happen  to  (with 

•r^,  Vry^  bo^y. 


360 


SYR  I  AC 


iOSi* 


wjaQS,  .-»*£)  to  blow,  to  sound. 

SD  Q^oa  Paul  ( a  proper  name ) . 

^LM.^Qa  work. 

Vooa,  ILdqS  mouth. 

jj^DOa  a  command. 

5Q2  Ethpe.  to  be  unwilling. 

}ai.t  )Q2)  a  tower  {''f^^yos). 

^L1)Q£)  a  reward,  a  recompense. 

JlOjaa  redemption,  salvation. 

•i"  "  •  '^^ 

{l»jQ2i  separation. 

fc»Q2),  *a2)  to  remain,  to  come 

to  any  one. 

1a»Q2)  doubt. 

^'        P    -x 

tQ»Q2>  an  explanation. 
^Lj^a  a  phial. 
"laQCDQ-LiLS)  a  philosopher. 

*£DQ4^ KSi  Pilate    (a  proper 

name). 
\aijjSi  mediation,  entreaty.        ' 

1£>    P    -X  I 

'fioHiD'rJjSi    a    servant    of    the 

clmrch. 

\Zi2i  cheek,  jole.  ■ 

^i^jla  to  divide,  Eihpa.  to  doubt. 

>»j.,S>a,  Par^.  •.xkS^}  to  work,  to 
serve. 

|l2)  to  return.  Fa.  to  answer, 
^j?A.  to  lead  back,  to  make 
known;  Eikpe.  to  turn  one's-self. 


LEXICON. 

7       17        7 

jifn^^l^  an  apparition,  an  en- 
chantment. 
(AaIs)  a  limit,  an  end. 

7 

fcCQCQ2),   .m<^  to  free,  ^^^.  to 


permit. 
tCQ2)  a  lot,  a  portion,  pi.  ]flCL2» 
IZo^ia  a  work,  labor. 

^P  X      7 

( fJZi,  Fa.  •->  ^  to  free,  to  deliver. 

7 

pQ2)  to  command, 
p     «.       «pp     <k 

^,^Q2),    p^aa    precept,  com- 
mand. 
I  Asia  a  camp,  a  valley. 

»P  7        7 

UHjkJ'fSi  paradise. 

•»?  -X  !> 

\O0\Si  a  redeemer,  a  deliverer. 

»P       P   -x      p 

t.*^0;a  salutiferous,  saving. 

■n     0 

»CD;a  Persia. 
\aS^'^  a  Persian. 

7 

^;a  to  recompense,  Ethpa.  to  be 
rewarded. 

»P        -X  7 

\2iO flZi  face,  presence. 
.-D;2)  to  preserve,  to  deliver. 

7 

^•;a  to  separate,  to  divide,  Ethpe. 

to  be  divided,  to  appoint. 
L\2i  to  break. 
^^M£i  to  extend,  to  spread. 
t4»*'^  just,  right. 

T,      7 

«nn<^  to  interpret. 


^ 


Lsi, 


IS^.Aa  a  word,  a  matter, 
(As,  PiAa  wide. 


%ajA2}  to  open. 
13^  JP^- 1^-  i^lo^s,  images. 
IpAa  an  idol,  an  image  of  a  false 
god. 

11^  to  be  filthy. 

11^  vile,  filthy. 

^ .  to  be  willing,  to  wish. 

fZoO^    will,    -io-O^,    lm£lJ, 

^   V)  of  one's-self,  freely. 
{jjOi  t  wilhng,  ready. 
^l  will. 
f1  iD .  will,  purpose. 
lot*  to  thirst. 
iOO . ,  iO^  to  fast. 
ISdo  .  days  of  fasting,  fast  days. 
|ljO  •  a  figure,  a  pretence, 
ll .  to  incline.  Pa.  to  pray,  with 

^*5y»-l  to  pray  for  any  one,  to 

bless. 

-«  0  7 

]].,  ]a^.  inclined. 

-^Vr  Ethpe.  to  be  crucified. 

l^Q^*  a  prayer,  an  entreaty. 


SYRIAC    LEXICON.  Sfil 

|^t\»  a  cru.ss. 
)S^  •  a  figure,  an  image. 
VfSi»  early  time,  dawn. 
]>•   Ethpe.  to  be  separated,  to 
burst. 


*  r       r        * 

\nn  Fa.  to  receive ;  ^^.^idAcdI 

to  happen,  to  come  to  pass. 
;*^0  to  bury. 

];^D,  1>Q*^0  a  sepulchre. 
^OjipO  ^V)  from  the  beginning. 
yj^O  for,  to,  ?  Wr~^  ^-k) 
ere,  before. 
>^,o   |*V)r£)  the  first. 

P    xV 

^JL^r^  holy. 

loo  to  remain,  to  stop. 

\laao  a  reception,  an  entertam- 
ment. 

[MJQQ  holiness. 

^QO,  >CLD  to  stand  up,  to  stand, 
Aph.  to  erect,  to  set  up,  to 
conclude,  to  appoint,  to  de- 
termine; with^  l^;o  pre- 
ceding, to  make  war  with  any 
one. 

.Q^'r^^QO  a  church-yard,  bary- 
ing-ground. 


362  SYRIAC 

it'   ^ 
JJojao* 

IJajao  a  servant  of  the  church, 
sexton. 

^flPOTifeA^COao      Constantine 
(a  proper  name). 

V  •■  "^  . 

Pi 900  a  town,  a  city. 

^ftJ.a)ao  a  Cyrenean  (a  proper 

name).. 

VAsQID  truth. 

(j  q4^  111.  a  murderer,  a  robber. 

\^  •       • 

^^  cunmng,  ingenious. 

]j4^  slaughter,  murder. 
]V)/n  a  league,  ]V^    »-0  ZojD 
consecrated  vhgins. 

lASCiJD  resurrection. 

\L\  lO  a  song. 

]m>n  a  tree,  bark,  a  book. 

IjAaO  Cithara,  harp. 

1>0>A.i-D  a  player  on  the  cithara. 

^'ix3,  (j-D  a  voice. 

^iKo  little. 

».QDO;  I  No  the  clergy. 

T^^li)  a  bride. 

JJLO  to  acquire ;  A'ph.  to  grant, 

to  bring. 
1>.10  a  pen,  a  reed, 
po^fej^  a  centurion. 
U;£QD  Csesarea  (a  proper  name). 
(l£)  to  call,  to  cry. 


LEXICON. 

^7     X     «s      *    7      7 

P»-O0>(£l£3  Cappadocia  (a  prop- 
er name). 
|*mr)  cassia. 

(^  to  name,  to  call,  to  choose. 
«    n;    n  to  approach,  to  draw- 


near,  Fa.  to  conduct,  to  bring; 

«  IN   ••  -^ 

(m^)  to  sacrifice. 
yo^'^  war 
kCOcA^^O'rO  a  crystal. 

I    7 

«*^i;n  near. 

•  p  p      '^ 

P-k;X}  reading. 

|Aj;£)  a  field,  a  country. 

^P         7 

p;0  a  horn. 
|A<^,o;o  calvary. 

^P  t     7 

i«»nn  a  priest,  an  elder. 

7 

»^)    much,   great,   loud,  chief; 

2)  ateacher,  jE;7ip>^^."lij  Als 

,..   7  7.-7 

'pl.  ^S>  Const.pl.  %A^i* 

ts>  to  grow,  P<a^.  to  bring  up,  to 

educate. 
^     -J  p    ..» 

QlDj  a  myriad,  pZ.  tOliJ* 

fZODj  greatness,  a  multitude. 

7 

v.^i>,  C..J  to  wish  very  much,  to 
desire,  Ethpa.  the  same. 

7  , 

Vyi  J  to  be  angry. 
^j,  (J^J  foot. 


SYRIAC 

XI..)  to  stone. 

«jA.t)  to  mark,  to  feel,  Aph.  the 
same,  with  JD  to  perceive,  to 
remark. 

\I^yO  a  wish,  a  desire. 

IP  to  go,  to  chastise  ;  with  and 
without  IV)    1*^  to  ship. 

[ZiOyj  a  persecutor. 

^^0)9  persecution. 

7    , 

^^U\y  to  hasten,  to  tremble,jEMpe. 
to  be  afraid,  to  be  terrified. 

AapDOClJ  Roman,  Adv.  roina-:- 

cally,  Latin. 
^01)  to  run,  to  hasten. 
fu.  0>  anger,  misfortune. 

wkaO)  m.  spirit. 

»     P   -x  , 

JjaO)  f.  wind,  breath,  spirit. 
|>l»tO>  spiritual. 

"iP        P     -x , 

JZLiaO)   bowel   love,   bowels  of 

mercies. 
]£1m6)    distance    ]£1mOj    ^Ld 

from  a  distance. 

•X  T  7 

^0>   Aph.  ^Q li]  to  raise  up, 

to  elevate. 
IijlSoo?  a  gift. 

«P        P    -x, 

paiO)  a  quarrel. 
]LoOJ  a  cloth  J  a  rag. 


LEXICOX.  3(53 

PID909   a  prince,   a  person  of 

rank. 
]iQ»0>  a  sign. 
y)t  M>  beloved. 
^Q— jsa)    to    love,  Ethya.     with 

^^— il  to  feel  compassion. 

PCLm9   _p/.   compassion,    beneyv" 
leuce,  love. 

IASOmj  love. 

♦    7 

•2Lm9  to  lie,  to  float. 

7  , 

tn»t>  to  be  far  distant. 

U*^y  smell. 

^»J  spittle. 

(lAa)  the  first  named. 

|Aajiu>,  Aa.Aa9  firstling,  begin- 

ning,  pi.  (z\.i^^9* 
^p       p      J 

pai:^Aa9  the  high  priest. 
*p  p  ^ 
pjij)  a  person  of  rank. 

v02>  to  ride. 

-«   7 

^j  Ethpa.  to  feel  inclined,  tr  be 
moved. 

^>,  ]Sd>  f  jASDj  high,  loud,  pi. 

JSD)  James  iv.  6. 
\hh  to  lie,  to  be  placed,  Aph.  to 

cast,  to  send;  with  *n\n  to 

administer;  with  Ia£L3  to  lose 

life. 


364                                           SYRIAC 

LEXICON. 

]k)j. 

*      r 

jSdj  Part.  P.  thrown  down,  given 

up 


IALdj  hills,  Luke  xxiii.  30. 
]Zoffi>V)>  patience,  long  suffer- 
ing. 

fmSDj  evening. 
«nr>rf>)  to  sprinkle. 
Jlj  Pfl^.  .jlIj  to  obtain   again, 
Ethpa.  to  be  reconciled. 

^^  PsDQl  J  mournful,  deeply  moved. 

JjAj  a  herdsman. 

p  •»     p  p  * 

^A^9,  p.kA9  sense,  mind. 
^1)  Ethpe.  to  be  angry. 
JSOIJ  thunder. 
rOi  to  dance,  to  mourn,  to  lament. 

*P  17 

)l^«9  sinful,  a  transgressor. 

7  , 

^S)  to  make  a  sign. 

oa^j  to  be  inflamed,  to  rejoice. 

•^* 

,    9v  *    7 

jOJ^ym  Sapores  (a  pro}3er  name). 

Ijl*  an  evil  spirit. 

s^  to  entreat.  Pa.  to  ask ;  with 

^\l  to  ask  after  some  one. 
p  *     ■»>    '««     * 
lAiL*,  12]J-»  entreaty. 

^t#,  ^^A^  to  reconcile,  to  calm. 
|Z.Q^a*  nearness. 


|ii*^»  captivity,  destniction. 
|»»  >*^»  praise-worthy. 
|Aain»  a  vine. 
14^*  a  sceptre. 
v>.ri»  to  guide,  to  lead. 

7  -p  7  X      7 

>1^Q*,    |sn»     seven,     ^LTl^ 

seventy. 
«nn»  to  leave,  to  give  up,  lo 

permit,  to  let  go. 
IAqji  a  week. 
J-i^Oy^  an  uproar. 
|a>  >!  •  restless,  uneasy. 
*rs^  to  kindle. 
•^w*  Ethpe.  to  be  moved,  to  be 

indignant. 
\r»  to  throw,  to  precipitate. 

Jr»  P^.  to  send,   Ethpa.  SjA», 
is  sent. 

,     7 

901A  to  awake. 

QM  to  be  worthy,  Ethpe.  to  be 
considered  as  worthy. 

(Qa,  ^Qs  equal,  pi.  ^Qs* 

IP,  p      ^ 
)01oa»  renown. 

ploQ*  praise,  renown,  glory. 

0 

»..a»,  v.1^  to  wash. 

*  7 

*01  OS  to  free,  to  tear  away. 


i4-»s>Q*  dishonor,  shame. 
]«^\»iQs  change,  exchange. 
(So\(T  consummation,  end. 
*^Qm,  v^  to  despise. 
}l^a»  power,  authority,  right. 
[OQM  way,  street. 
(?a«  a  wall. 

0  0  -x 

U)QS  beginning. 

pp  ^ 

XiSOM  confirmation. 
P>^Q»  gain,  advantage. 

P  -x         p 

f  jq4«  awkward,  stupid. 
IfiuL*  despised,  small,  inferior. 
%A*J^Mpl.  f.  ^oii^s  present,  Jp^. 

«»»*^» I  to  be  able,  to  find. 
wi»As  to  send,  to  put  away. 
]]*,  «>\«  to  cease,  to  rest. 
.    I    N  •,  I    i    N   •  rest,  ^ 

V*-^,  ^*«lV)  sudden. 
]»» iN*  an  apostle. 

v^i^  Pa.  *4^  to  be  able,  to 

be  powerful. 
^QA*  to  approach  fulfillment,  Pa. 

to  fulfill,  to  complete ;  with  ^\l 

to  salute,  Apk  to  deliver  up; 

f — mOj  to  give  up  the  ghost, 

to  die. 


SYRIAO  LEXICON.  3^5 

T       f 

]V)S»  jpl  m.  ]Sq^  peace 

i<l*,  ]lQ«  a  name. 

PQSq»  Samona  (a  proper  name'. 

*^qSq#  Simon  (a  propername). 

(•b>1Qa  heaven. 

t^aiV)^   Samosata    (a  proi^er 
name). 

«iNSfT  to  finish,  to  complete. 


MS>Q»  to  hear. 

^QlSfi*  Simeon,  Simon  (a  proper 

name). 

•A^bOs  to  serve. 

IaSQa  the  sun. 

\1M  Pa.  to  go  away,  Ol^icA  or 

OljlD  ZoL  to  die. 
»*  p  *p     p 
M-»,  H»JJ*  insane,  foolish. 

ll«,  lAl*  year. 

p    -«  ^ 

(rlA  torment,  pam,  torture. 

^,  ]!•  tooth. 

]l  i1»  sharp. 

(1*  ^iJA;>a.  »a1A»|  to  relate. 

\1l»,   lAli  an  hour;   ]i\liD 

p 
01— O  forthwith. 

Ul«  jest,  play. 

\jJZiM  beautiful,  good,  fern.  pi. 

|Z.V*^»  also  the  neiUer,  good- 
ness. 


R66  SYEUC 

^\£^. 
^Q*  to  hear,  to  take;  A])h.  with 

^Ld  to  go  away. 
\\»  an  inhabitant. 

];*  to  dwell;  with  ^\l  to  besiege, 
Pa.  to  begin. 

J^\»,     \^\»     generation,    bio- 
graphy. 

L.  ;*  a  light,  wax  light,  a  candle. 

lAo.— -. , — y^^»  a  spectre,  an  ap- 
parition. 
P*r«  the  remainder,  the  rest. 
y^,'f»  Ethpa.  to  be  convinced. 

10^7  .         x*P     I  7 

'ru'rS  true,  Adv.  /L-ij^^'p*  truly, 

really. 

IP,   0 
y'r^  truth. 

A»  six. 

L4cuL»  Adv.  silently. 

.^A— s  to  be  silent,  to  be  dumb. 

L 

t>    0       7 

l^ilZ  a  merchant. 

]k)ol2,  .^otijolZ  Thomas,  (a 
proper  name). 

^£0O\»g^olZ     Theophilus      (a 
proper  name). 


LEXICON, 

I 


12. 


\ML  not  clear,  dirty.  2;  dregs, 
that  which  is  most  objection- 
able. 

^i£^Z  to  demand. 

7      7 

;,iZ  to  carry  on  trade,  Ethjpa.  to 
win  (by  trade),  to  be  added 

]Z)QSdjZ  wonder. 

pioolZ  an  abyss. 

|;uOlZ  wonderful. 

J 01 Z  to  be  surprised. 

o'Z  r^r-last  letter  of  the  Alpha- 
bet. 

J-iOL  or  *oZ  to  repent,  to  tui'P, 
to  return. 

%aOL  again. 

01  oZ  to  be  astonished. 

pb-iJoZ  interpretation. 

fZoZ  repentance. 

jiDQjsAZ  a  limit,  bound. 

ZlmZ,  ZomZ,  Ajla*Z  under,  t^L 

^iD   from  below,  ^li  AajA^ 

under. 

«P«          1-  7% 

(Z*V)»tZ  shame, 
IZq^uZ  repentance. 
»OoZ   to   urge,  Part.  ^jl^dL, 
Luke  XXV.  23. 

iJZ  to  hanff  up,  to  raise  up. 


SYRIAC 

tSL 

Jvh^I  snow. 

fZo-aLJSZ  the  Trinity. 
pSo^Z  to  make  a  Scholar,  Ethjpa. 
to  be  learned,  to  be  a  scholar. 
1)»V)\Z  a  scholar. 
ASZ,/.1Z2LZ7w.  three. 
OIIsDZ  to  wonder,  to  be  astonished. 
IouIdZ  wonderful,  remarkable. 
y)iV>Z,  I Sn»V)Z  honest,  genuine. 
]j1dZ/.  eight. 
^iDL  there,  in  that  place. 
pZ  to  repeat,  Fa.  to  narrate. 


LEXICON.  36T 

Ja^oZ  great,  strong. 
Xlyt'^  to  explain,  to  interpret. 

^-^>Z,  ^-aZ^Z   two  ;    ^— i'Zi 

the  second. 
1^)Z  right,  true,  faithful. 
H'Z  a  door,  a  gate. 
|A.»^jZ  mind,  opinion. 
I  AjaQ^»Z  a  hymn,a  song  ofprai.se 
(AaSQsZ  service,  attendance. 
VLsZ/.  \LMLm.  nine. 
«>S»Z  to  narrate,  from  |jL*» 
|Aa1»Z  a  narration. 


Additions  and  Corrections 


TRANS  LA  TED  FROM  THE 


SECOND    EDITION 


OF 


UHLEMANN'S 


SYRIAC   GRAMMAR 


BY 

ENOCH    HUTCHINSON. 


NEW  YORK 
1875. 


ABBREVIATIONS    USED   IN  THIS  PART  OF  THE 

WORK. 


A  indicates  the  Second  American  Edition,  the  first  figure  or 
figures  following,  refer  to  the  page  of  the  same  edition,  the  next 
figures,  to  the  line  (  always  counted  from  the  top  of  the  page), 
and  the  next  figures  indicate  the  word  or  words  (always  counted 
from  left  to  right),  in  or  after  which,  the  correction  or  addition 
is  to  be  made.  For  example  :  A.  12.  4.  6.  indicate  American 
edition,  page  12,  line  4  from  top  of  page,  word  6,  counting  from 
left  to  right.  When  there  are  references  to  Notes  or  Sections, 
N.  is  inserted  for  the  former  and  §  for  the  latter. 


Additions  and  Corrections. 


A.  18.  28.  4— After  the  word  "east",  in  Translation,  add : 
"(i.e.  Dortherly)". 

A.20.  11.  6.— Before  "Syrian",  add  :«  ancient ". 

A.  20.  16.  2.— After  "186",  add:  "Notice  of  a  late  work 
on  the  modern  Syriac  tongue  (cf.  R'ddiger,  Chrestomathia 
Syriaca,  p.  138,  ff.),  is  found  in  the  Journal  of  the  American 
Oriental  Society,  vol.  v.,  no.  1.,  p.  1-180,  under  the  title: 
'  Grammar  of  the  Modern  Syriac  Language,'  etc.,  hy  Stod- 
dard, 1S56,  from  which  we  learn  what  a  transformation  the 
ancient  Syriac  has  received,  and  what  new,  foreign  elements 
have  been  incorporated  into  the  modern  language." 

A.  21.  35,  1. — Instead  of  the  sentence  in  translation  beginning 
with  :  *J  More  recently,"  etc.,  add  :  "  whilst  there  is  now 
(1857)  in  press  a  copious  and  elaborate  Syriac  Lexicon, 
whose  author,  the  highly  meritorious  Bernstein,  has  already 
distinguished  himself  in  Syriac  literature  by  his  Syriac  Lexi- 
con  attached  to  KirscJts  Chrestomathy,  (Lipsiae.  1836), 
which  will  be  a  most  essential  aid  in  the  study  of  the  lan- 
guage. Bernsteinh  great  lexicon  contains  the  results  of  the 
most  important  investigations  made  by  the  old  Syriac  Lexicog- 
raphers, and  with  that  work  Syriac  literature  in  respect  to 
lexicography  of  that  period,   closes.  * 

A.  21.  39.  2.  After  "  Sieffert",  add  :  "  and  Jidtf?^er". 
A.  2L  41.  12.  After  "  Syriac",  add  :  "monumental". 
A.  23.  39.  3.  After  "  4  ",  add  :  "  Ed.  XL  1691". 


*  The  first  number  of  Geonje  Henry  Bernstein's  great  Lexicon  was 
issued  in  1857,  but,  I  regret  to  say,  that,  for  want  of  sufficient  encourage- 
ment ,  the  learned  lexicographer  was  not  able  to  proceed  with  the  work, 

^•■-  25 


374  ADDITIO.SS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

A.  25.  1 8.  4.  After  "  Testament ",  add  :  "  Georg.  Henry  Bern- 
stem^  liexicoa  Syriacum  Chrestomathiae  KirschianiB  denuo 
editse.     Lipsia.  1836-8. 

A.  25.  29.  3.   After  "Bernstein",  add:  "Lipsia.  1832.  8vo. 

A.  25.  36.  8.  After  "Syr.",  add:  "jEmil.  Rddiger  Chrestoma- 
thia  Syriaca  (Glossario  explanata).  HalivS  Saxonum.  1828. 
8vo. 

A.  28.  23.  2.  Instead  of  the  first  five  lines  of  Rem.  2,  in  Trans- 
lation, add  :  "  In  respect  to  the  above  named  joining  of  indi- 
vidual letters  to  each  otner  m  a  word,  it  should  be  remarked  : 

that  the  letters,  ^  ,  y^,  a*,^  ^,a.  ,  a,SQ,l,m,a,n,  and 
&  ,  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  may  be  joined  to  letters  on  both 
sides  of  them,  while  (,,,01,0,1.,^,;,  and  A  ,  can  only 
be  joined  to  letters  preceding  them  ;  but  if  one  of  these  let- 
ters ('l,;,Cl,Q,].,  ^,;,A)  precede  the  letters  ? ,  J ,  i  ; 
or  2  J  no  connecting  line  is  inserted  between  them.  So  also, 
>  ,  )  ,  and  Z,  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  are  not  joined  with 
the  following  consonant.      The  final   letters^    ^,^,.,^, 

take  or  reject  the  connecting  lines,  m  accordance  with  the 
laws  of  uniting  letters  by  lines. 

When  I  at  the  beginning  of  a  v;ord  is  followed  by  \  the 

letters  are  written  -^ ;  but  when  inverted  they  are   written 

U ,  consequently,  when  two  words,   the  first  of  which  ends 

with  ^  ,  and  the  second    begins  with   f ,  they  are  united  by 

means   of  the  twisted  figure  XJ  ;  if  another   1  still  occur  in 

p-r, 

connection    with   ii,  the  latter  is  placed  after  f,  e.  g.  jj], 

A.  29.  18.  7.— Instead  of  "  the  gutturals  ",  add:  "  ]  and  L". 

A.  29.  24.  5. — After  "  01 ",  add  :  ", being  not  strongly  guttu- 
ral,". 

A.  29.  27.  11. — Insteadof  the  sentence  bep-inning:  "from  500- 


ADDITONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  375 

900 ",  add :  "  For  500-900,  which  reach  beyond  the  num- 
bers designated  by  single  consonants,  tens,  from  50-90,  were 
used,  and,  like  hundreds,  were  designated  by  points  placed 

over  the  letters,  o.  g  jb    600,  »2)  800  ". 

A.  29.  30.  2.—- After  the  word  "  units  ",  add  :  "  ( which  mark, 
in  hundreds,  tens  and  units  of  compound  numbers,  falls  away 
again,  e.  g.  0112)1,  1855)". 

A.  31.  4.  1. — Before  "  (  For  ",  add :  "  Sometimes  Q  was  origi- 
nally retained  by  Ephrem,  e.  g.  'ioo  0pp.    Syr.  I.  34.  1.  2., 

VqO  III.  590.  F.  1.  5  ". 
A.  31.  5.  5.— Instead  of  " three ,"  put :  "four". 
A.  31.  9.  7. — Instead  of  "  In  foreign  words  it  quiesces  in  Q", 

add  :  "  In  foreign  words  Q  quiesces  in  —  ". 
A.  32.  3.  2. — Before  "  seems  ",  add :  "(  corresponding  with  the 
Hebrew  mappik)". 

A.  32.  18.  2.— After  «  1773",  add:  "and  //.  Ewald  Ueber 
das  Syrische  Punktations  system  nach  Syrischen  HandschHft- 
en,  in  a  Treatise  on  Oriental  and  Biblical  Literature,  Bd. 
Gottingen  1832.  pp.  53—129". 

A..   32.  29.  3.— Add:  "§  12.    3.",  after  "  8  ". 

A.  33.  2.  6.  Instead  of  the  remainder  of  the  note  in  Transla- 
tion, add :  "  Yet  it  cannot  be  denied  that,  in  many  cases  there 
is  a  real  resemblance  between  them.  In  respect  to  the  use  of 
both  points  (Kushoi  and  Rukol),  it  is  universally  admitted, 
that  the  letters  named  (aspirates),  wlten  in  the  middle  of  a 
word,  were  originally  dependent,  for  their  aspiration,  upon 
the  vowels  immediately  preceding,  which  emit  the  softest 
possible   breathings  (  =  -7-  vocal )   flowing  over,  as  it  were, 

to  the  aspirates.  The  consonant  of  a  closed  syllable  immedi- 
ately preceding,  forms  the  opposite  relation,  according  to 
which  the  hardening  comes  in  through  Kushoi.  Hence 
this  mark  (Kushoi)  more  frequently  occurs  in  the  middle  of  a 
word  as  the  initial  and  Jinal  letters  sufficiently  make  known, 
in  respect  to  this  law  of  the  language.  The  first  (initial  let- 
ters), in  continued  discourse,  are  dependent  upon  the  prece- 
ding words  ending  in  a  vowel  or   consonant.      In   the   last 


jlQ  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

final  letters)  even,  the  vowel  or  consonant  makes  its  influence 
felt.  Hence  these  points  occur  in  accordance  with  the  fol- 
lowing rules  : 

A.  Rukok  occurs,  a)  at   the  beginning   of  a  word,   v/hen 
a  vowelless  consonant,  belonging  to  the  syllable,  precedes  the 

aspirates,  e.  g.  cA^aj,  .^Ao ;  b)  in  the  middle  of  a  word 
after  a  preceding  closed  syllable  with  a  long  vowel,  e.  g. 
]A.  \^  ^  Idqaxx*;  or,  when  (the  relations  being  the  same  as 
before),  the  following  syllable  begins  with  a  vowelless  conso- 
nant, (vocal  sheva),  and  no  aspirate  follows,  e.  g.  IAj^Q^IsZ. 
Nor  is  the  same  relation  of  syllables  lost  when  a  helping 
vowel  is  received  in  the  middle  of  a  \vord,  as  in  IAD'^L  for 

"jAo;!.      When  there  is  an  open  syllable,  with  1  quiescing  in 

or  ,  e.  g.  ^QOp  ,  r^fj.  Rukok  occurs;    c)    in  the 

final  consonant  of  a  closed  syllable  with  a  short  vowel  pre- 
ceding, e.  g..  ^^-^21  ,  ISdOaa  ;  d)  under  D  in  the  suffix 
of  the  2nd.  person  plural  after  a  preceding  closed  syllable,  e.  g. 

«»  "A  ■«         y 

•QOISd  ,  ^A.-k21 ;  and  finally,  e)  in  the  middle  of  a  word 
after  a  consonant  supposed  to  be  doubled  ,  e.  g.  lA^So  (from 
^SiSD  )  ;  VASqI*  (from  i^lSG>*). 

*  The  author  here  seems  to  regard  the  termination  |  of  these  exam- 
ples, as  formiug  a  syllable  of  itself  without  the  addition  of  A  and  O-  This 
view  is  against  that  of  Gesenius  in  respect  to  Hebrew  (vid.  his  Hebrew 
Gram.  Ed.  by  Rodiger,  15th  Edition,  Leip.  1848.  §  26.1),  where  he  affirms 
that,  with  one  exception,  every  syllable  begins  with  a  consonant.  A.  T. 
Hoffmann,  in  his  elaborate  Syriac  Grammar  ( Halaj.  1827.  lib.  1.  cap,  2.  §  3. 
1),  affirms  that  "in  respect  to  the  origin  and  division  of  syllables,  the  rules 
of  Hebrew  apply  in  Syriac,"  with  which  opinion  all  Oriental  philologists, 
no  doubt,  will  agree.  Furthermore,  "[Thiemann,  in  the  first  edition  of  his 
Grammar,  recognizes  this  principle,  in  his  example  given  in  §  5.  Anm.  Ru- 
hok,  c.  .  Instead  of  saying :  "  after  a  closed  syllable,"  he  should  have  said, 
"  after  an  open  syllable".  This  principle  he  has  stated,  with  an  example 
six  lines  farther  on.  The  instance  evidently  comes  under  Kushoi,  being 
stated  in  almost  the  same  words  aw  the  first  instance  (marked  a)  under 
Kushoi.     It  must  have  been  an  oversight  of  the  learned  Professor.   Tr 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  377 

B.  Kushoi,  on  the  contrary,  occurs,  a)  in  the  middle  of  a 

word  after  a  preceding  closed  syllable,  e.  g.  %^oLu  ;  d) 
after  prefixes  which  form  closed  syllables  by  taking  the  helping 
vowel — ,  the  initial  letter  of  the  syllable  before  taking  the  prefix 
being  vowelless,  e.  g.  **x2U0  (  wm.2U);  |r)A:ii^  (  h^^  )  i  ^') 
after  dipthongs,  which  are  considered  as  constituting  closed 
syllables,  e.g.  Aa.^ ,  \LjJ^  ,  U^llD,  |A.*JLd^  {-^  except- 
ed);  also  in  the  plural  suffix  of  the  2d.  person,  e.  g.  tO-^^, 

-n    .         7 

'  "^^  ;  d)  over  those  consonants  in  Pa.  and  Ethpa.  of  regu- 
lar verbs,  as  well  as  the  nouns  and  adjectives  derived  there- 
from, whose  middle  letter  is  supposed  to  be  doubled,  e.  g. 

K  .    7  7.    7  7.7      ■«         '7   7  //  •»■•    7  **/  7  .  ^        •»> 

^cil ,  >Aji  ,  >A^21,  sA^Sd  ;  VLi  ,  e.  g.  >*oj,  .ruTil,  .nnSZl; 
■  •  •  •        • 

/'  .  X..7 

in  ApJu  and  Ethta.  of  verbs  Ql  (in  O  and  2)),  e.  g.  ^-i-3 1  (from 
^),  j;ila.2>|  (from  ..CQa);  •.a.2)  and  JQ,  where  (  is 
changed  into  O,  e.  g.    ^oZo"} ,  ^Do] ;  or  in  general,  where 

ir  II 

the  first  radical  letter  falls  away,  as  in  verbs  wi^  and  ^,  e.  g. 
v.£^J  (  i^M^.  for  ^^U  ),  ..oAj  (  from  *!dAa  );  even  in  nouns, 

as  jiaCilD;  so  also,  in  those  particles  compounded  with  ^5iO 
in  which  .falls  away,  e.  g.  t-iSsD,  ^i-».2l!sO;  finally,  in  deriva- 
tives  of  verbs  Ml,  as  p^l,  even  when  Q—  has  been  inserted 
and  the  aspirate  follows,   e.  g.  JoQa*    (from   »^a*  ),     L.Oj 

(from  *vi5),  I^Ql  (from  «^1) ;  or  according  to  the  Hebrew 

p  :^7    .  •^ 

analogy,  e.  g.  |Zi.J  (=in"1^5^) ;  ^)  when  a  word  closes  with 
two  vowelless  consonants,  as  in  2d.  Sing.  Pret.^  the  final 
letter  also  takes  Kushoi,  e.  g.  t^^.     In  foreign,  (especially 


378  ADDITIONS  AND   CORRECTIONS. 

Greek)  words,  without  reference  to  the  division  of  the  sylla- 
bles, tiie  following  letters  take  it;  2)  which  corresponds  with 

0,  a  with  TT,  i)  with  K   and  D   with   x^   ^-  g-    >aPoSi^Sn«=^ 

==  UdiJKpilog]  ]D'rZi(Jl  ~  b  tnapxog,  etc.      The  importance  of 

this  mark  is  apparent  in  ancient  manuscripts,  which  have  no 
vowels  (  cf.  Lud.  de  Dieti^  p.  25.  tf.  ;  Ewald^  a.  a.  O.  and 
i?cr;zs/^gi«,  Lexicon  Syriacum.  Lipsiaj.   1836.  8vo.). 

Rem.  2. — Id  like  manner,  a  point  over  (  in  the  middle  of  a  word  after  an 
open  syllable,  indicates  that  that  letter  has  the  full  force  of  a  consonant, 

e-  g-  ^\m  ,  ^JD.    Also  when  the  same  mark  is  placed  over  Ol  in  (001^ 
Cn  is  not  sounded.    The  same  is  true  in  respect  to  oi  in  all  compounds  with 

\°  '  . 

1 01    ,    particularly  when  the  latter  has  a  demonstrative  signification,  e.  g. 

ZqOOI  ,  ^\^6i  ,  Isjoi  ,  etc." 

A.  33.  22.  7. — After  -'-  consonants",  add :  "  in  unpointed  writ- 
ings". 

A.  33.  24.  2. — After  "word",  add:  "In  the  noun  masc.  this 
mark  is  especially  useful  for  distinguishing  the  emphatic  plu- 
ral (§  45.  3)  from  the  same  form  of  the  singular". 

A.  33.  29.   \2.^AitQv''praised'\  add:  "(Ps.  XVIII.  16}". 

A.  34.  8.  7.— After  "^  16.  c",  add  :  "  In  respect  to  the  use  of 
Ribui  in  the  3d.  pi.  Fret.M  isdoubtful,in  many  cases,  whether 
such  use  should  be  considered  as  really  in  accordance  with 
the  rules  of  the  language  (§  20.  1.  Rem. ;  ^  80.  3.  Rem.)  or  an 
oversight  of  the  transcriber  (cf.  Bernstein  Chrestom.  p.  3)". 

A.  34.  15.  1.— After  "  Kushoi",  add:  «cf.  ^  5.  2.  Rem.  1.  B". 
(The  information  to  which  this  reference  relates,  is  found  on 
p,  377  Translation,  second  edition.     Tr.). 

A.  34  18.  1. — Instead  of  the  Translation,  §  7.  to  Rem.  1.,  add  : 
"  When  the  Syrians  wished  to  indicate  that  a  vowel  was  to 
be  received  in  order  to  aid  in  pronunciation,  or  when  such 
vowel  was  to  be  avoided,  as  in  case  of  Kushoi  and  Rukok 
employed  to  mark  the  softer  or  harder  sounds  of  consonants 
(§  5),  they  placed  small  horizontal  lines  over  or  under  the  con- 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  379 

sonants  where  such  vowel  was  to  be  introduced  or  avoided. 
When  there  was,  in  Syriac,  such  an  accumulation  of  vowelless 
consonants,  that  the  introduction  of  a  vowel,  selected  without 
reference  to  the  etymology  of  the  word  and  forming  a  short 
euphonious  syllable,  became  necessary,  a  line,  called  Meluigyono 

(from  \yjp\to  reflect)^  was  placed  under  that  word,  indicating  the 

place  where  the  voice  necessarily  hesitated  from  the  diflSculty 
of  pronunciation.     The  new  vowel  introduced  after  such  con- 

sonant  was  usually  —  ,  but  sometimes  —  ,  e.  g.  (Aj^a*> 
{dehh^lto^  making  a  kind  of  diaeresis.     But  when  the  voice  was 

to  hasten  over* the  same  consonants  without  the  least  audible 
vowel  sound,  a  line  was  placed  over  such  consonants  called 

Marhetono   (from  ^(SVi  to  hasten)^  e.  g.  |Ao>l  zedJcrto.'''' 

A.  34.  28.  6.— For  "  only",  put  "  immediately". 

A.  34.  32.  4.— After  "  11",  add  :  '' Ewald,  a.  a.  0". 

A.  35.  2.  1.  Instead  of  "§  8.",  read:  "This  mark  is  similar  to 
Marhetono^  and  should  not  be  confounded  with  Meluigyono. 
It  is  a  line  placed  under  consonants  indicating  that  the  latter 
have  scarcely  a  perceptible  sound,  and,  from  that  circum- 
stance it  takes  its  name.  When  placed  under  1  before  01  , 
it  indicates  a  softening  of  1  into  a  sound  very  nearly  repre- 

,  e.  g.  jOH   elyidh.      It  is  scarcely  believed  that 

a  regular  consonant,  taking  this  mark  under  it,  entirely  loses 
its  sound,  consequently  the   mark  under  the  middle   radical 

letter  of  the    imj^erat.   Ethpe.   and   Ethpa,    i^\^L\)   can 

scarcely  be  considered  as  indicating  an  entire  loss  of  pronun- 
ciation. No  confirmation  of  the  supposition  that  a  conso- 
nant with  this  mark  under  it  entirely  loses  its  consonant 
sound,  is  found  in  the  occurrence  of  the  mark  under  J  ,  e.  g. 

]Al*  ,  "|Ala,.SD ,  where  it  is  thought  to  indicate  an  assimila- 

tion,  as  it  does  in  L'^  and  in  the  imper.  %43ai  (from  •4^'). 
This  mark  indicates  an  entire  loss  of  sound  only  when  placed 
under  |  and  01  ,  such  loss  of  sound  being  particularly  pei- 
ccptible  when  |  precedes  ^  .  (cf  §  12.  1.  B.  a ). 


380  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

Rem.  Since  this  mark  should  not  be  extended,  as  it  has  been  by  some,  to 
the  impcrr.  Mhtaphal,  and  Eshta.,  so  it  follows  that  it  is  to  be  considered 
as  extending  only  to  the  marking  of  the  imperative  of  Ethpe.  and  Ethpa., 
lor,  were  it  to  extend  farther,  the  influence  of  a  rapid  pronunciation  might, 
in  a  measure,  counteract  the  utterance  of  the  fullest  known  sound  of  ihe 
letter  under  which  it  is  placed." 

A.  35.  19.  2.— After  "^7",  add:  ",the  difficulty  of  pronunci- 
ation is  relieved,".  Also  put "  and  "  after  "  antepenultimate". 
(Nos.  1.  and  2.  are  transposed  in  the  new  German  Edition,  and 
the  Rem.  is  placed  at  the  end  of  the  section.     Tr.). 

A.  35.  25.  11.— After  "final",  add  :  "  after  the  falHng  away  of 

^," 

A.  35.  SO.  1.  Insteadofthelirstlineof  §10.,  after  "divide"  iQ 
line  2  of  Trans.,  add  :  "  The  Syrians,  according  to  ancient  tes- 
timony, before  their  manuscripts  were  furnished  with  vowels, 
and  when  only  a  very  simple  system  of  accentuation,  similar 
to  that  of  the  Hebrew,  was  known  and  used  (cf.  Etmlcl,  a.  a. 
0.),  divided". 

A.  37.  25.  11.— Omit  in  Trans,  from  line  25.  word  12.,  "  with", 

to  line  27.  word  4.,  and  instead,  add  :  *';  c  )  with  ^  in^ll  togo, 
when  it  (^)  begins  a  syllable  in  the  course  of  conjugation,  in 
which  case,  the  vowel  belonging  to  it,  falls  back  upon  the 
middle  radical". 

A.  37.  31.  1.— Instead  of  Rem.  in  Trans.,  add:  "Rem.  This 
mark  (Linea  occultans)  also  occurs  under  ]  in  nouns,  which 
are   derived    from   those    mentioned    under    a   above,     as 

(ZqIajsaI  ,  (ZQAJf.  It  also  occurs  under  Ol  in  001  and  »-i01 , 

where  they  are  pleonastic  (§  55.  A).      It  does   not   appear 

IP 
OGl    when   it  is  absolute  and  has  the  signification  to 
be,  to  become,  or  to  cotne  to  pass''\ 

A.  38.  16.  8. — After  "  occultans",  in  Trans.,  add  :  "  by  contrac 
tion  in  a  word". 

A.  40.  21.  4.— Before  "is",  add:  ''sometimes". 

A.  40.  26.  4. — Instead  of  the  last  four  lines  of  §  14.  add,  before 
"where";  *•  c)  in  nouns  like  ^I'^n  wines,  >i\i  rest  ,  >jl^vZ[ 
yesterday.  But  «a  is  sounded  only  when  followed  by  001  , 
e.  g.  001  •-i^O,  pronounced  bekyu,  and  in  the  emphatic  state 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  381 

of  nouns  terminating  in  ]-».     So  it  ought  to  bo  considered  as 
well  established  that  w4  without  such  a  union  and  declension 
as  we  have  named  above,  may  be  enunciated  at  the  end  of  a  • 
word  as  a  weak  and  slight  consonant  sound.      The  same  is 
true  of  cases  mentioned  under  a)  above,  where  Q  and  »a  oc- 

// 
cur  at  the  end  of  verbal  forms,  vrhere,  in  verbs  |j  they  form 

the  dipthongs  au,  ai  and  oi^  e.  g.  Q-Li     -  '^.i ,  -  "a 

A.  41.  31.  3.— Before  "c)"  In  Trans.,  add:  "  the  vowel  being 
moved  forward.". 

A.  41.  32.  6.— Omitfrom"when",line2.  B.,to"In,'Ma8tl«ie, 
and  add :  ".when  a  suffix  of  the  Ist.  sing,  and  2d.  and  3d.  pi., 
is  added  ". 

A.  41.  33.  5.— Before  "In",  in  Trans.,  add:  "In  other  posi- 

tions  Q  takes  its  usual  place,  e.  g.  \^CiOr\  ^  ^^LoQoL." 

A.  42.  25.  8.— Omit  from  fine  10.  B.,  word  9.  "This",  to 
line  5.  B.  w.  8.,  "  Finally  ",  and  add :  "  In  the  verb  this  aux- 
iliary vowel  under  the  first  radical  with  a  fleeting    sound 

is—  in  Fret.  Te.  (3.  f.  and  1  sing.)  Al^^  j  A^4^;  or,   — 

before  wk  at  the  beginning,  e.  g.  JdLm,  t'^Ni;  or  at  the 
end  of  verbs  ]]  ,  e.  g.  wi^tZ] ,  «J>^« ;  with  the  exception  of 
the  imperative  Ethpe.  and  passive  part,  Pa.^  and  Apk.y  where 
it  is  —  and,   with  ^,  forms  the   dipthong  aij  e.g.  t-i.^^Z], 

*aA.^  (emphat.  state  f.  tAi\..V)) ,  " 
A.  46.  12.  15.— After  "  12.  1.",  add:    "In  the  1  pi.  ^L*,  and 

7  7   ■« 

more  frequently  ^mjI  occur  in  the  Actis  Mart,  orientail,  of 
Maruthas  (vid.  Tom.  ii.  p.  327.,  lin.  14  )  ". 

A.  4G.  30.  6.— Before  "  On  ",  in  Trans.,  add  :  "  The  Suffix  3d. 


382  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

m.  Sing.  i-aOlQ-i.,  enclosed  in  brackets  under  a.  in  the  table, 

has  been  introduced  and  accepted  by  some  Grammarians 
without  proper  authority,  and  it  might  be  omitted,  as  its  exist- 
ence is  not  proved,  from  the  fact  that  there  are  numerous  ex- 
amples of  the  form  ^G1Ql.i.  in  Ephrem  (cf.  Bernstein^  Chrest. 
Syr.  Prsef.  p.  xxi). 

A.  47.  2.  3— Before  "In"  Trans,  instead  of  4  lines  to  "Only", 
add :  "  Monosyllabic  nouns,  which  lose  their  vowel,  and  dis- 
syllabic nouns,  which  lose  the  vowel  of  the  second  syllable  in 

the  emphatic  state,  like  derivatives  of  verbs  \j  with  (  and  wk« 
take  it  again  when  receiving  the  sii^x  1  si?tg,  and  2  and  3 
plural.  \  passes  into  ^a  and  the  latter  is  either  movable  or 
quiesces  in  —  (cf.  %  4G).      In  the  plur.,  m.,    «a  ,  which   is 

y 

peculiar  to  the  pi.  suf,  coalesces  with  the  termination     w^. 

of  the  const,  st.  (§  45),  e.  g.  yL^oidD  (from  .  i  '^SV)),  so  that 
these  sifffixes  may  be  considered  as  added  directly  to  the  last 
radical ". 

A.  47.  7.  1. — Omit  from  "  In  ",  Trans.  7linestoEem.  and  add  : 
"  The  femin.  noun,  on  the  contrary,  takes  suffixes  of  the  sin- 
gular form,  in  the  sing,  and  plur.  number,  in  such  a  manner, 
that,  with  the  preceding  union  vowel  omitted,  the  vowel  ar- 
rangement of  the   empliat.  state  sing.,  is  received  with  the 

falling  away  of  ),  e.  g.  OlA^oAiD  (emphat.  state  (Z^oAtd)  ; 
the  others  (I  sing,  and  2  and  ^ pi)   are  attached  to  the  form 

and  vowel  arrangement  of  the  construct  state,  e.  g.  .jA^oAo  , 

9.        7     -X  7      «^ 

.QdALoAo  {const.  St.  A^oAo).  The  plural,  with  the  suffix 
of  the  sing,  form  only,  takes  essentially  the  form  and  vowel 

arrangement  of  the  const,  state  (ALoAtd)  ,  where  the  ending 
A  forms  a  closed  syllable,  and  thus  the  plur.  cannot  be  mis- 

taken  for  any  other  form,  e.  g.  *jA^oAo,  vf  A\oAo  ,  etc." 


ADDITIONS  AKD   CORRECTIONS.  383 

A.  47.  26.  9.— After  "it",  add:  "  is  taken  substantially  for  amj- 
things  or  ". 

A.  47.  27.  7.— -After  "us",  add:  "  (cf.  Synt.  ^  54.  B.  4.  Eem. 

A.  48.  7.  6. — Instead  of,  "with  both  plural  suffixes",  read: 
^^ plural  suffixes  of  both  genders  occur  with  ". 

A.  48.  17.  If^Omit  8  lines  in  Tr.,  and  read :  "  Rem.  The  wz«*c. 
sing,  form  .Gl  is  very  frequently  found  in  the  poems  of 
Ephrem  and  always  stands  before  the  noun.     It  is  used  thus 

P  7  0  0       9      0  J 

in  Ephr,  I.  p.  370,  e.  g.  X»^  ^01  for  pOI  tA^ ,  also  in  I.  Sam, 
xvii.  55.     In  Assem.  B.  0.  III.  75,  it  occurs  between  the  noun 

0      0 

and  adjective.     On  the  contrary  (JOl  can  precede  or  follow 

0  >    "      ' 

the  noun.     Also  JCT  /em.,  for  fjCTI ,  occurs  in  ^j^Ar.  III.  590, 
before  the  noun.     In  the  sing.  (IjOl  fern.),  it  is  united  with 

•w  X  y    0  -k"    " 

OCT  m.  and  *^C51/.  forming  QJOl  and  t-aOlfjOl  j  and  sometimes 

♦^  I  0     0^  *pi 

0C3  and   *a01  precede,  e.  g.    poi  001  ^e7^  ikisj  (jOl  wiOl 
e2;ew  ^/^w.      More  frequently  in  comparison,  is  the  Chaldee 

ftV»^  (from     ^^  and   ^^i  Nv  =  V^s^)  used  in  connection 

7  u  V  t\    0  y 

with    >L»1,    e.   g.    ^Aa"|    >wlj,   also  ^-JiCTI     y^lj    swcA 
(£>/«•.  III.  E.   1). 

2.  The  Relative  for  all  genders  and  numbers  is  3 ,  tr/«^, 
td7/i2c/i  and  ^/ia^,  whose  proper  position  is  at  the  beginning  of 
a  word  (as  a  prefix).  Immediately  following  a  word,  it  raises 
the  interrogative  idea  and  constitutes  the  interrogative  pro- 
noun. After  ,-Sd  ,  5  forms  either  the  general  idea  of  the  rela- 
tive^ as  y  -!sO  any  one^  who^  who,  or  constitutes  at  the  sumo 
time,  the  demonstraMvej  that  J  as  j  P-»l  thatfU;hichy  >  |r>|  i/ia^ 


384  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

which,  "i  y^\\^\  (gen.  c.)  tJiat,  which,      j  preceding  _ Vo  ,  ex- 

7 

presses  the  genitive  of  the  indirect  question,  e.  g.-Lo  Jwhose^ 
etc.  (cf.  §  56.  Syntax)". 

A.  49.  2.  7.— Add:  '' Ephr.  I.  347.  E.  7". 

A.  49.  7.  3. — Add  :  ",  and  partly  by  the  simple  personal  suffix 

with  its  case  marking  it  ". 

# 
A.  50.  11.  3.— After  "  Future  ",  add :  ("indicating  an  action 

finished  and  unfinished)". 

A.  54.  3,  3. — Omit:  "and  imperative". 

A,  54.  5.  5. — Instead  of  "  additions",  in  Trans.,  add:  "marks 
of  persons  ". 

A.  54.  6.  3.— After  "and",  in  Tr.,  add:  "  marks  of  gender 
and  number  ". 

A.  54.  6.  6. — After  "  end  ",  add  :    "  The  imperative  has  the 
marks  of  gender  and  number,  in  common  with  the/w^wre". 

A.  54.  17.  5. — Before  "is",  add:  "and  has  forced  itself  into 
use,  ". 

A.  54.  35.  11.— After  "P/eiJ."  omit  to  "But"  in  last  line,  and 
with  —  preceding  ( =  i^)  does  not 
seem  to  be  derived  from  the  pronoun  ". 

A..  55.   13.  4. — After  "  syllable",  omit  the  whole  sentence. 

'/  // 

A.  57.  2.  4.— Instead  of   "  \^   which",  add:  "  *^»^    (§  29) 

and  i^  (§  30),  of  which  the  latter  throws  ". 

A.  57.  6.  1. — Insteadof  the-first  six  lines  of  Rem.,  add  :  "  Eem. 
In  the  inflection  of  the  pret.  Pe,,  verbs  Med.  E.  [intrans.) 

retain  —  ,  where,  in  verbs  Med  A.,  —  stands  over  the  radical 
syllable,  e.g.  A!L*j.j,  ^oAi^*jw; .     In  the  3d.  r:i.  pi.   (all  the 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  385 

prct.)  the  paragogic  form  .C^4^  is  sometimes  found.     Hut 

••7    7  0  7  0      7 

the  forms  of  the  3  y/.  »A4£),   ,-^4^,   ^1^^  adduced 
by  Buxtorf,  are  not  confirmed  by  Syriac  Grammarians.     In 

respect  to  ^^Q  =  C^^a  ,  ^^^  (  3.  pi.  m.  and/.)  cf.  § 
6.  1." 

A.  57.  19.  7. — Before  "sometimes",  add  :  (  ^-\p  and  ^lp)." 

A.  58.  28.  13.— Before  "  first  ",  leaving  out  «  The  ",  add  : 
"  On  account  of  the  falling  away  of  the  third  radical  letter, 
.in  order  to  aid  in  forming  the  new  syllable,  the,". 

A.  59.  24.  9. — Before  "are",  add:  ^^  qw  en  io  i\\Q  absolute  St.* 
m.  together  with  the  other  cases  named  in  the  Rem.  of  the 
preceding  §," 

■•    7 

A.  60.  3.  9.— After   "press"  add:  "  \^  to  kill  many  (lit 

7 

more),  from   v.^^  ^^  ^-'^'^  ^^^'  (c^-  Bar-Ali  and  Bar-Bahlul 

*  7  7 

in    Bernsteins''    Chrest.   Pref.  p.  xx) ;  *n«1  and  ^OqI  to  kiss, 
with  a  similar  reference  to  single  or  repeated  action  ". 

A.  61.  15.  4.— Before  "  Aphel  ",  add  :  <'  Pa.  and". 

A.  63.  2.  5. — After  "  Patriarch  ",  add :  '* ;  or  such  letter  is  trans- 

T,  7 

posed,  e  g.  ^t^  fcaTTjyopetv  ". 

A.  63.   14.   12.— Before  "2)",  add:  "(a/w^with  Q ,  derived 

from  Ma^  ,  however,  occurs  in  the  Charkl.  translation  of  Luke 
vi.  30,  and  in  the  ArJis  Mart.  li.  p.  ]  16.  4)". 

A.  67.  5.   1 1 . — After  "  imperat ",  add  :  "  transitive  ". 

A.  67.  6.  5. — Before  "e.  g.",  add  :  '"  with  a  strong  sound  of  the 

voice  ". 

*  It  will  be  recollected  that  participles  are  considered  as  nouns,  and 
have  the  absolute  and  construct  state  (vid.  §  63.  E).  2r. 


886  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

A.  67.  9.  1. — Instead  of  the  first  seven  lines,  read:  "Rem. 
The  imperat.  Fe.  of  '^]  ,  like  the  jore^.,  retains  — ,  but  the 
imperatives  of  the  verbs  *2l^  ,  5<lo]  ,  yj"! ,  take  their  form 
with  an  intransitive  meaning,  from  the  usual  roots  of  verbs  *.»j2), 

7    I 

e.  g.  **^Ni  (Matt.  xi.  29).     Here  also  belongs  that  formation 

of  the/w^.  and  inf.  Pe.  in  which  1  of  the  original  \zi  verbs, 
with  vowels  indicating  a  transitive  signification,  quiesces  in 

— ,  e.  g.  ^QOp  ,  ^\o|Sd  ,    but  with  vowels  indicating  an 

intransitive  meaning,   in   — ,  e.   g.  pSo^J  ;Sd]1jd.      To   the 

first  (transitive  verbs)  belong  ^.  1 ,   h^|  ,  ^^1  (l]|  which  at 

-''  7^  7-«  7    -rt  7•^  7'^ 

the  same  time  is  U),^|,   J^lolj'rfiDl,    ^il,y»1.     To  the 

7   ft  7-n  y-i*  y-ft  7'n  7-n 

last  (intransitive)  belong  ^'\ ,  ^l]  ,  'rk)!  ,  ^1 ,  -«^^  ,  *f  j]  , 

// 
(the  roots  of  the  last  three  being  •-&£)  verbs).     Both  inflec- 

p  i»  // 

tions  are  found  in  \l\  (also  »])." 

A.  67.  22.  6.— Before  "The",  add:  "For  both  the  forms 
named  above,  the  London  Edition  of  the  New  Testament  has 

correctly  restored  the  reading  ^l|SaL  and  tO^li." 

A.  68.  8.  10. — Instead  of  the  first  ten  words  of  the  line,  add  : 

"  Rem.  Since  the  letters  1 ,  O  ,  »a  and  Ql  are  often  exchanged 
with  each  other ;  this  fact  not   only  explains  the   preceding 

rule,  but  the  fact  that  in  some  verbs  (  is  changed  into  %^ . 
Here  belong :" 

A.  68.  14.  5.— Instead  of  lines  13  and  14  to  ''pret.'\  add:  "It 
is  to  be  attributed  to  the  light  and  pleasant  pronunciation  of 

7  1> 

the  verb  \'\\ ,  (according  to  §  12.  1  and  §  15.  2)  that  ^  is  so 
often  used  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  is  not  more  fre- 
quently united  in  the  same  syllable  with  ] ,  and  is  not 
sounded,    Lin.   Occult,  being  placed  under  it,   causing  the 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  387 

following  vowel  to  fall  back  upon  1 .     This  is  the  case  in  the  '*. 

A.  69.  6.  11.— After  "vowel",  add:  "(3/.  and  1  sing.pret.)'' 

A.  69.  9.  5. — Instead  of  remainder  of  Kern,  before  "  Only ", 

7  7  r 

read  :  "Only  .^OIa  to  give  (for  tiDOU)  makes  an  exception 

to  this  vowel  mark.  Here,  especially  in  ihQpret.^  a  crasis  of 
the  first  two  radical  letters  is  found,  in  which  case  wa,  accord- 
ing to  the  regular  formation,  is  vowelless,  consequently,  in  the 
3d.  m.,  2  m.  and/,  sing.^  and  in  all  the  plur.  where  Ol ,  with 
Lin.    Occult,  occurs,  the   vowel  of  01  falls  back   upon   wa 

(Aooiu  ,  waAooi-* ,  Q:DOL*,  etc).  But  where,  in  the  regu- 
lar inflection,  the  first  radical  has  its  peculiar  vowel,  especially 
in  the  3  /.  and  1  sing.^  crasis,  with  Lin.  Occult.^   does  not 

occur  (AiDOLi  and  Aoou).  But  when  the  two  forms  last 
named  take  suffixes,  the  crasis  returns  again,  according  to 
§  36.     Here  also   the  first  radical    remains  vowelless    (the 

vowel  of  CI  being  thrown  back  upon  it),  e.  g.  OlAoCTU  ,  she 

.7  -n 

has  given  him  (AoOLi).     In  the  3  plur.  m.  and/,  Lin.  Occult. 

•      X  7 

falls  away  again,  e.  g.  OIQOOLa    they   have  given  them  up 

7 

(QSCTIa).  Upon  the  connection  of  this  verb  in  the  fut,  and 
injin.  Peal,  with  ^^  =  Itl!:  cf.  §.  35.  2.  6.  " 

A.  69.  21.  10.— After   "^'*,  add:    "  by  dropping  the  first 
radical ". 

A.  69.  28.  7.— Instead  of  "  jll  ",  add  :  "  ^10  ". 

A.  70.  2.  5. — After  "  verbs  ",  add :  "  consist  in  the  quiescence 
and  changing  of  ]  into  «ji   and  ". 

A.  70.  9.  8. — Before  "  —  ",  add:  "  in  order  to  relieve  the  pro- 
nunciation ". 

A.  70.  21.   1.— Instead  of  the  next  14  lines  to  "  Ee.n.",  add: 


388  ADDITIONS   AND    CORRECTIONS. 

1.  According  to    the    analogy   of    the    regular  verb,  Q,  «f 

verdsaL,  quiesces  in  — ,  in  the  imj^erat.    and  fut.    of  Fe.j 

•\  ^ 

>0ao,  ^QQJ;  the  prei.  and  irifin.  of    the  same   conjuga- 

p  p  p  //  I 

tion   takes  —  XLO  ,  >onV);  and  in  ve7-ds  .jkl ,  ▲  with  — i 

in  like  manner,  is  retained  in  the  pret.^  imperat.^  and  fut.  Fe. 
LmId  ,  y^AO) ,  i>QjbCQJ ,  while  the  infin.  with  —  belongs  to 
verbs  Ql .     The   preformative   of  the  fut.  takes  no  vowel. 

Only  1  of  the  1st.  sing,    takes  — ,  ^00*1.     In   the  other 

conjugations  Q  passes  into  ^  ( — ,  of  course,  is  the  usual 
vowel  in  Ethpe.^  Pa.^  and  Aph.  of  the  regular  verb),  and  either 

quiesces  in  — ,  in  Ethpe.,  Aph.  and  Ethtaph.  (pronounced 
the   same   as  Ethpe.),    e.   g.  y)  *  o2Z1 ,  ^-^  »  ^1 ,    i<laj221 , 

I    7 

(/^e  /ifls  exalted  himself,  cf.  ^Qa)]  ) ;  or  is  movable  in  Pa.  and 
JEJ^^^jja.  (corresponding  wnth  Dag.  f  in  Heb.),  e.  g.  ^CLxO, 

7      7  -R 

^  iOZf .     In  the  part.  act.  Pe.,  it  is  changed  into  1   (  =  y, 

cf.  §  1.  Rem.  4),  e.  g.  ^|o  (pronounced  hoy-em),  and  which 
(Q),  in  the  course  of  conjugation, loses  itself  again  in  jl.  ,  and 

with  — ,  forms  the  dipthongoi,  e.  g.  tV>iO  (emph.  st.  m,  or 
fern,  abs.)  ;  but,  in  the  part,  pass.,  it  follows  the  regular  form- 
ation w^ith  ^  quiescing,  e.  g.  ^^1 .  For  Fa.  and  Ethpa.  we 
sometimes  find  the  conjugations  Falpel  and  Ethpalp.,  e.  g. 

iO^ioi  {Ephr.    II.    20.  D.    6),    ^^-ioiZf,    ^lljlj    (from 

A.  71.  13.   I. — Insteadof  the  two  lines  beginning  with  "some", 
add:  "there  are,  however,  several  verbs,  originally  Ql ,  which 

0  ■«  7  77         -n 

retain  Q  in  Fa.  and  Ethpa.,  e.  g.  jj  Pa.  JOJ  Ethpa  .  jOjZ] . 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  3S9 

The  verbs  ^a^  >  •^^£0  follow  the   same  rule  in  their  forma- 
tion.    There  are   two   verbs   nearly   resembling  each  other 

which  are  distinguished  by  their  signification,  #02  [to  accuse) ^ 

7    7       1*  0  ^ 

^A.oZ(  (to  be  present)^  from  ^.     Some  have  double  roots, 

7  9  7  7   7 

e.  g.  JQ^  [to  blind),  from  JOl  {to  be  blind),  and  ;jl1  (^o  z^;a^-e 

0 

up),  from  ;2k  (^o  wake).     It  is  only  very  seldom  that  the  dou- 

9  7 

ble  root  has  the  same  signification,  e.  g.  •jai  and  *jaOJ     (^o 

7  7  7  7 

breathe),  from  which  are  tjaO)  and  .-m-aJ  to  permit  to  breathed 

A.  71.  32.  5. — After  ^'convinced''',  add:  "or  to  permit  to  con- 
vince themselves  (  =  Trel^es'hai),  Ethpe,  or". 

A.  72.  8.  1 0.— After  "  verbs",  add:  "  and  those  in  which  1 
either  quiesces,  passes  into  «ji  ,or    falls  entirely  away.    The". 

A.  72.  10.  1. — Instead  of  the  first  line  and  second  to  "the", 
add:  "  1.  In  respect  to  the  general  formation  of  the  tenses 
and  modes,  the  following    should   be   remarked.      Final  ( 

either   quiesces  in    a  preceding  vowel  (  —  or  —  ),  or  passes 
into  ^.     The". 

A.  72.  21.  TO.—     After  "P^.",  add:    "(except  Fe.   of  verbs 

II 

B )". 

A.  72.  24.  2. — Instead  of  the  sentence  beginning  with  "  The 
imperatives",  read :  "  Therefore,  we  have  here  the  addition  of 
the  imperat.   Fe.   to   the   imperat.  ending  of    Ethpe.,   e.  g. 

7  I 
^\D.M.   ". 

I     7        * 

A.  72.  26.  9.— Before  "  some",  add :  "  ;  Ethpa.  .^i^iA*  |  to  be 

named  {Acts  1.  23)". 

A.  73.  2.   1. — Before  "  The"  add  :  "  instances  of  false  punctua- 

P     7        -» 

tion  for  U-.Z]  {Ethpa.y\ 
^  26 


390  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

A.  73.  3.  1. — After   "and",  omit   next  word,  and  add:  "an 

apocopate  form  f  OU  ". 

A.  73.  10.  1.  Instead  of  first  line  "to  the  pret",  add:  "A.  In 
which  cases,  t^  ,  arising  out  of  |  ,  may  be  either  movable^  or 
quiescent,  as  can  be  readily  perceived  by  a  comparison  of 
these  with  the  regular  verb  \  a)  %jl  is  movable  in  verbal  for- 
mations where,  in  the  regular  verb,  the  third  radical  letter  be- 
gins a  syllable ;  b)  it  quiesces,  on  the  contrary,  where  the 
tbird  radical  closes  the  syllable.  Consequently  belong  here 
under  a\  (Also  in  lines  12,  13,  14,  15, 17,  from  top  in  Trans, 
omit  "in)". 

A.  73.  16.  10.— Before";  and",  add:  "  (also  the  eraphAovm 
of  the  masc.^''). 

A.  73.  21.  7.— After  "cases,"   add:  "(also   in   Fe.   of  verbs 

II 
^)". 

A.  73.  23.  1.— Instead  of  "  B.  ]  falls  away  in",  add:  *•  B.  ] 
falls  entirely  away  without  compensation,  before  the  forma- 
tive additions  Q  and  ^ ,  or  those  which  begin  with  Q  and  ^ 
as  tQ  and  ^  .      Accordingly  belong  here".     Omit  "  in,"  in 

lines  24,  25,  27,  29,  words  10,  7,  10,  11  ( countmg  from  the 
left),  in  p.  73,  and  lines  1,  2,  4,  T.,  words  10,  12,  3,  in  p.  74  in 
Trans. 

A.  74.  5.  7. — Before  "  e.  g."  add:  "(more  nearly  approach- 
ing to  the  sound  of  1)". 

A.  74.  7.  2.— After  "  appears"  add:  "  (cf.    the    Heb.    nii<!D> 

ninjn^jjn)". 

A.  74.  23.  1. — Instead  of  the  first  two  lines  and  a  half,  to 
"  sometimes ",  read :  "  When  ^  and  jl  movable  occur  to- 
gether, as  in  the  verb  V^a*  ,  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  jl,  falls 
away,  if  these  letters  are  separated  from  each  other  and  not 
in  the  same  syllable.  This  is  the  case  when  the  verb  takes  a 
preformative  and  the  first  radical  is  vowelless,  e.  g.  injin.  Fe. 

IjISo,  forU-**^"'*. 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  391 

A.  75.  10.  5. — After  "verbs",  add:  "consist  in  tlie  falling 
away  of  the  first  radical  letter  and". 

A.  75.  12.  1.— After  "^j9^.",  add:  '' and  Ethtaph.". 

A.  75.  13.  1. — Before  "  The",  instead  of  the  sentence  extend- 
ing to  the  Rem.,  add:  "A/^^^.  and  imperat.  with —  occur  even 

7     -»  7 

in  transitive  verbs^  e.  g.  »OQQJ  ,  »^CD  ,  in  respect  to  which 
the  former  is  only  distinguished  externally  from  the  pret,  by 

—  being  placed  over  the  preformative.     Two  forms  (jAj  and 

ioZu)  with  5Aj,  are  in   use  and  afut.   with  — ,  e.   g.  \>£i^ 

{Ephr.  11.  228.  E.  1.),  forming  the  verbs  j^  ,  ^2LJ,  ^Aj  , 
(cf.  *SOU  §  35.  2.  b)". 

A.  75.   19.  10. — After  "descended",  add:  "In  respect  to  re- 

It     7  P 

tainingthe  characteristic  1  in  Aph.,  e.  g.  \zi\y  from  ^OJ,  com- 
pare §  23.  1.  Rem.". 

A.  75.  25.  7. — Instead  of  the  line  to  "away"  read:  "A 
contraction  of  the  last  two  radicals,  takes  place,  by  which 
the  vowel  of  the  stem  syllable  falls  back  upon  the  first  radi- 
cal". 

A.  76.  4.  5. — Instead  of  12  words  from  "takes",  to  "away", 
read  :  ",in  its  approach  to  a  regular  formation,  requires  a  di- 
vision of  its  monosyllabic  stem  and  inserts  1  between  the  two 
radicals". 

A.  76.  16.  1. — Instead  of  the  seven  following  lines,  add: 
"  2.  l^he part, pass.  Pe.,retaining  the  middle  radical,  is  inflected 
regularly  in  a  fuller  form  on  account  of  the  last  two  radicals 
bemg  separated  by  the  insertion  of  the  characteristic  a,  be- 
tween them,  e.  g.  %m.fcID> .  All  of  the  modes  and  tenses  of  Pa 
and  Ethpa.,  (whose  middle  radical,  it  has  been  thought,  should 

be  doubled)  are  also  regularly  inflected,  e.  g.  ^CQXJ  ,  »£QCDjL|  . 


392  ADDITIONS  AND   CORRECTIONS. 

Hence  we  fiod  also  the  forms  Palpel  and  Ethpalp.^  c. 
g.  •-y\ki J ,  "WKV'  '  ■  Ei^^P^'  seldom  conforms  to  the  first 
formation,  e.g.    »mCD>Z]  {Heb.  IX.  13)  ;  ^XmZ]  {Barhebr.  p. 

508)  ;  >mimaZ|  from  ^COa  (  7l55ewj.  i?i6/.  Or.,  11.  pp.  13G. 
139)". 

A.  77.   17.  10.— After  "formed",  add:  "according  to  some". 

A.  77.  18.   1.— Before  " zV/tp^ra^.," add  :  "  (properly  by  the  eli- 
sion of  ^)". 

A.  77.  20.   12.— After  *'^ai",  add:  "  part.  act.  ^Gll  ,2yass. 

A.  77.  21.  8.— Before  "c)",  add:    "The  infin.    Pe.  ^cki 
mentioned  by  Ainira^  p.  362,  is  diflBcult  to  explain". 

A.  77.  28.  6.— After  "46",  add:  "(for  looif  Matt,    XVII. 
OOl]  ". 

A.  78.   1.  1. — After  ^^ passive'\  instead  of  the  rest  of  line  1,  line 
2,  and  line  3  to  "  while",  read  :  "  ]  being  retained  throughout 

7 

all  the  modes  and  tenses,  quiesces  in  —  ,  as  in  verbs  3  Gatt. 
(vid.    ^   13.   1.  Rem.  ),  while  its  vowel". 

A.  98.  23.  12.— After  "  Pa.",  add:  "and  Ajyh.,  retain". 

7    «.       0  7 

A.  100.  26.  2— Before  "  (compare,"  add:  "e.  ^.   >/r»v^o^\ 
infin.  Aph.  from  ^'jl ,  Ephr.  1.  p.  8.  E.  3.". 

A.  106.  5.  1. — After   "it",  add:    "(in  both  cases    corrected 
m  the  London  ed.,  thus,  OU^mJ  and  CTLiL2iD>*|  )". 

A.  106.  21.  6. — Before  "In",  add:  "in  consequence  of  which 
•Jk  becomes  movable". 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  393 

A.  110.  15.  2.— Instead  of  "loou,"  read;  "loiJ  ". 

A.  122.  5.  9.— For  "  ^JOl^,"  read:  "^aL  ". 

A.  123.  20.  10.— After  "44",  add:  "Rem.  A  special  versa- 
tility of  the  language  is  apparent  particularly  in  transferring 
Greek  composites  to  itself.  This  versatility  is  generally 
quite  evident  from  an  analysis  of  composites  in  respect  to 
their  elements  and  relation  to  the  genitive  (cf.  Synt.  g  81. 
Appendix).       The    following   express    the    concrete    idea  : 

P-X  I  0  0     7  7  7 

li*xOa*    ^jZ  opOoSo^og-  ;  loilL  L^  ^eoroiwg  ;  (cf.  2  Tim. 

III.  2,  3;  Acts  YII.  51).       Coticrete  co7)iposites,  marking  the 

•\^      ' 
idea  of  companionship  (  =  gvv  ),  are   expressed   by    |;n»t 

m.  (companion)^  \L\d^f.,  less  frequently  by    pa|   brother ^ 

e.  g.  |LOn  lg>  (x»|  aviK^vyddeg.    The  Syrians  express  univer- 

•X  *,  I    7 

sa/zVy  (  =  Trai^ro  )  by  ^^  placed  after  it,  e.  g.  ^^JD  r>-^l  ^^^- 
roKpdrisip  \  ^ibD  1  ^So  iravrodvvaiioq  \  multiplicity  {=  iroXv) 
is   expressed   by    w*«^ ,    e.  g.    toQ.^  **ytffl   TToXvfia/cap ; 

P   7..  17  0   7..  7    I       7 

UliDJ  -k-yjhfiO     iToXvTLiiog    {Johu  XIL    3) ;   PiJ]  i]j^wflD    (?/) 

TTOAviTOiKLXog.  In  reference  to  compounding  something  of  a 
general  nature,  cf.  Acts  X.  34;  XXIII.  23;  1  Cor.Yl.  9. 
The  same  is   true  when  abstract  ideas   are  expressed,  e.  g. 

yia  ;  jcoaSOJ  ^jZ  SevrepovofiLov  (cf.  ilfa^/.  XIX.  8 ;  Eph. 

IV.  2;    Co/.  1.   11;  III.  12).      Of  this   kind  are   compounds 

with  i^fu  preceding,  e.  g.  ];  i.'?^Of)|  Lo^J^^Zi  ruiiocpaLpLov \  with 

0  7  •J^-^  ppi  7  -n 

litaog  preceding,   e,  g.     ]Sdq.*j  OlnAs) ;  or  |V>V?i     Al^So 

fiearj^fipta  {cf.  Mark   XIII.  35  ;  i^ei;.  XIX.  17).      The  idea 

7  7  7         7 

of  climate  is  expressed  by  vMJrSo  wa^^. ,  and  transposed,  by 

7  7  7  7  *  ^ 

*jk.O^.  wi-wJ^Sd  northeast.     Negative  nouns  are  indicated  by 


)9-l  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 


p   ♦.      I        f 


Jj  preceding,  e.  g.   |Al,-»  jJ   ignorance  \    (Zo^^Oll   P  careless- 

ness ;  IZom^^  U  disorder  {ara^ia)  (cf.  ikZa^^.  XIII.  58 ; 
XVII.  20)  ;  an  object  entirely  negative   and   its   nature  for- 

0  7         0 

eign,  is  expressed  by  |j  ? ,  e.  g.  ^Ql  ]]  >  ovac  e^j^o^  (=  Dj? 
jjjfi)  nothing  less  than  this ;  by  a  negative  circumlocution^  e.  g. 

Zoi  1  \  1^  tV)»t'j  w?a7z;^  of  affection  {daropyta).  The  same  is 
true  in  respect  to  adjectives  and  adverbs,  cf.  Agrell  Supplem. 
p.  78  — 

A.  124.  7.  3.— After 'Manguage",  add  :  "like  the  other  Semit- 
ic dialects". 

A.  128.   15.   11.— After  "stejt?",  add:"  U^^ve^wi^  {Ephr. 

1.  8.  D.  2)  ,  ViLoy  a  /ie/-rf  of  horses  (Ephr,  1. 25.  X).  5),  Uoi'j* 
a/oo6^  (JS:;3Ar.  1.  121.  E.  5)." 

A.  130.  21.  1.— After  "should",  add:  "  (as  in  the  London  ed. 
of  the  New  Testament)  " 

A.   131.  2.  5.— After  "etc.",  add:  "  although  the  form   ti'l  is 
also  found,  and,  according  to  Bar  AH,  the  si?2^.  MO]^^  lies  at 

'^  p..     « 

the  foundation  of  ]jOV*j.". 
A.  131.  9.  7.— After   "food",   add:  "  but  Q  in  the  m;?^^^.  ^/. 

falls  away  again,  e.  g.   (AAOPiD.". 

A.  136.  6.   11.— Erase   "V",   and,  in   line  8,3d  word   (after 
"11"),  add:    "and  V". 

A.  136.   11.  5. — Instead  of  the  next  eight  lines  to  "movable", 
add  :  "  while  the  other  suffixes  with   their  union  vowels  pre- 

ceding  (  >^-.,  ...k..^^   etc.,  )    are    generally    attached  to    the 

form  of  the  ewphat.  state,  e.  g.  y  V)^\ ,  OljOlCD,  etc.,  which 
circumstance  is  explained  by  the  fact  that  it  relieves  the 
pronunciation  made  difficult  by  an  accumulation  of  vowelless 
consonants.     The  same  rule  holds  also  in  monosvllabic  nouns, 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  395 

which,  in  the  emphatic  state^  lose  —  or  —  (of  the  ahs,  state) ^ 
e.  g.    >Qa  ,   emph.    (Sos ,  with    svff.    «iV?p ,  ykl*   (^j^IIi , 

0  7  II  t^ 

^\d  from  ;ii)  etc.  Nouns  derived  from  verbs  U  with  |—  , 
e?7z;?A.  5i«^e  ^i.  [decl.  V.,  e,  g.  li^,  emph.  ]iS^  ),  allow  wi  in 
the  iSw^.  ( 1  sing.  2.  and  3. ^/.)  to  quiesce  in  — ,  e.  g.  - » *^^^  , 
^QDaX^ ,  w^hile  in  the  other  suff.^  «a  is  movabley\ 

A.   140.  7.  9.— After  "  syllable,"  add  :  "(in  the  emphat.  sing. 
and  in  all  the  plur.y\ 

A.  143.   12.  6.— After  "2)",  add:  "and  this  law  of  the  lan- 
guage is  applicable  to  a\]  feminines^\ 

A.  150.  5.  1. — Instead  of  "  denominative   adjectives",    read: 
"  adjectives  derived  from  noims,''\ 

A.  150.  22.   1.— After  "Rem.",   add:    "For  1A» ,  the  form 
1  As"!  occurs  with  prosthetic  f  when  preceded  by  the  copulative 

O   (  lAalo  ),  or  by  j  for  marking  the  ordinal  number  ((A»|5 
the  sixthy\ 
A.  150.  28.  7  — Instead  of  the  next  14  words,  including  "fern- 

•  •  ■«         7  0  7 

inine",  read  :  "  (  or  ^Z^k)  dual  from  IZ^D  )  200  ;  the  other 
hundreds  were  formed  by  a  unit  preceding,  in  the/ewj.,  united 

with  a  word  having   I^Sd  in  the   sing.    (\\^t^L)  ,  or  by  a 

unit  separated  from  a  word  in  the  plur.   having  ||Sd  f'ZolSo 

aIZ  300,  etc.". 
A.   151.  4,  9. — After  "word",  add:  "  ( each  having   a  double 

gender)". 
A.   152.  25.   1.— Instead  of  8  words,  from  "  so"  to  "  here,"  add  : 

"  truly,  yes,  so,  U  not,  oL  (from  OCJl  jJ)  not,  \a\  here,  there 
(^h\  farther,  there,  yonder),  \d  here,  there,  at  that  place,  p 
where,  only  there  where,  ^LdZ  at  that  place,  there. 


393  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

Rem.  The  prepositions  ^  and  Vn  united,  indicate  motion  to  or  from  a 
place,  e.  g.  ],:i^  there,  \^^from  that  place,  ^Ul^  farther  thisivay,  ^01^ 

Vn  from  that  place,  thence,  •l\  only  there  whither,  VnA\  thither,  to  that 
place,      Vr>/-     SD  from  that  place,  thence,     ]ol  forms  many  corapounda,  e.  g. 

1«  P  7       9  *kC>    7   0 

^;^C71  (tote)  then  (referring  to  time),  at  that  (time),  —OCH  ,  ^lOCT! 
so,  of  this  kind,  ^JOI  (from  loi  and  |o  with  the  changing  of  the  former 
into  jOI  )  fi-^re,  there  (referring  to  place),  therein,  \JjCl^  there,  pjOl 
^^r\  from  that  (time),  to  that  (time),  ^sDZjOI  ^/i«  very  same,  \mC\  (from 
loi   and  "{^^  hour)   now,    \mO\  ^^  frotn  this  time" . 

A.  152.  27.  6.— After  "M  ,"  add:  (AI]!),  ^J  ". 

•X      f  X 

A.  153.  I.  8.— After    "again",    add:     "  ZoiZulZ  ^/^e    third 

A.  153.  2.  7.— After     "  to-day  ",  add  :    "  Kem.    All    Gentile 
TZOMws  also  take  the  termination  Aj"|  with  C^  preceding,  e.  g. 

3.  The  manner  in  which  the  want  of  adverbial  forms  are 
supplied  and  expressed  in  the  Syriac  language,  by  nouns,  ad- 
jectives^ pronouns  and  other  parts  of  speech  is  liberal  and 
various.  Here  are  to  be  considered :  a)  adverbial  forms  ex- 
pressed by  substafitives  ]  a)  merely  by  the  abs.  stat.  sing,  with- 
out a  preceding  preposition,  e.  g.  t^^O  (want)  not,  Gl^3 
^\o  entirely  :  by  the  emph.  stat.,  e.  g.  {l^l  always  ( all  time) 

0        «.  P        •«  I  *. 

(;.iQJ  long,  |;^1  ontJds  side ;  by  the^j/wr.  ahs.,  e.  g.  ^CD*,*Q£i 

^  r  p 

manifold;  by  the  constr.  stat.,  e.  g.  ^-B'^r*^   around ;  by  the 

*.  p  p     -x        • 

/ew.  a55(?/.  sing,  0.11^  f^  freely,   Jlmj^  ^ver?/  ti?ne  ;  by  the  emph. 

p      y 

Stat,  fern.  e.  g.    |Al£^l  always  (all  time)  ;  by  the  constr.  stut. 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  307 

fern.  Aooj  instead  of ;  by  the  emph.  plur.fem.  (Al^l  some 
time^  inuch  time.     Also  more  frequently  by  >  following,  e.  g. 

J  (Zqq>;^  almost^  nearly.     Also  we  find  used  as  adverbs  \ 

[3)  nouns  with  a  preposition  preceding  (especially  ID)    in  the 

•X  7  7 

abs.  stat.^    e.  g.    >tO,.Q    somewhere^    ^^V^  formerly^    once^ 

\\^        ^      .  .  '  0  0       ^ 

^^^uLd  immediately y  swiftly  /  in  the  emph.  stat.    e.  g.   (jj-AO 

^       .i'     0  7  0      0  ^     "  ■"  0     P     ■>. 

truly ^  (jQir:)  unjustly y  (Ij;^  ,]a£Ci.^^  ,  ju^Q^^  privately ^ 
(^■■^fm  quietly y  in  the  /?/z^r.   Pr^O  sometimes  \  aho  fejninines 

•X  X  7  Ow  X  7 

in  the  absol.  st.,  OSX^Glfd  speedily ,  OJaOIVO  cautiously ;  in 

P    -X  X  7 

the  emph.  st.^  (ZoSi  1^  s/«//y/  with  >  preceding  e.  g. 
|Al»j  sooHj  PiDQA  ^\Dj    rfazYy ;  with  ^  preceding  and  j  fol- 

P       *.  -X  P         7 

lowing,  e.  g.  >  tljo|J  against,  5  *O0,^  somewhere,  >  I^^^a^ 
finally,  J  |n>jO^/ar  (from).  Also  with  ^So  preceding,  e.  g. 
»iN»  _Sd  immediately,  \^0j  _So  whence;  with  vA,  e.  g. 
•JQI..  ^^  ?eea/"  ^0,  ^Q2)  ^^  ?^ear  z^,  c/ose  by  ;  with  yu]  ,  e.  g. 

]CQ2}Q^  ^a]  straight  as  ;  with  a  preposition  preceding  and 

•n  P     -X  1>  7 

following,  e.  g.  —IsD  |idjQQ^  near  to  something,  _Sd  Q^ik^ 
within  something  ;  with  the  preceding  preposition  doubled,  e. 

g.  Qy^  — SiO  within  {laoi^ev),  \Cl^  ^iDivithout  (e^cj^ev).  The 
same  relations  are  also  found ;  b)  in  adjectives,  numerals  and 

P  I     7  P  X     7 

pronouns,  Q.g.  t^^^j  *-«-vv^  (also  ^^4?)  t'e?-j',  ;jiAa  more,  more 
so,  >Cl»i^,  9a»^^0  only,  pw^j,  (r**^|  at  once,  f(i.».l0  and 
I,..**  ^Sd  immediately,  pDO  7ioi^  much  ?  ].lV)JS  and  Ql2sD  z^7z?/ .? 
jlSQlD  lioiv,  5  |Sd  yLA\just  as,  J  OOl  yi^l  as  tlumgh,even  as 
f/',  J   w§01    >4.*(  so  as,   etc.      Finally  adverbial  forms    are 


898  ADDITIONS  AND   COPJIECTIONS. 

expressed ;  c)  by  verbal forms^  e.  g.  infin.  »f30iL  again^  or  by  the 

partic.  e.  g.  ^^>jwk^  ,  ^m»».So  ^So  almost.     Cf.  Agrell  Suppl. 

p.  259  flf.  and  Append,  p.  52.  Upon  the  manner  of  expressing 
adverbs  by  verbs^  cf.  Syntax  §  82.  1  ". 

A.  153.  16.  6.— After   "  ek?J ",    add:    ]4^|     eZra,    y.4    Ta;^^; 

A.  153.  27.  9.— After  ''ID",  instead  of  the  next  7  words  to 
"  which  ",  add  :  "(in  which  is  contained  the  idea  of  being,  in- 
cluding, or  being  in  something,  or  mediation  through  some- 
thing, the  allot.)  ;  j  (properly  the  relative.,  indicating  the 
drawing  out  of  something,  the  hanging  from  something,  the 

genit.) ;  ^  (indicating  direction  towards  something,  relation 
to  something;  therefore  dat.  and  accus.).  These  preposi- 
tions ". 

A.  154.   10.  3. — Before  "the",  instead  of  the  next  five  lines  to 

"  among  ",  add :  "  the  preposition  ^  preceding,  draws  O  to 

itself  in  the  simple  forms  \>«^£5Q^  and  ^r^QJ^    and  retains 

the  same  (O)  before  the  suffix  in  nouns^  taking  the  suffix  1 
sing.  2  and  3  pi.  m.  and/,  without  a  union  vowel  (cf.  ^15. 
2.  B.  c.  and  fol.  table) ;  but  before  the  other  suff.  w^ith  the 
union    vowel,    this    peculiarity    does    not    appear,    e.    g. 

•jlItioqI^,  OT^nn\,  etc.". 

A.  154.  15.  9.— After  "with",  add:  "(containing  the  idea  of 
a  common  union  with  or  accompaniment  to  something,  from 
:>aSDi)". 

A.  154.  15.  11. — After  "by",  read:  "(containing  the  idea  of 
adding  to  something,  an  immediate  consequence)". 

A.  154.  16.  2— After   "to",    add:    "(containing  the  idea  of 

adding  to  something  by  approximation,  from  *jiQ^)". 
A.  154.  19.   10.— After   "for",  add:   "(containing  the  idea  of 
changing  or  changing  with  something)". 

A.  154.  20.   11. — After  "under",  instead  of  next  three  lines, 

add:  "(  the  findingunder  something,  from  AwJ) ;  with  ^  (in 
which  is  contained  the  idea  of  going  down  under),  undei  ; 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTION'S.  399 

^!^  (the  being  separated  from  something,  the  removing,  from 

P  7    9 

Ll!iD)fro?n;  jAq  (standing  fast  in  the  order  of  place  and 
time)  after;  b)  substantives  with  prefixes^  e.  g.  VV^<^r>x 
(movement  in  an  opposite  direction)  against;  ^^^Q^  (direc- 
tion  forv^^ard)  hefcyre  ;  5 AfiQI!)  after  ;". 
A.  154.  27.  6. — After  "  over  ",  instead  of  the  next  4  words  to 
"against",  add:  "(relating  to  motion  upward;  hence  ^^.^  , 
direction  from  below  {sursuin)\  ^^.1^  ^Sd  direction  to  a  place 

,  pft  •   (the  adding  to  and 
agreement  with  something)  according  to,  to,  with,  ". 

A.  156.  9.  7.— After  "be  it— be  it",  add:    "(also  ,lo 

^j  tl  =  elre  Se elre)  ,11  /|o  wJwe  not,   or  ]j  ^J  1(0 

=  el  61  fiTj ;  ^1  if  too,  if  too  indeed,  although,  01  (=g(;i  ti^) 

if  not,  after  ^|  nevertheless,  J  |J  1  with  ihQ  future  following, 
^  Ul  with  the  infin.  following,  except  that,  ."I    jJ]  or  ]j  Q-^ 

•x  7  r  p        P  -n  ^ 

if  not ;  >Qm.^O  Q-^ »2)1  U  "|  wo^  ow/y  —  but  also ;". 

A.  156.  9.  14.— After  "lest",  add:  "with  i\\e fut.  following 
lest^  before  a  noun,  without ;". 

p 
A.  156.   11.  7. — After    '-until",  read:    I^^O  before,  ere,  or 

after  particles,  e.  g.  ?  '^■»  I ,  «5,  even  as,  as  if,  j  p.^^  (  so  as 

p      p  7  7 

(Ka'hdg),  that  (iva),  Uj   p..2Lfe]  ^/^ai  tzo?,  etc.;". 

A.  156.  14.  4.— After  "/^eV",  add:  "of  which  the  last  two  in 
the  Charklensian  version  of  the  New  Testament,  correspond 
with  the  Greek  [lev — de". 

A.   156.  14.  4. — Add  a  note:  "Rem.    The    frequent    use  of 

both  the  last  named  particles  ^JLd  and  ^  j  for  uniting  the  two 
parts  of  a  sentence  without  expressing  a  direct  antithesis,  i&  a 


400  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

peculiarity  of  the  so-called  Charklensian  version  of  the  N.  T., 
which  literally  follows  the  Greek  text,  but  very  seldom  em- 

ploys  the  classic  Greek.      The  particles  — Sd  and  —uj  named 

above,  evidently  precede  parts  of  sentences  or  simply  serve 
as  marks  (cf.  Synt.  §  85,  and  my  Treatise  de  versionum  N.  T. 
Syriacarum  critico  usu.     Berolini  1850.     4.     p.  12  ff.". 

A.   156.   15.   1. — Instead  of  the  next  four  lines,  read  :  "  3.  Inter- 
jectionSjfor  the  most  part,  areonomatopoetic  {dvoiiaTonoiTjTucd)^ 

e.g.  O I  (with  ^  following),  Oiol ,  ^o] ,  .o]  O  f  ah/  (with 
"  or  ^Sd  following)  ,  ^0  ,  -lO] ,  "jiaO  (=  Tjij^ ,  ^-jf^)  with 
^  or  ^^  following,  alas/  (also  abbreviated  %.a.^.*0  woe  to 
me/)  ]ai ,  loiO  (=  j-;5p| ,  Idov)  lo /  wkOU  ai /  ha! 
(=  stop).     They  are  borrowed  from  other  parts  of  speech, 

•X  '^  7 

e.g.  %£)0As1,  .jiqL  (=  js^:]3,  :]i)    0/  if  it  were  /   (       loould 

•X  P  II 

that  it  ivere  /)    Ql^O    (also  »^  and  p  =  jj^^  quceso)  pray  / 

\l,  plur.  QL  {imperat.  from  \L\)  well/  ^Q^  plur,  QSDQO 
up/  •.£0^  he  it  far  off/  ^jlOQ^  hail/  (with  plural  suffixes 
and  ^  following  before  the  noun).     Cf.  Synt.  §  86. 

"Rem.  In  respect  to  jcn  and  JOIO  in  the  Charklensian  version,  corres- 
ponding with  Idov  and  naX  l6ov  in  Greek,  the  same  rule  holds  as  in  res. 
pect  to  aev  and  Se  named  above.  But  this  peculiarity  does  not  very 
often  appear  in  the  Peshito," 

A.   157.   12.   11.— After  "lY.  5",  add:    '' Assem.  III.   P.  II. 
348  ;". 

A.  157.    16.  11.— After  "  Kirsh.",  add:  "  Chrest." 

A.   157.  18.  4.— After    "accusative",    add:    '' Ephr.   1.   123. 

ipi  PO  I  -n  0  0     7  0  -X  y  0         7         7 

D.  3.   Lj]LJi^L  iOjl  \j,'^l]  lc3i!L?   Uci^?o   l^^^? 

J^«  *-»01  cn^  ^I^dAcqLd    this,  that  Adam  was  created  in, 

the  image  of  God,  we  know,  from  a  threefold,  reason  ". 

A.  158.   1.  1. — Instead  of  the  next  eight  words,  read:  "  Eem, 
Separate  personal  pronouns  are  also  found  similarly  situated 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  401 

without  beiDg  emphatic,  e.  g.  Ephr.  11.  209.  D.  7.  ]>01  Zooi 

P  OlZuUD  p(>  \y.£iO  is  not  this  Babel  which  I  have 
built  ?  I.  312.  A.  1.  They  are  emphatic  when  following  and 
oftener  before  ihQ  verb^  e.  g.  Barh.  399.  15;  especially  when 

*£i\  is  placed  between  ". 
A.  158.  2.  9.— Before    "  Upon  "»    add:  ''Ephr.  I.  308.  E.  3. 

ySli:^   \l\  *al  ]j|  ^ll  I  also  vnll  go  with  thee  ". 
A.   158.  5.  12.— After    "38"    read:  "  e.  g.  ^y^r.  II.  220.  D. 

2.  3.   (Aj^Sd  *a01   1;^;*  ^Ae  tvord  is  true  ". 
A.   158.  9.  6.— After  "64",  read:  ''Ephr.  I.  392.  C.  3.    *a01 

(.kJi.1  ^)  uiOl  ^^  that  is  manifesV\ 
A.  158.  19.  2.— Before  "or",  add:  ''ActsN.^I.  ^a*  IjOlO) 

7  .-h        ?  I  X 

^Lm     t<?e    are    witnesses ;    Barh.  26.    2.      (JOl  *^ai  *a010 

P         7       7 

]An<^V)  and  this  is  the  translation.      Also  the  pronoun  oc 

X  7        X  ^  *^ 

curs  with  A^]  e.g.  Ephr.  II.  153.  A.  2.  *a01oZu|  001  001. 
this  is  it ;  or  it  is  separate,  e.  g.    I.  392.    C.  I.  483.   E.  2 

*.  7  T>  7         «.  7  P 

•oAjI  OISQI  jOAjIj  |S£2D  50  /o7?^  way  you  be  with  me;  Acta 

Mart,  orientt.  II.  351.  20.  21.  " 
A.  158.  21.  10.— After    "15",  add:   '' Eem.  The  substantive 

•X 

verb  is  often  expressed  by  OOl  ,  after  a  personal  pronoun,  e.  g. 
ilfa«.  XXVI.  25.  ^jJO'y  001  ]j1  ]!^     Sir,  is  it  I?     Also 

*s  7  7        0  *»  P 

in  compounds,  as  QlLo  z^^/io  is  ?  Ql!sO  t^Aa^  w  ?  Q^^  he  is 

good;  Q^ji'rCi  he  is  blessed ;  Luke  X.  41  ;  1  Cor.  IV.  11 ;  X. 

22;  Rom.Ylll.  37". 
A.  159.  2.   14.— After  "133.1",  add:    "^c^^s  III  14;    Ephr. 

I.  85.  F.  6.  7." 
A.  159.  4.  14. — After  "are'*,  add:  "4.  The  neuter  pronoun 

(cf  Agrell  App.  II.  p.  23)  is  expressed ;  a)  by  the  fe?nininej  it' 


402  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

ihe  pronoun  take  both  genders^  e.  g.  jBar^.  264, 9.  Zooi  •^(j 

"  -  p     p     ■*    »      -ft 

•-»cn  that  wUich  has  happened  J-  569,9.    \kOU\   fjOl  J  zf/^/ws 

happen;  Assem.  I.  372.  *j.oAdZ|  ^OlJkT)  ,-jAoi  aH this 
is  written;  b)  by  the  masc.  when  t\\Q pronoun  takes  oniy  one 

gender^  e.   g.  ^Issewz.  I.  375.  vm^AaJ)  ^Ld  z^,'//.i6^  has  been 

found;  Barh.  439,   14.     .Q^  ]00U  U^   tf^J>^  has  hap. 

pened  to  you  ;  the  neuter  pronoun  is  seldom  expressed  by  the 
masc.  whea  it  takes  both  genders^  e.  g.  Xw^e  VII.  7 ;  VIII. 
18;  XIX.  26;  Matt.  XIII.  22. 

B. — Suffixes, 

11\\Q  pronominal  suffixes  of  the  verb  mark  the  accusative^  sel- 
dom the  personal  dative  of  other  languages,  e.  g.  Assem.  III. 

7       7  P 

P.I.  179.  «>Tr.«  it  happened  to  me.  Also  (001  maiksthe  ac- 
cusativej    e.  g.     tIc/s     VII.    40.     *.»0Li001   plD    M.^^^  which 

hapi^ened  to  him^  what  became  of  him  ;  XXVIII.  5.  6.  Some- 
times  also   the   arcus,  is  marked  by  a  preposition,  e.  g.  ikfe^f. 

XXVI.  39.  wiJf^U  (rrapeASerw  ot'  tjaoi; ) ;  it  is  also  some- 
times found  in  connection  with  ^ID ,  e.  g.  Barh.  219. 

7 

Rem.  But  the  verb  JDOIa   ^^  9^^^>  ^^^^  ^^^  belong  here,  as  in  this  sig- 
nification it  is  only  united  with  a  personal  dative.     If,  therefore,  we  find 
0  7  ^       A  " 

.  >i  Aom.  in  Jwd  I.  15,  it  does  not  mean  as  much  as  >  .\  A^OLb, 
thou  hast  given  to  me;  but  the  suffix,  according  to  the  original  meaning,  to 

P  7 

set,  to  place,  to  misplace,  is  the  personal  object  in  the  accusative !   ,  »  iA*"^m^ 

should  be  rendered  thou  hast  placed  or  misplaced  me.  The  LXX_  have 
rightly  translated  endedoaal  fie  thou  hast  given  me  {of  the  house)  i.  e.  a 
dourry.  Therefore  the  auxiliary  signification  to  reward,  to  present  with,  is 
here,  to  lead  by  the  hand.  This  relation  is  not  found  in  the  Old  Testament, 
e.  g.  Isa.  XXVIl.  4,  compared  with  Uphr.  II.  65.  E.  and  Zach.  VII.  5, 
compared  with  Uph\  II.  296.  B." 

A.   159.   14.  8. — After  ^'proper",  add:  "when  they  stand  in 
place  of  the  adjective  ", 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  403 

A.   159.   16.  4.— After  "ornament  *',  add:  "^joAr.  11.  22  I.B.I. 

0        4^  P       I  7 

f »jQO>  IAa'^  ^  over  thy  holy  city;  227.  C.  4,  5 ;  11.  339. 
(J.  \b,7',  I.  130.  E.  7;». 

A.   159.  30.  9.— After  "him",  add:  '' Ephr.  I.  349.  C.  4  ;". 

A.  159.  32.  6.— After  "  14",  add:  "  42G.  8.  a\^\i  the  r  eport 

by  him  ". 

A.  160.  9.  6.— Instead  of' and",  add:  '' Ephr.l.  340.  B.  8. 

pi  0  9  7  0     7     0 

>iL^)    y.^  ^1    OjJQL  JIOOl    so  also  they  makeit  {directly) 

With  thee;  I.  131.  D.  7.  ^-iui  j  ^^LCL^J  P^^l  even  as  vnth  us, 

"When  an  aJjeciive  is  united  with  a  noun  ihQ  possessive  follows 
the  latter.  If  the  possessive  stand  before  the  noun,  it  takes 
the  place  of  the  substantive  verb,  e.  g.  Ephr.  II.  220.  C.  2. 

|Zq21  k^^Lo  y.-^?  thine^  O,  Sir,  is  the  victory.  So  with  J 
following,  the  possessive  pronoun  signifies  the  same^   e.  g. 

|.^\V)>    ai^)    the  sar/ie   kings;    Atsem.   I.  28.    lAl^pLO) 

\^   ^*  *  •    .  ~  '     ' 

Gl^)  the  same  city ;  or  it  is  used  as  a  relative^  e.  g.  Barh. 

•07  ' t"     ^ 

429,  2.  GISDjOJ  Cll^)  whose  name.  With  a  preposition  pre- 
ceding it  means  se/^,  e.  g.  OlA^r^  in  themselves  ;  Ephr.  II. 

7      X  7 

204.  F.  7.  ^^>  ^  ourselves.  With  a  jorcpoizYzm  preceding 
and  a  5^^^a;  added,  it  stands  in  place  of  the  substantive  pro- 
nouns,  mine,  thine,  etc.,  e.g.  John's..  14.  *i\i>  ^D  from 

•n     I  7    I  1» 

mine;  I.  11.  OlAjr^  to  his ;  Assem.  I.  375.  ^^>  ^^  from 
ours.     The  sense  is  similar  when  preceded  by  a  pronoun  sep- 

«mife,  e.g.  B  ith.  254.  10.  ^^>  ^^01  ^^D  from  thine; 
526,  11  ;  425,  14.  5;  and  fully  absolute  as  in  Luke  XV.  31. 

001  \^J^)  >A.^j?  ^,V)\oo  a'ndwliat  is  inine,  that  is  thine ^ 
John  XVII.  9,  10.      The  repetition  of  the  suffix  occurs  ". 
A.  161.  12.   1. — After   "Rem.",   read:    *' Here    belong    also 

^  0  -X  -  0 

abbreviated  forms,  e.  g.  O^N   for  001  >^ ;  Assem.  III.  P.  I. 

0       0        *  0 

293.  TrSo  aa^  to  thee,  0  Lord'\ 


404  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

A.  161.  14.  7.— After  *' city  ",  instead  of  "  XXII.  19,  und  •', 
read :  "  *-iCl  does    not    often  appear  in  such    passages    as 

Assem.  III.  P.  I.  363.  loilLj  ^Gl  ]L^acl3tS,  to  the  praise 
of  God,     The  same  is  true  also  in  respect  to  ". 

A.  161.  26.  8.— After  "  14",  add:  ''Bark.  452,  14.  OlJSOiI, 
CI  ^2U  he  gave  (him)  his  wine  himself ;  Ephr.  II.  217.  D.  I. 
Also,  according  to  some,  the  suffix  also  stands  between  words, 

e.  g.  EjJhr.  I.  84.  B.  7  ^IDOnSiN  *a01  c£)(o  OlZ^  she  also 
asked  it  (him)  from  Jacob.  \^  also  stands  after  the  verb  be- 
fore a  mere  personal  suffix^  e.  g.  .Sar/z.  324,  3.  Olbi  w»aiOr^] 

they  took  him  prisoner ;  even  when  it  follows  the  52{^,  mark- 
ing the  nearer  noun,  so  that  there  is  a  double  pleonasm,  e.  g. 

^^ir.  I.  314.  C.  I.  ^0\C1^  OIJ^  ^010)^1  J  ivhich  had  sus- 
tained'(h\m,  h\m)Barak;  III.  567.  D.  7.  8." 

A.  161.  27.  7. — x\fter    " pleonastically ",    add:   "as  personal 

dative  ". 

A.  161.  28.  5. — After  "  &c.",  add  :  "which  pecuharityismore 
frequent  in  Syriac  than  in  Hebrew.  The  following  belong 
here  ". 

A.  162.  5.  13.— Before  "sometimes",  instead  of  the  rest  of 
the  Eem.,  read :  "  sometimes  this  peculiarity  of  speech  is  found 

in  connection  wlthjl^^^  wander,  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  1.  C.  I;  |ls 

to  be  quiet ;  Ephr.  III.  584.  F.  4     oA.:i*|  to  find,  e.  g.  Ephr. 

I.  184.  D.  3;  ILdj  to  be  similar,  e.  g.   Ephr.  II.  339.  B.  7; 

i^ii  ^0  make,  e.  g.   Barh.   217.  10;    |4*  ^^  be  foolish,  e.  g. 

Kom.  I.  22;  even  with   (OOI,  e.  g.  John  I.  15;  Ephr.  I.  8. 

E.  1.  Ol^  fOOl  (aSD9  ^  as  it  was  evening ;  often  in  con- 
nection with  many  verbs,  in  which  the  idea  of  a  kind  of  draw- 
ing back  seems  to  lie,  e.  g.  ;*Scir)  to  believe  ;  John  XI.  31 ; 

7  I 

£7?Ar.  I.  82.  A.  3 ;  266.  A.  3 ;  Vi^  to  know,  to  comprehend^ 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  405 


e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  -265.  C.  5 ;  84.  B.  6 :  U^D   ^o  venture,   o.  g.  I. 

7 

348.  F.  1.  ^ry\io  happen  to  ones  self;  Ephr.l.  125.  C.  3- 
^llil  ^1^  tOCTl-l  ^aJi,_.j  wJdch  is  accustomed  to  happen 
to  one  from  time  to  time.     The  same  is  true  m  passives,  e.  g. 

covered;  Ephr.  II.  20G.  E.  3.  Ol^  r^^)  he  was  born;  II. 

227.  D.  4.  5.  .OOl^j  ]L.>*  OlLd  Ol^  J^AAaJ  your  whole 
armytvillbe  surrendered;  Ephr.  I.  21.  B.  6.,  etc.* 

A.  162.  18.  8.— After  "  honor  it  ",  add  :  ";  Arts  V.  G  ;  VI.  12  ; 
especially  when  the  participle  is  separated  from  the  first 
{verb);  e.  g,  Ei^hr.  I.  81.  D.  2;  III.  591.  A.  7,  namely,  when 
simultaneous  actions  are  associated.      Sometimes  alsu   the 

sujjix  tOj]  is  attached  to  the  first  verb,  e.  g.  Ephr.  II.  152. 

P.  5.  »^0;akJO  .QJ*|   yIiSa3  /^e  m  overwhelmed  and  {they) 
dead:\ 
A.  162.  22.   13.— After  «B",  add:  ";IL153.  A.4.     '.  .A^\ 
.OOlZoZ;^  zAe  {your)  heir  of  the  children  of  God ;  even  when 
this  genitive  is  a  pronoun,  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  83.  B.  4.  5.   fjOlj 

•    p      »^  1»  -»     7 

m^nh^Kn  SoXa  to  perform  matrimony  {whh)  her.  The  ple- 
onastic sz^a:  is  attached  to  two  nouns,  taking  the  gender  of 
the  first,  especially  if  the  noun  is  masc,  e.  g.  jE^jt^^r.  I.  6.  F.  3. 

P77  0       77«^  I  7 

ll^ljO  t.ki^^>  tOOlAjiJ^  \y.l  concerning  the  creation  of  the 
heavens  and  the  earth  ". 
A.  162.  24.  7.— After    "Rem.    1.)",     omit     the     next    word 

"(and)",  adding  :  ",  e.  g.  Ephr.  II.  217.  D.  6,  7.  "{pjj  oil*  j 

-n    0      7  J     7 

OiAJ'P  ^Z';Z  the  two  horns  of  the  ram  (but  the  suffix  to  the 
preceding  noun  may  fall  away,  e.  g.  JE^o^r.  11.  221.  B.  5; 
233.  C.  5) ;  also  here  belongs  the  repetition  of  the  suffi^^ 

27 


40G  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

A.  162.  28.  3.— After  "  people  ",  add :  «  indeed  both  ^  and 
^^j  after  the  noun^  sometimes  take  suff.^  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  318. 

B.  7.  ^\>*J  01^3  tOOlX^)  vSQI  all  the  people  feared  her '^  ". 
A.  162.  SO.  6.— After  "4",  add:  "; ^  absolute  united  with 

a  svff.^  indicates  the  whole^  e.  g.  >  i\^  I  wholly ;  ,^\o  2^"fi 
wholly.     In  the  third  person,  the  demonstrative  pronoun  often 

precedes  ^^^,  e.  g.  Ol^  poi  this  (he)  wholly ;  OL^  IjOl 
r/iis  (she)  wholly ;  less  frequently  is  a  pronoun  placed  alter 

^ ,  e.  g.  Barh.  568,  10.  11*^  ]jCJl  OlliD  ^/iis  w;/io/c  ^mc. 
As  a  collective  ^*^  is  united  with  a  sing,  and  plur.  svff.  Be- 
fore numerals  it  forms  a  distributive^  e.  g.  Barh.  440,  7.  ];£Q1 

^  mc/i  ten;  l|kD  ^  eachhundred ;  516,  2.  .^-lAA  A»  ^ 

eac/i  sia;i/i  year^  all  the  six  years  ". 

A.  163.  5.  5.— After  "  sin  ",  add  :  "  Ephr.  11.  227.  B.  1 ;  -iD , 
e.  g.  Acts  XXIII.  6 ;  Ephr.  I.  7.  D.  8 ;   117.  C.  3.  4 ;" 

A.  163.  6.  11.— After  "tyrant",  add:  ''Ephr,  II.  217.  C.  8; 

I.  6.  F.  6.   |l.kD>  «oai>  >>S  concerning  her  being \  ". 

A.  163.  7.  7.— After  "  19  ",  add  :  ''Ephr.  II.  217.  A.  4.  From 
this  connection  of  the  suff.  and  prep,  we  understand  clearly 
the  substantive  character  of  the  prepositions.  "We  also  find 
this  usage  still  oftener  employed  in  connection  with  a  nou7i 

P      *.  7 

preceded   by   a  pronoun^   e.  g.   Assem.   I.    40.   21.     jZoa  »> 

p      •    p     ^ 
^ai>  Gl^^nn\  against  this  monster.     Also ;  ". 

A.   163.   11.  1.— After  "feast",  add:  "  i^/^Ar.  II.  217.  D.  3.  4. 

This  repetition  is  particularly  apparent  in  the  use  of  ^Sd  and 

^i^.  Its  foundation  lies  in  the  noun  with  a  demonstrative  pro- 
noun preceding,  e.  g.  Acts  VIII.  35.  IX.  21 ;  Ephr.  1. 308.  D.6. 

P   ♦.  *     »"  7  P      P  ti  »    1> 

()00U)  \^CiM  poi  ^^  OUSd  owjJ  of  this  root  of  Judah  ;  c) 
also  some  words  often   stand  between  this  pleonastic  sufj\ 


ADDITIONS  AND   CORRECTIONS.  407 

and  the  following  noun  qv  pronoun  with  the  same  preposition^ 
e.  g.  Ephu  II.  232.  C.  7.  ll^iliJ  tUSD  -^-^1  OlL  .liaLo 
^/ie/e  ^^e  angel  commanded  (him)  the  prophet  (cf.  Agrell.  Suppl, 
p.  206);  Ma^^.  XXVII.  4.  ^  |Ld  ^  rl  7rp5?  ^/zac;  /oA« 
XXI.  22;  Assem.l. 405.  ^  »aO  *a.1  wo  to  me!  III.  1.  118. 

^^  *si\  ^j  _j^  AjiI  to  we  also  had ;  Barh.  597.  4.  After 
an  oblique  case  of  a  noun  ov  pronoun  separate^  the  52{^.  of  3d. 
person,  either  pleonastic  or  for  the  sake  of  perspicuity,  some- 
times follows,  e.  g.  Barh.  78,  11;  Assem.  II.  372.  11.  Ol^ 
loCTl  )jGlL  1u  had;  sometimes  the  suff.  of  1st.  and  2d.  per- 

son  appears,  e.  g.  Barh.  542,   11.  12.  «jk^ %iT  lOgf  he 

permitted  me  to  drink to  myself.     So  also  after  the 

Accus.  of  the  j9ro?2.  separate,  e.  g.  -4ss.  III.  P.  1.  96.  CTI-^feo 

IjoiI  if/m  (him)  he  killed;  Barh.  342.  11.  OITMOJ  —  IZAj] 

^Ae  ivife  —  he  took  (her) ;  ". 
A.    16.  22.  2.— After  "  these  ",  add  :  "  Ephr.  I.  39.  E  ;" 
A.  164.  4.  5. — After  "signification",  add:  "when  occurring 

after  them  ". 

A.   164.   14.  3.— After   "8",  add:  "  >Z(   paOi  ]^imJ    U^f? 

tJie  wind  blows  where  it  ivill;    >   (LdQjlO  ivhen  ;  Ephr.  I.  86. 

f  ^  7   7  V      \Q  7 

A.  1.  N^  'r'^?  |Vnr>>*^  when  he  sent  thee  (is  sent).  Some- 
times J  stands  before  the  interrogative  adverb,  e.  g.  ^^p^r.  L 

83.  A.  3.  OUaJLO  y.;2Z|  |V^O>  fOOl  IVm  hQ  saw  how  his 

possessions  had  been  prospered  ". 
A.  164.  18.  11.— After  "14",  add:  "1.39,2.3.   .OOUOlSci» 
_1£dAo  U>    2677iOse  name  we  have  not  written;  Barh.  141. 

15;". 
A.  164.  20.  8.— After  "31",  add:  '\  Barh.  mi.  i.  Oil  1 001 
Ljk\  Oli^  *2i(j  that  which  also  had  \  \ 


408  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

A.  164.  24.   1.— After   "sent",    add:    '' Barh.  23.   4.    161,  9. 

«Qj]    tr^l  lOfOSj  ivhom  we  have  taken  prisoner  in  war-^\ 
A.   164.  26.   14.— After  "  God,  etc.",  add  :  "  ;  or  simply  as  in 

Barh.  54,  7.  OlOj  in  which;  also  with  one  or  more  words 

between  them,  e.  g.  ^55.  11.  260.  17.  ]]  jZu^  ^*^  fOlj  ^OlO 

«a£)  2;z  td;^ic^  wo  Iwuse  is  left  standing  ". 
A.   164.  27.   1. — After  "Rem.'*,  add:  "The  preposition  may 

be  omitted  where  the  sense  is  easily  understood  from  the  con- 

17         0       7  •^     «v 

nection,  e.  g.  Barh.  165,  5.  v.  E.  AaOOlj  flO]  Oli^OO  during 

O  "i"^"  "         7-07 

the  whole  time  in  which  I  teas  ;  94.  y^Sf)])  |A>V>^r>  (Alao 

during  the  first  year  in  which  I  was  Idyig.     The  bare  relative^ 
especially  when  in  the  neuter  gender^  without  a  sujf,  follow- 

ing,  marks  the  accusative^  e.  g.    ^d^'i  ^\o  all  which  he  had 
7nade  ;  or  the  relative  precedes  the  mark  of  the  case,  e.  g. 

■r>         7         7  p-np77 

Barh.  43.  12.  01iri]^j  to  which  time;  137,  5.  looi  Vkl^^) 

which  belonged  to  the  Arabians.     At  the  same  time  it  (the  rela- 
tive) includes,  together  with  itself,  the  demonstrative^  and  so 

*  7   7 
may  stand  after  the  j»r^7?osi^io;2,  e.  g.  Barh.  361.  14.  01^01^^  to 

10        7  • 

those  who  were  with  him ;  91,5.      >Vr)»  rt  \  iq  those  who  stood 

■*>  p    0        7 
bij  ;  Assem.  III.  P.  I.  238.  *£)»!  13 >  ^^  up>on  that  which  is 

not  becoming ;  hence  in   general  as  follows :  >  ^^  therefore^ 

•X     -h  7    0 

because;  J  ^\4^  because;  j  jAo  afterwards  ■\ 

A.   165.   1.  2.— After  "strong",  read:  "^5sm.  III.  P.  I  92. 

p  I     7 

PI  ,.A.Q2)j  whom  I  have  commanded.  " 

A.   165.  7.  3.— After  "Arabians",  add:  "  Barh.  518,  5.  ^1 

^;Ld(>  /  o/"  whom  they  say ;  533.  14.  {1^^*   U?  -^ajoZ 
^/ww,  t^/wse  religion  is  unknown  ". 
A.   165.  14.  9.— After  "170,5",  add  :  "Also  by  j  preceding 
the  above  named  pronouns,  e.  g.  oai>  ,  •.aO*)  either   alone 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  409 

or  80   that   j    also  follows,  e.  g.  Barh.  314.   14.  (OOI  OlSDlj 

^  17  1 

OCTlj  /^e  it^/w  2d;a5  tc'ith  him  ;  w*-^j  .-lOlj  the  one  who  very 

4w  7  ^        r  p 

\^\vas  rich);  farther  oai>  001  m.,  t-iOlj  "-aOI/,  e.  g.  Barh,  465, 

4.  Zooi  ^019  *aCn  he^iolw  was'^\ 

A.  165.  23.  1.— After  "Rem.",  add:  "  The  same  is  often  ac- 
complished even  by  the  svffix^  c.  g.  i?«rA.  303,  15;  138,  10. 
17;  or  merely  by  the  copula^  e.  g.  i^ar/i.  559,  9;  Luke  III. 

16.  Ol'rColo  rjvedrjae  {q,1  AgrclL  p.  219)". 
A.  165.  25.  5.— After   "sat",    add :  5  ^  001  Ephr.  I.  82. 

E.  3;  and  tjOl  olooi  Ephr.  I.  119.  B.  4.". 
A.  166.  6.  6. — After  "signification",  add:  "After  a  preced- 
ing noun  in  the  construct  statc^  it  indicates  the  genitive^  e.  g. 

Barh.  504.  ilOl  ^aSoqIh^   in  those  days;  596,   14;  388,  2. 

eOJOl  Zoai.»..i2>  ^/m  /o%.      "Without  a  preceding  noun  it 
indicates  the  genitive  by  j  preceding  it,  e.  g. /oArt  iX.  28. 

OOI  J  OlrASQ^^Z  disciple  of  this ;  JJOIJ  ,  e.  g.   i?a?7^.  256.   8. 

]>01>  ^  e.  g.  102,  3.   {dat.  and  accw5.  by  ^ )". 

A.  166.  7.   6.— After   "47"    add  :   ";Ma^^.   Y.    17  ;  Ephr, 

I.  1.  D.  3.    |Zn^V>N«V)  fjOl  •.aOI  even  ^/^zs  doctrine ;  it  (the 
demonstrative  pronoun)  also  corresponds  with  the  Latin  /ticce, 

•X        -n         P    P 

e.  g.  ylc^s  I.    11.  ^QA*  poi  ^/m  7e5z^5;  Ephr.  I.  312.  D.  5. 

7  y:  0     t> 

oiil  »rr)  |J01  this  Sinai  \  JohtiXlX.  19.     In  Ephrem  it  often 

7      0 

Stands  evidently  for  QJOl ,  that  is  (hoc  est),  e.  g.  B.  I.  312. 

P  -»>       'X  0  7     9 

D.  2.  5.  Ql]   f'jQ^  *a|  QJOl  i.  e.  also  the  mountains  shook. 

Rem.  2.  The  neuter  is  usually  expressed  by  the  fem.  form  though  some- 

times   by   the   masc.,  e.  g.    J/a^f.    YI.   25 ;    XIII.    13.     (jOl   ^^4^  ^*^ 
rovTO. " 

A.  166.  14.  12.— After  "thou",  add:  ''-.Ephr.ll.  10  A.  1 ; 
I.  128.  B.  2.  4;" 


410  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

A.  166.  15.  4.— After  "*^,"  add:    *',  after  the  nou7i  in  tliu 

emphat.  state," 
A.   166.  16.  6.— After    "hand",    add:    "e.g.   Ephr.   II.  10. 

A.  1 ;" 
A.  166.   19.  10.~After  "prepositions",  add:  ''Ephr.  I.  128. 

13.  4.  ^iiOj   |JiD  fjS^  by  whose  words  i?  .QlD  and  Jl^  are  used 

in  respect  to  things,  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  389.  A.  8.  tOloL  ichy  ? 

C.  2.    .Qk)  \y^  wherefore  ?  Acts  V.  24.  (301  w^OI  ]iSd  w/m^ 

is  this  V 
A.  166.  22.1.— After  "Rem.",  add  :  "  Thezw^m-<?5'a«iz;e  is  also 

7      7  7  7  7 

found  in  the  following  formation:  p|  ^!iO  (apa),  ^.i^  ^k), 
Qlk) ,  J  0C71  ^  (  who  is  he  that ) ;  \1^\ ,  ..j^  ]l^|  m.,  j,.a| , 
*a^  |,..a|  /.  (taho  ifideed^),  Ql^j ,  >  %^^  P-»|  (t^-^o  zAere  zw- 

7       7  p         y      ?  1*  7 

deed?) J  j  Ola]  ,  e.  g.  ^jo/zr.  III.  593.  D.  jcCLiVraL  Olki..iZ5 

P    *.  7  P         7  ^ 

ISdqS  n^MJD  t*1  whose  lips  can  adequately  describe  Paradise  ? 
In  indirect  questions  (laf   and  |pA|  are  found  with  v  follow- 

P  7  P  7   7  * 

ing  or  preceding,  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  6.  E.  2.   (SdQ-i  (1.^(2)  OlO 

P  7*77  PO  0    0    '*   7 

on  which  days;  I.  24.  D.   6.    Wj  1q*jJ>    ^j]]o   IZqo-m 

Aa^  locn  Aji(  |1jj»  ^7/  u'hich  he  showed  what  peace  existed 
between  the  animals  and  Adam;  also  without  j  ,  e.  g.   ilia^^. 

XXIV.  42.   .QO'rk)  12]  lAlS  1p»|o  at  lohat  hour  your  Lwd 

•X  7  _  .   P         '      _  , 

doth  come;  and  QlSo  with  (OCTI  implied,  e.  g.  Jb/m  XVIII. 
38.  \y^  QlLo  ^^;/^a^J  w  ?n«^^?  VII.  20.  Moreover  flk)  , 
relating  to  person  is  found,   e.  g.   Bojrh.  223,  2.  Aj|  jlSC) 

I  -n  P  P       P  ~ 

tvho  art  thou?  399.  15.  i>Qurmk5  looi  ]iSd>  7^^  t^'/io  ^t'as 
from  the  beginning.  In  respect  to  the  relative  meaning  of  the 
interrogative  pronoun  arising  from  j  following,  of.  §  56.  1  ". 


ADDITIONS  AND  COllRECTIONS.  411 

A.  166.  31.  2.— Instead  of   "in",    read:    "by   the   suff.  of;" 

after  "  person  ",  add  :  "  and  ". 
A.  167.  1.  3.— After  "e.  g. ",  instead   of  the  next  21  words, 

10  "by  prepositions",  add  :"  .001^   to  one's    self   (  si&i) -^ 

Barh,  77,  5.  {.H^Sd  tOOlJ^  0V)iO|  theT/  chose  to  themse/ves 
a  king.     The  separate  pronoun  of  the  3d.  person  usually  pre- 

cedes  the  accusative^  e.  g.  Barh.  54,  15.  ^^^^O  01^  001  he 

killed  himself  (selbst)." 
A.   167.  4.  5.— After  "themselves",  add:  '' Ephr.  I.  349.  C. 

6;" 
A.   167.   11.  3.~After  "myself",  add:  "  i^;?^/.  I.  237.  D.  2 ; 

11.  208.  F.  5.  6;" 

A.   167.   15.  3.— After    "9",    add:    ''{Ag7ell.  Sujipl    210 )  i 
\2iOfXSi  (TTpoacjTTov)  Assem.  1.  AS5  ;''\ 

A.  167.   15.  8. — iVfter    "6'*,  add:  '* sometimes   ]L»  exhtence, 

•X  0  7  0 

e.  g.  Assent.  III.  P.  I.  77.  tOaiZu  >,iV^»»'^  who  even  love 
themselves;  also  without  a  suffix,  e.  g.  Assem.  III.  P.  1.  98. 
(A*  LQ^^a     even   contempt.      PsOQlO  signifies   real    sub- 

P  7  •         £)    »>  7 

Stance,  the  thing  itself,   e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  6.  jl)|>  OISdQIOO 

0     7         7  -n     *v 

].Vn^-»  oiSsDQiO  Jf/se  rea/  Jieaven  and  the  real  earth  ( even 
both)''. 
A.  168.  7.   13.— Instead    of  the  next  three  lines,  add :  "VII. 
24;  >  _k)  (ocrn?  dV),  e,  g.  ilfa^?.  X.    33;  Mark  VII.    16; 
i?arA.  195,  3;    198,   12;    ?  ^   \^,    e.  g.  Assem,.  I.  235;  j 

(?       7  P        7  P         7  «v 

W  7?i,  >  Ir^l/.,  e.  g.  i?arA.  113,7;  598,  14;  j  ^l^]  ^, 
e.  g.  I  /oA?^  III.  3.  The  neuter  is  expressed  by  >  ^D , 
J  ^  ,  e.  g.  /o^/a  XV.  16 ;  J  Ud  ^ ,  e.  g.  ^cis  III.  22  ;  IV. 
23;  J  :>OrSD  (ortav),  e.g.  Jia^^.  X.  27 ;  >  Vo^^^  ^\D 
{boa  av),  e.  g.  John  XVI.  23;  Birh,  107,  13;  j  U^^  ^, 
e.  g.  Barh.  600  {ult.)]  J  ]jl  .^,  e.  g.  Assem.  II.  172". 


412  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

A.  168.  15.  9.— After  "  18;  by\  add:  "even  united  with  a 
fem.^  e.  g.   Barh.    129.     *iiJf  |ZAj]  a  certain  woman  \  «aj| 

7  PPP7P7P 

i-js* ,  e.  g.  Asseni.  I.  32.  {^1^(2  %m.l\  ^^  2q-^  to  some  oivner 

•  —    • 

of  a  bath\  b)    by   _lD    r-*^ ,    e.g.  i?ar/i.   127.  8.  ^"  r»^0 

•  •      X  7  •  • 

,^>V>Qa  on  a  certain  day  /". 

7   7 

A.  168.  17.   10.— After  "5",  add:  ''Barh.   167.  15.  ^^010^] 

^!iD  5£Wje  owe  o/"  his  brothers  ;  d)  by  ^^  having  reference 
to  something  including  both  gender  and  number,  e.  g.  Barh. 

241.  16.  5>0jLd  UdI  a  certozw  jt7eo/?/e;   iz^/je  XL  36.  :>Ojk) 
p  p  p  pip 

I  Alio  a  certain  part  ;  e)  by  ^-^^  w^.,  f^>l\^  /.   (by  con- 
cealing the  name  =  6,  ^  6uva)\  Barh.  187,  12;  219;" 

A.  168.  19.  4.— After  "27",  add  :  ";  also  by  \ziO^^  relat- 
ing to  persons,  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  11,  22.  Sometimes  this  idea  is 
contained  in  the  7ioun  itself,  e.  g.  ^O^d  to  a  certain  place  ; 

0  7  '  -i"  ^ 

Barh.  250,  16.  jl^l  a  certain  longtime;  (Aj^l  once^\ 

A.  168.  21.  6.— After  "15;",  add:  "also  doubled,  e.g.  1. 
Cw.  XI.  1 8  ;  5)  elliptically  ;  also  ". 

7  0  Q 

A.  168.  28.   12.— After  "good",  add:  "  Also  by  ^^  ]]  or  U 

7  iK         P  0  ^ 

rA* ,  e.  g.  Barh.  284,  8 ;  613,  1  ;  ^  U  or  ]]  —  ^  ,  e.  g. 

*  P  -X  P 

^ar^.  347,  2.  3;  finally  by  *aj]  ^  P  ". 

X 

A.  169.   12.   10.— After  "  11",  add:  "  also  without  M,  e.g. 

7  p  ..    I    p 

J5a?7i.  359.  «,iCnnV)»»'i  ^^>.bi|  certain  of  his  friends  \^\ 
A.  169.   17.  7.— After     "20",    add:     "  Eelating    to    things 

■n-n  '^'^»•^p•• 

^^  isfound^  e.g.  iw^elX.  17.  5>0,iD  J.*^  some  crumbs; 
or  dovhled,    e.  g.   ^kiJs  XXV.    19  (rti^a);   ^Sd  X>pS!0,  e.  g. 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  413 

Bar/i.    347,   U.    01 A^.    ^   ^^    some  of  her  fingers^ 
With  the  same  signification  ^J^l  (an  indeclinable  collective 

0    7   "  9        7 

noun)  occurs,  e.  g.  Barh.  217.  \mJI»  ^^1  some  several  years; 

P  0   •»7  0  V  0 

204,  1.  lAlilil  ^1^1  sometimes;  and  ^i:^,  e.g.  ^ar^.  385. 

P  0     "7  p 

1 4.   f  Aa2U  ^^2)  some  men  ". 

A.  169.  27.  3.— After  "  18  ",  add  :  "  or  by  f^  —  .OOUlD , 
e.  g.  Ephr.  II.  36.  D.  4  ".  ^ 

A.   170.  2.  5.— After  "32  ",  add  :  "Also  -^C31 -i^Ol 

occur,  e.  g.  Ephr.  II.  232.  B.  3.  4." 

A.  170.  5.  2.— After  "5",  add:  ''Ephr.  I.  315.  C.  2;". 

A.  170.  7.  10.— After  "other",  add:  "with  h^  or  *mj|  pre- 

'  P         7  t,  P  P         P  7 

ceding,  e.  g.  Ephr.  II.  217.  A.  7.  8.  Ol2-rn>*  ^  \^\  ]^0 
and  the  one  (horn)  was  higher* than  the  other ;". 

A.  170.  9.  3.— After  "another",  add:  Barh.  570.  4;" 
A.  170.  10.  4.— After  "10",  add  :  ''Ephr.  I.  227.  E.  5;" 
.     A.   170.  12.  5.— After"  24,"  add:  "Ephr.  I.  40.  A.  6;". 
A.  170.   12.   10.— After  "37",  add:    "Ephr.   11.   316.  A.  8. 

^-      7  ^      "7  f>  -i"         ^ 

{aorOj^  (2)Q^  ^Id  from.  07ie  end  to  the  other  ;  with  |;£Lm 
added,  e.    g.    Ephr.   II.    339.  B.    4.  ^k>  GFI'^fHix^  lAiON 

0        7  I 

|Aj^/row  ow^  house  to  another]  or  with  ^>*|  added,  e.  g. 

B.  5.  (la^l  (;!iOQl^  |;SDai  ^V)  from  one  dwelling  to 
another'\ 
A.  170.  15.  8.— After  "  burden",  add  :  "  ^OOUSO  is  even  found 
doubled,  e,  g.  Acts  XVII.  32;  XIV.  4;  even  as  an  accusa- 
tive^ e.  g.  Mark  XII.  5 ;  and  »oailV)\  with  the  mark  of  the» 
case,  e.  g.Barh.  114.  14;  145.  4.  5.  v.  E.". 


414  ADDITIONS  AND   CORRECTIONS. 

A.   170.    16.   1. — Instead    of    the    next   4     lines,    add,    (  after 
"  llem.")  :  "  One  another^  corresponding  with  the  Greek  ri/l/l/}- 

Aoi,  is  represented  by  (r^  reciprocal,  in  such  a  manner  that 

a  preposition,  corresponding  with  the  same,  precedes,  or  is  join- 
ed with  it,  the  latter  being  seldom  without   the  preposilio?i, 

c.  g.  Ba7-h.  260.  1.  2.  f>7A*  —  Ql\d]  they  consumed  one  another ; 

7 

by   ^ ,  e.  g.  Acts  XXI.   6  ;  by   ^1 ,    e.  g.  James  TV.  11; 

7  7 

by  i>Ql ,  e.  g.  Luke  IV.  36 — (we  also  find  |.x»  doubled,  e.  g. 
/o7i?2  XIII.  14);  sometimes   by   the  preposition  merely  with 

a  suffix,  e.  g.  i^owz.  I.  24.  .0010  among  each  other  ". 

A.  170.  21.  10.— After   "  e.  g ",  add:  '' Ephr.   I.    308.     B. 

3;". 
A.  170.  23.  5.— After  "  same  ",  add  :  Ephr.  II.  350.  0.  3.  4 ; 

with  a  preposition  preceding,  e.  g.  Ass.  I.  117.   |Alm!D  OlO 

7  •      P 

1^  OlO  m  i^Ae  sawze  2/ear ;". 

♦»  p  ? 

A.  170.  25.  5. — After   "  ;?ro72ow7i",  read  :"  001  and   |j01  m., 
-«  p 
^Ol  and  IjOl  /.  ". 

A.  170.  26.   1.— After  *•  Rem.",  add  :  "  e.  g.  Barh.  508.  14  ;''. 

A.  171.   1.  7. — After  "  blood  ",  add:  ^^  without  the  prepositio7i 
before  the  noun  being  doubled,  e.  g.  Barh.  159.   11;  ". 

A.  171.  2.  12.— After   "year"   add:  "^y^r.    II.   453.  C.  6. 

{.aO^£D>  .OClXiJ  their  specialinquirer \'\ 
A.  171.  4.  8.— After  "43",  add:    ";  by  }l1,   e.  g.  ^1  ive 

ourselves;  \ind   do.    (will),    e.  g.  76'/^?^   V.   30.    ZojD.  ^iD 

7 

w>.aa3  by  me  myself ;  VII.  28,  etc.". 

•X       -x 

A,  171.   6.    11.— After  "2.",    add:  ";  and  Q^OOl,    e.  g.  Acts 
II.  33". 

A.  171.  7.   10.— After  "fern.",  add:  "  (=-  r^r  ),  generally  plac- 
ed after  the  noun  ". 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  415 

A.  171.  22.   11.— After  *' 18  ",  add  :  «;  of  what  sort  (gualis), 
is  only  expressed  by  ZoLo^  after  the  image  =  like  as  ;e.  g. 

Ephr.  I.  393.  C.  1.  U^4  20^5^0  like  goats.  " 
A.    172.  20.   14.— After ''  receive"*,  add:  "68,  4;  ". 
A.   173.   19.   10.— After    "angry",  add:   "  (?)  the  pret.   ]ooi 

often  stands  for  the  present^  e.  g.  JbA^z  XL  4.     jOOl  '=kort ; 

MaW.  II.  6.  AaOOI  =  et;  1  Cor.  VI.  19.  .oZuooi  =«eare  ."' 

A.    173.  25.  2.— After  "20",  add:  "otherwise   very  seldom, 
e.  g.  ^ar/i.  413.  1.  3.     When    one   commits   murder,  e.  g. 

-^  7 

Ol  Aa^O   /  s^a//  ^i?/  some  one ;  ". 

A.  174.   10.   1. — After   "sometimes",  omit  thirteen  words  to 
"Eem.",  and  instead  of  them,  read  :  "  ,  though  seldom,  the 

pret.  denotes  merely  the  optative ^  e.  g.  Assent.  I.  38.  yll  he 
may  hear  thee\  often  with  the  optative  particles  ^aoA*]  and 
•^Q^  would  that  {utinam)^  or,  *aO  q!^  e.  g.  iwXre  XIX. 
42.  waAlf^  WL.D  Q_^  O,  if  thou  hadst  yet  known ;  ". 
A.  174.  14.  3.— After  "under  c",  add:  "  *OOU  _So  (prop- 
erly  *i:iOU  ^So )   O  that,  transferred  from  the  Hebrew,  njrii 

1^  ;  also    «£C1m    Unvoice    thee  (God),  belong  here  (cf  Hahn 

C'hrest.  100,  3.  7).". 

A.   177.  4.  8.— After  "say",  add:  "  The  auxiliary  word    can 
is  more  frequently  written   in    connection   with   the  part,  of 

P  7Iifp7t>7 

I^Ld,    e.  g.  Ephr.    1.     133.    £.    5.   jZIj    AaUj-pwIj    U^2^ 

■"PP  0      0?  P-X  7 

;u-M,  U    lA-iOl-i^   fZaliD,^  in  no  other  icay  can  we  be  benefitted 
by  the  divine  image  ". 
A.  177.  7.  3.— After  "  2,"  add  :  "  ;  B.  The  optative  (cf.  Agrell. 
p.  31),  e.  g.  Barh.  183,  4.  v.  E.  \J\l  may  he  live  )  the  king)  . 
290,  4.  V.  E;  Assem.  I.  168,  15.  v.  E.  looiZ  be  it  so ;  III.  P. 


416  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

II.  465,  8.  >f^*r^^  ^^i  (God)  be  Uessed.     With  >  preceding,  e.  g. 

Assem.     II.      118.  5.    8.    IcOmJ  loillLj  that    God  may   be 
gracious  ". 

A.   177.   10.  4.— After  "not",  add:  "  Less  frequently  we  find 

P-     7  -P  V  T,  0  7 

ISolj  for  V  J  e.  g.  Assem.  II.  259,    24.   fr^c^Z  ]<^V'>   believe 

?wty 

A.  177.   11.   12.— After  "11",   add:  ";    and   negative,   e.g. 

7      T>  p  -X 

i?ar^.    366,   5.    v.    E.     %^01jZ  IJo  —  *OQ£D  ^o   owi  —  but 
haste  not.'''' 

A.  177.  21.  5.— After  "XV.  4.",  add:  ";  Ephr.  I.  124.  D. 
3". 

A.  177.  25.  4.— After  "  B.",  add  :  "  ,  and  the>^.  is  found  cor- 
responding with  the  genitive  of  the  Latin  gerund,  with  j  pre- 
ceding, after  a  preceding  noun^  so  that  by  this  means,  the 
idea  of  the  fut.   is  more  accurately  expressed,  e.  g.  Assem. 

I.  40.   He  takes  pleasure  |V»jJ)  to  see ;  or  33,  1 7,  in  the  2d.  per- 
son  (OOlZj  to  remain  {that  tJiou  shouldst  remain)  Barh.  367. 

7       1  0  7 

7.  8;  245,  13.  ^^r^^?  U^l  the  time  to  bring  forth.     Very 

seldom  without   ?  ,  e.  g.  Assem.  IL  308,  19.  20.     Cf.  Agrell. 

SuppL  p.  38  ". 
A.   177.26.  3.— After  "finally",  instead  of  "the"'   add:  "a 

periphrastic  ". 
A.  177.  30.  9.— After  "  35  ",  add  :  "  Ephr.  I.  19.  F.  7 ;  '\ 
A.  178.  1.   12.— After  "36",  add:  ";  Barh.  435,  11.  iS)   by 

^77  0        0 

the  fut.  following  with  ?  ,  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  481,  22.  (rAJj  (JOID 

I      7 

^Alj  the  priest  shall  begin  ;  37.   17;  Ji^Ar.  L  197.  D. ;   312 
A.  4;  in  the  plur.,  e.  g.  /o/^tz  VI.  15.     Also  y  is  sometimes 

wanting,  e.  g.  ii:y^r.  II.  152.  F.  4-6.  plk)   ^aAlj  -OO-f^JO 
.QJ I   )^aS£iJ  that  the  king  should  strike  and  destroy  them  ". 

A.  178. '2.  8. — After  "  expressed  ",  add:  "in  both  cases". 

A.  178.  4.  7.— After  "receive",  add:  "  ;  Ephr.l,  82.  D.  3-5 

•     p«si  7  ^x  x7«v■^a.X  0 

OlL  lOZilJ    0001    ^^r-a-Ai    ^a^nV^\  ^i^J  1l^)Q-C5?   »-»oi 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  417 

her,  to  whom  the  gifts  (presents)  of  all  the  people  should  come ; 
131,  D.  3;  Z>)  by  i\\Q  fut.  of  looi  with   the  part,  following, 

Q.g.ActsY.  15.  ]Z)  looiJ)  •uALd]   ivhen  he   came  {should 
come);  XVII.  26.". 
A.   178.  5.   1,— After  "Rem.",  add:  " Sometimes  the  idea  in- 

eluded  in  the  Greek  6eI  is  expressed  by  r»^  j  ©•  g-  ^^^'^  ^^ 
VIII.  31 ;  XIII.  7.  10  ;  Luke  IX.  12 ;  XVII.  25". 
A.  178.  13.  2.— After  «  forth  ",  add :  "The>#.  with  j  ^  pre- 
ceding, corresponds  with,  the  Latin  gerund  in  do,  e.  g.  Assem. 
II.  408,  3.  4.    He  permitted  to  bring  it  (  the  ark)  forth,  is  ex- 

-n  7  ■« 

pressed  by  Oioajj  ^iD ;  III.  P.  1.  120.  6.  he  was  weary  of 

lying,  by  jQaoJj  ^iD  ;  with  OCT!  or  *aCl  inserted  between, 
e.  g.  III.  P.  1.  484, 22.  ^DO'r^j  ^6\  ^  by  fleeing.  The  fui. 
also  is  found  in  cases,  where,  in  Latin,  the  superlative  is  necessa. 

ry  after  verbs  of  motion,  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  32,  6.  ^QUj  in  going 
towards :  without  ?  ,  e.  g.  ^55ew.  I.  380,  24.  v.  E.,  Zok)!  ^l] 

7   7  •"      I 

I  taillgo  to  die',  Barh.  373,  8;  h^  l^V^?  /o?*  that  reason  he 
comes  to  help ;  sometimes  with  the  copula  O  ,  e.  g.  -4c^s  XV. 
36  {AgrelL  pp.  39.  40)". 
A.  178.  24.  10.— After  "go",  add:  "  This  union  oi  the  fut. 
with  the  paragogic  imperative  of  the  Hebrew,  sometimes  cor- 
responds with  the  imp.  'ni  ,  parag.  XX2b  5  ^^  ^"^  Ephr.  I.  320, 

I"  T, 

E,  5.  ,^i.>>S  ^A.'^NV)]  w»Aj|  %^L  let  him  be  king  over  US',  321, 

P       I  7  I  0 

0.  6.  7.  \m^\  ^  wiOOl  12  «^'e//,  ^e  oz^r  master',  II.  316,  A.  2. 

0  1         "  0         7    i>         0 

]l  >SV>\  -yiaQjs*!  \L  well,  I  ivill  show  tliee  the  spring  ". 
A.   179.  2.  6..— After  ''infinitive'',  add:  Ejohr.  III.  566,  B.  6. 

7;^ 

A.  179.   16.  6.— After  "5.  «.",  add:  "Also the /^^.  of  (OCTl  with 
the  part,  following,  expresses  the  imperative,  e.  g.  Assem.  III. 


418  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

If*.*  «9 

P.  1.347.  2.     ^V*^  ,OQCU  let  them  hasten-,  53.  17.  \il 

focru  he  may  relate  ". 
A.   180.   1.  4— After  ''9  ",   add:  '' Ephr.  II.  203.  C.  6;  231. 

F.  2.  3;  I.  389.  A.  5;   Barh.  409,  14.  15;  517,  5.  v.  E ;". 
A.  180.  5.  5.— After  "  6  ",  add  :  "  also  before  the  infin.,  e.  g. 

Acta  Mart.  III.  293,  9/.  looi  >SilQSD  oSS^V)  ]]  he,  by  no 

means,  spake]  Ephr.  I.  40.  C.  8;  III.  369,  D.  1;  Acta  Mart. 
II.  347 ;  348,  1 ;". 
A.  180.  7.  3.— After  "7",  add:  ";  even  in  the  comparative 

degree,  e.  g.  Acta  Mart.  11.  347,   23.  24.   (OOl  ^ml  ^aSV) 

*  p     *v 
—  GU^o]  his  wickedness  becomes  continually  more  aggra- 
vated."" 
A.   ISO.   14.   11. — After    "seen",    add:    ";    even,    so    much 

(adeo),  e.  g.  Acta  Mart.  II.    337,  5.  6.  "^j]  ]L^lD  J  ASqSd 

so  much,  if  I  die;  even  with  words  standing  between  at  the 
end  of  a  proposition ;  yes,  indeed,  e.  g.  Acta  Mart.  360,  8.  9. 

v.  E.  Q. Asik)  ^ilg  AXZ  ^u^Oli^  ^]  ^h^S^^SLlj  he  may 

yet  indeed  divide  these  three  years.     But  often  this  emphasisis 

•07  7         '^ 

scarcely  perceptible,  e.  g.  ^ar/i.  226.  OlAlOl  ^^V^  I  have 

purchased  it  (legally  ?y\ 
A.  180.   16.  3.— After  "45"  add:  Ephr.  I.  9.  F.  7.   10.  A. 

3;". 
A.  180.   18.   14. — After  "die,"  add:  "sometimes   the   expres- 
p         p 

sion  J   (OOl  |J  by  no  means,  on  no  account,  stands  before  the 

infinitive,  e.  g.   Ephr.  I.  40.  C.  2  ". 
A    180.  22.  6. — After  "  is  ",  omit '  which  is  ",  and  add  :  "  ;  also 

i  Sam.  XXII.  16  {cf.  Ephr.  I.  377,  E)  which  are  ". 
A.  181.  9.  8.— After   "weep",  add:  ''Barh.   19.  20;  Ephr. 

II.  204,  C.  4;". 
A.  181.   12.  2.— After  "  21  ",  add  :  **  Acts  1.  1  ;  11.  4.  v.  42;". 
A.  181.  14.  3.— After  "  16,',  add  :  "  Ephr.  I.  85.  B.  4.  5;". 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  4 1 0 

A.  IS  I.  25.  6.— After  "  teach  ",  add  :  '^  Ephr.  I.  S92,  B.  2;". 

A.  181.  27.  4.— After  "enter",    add  :  "Sometimes,   for   the 

sake  of  perspicuity,   %a01  is  inserted  between,  e.  g.  Asscja. 

II.  438,  19.  *D*,Sq1j    ^(S\  ^  by  spitting ;". 
A.  181.  29.  4. — After  "  me  ",  add:  "  ;  or  it  indicates  compari- 

7 

son  in  connection  with  >  f .»] ,  e.  g.  Ephr.  III.  568,  F.  8. 
i-«rfiV)\>  yjfc  f  even  as  they  are  accustomed  to  worship  them 
(the  trees).  United  with  the  suff,^  it  makes  the  verh^  e.  g. 
Ephr.  I.  194,  D.  2.  3.  aiS^ovi\  llo  Ae  som^/^^  tokillhirri\ 
substantively,  e.  g.  I.  312,  B.  1.  ;.i^  ^j  v^  r^^Vno  ^ 
/%  way  from  Seir.     Besides,  it  marks  the  \u2i\An  gerund  with 

ad,  e.  g.  J5ar/i.  466.  \\V>«Vi\  for  hearing-^  272,  2.  v.  E., 
and    the    supine    in    u,  e.   g.    -^ssern.    III.    P.    1.  115,   6. 

*^      t>         7  "^  t  7     ••  7 

o;^jZ\rr>V)\  t  lOrnS  unpleasant  to  hear''\ 
A.  182.  22.  6.— After  "him",  add:  ''Ephr.  I.  392,0.2;". 
A.  182.  24.  5.— After"Byssus",  add:  '' Ephr,  III.  578.    C. 

2;  Barh.  88.  13;". 
A.  183.  4.  10.— After  "214,  1.  ",add  :  «  JS^o/^r.  I.  283,  B.  5.  6; 

II.  232,  B.  7;  I.  314,    C.  8;  217,  A.  8.  9;". 
A,  183.  7.  7.— After  "  oath ",  add:  Ephr.  III.  565.  E.  8.  F. 

1 ;  Assem.  I.  261,  2  ;  Barh.  73.  1  ;  ". 
A.  183.  15.  1.— After   "Lord",    add:     "This  projioun    ia 

doubled  when  two  or  move  participles  are  united,    e.  g.    Acts 

II.  23.  tOAj]  ^AlSflgQ  tOAj*!  ^\^  ye  see  and  ye  hear-^  yet 
the  second  pronominal  mark  may  be  wanting,  e.g.  Acisl.  11. 

P         7  '»     7  xp  9v  7  xppp 

]»<^>«^  ^  ;i>*0  tO  Aj]  ^jlSQa^  |jiD  i^'/^y  5towc?  ye  and  gaze 

towards  heave?i  ?  ". 
A.  183.  23.  3.— After"(§  65)",  add:  ''Barh.  120,  5.  loCTl 

Uco  he  hates  (  §  65) ;  JE:/?^r.  I.  39,  E.  7.  |l>]o  ^Is  ^JjCO 
\l^  \LJ  V\  >  '^rn   1 0010  awtZ  ^oe/  ^e?^/^e<i  the  flocks,  but  Cain 


420  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

cultivated  the  land  \  Acts  XX.  11;  Barh.  275,  5;  very  sel- 

7 

domdoes  fD  stand  before  the  particijjle,  e.  g.  Barh.  280,  15. 

17  7  7  P 

16.  ^i*^;nV)  p  0001  they  fought-  or  J  with  looi  follow- 
ing,  e.  g.  j5ar^.  126,  8.  (OOl  ^ja>9  /^e  /ovetZ ;  or  with   fOOl 

~  I  p  7 

preceding,  e.  g.  Bzrh.  562,  14.  ^^il^?;  0001  they  direct]  ". 
A.   183.  25.   10.— After  "2",  add:  "  ^cis  II.  7.  12.  30;". 
A.  184.  5.   1.— After    "Eem.",  add:  "  Less  often  for  the  for- 

mation  of  the  imperfect,  (ooi ,  united  with    Aji]  or  fOOl   Aaf 

and  %M2i  {to  remain),  contributes,  in  connection  with  >  or  p 

7     P  I    " 

following  before  the  participle,  e.  g.  Barh.  597,  ;2lO  A-i|  /le 
told  a  falsehood  ;  468,  5.  |;«J     looi     ^aOIoAaI  /^e  ^oo/i;  up  a 

7     7         7         p  p 

W;  581,  rve**^  r^  •••^  he  limped  {conti?iued  hobbling)  *\ 
A.  185.  25.  9.— After  "19",  add:  "Rem.  The;?«r^.,  in  con- 

nection  with  (001  (which  then  precedes   the  ^ar^.),  forms  a 
periphrastic  imjjerative,   nearly   resembling  the  subjunctive, 

7   p       .         7 

e.  g.  Asseni.  I.  455,  ^^  AuOOl  knoiv  (scias) ;  III.  P.  1.  600, 

10^7  «k7ip 

18.  V.  E.  ^-a^r^  .oZuoOl  know  ye\  358,  10.  .oZuooi  ^'rOl 

m.     P 

doye\  even  without   |001 ,  but  with   the  personal  prorvoun 

7         1  • 

added,  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  40,  8.  Ajf  ;al...  ^e  dumb;    351,  22.  v. 

V-np  7-^p  ^''^ 

E.  Aj|  »!D0U  ^'^z've;  378,  10.  Ajf  looiO  —  \0£^  remain  — 
and  be  (Agrell.  Sujipl.  p.  25).     B.  T1\\q  optative,  e.g.  Assem. 

0   0         7  77■^  77  7 

III.  P.   1.   572,  6.  7;  568,  10.  lail]o  ^a:LALDO  :>CL.^ASd 

^  P  P         -x 

may  he  be fortijied  and  strengthened  by  God;  597,  lO.  fjjOlOl 

l4i>  may  Ids  memory  be  destroyed  [Agrell.  Suppl.  p.  32  )". 
A,  186.  8.   12.— After   "47",    add:  "  III.  2.    ^L^    OOCn 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  421 

t:^!'^^?  ^»N>f  Ol!^  ,^1  V)imo  they  who  were  accustomed  to 
bring  and  lay  him  down ;  ". 
A.  186.   13.  6.~ After  "  HavAov  ",  add  :  "  It  should,  however, 

X  7 

be  remarked,  that  •-»'r«,  in  the  above  named  connection,  is, 
for  the  most  part,  pleonastic,  and  that  besides,  the  fmite  verb, 
at  the  same  time,  contains  the  same  idea  within  itself  (cf.  the 
JjSitin  jubere,  ccBpisse,  and  the  Greek  apxecr^aty. 

A.  186.  23.  1.— After  "Eem.",  add:    "  Before  such  a  parti- 

7 

ciple,  yO  or  J  is  only  seldom  wanting;  indeed,  adjectives,  with 

a  participial  meaning,  are  united  with   ^  or  >  ,  e.  g.  wi-m  , 

7       7  '         -i  "  '       ' 

Acts  XX.    12.    •.ft.A*    ,.0    i^CJvra]    IX.    41.   f^^>  ,.0  ^Cjoav  \ 

Apoc.  XIX.  20.  ^LLl  p  ^wvTff ". 

A.  186.  30.  6.— After  "  I3'",  add  :  "The  part,  when  not  used 
as  a  noun,  takes  no  svffix,  but  always  permits  the  mark  of  the 
case  to  follow  with  the  objective  suf.,  e.  g.  Matt.  X.  40  ;  V. 
44;  Luke  X.  26;  XXII.  43;  John  Vl.  6;  VIII.  6,  7;  Burh. 
520,9-   125,  13". 

A.  187.  12.  8.— After   "bed",  add:  '' Ephr.  1.  82.  A.  7.  8. 

AuOOl    y-»lD?  //iarc  5/6y9^;  B.  2.  ZUOOI   ^TIIa.I^  //oy;  11. 

339,  A.  5 ;  III.  566,  A.  3  ". 

A.  187.  14.  4.  —  After  ^^9idus^\  add:  "and  culjectives  in 
^iVw,  ". 

A.  187.  14.  11.— After  ''timendus'\  add:  "  ^ssewx.  III.  P.  2. 
118,  IhkvCO   adorandus\  III.  P.  1.  536,   20;  iJar/i.  609,  10. 

0  7  0  7 

froNrsV)  laitdabili<^\  Assem.  II.  40.   |'=^\Vo  docibilis\  ". 
A.   187.  26.   1.— Before    '' by\  add:    "a  vcr5   united   with   a 
part,  may  either  follow  in  the  ivfin.  with  ^  ,  e.  g.  JbAn  III. 

30.  ^.nV^S  wi^O  'i^;!^!^  l)o  OCT  Oot!^  he  must  increase 
but  Iriiust  decrease  \  Barh.  6,  5.  v.  E  ;  205,  8  ;  or  in  the  fut. 
with  J  preceding,  e.  g.  J5ar/i.  476,  9.  ]^Aj>  |J0  h^   must  be 


422  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

called  \  Luke  XII.    12;  XXII.  37;  and  impersonalhj^  e.  g. 

Assem.  I.  70,  17.  ^^^Q^  tJDjl  one  must  knoiv^  ". 
A.  188.  2.   10.— After  "4",  add:   *' ;  with  the  ^^^  following, 

e.g.  Assem.    III.    P.  11.220.    jk^lZZj  \oj]    one  must  say  \ 

Barh.  410,  12.  "HiD  it  is  fit '\ 

A.   188.  12.  2.— After  '' participle "",  add:   "united   with  the 
personal  j)ronoun  ". 

A.  190.  4.  1.— Before  "  LV.",  add  :  "*QOlJ'  ^  ". 

A.  190.  5.  2.— After  "  following",  add :    "e.g.   Num.   XIV. 

2.  *2)oA»]  .Zu^   Othatioe  had  died'\ 

A.  190.    13.   1. — After  "when",  add:  "in  connection  with  a 
noun^\ 

A.  190.   16.  5.— xVfter  "3",  ..add  :  '' Eplir.W.  1.  A.  5.  6;  12. 
C.  3.  4.     Also,  instead  of  "it",  in  same  line,  add:  '*the  ex- 


7  7 


pression  j  ,^il  ^So". 

A.   190.   17.   10.— After  "brother",   add:  "Also   *QC31  (from 
^OlI)  is  found  in  Ephr.  III.  593.  B.  6  f .". 

A.   191.  2.  5.— After  "you",  add:  " i?ar^.  447,  4 ;   Ephr.    1. 
40.  D.  7;". 

A.  191.  3.  4.— After  "him",  add:  "  Apoc.  XYIII.  7;". 

A.    191.  7.  4.— After  "generation",   add:    '' Barh.  115,    5; 

Ephr.l.   124.  C.  3;". 
A.  191.  9.  13.— After  "  us  ",  add :  ''Assem.  1.  431;". 
A.  19!.  25.   13.— After   "him",  add:  "26.9;   167,  13;  251; 

Assem.  1.  28.  8.  v.  E;". 
A.  192.  25.  5.— After  "9  ",  add  :  ";  Ephr.ll.  20.  C.  I;  118,F. 

5;   125,  E.  4;  Ephr.  I.  9.  E.  5". 
A.  103.  16.   13.— After  "37,"   add:  '' Assein,   1.38  (not  II) ; 

«v  7 

174,  4.  V.  E.     Hence  OOl  is  often  put  for   Ajf  ,  cf.    Tychsen 
Elem.  Syr.  48,  4.  v.  E.  Aioa)  OOl  thou  ivho  hast  given -^   49, 

.  I  7  4v 

3.  A.ftJD»  —  001  tliou  who  hast  united  :^\ 


ADDITIONS   AND  CORIIECTIONS.  42b 

A.  193.  22.  9.— After  *' hirn  ",  add:  "Here  also  belong  in- 
stances  in  which  writers  designate  themselves  by  chang- 
ing the  phraseology  back  again  from  the  1  plur.  to  the 
1  sing.^  e.  g.  Barh.  513.  4.  v.  E.  '*. 

A.  194.  3.  12.— After  "11",  add :  « J^j^Ar.  II.  316.  A.  l.'\ 

A.  194.  5.  10.— After  "  20  "  add  :  "  Acts  V.  40  ;  Ephr.  I.  28 1, 
B.  1  ;  293,  A.  4;  II.  207,  B.  3;  232,  C.  7;  484,  C.  4.  5.". 

A.  194.  14.  9.— After  "8",  add:  ''Assem.  II.  400,  2;  Barh. 
74,  2.  3;  265,5;". 

A.  194.  15.  2.— After  "  2  ",  add :  '' or  part,  pass.,  e.  q.  Acta 
Mart.  II.  364,  1.  l2jQ>j  U^CdI  looi  *^>*^V^  who  was  clad 
ivith  a  white  stola ;  ". 

A.  194.   17.  6.— After   "29",   add:    "(also  with  ^  ActsY. 

3);". 

A.  194.  20.   12.— After   "10",  add:  "  ^pjZf  to  be  estrang- 
ed, e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  1.  C.  5,*'. 
A.   194.  25.   13.— After  "33,"  add:  "  Eem.  The  prepositions 

LCl^  and  fU»  are  found  in  connection  with  the  last  two  cases 
(  y  and  d),  and  especially  in  connection  with  personsJ'\ 
A.  195.  3.  6.— After  "  A.",  add :  ''Barh.  288,  12 ;  Assem.  I.  303, 

12;  ^c-^s  II.  30;  4.  1.  USd  ^So  to  speak]  also   the  Pass. 

e.  g.  Ephr.  II.  229,  B.  3.  ^Ci^AkSD  »ria>*Z|  to  think  to  re- 
fiect ;  ". 
A.   195.  7.  5.— After  "14",  add:  ";  II  Sam.   IV.  5;  Ephr. 

I.  81.  B.  1.2;  Barh.  555,  13.". 
A.   195.   11.   11.— After  "  6  ",  add  :  "  ^'/^Ar.  I.   131.  E.  5;  III. 

5(0.  F.  4;  570,  B.  1.  2;  Assem.  I.  239,  3-5;  Barh.  327,  10 

(cf.  §  54,  B.  1 ).". 
A.   195.   12.  7. — After  "■  accusative  ^\  add:  "  of  the  person  and 

thing.  ". 

A.  195.  19.  3.— After  "  10",  add:  "  Fa.  and  Aph.  fn-ra  ^Si^^, 
e.g.  Ephr.  III.  570.  C.  3.  |aj^Q»  ^^OlOxSiAiJ  he  zmshed  to 

c/othe  him  with  glory,  I.  20.  A.  5;  SL^  I.  127,  E.  6;  *,^jX2l 


III.  569,  A.  2.  3  ;  ." 


-^^.-^ 


424  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

A.  105.  25.  7.— After  *^32",  add:  ''  Ephr.  I.  389,  D.  3;  II. 
316.  F.  2;    20.    D.  4.      Here    belong    also     ^:i£D,    e.  g. 

7        7 

Assem.  I.  75.  7.  8 ;    ^>ol,  e.  g.  II.   372,  5.  6.  v.  E.". 
A.  195.  26.  9. — After  ''signification",  add:    "in    respect  to 

persons  and  things.". 
A.  196.   12.   13.— After  "  E.",  add  :  ";  Ephr.  II.  20.  D.  2.". 
A.   196.  16.  7.— After  "  III.  l.",add:  ";  Ephr.  11.  20.  D.  3.". 
A.  196.  26.   11.— After  "43  ",  add:  "^c^s  III.  4.  5;". 

A.  197.  1.  1.— After  "16",  add:  "  *Q  ^ij  to  blush  on  ac- 
count of  something]  Ephr.  III.  571,  B.  5.  6  ;  ". 

A.  197.  4.  1.— After   "  13",  add:  "  *Q  ^\\  to  punish;  Ephr. 

I.  40.   C.  6;  ". 
A/  197.  14.  2.— After  "  one  ",  add  :  "  Ephr.  I.  312.  A  ;  ". 
A.  197.  24.  4.— After  "  23",  add :  ";  Ephr.  I.  228,  A.  2.". 
A.  198.   1.  12.— After  "  19  ",  add  :  ''-.Ephr.  I.  85,  2.  3  ;". 
A.  198.  7.  9.— After  "him",  add  :  ";  Ephr.  I.   117,  E.  3  ;  II. 

339,  B.  7;  II.  209,  A.  I ;  I.  84.  D.  3.". 

A.  198.  9.  11.— After  "e.  g.",  add:  '' \Ephr,  I.  330,  B.  8 ;  L 
40,  B.  2 ;  ". 

0  0 

A.  198.  15.  4.— After  "  sons  ",  add:  ";  and  looi  V ,  Barh. 
562.  10.  P  OlL  '\0CIU  he  will  not  have.  Also  OlL  Aj]  may- 
signify  he  has  written — is  an  author^   e.  g.    Barh,    19.    Aa] 

0    0  •« 

IidAo  Craii  he  has  written  a  hook]  or,  it  is  permitted  to  him^ 
e.g.  Assem.  III.  1.  151,  5.  «21^]SQ^  ^j^  bS\  it  is  permitted 

7 

to  us  to  learn  ;  with  ^>Q^  =  to  belong  to  one^  e.  g.  Barh.  442 

12.    ISdJ^O  Ul\n\  A^lj  all  which  belongs  to  him  {Agrell.Y\ 
A.    IDS.   19.  8.— After '' 9  ",  add:  ''Ephr.  11.  209,  A.  1;". 
A.   199.   1.  5.— After   "evil",  add;  Ephr.  I.  83.    D.    7;  24. 

A.  8;  ". 
A.   199.  4.   11.— After  "  18"  add:  ''Passives,  e.g.  Ephr.  II. 

201,  F.  3;  I.   125,  D.  1;". 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  425 

A.   199    22.  7.— After*- him",  add  :'' Ephr.  I.  318,  C.  5;". 

A.  200.   1.  13.— After"  13",  add:  '' Ephr.  I.  6.  D.  6  F.  3;". 

A.  200.  5.  6.— After  "thee",  add:  ''  Ephr.  I.  117,  B.  4;". 

A.  200.  6.  2.— After  "signification",  add:  '' Ephr.  I.  123, 
F.  4;". 

A.  200.  12.  3.— After  "  6  ",  add  :  "  also,  finally  ;/)  verbs  of  mo- 
tion  after  or  against^  e.  g.  |Z|  ,  ^ri\TO  ,  ZUj^J  ,  .naj  etc. 
So  also  ^.1  ^CLO  to  stand  up  against  any  one^  e.  g.  Acts  IV . 

r  I  7  r       Q 

I  ;     \y^  5>a»>)  to  lift  up  against,  e.  g.  ^c^5  IV.  3 ;  ^  ]*j^ 
^0  wa/»;e  aw  assault  against^  e.  g.  Barh.  305,  4.  v.  E  ;  41 1,  2  ; 

417,  (cf.  5.  Agrell.  p.  63.)". 

A.  200.  28.  1.— Before  ";I  Tim:\  add  :"  and  >Aa  ^, 
e.  g.  ". 

A.  200.  28.  8.— After  "22",  add:  "j  Ephr.    1.    30?,  F.    1  ; 

418,  B.  2.". 

A.  201.  19.  9.— After  " following  ",  add:  "  and  so  that,  after 

7 

the  first   ( fOa  ),   the  jut.^  with  j  preceding,  follows,   e.  g. 

Ephr,  I.  118,  F.  3.  4.  *|ooiJj  —  ,ri2)  he  permitted  —  to  pro- 
ceed] or  with  the  copulapreoeding  the  finite  verb,  e.  g.  Ephr,  II. 

■(K  7  7 

212,  A.    7.  8.   wiCnOnn^O — f02i  he  permitted  him  — to 

dress -J  even  without  the  copula  preceding,  e.  g.  ". 
A.  201.  21.   11.— After  "itself",  add:  "  Assem.  I.  84,   11 .  12. 

*>    *-  p        ''  .. 

.Qj|  |p»  ji^a  lie  permitted  them  to  throw  ;  with  ^  before  the 
V         "      •  '      \  ' 

infin.  e.  g.  J:55em.  III.  P.  1.  598,  7.  8.  j^lSOl    0^03   they 

permit  to  make.     If  the  finite  verb  follow  in  the  3d.  p/wr.,  it 
may  be  considered  by  some  as  impersonal,  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  372, 

9.  aiQui^j|0  Lf02i  I  commanded  that  he  should  bow  doun. 

'  7   7 

The  same  holds  good  in  respect  to  >r»  ,  e.g.  ". 
A.  201.  22.  5.— After   "14",    add:    ";  213.    12.    OiAI^do 
jfB   he  permitted  to  put  him  to  death]   173,4.   Ol,^\   j,a 


426  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

Jte  yermiited  to  seize  him ;  Matt.  II.  16.  v*4^  >r*  ^^^  'permit- 
ted to  ldll\  consequently  it  should  be  remarked  that  the  idea 
of  co7nmanding  even  is  often  included.     Often  also  a  noun^ 

9 

instead  of  ayZ;2zY^  ve'r*^,  is  found  with  pO£5,  e.  g.  Barh.  165, 
I  0.  ,.Q2)  jsQ^i^  Ol^  he pe^'mitted  him  to  dress  [ordered  Itirn 
a  dress) '^  and  sometimes  jSd")  also  takes  the  same  significa- 

X  7  p  7  7      •« 

tion,  e.  g.  E2)hr.  II.  212.  A.  7.   8.    »a01QjA^1o    jolSD    -pk)! 

i/ie  king  permitted  to  carry  him  in.  " 
A.  202.  2.  7.— After  "  11."  add:  '' Ephr,  II.  220,  B.  4;  221. 
A.  6.  ^  is  also  found  before  the  finite  verb,  e.  g.  Ephr.  III. 

567.  B.  8,  C.  1.   ^^.ZkoAk)    .ooiAi>an\   0^00]^-^  o/^/iose 

who  had  lost  their  clothes  were  they  sought " . 
A.  202.  10.  3.— After  "28",  add:  "  ^c^5  III.  13;  Ephr.  III. 

571.  B.  1;  I.  2.  B.  1.". 
A.  202.  14.  5.— After  "prayers",  add  :  ''  Neh.  I.  8.  Here  also 

belong  " . 

I     7    * 
A.  202.  15.  8.— After  "  15",  add:  '^j^joAsl  to  pro??iise,  e.  g. 

II.  Fet.  II.  19;". 

X         7      -n 

A.  202.  18.  5.— After  "3,  5",  add:  "  ^OsiZI  todrinh\  e.  g. 
Barh.  322,  14;  333,  6.  v.  E  ;  ". 

A.  202.  26.  7.— After  "  etc.",  add  :  " ;  M^liZ]  to  bestir  one's  self, 

7      7       -n  777 

e.  g.  Barh.  213  ;  r^j2]  to  unite  one's  self,  269,  5.  v.  E ;  ^^2^2] 

to  mutually  accuse  themselves,  e.  g.  Assem.  III.  P.  II.  457,  7.". 

A.  203.  4.  2. — After  "  etc.",  add  :  "  The  same  is  true  in  respect 
7  i»  y  "^ 

to  ^1]  [to be  removed) ,  e.  g.  Barh.  312,  8;  fC^\  i^tobeldlled)\ 

r>2l,  13;  *£lIi£D  {to  be  brought  forth)  ,  Assem.  II.  183,  16.  v. 
E;  >^^^  {to  be  forsaken),  Barh.  271,  13.". 


ADDITIONS  AND   CORRECTIONS.  427 

A.  204.  3.  3.— After  "  9  ",  add:  "  by  JoLm]  ,  e.  g.  Acts  V.  9. 

Qo-CniSoL     .0Aa0A*]>     ^dD     rl    uTL    (Tvve(pcjV7J}:7j    vixlv 
TTElpdoat  ;  ".    ^ 

A.  204.  19.  6. — At  end  of  liein.  add  :  •';  or  when  synonymous 

verbs  are  united  together,  e.  g.  Asseyn.  I.  32, 1.  \^\D0  "{l]  he 
came  (ivent)  and  arrived \  Barh.  570,  11.  476;  371,  12.". 
A.  205.  4.  7.— After  "etc.'^  add:  "jmore  frequently, like  the 
noun,  it  is  considered  as  absolute  without  a  svfflx  preceding, 

7  I 

c.  g.   Matt.  XXII.  25.  0001  Aa]  they  were  \  Barh.  287,  1. 

..  7  X  f 

^0C\  Au|  they  were\  seldom  does  looi  precede,  e.  g.  Barh. 

7      10  p 

94,  7.  ..jkCloA-i]   (OOl  he  iuas\  sometimes  ]oai  is  wanting  for 


V 


marking  past  time,  e  g.  Assem.  I.  34,  8.  v.  E.  ^aZu]  ^  as  I 

7        I  0        7  t\  i\  0-7 

luas',   Matt.  II.  9.  waCToAj*])  ]ju\  ^  ^^  ]A^  over  the 

place  ivhere  the  child  was.  Also  the  expression  ]ooi  La\  is 
used  in  the  absolute  without   taking  the  gender  and  number 

0  ^0^0 

of  the  following  noun,  e.  g.    looi    A^f    fZo-i^-^a    it  icas  a 

combat-^  Barh.  2SS,  4.  ]-^Sd1    ^ySQl    ]oGl    La]  there  laej-e 

20  Emirs',  415,  3;  221,  10;  MarkXV.  25;  II  John  verse  12; 
but  the  resfular  union  is  the  most  common,  e.  g.  John  IX. 
16;  I.  39;^XIX.  14  i  Luke  XXIII.  44.  {Agrell.  p.  6)." 

I  0 

A.  205.  5.  1.— After  '•  Eem.",  add  :  "  La]  and  ]ooi  with  ^  before 
the   infin.   following,   mark   the  Latin  gerund,   e.  g.    Matt. 

XXVI.  35 ;  Acts  XXVIL  2;  Zu|  has  also  the  fut.  following, 
e.  g,^c^5XXVIL26.". 

A.  205.  11.  3.  —After  "27  ",  add  :  "So  also  ]6oi  is  pleonastic 

after  U  in  a  mere  negation  or  negative  question  (  nonne  ?  )  , 


428  ADDITIONS  AND  CORIIKCTIONS. 

e.  g.  Ephr.  1.2i,I>.   8.    V     ]nm\0    U^(     a»'r^^|    UM 

.07  0 

GlSd>    1 001    the  trees  and  plants  were  not  created  at  the  same 
time  with  the  earth  ;  24,  D.  1  ;  26,  B.  3.  F.  2f.". 

A.  205.  16.  1.— After  "17",  add:  "The  apocopate  M  ]oiJ 
sometimes  takes  the  signification  of  the  subjunctive^  and  the 

aorist  if^n-j  =  Kal  eytvero  is  translated  by  >  fOOl,  or,  instead 
•  t- 

7       T>  0  7 

of  J  we  sometimes  find  O,  e.   g.  Luke  I.  59,    oZjO — JOOIO 
tltere  they  came ;  also  by  omitting  j  or  O,  e.  g.  Mark  I.  9. 

12]   "looiO  there  he  came\  Luke  I.  22;  V.  17.     Often  how 

ever,  [001  remains  untranslated,  e.  g.  ilfa^^.  IX.  10;  Jfar^ 
IV.  4;  Lukel.  23;  11.  46.". 

A.  205.  26.  1.— After  "Eem.",  add:  "Besides  jk)|,  the  ^er^5 

P  17  1\  0  Q  7 

U^,  ^a^a,   ^]«,  ]l£),  ];0,  .TiAs)  also  belong  here." 
A.  206.    4.    11.— After    "97,  1",   add:    "  ;  Ephr,  I.  85,  C. 

5.  6.". 
A.  207.  17.  7.— After  "  44  ",  add  :  " ;  Ephr,  I.  267,  C.  3  ;  III. 

PP•X'^*.  PO*w 

589,  D.  1.  ISQQDOriij  {j^O,  lovely  breezes;  ActsYl.  11.  ]2ijQ..j 
U-lD  blasphemous  words  ;  or  without  J  with  the  construct  state 

preceding,  e.  g.  Ephr.  II.  208.  C.  4.  5.  (*JQI5  w»j]Sd  xy^^ 
o;i  account  of  the  holy  vessels ;  F.  3.". 

A.  208.  1.  3.— After  "box",  add:  ''Ephr.  I.  283,  A.  7;  295, 

F.  5 ;  ". 
A.  208.  3.  1.— After  "pillar",  add:  ";  Ephr.  1.  122;  A.  3; 

0     0       7         0         7  P     ■« 

without  3  ,  e.  g.  Ephr.  IT.  208,  F.  3.  Ijuj.JO  ]i]\2i  jco]  aw 

troTi  and  brazen  chain  \  II.  227,  C.  4.  5;". 
A.  208.  13.  5.— After  "household",  add:  '' Assem.  I.  386;". 
A.  208.  14.  1.— Before  "some",  add:  ";  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  397; 

405,  17;  Barh,  278,5.  6.". 
A.  208.  17.  7.— After  "13",  add:  "  The  relation  of  Tzwrwi^-r  and 

time  is  marked  by  the  noun  used  as  an  adjective,  e.  g.   i?arA. 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  429 


* ,    r         ^0      r 


134,  1.  CJly^^o  "U*.'^  IJ  months-  Acta  Mart,  II.  348,   12. 

t>    0  •'  7  0        7 

]ASDa»j  ]tl»  a  full  year  {lit.  of  days):' 

A.  208.  26.  9.— After  «  167,  1  ",  add :  "  Ephr.  I.  310,  F.  5; 

320,  D.  5  ;  ". 
A.  208.  28.  2.— After  "91,  2  ",  add  :  "  Ephr.  I.  420,  E.  8;  ". 
A.  209.   1.  2.--After  ''freeman  ",  add:  "  Ephr.  I.  84,  B.  3  ;  ". 
A.  209.  2.  6.— After  "  heretic  ",  add  :  "  On  the  contrary,  Ephr. 

II.  227,  F.  3  ;  ". 

A.  209.  3.  a-^After  "20",  add:  ";  Asse)}t.  III.  P.  I.  449,  14; 
408,  12.  13.". 

A.  209.  7.  7.— After    '^  14  ",  add  :  "  Ephr.  I  1.  D.  1 ;  ". 

A.  209.  11.  13.~After  "32",  add:  ";  Barh.  448,  9.  OISdoI 

7  17 

Jili  en  the  same  day\    180,  8.  •.A^))  \^  again^  anew\  289, 

10.     It  (  ;q  )  also  corresponds  with  the  the  Latin  natus^  in 
designating  age,  e,  g.  Fhil.  III.  5  ;  Luke  II,  42." 

A.  209.   14.   11.— After     "free",  add:    ";  Loi  bpa  vnfe\ 

(V>iO    L\^    holy    virgin    ( nonne )  ==  nata^  in   giving  the 
age;  ". 

A.  209.  26.  2.— Before  "  Luke  »,  add  "  and  f^ ;  ". 

A.  209.  27.  2.— After  "0",  add:   ''Matt.  X.  25;    XIII.  17, 

52;  Barh.  180,3;  441,3;". 
A.  210.  3.  7.— After  "XIX.  2",  add:  ";  Barh.  516,  7;  ". 

A.  210.  7.  4.— After   "16",  add:  ''Ephr.  I.  308,  D.  3;   II. 

20.  F.  2 ;  ". 
A.  210.  8.  4. — Before  "sometimes",  add :"( more  frequently 


^     I 


by  laauS)  ." 
A.  210.    18.  5.— After  "  Persia  ",  add  :  "  ;  Acta  Mart.  II.  343, 

11.  12,  V.  E.     With  5  preceding,  it   {L»J^)   forms;    pat,- 

7  7  " 

rynyniics,  e.   g.  Asse^n.  III.  P.  I.  426,  19.   ilcolflD  A^Oj  a 

7  7  -^ 

Saeanide;  Barh.  580,  1.  ^ri£il  Z\a.S>  Ahbasides:' 


430  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

A.  210.  23.  3.— After   "hydraulics",  *' add  :  *' Here  are  also 
found  compounds  with     f,^  and   Tr^y  in  the  p/ur.,  e.  g. 

Assem.  III.  P.  II.  693,  14.  v.  E.  IZ^lj  OUylu  the  congre- 
gallon  of  a  church ;  Barh.  235,  4.  OlAa.O  ^.i^J^  his  family ; 

^%P        7  7  7  •     £»       7  * 

106,  4.   ll.».>*    •-»V^\  soldiers\  \d\b  with  the  mark   of  the 
case  preceding  =  the  remainder. '''' 
A.  211.  24.  9.— After  "  etc.",  add  :  "Rem.  Ahtro,cts  formed  from 

concretes  take  the  ending    ]Zq,  e.g.    ]2qaj)    (from  *aj|) 

humanity  \  ]2q»»  A.\a  embassy  (from]N»  iNt));  ]Zqa1D0CTIj 

if^e  Roman  power  or  a  person  ivho  is  a  Roman  (Rofnerthum, 
lit,  Romandorit, )  etc.  In  addition  to  these,  there  is  sometimes 
added,   a   concrete  explanatory  term,  e.  g.  Assem.   II.    177. 

P  P    -X  17  P   -X  £>    -X 

JaSdoj  fc\AOo|  (Zo>V)Om>  Romandom^  \.  e.  a  Roman. 
More  frequently  abstracts  are  used  in  ^i^/es,  e.  g.  J.sse?/z.  III. 

P    -X  7 

P.    I.    372,    15.     y.ZQ.a-ikA    thy    royal  majesty;    598,    2. 

*.  -X  7  7 

«QsZqa^.\V)\  ?/ow7-  highness-^  303,  17.  v.  E.  etc.    A  change 

or  exchange  of  gender  does  not  occur,  when  the  container 
(vessel)  stands  for  the  contained  or  the  place  for  those  who 

7    -n  0      9 

live  in  it,  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  160,  8.  A^O  —  ]l)]  ^/ze  inhabitants 
of  the  land — went  in  \  Barh.  510,  7.  82,  8.  Sometimes  the 
sing,  and  plur.  are  found  near  each  other,  e.  g.  j5ar^.  588, 

*.  *.  I7P7  1»  P** 

7.  .001-^  ^"5uJDj]j  1>Z]  .n\m  ]ircl>»L  all  the  inhabitants 
of  Arbela  went  up  into  the  fortress^  (  cf.  Agrell.  p.  165  )  ." 

A.  212.  2.  2.— After    "new",    add:    "Rem.     The  w^w^^r  is 
also,  sometimes  designated  by  the  mascidine^  e.  g.  II  Cor.  V. 

P  17 

10.  ^^dyaSov;  Ga/.  IV.  18.  ;aJ2l*  KaAoi ;  717a«.  XXVII. 

23.  ^AjlO  KaKov ;  hence  it  is  difficult  always  to  decide  which 
gender  is  really  used,  still  it  can  be  definitely  determined,  in 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  431 

most  cases  whether  the  feminine  is  employed  for  the  neuter, 
although  there  is  no  fixed  law  perceptible  in  respect  to  it,  as 
it  ( the  neuter )  seems  to  arise  from  impersonal  expressions, 

*        X         f 

e.  g.  Acts  VI.  2 ;  on  the  contrary,  see  Mark  VII.  2T.   |;^^« 
U",  etc.". 
A.  212.  9.   11.— After  *'12",  add:  "Here  belongalso?7ia7-/j5q/ 

P  •»  7  0        7 

time  as  divisions  of  tim^,  e.  g.  Mark  I.  32.  |aSqs  .  >  ^\Kj^^ 
by  the  setting  of  the  sun ;  Ps.  L.   1 ;  Barh.  466,  2.     So  also 

or        JO        7 

we  find  in  Matt.  XIII.  48.  ISo*  wi,*^m\  cttI  t5v  a/ymAov , 

or  IASdqLd  an  oath',  Barh,  454." 
A.  213.  8.  1.— After  "  Canaanite  ",  add:  ";  Ephr.  II.  203,  C. 
8.  D.  1;  I.  310,  B.  1.  2.". 

A.  213.   10.  2.— After  ''noun'\   add:    ''Barh.  535   6;    ^cis 
VII.  30;  Gal.  IV.  24;  Barh.  602,  11  ;  ». 

A.  213.   12.  5.— After   "genitive",   add:  "with  j.". 

A.  213.   13.  5.— After  "  barley  ",  add  :  "  ;  ^ar^.  304,  2.  I^Jj 

yA*  II  jar)  a  5w5/ie/  0/  id;/tmi{ ;  522,  13  ;  524,  4  ;  299,  4.  v.  E. 
Also  between  the  principal  noun  and  the  one  in  apposition, 
B.  suffix  is  sometimes  found  attached  to  the  former,  e.  g.  Barh- 

■n   0     I  -K-x  *.  7       7 

225,  10.  ]vl^>0  llol  .0ailll4^  «wY7^  ^^ez>  /oo^/s  of  drachms 
and  denarii ;  or  several  words  occur  between,  e.  g.  Barh.  89, 

4.  5.  "looij  ^ASaK»0  llSofev*  Vf^*^  650  ;30wwc?5  o/"  gold. 
But  whether  synonyms  with  the  copula  O ,  could  be  properly 
considered  as  an  instance  of  apposition,  may  be  doubted, 
and  more  especially  when  w^e  refer  to  the  whole  subject  of 
the  union  of  nouns  of  a  similar  meaning,  e.  g.  Barh.  118,  13. 

0     0      ,    ••    7  i\*»y 

]ZaaiQSDO  U«?  gifls  and   donations]    298,   3;    521,    15. 

589 ;  322,  2  {  AgrelL  pp.  156,  157  )  .".    . 
A.  213.   19.  6.— After  "  19  ",  add:  "  ]  Ephr.  I.  18.  A.  6;  24. 

E.  1 ; ." 
A.  213.  28.  4.— After  "contents",  add:  '' Heb.  IX.  10;  Ephr. 

I.  282.  D.  1.  2;  II.  464,  E.  1  ;  Acta  Mart.  II.  346,  8; ". 


432  ADDITIONS    AND  CORRECTIONS. 

A.  214.  1.  4.— After  "v.  E.",  add:  '' Ephr.  I.  125.  D.  7.  8 ;  ". 

A.  214.  7.  11.— After  "9",  add:  "In  the  New  Testament,  and 
wherever  the  two  forms  appear  alike  together,  they  are  used 
promiscuously  without  any  perceptible  distinction  from  each 

other,  e.  g.  Luke  11.  13.  .ji.1*  ^Sd  and  XIII.  7.  llli  ^ 
suddenly.  Dififerent  Syriac  writers  recognize  this  peculiarity, 
e.  g.  Bark.  20,  4.  ^^.is  ^-i^^j)  &  19,  7.  8.  ^10>f]Il3  40 
years;  cf.  544,  13.  with  334;  596,  7.  with  b77,  15.". 

A.  214.  15.  7.— After  "001",  instead  of  "is",  add:  "  ^z., 
^aOI  /.,  pi.  tOJOl  w.,  ^.*.J01/.,  corresponding  with  the  Greek 
article  6,  i] ,  ^/.  ot ,  a2,  are". 

A.  214.  17.  2.— After  "It  stands",  add:  "  They  stand  ;"  also 
line  18.  W.  11.  instead  of  "  follows  ",  read  :  "  follow.". 

A.  214.   18.  9.— After  "  IG  ",  add:  "  Mark  V.  33.  IZAj]  ^3 

0  p         p  ..  I     » 

^Ol  but  the  wife  {^rj  6e  yvvrj ) ;  Matt.  XXV.  4. 1  ASll*.::^^ 

^J    ^aJCn    but  (they)  the  wise  {young  ivomen)   (  =  at  (Je 
(ppovLiioL ) ;  V.  8,  9,  11;". 
A.  214.  20.  2.— After    "whole",    add:    "  (^tyeVerovy^  6 
dv'^pcjnog ).     In  the  first  case  even  the  oblique  cases  are  prece- 
ded by  these  pronouns,  restoring  the  marks  of  cases,  e.  g.  Ltike 

7  7 

XVI.  21.    OOIJ  =  rov]   Matt.  XII.  13.    001^=  rai;  Rev. 

XVII.  1.  •aOlJ  =r7]g,  etc.  But  this  peculiarity  of  speech  is 
found  not  merely  in  the  translation  of  passages  in  the  New 

P       I     7  7 

Testament,  but  often  also  in  Assem.  e.  g.  I.   30,  2.  ^a.^^^  001 

•»>  p    ».       «^     p  • 

the  saint;  and  in  Barh.  487.  ]lQ'^0>  .QJOl  the  design,  etc.". 

A.  215.  9.  12.— After  "  16",  add  :  "  Ephr.  I.  314,  C.  2;  II. 
207,  B.  6;" 

A.  215.   13.  6.— After  "faith",   ad(i:  ";  Actsl.  15;    VI.  12; 

Ephr.  I.  314,  7;  439.  B.  6.  7.  D.  1." 
A.  215.   17.  8.— After  "50",  add:  ";  Ephr.  1.  IB.  4;   121, 

F.  7;    128,  0.  3;   II.  40.  D.  5;    153,  D.  8;   III.  570,  F.  8. 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  433 

A.  215.  20.   11.— After  "palace",  add:  ";  Eijhr.  11.  318,  C, 

4.". 

A.  215.  22.  5.— After  "  B  ",  add  :  "  (  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  392,  4.  5 
II.  330,  A.  3.  4;  B.  8.  9 ;  III.  567,  B.  3) ." 

A.  215.  26.  7.— After  "oath",   add:  ''Ephr.  III.  750,  E.  6 

1.  18,  A.  3;  119,  A.  5;". 

A.  216.   14.  4.— After  "earth",  add:  "  When  two  such  ^e«i 
lives  follow  each  other,  the  pleonastic  suffix  is  attached  to  the 

former   and   not  to   the  latter,    e.    g.    Acts  IV.  8.     liQl> 
M01QJQ2^t    0^^<>     \Lk;£CLt    Z\aO>    (a^aoo  ye  rulers  of  tlie 

people  and  elders  of  the  house  of  Israel^  hear!  ". 
A.  216.  21.  6.— After  "Jerusalem",  add:  ''Ephr.  I.  292.  E. 

2.  3  ;  ". 

A.  216.  25.  4.— After  "2",  add  :  ";  Ephr.  II.  220,  F.  7." 
A.  216.  27.  9.— After  "21",  add:  ";  more  frequently  with  the 

preposition  preceding,  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  85,  C.  2.  jAl  tQ^f )  ^iD 
of  the  riches  of  our  father  is  he  rich.^^ 
A.  216.  30.  2.— After  ^''  prophet ",  add  :  "  with  the  pron.  pre- 

9  0  7       -n      P 

ceding,  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  25,  B.  4.  «-»C71  loilS^j  ]>C71  that  is  the 

Op-n  OP  0  0  7  7 

itor/^  o/"  Go^;  III.  579,  C.    4.    5.  U-*^  t?    |j01    IiaDj   OOl 

^/izs  (  a  work )  o/"  nature,  that  of  design. ". 
A.  217.  5.  5. — After  "j",  add:  "  for  designating  the  author, 

as  in  Ps.  4  and  flf.,  or  when  a  drawing  audi  something  fixed  SiVQ 

thereby  expressed.". 
A.  217.  6.    11.— After  "Lord",  add:  "  ^c^s  II.  S4 ;  Ephr.  I. 

319,  B.  6.  7.  etc;". 

I         7 

A.  217.  9.  7.— After  "Franks",  add:  "  1  Kings  X.  18.  ^^JZio] 

Ti  P  7  0    0        0-  ' 

^    looij  gold  of  Ophir;  Ephr.  I.   119,  E.  2-5.  *|ZQ^la| 

•X  7  -n 

•OOla'jZ   ^iD'i  the  peculiarities  of  both  { the  water  and  fire ) , 

by  which  it  appears  that  >  before  -So  is  not  to  be  over- 
looked; ". 
A.  217.   12.   1.— After  "  Turks",  add  :  ";  jG^V^r.  I.  312,  E.  2. 

p-n-np..         *  *  7  17 

IIJioAa  VAa!i2)  ^Sd  *0>a  ^'f^\  ^^  ^"^^^^^  ^^^  Philistines; 


434  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

I.  131,  K.  7.     We  also  find  *Q  with  >  preceding  for  mark- 

ing  the  idea  of  place,  e.  g.  ]qqO  VpOrSoO)  iAoms  of  the 
(^ which  are  in  the)  desert. ''\ 

A.  217.   17.  7.— After  ''him",  add:  ";  Ephr.  III.  562,  C.  6; 
I.  121,  A.  I.". 

A.  217.  25.  4.— After   "20",   add:   "More  frequently  is  the 
^ewmz;^  expressed  by  of  from  (de)   (instead  of  which,  we 

«^    •"  7  0       r  p       7 

also  find  ^i^^^  and  ^),  e.  g.  Barh.  230.  ]nS^y  ]ci'^ 
the  history  of  the  hound -^  589,  5.  v.  E;  120,  3.  4;  by  since, 
after,  from  there  to,  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  236,  6.  v.  E  (Agrell.  pp. 
129,130).". 

A.  217.  29.  8.— After  "Egypt",  add:  ''Ephr.  I.  349.  B.  5;". 
A.  218,  5.  5. — After  "love",  add:  '';  or  the  genitive  may  he 


0    0         -*  7   *. 


used  in  the  ablative,  e.  g.  Barh.  285,  2.   (1  ilV)  wt'^Q^l  sma/^ 
in  number-,  268,  15;  229,  13.". 
A.  218.  6.   1.— After   "Rem.  ",  add:   "  As  ablative,  it  is  also 

often  used  to  denote  a  definite  time,  e.  g.  Barh.  314,  10.  \\£iQ^ 
^\oj  on  each  day.'\ 

A.  218.  9.  10.— After  "  12",  add:  ";  Ephr.  I.  318,  D.  9. 
10.". 

A.  218.  22.  5.— After  "  together  ",  add :",  where  usually  the 
personal  object  of  the  accusative  follows  the  dative.''\ 

A.  218.  23.  9.— After  "32",  add:  ";  yet  sometimes  the  posi- 
tion of  the  accusative  is  reversed,  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  84,  E.  2. 

7    ,  y       7        f^  -ts 

w>.\Sd^  wiASof  Aaoirfj  ^Aa/  i  7i(2?;e  ^i>en my  servant  to  my 
spouse;  but  if  \X\e  accusative  is  the  object,  it  usually  stands 

after  the  dative,  e.  ^.Acts  III.  3.    .O^Ajj    ]Ao>]    Cl^   ^/^ai 
^Aey  ^^^^  ^^  ^^^'^  alms. ". 
A.  218.   24.   1.— After  "Eem.",  add:  "Also  the  dative  more 
frequently  stands  for  the  genitive  in  nouns  indicating  rcore 

P    *.  7  0       7 

nearly  fixed  time,  Assem.  I.  2.    ]ZqqLSq^    ]AiaO  m  ^^r 

?/car  of  the  reign;  Barh.  13,  10.  ,  where  the  genitive  with  j 
merely  precedes ;  Barh.  13,9.  So  in  respect  to  the  names 
of  the  months,  «2  is  placed  before  the  day  of  the  month.". 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  435 

A.  218.  26.   10.— Before    "usually",    add:    '':  e.  g.  Ephr.  J. 

318.  E.  4.". 
A.  219.  7.  2.— After    "  ;  a  )  ",    add  :  "  ,  in  respect  to  fized 

places,  a)   adode  at  a  place    (where  ?),   e.  g.   Acts  V.  2^. 

C1m.Q»|    U    |;^Q0|    A.*^    .QJf  they  found  them  not  in  the 

prison;  V.  25;  i3).".  ^ 

A.  219.   18.   11.— After  "deep",  add:  ''Acta  Mart.  II.  360» 

13.  14;". 
A.  219.  25.  9.— After   "20",  add:  "  In  fixed  measures  *r5  is 

frequently  used,  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.   122,  C.  4.  D.  8.     Also  fixed 

geographical  degrees  are  expressed  by  the  accusative,  e.  g. 


0        7  0         P      P7 


Ephr.  I.  123.  B.  3.  ^.iJioZo  1|Sd  UcuSo  180°.". 

A.  220.  2.  2.— After  "6",  add:  "^c^sl.   16;  E2^hr.  I.  19.  0. 

6;  d)  infinitive  forms,  e.  g.  Barh.  443,  12;  Ephr.  I.  194,  D. 

1;  D.  4,  39,  D.  7.9.  0.  8.". 
A.  221.  8.  6.— After  "  21  ",  add  :  "  Ephr.  III.  591,  D.  2;  ". 
A.  221.   18.  4.— After  "Moses",   ^M:  ''Ephr.  III.  590.  E- 

5.  6;  I.  131.  D.  4  f.;  II.  223,  C.  7.  8;  I.  554,  D.  7.  8.". 
A.  221.  16.   1.— After  "Lord",    add:    "Less  often   does  it 

occur  with  the  marking  of  the  cases.". 
A.  221.  19.  8.— .After    "other",    add:    " ;  Barh.  57,  11;  38, 

6;  541,  11.". 
A.  222.  9.  5.— After   "  v.  E.  ",   add :   "  Ephr.  IL  227,  D.  8. 


7  P         P      7 


. .  1 1  f^;  Ujl>j  V*-^rO  ^^  an  army  which  was  greater  than 
the  first',  E.  1;  L  319,  C.  5.  6.  E.  5  f. ;  IL  239,  D.  1.  2;  L 
40.  A.  2.     Less  frequently  the  object  compared  occurs  with 

_Ld  before  the  subject ;  ". 
A.  222.   10.    II.— After  "man",  add:  "  ;  Barh.  359,  2.  3.". 
A.  222.   11.  7.— After  "very",  add:  "  *^^CD  much.'\ 
A.  222.   15.  5.— After    "12",    add:    ";  i?arA.  373,  9 ;  397,7; 

so  without  _k),  e.  g.  Barh.  536,  7;   129,  12;  particularly  in 

^  I  7  I       7 

adverbial  comparison,  e.  g.  Matt.  VI.  30.  '^L^  «t  .ifin 
ttoAaoj  iiaXXov.''\  ^ 

A.  222.'   18.  5.— After  "younger",  add:  "also  Barh.  325,  12. 
13;  Ephr.  I.  80.  B.  5;  63.  B.  2;". 


436  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

A.  222.  23.  13.— After   "forgiven",    add:   ";  sometimes  ^ 
is  used  with  j  following,  not  entirely  as  a  mark  of  the  geni- 
tive^ e.  g.  Assem.  11.  122,  6.  1q..j  ^k)    OIJOOJ    5»0j  Jns  be- 
havior is  held  up  as    ( compared   w^ith )    that  of  the  many 
even  with  the  insertion  of  a  pronoun  following,  e.  g.   Barh* 

84,    3.    .-aOlQrilj    »a01    _Ld    \^Lk   more,  than   that  of  his 
father 'j  but  also  in  the   signification,  than  that,  e.  g.    Assem. 

7     fy  t\ 

I.  239,  3.  4.  »^CQJj    ^Ld  more,  than  that  he  could  receive ; 
still  this    >    is    sometimes    also  pleonastic,  viz.  before  the 

prepositions    *Q    and  ^ ,     e.    g.    Barh.  489,  3.  4.  v.  E ; 

Matt.  X.  37.  wi.lj    ^    JaZu  more  than  me  \  John  III.  19. 
JaA^  paiQl^>  ^Sd  more  than  the  light ;  also  before  particles, 

■h       7  7  *  17 

e.  g.  Rom.  XIII.  11.  ^iSo^cn  ^Dj  ^^  'f^b^*  more  than  when 
we  believed,''\ 

A.  222.  28.  6.— After  "3",  add:  "Sometimes  o} ^instead  of 

^Sd  ,  stands  before  the  object  compared,  with  the   adjective 

■X     7  7  X  p     7 

or  verb  preceding,  e.  g.  Barh.  582,  13.   (jLki    Of    %a.^   >»»n<^ 

I  7         p  7 

JaAa  "IZqLd  cfm^/i  w  to  me  dearer  than  life',  Matt.  XIX.  24; 

II.  Pet.  II.  21.". 

A.  223.  4.  7.— After  "Apostles",  add  :  ".455m.  I.  261,  2.  3, 


noun 


]j^.>    (^A»V>  the  most  excellent  7nan  ( even  with  the 

following  in  the  singular);  ". 
A.  223.  6.  8.— After  "Judah",  add:  "^55ew?.  I.  306,  17.  18; 
even  merely  with  *Q  before  the  suffix,  e.  g.   Barh.  506,  4. 

tOCTLD   (OOI  *1DJJ  loho  luas  the  oldest  among  them;  ^\ 
A.  223.   13.   13.— After    "evils",   add:  ";orby  ^'i ,    e.   g. 

7      -X  P   7  -X 

Barh.  513,  1.  ^Ad)    "Joj  the  greatest  of  us;  or  with  ^^..arD, 
e.  g.  Assem.  I.  55,  1.  Am^^O  ^OS  ^Ae  holiest  of  all-,  ". 
A.  223.   19.  2.— After  "king",  add:  "  Ephr.  III.  586,  0.    3; 
569,  F.  1 ;  570,  A.  8;  11.  339,  B.  6;  316,  A.  8;  by  .adding  a 


ADDITIONS  AND   CORRECTIONS.  437 

Hynonymous  adjective,  e.  g.   Bark.  6,  4.    ]<^'">ri    ISo^j^) 

].i^iD  the  wisest  king.  .  Here  also  belong  the  duplication  of 
words  by  synomyms  of  the  same  root,  e.  g.  Assem..  III.  P. 

0       7    7  7  9  1. 

I.  333,  4.  5.    IAojqSdo    1A:Li*^   the  greatest  happiness-^  or 
words  of  a  difierent  root,  especially  of  adverbial  formations, 

I     P        I   f  7  7 

e  g.  Barh.  429,  5.  ZuUAoo    ^^.^t^    very  quick \  481,  9; 
A.  223.  21.  3.— After   ''3",    add:    " ;  by  ^'' or  ^j    fol- 

17  e*7     7 

lowing,  e.  g.  Barh.  454,  3  ;  by  w»-^  JKey.  XXI.  1 1.  ]/;r>>V> 

•->~^  ]Sm  ihe  most  costly  stone ;  by  Ito  and  the  7w?w?i  fol- 

lowing,  e.  g.  ^Coi^QD    IL^  the  highest  praise  (literally,  full 
of  praise )  . ". 

A.  223.  26.  10.— After  "mountains",  add:  ";by  (Ij  =  iz/ no 

.  means,  with  an  adjective  following,  e.   g.    i^/zr^.  606.    JQII 

P>  ^y  wo  means  small,  i.  e.   really  2;e;y  great.     Also  belong 
here  a  figurative  manner  of  expression,  e.  g.    ^Xi^iO    A^ilo 

PP..I7P7  • 

or  fAl^rSO)  |A.2i^Sd  tJie  queen,  i.  e.  the  most  important  fer son 
of  the  city,  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  531,  4.     Sometimes  we  find  a  cir- 

I       7  *  I  ? 

cnmlocution,  e.  g.    »a-i^CO  ^^    JaAj    ?7zore  ^/i«w  mvch,  i.  e. 

1*7^17  17  * 

very  much,  or  ^^Lo  *^^C0  •-»-iv^  ^^  much  and  {farther  ) 

move  than  muchy. 
A.  224.   10.  9.— After  '' Burh:\  add:  "20.4;". 
A.  224.   16.  6. — After    "cities",    add:    ";  sometimes,  in  the 

larger  numbers,  the  thousands  precede  the  object  numbered, 

-"  P    7  0     7  7 

in  the  emph.  St.,  e.  g.  Assem.  III.  P.  1.  421.   [m-^    XxJZl^. 

^A*(  60.000  Aorsmew;  Barh.  189,  14.  15.    (AmSU    |*f^^ 

^^  20.000  sow/5;  405,  1;  341,  11;  134,  \\.'\ 
29 


43S  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

A.  224.  26.  5.— After    "11",   add:  ''\Ephr.  II.   233.   C.   7. 

i-n  '^7  »P  I..  7 

^l*Zo  ^ZtiDO  *SLiv  ^aV^Oi   1290(?a2/5;  D.  8.  9.    With 

a  sw^a;  attached,  they  become  more  closely  connected  with 
(drawback  towards)  the  preceding  noun^  e.  g.  ^c^s  I.    24; 

.OOUjZ  ^^ai  o/'  botk  these  \    Ephr.  III.  570,  B.  3.  4 ;  571, 

A.  5.  6 ;  572,  E.  5.  6  ( cf.  ^  46.  2.   6.  Kem.  )  ". 
A.  225.  2.   11.— After  "11",  add:  "Rem.     The  ordinal  num 
bers,  fir  St  ^  second^   etc.,  following  each  other,  are  expressed 
either  by   a   numeral  a^ec^we  connected  with  O,  or  without 
the  same,  e.  g.  Barh.  240,  12-14.  16.  17  ;  or  so  that  the  series 

0    0       r 

begins  with  V»-^r^  and  the  ordinals   are  exchanged  for  the 
cardinals  with  >  preceding,  e.  g.  Barh.  5,  3-5 ;  or  so  that  for 

7  P  OX  0    1 

fi^rst,  pA*  m.,  Ir>*/.;  and  for  second^  Wt*A  ^2-,  |A;-js*|  /.,  are 

P    X  7 

used,  e.  g.  481,  15;  or  finally,  so  that  Pr**|  after  ^m  is  used 

in  all  the  following  ordinals,  e.  g.  Barh.  444,  14-16.". 
A.  225.  19.  5.— After  "third",  add:  ''Ephr.  I.  236,  D.  1.  2. 

J27,  A.  2;  E.  I.  F.  3;". 
225.  21.  2.— After  "86,  11",  add:  ";  Ephr  11.  221.  Rem. 

7.  V.  E.". 
Ai  225.  22.   1. — After  "  Rem.",  add  :  "  In  designating  years 

0        7  0  7  OP 

days  and  hours^  the  nouns  \L\A  |LdQa  ,  |Al«  stand  before, 
the  cardinals  in  the  emphatic  st.  with  j  following  ;  or  with- 
out  J  in  the  constr.  St.,  with  *0  preceding,  e.  g.  |aSQ>j 
^QjJO;    or  in  the  accusalive  without  *a,  e.  g.  Birh.  515, 

0  7  -X 

11.    |fiSD>A    ^Qj    in  the  fifth  day.     Nor  do  the  ordinals 
always  take  the  formative  letter  >  after  the  emphat.  St.,  e.  g., 

•n  -n   7  7       0  7 

Bark.  35,  13.   |YCQ,lftSn»j  jAlATD  z?2^/ie  \bthyear\  but  always 

0  7 

before  numbers  expressed  by  letters,  e.  g.  454,  1.  IjZ  ]AlaO 


in  the  Q07 fh  year;   138,  11.   12.   CTUJd)    AjaO  mif/ielll5/A 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  439 

year\  sometimes  without  any  letter  to  mark  the  year,  e.  g. 


Bark.  311,  4.  V.  E.  ^OOl    OlSiDZ|    -Aoi  tldi  occurred  in 
the  year  \Ub:\ 
A.  226.  3.  7.— -After  "  30  ",  add  :  '' Ephr.  II.  223.  C.  2;  ". 

A.  226.  6.   12.— After   ''week",  add:  "  Here  wo  find  J>OcLa 
with  the  numeral  added  and    |*^^*^  following,  e.  g.  Barh- 

0      7  f  ^ 

566,  7.  8.  12.  ]nm!D  p>*  VOa>.Q  on  the  first  dai/  of  the  week; 

0     7  9    Q  *- 

583,  8  ;  without  l^lmiD  ,  e.  g.  518,  3.    "|AiZ    ^a>^   on  the 

*<. 
third  day  [of  the  week)  \  with  ^Ql»^  omitted.". 
A.  226.^  8.  8.— After  "12,  v.  E.",  add  :    "  ;  Ephr.  I.  236.  D. 
2.     The  days  of  the  week  are  more  nearly  fixed  by  the  days 
of  the  month,  thus  the  day  of  the  week  is  more  nearly  marked 

•X 

by  ^Qli.O  ,  and  »Q  is  omitted  before    the  number  of  the 

•X  0  *s         9 

day_of  the  month,  e.  g.  Barh.  50,  9.  ^a^-O    •^.^wl     #01.00 

9  or  9  7 

|A»  ]jQa.lD  PkO^I  on  the  fourth  day  of  the  week  (  Wednes- 
day) the  Qth  of  Sanitary  \  566,  10.  11;  or  the  day  of  the 
month  stands  before  the  day  of  the  week  without  ^GLi  and 
is  thus  more  precisely  marked,  e.  g.  Asse^n.  I.  426, 14.  15.  OlO 

9    9         7  ox  r         Ti  9      7  7  -X 

lAlAo    ^rQjiJ     ^ja'HLQ    ]oaO    H^    ^Qa    on    the   3d    of 

April  on  the  first  day  of  the  iueek\  or  |*^^*^  is  wanting,  e.  g 

0"  9  9         0  9  7  %. 

Barh.    562,  5.   v.  E.  \»jr^  ^::^\^  "U^^^  ]flV)»i  ^O*^  on 

the  fifth  day  of  the  iveek  on  the  eighth  day  of  August ;  some- 
times also  ^Gu   falls  away  both  in  the  day  of  the  month 

9  7  7    p 

and  of  the  week,  e.  g.  Barh.  304,   10.  11.    ilOj|    01.^^5 

I  i>^      9  9         f^  9       7  \^ 

^ji  p£)  iQlOO   |;IS11  I'D  AS  on  the  morning   of  the  fourth 

0     7 

day  of  the  week  on  the  \Qth  of  December ;  even  without  l*"^**^ 

^  0  10  9     9       7  9  X. 

ill  Assem.  II.  266,  20.   IQ^isAo    ^aA^Z    |Ab^Zj    UHq  ou 


440  '  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

the  night  of  the  third  day  of  the  week  on  the  30^/i  of  July, 
Also  the  day  of  the  week  and  that  of  the  month  are  transposed, 
e.  g.  Barh.  548,  15.  16;  547,  3  ( cf.  Agrell  App.  II.  p. 
7  fi: )  .'•'. 

A.  226.   1 1.  7.— After  <^e.  g.",  add:  "  Ephr.  L  9.  B.  2;  ". 
A.  226.  17.   12.— After   "  8 '\    add:  «  .£>/ir.  III.  575,  C.  6  ;  ". 
A.  226.  23.  11.— After  "38",  add:  ''  Ephr.  I  85,  D.  1;". 
A.  226.  27.  6.— After    "24",    add:     '' Ephr.  I.  240,  A.  3; 
Assein.  I.  111.4;". 

A.  227.  3.  7.— After  "  time  ",  add  :  "  ;  or  in  Zu| ,  e.  g.  A*]AAZ 

for  the  third  tirn.e.^\ 
A-  227.  4.   1.— Before    "3.  Fractions",    add:    ''Rem.      The 

Iff         ?  I.    f   fi      ns  IP        I 

following,  ZutOpO,  AaU^jZ,  Lk\Lj^L  first,  second,  etc., 
are  a  formative  series  of  numeral  adverbs ;  also  feminines  of 

or  *«  7  or 

cardinals  with  >  preceding,  e.  g.  Ir**?,  ^^'^?)  A^Zj  etc.; 

or  0   1  t>      t>       I  '         ?      0    r  y  -« 

also  lAin^l,  ]A*r>*1,   IA^AjlIZ,  or  Aa.SdP,    ^,   ^O,    or 

ip7  i\     r    0  -^      0 

finally  AalLD^O,  ^)Ao,  ^-tr-^OI  united  by  the  copula^. 
A-  227.  6.  9.— After  "  VII.  2  ",  add  :  "  Barh.  256;  417,  8 ;  ". 

0 

A.  227.  8.  8.— After    "]r^",    add:    ''\Ephr.   I.  236  ,  F.  I; 
245,  D.  7.  IaSDa*    ^    ^    .1-  .     By  *.Aa    and  IZq-^Ls) 

P    -x        r 

(half),  is  I-  expressed,  e.  g.    Ephr.  II.  222,  D.  5.  ^lon* 

A.  227.  9.  I.— Before   "§79",  add:  ''Rem.    Among  the  un- 
determined numeral  relations,  are  o]  or,  e.  g.  Matt.  XVIII 

0    0  r  ti  7 

20.   (A^Z    o|     ^>Z  tivo  or  three;  without  o),  e.  g.  Barh. 


■h       r  y     y 


603,15.  16.  ..ak^A*  Moil /o?/r  or/ye;  217,   15.". 
A.  227.  26.  2  and  6.— After     "  The  ",     add  :    "  adjective  or  ", 
also  after   "first",  add:    " ixs  epithetic,  q.  ^.  Matt.  XIII.  17. 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  441 

{kiCiJ    H^Mr^O  many  prophets  \    Bark.    IGO,  5.  v.  E.   U-^ 

|A'1.^QD  many  words  \  ". 
A.  228.  8.  1. — After  "  teacher  ",  add:  "sometimes  j  is  found 
as  epithetic  before  the  adjective^  e.  g.  Luke  XI.  25  ;  or,  instead 

of  ?,    p  is  used,  e.  g.  ikZar/fc.  XII.  3;  Luke  XX.  10,  11,  and 

stands  'm  the  absolute   state   in  connection  with  a  preceding 
Tioun  in   the  enipkatic  state.    This  is  especially  true  in  respect; 

\  I  X  f  0      » 

to  the participk,  e.  g.  Acts  Vll.  56.  ^>»mA2)  ,.0  [iA^Qs  the 

17  7        7 

opened  heaven ;  i^arA.  83.  1 0.  ;^;0)  IkJQa  i/^e  co/t/  day ;  j1c/« 

XXVII.  41;  Barh.  286.  ISoij  lAoOjl  to  a  high  place ;  but 

when  with  a  j!?ar^.  thus  marked,  a  second  (part. )   is  united, 
5  falls  away  in  connection  with  the  latter,  e.  g.  Luke  II.  12; 


p 


T'lssewi.  II.  303,  23.  fr-^^O  ]p?  Xj^bSo  a  short  and  lim- 
ited timey. 

A.  ,228.  19.  4.— xifter  "adjective",  add:  ";  in  the  absolute 
stated, 

A.  229.  18.  6.  —After  "evil",  add:  ''It  should  still  be 
especially  remarked,  that  when  the  masculine  adjective  occurs 

with  or  without  (OOl  in  the  absolute  state  and  without  j  pre- 
ceding,  it  is  impersonal,  e.  g.  I  Cor.  XI.   13.  IZAjy    ]|u  is  it 

♦^  ■^    p 

becoming  for  a  woman  \    Acts  XIX.  36.  tO.'i\  Uo    ye  must, 
•X  .  ■  p    ♦>  p 

with  001  following,  e.  g.  ilia^^.  XVIII.  8.  9.  yj^  001  *£i4 
^^  w   ^ei^er  for  thee;  without    001  ,  e.  g.    Matt.   XV.    26. 

7         -n  I    7  p 

*^CQSd\  ^^a  ]J  it  is  not  proper  to  take ;  less  frequently  is 
the  feminine  used  and  generally  in  connection  with  the  jtwo- 

P       •«     7  1     9  .        . 

noun,  e.  g.  1  Cor.  VII.  26.  |;.».2is  l?01?  that  this  is  good\ 
Acts  XII.    9.  ^01    Zooi     \\^\»l  that  this  is  true;    Luke 


442  ADDITIONS  AND  CCRRECTIONS. 

XVIII.  25.  »a01    ]1a.^?  iJi^(^^  it  may  be  easier -^  also  withoul 

i\\Q  pronoun,  e.  g.  Tim.YL  7.   l^Jr-^O  a?td  it  is  certain  \  JBarh- 
531,  8.     MvSo    it  is  possible]  and  even  the  negative  phrase 

(>  r^  ]j  appears,  in  consequence  of  which,  we  also  find  ZoGI. 

But  the  /em.  adjective  stands  in  the  emphatic  st.^  when  the 
wei^^er  as  subject  or  object  is  indefinite,  e.g.  Ro7n.  VII.    13, 

13.  lA^^^*^^  dya'^Ov,  v.  21 ;  i?a?7i.  504,   14.  ]Aaa.Q  ^ 

|Ao4  {to  distinguish)  the  good  from  the  bad.     Also  the  jt?/wr. 

p..  p 
fern,   is  found  in  the  absolute  St.,  e.  g.  .T^'^.   III.  8.    ^^4? 

IS   •»>  i\  0 

^jlJ|  ^^iiNoi  =    ravra  kariv  ra    KaXd\    John  I.  50;  Kom. 

p..   ly        p  p»P  P 

VIII.  38.   f  r»Al>  l]o    ^SQ^r^?  ]]o     =  oi;re  evEorura  ovre 

fiEXXovra  (  cf.  Agrell.  Append.  )■'. 
A.  230.   10.  6.— After  "invalids",  add:  "^c^s  III.  9;" 
A.  230.  11.  7.— After  "312,7",  add;  ''Acta  Mart.  II.  394, 

21;". 
A.  230.  23.  7.— After  "  23  ",  add :    "  Also   the  feminine  col 

lective  names  may  be  united  with  iheplur.  masc.  of  the  ve7'b^ 

7  I         P  P    «^  ♦^ 

e.    g.    Barh.    238,  6.   0001  ^AwJ  —  IjQ..  ^^  the  great 

multitude  (of  your  horses)  ascended':  5 \0y  17.  18;  533,   13.". 

A.  230.  27.  10.— After    "8",    add:    "  ;  also   the  plur.  form 

stands  in  an  inverted  position  with  i\\Q>singular  verb,  e.  g. 

..17  PPP  P  PP  ..I? 

Ephr.  I.  18.   A.  5.  ^jlQ>  —  IAj^V^  Zooi  13  ^.y  ^^y  birds 

raise  the?nselves  (fly)  inflocks.''\ 
A.  231.  6.   1.— After  "  12  ",  add  :  '' Ephr.l.  10.  C.  8;". 
A.  231.   13.    1.  —After    "opened",    add:    ''  Ejihr.  II.  20.  D. 

I  ;  even". 
A.  231.  20.  12.— After  "porches",    add:   ''Ephr.  I.  40.  B. 


ADDITIONS  AND  COHnECTIONS.  443 

Aa  231.  25.  8.— After  "9",  add:  "  relating  to  an  object  in  tho 

neuter  gender,  e.  g.  Barh.  186,  16.  17.  \^}  »O0L*Z|  a 
denarius  was  given  \  even  the  fenn.  nonn  with  the  masc.  sing., 

e.  g.  i?ar/j.  118,  11.  Olbk  wiOloAalj  ]ZqJ-m  the  tent  which 
belonged  to  him ;  ". 

A.  231.  28.  3.— After  "walls",  add  :  '' Ephr.  II.   2.   B.  6.  7; 
I.  122.  F.  4  ;  ". 

A.  232.  8.  g. — After  "  writing  ",   omit  the  period  and   add  : 
"  (no  one,  of  course,  will  make  the  transcriber  responsible  )". 

A.  232.  14.  6.— After   "r*»^,  add:  "  hL  ^  ;\     * 

A.  232.   16.  5.— After    "  country  \,    add:    ''  Ephr.  Ill,  571, 

A.  8 ;  ". 
A.    232.    24.    8.— After  "  Egypt  ",    add  :   "  Ephr.   II.    464. 

C.  3;". 

A.  233.  6.  2.— After    "  10  ",    add :    " ;  and  vice  versa,  e.  g. 

Barh.  288,  7.  ]Aaa.O  ^\Sil\  IAajlQ  »a^j.»  it  was  custom- 
ary to  return  evil  for  evil.^\ 
A.  233.   10.  9.— After  "mankind",  add:  "  ^c^5  II.  41;", 
A.  233.   17.  7.— After  "  16",  add:  "  ;  Ephr.  I.  194,  B.  1.". 
A.  234.  21.  3.— After     "  eyes  ",    add  :    "  ;    Ephr.    II.    232, 

D.  2.". 

A.  234.  24.  8.— After    "eggs",    add:    "  ( cf.    Ephr.    I.    18, 

A.  5).". 
*A.  235.   13.  4. — After  "  granted",  add:  ";  perhaps  however, 

|1S£2aJ  should  not  here  be  rendered,  Jie  would  grant  ox  fulfil, 
which  mode  of  reading  is  found  in  the  parallel  passage  in 
Assem.  III.  P.  11.  126,  11.  12.". 

A.  235.  22.  6.— After  "A",  add:  "40,  A.  6;  318,  F.  3;". 

A.  236.  1.  2.— After  "230.  D ",  add:    ''Acta  Mart.  11.  349, 


T^  1^  ¥. 


25.  OlAxkO  oik:]©  0C71  lAAjQSQL!iD  ^Q«  he  was  baptized, 

he  and  his  mother  and  his  sister ;  ". 
A.  236.  2.  8.— After  'invited",  add:   ''Ephr.  II.  223,  B.  8, 

C.  1 ; ". 
A.  236.  8.  5.— After  "4",  add:  "  Ei^hr.  I.  311,  D.  4  ;  ". 


444  ADDITIONS   AND  CORRECTIONS. 

A.  236.  25.  3.— After   "  sorrow  ",   add  :   "  Eiohr.  III.  593,  B. 

6f.;". 
A.  236.  28.   11.— After  "nature",  add:    "When  several  sub. 

7 

jects  are  in  the  2d.  person  with  Aj]  preceding,  the  second 
plur.  follows,  e.  g.  Ephr.  11.  211,  D.  6.  7.  .oAaZu]  I'p^^ij^  — 

^jlMIO  Aj|  thou  and  thy  wife  have  {ye  have)  drunk  laine. 

Yet  one  of  the  subjects,  (the  most  important  one  )  is  found 
in  the  preceding  pronoun  of  the  first  person,  the  verb  follow- 
ing the  same  rule  (of.  Michaelis  Chrest.  28,  7.  9)". 

A.  237.  7.  9.— After  "hair",  add:  ''Actsl.  12;". 

A.  237.   11.  5.— After   "22",   add:  ";  Ephr.  11.  318,  E.  3; 

327,  A.  8;  I.  119,  E.  7;  126,  E.  1;   131,  C.  7;  40,  D.  6.". 
A.  237.   17.  9.— After  "  preached  ",  add  :  "  An  ellipsis  is  found 

in  Syriac  like  that  found  in  Hebrew  in  Jp^  ,  e.  g.  Ephr.  I. 


P  7  9  7         7 


320,  C.  2.  3.  looijj  ]|iQl,OaO  and  17 00  gold  coins ;  D.  8. 

P  *  I   ••   7  -n 

laCQSj  ^>\n^  70  silver  shekels.     So   the    noun  •-i<e-^2)  is 

ti     r 

wanting,  e.  g.    Barh.    2G,  4.    v.    E.    ^^A!^  in  two  parts ; 

I  -n  •»       7 

fully  expressed,  e.  g.  541,  10.  ^-kL^La  ^a)Aj^;  21.  8.    Upon 
yjOi,  cf.  §  78.  B.  Rem.". 

•   7 

A- 237.  23.    3.— After  "XXX.    1.,   add:    "  >ain    an    army 

P         7 

( 11  i  »t  )    to    collect    together-^    Barh.    107,    5.    6.;  so  also 

*  7 

^01£)1;   142,  5;". 
A,  237.  24.  3.— After"  12,"  add:    ";  Ephr.  I.  169,  C.  5.". 
A.  237.  24.  8.— After  "39,  11.  ",  add:  ''Ephr.   I.  89,  E.  1. 

2.4;". 

T,      7 

A.  237.  25.  14.— After  "19.",  add:    "  :>al«  to  die,   literally, 

0      7 

to  finish  (  \l^  ),  e.  g.  Barh.  252,  7;". 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.       '  445 

A.  238.   17.  5.— After  "sword",  add:  ";£/?/ir.  II.  100,  B;  I. 

319,  E.  8;   12,  A.  7.". 
A.  240.  11.  6— After   "out",   add:  '' Ephr.  222,  A.  1;". 
A.  240.   12.  6.— After  "again  ",  add  :  "  Ejohr.  1.  295,  F.  5.  6;*\ 
A.  240.  14.  4.— After  "again  ",  add:  '' Ephr.  II.  125,  B.  6;". 
A.  240.   15.  5.— After  "  again  ",  add  :  '' Ephr.  I  39,  E.  6  ;". 
A.  240.   17.  10.— After  "earth",  add:  '' Ephr.  I.  281,  D.  6.  7. 

Also,  Jl2)  to  turn  one's  self,  is  found  with  a  similar  signifi- 

cation,  e.  g.   Ephr.  II.    98,   E.  2.    .Qj]  «*t|  ]i2)  .001^ 

001  he  brought  them  again  into  activity ;  ". 
A.  241.  2.  8.— After  «  evil",  add  :  ''Ephr.  III.  592,  A.  3.  4;". 
A.  241.  7.  10.— After    "III.    8.",   add:   ";  Ephr.    II.    100, 

A.  4  (with  the  copula)  ,  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  82,  C.  5.  s^a"!  ]oot 
wftOU  ;£)0  ^r^J  as  he  had  named  him  before]  II.  212, 0.  2.  3; 
I.  439,  C.  7.8  ;  II.  203,  B.  5 ;  220,  0.  6  ;  also  the  passive,  e.  g. 


0    0  7  7 


Ephr.  I.  195,  D.  2.  y)ai;oll  2;i>o]Z)o  ASDjoZJj  ]A1sd 
^/ie  word  which  had  before  been  spoken  to  Abraham  ;  II.  221,, 

(Rem.  2.) ;  e)  ^<J\\  to  fiow,  ^QOlfCD   to  Jiasten,   for   quick, 

/i^s^y,  e.  g.    jE:/?/ir.    III.    569,   E.  4.  5.  OUk)  ^1  ^.^OlJ  he 

7  7  i>  7 

hastened  therefrom;  Barh.  73,  7.    oa;flD|0  »r:iOl;CD  he  cried 
out  quickly  (  exclaimed  )  ;  also  \^\e  passive,  e.  g.  -Ejo/^r.  I.    24, 

7  7  7  7  -R 

r.  3.  5;i^0  i^(3\\Lci:i\  he  fell  quickly  from  {hastened).     Fi- 

7 

nally ;  /)  -^'=^""  to  suffice,  for  svfjiciently,  is  used,  e.  g.  J^pZ'-r. 

•X  7«K-»7  X7  7  0 

II.    464,    F.   5.    .0C7l.i.S;DQlo\    Oi^S    QOaO)   ]]  ?Acy   r/eV^ 
wo^  ez;e?i  sufficiently  protect  themselves ;  *0;rD  ?o  approach,  for 

7    7      1>  7  7 

^ea%  a//?2os^  e.  g.  i?ar/j.  551,  11.  ».»JjAsZj  L^^Q  he  was 


446  •        ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

almost  confirmed     Ephr.  I,  169,  C.  1.;  •.»|o|   to  deal  basely^ 

^  •«  -x  Ty      ? 

for  base,  e.  g.   Ephr.  II.    128,  F.    2.  .O^^lZj    .oA^io]  ^e 
/iaz^e  dealt  basely,  etc.".  ' 

A.  241.  22.  2.— After  «  v.  E.",  add:  ''Ephr.  II.  232,  A.  1 ;". 
A.  242.  2.  6.— After  "  partly  etc.".  add:  ";  and  Ollo  Ijcn 

m.j    Cl^  (?^/«  ^^^y  (tf-  •Ag'rell.  Suppl.  p.  162),  e.  g.  J^arA. 

165,  1.  10.  [001  ^1  »>>  01^  pCT  /it;  t«7«s  very  much  beloved 


7   7        ■»  -n     ♦,         0     0 


587,  9 ;  -.  so  very,  e.  g.  ^arA.  232,  6.    jAjA]  OlLs  ]j01  /^e 
distinguislied  himself  so  very  muclr^  with  the  jo/wr.  following, 

7       7    *  *    #k  P    P 

e.  g.  jBarA.    122,  13.   0^]Z|  01^  ]jai  ^/z^y   t^ere  pressed 
very  much;  with   j  following  =  so  i^er?/,  ^Aa^,   e.  g.    Barh. 

7  .•1*'I7  «*.  pp 

411,3.  J  0001  ^fo..!^  01^  I J  01  they  were  so  much,  that; 


-»  ^      p    p 


with  the  fern.,  e.  g.  i?arA.  492,   8.  OliikO  ]j01  Amj;a  'n^a 
they  becaine  so  distinguished.     Also   the   adverb  is  expressed 

by  the /em.  Ol^  pOl  a//  this  ". 
A.  242.  7.  4.— After '"degrees",    add:    "424,11;    571,8.9; 

Evhr.  I.  379,  C.  5 ;  ". 
A.  242.  9.  2.— After  "there",  add:  ";  Barh.  574;  Assem.  III. 

P.  I.  130,  9  ;  c)  the  Latin  adverbial  ending  atim  is  expressed 

*p      ^      ^  p     «« 
by  the  nonn,  e.  g.  Barh.  424,  10.   JiSCLm  flSQ^j  handfid ; 

410,5;  334,  11  ,  etc.". 
A.  242.  19.  7.— After  "  this",  add:  "  Ephr.  II  9,  C.  2;  ". 
A.  242.  24.  2.— After  "  wish  ",  add  :  "  Ephr.  I.  169,  C.  6/. ;  II. 

5,  A.  4/". 
A,  243.  7.  4.— After  "35  ",  add  :  "  ;  something  doubtful  con- 

firmed  by  an  affirmation,  is  expressed  by   ..a-D  |iSdj^  ,    e.  g. 
Ephr.  I.  370,  (Jacob  of  Edessa )    ^^    P  r»Or^  ^©l*  ^^^ 

OP  ... 

llSO-^  did  not  Saul  somehow  know  David  ?   Ephr,   III.  593, 
D.  1.". 


ADDITIONS  AND   CORRECTIONS.  447 

A.  243.  8.  1. — Instead  of  the  Rem.  ( lines  8  and  9  from  top), 
add:  "Rem.  Also  .]  is  employed  in  the  direct  questioHy 
e.  g.  Ephr.  II.  5.  A.  6.  tS\  ^^-^  A  thou  knowest.       So  also 

]y\  (  apa),  e.  g.    Barh.  131,  12.  J  ]j1  ,  e.g.   Ephr,  I.  436, 

(  note  from  Jacob  of  Edessa,  1.  2  ) ;  |iSd  for  ]Sq^  ,  e.  g. 
Barh.U^,    10.  etc.". 

X 

A.  243.  22.  15.— After  "yes  ",  add :  "  Yet  we  also  find  ^1  in 

connection  with  the  affirmative  with  the  repetition  mostly  of 
the  thing,  e.  g.  Acts  V.  8 ;  or  without  a  repetition  ( lit.  en- 
tirely simple),  e.  g.  Matt.  XXI.  16;". 

A.  243.  26.  13— After  "father",  add:  "or  simply  ]]>  ,   e.g. 

Barh.  370,  13.". 
A.  244.  3.  1. — After  "veri",    add:    "  A   double    negation, 

as  in  Greek,  makes  the  negation  more  emphatic,  e.  g.  Barh. 


7      7        9  0  0 


491,9;  icn]  ]]  auj  ]]  he  lias   (positively)  injured  no  one  \ 
93,  9 ;  606,  2.     The  same  is  true  in  respect  to  oL  V    or   ]] 

7  0  9         7  9  7 

qL  ,     ]]> ,  ]V^S>  and  ]iQ^?)  ,  after  verbs  signifying  to  fear, 

9  9 

correspond    with    the  Latin  ne,  e.  g.  Barh.  III.    JJj   (OOl 

^{u*j  he  feared  that ;  ^jo/ar.  I.  80,  D.  6 ;  also  0  y5>>  =»  w^ , 
that  not ;  ^ssew.  I.  455,  1.". 
A.  244.  9.  6.— After   "imperishable",  add:  ";  Ephr.l.  310, 
C.  1.  2;  II.  212,  D.  8;  I.  128,  D.  1.". 

9       9 

A.  244.  14.  3.— After  "  IX.  3.",  add :  ";  in  1k)l  —  "^  on  no 

9  0 

possible  account ,  %£i\ ,  preceding   the  latter  ]]  ,  strengthens 
the  negation,  e.  g.  ^iVjr.  III.  569,  B.  3.  4.". 

A.  244.  21.   12.— After  "19,"  add:  "  A^  ^  out  from  be- 

•^..    I  i\  -^  9      0  7 

tween  something',    Acts    III.    5.    IAaId   Zu^    ^    loilL 


448  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

XIjuD]    Cl^j  whom   God  has   raised  from   the  dead ;    2a^ 
^  from  0716  here;    also    ^\    ^  ,  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  392,  B. 

4.  5.    "^ol*  ZqI  -Id  —  Ul  /^^  came  herefrom  Saul:  I.  84, 

A.  8.  etc.;".  ^^ 

A.  244.  26.  12.— After  "  walls",  add  :  ''Ephr.  I.  81,  E.  5.  6;". 
A.  244.  28.  1.— After    "excellence,"    add:    "also   by   their 

(  \)Jl1o  —  _Sd  )  collocation,  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  6.  D.  8.  NSaAO 

|S>0>|   ^sD  out  over  the  firmament  \^\ 
A.  245.  2.  2.— After  "him",  add:  ''Ephr.  II.  318,  C.  5.". 
A.  245.  8.  3.— After  "  13  ",  add  :  "  Ephr.  I.  292,  C.  3/.  ;  III. 

595,  C.  3.  4 ;  also  with  the  copula,    e.  g.    Darh.   270.    yJ^O 

•jA  Aa.2  between  me  and  thee  ;  Aj^    is  seldom    repeated 
with  the  copula  standing  between,  or  with  ^  preceding,  e.  g. 
Ephr.  I.  13,  B.  6.  7.". 
A.  245.   10.  3.— After  "David  ",  add  :  "  or   with  the  copula 

0     7    7  7  0  ■*>  7    0 

united,  e.  g.  Ephr.  II.  204,  F.  6.  lio^O  ;>all  ^  :>a\s\ 

from  eternity  to  eternity  and  until \  I.   237,0.  5/.:    361, 

A.  6.  7;". 
A.  245.   17.  4.— After  "66.  6",  add:  ";  Ephr.  I.  25,  D.  4/." 
A.  245.  21.  2.— After  "  17",  add:  "Ephr.  I.  122,  F.  1;  318, 

F.  3.  4.". 
A.  245.  23.  12.— After  "  193,  19;  ",  add  :  "Ephr.  I.  310,  D.  8; 

also  it  (»ili)  serves  to  designate  realization   (*0  essentice), 

7  ^  7  7      0  pix 

e.  g.  Ephr.  II.  324,  E.  6.  ^0^00^  Ojum  .^OlOlV;^  ]ju1Lo 

y.QJLM  Enoch  and  Elijah  lived  before  their  time  ( as  types)  j 
or  *0  stands  before   an  asseveration,  e.  g.  Barh.    183,  10. 

0     0        7 

|Ol  \sD  by  God  !  \  but  sometimes  it  is  wanting  before  an  as- 
severation ;  ". 

A.  245.  25.  6.— After    "  to  ",    add :  "  until    to,   about,   e.  g. 

0         0         7  0    7 

Ephr.  I,  122,  D.  8.  l]iDA\A\  ^0^^  about  300  {miles)-,  or 
with  liiool  =  near  to,  added,   e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  122,  C.  8. 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  440 

■».»!  P     7  7  9  7  0     7  0  *. 

ILld  UalL  laSn»S  \^^  llDjanl  nearly    6000  miles. 

9  9 

Also  here  may  be  reckoned  (as  opposite  relations)  t^  >fAc 

•-«ik  what  to  me  and  thee  ( what  have  I  to  do  with  thee )  • 
Mark  VII.  5  j  John  II.  4 ;  Luke  IV.  22;  ilfai^.  XXVII.  19."! 

A.  245.  28.  1. — After  *' 14",  add:  "and  ^Xii  sometimes  stands 

0"7  7 

for  »0,  e.  g.  jE:7?/ir.  I.  13,  A.  1.  JjlSd  ^11  i/i  iAe  water,  or 
it  =  against,  e.  g.  ^^ir.  I.  389,  B.  5;". 

A.  246.  1.  3.— After   "29",  add:  "^c^sll.  34.  >i1iV).'  ^ 
to  my  right  ( hand )  ;  it  is  synonymous   with  »iD  (  =-  ])er  ) 

^y  viV^wf!  q/;  e.  g.  ^;?^r.  I.    126,   B.  4.    aiZoSOxiaM   _Ldo 

OIJOIQJJ   poll  ^So  by  virtue  of  the  splendor  of  his  light  and 

warmth  ;  ". 
A.  246.  4.  9.— After  "feet",  add:  ";  it  is  also  used  in  the 

0  9        ■» 

formation  of  the  adjective,  e.  g.  Acta  Mart,  II.  394,  17;  |l  >  11 

]J>0   ]^)o   ]]j   'painless  and  unharmed.  It  can  take  no  svjf., 
and  instead,  the  separate  jorowoww  follows,  e.  g.  John  XV. 

A.  246.   18.  5. — After  "  4  ",  add :  " ;  or  they  are  not  united  by 

r 

and,  e.  g.  ^j^/ir.  III.  569,  B.  6 ;  and  even  after  p  and  other 

antecedent  joar^zc/es;  e.  g.  Matt.  I.  20,  24;  VI.  5,  7 ;  XXIV. 
22 ;  Mark   XIV.  72.  etc.  " 
A.  246.  21.  5.— After  "  19,"  add:  ''Acta.  Mart.    II.   273,23. 

7  P   -x  '^  P  7  ■« 

24.     -<^^^  ]r^r>«B<^  Ol^  ^ClO  ^ll  lie  turned,  went,  and  ar- 
rived at  the  market ;  ". 
A.  246.  22.  2.— After   "XV.    6.",  add:  "in   the  imperative^ 

T         •  P  *    7 

e.    g.    Acta  Mart.    II.    293,   3.  v.    E.    ^^*\^  U    f  ^01 
VOOD  aWse,  im/yt  and  go  upon  thy  feet.  ". 
A.  246.  28.  6.— After  "5,  6,",  add:  '' Ephr.  I.  119,  A.  7.  8. 


450  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

O  before  the  pret.  and  fut.^  is  often  translated  by  that^  in 
order  that,  e.  g.  Barh.  321,  3  ;  395,  7;  384,  6.  7.". 

A.  247.  2.   15.— After    "v.  E.   ",  add:  "  Ephr.    I.   184,  E. 

0  0 

4-6.  V.  E  (  also  ^lo  —  •S)]©  );  ". 
A.  247.  3.  10.— After  "  4,  5.",  add  :  "  Ephr.  III.  569,  F.  6.  7;". 

A.  247.  4.  6.— After  "  13,  ",  add  :  "  ( also  .]o  —  .j  ;  .*)  o?  — 

^1 ;  o]  —  \j^a\  —  ^] ;  o]  —  ooul ),  ". 
A.  247.  5.   13.— After  "24,  ",  add:  "  Ephr,  I.  271,  A.  1.  2"; 

0   7     P  0  7 

A.  247.  6.  7.— After  "E.",  add:  "]loani  —  j  fco  ^1  ,  e.  g. 

P  7         0     7     » 

-4c^s  I.  1 1 ;  —  J  too]    U^Ol,    Ephr,    II.    210,    C.    6—8; 

7      9  7  0  0  7         7 

^(Jl^y^),  Ephr.  I.  7,  C.  8/  ;    ^lo  -  j  U^]  ,  1.8, 

0    7     p 

E.  4  f.      Also  with  the  falling  away  of  ]l001  ,  e.  g.  Ephr, 
II.  3.  E.  3  4;  451,  B.  4/.;". 

0    T>  0 

A.  247.  7.  6.— After  "  12.  13,",  add:  " ;  and  Bl  —  *£)]  ,  e.  g. 
Ephr.  1,  21,  C.  6/. ;    ^]  ]]  |  —  >OuSn  U  ^oi  o;?/?/  —  but 

P  ^  7  " 

also-,  Ephr.  11,   153,  E.  1.2;  *a1j  —  jQaAtd    q1  ,  I.    24 

0  0  9 

F.  4/  ;  ]]  *2)]  —  ]]  wei^/ier  —  nor,  e.  g.  ^/^/^r.  I.  1 17,  A 
3  /. ;  127,  C.  6 ;  t|o  —  .1  t6'7je^^er  —  or,  e.  g.  II  Cor,  XII.  2 
also  o]  — •  ]  ,  e.g.  Barh.  597 ;  or  o]  —  1>]  ."Ij  ,  e.g.  i?a/-^.  441 

0777  77  7       7 

V  of  —  I J I  ivhether  —  or  not ;  ^^V^O  —  ^^1^  soon  —  soot 

0  7  0 

"U^O  —  "tiL  hither  —  thither  ,    e.  g.   Barh.  363,  5.  v.  E, 

7  7  0  7      7  7  0     1* 

also  ^Ollo  —  tjl!i  or  ^OlLo  —  ^Gli^ ;  finally,  ]^V>0  — 

0     *  7 

f*^^  //-o/?*     here  —  fro})i  there,  e.    g.    Barh.     574 ;  ^Gl^ 

•»>  0  0  * 

^O  —  lajon  ^,  e.  g.  i^ey.  XXII.  2.  etc.  ". 
A.  247.  21.  8.— After  "  13  ",  add  :  "  Ephr.  I.  294,  E.  8;". 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  451 

A.  247.  29.  8.— After  "  844",  add  :  "  and  o>i;/u  with  el  and 
elfiTj  following.". 

A.  248.  12,  13.— After  "  13,  ",  add  :  "  j  ^01  ^  because,  e.  g. 

i:phr.  II.  217,  B.  4;    j  ^Ol  ^i^iD   because  of,  e.g.    B.  1; 

9  7 

y  *j01  ^OL  at  the  same  tinie  tluxt^  that,  e.  g.  Ephr,  I.  9,  F.  6 ; 

7 

?  r»-S  thereby,  that,    (frequently  in  Ephr.),    Ephr,  1.85, 
D.'3;'\ 
A.  248.  19.  2.— After  "  20,  %    add:  "  y)  j   stands   after   the 
mark  of  case  (  =  "itJ^  with  the  j9re/?os27ion  preceding ),  e.  g. 


t>  9  7       7 


Assem,  I.  83,  14.  v.  E.  V»JaUr^  according  to  the  {chronology) 
of  the  Greeks ;  III.  P.  I.  527^  6.,  etc. ;  ". 
A.  248.  22.  2.— After  «  221,  2.",  add  :  "  Ephr.  I.  84,  F.  6.  7; 

446,  D.  8.  9 ;  also  after   |ao  to  be  worthy,  e.  g.  III.   579, 
P.  2;". 
A.  248.  22.   13.— After  "7.  8,  ",  add:  ''Ephr.  1.  84,  C.  5.  6 ; 
11.227.  A.  1\  I.  123,  C.  3/.;". 

A,  248.  26.  5.—  After  "  nevertheless ",  add :  "  E-phr.    I.  75, 

F.  5.  ". 
A.  249.  8.   13.— After  "  me",  add:  ''Ephr.  II.  20,  F.  7.". 
A.  249.  17.   12.  — After  **3,  4.",  add:   "Ephr.  II.  481,  D. 

3.  4.  ". 

A.  249.   19.  4.— After  "436.",  add:  "The  following  are  f?2^^- 

P  7 

jections  formed  from  verbs ;   \L  pi.  oZ  well  now  !  Barh,  88, 

4.  ^ao  pi.  qSdoo  up  I  599,  1 ;  and  ]j  represents  the  Heb. 
jj^5  (==  qiicBso),  I  Kings  XXII.  12.". 

A.  249.  31.  4.— After  "30",  add:  "Ephr.  II.  235,  A.  8.". 
A.  250.  4.  7.— After  "27",  add:  "  ^c^s  II.  7.". 
A.  250.   18.  5.— After  "4-11.",  add:    "Ephr.    2.  233,  D.  7; 
III.  563,  E.  4;". 

A.  250.  21.  33.- After  "17,  19.",  add  :  "Also  t\\Qsing.  •QQ^ 

P         7  7  ■^     «> 

is  found  in  Ephr.  III.  584,  D.  4.  liZ]  OOlj  OlTiQ^  the  hap- 
py place. ". 


452  ADDITIONS  AND  COKIIECTIONS. 

A.  250.  24.  1.— Instead  of  "Appendix  ",  add  :  "  §  87.". 
A.  251.  5.  1. — After  "ye.",  add:  "In   a   longer  period   the 
finite  verb  is  found  at  the  end  of  such  period,  e.  g.  Ephr.  II. 

y  9        7 

210,  D.  5— E.  ^.     ,ril  —  1v^m\  afea&t  —  he  arranged ;  II- 

123,  A.  1 — 4;    L  446,  E.  3.  4;  or   it  is   separated  from   it8 
auxiliary  verb  by  several  words,  e.  g.  Ephr.  II.    21 1,  C.  8 — 


7         -i>  7         •^ 


D.  2.   t;nV)N  —  >»»'}l>2  Xl^  1 1  if  thou  art  now  on  the  stand 
—  to  read\  or  the  auxiliary  follows  the^m*^^  verb,  e.  g.  Zi/V^/-. 

11.  212,  C.  5.   6.  ]oai  1^.   13  l^AjjO  Ae  would  not  2^cr- 

mit  himself  to  be  persuaded ;  even  so   the  infinitive  with    ^ 
before  the  verb  upon  which  it  is  dependent,  e.  g.  Ephr.  1.  83, 

p  P7  1>I  7P"»>  ft7*7 

D.  3.  4.  2oci  V^ACD  oi^j  ^oinSs  ]oaiV^\  ^lyl  ^i^fii? 

U]  iw^,  because,  to  be  the  husband  of  two  wives  loas  hateful  to 
him-,  84,  A.  7.  9;  I.  2,  A.  7.". 
A.  251.  9.  2. — After  "  men",    add:  "they  stand  between  the 
relation  of  genitive  and  another  noun ;". 

Ai  251.  9.  11. — After  "  noun^\  add:  "of  which  it  should  be 
remarked  that  the  subject   sometimes   stands   after  the  verb 


»v  IS 


and  object,  e.  g.  Acts  V.  26.  "ISOI   .Oj]   ^S\^  V^}  'HKy 

7X0  NX  ^ 

00CJ1  -.jL^bM)  then  they  feared  lest  the  people  should  stone 
them ;  the  object  stands  before  the  verb,  e.   g.  Acts  V.  28. 


7  0  0        7 


.Q2k^2  U  •^j]])  that  ye  should  not  teach  \  Ephr,  III.  565, 

A.  5.  6 ;  the  object  stands  between  the  auxiliary  ^xi^  finite 
verb."". 
A.  251.  11.   11.— After  "heaven",  add:  ''Ads  III.    21;   V. 


ts  9     7  9 


41 ;  Ephr.  II.  232.  D.  1.  2.  ^onmi?  llQl  looi  ^^Al  ^Olj 

^Aa^  ^/ze  people  should  endure  this ; 

c?)  The  aoJ/'ec^zVe  stands  before  its  noun  separated  by  another 
7ioun  placed  betweeUi  whose  signification   is  connected  wiLli 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  453 

9       7         *     r 

the  first  noun,  e.  g.  Ephr,  II.  227,  E.  7.  8.  «£00>rl£Qnl^) 

1\    I   ..  7  7    »•    7  '7 

1 1 4 .1  CIO  «,>Q1o\i  n  •jt^-^0  and  many  of  Alexander's  generals  \ 
or  it  is  separated  from  its  noun  by  the  auxiliary  verb,  e.  g. 

£/?/ir.    I.    309,    R  5.    6.  '\l\^   )o01  Uru  o]  ]oai    VSOau 

7 

o|>  ^^a^  /^e  was  either  Joshua  or  another  prophet,''\ 

A.  251.  12.  6. — After  " particles",  add  :  " concerning  which  it 
should  be  remarked  that  the  adverb  more  frequently  precedes 
the  verb.  ". 

A.  251.  13.  10.— After  "city",  add:  "  or;  e)  it  is  found  at 
the  end  of  the  sentence,  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  126  ;  /)  in  poetry  also, 
the  verb  stands  between  the  noun  in  the  genitive  and  another 

7 

noun    connected,    e.   g.    Ephr.    III.    564,   B.    3.   4.  yji]o 

9        7        7  *  9         9     *^  f  7 

|£Qa>;a)  iHl  >  |Zni\»i>  OOl  as  he  who  held  under  (cher- 
ished) the  loveliness  of  Paradise^  C.  8.  9;  576,  F.  8.  9.  The 
poetical  arrangement  of  words  also  belongs  here,  e.  g.  Ephr^ 

17  4k  7*.  0  9  99     7 

III.    572,  F.   2.3.  *Ajao"|    JDQ4  ^01072)Qa^  Ik)]     ]a^? 

a/so  o«  the  other  hand  the  external  beauty  of  Paradise  cannot 
be  described.  ".  ^ 

§  88. 
General  View  of  Syriac  Metre. 

1.  Since  Syriac  literature  is  rich  in  ecclesiastical  poetry,  com- 
posed in  a  fixed  measure  and  rhythm,  I  did  not  dare  to  omit 
here  a  general  survey  of  the  external  form  of  the  same,  and 
finally,  therefore,  decided  that  a  brief  and  clear  view  of  Syriac 
metrical  forms  and  laws  should  be  presented.  The  origin  of 
this  poetry  is  found  in  the  most  ancient  Syrian  church,  at  the 
time  when  history  mentions  the  Gnostic  Bardesanes,  living  in 
the  second  half  of  the  second  century  of  the  Christian  Era 
{cf.  Aug.  Hahn  :  Bardesanes  gnosticus  Syrorum  primus  hymn- 
ologus.  LipsicB^  1819),  who  endeavored  to  put  his  Gnostic  writ- 
ings into  poetry,  by  which,  according  to  the  testimony  of 
Ephrem  Syrus  (born  307,  died  378),  he  drew  the  minds  of 
30 


454  ADDITIONS    AND  CORRECTIONS. 

youth  to  himself  and  won  them  to  his  views.  He  was  accus- 
tomed to  have  David  before  him  as  a  model  poet,  and  even  to 

t>    f         7         t  p  I 

write  out  each  one  of  the  150  Psalms  (  iO),lo  (Z'^aIoI).  Thus  he 

stood  forth  as  the  first  hymnologist  of  the  Syrian  church.  His 
poetic  talent  was  transmitted  to  his  son  Harmonius,  who,  in 
respect  to  his  writings,  walked  in  the  footsteps  of  his  father. 
His  poems,  with  the  exception  of  a  small  fragment  of  the  first, 
are  lost,  and  only  the  ecclesiastical  form  remains.  Then 
Ephrem,  who  decidedly,  in  every  possible  manner,  opposed  the 
the  long  continued  Gnostic  errors  of  his  time,  established  a  sim- 
ilar musical  school  (to  those  of  Bardesanes  and  his  son)  for 
young  persons  of  both  sexes,  and  performed  so  elegantly,  while 
he  retained  both  the  external  forms  of  poetry,  that  a  thankful 
age  called  him  the  "  cithcra  of  the  Holy  Ghost."  After  his 
time,  history  records  the  names  of  many  distinguished  Syrian 
poets,  though  Ephrem  still  remains  the  chief  authority  for 
the  study  of  Syriac  metre,  as  almost  half  of  his  extensive  writ- 
ings belong  to  the  department  of  poetry. 

2.  The  terms  applied  to  the  dififerent  departments  of  Syriac 
poetry,  as  far  as  they  are  known  to  us,  comprehend  various 
kinds  in  respect  to  form  and  contents.     The  more  general  term 

( I'^PiD  )  makes  it  a  condition  that  there  should  be  equality  in 
verses  according  to  the  number  of  syllables  and  rhythm,  but  not 
a  division  into  strophes,  "which  also  seems  to  be  indicated  by  the 

more  extensive  term  I  A*jbSQlJD>  f'^pD,  i.  e.  a  discourse  on 
rhythmical  oneasure  (  lit.  discourses  on  measures  ).  On  the 
contrary,  the  peculiarity  of  that   kind,   which  is   divided  into 

strophes,  is  indicated  by  |*)^,  in  respect  to  which,  refer- 
ence is  made  by  Ephrem,  to  the  substance,  at  least,  of  the  rad- 
ical idea,  and,  what  he  calls  poetry,  forms,  in  his  estimation,  the 
basis  of  philosophical  inquiry  and  investigation,  or  the  basis  of 
the  fundamental  laws  of  refutation  and  dogmatical  unity.    Melo- 

dy  and  its  laws  are  generally  indisated  by  U—D,  which  includes 
metrical  form,  extending  so  far  back  as  to  comprehend  our 
(  German  )  ecclesiastical  intonations  and  antiphonies  answering 
to  each  other  only  at  short  intervals.     That  which  is   included 

under  IZuJOtl  is,  at  the  same  time,  comprehended  under  |«J^. 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  455 

The  former  term  included  such  a  change  of  song  that  each 
Btrophe,  or  its  closing  part,  was  so  marked  as  to  indicate 
that  it  might  be  repeated  in  the  chorus,  by  which,  indi- 
vidual strophes  might  bo  added  as  a  suitable  doxoj. 
ogy.       The    psalmodic    form     and      its      fundamental     idea 

were  probably  indicated  by  lZy,*V)l  ,  1jnV>|Vr>  and  ^r>-*t  cor- 
responding with  the  Hebrew  terms  'ii'^^r/^  and  -ji^  ,  and  in 
each  case  borrowed  from  them.     Also  from  the  import  and  sig- 

P     9     •,         -A 

nification  of  ]A»»n»Z,  it  was,  uo  doubt,  mostly  used  in  praise 
of  martyrs  and  saints,     But  what  kind  of  song  was  understood 

by  |A\nro  (meaning  literally,  degrees,  scales),  is  doubtful, 
though  one  would  suppose,  from  the  signification  of  the  term 
indicating  it,  that  this  particular  species  of  hymns,  with  their 
accompanying  tunes,  was  arranged  in  an  advancing,  ascending 
rhythm.  Probably  this  term  was  merely  transferred  from  the 
Hebrew    tlib3>?2M  as  the  ground  form. 

'=  r " 

3.  Rhythmical  measure,  formed  in  respect  to  the  quantity 
of  syllables,  is  not  known  in  Syriac  poetry.  Only  according  to 
the  number  of  syllables  is  metrical  succession  measured  and 
limited,  and  thereby  the  place  of  the  accent  is  made  known,  there- 
fore, strophes  themselves  also  move  on  in  even,  rhythmical  order, 
and  are  only  occasionally  interrupted  by  the  change  of  longer 
verses  {dlicG)/\,a).  Thereby  a  mixed  mode  was  established, 
which  was  also  used  by  Ephrem.  Lines  of  verses  generally 
contain  j^Xz/'e  and  seven  syllables.  Bardesanes  wrote  especially 
in  the  former,  and  his  son,  Harmonius,in  the  latter.  In  respect 
to  the  former,  Ephrem  bears  witness  in  the  subscription  of  his 

■n^^M?  7  «k  -KPT 

poem  againstHiiretiker  (Uo^  ^5y.Ci£)Ql  WjA^)  T.  III.  p.  128, 

19     y         y        ?  p  •«  9     y     T  yi 

in  the  words  ^jJIJjLd  ymsAna  okAa  ,^r^}  ^GlO;.u*> 

*  ..p  y 

]1  r>  ^^  i.  e  closed  are  the  1 7  hymns  in  the  measure  of  Barde- 
mnes.  He  (Ephrem)  therefore  called  the  measure  of  five  sylla- 
bles that  of  Bardesanes,  although  the  Syrians,  rightly  believ- 
ing, rejected  the  appellation  and  called  it  the  Balaic  measure. 


456  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

9    9 

after  Balaus  («»\n),  a  pupil  of  Ephrem.  But  as  Ephrem 
himself  preferred  to  use  that  kind  of  verse  whose  lines  had  seven 
syllables,  it  might  properly  be  called  Ephremic.  He  also  some- 
times wrote  in  a  measure  of  four  syllables.  Harmonius  also 
is  said  to  have  composed  poetry  of  the  same  kind,  also  Jacob 
von  Sarug,  towards  the  end  of  the  fifth  century,  and  in  the 
Actis  Martyrum^  Tom.  II.  p.  230 — 344,  we  find  a  more  exten- 
sive commendatory  poem  of  the  same  kind  from  Symeon  Styli- 
ta.  We  have  only  a  fragment  of  poetry,  whose  measure  is  six 
syllables,  from  Bardesanes,  preserved  by  Ephrem.  The  length 
of  strophes  which  are  employed  with  considerable  uniformity, 
seems  to  have  been  subjected  to  no  fixed  laws,  but  was  left  to 
the  poet,  and  perhaps  made  dependent  upon  the  contents  and 
scope  of  the  thought.  Hence  we  find  measures  called  strophes, 
which  contain  from  four  to  thirteen  lines.  Cf.  Hahn  et  Sieffert: 
Chrestomathia  Syriaca  sive  S,  Ephrcemi  carmina  selecta^  Lip- 
sice,  1821.  8. 

The  original  basis  of  Syriac  metre  is  found  in  certain  gram- 
matical rules  relating  to  euphony,  indicated  by  the  marks  Mar- 
hetono  and  Mehagyono  (  §  7) ;  crasis  by  Linea  Occultans  (  §  8 ); 
and  the  adding  or  dropping  of  preceding  vowels  (  §  15) .  These 
euphonic  fundamental  laws  are  only  valuable,  to  any  great  ex- 
tent, in  metrical  song.  Before  all  other  considerations  we 
should  take  notice  that  the  accumulation  of  vowelless  conso- 
nants does  not  disturb  the  euphony,  and  to  aid  in  preventing 
such  a  disturbance,  vowelless  initial  letters  of  a  word  are  added 
in  r>ronunciation  to  the  last  syllable  of  the  preceding  word  when 
such  word  ends  with  a  vowel,  by  which  the  ornament  of  the 
word  is  not  destroyed,  but  the  euphony  is  improved.  This 
arrangement  is  observed  not  only  in  one  and  the  same  verse, 
but  also  when  the  same  relation  exists  in  two  verses  (  the  final 
syllable  of  the  first  and  the  initial  syllable  of  the  one  succeed- 
ing, immediately  following  each  other). 

The  following  lines  are  thus  pronounced  : 

^i»^    ^^S2AZ^   \»C^  Musche'  m  thalmedh  huV  I 

.  h  « V)»  wOlOV'^mN  sephrau'sh  maydne. 

'UfCiL'i     V=i>  Rdbho'  dh  ebhroye 

.  OlialoA   >>.l,Vn\Z  thdlmdan'  I  yulphdneh. 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  457 

Bnt  when  this  diflSculty  of  pronunciation  by  concatenation 
cannot  be  otherwise  overcome,  either  all  of  the  unnecessary 
vowels  fall  away  by  dropping  the  supernumerary  syllables,  or, 
on  account  of  a  want  of  completeness  in  respect  to  the  neces- 
sary number  of  syllables,  the  metre  is  perfected  by  the  addition 
of   vowels  for  the  formation   of  new  syllables,  as  in  case  of 


y  «    A 


Mehagyono    (  ]A!^>  for   *|AL-mj).       Therefore,   in   metrical 

song,  both  of  the  peculiarities  called,  in  grammatical  language, 
SyncKresis  and  Diceresis  are  valuable. 

1.  The  first  occurs,  when,  by  the  aid  of  an  auxiliary  vowel, 
the  initial  letters  of  a  word  form  a  new  syllable,  particularly ;  a)  \ 

(with  —  or  — )  in  the  pronouns  #03^  ^  ^^| ,  \i\ ,  which,  in  con- 
nection with  the  part.j  are  generally  pronounced  in  one  syllable, 

e.g.  tQJ|  ^OUIdZ  pronounced  ih^ m'ih'i-nun-^  verbs  ]]  ,  e.  g-  ;^| 

(J  J  pronounced  d^lo-mar-^  so  Ulso  — in  the  pan.  P.  of  U  verbs, 

e.  g.  IJjlLdIj  pronounced  d"  miro.      This  is  also  the  case  with 

the  prosthetic  \  taking — ,  e.g.  - »  \^/]  V^^i  pronounced 
7f  bhath-mol,  and,  in  words  translated  from  the  Greek,  which, 

with  2  initial,  soften  the  pronunciation,  from  the  fact  that  1  with 
—   precedes,   e.  g.    ]V)i  nm]    =    Gxrjua    pronounced    sk'imo, 

P       7 

There  are  also  examples  in  which  ]  is  a  radical  letter  as  VmJ  , 

P     7        p 

6.  g.  V»]  looi  pronounced  Jf  vo-hho.  So  also;  b)  \n  words  of 
three  syllables,  the  vowel  standing  over  the  first  radical  letter 
is  dropped,  when  the  middle  syllable  is  pronounced  with  a  long 

immutable  vowel  (  Q  ,  a. ,  —  and  a. ).  In  this  case,  the  form  of 
the  word  continues  to  be  easily  recognized,   and  the  vowel, 

p  ♦.      r 

which  is  dropped,  is  readily  perceived,  e.g.  |Zqo>  read  r^bhutho; 

P  I     7  0      0   7 

t^'  *>'•   pxono\ineedhlfk\mo\   \\y\^   pronounced  ^^/i^/o/^/^o, 


458  ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

etc.     The  same  is  also  true  with  vowels   over   auxiliary  conso- 
nants which  did  not  originally  belong  to  the  radical  word,  e.  g. 

Uonnm  pronounced  5**  /cubhlo ;  |A-iA>Z   pronounced    th^  ritko. 

Finally,  there  is  also  a  similar  rejection  of  those  vowels,  which 
the  preforraatives  or  prefixes  of  the  verb,  generally  take,  e.  g. 

■y>     7        p       r  -K        r    *>.       r 

]pj    \*r^^3  i^Yonounced  shabhro^n-lrez;  >0^>  OlV)  pronounced 


I     r       p      7 


manu'dh-nHsur  ;  .^LiAdj  ]ljk\  lironounced  aino^ d/i-kUhibh. 

2.  In  the  middle  of  a  word  vowels  are  omitted  in  pronuncia- 

7  7    f  • 

tion  as  follows  :  In  the  verb,  —  in   Ethpa,,  e.  g.   *.fc-^j2)Z|  pro- 
nounced eth'pHag\  in  the  noun  especially,  —  of  the  middle  sylla- 

P      7  X  p  ^         P     7 

ble,  e.  g.   (AklxXSD  pronounced  si??i*i/io;  fZo 01-^  pronounced 
ai^  hutho. 

3.  Vowels,  at  the  end  of  a  syllable,  fall  away;  a )  in  the  verb, 
when  the  grammatical  form,  notwithstanding  the  falling  away, 

remains  suflSciently  recognizable  in  pronunciation,  as  —  in  Pa. , 

T»  T 

e.  g.  «2l:^  read   al" ph  ;  especially  in  the  part.  act.  Pe.,  e.   g. 

7         7      P 

Aj]  ^^flO  pronounced  soc/^V-a^/i ;  and  in   the    -part.  pass.  Pe., 

9  7  P  7 

e.  g.    Ir^^*^  pronounced    /easy';   \.kSih    pronounced     raphy'; 

p        X  0 

|Aa\.t  read  g""  I'iih  ]  b)  in  the  noun,  —  of  the   emohat.    state, 

P         7  P         I 

0,  g.  Vn^P  read  phagr^  ;  ]m*n  read  bish'' . 

There  is  no  common  law  for  the  occurrence  of  sijnoRresis. 
It  only  appears  when  the  number  of  syllables  in  the  metre  is 
too  great  and  the  connecting  word  admits  of  contraction. 

So  secondly  in  dimresis,  by  which  an  inadequate  number  of 
syllables  may  be  compensated  when  there  are  vowelless  conso- 
nants which  make  possible  an  increase  in  the  number  of  sylla- 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS.  459 

bles,  Mehagyono  properly  comes  Id,  especially  when  synonymous 

forms  appear  with  the  vowels  added,  e.  g.  ]»»li\»  and  ]»fci'\«  , 
or  when  the  nature  of  consonants  allows  such  a  vowel  e.  g.  ^ 

in  .001  iSs  ,  in  which  case  it  may  be   read   t001>\s  .     It  is 

otherwise  usually  with  the  auxiliary  vowel  —  (—  sheva  mobile) ; 
and  not  only  in  the  middle,  but  also  at  the  beginning  of  a  word, 

e.  g.  nn^»  read  sh^bhak\    \^Oi:nm  read  sh'muil. 

The  rhythmical  termination  of  verses  (  bfioioTeXevra )  imme- 
diately following  each  other,  is  more  dependent  npon  the  for- 
mation of  the  words  and  thoughts,  than  upon  a  special  peculi- 
arity of  Syriac  poetry.  " 


V 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  50  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.00  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


JUN    !■?  1S43 


^S'^JAN     4  19S6     5. 


:Z 


E 


APn    G    1944 


iiJG15'RR-5PM 


iKfnrnrcf 


.'•■tCi,  / 


h^^->i-^ 


1  -n 


J  ';  , 


^^ 


MS^ii 


RECEIVED 


LOAN  DEPT 


woai 


496SJtT 


RECEIVED 


SEP  2 -'66 -3  PM 


LOAN  PCPT. 


MAY    8196763 


IN  STACKS 


2  j  b/  "4  PW 


R 


m 


MAY^B  1961 


LD  21-100r/i-7,'33 


■.jf.i'u^BB 


:504O» 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  UBRARY 


